U.S. Department of Justice
Office of Justice Programs
Bureau of Justice Statistics

National Crime Victimization Survey Interviewing
Manual for Field Representatives

Table of Contents

PART A
The National Crime Victimization Survey and You

Chapter   Title                                             
An  Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

Topic
   Purpose and Sponsor
   Historical Overview
   Sample Design
   Data Products and Their Uses

Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey Interview

Topic
   Introducing the Survey and Its Authorization
   Confidentiality
   Eligible Respondents
   Maintaining Respondent Rapport
   Answering Respondents' Questions
   General Interviewing Techniques
   Closing the Interview and "Thank You" Letters

General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

Topic
   Basic Survey Procedures
   Monthly Tasks
   Daily Tasks
   Specific Household Procedures

Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

Topic
   Basic Field Duties
   Additional Duties
   Performance Standards

Chapter Title                                             
Your Job Duties and Performance Standards (Continued)

Topic
   Field Evaluations--Observation and Reinterview

   Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

Topic
   Identifying the Method of Interview
   Qualifications for Using the Personal Visit Method
   Qualifications for Using the Telephone Method
   Instructions for Conducting Telephone Interviews
   Telephone Interviewing Skills

Noninterviews

Topic
   Overview of Noninterview Types and Procedures
   Type A Noninterview Categories
   Type B Noninterview Categories
   Type C Noninterview Categories
   Control Card Entries for Noninterviews
   Type Z Noninterview Persons

Interviewing Materials - Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal 
Instructions

Topic
   Description of Materials
   Materials Kept Month to Month
   Materials Supplied Monthly
   Checking and Acknowledging Receipt of Materials
   Mailing Completed Work

PART B
How to Complete and Edit National Crime Victimization Forms

Chapter   Title                                             
Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

Topic
   General Instructions
   Completing Items 1 Through 11 (Unit Identification)
   Completing Items 12 Through 15 (Household Roster/
   Housing Unit Coverage)
   Completing Items 16 Through 22 (Personal 
   Characteristics)
   Completing Items 23 Through 25 (Race/Hispanic Origin/
   Household Composition Changes)
   Completing Items 26 Through 29 (Use of Telephone/
   Building Characteristics/Household Income)
   Completing Items 30 Through Table X (Record of Visits
   and Telephone Calls/Noninterview Reason/Notes/
   Bounding Information/Noninterview Contact Person/
   Determining EXTRA Units)

Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

Topic
   General Instructions                               
   Completing Items 1 Through 16 (Cover Page)
   Completing Items 17 Through 28 (Personal 
   Characteristics)
   Completing Items 29 Through Check Item E (Mobility/
   Businesses/Theft/Break-ins/Motor Vehicles/Specific
   Locations/Use of Weapons/Known Offenders/Unwanted 
   Sexual Acts/Catch-all Questions/Computer Crime/Proxy Help)
   Completing Items 46 Through Check Item I (Vandalism/
   Crimes During Vandalism/Hate Crimes/Transcribing 
   Number of Incidents/Employment Questions)

Chapter   Title                                             
Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

Topic
   General Instructions
   Completing Items 1 Through 23 (Cover Page/Location of
   Incident/Illegal Entry/Use of Weapon)
   Completing Items 24 Through 31 (Attacks/Threats)
   Completing Items 32 Through 54 (Injuries/Medical Care/
   Protecting Self or Property/Results of Actions/Presence
   of Others/Injuries to Others Present)3
   Completing Check Item G Through Item 87 (Use of
   Physical Force/Characteristics of the Offender(s))
   Completing Items 88 Through 114 (Theft/Items Stolen/
   Value of Stolen Property/Repair or Replacement of Stolen
   Property/Cost of Repair or Replacement)
   Completing Items 115 Through 134 (Police 
   Notification/Reasons for Reporting or Not Reporting
   Incident to Police/Police Response to Notification/Contact
   With Authorities)
   Completing Items 135 Through 153 (Activity During
   Incident/Employment Status at Time of Incident/Type of
   Job/Lost Work Time Due to Injuries/Lost Pay Due to
   Incident)
   Completing Check Item U Through Check Item Z (Series
   of Crimes/Hate Crimes/Disability/Summary of Incident)

Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

Topic
General Instructions                                
  Items 1 Through 10
    
  Editing Procedures

Topic
   General Editing Instructions
   Editing the Control Card
   Editing the Basic Screen Questionnaire
   Editing the Crime Incident Report

Chapter  Title                                             
Editing Procedures (Continued)

Topic
   Editing the Noninterview Record
   Office Edits and Qualified Edit Field Representatives
   
Part C
Survey Concepts

Note:  Coverage concepts are included in Chapter 7, General 
       Coverage Procedures, of the Listing and Coverage 
       Manual for Field Representatives, Form 11-8.

Chapter  Title                                             
Basic  National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

Topic Title
      Overview of Chapter 1
      Reference Period
      Household Membership
      Reference Person
      Household and Individual Respondents
      Proxy Interview
      Bounding Interviews
      Out-of-Scope Incident

Screening for Crimes 

Topic Title
   Overview of Chapter 2
   Crime Measured by the NCVS
   Threats
   Vandalism
   Recognizable/Unrecognizable Businesses
   Ownership of Motor Vehicles
   Months/Years Living at Address
   Frequency of Household Moves
   Computer-Related Incidents

Chapter Title                                             
Reporting Crime Incidents 

Topic Title
     Overview of Chapter 3
     Series of Crimes
     Right to Legally Enter Home/Lodging
     Restricted Areas/Areas Open to the Public
     Illegal Entry (With or Without Force)
     Presence During an Incident
     Weapons
     Rape/Unwanted Sexual Contact
     Theft/Attempted Theft of Cash/Property
     Value of Stolen Property/Methods Used to Determine
     Property Ownership
     Recovered Money and/or Property
     Medical Care
     Medical Expenses
     Race of Offenders
     Other Victimized Household Members
     Damage to Property During an Incident
     Job/Business at Time of the Incident
     Major Activity During Week of the Incident
     Incident Occurred at Work Site
     Incident Involved a Police Officer
     Hate Crimes
     Writing Summary Reports
     Type of Industry and Occupation

APPENDIXES

Note:  Procedures for interviewing group quarters units are 
covered in Chapters 2, 4, and 5 of the Listing and Coverage 
Manual for Field Representatives, Form 11-8.

Appendix  Title                                             
A    Summary of Monthly Field Operations for Field
     Representatives

B    National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures for
     Replacement Households, EXTRA Units, and Merged 
     Units

INDEXES

Index  Title                                           
     Subject Index

     Item Number Index

Part A, Chapter 1
An Overview of the National Crime Victimization Survey

Table of Topics

Topic

Purpose and Sponsor
                              
Historical Overview                            

Sample Design                              

Data Products and Their Uses
                             
Topic 1.  Purpose and Sponsor
     
Primary Purpose

The primary purpose of the National Crime Victimization 
Survey(NCVS)is to obtain, from respondents who are 12 
years of age and older, an accurate and up-to-date 
measure of the amount and kinds of crime committed during 
a specific six-month reference period. The NCVS also 
collects detailed information about specific incidents 
of criminal victimization that the respondent reports 
for the six-month reference period.

Secondary Purpose

NCVS also serves as a vehicle for obtaining supplemental 
data on crime and the criminal justice system, including:

*  Attitudes toward crime and police officers, 

*  Crime incidents in our schools, and Nonfatal workplace 
   violence.  

This supplemental information is collected periodically, 
along with the standard NCVS data.

Survey Sponsor

NCVS is sponsored by the Bureau of Justice Statistics 
(BJS), which is part of the U.S. Department of Justice.  
At this time, it is the largest ongoing statistical 
survey sponsored by BJS.  

BJS is responsible for collecting, analyzing, publishing, 
and disseminating statistical information on crime, its 
perpetrators and victims, and the operation of justice 
systems at all levels of government.  BJS is also 
responsible for providing timely and accurate data about 
crime and the administration of justice to the President, 
Congress, other government officials, and the general 
public.

BJS also supports and manages two clearinghouses which 
people can call toll-free to obtain information and 
publications.  They are:

*  The Bureau of Justice Statistics Clearinghouse at 
   1-800-732-3277 and

*  The Drugs and Crime Data Center and Clearinghouse 
   at 1-800-666-3332.

BJS also has statistics available on the Internet. 
Their web site address is www.ojp.usdoj.gov/bjs/.

To succeed in providing timely and reliable statistics 
on crime and its impact on society, BJS contracts with 
the Bureau of the Census to conduct the NCVS, which is 
the main source of information for measuring crime and
assessing its impact.  

NCVS vs. Police Reports

Most estimates on the amount and nature of crime are 
derived from police reports.  However, evidence has 
proven that a significant number of crimes are never 
reported to the police. Victims have cited some of 
the following reasons for failing to inform the 
police about crimes:

*  Victim felt that nothing could be done.

*  Victim thought that the crime incident was not 
   important enough to report to the police.

*  Victim decided that the incident was too private 
   or personal.

*  Victim felt that the police would not want to be 
   bothered with the incident.

Police departments often lack the personnel or technical 
resources necessary to record and publish the kind of 
detailed data from crime victims that are required for 
comprehensive criminal justice planning, evaluation, or 
analysis. The Bureau of the Census has both the personnel 
and the technical resources to conduct and supply reliable 
and detailed statistics on victims of crime. Your work as 
an NCVS field representative will allow us to succeed in 
providing BJS with the type of crime victimization data 
that police reports cannot.

Topic 2.  Historical Overview

How the NCVS Began

Between January 1971 and July 1972, the Census Bureau 
conducted the first nationwide victimization survey as 
a supplement to the already established Quarterly 
Household Survey (QHS). During that period, only minor 
changes were made to the survey questions in an effort 
to improve data quality.

In July 1972, the National Crime Survey (NCS) became a 
separate national sample survey as a pioneering effort.  
The first sponsor of the NCS was the Law Enforcement 
Assistance Administration (LEAA).  This survey began 
when the LEAA received a mandate set forth by Section 
515b of Public Law 93-83 to collect, evaluate, publish, 
and disseminate information on the progress of law 
enforcement within the United States.  

The NCS was intended to complement the crime information 
that the FBI reports annually to law enforcement agencies 
in the Uniform Crime Reports. The NCS is designed to 
provide a detailed picture of crime incidents, regardless 
of whether they were reported to the police. This survey 
also provides a picture of crime victims and crime trends 
as seen from the victim's perspective.

In December 1979, NCS was transferred to the Bureau of 
Justice Statistics, U.S. Department of Justice. During 
that same year, the first major attempt was made to 
improve the quality and utility of the NCS data.

Improving Accuracy and Usefulness

In the mid-1970s, the National Academy of Sciences 
evaluated the accuracy and usefulness of the NCS. 
Although the NCS was effective in measuring crime, 
they did pinpoint certain aspects of the survey that 
could be improved. During 1979 to 1985, a group of 
experts in criminology, survey design, and statistics 
conducted a detailed study and testing of the NCS.  

Their findings resulted in a survey redesign that would:

*  Increase reporting of crime victimization, and

*  Provide additional details on individual crime 
   incidents.

The recommended changes were phased in as part of a two-
stage process--near-term and long-term. The "near-term" 
changes were not substantial enough to affect the 
comparability of the crime rates for previous years, and 
these changes were implemented in July 1986. On the other 
hand, the long-term changes have had a substantial impact 
on the NCS crime rates. These long-term changes were 
phased in gradually starting in 1989, and were fully 
implemented by July 1993.

To achieve the redesign objectives, the following 
improvements were made between 1986 and 1993:

*  Better "short cue" screening questions were added to 
   stimulate respondent recall of incidents.

*  More thorough descriptions of crime incidents were 
   added as an effort to help all respondents interpret 
   NCS concepts correctly.

*  Computer-assisted telephone interviewing was 
   introduced to improve data collection for selected 
   sample segments.

*  Specific questions about rape and sexual assaults 
   were added to improve measures of these crimes.

*  Screening questions were reworded and added to get 
   a better measure of domestic violence.

As part of all the redesign changes, BJS decided in 
late 1991 to rename the NCS to its current name, the 
National Crime Victimization Survey.

Overview of Changes Between 1999 and 2003

In January 1999, a series of hate crime questions were 
added to the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire, and the 
NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report. In the NCVS-1, we are 
trying to determine if there is any reason to suspect 
that an act of vandalism was a hate crime or a crime of 
prejudice of bigotry, while in the NCVS-2, we want to 
determine if there is any reason to suspect the reported 
incident was a hate crime or a crime of prejudice or 
bigotry.

In July 1999, a question asking whether the household's 
living quarters is located on an American Indian 
Reservation or on American Indian Lands was added to the 
household's Control Card, NCVS-500. A similar question 
was added to the Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2,asking if 
the incident took place on an American Indian Reservation 
or on American Indian Lands. 

In July 2000, the lifestyle and home protection questions 
in the NCVS-1 were deleted and the hate crime questions 
on the NCVS-1 and NCVS-2 were revised.  A new series of 
disability questions were asked of persons who reported 
an incident in the seventh enumeration period.

In January 2001, the new disability questions were asked in
the NCVS-2 of all persons reporting an incident. 

In July 2001, a new series of computer crime questions 
were added to the NCVS-

1. Another change involved the expansion of answer 
categories for the following NCVS-2 items: 10, 70, 84, 
and 158, along with the addition of revised employment 
questions for the NCVS-2.

In January 2003, changes were made to the Control 
Card items which ask about educational attainment, 
ethnicity, and race. 

Topic 3.  Sample Design

NCVS Sample Population and Size

Any noninstitutionalized person who is 12 years of age 
or older and lives in the United States is eligible 
for the NCVS.  Every 6 months, approximately 54,000 
housing units and other living quarters, such as 
college dormitories and religious group dwellings, 
are designated for sample.

Persons who are not included in the scope of this 
survey include:

*  Crew members of merchant vessels,

*  Armed Forces personnel living in military  
   barracks, and

*  Institutionalized persons, such as correctional 
   facility inmates.

Primary Sampling Units

The households to be interviewed for the NCVS are 
selected by scientific sampling methods from specific 
sampling areas across the United States. We refer to 
these sampling areas as Primary Sampling Units(PSUs).

All counties, minor civil divisions (MCDs), and census 
county divisions (CCDs)are classified and grouped 
together based on similar characteristics. These 
characteristics include geographic region, population 
density, rate of growth, population, principal industry, 
and type of agriculture.

There are two main types of Primary Sampling Units 
(PSUs)--stratification PSUs and field assignment 
PSUs.

In most states, stratification PSUs consist of one 
or more adjoining counties and independent cities.  
In New England and Hawaii, they could consist of one 
or more MCDs or CCDs. MCDs and CCDs are portions of 
a state similar to a county, but smaller in size.

In order for each FR to have a more manageable 
assignment area, stratification PSUs are divided 
into smaller field assignment PSUs.  In most states, 
these field assignment PSUs consist of one county.

Sample Unit Selection

Each stratification PSU is made up of four different 
sampling frames--Unit, Permit, Group Quarters (GQ), 
and Area. The NCVS selects sample units from each of 
these sampling frames.

For the Unit and GQ frames, sample addresses come 
from the 1990 census files.  For the Permit frame, 
sample addresses come from building permit data 
supplied to us from building permit offices.  For 
the Area frame, FRs canvass sample blocks from the 
1990 census files and create address lists for these 
blocks. Then, the address lists are used to select 
sample households to be interviewed for the NCVS.

Interviewing Pattern

All sample housing units selected for the NCVS are 
divided into six equal rotation groups.  Each 
rotation group is further divided into six panels. 
Each month, one panel from each rotation group or 
one sixth of each rotation group is selected for 
interviewing. As a result, a different panel gets 
interviewed each month.

Here's an example: In December 2002, we used Samples 
J20 and J21 to select cases for NCVS interviewing.  
From Sample J20, cases will be assigned for interview 
from Panel 6 of rotation groups 4, 5, and 6. From 
Sample J21, cases will be assigned for interview
from Panel 6 of rotation groups 1 through 4.

Sample 
J20
J21

December 2002 
64   65   66  
61   62   63   64

In this example, the "64" stands for "Panel 6, 
Rotation 4," "65" stands for "Panel 6, Rotation 
5," and so forth. 

Over a 3-year period, sample housing units from 
each rotation group are interviewed once every 6 
months. Over a 6-month period, a different panel 
of households gets interviewed each month. Every 6 
months, a new rotation group enters the NCVS sample 
to replace an outgoing rotation group whose 3-year 
interview cycle is complete.

FRs and CATI interviewers conduct a majority of 
their NCVS interviews during the first 2 weeks of 
each month. The initial interview with a sample 
household is always conducted by personal visit 
and is used primarily to establish a timeframe to 
avoid duplication of crimes during subsequent 
interviews.  Whenever possible, subsequent NCVS 
interviews are conducted by telephone.

CATI Eligible PSUs

NCVS utilizes Computer-Assisted Telephone Interviewing 
(CATI) for about 30 percent of the sample households. 
Segments of PSUs are identified to determine if they 
qualify for CATI interviewing.  Our main goal is to 
have an optimal workload for our field representatives.

Topic 4.  Data Products and Their Uses

Types of NCVS Data Products

All data that we collect for NCVS are tabulated in 
the form of statistical summaries.  No individuals 
who participate in this survey can ever be identified 
from the statistical totals that are released to the 
public.

Once we turn over these statistical summaries to the 
Bureau of Justice Statistics, they have a special 
analysis group who analyze the data and produce several 
types of publications on an annual basis.

Some of the publications released from this survey 
include:

*  Criminal Victimization in the United States

*  Changes in Criminal Victimization

*  Female Victims of Violent Crime

BJS routinely distributes copies of their publications to:

       State and regional planning agencies,
       Colleges and universities,
       Commercial and industrial groups,
       Citizen groups,
       Professional associations,
       Federal, state, city, and local police,
       Courts and correctional agencies, and
       Legislative bodies.

BJS also makes selected crime victimization data 
available through the Internet.

In addition to BJS, the Census Bureau makes available 
full sets of data tabulations to a variety of data 
users. These tabulations include many tables that 
never make it into the printed publications.

After the survey results have been modified to protect 
the confidentiality of our respondents, both the Census 
Bureau and the University of Michigan disseminate NCVS 
data tape files. The University of Michigan uses a grant 
awarded by BJS to release NCVS data in a format that 
makes them more accessible to the general public, 
criminal justice practitioners, and academic researchers.

Who Uses NCVS Data and Why

Users of NCVS data cover a wide audience of groups and 
persons who are all concerned about crime and crime 
prevention. These users include:

*  Researchers at academic, government, private, and 
   nonprofit research institutions;

*  Community groups and government agencies;

*  Law enforcement agencies; and

*  Print and broadcast media.

Researchers use NCVS data to prepare reports, policy 
recommendations, scholarly publications, testimony 
before Congress, and documentation for use in courts.

NCVS data are used by researchers to explore the public 
policy implications of victimization data. From a 
policymaker's point of view, it is important to know 
the effect, if any, police behavior, and the legal and
correctional systems have on crime levels.

Researchers also use the NCVS information to investigate:

*  Why certain persons are victimized more than 
   others, The characteristics of attempted 
   versus actual victimizations,

*  The reasons why persons do not report crime 
   incidents to the police, and

*  Victimization among juveniles, domestic violence, 
   gun-related crimes, multiple victimizations, and 
   so forth.

Community groups and government agencies use the data 
to develop neighborhood watch and victim assistance 
and compensation programs. 

The NCVS produces several facts that are relevant to 
projecting the costs of victim compensation programs.  
After reviewing specific NCVS facts, it was revealed 
that some of the eligibility restrictions for existing 
compensation programs are not entirely relevant to the 
types of people most likely to be victimized. This was 
determined by examining data on age, employment status, 
and family income of victims of personal crimes, together 
with findings about victim/offender relationships in 
these crimes.  

Law enforcement agencies use the NCVS findings for 
training purposes, and the findings can be seen in 
crime prevention public service announcements and 
in crime documentaries.

Law enforcement agencies in various cities also use 
NCVS data to increase:
          
*  Citizen cooperation with officials in deterring 
   and detecting crime,

*  Special police strike forces to combat those 
   crimes which the survey indicates as being most 
   prevalent, and

*  Street and park lighting programs in those areas 
   with the highest reported crime rates.

Print and broadcast media regularly cite NCVS findings 
when reporting on a host of crime-related topics.

Here are some examples of crime victimization highlights 
that could be of interest to the print and broadcast media:

The violent crime rate fell 10% between 2000 and 2001 due 
primarily to a significant decrease in the rate of simple 
assault.

The overall property crime rate fell 6% between 2000 
and 2001 because of decreases in theft and household 
burglary rates.

Violent crimes were less likely to involve firearms 
in 2001 than in the period between 1993 and 1996.

Some other reasons why data users want the crime 
victimization information produced from the NCVS 
include:

* Planning for public education programs, police 
  patrol strategies, and new communities and housing
  projects. This type of planning requires a knowledge
  of the characteristics of victimized persons and
  households, as well as when and where victimizations
  occur.

* Conducting feasibility studies and planning programs
  for the restitution and compensation to victims of
  crime.  These studies and programs require
  information on the nature and extent of injury and
  loss that results from criminal victimization.

* Assessing the need for property identification
  programs. These programs require information on 
  the level of property recovery after burglaries 
  and thefts.

* Understanding more about the nature and extent of
  biases in police data on known offenses.  These
  studies require a knowledge of the levels of
  nonreporting to the police, together with 
  information on the kinds of victimization that 
  are disproportionately not reported to the police.

Part A, Chapter 2

Chapter 2
Conducting the National Crime Victimization Survey 
Interview

Table of Topics

Topic   
1  Introducing the Survey and Its Authorization

2  Confidentiality

3  Eligible Respondents

4  Maintaining Respondent Rapport

5  Answering Respondents' Questions
                              
6  General Interviewing Techniques
                              
7  Closing the Interview and "Thank You" Letters

Topic 1.  Introducing the Survey and Its Authorization

Introducing Yourself and the Survey

After making contact with a respondent, you must introduce 
yourself, verify that you contacted the correct address, 
and introduce the survey.  Your introduction needs to 
include the following information:

*  Who you are (your full name),

*  Who you represent (the U.S. Census Bureau),

*  Proof of your identification for personal visit interviews 
   (your official ID card), and

*  The purpose of your visit/telephone call(conducting a 
   survey to determine how often people are victims of 
   crime).

Also, ask whether the household received our introductory
letter for personal visit interviews or provide the 
information required by the Privacy Act(shown on page 
2 of the Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554).

Suggested Introductions

For a personal visit interview, you can say something
similar to the following introduction:

"I'm (your name) from the United States Census Bureau. 
Here is my identification. (Show ID card and verify
address.)  The Census Bureau is conducting a survey
here and throughout the Nation to determine how often
people are victims of crimes.  Did you receive our
letter?"

When you are not sure if the person who greets you at 
the door is at least 18 years of age, ask:

"I need to talk to someone who is at least 18 years 
of age and knowledgeable about this household? Would 
that be you?"

Here's an example of an introduction you can use when 
conducting a telephone interview:

"I'm (your name) from the United States Census Bureau. 
(verify address) The Census Bureau is conducting a
survey here and throughout the Nation to determine how
often people are victims of crimes. We contacted your
household for this survey several months ago. I would
like to talk to someone in the household who is at least 
18 years of age and knowledgeable about this household? 
Would that be you?"

Keep in mind that the first contact with a sample 
household must be a personal visit.

Why We Use Introductory Letters

The NCVS uses two different introductory letters to
comply with the provisions of the Privacy Act of 1974. 
This Privacy Act requires that all Federal agencies 
provide specific facts to anyone from whom they plan 
to collect personal information. These facts include:

*  The legal authority for collecting the information;

*  The principal purposes for collecting the information; 

*  The various uses for the data after it is collected; 
   and

*  The mandatory or voluntary nature of the survey and
   penalties, if any, for not providing information.

One introductory letter, NCVS-572(L), is usually mailed to
a household just before it comes into sample for the first
enumeration period.  The other introductory letter, NCVS-
573(L), is usually mailed before each subsequent 
enumeration period.

In addition to complying with the Privacy Act of 1974, 
both letters prepare the household for your visit/
telephone call and provide the household with your 
regional office address and telephone number.

How To Use Introductory Letters

Your regional office is responsible for mailing out
introductory letters and indicating on the NCVS Control 
Card (NCVS-500) whether or not they mailed a letter. 
Your assignment materials will also include copies of 
both introductory letters in case you need to hand them 
out during personal visit interviews.

For each enumeration period, your regional office 
will mark Item 5 on the NCVS Control Card to let you 
know whether or not they mailed an introductory 
letter to the sample household. Always check Item 5 
before starting an interview. Then, take the following 
actions: 

If "No" is marked in Item 5 or Item 5 is left blank--

Personal Visit - Before you start introducing yourself 
to the respondent, hand the respondent a copy of the 
appropriate letter for the enumeration period.  As you 
hand the letter to the respondent, say something similar 
to: 
"I would like you to have this letter which introduces 
this survey and the purpose of my visit ."  Allow the 
respondent time to read the letter before the interview.

Telephone - When conducting an NCVS interview by telephone, 
it is not necessary to mention the introductory letter.  
However, you may find the following Privacy Act statement 
useful, even when the respondent has received our letter 
and still has questions about the survey's purpose, any 
penalties for not participating in the survey, or the 
importance of each sample household's participation:

"The Census Bureau is conducting the National Crime
Victimization Survey for the Bureau of Justice Statistics 
of the United States Department of Justice. The survey's
purpose is to provide information on the kinds and amount
of crime committed against households and individuals
throughout the country.  All survey information will be
used for statistical purposes only.  This survey is
authorized by Title 42, Section 3732 of the United States
Code.

Participation in this survey is voluntary and there 
are no penalties for refusing to answer any questions.  
However, your cooperation is extremely important to 
help insure the completeness and accuracy of this much 
needed information."

If "Yes" is marked in Item 5 (for first enumeration
period):

Since all first enumeration households are personal visit 
interviews, ask the respondent, at the end of your
introduction, whether or not he/she received the NCVS
introductory letter. If the respondent states that he/
she did not receive it or doesn't recall seeing it, hand 
the respondent a copy of the NCVS-572(L) and allow time 
for reading it.

If "Yes" is marked in Item 5 (second through seventh
enumeration period):

In most cases, you will conduct these interviews over 
the telephone and will not need to ask about the 
introductory letter for the second through the seventh 
enumeration period. There are a few instances when you 
would need to ask about the introductory letter or 
provide the Privacy Act information for second through 
seventh enumeration period households.  These exceptions 
include households that were Type A noninterviews during 
the first enumeration period, and cases where you discover 
a replacement household. 

NCVS Authorization

Currently, BJS is authorized to collect statistics on
victimizations through Title 42, United States Code, 
Section 3732 of the Justice Systems Improvement Act of
1979.  Although this law authorizes BJS to collect
victimization information, it does not make respondent
participation mandatory.

Title 42 also requires that all information collected 
from respondents be kept strictly confidential, so that 
individual respondents or households cannot be identified 
from the survey results. (See Topic 2 of this chapter for 
more details about confidentiality.)

Topic 2.  Confidentiality

How We Define Confidentiality

By law, Titles 13 and 42 of the United States Code, the
Census Bureau is required to guarantee that we will 
not release any information from which respondents 
can be identified.  Only sworn Census Bureau employees 
are allowed to see names, addresses, and other personal 
information that we collect. 

Confidentiality and Your Job

While working as an FR, you must avoid mentioning or 
providing anyone, other than sworn Census employees, 
with any survey materials that would link a specific 
household or person with a specific survey.  When 
discussing your job, always be careful never to reveal 
any information collected during an interview to an 
unauthorized person or allow unauthorized persons to 
view completed questionnaires.

Always be careful to store completed questionnaires 
out of sight, so that unauthorized persons won't be 
tempted to look at them.  Never leave completed 
questionnaires on table or dresser tops at home, in 
motel rooms, at restaurants, or any other public 
place.  When traveling in your vehicle, always keep
completed forms locked out of sight, especially when 
you leave your vehicle.

No One Home

When you find that no one is home at a sample address, 
you need to be very careful how you inquire about the 
best time to reach someone at the sample address. If 
you ask a neighbor, apartment manager, or someone else 
living nearby, do not mention the survey name or attempt 
to describe the survey.  

Here's an example of what you may want to say:

"Hello, I am (your name)from the United States Census 
Bureau. Here is my identification (show ID). I need to 
interview the household at (sample address), but no one 
is at home now. Do you know when I might find someone 
at home?"

Nonhousehold Member Proxy 
Respondent 

In the few cases where it is acceptable for you to allow 
a nonhousehold member as a proxy respondent, you cannot 
provide the proxy respondent with any information that 
was provided by household members in earlier interviews/
enumeration periods. This includes information on household 
composition, marital status, education, income, and any 
other responses provided on the Basic Screen Questionnaire 
(NCVS-1) and Crime Incident Reports (NCVS-2s).

To fully comply with our confidentiality rules, reask 
Control Card Items 13a and 14 of the nonhousehold 
respondent, and then only ask the NCVS-1 questions 
for the persons named by the nonhousehold respondent 
(those already listed and newly added).

Using an Interpreter

There may be instances when you need the assistance 
of an interpreter.  Perhaps the respondent speaks a 
language that you can't understand or he/she is unable 
to speak at all. Only use an interpreter that the 
respondent is willing to accept. If the respondent 
objects to a particular interpreter or you can't 
locate an interpreter, call your supervisor for help 
in finding an acceptable interpreter.

Telephone Interviews

When conducting an interview over the telephone, do 
not permit unauthorized persons, such as your family 
members or neighbors, to listen to an interview.

Personal Visit Interviews

If nonhousehold members are present, either in a sample
housing unit or a group quarters, ask the respondent if
he/she wishes to be interviewed in private. If so, make 
the necessary arrangements to either interview the person
elsewhere or at a different time. Some respondents may
prefer not to be interviewed while other household members
are present.  Always respect the respondent's need for a
private interview.

Here are a few examples:

You visit a sample housing unit and discover that there 
are relatives visiting from out of town.

Or

You visit a college dormitory to interview a student and 
find students from other dormitory rooms studying in the 
sample student's room.

Reassuring Respondents

Even though all NCVS data that we collect are tabulated 
in the form of statistical summaries, some respondents 
may still feel uneasy about providing the requested 
information. Here are some facts that you can relay to 
respondents who may be concerned about confidentiality:

    Before any NCVS data are released, all personal
    information is removed and only summary information
    or totals are released to data users.

    The Census Bureau takes its confidentiality promise 
    to respondents very seriously.  A Census Bureau
    employee can be fined up to $250,000 and/or imprisoned 
    for up to 5 years if the employee is found guilty of 
    an unauthorized disclosure of individual information 
    provided to the Census Bureau. Our agency has an 
    unchallenged record when you examine how we protect 
    a respondent's confidentiality.

Topic 3.  Eligible Respondents

Types of NCVS Respondents

There are three types of respondents for the NCVS:

    Household respondents,

    Individual respondents, and

    Proxy respondents.

Certain NCVS forms and sets of questions require 
different respondents.  There are specific questions 
on the Control Card(NCVS-500)and the Basic Screen 
Questionnaire(NCVS-1)which relate to the household 
and are asked only once during each enumeration period. 
We refer to the respondent for these questions as the 
"household respondent." 

All other questions for the NCVS are considered "self-
response" questions.  In other words, each household
member who is 12 years of age or older is expected to
answer for himself/herself.  We refer to these 
respondents as "individual respondents." 

As a last resort and only under specific conditions, 
we will allow another person to answer questions for 
a household member.  We refer to this person as a 
"proxy respondent." In most cases, a proxy respondent 
will be another household member.  Strict rules are in 
place for when to accept a proxy interview, since a 
proxy respondent is more likely not to report a crime 
incident and less likely to know the full details 
concerning reported incidents. 

Interpreters and Signers

"Interpreters" are acceptable for respondents who 
cannot read or speak English, and "Signers" are 
acceptable for respondents who are deaf.  However, 
interpreters and signers are not considered "proxy 
respondents," because they are not responding for 
the household member. 

Interpreters are translating the NCVS questions into 
the respondent's language and then translating the 
respondent's answers into English for you.  Signers 
are using sign language to relay the NCVS questions to 
the respondent, the respondent uses sign language to 
answer the questions, and then the signer tells you 
the respondent's answers. Whenever you have the 
assistance of an interpreter or a signer, note that 
fact in any summary reports that you complete for 
the respondent.

Rules for Household Respondents

Your goal for selecting a household respondent is to 
find the most knowledgeable household member who is 
at least 18 years of age.  By most knowledgeable, we 
mean the household member who is most likely to give 
accurate answers to the household questions.  Most 
often the household respondent will be the reference 
person (one of the persons who owns or rents the 
home).  (See Part C, Chapter 1, for more details 
about reference persons and household respondents.) 

First Person to Interview

You must select and interview the household respondent
before interviewing any other household members,
regardless of whether you interview by personal 
visit or telephone.  

For a first enumeration period household, ask to 
speak with one of the persons who owns or rents the 
home, as soon as you have introduced yourself and 
verified that you are at the correct address.  

For a second through seventh enumeration period
household, ask to speak with the person who was the
household respondent during the previous enumeration
period, as soon as you have introduced yourself and 
verified that you contacted the correct address. If 
that person is not available, you can ask to speak 
to the reference person, another household member who 
owns/rents the home, or a household member who is at 
least 18 years of age and knowledgeable about the 
household.

Exceptions to the Age Requirement

There are only two instances when a household respondent
can be under 18 years of age.

     When the household's reference person (one of the
     person's who owns or rents the home) or the spouse 
     of the reference person is 17 years of age, you can 
     select either person as the household respondent.  
     Because they are MARRIED, either person qualifies 
     as a household respondent, even though one person 
     is 17 years of age.

     When you have a household in which ALL household
     members are 17 years of age, select the most
     knowledgeable household member as the household
     respondent.  However, if the household has at least 
     one 17-year-old household member and the remaining
     members are under 17 years of age, select the 17-
     year-old household member as the household respondent.

     NOTE: If you encounter a household in which ALL
     household members are under 17 years of age,
     contact your supervisor who will discuss this
     situation with Headquarters staff and then let you
     know how to handle the case.

Switching Household Respondents

If it becomes obvious that you are interviewing a  
household member who is unable to answer the household 
questions, you must:

    Find a more knowledgeable household respondent, or

    Arrange to return to the household when a more
    knowledgeable respondent is available.

However, you must interview the household respondent
BEFORE interviewing any individual respondents. If you
have to change household respondents, start the interview 
over again from the beginning.

Rules for Individual Respondents

After you are done interviewing the household respondent,
then you can interview each of the remaining household
members who are 12 years of age and older.  We want 
self-responses from each of these household members.  
This may require you to make callbacks, so that you 
can talk directly to each household member.

Rules for Proxy Respondents

To be eligible as a proxy respondent, a household 
member must be:

   At least 18 years of age,

   Knowledgeable about the household member for whom he/
   she is responding, and A completed NCVS interview 
   himself/herself before providing a proxy interview.  

The only time a proxy respondent can be under 18 years 
of age is when the reference person or the spouse of 
the reference person is under 18 or all household 
members are under 18 years of age.

Proxy Respondents Who Are Not Household 
Members

Before you can accept a nonhousehold member as a proxy 
respondent, all of the following conditions must apply:

     All household members cannot be interviewed due 
     to health problems or mental incompetence.

     During the entire reference period, all household
     members have been unable to leave home unless they
     were accompanied by a caretaker who is nonhousehold
     member.

     Proxy interviews are provided by the nonhousehold
     member caretaker for ALL eligible household members, 
     including the household respondent's interview.
     
     The nonhousehold member caretaker must be at least  
     18 years of age.

     During the entire reference period, the nonhousehold
     member caretaker had responsibility for the care of
     each eligible household member.

The only time you are allowed to take a proxy interview 
for a household respondent is when all of the conditions 
for a nonhousehold member proxy respondent have been met 
and the nonhousehold member is the proxy respondent for 
the household respondent and all remaining eligible 
household members. Otherwise, one of the eligible 
household members must be the household respondent.

When Not to Use a Nonhousehold Member

If any of the household members, who require proxy
interviews, have not been under the care of the
nonhousehold member for more than a few days during 
the reference period, do not accept a proxy interview 
from the nonhousehold member. 

Here are a few examples of when not to accept a
nonhousehold member caretaker as a proxy respondent:

   A nonhousehold member goes on a 2-week vacation 
   and is not with the household member during those 
   2 weeks.

   The household member is in a hospital or a nursing
   home or visiting with relatives for one or more 
   months. During that time, the nonhousehold member 
   caretaker is not staying with the household member.

If you have a case where you are not sure whether to 
accept a nonhousehold member caretaker as a proxy 
respondent, always check with your supervisor before 
conducting the proxy interview.

Protecting the Rights of Household Members

Make sure that a nonhousehold member caretaker is an
acceptable proxy respondent before conducting a proxy
interview. If you allow an unacceptable nonhousehold
member to be a proxy respondent, you run the risk of:

    Violating the sample household's right to 
    confidentiality,

    Violating the sample household's right to choose
    whether or not to participate in the survey, and

    Interviewing a proxy respondent who is not
    knowledgeable enough to provide complete and 
    accurate information.

When accepting a nonhousehold member caretaker as a
proxy respondent, remember not to provide him/her with
any information that the household member(s) provided
during previous interviews.  This includes information 
on household composition, marital status, education, 
income, and so forth, as well as any other information 
previously given by household member(s).

When updating the Control Card (NCVS-500), reask Items 
13a and 14, and then only ask the screen questions for
those household members named by the nonhousehold
member proxy respondent.  For other items that require
updating for the enumeration period, reask these items
without mentioning the previously recorded information.

Entries on the Basic Screen 
Questionnaire (NCVS-1) for
Nonhousehold Member Proxy 
Interviews

Item 13 on the front page of the Basic Screen Questionnaire 
(NCVS-1)is intended for entering information about proxy 
interviews.  When the proxy respondent is a nonhousehold
member, you need to complete Item 13 as follows:

   In Item 13a, enter the line number from Item 19 
   on the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) for the
   household member who required a proxy interview.
     
   In Item 13b, print the name of the nonhousehold
   member proxy respondent in the "Name" column and
   print "Non HH" in the "Line No." column.  NEVER
   enter a line number for a nonhousehold member on
   either the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) or 
   the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2), even if the
   nonhousehold member is listed in the household 
   roster of the Control Card (NCVS-500) as a "usual 
   residence elsewhere" (URE).

   In Item 13c, always enter Code 2 (Physically/mentally
   unable to answer), since that is the only acceptable
   reason for allowing a nonhousehold member to be a
   proxy respondent.

Completing an INTER-COMM 
for Nonhousehold Member
Proxy Interviews

Whenever you accept a proxy interview from a nonhousehold 
member proxy respondent, you must complete an INTER-COMM 
(Form 11-36) explaining the situation. Your explanation 
needs to include who the nonhousehold member is (nurse, 
daughter, neighbor, etc.) and how much time the 
nonhousehold member caretaker spends with the household 
member(s). 

When to Accept a Proxy Interview

One of the following circumstances must exist before 
you can accept a proxy interview:

   A parent does not want you to interview his/her 12-or
   13-year-old child.  In this case, any knowledgeable
   household member who is at least 18 years of age can
   be the proxy respondent for the child.  

   A household member who is 12 years of age or older is
   temporarily absent and will not be back to the address
   until after the interview closeout date.  In this case,
   make sure that the person is still a household member. 
   Check page 4 of your Information Card Booklet(NCVS-554) 
   if you need help determining household membership. If 
   the absent person is still considered a household member, 
   then you can accept a proxy interview.

   If a household member who is at least 12 years of age
   is considered physically and/or mentally incapacitated,
   then you can accept a proxy interview. To qualify as
   physically and/or mentally incapacitated, the household 
   member must have health and/or mental illness problems 
   that are continuous throughout the entire interview 
   period and these problems make it impossible for the 
   person to be interviewed.  
          
   The following problems do not qualify as health or
   mental illness problems:
                    
    *  Colds or the flu,
    *  Drunkenness or drugs, or
    *  Emotional problems that might be aggravated
    *  due to some NCVS questions, such as those
    *  dealing with sexual assaults.

When Not to Accept a Proxy
Interview

Under the following circumstances, do NOT accept a 
proxy interview:

   You are unable to reach a household member at the
   sample address, despite repeated attempts throughout
   the interview period.  For example, a high school
   student who goes to school, works part time, and is
   involved in several sports activities. 

   In a two-person household, one of the members tells
   you that she can't take the time to answer your
   questions. Instead, she wants her husband to 
   answer all the NCVS questions for both of them.

   A household member refuses to let you interview
   someone in the household who is over 13 years of 
   age, such as a 14-year-old son or daughter or a 
   90-year-old parent. 

   A respondent does not understand English and you 
   are unable to find an acceptable interpreter, 
   including another household member.

If you encounter any of these situations, you must classify 
the individual respondent as a Type Z Noninterview. Remember 
that you can never classify a household respondent as a Type 
Z Noninterview. If none of the household members qualify as 
a household respondent, then you must classify the entire 
household as a Type A noninterview. (See Part A, Chapter 6, 
for more details about noninterviews.)

Procedures for Conducting
Proxy Interviews

There are specific items on both the Basic Screen Questionnaire 
(NCVS-1) and the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2) that require 
special procedures when conducting a proxy interview. 

Whenever you conduct a proxy interview, follow these
procedures:

   *  On the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1):
   
      Complete Item 13 before leaving the household.    
      Make sure to mark either box 3 or 4 in Item 18 to
      indicate that the household member's interview was
      taken by proxy either in person or by telephone.

   *  On the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2):

     Item 20b - The word "respondent" in the answer
     categories refers to the person for whom the proxy
     interview is taken, NOT to the proxy respondent.

     Items 21 - 115 - Replace the word "you" in each of
     these questions with the name of the person for whom
     the proxy interview is being taken. 

     Items 116 - 134 - For these questions, we want the
     proxy respondent to answer for himself/herself, 
     not for the person for whom the proxy interview 
     is being taken.

     Items 135 - 176 - Replace the word "you" in each 
     of these questions with the name of the person for
     whom the proxy interview is being taken. 

Justifying a Proxy Interview

When you take a proxy interview because the household
member is physically and/or mentally unable to answer 
or the household member is temporarily absent and will 
not return before closeout, you must explain the 
situation in an INTER-COMM and attach it to the Basic 
Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1).

You do not need to complete an INTER-COMM if you take
a proxy interview for a 12- or 13-year-old child whose
parent refused to let you interview the child.

Remember to only accept a proxy interview as a last 
resort. Also, only accept a proxy respondent who is 
able to answer questions about the household member 
accurately and completely. 

Rules for Interpreters and
Signers

Before using an interpreter or a signer, make sure 
that the person is acceptable to the respondent. The 
interpreter or signer can be a family member, a 
neighbor of the respondent, an official interpreter 
or signer, or even you, if you speak the person's 
language or can sign well enough.

If you have difficulty finding a suitable interpreter 
or signer, contact your supervisor.  NEVER accept a 
proxy respondent when you can't locate a suitable 
interpreter.  However, you can use a proxy respondent 
for a deaf respondent, when a suitable signer is not 
available.

If you complete any NCVS-2s for a respondent who
required the assistance of an interpreter or signer, 
note in the summary report that an interpreter or 
signer was used.  Do not use Item 13 on the Basic 
Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) to note the use of an 
interpreter or signer.  Item 13 is intended ONLY for 
noting proxy information. 

Whenever you use an interpreter who is not a household
member, you must complete a Form 1415, Contract for
Interpreter Services.  Details for completing this 
form are contained in the Administrative Handbook, 
Form 11-55.

Topic 4.  Maintaining Respondent Rapport

Starting Off on the Right Foot

You do not always get a second chance to make a first 
impression.  As soon as the respondent answers the door 
or the telephone, you need to start building a harmonious 
relationship with him/her.  Maintaining this rapport 
throughout the interview will ensure that you collect 
full and valid information.

As you introduce yourself and the survey, create a
comfortable atmosphere by showing sincere understanding
and interest in the respondent. If the respondent feels
comfortable, he/she will be more willing to provide 
honest and full responses.

Keys to a Successful Introduction

The following key points will help you deliver a 
successful introduction:

    For personal visit interviews, always have the 
    NCVS introductory letter handy to give any 
    respondent who did not receive it in the mail.

    Be enthusiastic and friendly. Remember that a smile
    helps you open a lot of doors.

    Be prepared for any type of responses or questions
    from respondents. By knowing the survey, you will 
    be able to handle any questions. 

Creating a Good Impression

Knowing the NCVS well is a major key to creating a good
impression with respondents.  Pay attention and play an
active role during your training sessions and make sure 
that you complete all self-studies.  Also, make sure to 
read this manual, NCVS-550, and refer to it whenever you 
have questions about the NCVS procedures.

Before you start interviewing for the NCVS, make sure 
that you understand:

     *  The purpose of the survey;

     *  How the survey results are used;

     *  The types of questions asked in the 
        interview; and

     *  How to answer respondent questions.

Being Professional, Friendly, and 
Sincere

One of your greatest assets in creating a good impression 
is to conduct interviews in a professional, friendly, and 
sincere manner. Always keep in mind that you are a 
representative of the United States Government.  This role 
requires you to take a professional approach towards your 
work.

Interviewing in a professional manner, does not mean that 
you can not smile or be friendly.  However, showing too 
much friendliness or concern about a respondent's personal 
matters can cause a respondent to hold back information or 
provide biased information.

Listening carefully and showing a sincere interest in 
what each respondent tells you, will make your 
interviewing easier and more enjoyable.

Staying Neutral and Objective

During an interview, it is important to develop an 
objective, non-threatening, non-judgmental atmosphere.  
Don't let the respondent see any signs of approval 
or disapproval after he/she gives you information.

Be careful not to give your personal opinion either 
by your words, facial expressions, or the tone of your 
voice.  Since some of your respondents will be victims 
of crime and will be telling you personal or sensitive 
information about the crime incident, you must be 
careful not to show any surprise, disapproval, or 
sympathy.  Any of these expressions could cause the 
respondent to give untrue answers or withhold 
information. 

Staying neutral and creating an objective atmosphere 
during an interview is not easy. It comes with experience.  
Practice using neutral expressions and gestures, such 
as "uh-huh," "I've got that," "Yes, I see," or simply 
a nod of your head. These signs will tell the respondent 
that you are listening, without leading, influencing, 
or biasing the information that you receive during an 
interview.

Here are some reasons for not showing your reactions 
to what a respondent says:

     Your actions, as well as your words, can help or 
     hinder an interview.

     If you frown or shake your head, the respondent will
     sense your disapproval just as clearly as if you put 
     it into words.

     If a respondent thinks that you favor one answer more
     than another, this could influence how the person
     answers the question.

Believing in Yourself and the NCVS

Before you make contact with a respondent, believe 
that:

     You "have what it takes" to get a good NCVS
     interview.

     The data you collect for the NCVS is important.

     Each respondent is going to participate in the 
     NCVS.

Guidelines for Gaining Cooperation 
From Respondents

Be Positive - Approach each household expecting to 
obtain an interview.

Introduce Yourself Properly - Always include the 
following points in your introduction:  

 *  Your full name,

 *  Point out that you are representing the United States 
    Census Bureau,

 *  Show your identification card,

 *  Explain the nature of the survey, and

 *  Ask whether the household received our introductory 
    letter.

How Long Will This Take? - Give the respondent an honest
answer as to the length of the NCVS interview.  The NCVS
interview takes about 25 minutes to complete for each
household member, but this can vary depending on the
person's experiences during the reference period. If 
the respondent is reluctant, offer to start the interview 
and, if he/she does not have time to finish, you can 
return later to complete the interview. 

Know Your Survey - The better you know the survey on which 
you are working, the more successful you will be. Know the 
purposes of the survey and be prepared to answer any 
questions about its importance. This will be your best 
defense against respondent objections.

Appearance - Dress in a professional manner.  The initial 
impression you make can be the deciding point between 
whether or not the respondent participates. Dress for the 
neighborhood in which you are working.  Do not overdress. 
A businesslike appearance is essential.

Use Survey Aids - Be ready to show respondents the 
appropriate survey "fact sheet," brochures, or local 
newspaper/magazine articles that make use of NCVS facts. 
This will help the respondent understand the importance 
of his/her participation.

Be Flexible - Be available to complete the interview at the 
respondent's convenience.  Offer to return at a different time 
if the respondent can not do the interview when you contact him
her.  Try to get a telephone number and name, in case you need 
to change the appointment time.  Also leave your name and 
telephone number, when you find that no one is home. Be 
persistent, but do not be pushy. 

It's Voluntary - A few respondents may choose not to participate 
because the survey is voluntary and there are no penalties for 
not participating.  If this happens, explain that the overall 
quality of our data could be affected when sample persons refuse 
to participate.  Persuade the respondent into letting you start 
the interview, and explain that any objectionable questions can 
be refused.

Leave the Door Open - Always maintain a pleasant and business
like manner.  No matter how hostile the respondent behaves towards 
you, always leave the respondent with a positive impression of the 
Census Bureau.  This will facilitate any future contacts with the 
household.

Topic 5.  Answering Respondents' Questions

Importance of Answering Respondent 
Questions

You need to keep a good, positive attitude about the NCVS, 
and be prepared to answer almost any type of respondent 
question with conviction and accuracy.  The Census Bureau 
prides itself on having a qualified staff of FRs who 
consistently continue to receive high marks for gaining
respondent cooperation. This is pretty impressive
considering that in recent years the general public has 
become frustrated with all forms of government.  We 
attribute this success to the good attitude and 
preparedness of our FRs. 

Even though we provide sample households with basic information 
about the NCVS in the introductory letter, some respondents 
may still have questions to ask either before the start of 
the interview or at different points during the interview.

Types of Respondent Questions

The questions that respondents may ask can be divided 
into two main categories:

     *  Item specific questions and

     *  General survey questions.

Item Specific Questions

After you ask a question from any of the NCVS interviewing 
forms, a respondent may ask you:

     *  Why a particular question is needed,

     *  What a particular word or phrase from a 
        question means, or

     *  Who needs the information from a specific 
        question.

This manual has the information you need to answer any item 
specific questions that respondents may ask.

We do not expect you to memorize all of the information
provided in this manual, but you do need to know where 
to look within the manual for specific types of 
information. 

Use Part C, Survey Concepts, when you need to find the meanings 
of specific words or phrases as used in the NCVS questions. 
Chapters 1 through 5 of Part B, How to Complete and Edit NCVS 
Forms, will help you answer respondents' questions about why 
we ask certain questions and who uses the information from 
specific questions.

General Survey Questions

Most of the time, respondents will ask general survey questions 
at the very start of the interview.  Although we can not predict 
every question that a respondent may ask, we have compiled a list 
of commonly asked general survey questions with some suggested 
responses to help you.

A condensed list of the four most commonly asked questions are 
shown:

     *  On the back side of both NCVS introductory letters, and

     *  On page 2 of your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554.

In addition to being listed below, a shorter list of general 
survey questions and suggested answers is shown on the reverse 
side of your NCVS Job Aid, NCVS-550.1.

General Survey Questions and Answers

What is this survey all about?

The National Crime Victimization Survey is conducted monthly 
to collect information on the kinds and amount of crime in 
the United States.  

From a sample of households throughout the United States, we 
interview all household members who are at least 12 years of 
age.

What information do you get from 
this survey?

This survey collects information on the types and amount of 
crimes committed, the characteristics of victims, and the 
characteristics of offenders who have committed violent 
crimes.  The following types of information are also 
collected for reported crimes:

   When and where crimes occur,

   Economic loss to the victim,

   Extent of injuries suffered by the victim,

   Whether the victim knew the offender or whether they were 
   strangers,

   Whether the offender used a weapon, and

   Whether the police were notified.

Why can't you get this information 
from police records?

Based on information received in previous survey years, we have 
found that over half of all crimes go unreported to the police.  
Since this survey includes crimes that are both reported and 
unreported, data users can get a more complete picture of crime 
in the United States from this survey.

What kind of results are released 
from this survey?

Our sponsor, the Bureau of Justice Statistics, releases 
results periodically from the National Crime Victimization 
Survey, together with reports on specific topics. They 
only publish statistical summaries for the Nation as a 
whole and never release any information about you as an 
individual.

Do you have any statistics from this 
survey that I can see? 

For personal visit interviews--
Yes.  You can have this Fact Sheet which contains statistical 
graphs, charts, and figures from the National Crime 
Victimization Survey.  (Hand the respondent a copy of Form 
NCVS-110.)

For telephone interviews--
Yes. I can mail you a copy of a recent Fact Sheet showing 
statistical graphs, charts, and figures from the National 
Crime Victimization Survey. (Mail respondent a copy of Form 
NCVS-110.)

Why Was I Selected for This Survey?

Actually, we selected your address, not you personally. Using 
statistical methods, we selected approximately 54,000 addresses 
across the country to represent the entire population.  If your 
household should move away while your address is still in the 
survey, we would interview the new family that moves into the 
home.

I'm pretty busy. How long will this 
interview really take?

We expect the interview to take about 25 minutes. Your interview 
may be somewhat shorter or longer depending on your circumstances. 
If you have any comments on this survey or any recommendations 
for reducing its length, I can give you an address to use.

   (When asked, here is the address:)

   Chief, Victimization and Statistics Branch
   Bureau of Justice Statistics
   Washington, DC  20531

I thought that your agency just takes a Census every 10 
years. What else does your agency do?

In addition to the decennial census conducted every 10 years, 
the U.S. Census Bureau collects many different kinds of 
statistics. By law, we are required to conduct a variety of 
economic censuses on a regular basis, such as the census of 
business, manufactures, and state and local governments. We 
also collect monthly data on such activities as labor force 
participation, retail and wholesale trade, manufacturing 
activities, and trade statistics, along with yearly data on 
business, manufacturing, governments, family income, and 
education.

How many times will I be interviewed?

Over the 3-year period that your household is in sample for 
this survey, we will ask you to participate once every 6 
months for a total of seven interviews.

Is this survey authorized by law?

Yes. We are conducting this survey under the authority of Title 
13 of the United States Code, Section 8. Section 9 of this law 
requires us to keep all information about you and your household 
strictly confidential.  We may use this information only for 
statistical purposes. Also, Title 42, Section 3732, of the United 
States Code authorizes the Bureau of Justice Statistics of the 
U.S. Department of Justice to collect information using this 
survey.  Title 42, Sections 3789g and 3735 of the United States 
Code also require us to keep all information about you and your 
household strictly confidential.  

Do I have to participate?

Participation is voluntary and there are no penalties for not 
answering questions.  However, it is very important that we 
have your cooperation in this survey to ensure the validity 
and accuracy of the survey results.

Why can't you just mail me a questionnaire?

The survey design and the nature of the questions require a 
trained person to record the information. This method of 
interview is the least expensive way to obtain this 
information.

How can I know for sure that you are 
who you say you are?

Besides my identification badge, I can give you a telephone 
number to call so you can verify with my supervisor that I 
work for the U.S. Census Bureau.

How can this survey help to
fight crime?

The results of this survey show a variety of information 
about crime victims, offenders, types of crimes being 
committed, and types of places where these crimes occur. All 
of this information is put to good use by law enforcement 
agencies, community groups, and government agencies throughout 
the country to lower the incidence of crime.

Why do you need to interview me 
when I don't have any crimes to 
report?

We are interested in getting information from both victims and 
nonvictims. By examining the differences between victims and 
nonvictims, we can try to determine why certain individuals 
become victims, while others do not.

Why waste my tax dollars on
a silly survey?

We are always concerned about survey costs; however, the National 
Crime Victimization Survey is the ONLY source of information on 
crimes not reported to police.  Legislators and planners use 
this data to make informed decisions on numerous crime-related 
programs.  This data is also used to estimate the cost of victim 
compensation programs; to determine the types of programs needed 
for elderly crime victims, and to measure the effects that 
police behavior and the criminal justice system have on crime 
levels.

Topic 6.  General Interviewing Techniques

Applying General Interviewing 
Techniques

In addition to creating a good impression and answering
respondent questions, we want all FRs to use the same 
interviewing techniques.  By following uniform techniques, 
we can ensure that the final survey results are more 
complete and accurate.

Pacing the Interview

Remember the following key point about pacing the NCVS 
interview--"do not rush" to complete an interview under 
any circumstances.  Maintain a calm, unhurried manner 
and ask the questions in an objective and deliberate way. 
This will not only relax the respondent, but also help to 
keep the respondent's attention.

When respondents sense that you are rushing through 
an interview, they may withhold information thinking 
that it would take too long to explain the crime 
incident.  On the other hand, do not let respondents 
waste too much time talking about unrelated information.  
Try to tactfully steer respondents back to the interview 
without making them feel as if you are hurrying to 
finish.

An average NCVS interview will take about 25 minutes 
to complete.  However, the actual time required to 
interview all eligible members of a sample household 
will vary depending on the household's composition 
and crime experiences during the reference period.

Always assume that each respondent has time to be interviewed 
when you contact him/her. If the respondent tries to rush you 
through the interview or tries to cut you off, arrange to 
continue the interview at a more convenient time for the 
respondent.  Whenever possible, make every attempt to complete 
at least the household respondent's interview during your first 
contact for the interview period.  This will make any callbacks 
for remaining household member's easier.

When conducting interviews, always speak as clearly and 
distinctly as possible.  Avoid talking too fast or too slow. 
Talking too fast may give the impression that you think the 
questions are either unimportant or sensitive in nature. By 
speaking in a confident voice and at a moderate pace, respondents 
are more likely to stay relaxed and responsive. 

Asking Questions as Worded

When asking NCVS questions, you must avoid changing the words 
or omitting parts of questions.  Even if the change seems 
insignificant to you, it could change the way the respondent 
interprets the question.  We want each respondent to interpret 
the NCVS questions the same way, so the answers that we receive 
will be comparable throughout the entire sample.

Here is an example:

Item 34 from the NCVS-1-- 
Does anyone in this household operate a business from this 
address?

Item 34 after an FR omits words--
Does anyone in this household operate a business?

By rewording this question, the FR may get a different response 
than an FR who reads the question as it is printed on the 
questionnaire.  By leaving out "from this address," respondents 
could misinterpret the true intent of this question.

Words in Bold Type

When looking at item questions and answers on the NCVS 
questionnaires, any words shown in bold type are meant 
for you to read to the respondent.

Words in Regular Type

Words shown in regular type on the NCVS questionnaires are 
intended either as instructions for you to read to yourself 
or answer categories that you do not read to the respondent.

Phrases in Parentheses

Some of the NCVS-1 questions contain a phrase in parentheses, 
such as the questions in Items 44a and 46d.

Item 44a on the NCVS-1--
During the last 6 months, (other than any incidents already 
mentioned,) did you call the police to report something that 
happened to YOU which you thought was a crime? 

Item 46d on the NCVS-1--
What was the total dollar amount of the damage caused by 
this/these act(s) of vandalism during the last 6 months? 
(Use repair costs if the property was repaired.)  

(Exclude any damage done in incidents already
mentioned.)

When you see a phrase in parentheses, you need to decide 
whether the text has to be read to the respondent because 
he/she had already reported a crime incident in an earlier 
screen question (as shown in Item 44a) or as a reminder 
(as shown in Item 46d).

Reading the Entire Question

Part (a) of most screen questions has at least three
subcategories and could have as many as eight
subcategories.  This may prompt some respondents to 
give you an answer before you finish reading each 
subcategory. We would prefer that you finish reading 
each subcategory before the respondent gives an answer.  
Even if you get interrupted, you must read each and 
every subcategory in its entirety.

The following technique may help you get through all 
the subcategories of a screen question before getting 
a respondent's answer:

1  After reading each subcategory in part (a), only 
   pause long enough to let the respondent know that 
   you are about to start reading a new subcategory. If 
   you pause too long, the respondent may feel that you 
   are waiting for an answer.

2  After reading all subcategories in part (a), pause 
   long enough to allow the respondent to reply. If the
   respondent doesn't give you an answer, then read the
   question in part (b), "Did any incidents of this type
   happen to you?" 

3  If you get a "Yes" response in part (b), mark the 
   answer box and ask the respondent "What happened?"  
   Based on the answer you receive, enter a brief 
   description of the crime incident in the space 
   provided to the right of part (a).  Then, ask the 
   question in part (c), "How many times?"

4  If you get a "No" response in part (b), mark the 
   answer box and continue with the next appropriate 
   item number.

If this technique doesn't work and a respondent either
interrupts you in the middle of reading a subcategory 
or before you finish reading all the subcategories for 
a question, follow these steps:

Respondent answers in the middle of reading a
subcategory--

1  Stop and thank the respondent, but explain that 
   there is more to the question which he/she needs 
   to hear before giving an answer.

2  Reread the unfinished subcategory again from the
   beginning.  

   If the respondent gives you a "No" answer after you
   finish reading the entire subcategory, tell the 
   respondent that you need to finish reading all the 
   subcategories for the question.  

   If the respondent gives you a "Yes" answer before 
   you have read all subcategories, then follow the 
   instructions below.

Respondent answers "Yes" before you have read all
subcategories--

1  Mark the "Yes" answer box in part (b) and ask "What 
   happened?"

2  Enter a brief description of the crime incident in the 
   space to the right of part (a).

3  Then, ask the question in part (c), "How many times?" 
   and fill the "Number of times" space.

4  Next, start by saying, "Other than any incidents 
   already reported..." and finish reading the 
   remaining subcategories in part (a) for the item 
   number.

5  If the respondent mentions any additional crime
   incidents, briefly describe them in the space next 
   to part (a) AND correct the "Number of times" 
   entry in part (c). 

By using these techniques, there is less chance of missing 
any crime incidents which occurred during the reference 
period.

Marking All Answers That Apply

There are several questions in the Crime Incident Report
(NCVS-2)that are designed to get multiple answers.  Here's 
an example:

Item 51 - How did they make the situation worse?

This item has six answer categories: 

   Led to injury or greater injury to respondent
   Caused greater loss of property or damage to 
   property Other people got hurt (worse)
   Offender got away Made offender angrier, more 
   aggressive, etc. Other - Specify                            

To ensure that we get all answers that apply to this question, 
you must continue asking, "Any other way?" until the respondent 
answers, "No."

Inserting Names in Questions

Several questions on the Control Card are designed so that you 
get prompted to insert the appropriate household member's name.  
These prompts are indicated by a series of three dots.

Here is an example:

Control Card Item 24:

"Please choose one or more races that ... considers him/herself 
to be."

Wherever you see this prompt (...) in a Control Card question, 
substitute the name of the household member about whom you are 
asking.

When you conduct a proxy interview, there are several questions 
on the crime incident report where you need to substitute the 
name of the person for whom the proxy interview is being taken, 
instead of reading the word "you." This substitution applies to 
Items 21 through 115 and Items 135 through 176, but only when 
you are talking to a proxy respondent.

Asking Questions in the Right Order

After completing or updating the appropriate Control Card items, 
always interview the household respondent first. Once you have 
completed the household respondent's interview, then interview 
the remaining household members one at a time. In most 
households, each individual respondent will answer the questions 
for himself/herself. Do not attempt to interview more than one 
household member at the same time.

Once you start to interview a household member, ask the 
questions as instructed on each questionnaire. A great 
deal of planning and forethought has gone into designing 
the NCVS Control Card and questionnaires, so that you can 
get the best results from each interview.  Because of this, 
keep the following points in mind:

 *  Never ask questions in a different sequence from the 
    order in which they are shown on the questionnaire.

 *  Carefully follow all FR and skip instructions on 
    the questionnaires.
 
 *  Ask questions as they are worded without adding 
    or deleting words or phrases. 

 *  Do not skip a question when a respondent has already 
    given you the answer.  In most cases, you will still 
    ask the question as worded without adding or deleting 
    words or phrases. 

    Verifying a respondent's previously given answer
    without reading the question is only permissible 
    for items that have an "Ask or Verify" instruction.  
    If you do not see an "Ask or Verify" instruction, 
    always ask the question as worded on the 
    questionnaire. 

    Do not assume that you know the answer without 
    asking or verifying a question. 

    Here is an example:

    In Item 10 of the NCVS-2, you ask the respondent 
    where the incident happened.  The respondent 
    answers:  "It happened on the street in front of 
    my school."  After marking Box (21) in Item 10, 
    you skip to Item 18.
     
    Item18 instructs you to either "Ask or Verify" --  
    "Did it happen outdoors, indoors, or both?" In this 
    situation, you can just verify that the incident 
    happened outdoors by saying: "So this incident 
    happened outdoors?"

Listening to the Respondent

As an FR, your listening skills are of utmost importance. Listen 
carefully to what each respondent has to say and continue 
listening until the respondent is done giving his/her answer. By 
improving your listening skills, you can increase your chances 
for recording complete and accurate information.

Here are some listening "Do's and Don'ts":

Do's:

   Repeat the question as worded in a clear and 
   distinct voice when the respondent appears to 
   have misunderstood the question.

   Repeat the respondent's answer when it's necessary 
   to check your understanding of what the respondent 
   said. Then pause in hopes that the respondent will 
   expand and clarify his/her answer.

   Whenever a respondent mentions a crime incident,
   complete the screen item on the NCVS-1 and complete
   an NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, even if the
   respondent makes light of the situation or says that 
   it was not "serious."

Don'ts:

   Do not tune out what a respondent says when you 
   start recording an answer.  You may need the 
   information to either clarify the answer or change 
   the way you interpret the answer.

   Do not interrupt respondents before they are finished,
   even if they hesitate while giving their answer. Be
   patient and allow respondents sufficient time to recall
   the facts. 

   Also, remember that some respondents may say, "I don't
   know," when they really mean, "Let me think about it." 
   When you experience this situation, allow the
   respondent time to finish his/her statement before
   repeating the question or probing in some other way.

   Stay neutral and avoid showing shock or disapproval
   while a respondent is answering questions.

Using Appropriate Gestures

Your gestures, both verbal and non-verbal, need to convey 
to respondents that you are conscientious, concerned, and 
courteous. Poor use of gestures can portray a lack of 
interest, an indifferent attitude, or even disdain.

As you speak, be mindful of the inflection of your voice, 
its tone, and its volume.  Also, be aware of what your eye 
contact, use of hands and arms, and facial expressions 
might be saying to a respondent.

Probing When Necessary

Probing is a technique whereby you casually get the respondent 
to provide an answer that meets the question's objective.  
Probing is a necessary interviewing technique because some 
respondents:

  May not hear the question correctly because of poor hearing 
  or background noise;

  May not understand the meaning of a word or phrase used in 
  the question; 

  May give you an answer that is too general; or

  May say, "I don't know," because they are trying to:

      -- Avoid the subject of the question,
      -- Buy some time before giving an answer, or
      -- Avoid saying that they did not understand the question.

Understanding the Intent of NCVS Questions

Before you can decide whether or not to probe, you need 
to understand the intent of each question. By understanding 
a question's purpose, you can better decide when to probe 
and which probing technique to use.  

Here is an example of what can happen when you do not 
understand a question's objective:

Item 10 on the NCVS-2:
Where did this incident happen?

Respondent Answers:
In the parking garage of a shopping mall.

Bad Probe:
Would that be a commercial or noncommercial parking garage?

Good Probe:
Were you charged a fee to park in the garage?

If you do not ask the right probing question, you will not 
get an accurate answer. By using a bad probe, the FR is 
either:

*  Assuming that the respondent knows what we mean by the 
   terms "commercial or noncommercial" 

   or 

*  Failing to understand that we want to differentiate
   between parking lots/garages charging a fee and those 
   allowing free parking.

Probing Techniques

Don't assume that a respondent's answer is always correct. 
When you get an answer that does not make sense to you, 
you need to immediately decide which probing technique 
will work best in the situation.  

Choosing the best probing technique will help you to casually 
persuade the respondent to expand and/or clarify an answer.

Here are some standard probing techniques:

  Brief Assenting Comments - Use a comment like, 
  "Yes, I see," when you want to stimulate the 
  respondent to talk further.  This will also show 
  that you are giving attention to the respondent's 
  answer.

  Here's an example:

  Item 45a on the NCVS-1:
  During the last 6 months, (other than any incidents
  already mentioned,) did anything which you thought
  was a crime happen to YOU, but you did NOT report
  to the police?

  Respondent Answers:
  Yes, I saw a prowler.

  Brief Assenting Comment:
  Yes, I see.  Can you tell me more?

  An Expectant Pause - During a personal visit interview,
  use an expectant pause together with an inquiring look 
  to convey to the respondent that you expect him/her 
  to give you more information.

  Repeating the Question - Repeat the question when 
  the respondent does not understand or misinterprets 
  the question, seems unable to make up his/her mind, 
  or strays from the subject.

  Here is an example:

  Item 87 on the NCVS-2:
  Was this the only time any of these offenders
  committed a crime against you or your household or
  made threats against you or your household?

  Respondent Answers:
  No, one of the offenders was arrested 2 years ago 
  for a bank robbery.

  Repeating the Question:
  Was this the only time any of these offenders
  committed a crime against you or your household or
  made threats against you or your household?

  Repeating the Respondent's Reply - Repeat the
  respondent's reply exactly as the respondent gives 
  it to you, when you need to clarify the answer and 
  prompt the respondent to expand his/her answer.  
  Never interject your own ideas when repeating the 
  respondent's reply.

  Here is an example:

  Item 82 on the NCVS-2:
  How well did you know the offender(s) - by sight only, 
  casual acquaintance or well known?

  Respondent Answers:
  She's just one of the girls on the block.

  Repeating Respondent's Answer:
  She's just one of the girls on the block?  So did you know 
  the offender by sight only, casual acquaintance or well known?

  Respondent Answers:
  I don't even know her name. I just see her around,
  so I guess sight only.
  Neutral Questions and a Neutral Tone of Voice - Use
  neutral questions when you need to get a fuller, 
  clearer response.  Always use a neutral tone of voice 
  so you don't sound demanding and upset the respondent.

  Here is an example:

  Item 98 of the NCVS-2:
  Had permission to use the (car/motor vehicle) ever
  been given to the offender(s)?
     
  Respondent Answers:
  Well, I said maybe he could use it when it wasn't so new.

  Neutral Probe:
  Did the offender have permission to use the
  car/motor vehicle?

Sometimes a respondent may still misunderstand a question's 
meaning or give you an unintended response.  If this happens, 
you can read a question's answer categories to the respondent 
as a "last resort." 

If you use this technique, do not bias the respondent's answer 
by only reading a few of the answer categories. By reading all 
answer categories for a question, you will help the respondent 
to better understand the type of answers the particular question 
is attempting to get.

Staying Neutral

Whichever technique you choose, be careful not to ask leading 
questions and not to make the respondent feel insulted. A 
"leading" question is one that could influence a respondent's 
answer or unnecessarily prolong the interview. 

Here is an example of probing with a leading question:

Item 46e on the NCVS-1: Was the damage under $100 or $100 or 
more?

Respondent answers: I'm not really sure.

Leading Question Probe:
Do you think that it was probably less than $100?

A More Appropriate Probe:
If you include the total amount of damage for all incidents of 
vandalism during the last 6 months, would you say the damage 
was under $100 or $100 or more?

Do not assume that you know what the answer should be, and then 
lead the respondent to that answer. Keep your probing questions 
as neutral as possible, so the respondent can think objectively 
about the question and give an accurate answer.

General Screening Guidelines

The screening portion of the NCVS interview is very important.  
The NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire, is designed to give each 
respondent every opportunity to remember any crime incidents 
that occurred during the 6-month reference period. The BJS and 
the U.S. Census Bureau have specific reasons for the wording of 
each question and the sequencing of each group of questions.

While conducting the screen interview, do not jeopardize
their efforts by eliminating questions or asking questions 
in a different sequence.  Also, NEVER eliminate the screen
interview by just asking whether any crimes occurred during
the 6-month reference period or since the household's last
interview.

Asking Applicable Questions

During each enumeration period, ask the household respondent 
and all remaining household members ALL applicable screen 
questions.  Since respondents can easily forget many crime 
incidents, it is essential to ask all applicable questions 
each time the sample household is assigned for interview.  
This is the only way we can ensure that we collect complete 
and accurate information.

Handling Difficult Respondents

Some respondents may not want to go through the interview on 
the NCVS-1 for various reasons, and may say:

   Let's save some time. I can tell you up front 
   that I haven't been a victim of crime since the 
   last time I talked to you.

   Or

   You don't need to read all those examples of stolen
   items, because nothing was stolen from me or anyone
   else in this household.

When you need to convince a respondent to complete the
entire screen interview, try the following techniques:

   "Some crime incidents are easily forgotten. By asking
   these screen questions, you may remember something
   that you've put out of your mind. To guarantee that 
   I don't miss any crime incidents, I'm required to ask
   each question and allow you time to make sure that
   you haven't forgotten anything."

   "Even if you haven't been a victim of crime during 
   the last 6 months, we are also interested in any 
   other changes in your life, such as marital status, 
   household income, and job changes.  These 
   characteristics also play a part in examining criminal 
   victimizations in the United States.  I'm required 
   to ask these questions each time your household is 
   assigned for interview. Otherwise, we can't get a 
   complete and up-to-date picture of both crime victims 
   and nonvictims for comparative purposes."

   (Only use this technique when a supplement is attached 
   to the NCVS interview.)  "For this interview, our sponsor 
   has added a few new questions for a specific study they 
   are authorized to undertake. The information we collect 
   from these new questions, along with the original 
   questions, is essential to our sponsor and the completion 
   of this study."

Never tell the respondent that you do not remember what you were 
told during the last interview or that all the information he/she 
provided during the last interview has gone to Washington.

General Guidelines for Recording 
Answers

After listening carefully to a respondent's answer, take great 
care to record the answer accurately and legibly. By recording 
answers accurately and legibly, you can help guarantee that the 
information you collect is understood clearly by editors and 
keyers who need to process your completed work.

For questions that require you to mark an (X) to record the 
answer, make sure that your (X) is easy to read and fills up 
the answer box without going outside the box. Making your (X) 
either too large, too small, or too light could cause confusion 
and/or mistakes during keying.

For questions that require you to write in an answer, make 
sure that you print the answer neatly so someone else can 
easily read your entry later.

Correcting Answers

If you need to change an answer, line through the old entry 
and mark (X) the correct answer box or print your new entry 
above the old entry.  Do not erase an entry unless you are 
specifically instructed to do so in this 
manual.

Here are two examples of correcting answers by lining through 
old entries--

Example #1

0   None - SKIP to 40a
1   1
2   2
3   3
4   4 or more

Example #2

    Months (1-11) - SKIP to 33b
    OR
    Years (Round to nearest whole year) -
           Fill Check Item A

Here's an example of when you are allowed to erase an 
old entry--

Item 25b on the Control Card is used to enter the date 
of interview.  After completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen
Questionnaire, and any NCVS-2s, Crime Incident Reports,
for a second through seventh enumeration period household,
you need to erase the interview date from the previous
enumeration period and enter the new interview date for 
the current enumeration period.

Topic 7.  Closing the Interview and "Thank You" Letters

Leaving on Good Terms

Since you or someone else from the Census Bureau may
need to contact a sample household again, always leave 
the household with a good feeling towards you and the 
Census Bureau. By ending every interview with a friendly 
and polite "Thank You," you will be paving the way for 
future contacts.

Let respondents know that we appreciate the time that 
they gave for the interview, and tell them that they 
may be contacted again for this survey.  Always remain 
sensitive, concerned, and courteous throughout the entire 
interview.

By closing the interview properly, you are nurturing a
positive image of our agency, and improving the chances 
for successful followup contacts during editing, 
reinterview, or other surveys.

Using "Thank You" Letters

We have prepared two different "Thank You" letters for 
you to use--the NCVS-593(L) and the NCVS-594(L).  Each
letter has a specific purpose, and we do not intend for 
you to hand or mail a "Thank You" letter after every 
NCVS interview.  Both of these "Thank You" letters are 
printed in English and Spanish.

These letters not only thank the household for their
cooperation, but also relay to them again how important 
this survey really is.  Depending on the circumstances, 
you can either hand or mail the letter to the household.  
If you mail the "Thank You" letter, make sure that you 
use the "mailing address" from either Item 6a or 6c on 
the Control Card.

Regardless of whether or not you give the household a
"Thank You" letter, always remember to thank them
yourself at the end of the interview.

First Through Sixth
Enumeration Period 

For first through sixth enumeration period households, 
use the NCVS-593(L) "Thank You" letter whenever you 
feel that the household shows any signs that they may 
refuse to be interviewed again.  For example, a 
household member may become annoyed at the length of 
the interview or at the number of times you have 
contacted the household. In these situations, a "Thank 
You" letter does not guarantee cooperation, but it may 
help to leave a positive impression, and make it easier 
to gain their cooperation for future interviews.

Seventh Enumeration Period

At the end of the seventh enumeration period interview,
always make sure to either hand or mail the respondent 
a NCVS-594(L), "Thank You" letter. 

Noting the Control Card

Whenever you hand or mail a "Thank You" letter to a
household, briefly note that fact, along with the date, 
in the "Notes" space below Item 30g on the Control Card.

Part A, Chapter 3

Chapter 3
General National Crime Victimization Survey Procedures

Table of Topics

Topic

1    Basic Survey Procedures
                       
2    Monthly Tasks
                              
3    Daily Tasks                     

4    Specific Household Procedures

Topic 1.  Basic Survey Procedures

Length of Time in Sample

Each address that is selected as a sample unit for the 
NCVS is usually interviewed seven times. These interviews 
are conducted once every 6 months over a 3-year period.  
This allows us to compile a continuous record of the 
sample household's experiences at a reasonable cost and 
with the least amount of inconvenience to the household.

Enumeration Periods

We refer to each time a sample household's address is 
assigned for interview as an "enumeration period."  
Since we interview or attempt to interview each 
sample household seven times, then there are seven
"enumeration periods" for each sample address.

When a sample address is assigned to you for interview, 
you need to check the enumeration period indicated by 
the regional office on the case's Control Card. Look 
at Item 5, Letter Sent, to see which enumeration 
period is the last one marked by the regional office. 
Some of the procedures you need to follow will vary 
depending on the enumeration period for the current 
interview.  

Here are some examples:

Since the household roster on the Control Card is 
blank for a first enumeration period, you would ask 
the question for Item 13a on the Control Card.

----------------------------------------------
                HOUSEHOLD ROSTER
                Last name first
                                
What are the names of all persons living or staying 
here?  Start with the name of the person or one of 
the persons who
              (owns/rents)this home.
List all persons who usually live here and all 
persons who are temporarily absent.  Be sure to
INCLUDE infants under 1 year of age.
                       13a
------------------------------------------------                               

For the second through seventh enumeration periods, you
would ask the question in Item 14 on the Control Card,
instead of asking the question in Item 13a.                            
 
------------------------------------------------                               
          HOUSEHOLD ROSTER COVERAGE
                     14
Ask each time household is interviewed. (If "Yes," 
enter name in item 13a above.)

I have listed (Read names in item 13a and verify 
13c as appropriate).
                        
Have I missed anyone else living or staying here 
such as any babies, any lodgers, or anyone who is 
away at present traveling or in the hospital?
------------------------------------------------

Control Card Item 14, together with other selected 
items, are printed with shading.  After the first 
enumeration period, each of these shaded Control 
Card items needs to be updated:

*  During each subsequent enumeration period,

                     OR 

*  When indicated, only during the 3rd, 5th, and 7th
   enumeration periods.

Identifying the current enumeration period accurately 
will enable you to ask the appropriate Control Card 
questions and update the appropriate Control Card 
items during each enumeration period.

Reference Periods

For the NCVS, the reference period covers the 6-month 
time period prior to the interview date. When conducting
interviews, we are interested only in crime incidents 
that occurred during a household member's specific 
6-month reference period.

For the first enumeration period, each household member's 
reference period will start on the first day of the month 
6 months prior to the interview date, and end on the day 
prior to the interview date.

Here is an example:

If a household respondent's first enumeration period 
interview is conducted on January 3, 2003, then the 
current reference period for the household respondent 
would be July 1, 2002 through January 2, 2003.

If the remaining household members were interviewed 
for the first enumeration period on January 4, 2003, 
then the current reference period for each of these 
household members would be July 1, 2002 through 
January 3, 2003.

For a first enumeration period household, all household 
members will have the same start date, but each household 
member's end date may vary based on the member's current 
interview date.

After the first enumeration period, reference periods for 
all remaining enumeration periods will start on the date 
of the household member's last interview and end on the day 
prior to the member's current interview date.  Unlike the 
first enumeration period, each household member could have 
a different reference period start date for the second 
through seventh enumeration period based on the member's 
last interview date.  

The following two terms are often used to describe this 
type of reference period:

    *  Period-to-period recounting or

    *  Floating reference period.

By using this type of a reference period, we can compile 
a continuous record of the household's experiences for the 
3 years that they are in sample.

For second through seventh enumeration periods, you would 
normally use the date entered in Item 25b on the Control 
Card as the household member's start date for the reference 
period.  However, if the following exceptions exist, do not 
use the date in Control Card Item 25b as the start date for
the household member's reference period:

*  When no date is entered in Item 25b (person was 
   a noninterview last enumeration period) - The 
   start date for the reference period would be the 
   first day of the month 6 months prior to the 
   current interview date.

*  When date entered in Item 25b is more than 6 
   months prior to the interview date - The start 
   date for the reference period would be the first 
   day of the month 6 months prior to the interview 
   date.

*  Household respondent is a different person than
   the last household respondent - The reference 
   period start date for the current household 
   respondent would be the date entered in Item 25b
   for the household respondent from the previous
   enumeration period.

*  Cannot determine which household member was
   the last household respondent - The reference 
   period start date for the current household 
   respondent would be the first day of the month 
   6 months prior to the interview date.

Your NCVS Field Representative's Information Card Booklet, 
NCVS-554, has a checklist on page 10 for determining 
reference periods for interviewing and examples of reference 
periods on page 11. Two-year calendars are also provided on 
pages 12 and 13 to help the respondent remember the reference 
period for the current interview and also enable him/her to 
determine the exact month that an incident occurred.

Once you have determined the start date for the household 
member's reference period, enter this start date where 
indicated in the following questions on the Basic Screen 
Questionnaire, NCVS-1: Items 36a, 40a, and 46a for the 
household respondent and Items 36a and 40a for the 
remaining household members.

While interviewing, it is important to keep reminding the 
respondent of the starting and ending dates for the 
reference period. If a respondent seems to be having 
difficulty keeping track of the reference period dates, 
try adding the actual dates after reading "in the last 6 
months."  This will help the respondent to stay focused on 
the correct time frame for the interview.

Incidents Outside of Reference 
Period

Remember to only complete an incident report for incidents 
that occurred during the reference period for the current 
interview. If at any point during an interview, you discover 
that the incident is outside of the reference period, you 
need to discontinue taking information for the incident 
and follow the proper procedures for marking the incident 
"out-of-scope." (See Part C, Chapter 1, for out-of-scope 
incidents.)

Incidents Occurring on the Day of 
the Interview

Also, if a respondent reports an incident that occurred on 
the same day that you are interviewing him/her, you would 
not complete an NCVS-2 for this incident until the 
household's next enumeration period.  In this situation, 
make a note on the Control Card reminding you to complete 
an NCVS-2 for the incident during the next enumeration 
period.  

Interview Scheme

All households in the NCVS sample are divided into six 
groups, which are referred to as "rotation" groups.  
During the course of a 6-month period, one-sixth of the 
full sample or a "panel" from each rotation group is 
assigned for interview each month.  This interviewing 
scheme enables us to spread out the interviewing work
fairly evenly throughout the year, so we can maintain 
a regular staff of FRs with routine monthly NCVS 
assignments.

Here are some examples:

Sample households in panel 1 of rotation groups 1 
through 6 are assigned for interview in the months 
of January and July.

Sample households in panel 2 of rotation groups 1 
through 6 are assigned for interview in the months 
of February and August.

By the time we get to panel 6 of rotation groups 1 through
6, which are assigned for interview in the months of June
and December, we will have assigned for interview all
sample households from panels 1 through 6 of rotation
groups 1 through 6.

Interview Period

An interview period is the time that you are allowed 
to complete all of the NCVS interviews assigned to you 
for an interview month.  Typically, your interview 
period will begin on the first day of the month. 
Ideally, we would like your assignment to be completed 
as quickly as possible once the interview period begins.  
Your supervisor will give you the interview closeout 
date for each interview month.  This will be the "drop 
dead" date by which all NCVS cases assigned to you for 
the month must be completed.

The majority of the NCVS cases in each assignment will
require telephone interviews. Always try to complete 
all of your telephone interviews:

Before conducting your personal visit interviews and

Within the first few days of the interview period.

This procedure allows you to detect any replacement
households or other situations from your telephone
interviews that could require personal visit 
interviews before you plan your personal visit work 
schedule.

Some assignment areas (PSUs) have been selected for
Computer-Assisted Telephone Interviewing (CATI). If 
you are assigned work in a CATI PSU, you will also 
receive Control Cards for the sample addresses 
scheduled for CATI interviewing.  Do not attempt to
interview any "CATI Hold" sample addresses, unless 
your supervisor tells you to do so. You will only 
need to interview a "CATI Hold" sample address when 
the CATI facility is unable to conduct the interview.

Topic 2. Monthly Tasks

Monthly Instructions

About one week prior to the start of the interview month, 
your regional office will send you a memorandum with 
specific instructions for the upcoming interview month. 
When you receive your monthly memorandum, read the entire 
memorandum very carefully and contact your supervisor if 
you have any questions about the information provided.

Preparing to Interview

When you receive the monthly memorandum for an interview 
month, you will also receive:

*  Your interviewing assignment for the month,

*  Any listing work for the month, and 

*  Any supplies you may need.

Checking New Assignments

As soon as you receive your monthly package of interview 
materials, check the items listed on the Transmittal Form 
11-35 that accompanies these materials. If anything listed 
on the transmittal is missing from your package, call your 
supervisor immediately.

Sorting Your Assignment

After checking your assignment, the next step is to make 
sure that your assigned cases are sorted as described 
below:

First Sort: Separate your cases into three stacks--
Telephone interviews Personal visit interviews CATI hold 
cases - Only interview CATI hold cases when instructed 
to do so by your supervisor. This will happen when the 
CATI facility is unable to complete the interview and 
the case is recycled to the field staff for completion.

Second Sort: Separate your personal visit interviews 
so that cases in segments that are geographically 
close to one another are stacked together.

Organizing Your Work Schedule

As you organize your assignment for the interview month, 
take into consideration the geographic distribution of 
your cases and the number of new segments in your 
assignment. Then, follow the steps listed below:

Step
1  Always conduct your telephone interviews FIRST.

2  Try to conduct your personal visit interviews in
segments with first enumeration period households
next. This will allow sufficient time should you
encounter unexpected problems with these cases. For
first enumeration period households, you must conduct 
the household respondent's interview IN PERSON.  
However, if the remaining household members are not 
available at the time of your visit, it is acceptable to 
interview these household members by telephone once you 
have completed the household respondent's interview in 
person.

NOTE: Regardless of the enumeration period, the household 
respondent always must be the FIRST household member 
interviewed and he/she must be at least 18 years of age and 
knowledgeable about the household. For example, the reference 
person or one of the other household members who owns or 
rents the home. (See page A2-11 for exceptions to the age 
requirement.)

3  Conduct any remaining personal visit interviews in a logical 
sequence so that you keep to a minimum any backtracking or 
return trips to a segment.

Completing Your Assignment

Always attempt to complete your interviewing assignment as early 
in the interview month as possible. Transmit your completed work 
on a flow basis as frequently as possible. Your supervisor will 
provide you with a final transmittal date or closeout date for 
each interview month. (See Chapter 7 for more details on receipt 
and transmittal of work.)

Topic 3. Daily Tasks

Planning Your Daily Schedule

It is important to carefully plan your daily schedule so that you 
get the maximum amount of interviewing work accomplished during 
your workday. Keep the following points in mind as you plan your 
workday:

*  Geographic location of assigned addresses,

*  Any previously made appointments, and

*  Best time to visit or call the household (noted 
   in Control Card Item 26e).

Assembling Your Materials

Before you leave home to start your workday, it is very important 
to make sure that you have everything you might need to carry you 
through your entire interviewing schedule for the day. Make sure 
that you take current versions of the following items with you:

*  NCVS-550, Interviewing Manual for Field Representatives

*  NCVS-554, Field Representative's Information Card Booklet

*  A sufficient supply of blank forms, such as the NCVS-500, 
   NCVS-1 and -1A, NCVS-2, and the NCVS-7.

*  Copies of both introductory letters, NCVS-572(L) and 
   NCVS-573(L), and the Fact Sheet brochure, NCVS-110.

*  The appropriate segment folders containing the Control 
   Cards for each assigned case within the segment.

Conducting Telephone Interviews 
and Callbacks

Since the primary purpose of conducting NCVS interviews by 
telephone is to reduce travel costs and save money, avoid 
traveling to assigned segments that require telephone 
interviews until you have attempted to conduct all assigned 
telephone interviews.  

Typically, interviews for second through seventh enumeration 
period households are conducted by telephone. Always check 
Control Card Item 26e to see when the household prefers to 
be contacted. (See Part A, Chapter 5, for more details on 
telephone interviews.)

Conducting Personal Visit Interviews

In addition to the first enumeration period households,
other sample households may require personal visit
interviews because they:

*  Do not have a telephone on which they can be contacted,

*  Refuse to give us their telephone number,

*  Tell us that a telephone interview is not acceptable, or

*  Are replacement households.

Control Card Items 26a through 26d provide this information for 
second through seventh enumeration period households. (See Part 
A, Chapter 5, for more details about personal visit interviews.)

Transcribing Information

Both the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) and the Noninterview 
Record (NCVS-7) require you to transcribe information onto 
specific items from the Control Card (NCVS-500).  Since it 
is very easy to make transcription errors, take your time and 
carefully transcribe the required information. (See Part B, 
Chapters 2 and 4, for more details about transcribing 
information from the Control Card.)

Whenever you fill a Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2) for 
a household member, you need to transcribe information
from the NCVS-2 onto Control Card Item 32. This transcription 
is done after you have ended your contact with the household.  
The information that you transcribe onto Control Card Item 32 
will help ensure that we do not duplicate incidents.  We use 
the term "bounding" information to describe the information 
transcribed onto Control Card Item 32 during each enumeration 
period for each of the household's reported incidents. (See 
Part C, Chapter 1, for more details about bounding information.) 

Before Editing Your Work

After you have completed all the required transcriptions,
check to see if any of your notes need clarification and
complete or clarify any INTER-COMMs that your interviews 
may require.

Editing Completed Forms

Once you are done with the transcriptions, notes, and
INTER-COMMS, edit any forms that you have completed. 
Make sure that any listing sheets, Control Cards, and
questionnaires that you completed or updated are filled
properly, accurately, and legibly. (See Part B, Chapter 
5, for more details about editing your completed work.)

Sending "Thank You" Letters

As needed, mail "Thank You" letters to respondents using the 
mailing address from Control Card Item 6a or 6c. (See Part A, 
Chapter 2, for more details about sending "Thank You" letters.)

Transmitting Completed Work

Transmit your completed work on a flow basis, preferably on 
a daily basis whenever possible. Frequent transmittals will 
enable work to flow easier through the various processing 
stages. (See Part A, Chapter 7, for more details about 
transmitting completed work.)

Topic 4.  Specific Household Procedures

Starting With the Household Respondent

Once you have introduced yourself and verified that you 
have contacted the correct address, then you must ask to 
speak with:

*  One of the persons who owns or rents the home, 

*  The previous household respondent, or 

*  A household member who is at least 18 years of age and 
   knowledgeable about the household.  

Remember to show your identification card for each
personal visit interview. When you know that you are
speaking to a household member at the sample address,
then you can introduce the survey.  

ALWAYS complete the household respondent's interview
before interviewing any remaining eligible household
members (household members who are 12 years of age 
and older).  Without a completed interview from an 
eligible household respondent, the sample household 
will classify as a Type A noninterview. (See Part
A, Chapter 6, for more details about noninterviews.)

After you have identified an
eligible household respondent,
follow these steps to interview
him/her:

Step
1  Introduce yourself and the survey, showing your
   identification card for each personal visit 
   interview.

2  Ask or update Control Card Items 6b through 25a 
   and Item 25c for the sample household.
  
3  On the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire,
   transcribe the sample, control number, and 
   household number from the Control Card onto 
   the top of the cover page. Then, fill Items 
   1 through 4 on the cover page.  You will 
   complete most of the remaining items on the 
   NCVS-1 cover page after the entire household
   has been interviewed (follow the instructions on 
   the NCVS-1 for the remaining items).

4  On page 2 of the NCVS-1, complete Items 17 through
   19 (transcribe information onto Items 20 through 
   28 after leaving the household). Then, enter the
   interview date in Item 29. Next, ask and complete 
   the mobility questions in Item 33, and the questions 
   about businesses operated from the sample address 
   in Items 34 and 35. 

5  On pages 3 through 10 of the NCVS-1, ask and
   complete the screen questions (Items 36 through 
   46)with the household respondent.

6  On page 10 of the NCVS-1, complete Check Item G.

7  Complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for 
   each crime incident reported by the household respondent 
   in the screen questions. The only exception to this rule 
   would be a series crime. (See Part C, Chapter 3, for 
   more details about series crimes.)

8  After completing all required NCVS-2's for the
   household respondent, go back to page 11 on the
   NCVS-1 and complete Check Item H through Check
   Item I.

9  Enter or update the interview date in Item 25b 
   on the Control Card.  Also, ask or update Items 
   26 through 28.

10 Review all the forms that you just completed with 
   the household respondent (NCVS-500, NCVS-1, and, 
   if required, any NCVS-2s).

Make sure that:

*  You asked the household respondent all appropriate 
   questions on each of these forms.

*  You not only asked but also marked each screen question 
   accurately on the NCVS-1.

*  You completed an NCVS-2 for each incident reported by 
   the household respondent.

11 Close the interview and thank the household respondent. 
   If there are other household members present who are 
   at least 12 years of age, ask to interview one of them 
   next.

Interviewing Individual Respondents

You must complete the household respondent's interview before 
you can interview any other eligible household members. Once 
you are done interviewing the household respondent, then 
complete any remaining eligible household member's interviews 
one at a time.  

During your initial contact with a sample household, always 
try to complete as many interviews with individual respondents 
as possible. Try to keep household callbacks for individual 
respondents to a minimum.

Your initial contact with a first enumeration period
household must be in person. However, after interviewing 
the household respondent in person, any individual 
respondents in the household who are unavailable during 
your initial contact can be interviewed later by telephone. 
(See Part A, Chapter 5, for more details about telephone 
interviews.)

Once you have completed the household respondent's interview, 
follow these steps to interview each individual respondent:

Step
1  Start by introducing yourself and the survey.

2  Identify the respondent and type of interview 
   by completing Items 17 through 19 on the NCVS-1
   (transcribe information onto Items 20 through 28
   after leaving the household)and enter the 
   interview date in Item 29. (See pages 11, 16, 
   and 21 on the NCVS-1.)

3  Ask the mobility questions in Item 33 on the   
   NCVS-1. (See pages 12, 18, and 24 on the     
   NCVS-1.)

4  Ask the screen questions for the individual 
   respondent (Items 36 through 45) on the
   NCVS-1.   

5  Complete a separate NCVS-2 for each incident
   reported in the individual respondent's screen
   questions.

6  After completing all required NCVS-2s for an
   individual respondent, enter or update the 
   interview date in Item 25b on the NCVS-500.

7  Review all the forms that you just completed 
   with the respondent (NCVS-1 and, if required, 
   any NCVS-2s). This review is important because 
   it can lessen the number of callbacks to the
   household for missing information. 

As you review completed forms, make sure that you:

*  Asked the respondent all appropriate questions
   on the NCVS-1 and marked each screen question 
   accurately.

*  Completed a separate NCVS-2 for each incident
   reported by the respondent.

8  Closed the interview and thanked the respondent.  
   If there are other household members present who 
   are at least 12 years of age, ask to interview 
   one of them next. If the remaining eligible 
   household members are unavailable, ask for the
   best time to callback and interview the rest of 
   the household.  Use Item 30g on the NCVS-500 to 
   enter notes about callbacks (dates, times, etc.). 

Part A, Chapter 4

Chapter 4
Your Job Duties and Performance Standards

Table of Topics

Topic

1  Basic Field Duties       

2  Additional Duties                            

3  Performance Standards                        

4  Field Evaluations--Observation and Reinterview

Topic 1.  Basic Field Duties

Overview

As a field representative for the National Crime Victimization 
Survey, you will be assigned to work in one of the NCVS 
sample areas or Primary Sampling Units (PSUs).  Most of your 
duties will be the same for each interview month. Your work 
will pretty much fall into two main categories--listing and 
interviewing.

Listing Assignments

During your first month on the job, you will not receive 
any listing assignments.  You will begin learning the 
listing and coverage procedures during your second month 
on the job. This training will consist of a series of self-
studies together with on-the-job training.  

In very general terms, your listing work will consist 
of systematically documenting on listing sheets the 
existence of living quarters where people live or 
could live within an assigned segment.  Detailed 
procedures for completing your listing assignments 
in each segment type are provided in the Listing and 
Coverage Manual, Form 11-8. Your listing assignments 
could be in all four segment types--Unit, Permit, 
Area, and Group Quarters.

Unit Segments

For single-unit addresses, no listing is necessary 
and you will not receive listing sheets for these 
addresses.

For multi-unit addresses, you will be verifying and 
updating the listing sheets for these assigned 
addresses when you are at the address to conduct 
interviews.  There are separate procedures for small 
multi-unit addresses (2 - 9 units) and large multi-
unit addresses (10 or more units). (See Chapter 2 of 
the Listing and Coverage Manual for more details on 
listing unit segment addresses.)

Permit Segments

When you make your first visit to an assigned address
within a permit segment, you will list all units found 
at the address.  There are separate procedures for 
listing a single-unit address and a multi-unit address.  
You could also be assigned a previously listed address 
to verify and, if necessary, correct before you conduct 
interviews at the address. (See Chapter 3 of the 
Listing and Coverage Manual for more details on listing 
permit segment addresses.)

Area Segments

Before any units are selected for interview from an 
area segment address, there are a variety of tasks 
that need to be completed.  These tasks include:  
precanvassing, canvassing and map entries, and listing 
units.  You could also be asked to update and record 
changes to area segment listings. (See Chapter 5 of 
the Listing and Coverage Manual for more details 
about listing area segment addresses.)

Group Quarters Segments

A group quarters is a type of living quarters where 
the residents share common facilities or receive 
authorized care or custody. There are three types of 
group quarters--institutional, noninstitutional, and 
military barracks.  Only noninstitutional group 
quarters units are eligible for interview.  By 
definition, a group quarters is not a housing unit. 

A group quarters segment is made up of one or more
group quarters that were identified in 1990 census 
blocks originally screened for unit segments.  In 
addition to listing group quarters in group quarters 
segments, you could also find and list group quarters 
units in area and unit segments.

Your listing assignment tasks in a group quarters 
segment could include:  identifying eligible units, 
choosing listing methods, and listing units in group 
quarters.  You could also be asked to update a 
previously listed group quarters listing sheet. (See 
Chapter 4 of the Listing and Coverage Manual for more 
details about listing group quarters.) 

Interviewing Assignments

Each interview month, your interviews will be a combination 
of personal visit and telephone interviews and could include 
addresses from any of the four segment types. Regardless of 
the interview method, always conduct your interviews with 
discretion and courtesy.  These two traits are especially 
important in gaining a respondent's confidence and 
continued cooperation.

Your basic interviewing duties include:

*  Filling or updating Control Cards (NCVS-500) for 
   new, returning, replacement, and noninterview 
   households.

*  Filling the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) 
   for the household respondent and each remaining 
   household member who is at least 12 years of age.  
   For households with more than four members, you 
   will also fill an NCVS-1A for each additional 
   household member.

*  Filling a Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2) for 
   each incident reported in the Basic Screen 
   Questionnaire.

*  Completing a Noninterview Record (NCVS-7) for 
   each sample address that you are not able to 
   interview during the interview period, such as 
   refusals, vacant units, demolished units, and 
   so forth. (See Part A, Chapter 6, for more 
   details about noninterviews.)

Topic 2.  Additional Duties

Be Flexible

Due to the nature of interviewing work, you need to 
be ready to work both day and evening hours to reach 
sample households.  Some of your respondents may be 
hard to reach, so you will need to contact sample 
households at various times of day and on various days 
of the week. If you are not flexible with your work 
schedule, you will find it very difficult to complete 
all of your assigned interviews.

Keep Up to Date

It is important to read carefully and try to absorb 
all memos, self-studies, or other instructional 
materials concerning your NCVS work. From time-to-
time, our sponsor may decide to add survey questions 
or reword existing questions. Other times, you may 
receive instructions on how to perform a specific 
task using new procedures. 

In order for you to understand the intent and usage 
of these changes, you must read and understand all 
instructions that you receive.  When you receive any 
NCVS instructions or self-studies, keep in mind that 
they are intended to help you do your job better and 
more efficiently.

Do Not Procrastinate

Arrange your work schedule for each interview month 
so that you can complete the majority of your cases 
as soon as possible after your assignment begins. If 
you delay most of your interviewing until later in 
the interview period, you run the risk of not 
completing your assignment by your closeout date.  
Remember that most sample households will require
more than one contact to complete interviews for
all eligible household members.

Make Several Transmittals

It is very important that you return your completed 
NCVS work on a flow basis to your regional office.  
Whenever possible, send your completed work every 
workday.  By sending frequent shipments of completed 
work, you will enable your supervisor to correct 
problems quickly and allow all other related 
processes to run more smoothly.

Keep Accurate Records

Accurate administrative records are important for both 
you and your supervisor.  Make sure that each workday 
you record:

*  The amount of time you spent on NCVS work, 

*  The current status of your assignment, and

*  The number of miles you traveled for NCVS
   interviewing.

Meet Expected Standards

Your main goal for your work on the NCVS is to strive 
for the highest possible degree of accuracy and 
efficiency.  To aid you in meeting and maintaining 
this goal, the Census Bureau has developed performance 
standards by which your supervisor can rate your 
performance.  (See Topic 3 of this chapter for more 
details about performance standards.)

Additional Reading

If you are interested in reading additional general
information about your interviewing job, refer to 
Chapter 1 of the Administrative Handbook for 
Intermittent and Part-Time Schedule A Employees, 
Form 11-55.

Topic 3.  Performance Standards

Overview

The success of the NCVS is dependent on accurate and complete 
information.  We count on you, our field representatives, to 
help us succeed in this effort. This survey operates on a 
fixed budget and the only way we can conduct the NCVS on 
schedule and within budget is with your cooperation. We 
depend on you to complete your work accurately and 
efficiently.

Performance Ratings

We hope that you will always strive for the highest 
level of quality and productivity in your NCVS work.  
We also realize that a new field representative 
cannot be expected to start out with an "outstanding" 
performance rating. However, we do expect you to do 
your best and to improve as you gain more interviewing 
experience.

To help you meet and maintain high performance standards,
we have established measures for various elements of 
your job. Your supervisor will evaluate your performance 
on a continuing basis and will keep monthly records on 
your level of performance.

Twice a year, your supervisor will rate your response 
and accuracy rates into one of two categories: Pass 
or Fail.

Production Standards

The importance of completing your assignment within the
specified interview period is not only important from 
a cost standpoint, but is also essential for meeting 
our processing deadlines. With the exception of 
holidays, always begin your assignment on the first 
working day of the month. Try to complete as quickly 
as possible all interviews assigned for an interview 
month. Schedule your work so that your assignment is 
completed before the closeout date for the interview 
month.

Planning Your Travel Route

Plan your travel route so you can accomplish your 
NCVS work and move from one segment to another 
using the least amount of time and mileage.

Keeping Callbacks to a Minimum

Try to plan your personal visits during the most 
productive hours of the day and days of the week, 
so you can find household members at home and reduce 
the number of return visits to a sample address.  
Evening hours and weekends tend to be most productive 
in areas where a majority of the household members 
work outside the home.

Always remember to make the least number of trips 
to a sample area as possible to complete your 
assignment.  If you need to make personal visit 
callbacks in a sample area where you still have some 
initial visits, try to complete these interviews in 
one trip.  Also, if no one is at home at the time of 
your visit, attempt to find out the best time to 
contact the household before you leave the sample 
area.  You can inquire of neighbors, apartment 
managers, janitors, and the like, but you cannot 
mention the survey name to these people.

Conducting Efficient Interviews

Here are some pointers for saving time without 
sacrificing accuracy:

*  Become thoroughly familiar with the sequence of
   items on the Control Card and NCVS questionnaires.

*  Make sure you understand how to enter answers on
   each NCVS form.

*  Familiarize yourself with the possible answer
   categories on each NCVS form.

*  Be prepared to answer respondents' questions 
   briefly and clearly, regardless of the type of 
   question.  To help you prepare for respondent 
   questions, you can read the introductory letters, 
   your job aid, NCVS At a Glance (NCVS-500.1), the 
   NCVS Fact Sheet (NCVS-110), and this manual 
  (NCVS-550).

Quality Interviews

Your supervisor considers the quality of your work 
to be just as important as your productivity. It will 
be of no value to this survey if you transmit your 
entire assignment early in the interview period, but 
most of the returned forms are either incomplete or 
inaccurate.

The instructions provided in this manual provide 
all the information you will need to conduct NCVS 
interviews efficiently and accurately. If you 
experience special situations or problems that are 
not covered in this manual, either call your 
supervisor or document the situation or problem on 
an Interviewer Communication (INTER-COMM), Form 
11-36.

Accuracy Rate

Your supervisor will periodically provide you with a 
report showing interviewing errors that were detected 
as your completed work was reviewed. Besides documenting 
your errors, this report will also give you advice on 
how you can avoid or eliminate similar errors in the 
future.

Strive to become thoroughly familiar with all NCVS
procedures and to conduct your interviews in a 
uniform and consistent manner. If you achieve these 
goals, you will eliminate most interviewing errors.

Response Rate

For each interview month, your supervisor will calculate 
the response rate for your NCVS interviewing assignment. 
Your response rate takes into consideration how many 
interviews you were able to complete from all eligible 
sample addresses assigned to you (excluding Type B and C 
noninterviews). By reviewing your response rate, you and 
your supervisor can track how effective you are at 
obtaining interviews.  

Maintaining a high response rate is essential to ensuring 
that our NCVS sample data are representative of the entire 
U.S. population.  Failure to interview all eligible household 
members can introduce a serious bias into the survey.  For 
example, sample persons who are difficult to contact or who 
resist being interviewed could have very different victimization 
experiences than those sample persons who are easy to contact 
and interview.

You need to keep to a minimum all Type A noninterview
households and Type Z noninterview persons.  

When you are assigned a sample household that is eligible for 
interview and you are unable to interview ANY household members 
(including the household respondent), the case is classified 
as a Type A noninterview. Some Type A noninterview reasons 
include:  

*  No one home,

*  Temporarily absent through the entire interview 
   period, and

*  Refused.

An eligible household member is classified as a Type Z 
noninterview when the household member cannot be
interviewed during the current interview period. Never
classify a household respondent for a sample address 
as a Type Z noninterview.  When you are not able to
complete an interview with a household respondent, 
you must classify the sample address as a Type A 
noninterview. 

Some of the Type Z noninterview reasons include:

*  Person is never available,

*  Person refused,

*  Person is physically and/or mentally unable to 
   answer and no proxy respondent is available, 
   and

*  Person is temporarily absent and no proxy 
   respondent is available.

The best strategy for minimizing Type A and Type Z
noninterviews is to:

*  Work on improving your salesmanship skills so you
   are better equipped to gain cooperation from all 
   types of respondents and

*  Contact respondents when you are most likely to 
   reach them at home.

(See Part A, Chapter 6, for techniques on reducing
noninterviews.)

Topic 4.  Field Evaluations--Observations and Reinterview

Observations

In addition to the review of your work in the regional 
office, your supervisor or his/her representative will 
periodically observe you actually performing your 
listing and interviewing work.

The first two on-the-job or induction observations are 
for the purpose of providing post-classroom training 
during actual work situations on interviewing 
techniques and NCVS concepts.  Both of these 
observations are usually done within your first 6 
months on the job.

All other observations are aimed at evaluating and
improving your on-the-job performance.  Normally, you 
will be observed at least once a year and you will 
probably be with the observer for a minimum of 6 
hours.  This is the average length of time required 
for reviewing your general performance and rectifying 
specific performance problems.

Keep in mind that observations are the best opportunities 
for you to receive individual assistance with any problems 
you are experiencing. Observations are designed to help 
you improve all measures of performance.

Prior to your observation, the observer will contact 
you to make the final arrangements and give you any 
pre-observation instructions. These instructions may 
vary depending on the purpose of the observation.

For a Low Response Rate

If one of the purposes for the observation is to help 
you improve a low response rate, you will probably be 
instructed to:

*  Delay interviewing households where you suspect 
   that you might experience problems and 

*  Keep interviewing materials for problem households
   that you have already contacted. 

This will allow the observer to work with you on these 
cases and help you improve your techniques for gaining the 
cooperation of sample households.

For a Low Accuracy Rate

If one of the purposes for the observation is to help 
you improve a low accuracy rate, you will probably be 
instructed to carefully edit and retain your previous 
day's work. This will allow the observer to show you 
ways to reduce the number of interviewing errors.

For a High Number of Minutes per Case

If one of the purposes for the observation is to help 
you spend less time on each case, you will probably 
want to be prepared to discuss how you:

*  Plan your itinerary,

*  Use the county and segment maps to locate assigned 
   addresses,

*  Use the telephone, and

*  Decide when to contact assigned households.

Reinterview

Reinterview is a method we use to independently evaluate 
your on-the-job performance. At least once a year and 
possibly up to four times a year, your supervisor or his/
her representative will redo a portion of your assignment 
for the interview month.  You will not be notified 
beforehand as to which month's assignment is targeted for 
reinterview.

The reinterviewer will recontact some of the same households 
that you have already contacted.  The reinterview answers 
will be compared against the original answers that you 
recorded, differences will be identified, and reasons for 
the differences will be determined.  

The reinterviewer will verify that:

*  The correct sample units were interviewed,

*  The listing sheets were completed or updated 
   properly,

*  The Control Cards were completed or updated
   properly,

*  All screen questions on the NCVS-1 were asked 
   and all answers recorded,

*  The appropriate number of NCVS-2s were completed
   for each reported incident, and

*  Any noninterviews were classified accurately.

Once the reinterview is completed, the reinterviewer will 
contact you so both of you can review the results together. 
During this review, errors will be discussed and the 
appropriate concepts and procedures will be reviewed. In 
some cases the extent and type of errors will require a 
"special needs" observation and/or retraining.

Part A, Chapter 5

Chapter 5
Personal Visit vs. Telephone Interviews

Table of Topics

Topic                          

1  Identifying the Method of Interview                           

2  Qualifications for Using the Personal Visit Method                          

3  Qualifications for Using the Telephone Method                            

4  Instructions for Conducting Telephone Interviews                            

5  Telephone Interviewing Skills

Topic 1.  Identifying the Method of Interview

Checking Control Cards

Each interview month, some of your interviews will be 
designated as personal visit interviews and some will 
be designated as telephone interviews.  Your regional 
office will separate the Control Cards for your 
assignment and place a card on top of each stack to 
identify which ones require personal visit interviews 
and which ones require telephone interviews.  Keep these 
two stacks separate until you have completed all cases 
in the telephone interviews stack.

Depending on your assignment area (PSU), you could
receive a third stack of Control Cards with a card 
on top identifying the stack as "CATI Hold" sample 
addresses. You will only interview a sample address 
from this stack if your supervisor asks you to do 
so, because the CATI facility was unable to get a 
completed interview.

Your regional office will also indicate on your assignment 
control sheet (Form 11-35) which sample addresses in your 
assignment are designated for:

*  Personal visit interviews,

*  Telephone interviews, and

*  "CATI Hold" sample addresses.

Notify your supervisor immediately if you have any questions 
about whether or not the sample addresses in a particular 
segment need to be interviewed by personal visit or by 
telephone.

Topic 2.  Qualifications for Using the Personal 
          Visit Method

Overview

Since telephone interviews are more cost effective, most of 
your NCVS interviews will be by telephone.  The following 
qualifications must exist before you can conduct an NCVS 
interview in person:

*  The sample household is assigned for a first
   enumeration period interview.

*  The sample household has not been interviewed in 
   any previous enumeration period (sample address 
   was a Type A or B noninterview previously or a 
   replacement household now lives at the sample 
   address). 

*  The sample household does not have a telephone 
   on which they can be reached.

*  The sample household does not want to be interviewed
   by telephone.

First Enumeration Period
Households

For the first enumeration period, a sample household will 
always be scheduled for a personal visit interview.  When 
using the personal visit method, try to complete interviews 
for the household respondent and all other eligible household 
members during your initial visit. If the household respondent 
refuses to do the interview in person, you can take a telephone 
interview for the initial visit. However, try to avoid this 
situation whenever possible.  

Only the household respondent's interview must be done in 
person for a personal visit interview.  Any other eligible 
household members who are not available during your initial 
visit, can be interviewed by telephone.

Checking the Control Card

By reviewing the Control Card for a sample address, you can 
tell whether a sample address needs to be interviewed by 
personal visit. For a first enumeration period household, 
most of the Control Card items will be blank.  Items 1

through 6a will always have entries shown and Item 5 
(letter sent) will only have the first enumeration 
box marked.

Household Not Interviewed in 
Previous Enumeration Periods

Regardless of the enumeration period, your first contact 
with a sample household must be in person. After the first 
enumeration period for a sample address, a sample household 
may not have been interviewed because:

*  The sample household was classified as either a Type 
   A or a Type B noninterview in all previous enumeration 
   periods.

*  The sample household is not the same household as
   was interviewed in the previous enumeration period. 
   The new household at the sample address is referred 
   to as a "replacement" household.

If you discover that a replacement household is now 
living at the sample address, you must:

*  Complete a new Control Card (NCVS-500) for the
   replacement household,

*  Staple the new Control Card for the replacement
   household to the original Control Card, and 

*  Interview the household respondent in person,
   along with any remaining household members who
   are eligible for interview and available at the 
   time of your visit. Any callbacks for individual
   respondents can be done by telephone.

Checking the Control Card

If you look at Item 30f on the Control Card, you can 
see whether or not the sample household was a 
noninterview in the previous enumeration period.  You 
can also discover why the household was a noninterview 
by checking the noninterview reason listed for the code 
entered in Item 30f. If a sample household has been a 
noninterview in all of the previous enumeration periods, 
then you will need to use the personal visit method for 
the current interview period.

No Telephone Available

If you should find that a sample household in your 
telephone interview stack does not have a telephone, 
you need to conduct the interview in person. To 
conduct a telephone interview, the sample household 
must have a telephone at home or elsewhere on which 
all eligible household members can be contacted.

Checking the Control Card

Look at Control Card Items 26a, 26b, and 26c to verify 
that the household has a telephone on which all eligible 
household members can be interviewed and that at least 
one telephone number is listed.

Telephone Interview Not Acceptable

If you should find that a sample household in your telephone 
interview stack does not want to be interviewed by telephone, 
then you must conduct personal visit interviews for the 
household.

Checking the Control Card

Look at Control Card Item 26d to verify that the "Yes" 
answer box is marked. If the "No" answer box is marked 
in Item 26d, then you must conduct interviews for this 
household in person.

Special Situations Requiring 
Personal Visit Interviews

Some special situations can require cases that would
normally be interviewed by telephone to require 
personal visit interviews. These situations include:

Entire Sample Household Refuses a Telephone Interview

*  In some cases, you could encounter a sample
   household in which all household members refuse 
   to be interviewed by telephone. Instead of 
   classifying the household as a Type A noninterview, 
   you must attempt to conduct these interviews in 
   person.

Household Member Unable to Complete a Telephone 
Interview

*  In a single-person sample household, the household
   member is either too hard-of-hearing or is mentally
   and/or physically unable to complete the interview 
   by telephone. Attempt to conduct the interview in 
   person and explain the reason for the personal visit 
   on the questionnaire.

An EXTRA Unit Is Found

*  When an EXTRA unit is discovered during a telephone 
   interview, interview the household at the EXTRA unit 
   in person and explain the reason for the personal 
   visit on the questionnaire. 

(Chapter 7 of the Listing and Coverage Manual,
Form 11-8, provides details about EXTRA units.)

Incorrect Telephone Number

*  If you discover that the telephone number listed on 
   the Control Card is incorrect, verify whether or not 
   you have reached the sample address. If you have not
   reached the sample address, try to get the correct
   telephone number from directory assistance, the
   operator, and so forth.  If you cannot get a good
   telephone number for the sample address, then you
   will need to make a personal visit and explain the
   reason for the personal visit on the questionnaire.

No One Answers

*  If you have tried several times to reach a sample
   household by telephone and were unsuccessful, you
   must:

*  Verify the accuracy of the telephone number
   either in a local telephone directory or with 
   directory assistance.

*  Telephone the contact person if one is listed in
   Item 33 on the Control Card. If you can reach this
   contact person, try to find out why you have been
   unable to reach the sample household by
   telephone.

*  As a last resort, you will need to make a personal 
   visit to the sample address and explain briefly the
   reason for the personal visit at the top of page 2 
   on the NCVS-1(above the Household Respondent's
   Personal Characteristics banner).

You Get a Recorded Message

*  If you get a recorded message saying that the
   telephone number has been changed, you need to call
   the new telephone number (if given)and make sure
   that you have reached the sample address before
   starting the interview(s). Make sure to enter the 
   new telephone number in Control Card Item 26c and 
   line through the incorrect number.

   If the recorded message says that the telephone 
   number is disconnected or has changed and a new 
   number is not provided, try to find a new number 
   from a local directory or directory assistance.

   As a last resort, you will need to visit the sample
   address and explain briefly the reason for the 
   personal visit at the top of page 2 on the NCVS-1 
   (above the Household Respondent's Personal 
   Characteristics banner).

CATI Recycled Cases

*  If you receive any "CATI Hold" Control Cards in your
   assignment, your supervisor may instruct you to
   interview one or more of these "CATI Hold" cases
   during the interview period.  We refer to these 
   sample addresses as "recycled" cases, because the 
   CATI facility was unable to interview them.  When 
   your supervisor instructs you to interview a recycled 
   case, interview the sample address by personal visit.

Topic 3.  Qualifications for Using the Telephone Method

Overview

You will be conducting most of your assigned interviews 
for second through seventh enumeration period households 
by telephone. The following qualifications must exist 
before you can conduct an NCVS interview by telephone: 

*  The sample household was assigned for a personal
   visit interview in a previous enumeration period and 
   at least the household respondent was interviewed in
   person in a previous enumeration period.  Refer to
   Control Card Items 25b and 30 for this information.

   The sample household must have a telephone on which
   all eligible household members can be interviewed. 
   Refer to Control Card Items 26a, 26b, and 26c for 
   this information.

   The sample household must be willing to be
   interviewed by telephone.  Refer to Control Card   
   Item 26d for this information.

Once a sample household is assigned for a telephone
interview and there is no special situation requiring a
personal visit, then you would interview all eligible
household members by telephone for the current and all
future enumeration periods.

Household's First Time in Sample 

As covered in Topic 2 of this chapter, only the household
respondent's interview must be completed in person when a
household first enters the NCVS sample (regardless of the
enumeration period). Once the household respondent's
interview is completed in person, any callbacks for other
household members can be conducted by telephone. This
will help us lower our interviewing costs.

Type Z Noninterviews

If a sample household is designated for a telephone
interview and an eligible respondent, other than the
household respondent, refuses to be interviewed, 
classify the respondent as a Type Z noninterview. Do 
not make a personal visit in an attempt to convert a 
refusal for an individual respondent. (See Part A, 
Chapter 6, for instructions on classifying a respondent 
as a Type Z noninterview.)

Type A Noninterviews Require a 
Personal Visit

If either the household respondent or the entire 
household refuses to be interviewed during a telephone 
interview, then you are required to make a personal 
visit to conduct the interviews.  

Never classify a sample household as a Type A 
noninterview following a telephone interview.  You 
must attempt to convert the refusal in person before 
classifying a household as a Type A noninterview.

Topic 4.  Instructions for Conducting Telephone 
          Interviews

Timing of Interviews

Always start your assignment with the cases in your
telephone interview stack, and get started as soon as 
possible once the interview month begins. It is possible 
that you will discover cases in the telephone interview 
stack that require you to make a personal visit to an 
assigned segment (as covered in Topic 2 of this chapter).  
By working through your telephone interview work first, 
you can keep to a minimum the number of trips to a 
segment area and help us save money by reducing travel 
costs.

Because of these possible personal visits, it is 
extremely important that you attempt to complete 
all telephone interviews in a segment within the 
first few days of the interview period.

As you plan your itinerary for your personal visit 
cases, make sure to include any telephone interview 
cases that now require personal visits. Strive to 
make the least number of trips as possible into 
a segment area to complete your assignment. 

Whenever you discover that a case scheduled for 
telephone interviewing needs to be interviewed in 
person, explain briefly the reason for the personal 
visit at the top of page 2 on the NCVS-1 (above the 
Household Respondent's Personal Characteristics 
banner).

Starting the Interview

When you are ready to start a telephone interview, 
look at Control Card Items 26a through 26f. By 
reviewing these items, you will be prepared for 
situations where:

*  The telephone number provided in Item 26c will 
   ring somewhere other than the sample household's
   residence. Item 26b will give you this information.

*  You are unable to contact the household on the 
   first telephone number listed in Item 26c, but 
   a second telephone number is also entered in 
   Item 26c.

*  The sample household does not want to be interviewed
   by telephone. Item 26d will give you this information.

*  The sample household indicated the best time to 
   call or visit them and/or when they do not wish 
   to be contacted. Item 26e will give you this 
   information.

*  The sample household indicated that they do not 
   want to be contacted on a Sunday. Item 26f will 
   give you this information.

By reviewing these Control Card items before dialing 
the telephone number, you will be more likely to reach 
the household and less likely to bother them at an 
inconvenient or unwanted time.

Ask for Previous Household 
Respondent

After dialing the telephone number listed in Control 
Card Item 26c and someone answers, start by identifying 
yourself and asking to speak to the household respondent 
from the previous enumeration period. If that person 
is not available, then make sure that you have reached 
the correct sample address.  

Once you know that you have reached the correct sample
address and are speaking to a household member, you 
can continue with your introduction. You don't want 
to describe the NCVS to someone who is not a sample 
household member.

Then ask to speak with a household member who is at 
least 18 years of age and knowledgeable about the 
household, preferably one of the owners or renters 
of the home. This person will be your household 
respondent for current interview.

A Typical Introduction

The following introduction will give you an idea of 
what you need to say when you introduce yourself and 
the NCVS:

"Hello, I'm (your name) from the United States Census
Bureau." (After reaching a sample household member,
continue with...) "The Census Bureau is conducting a
survey here and throughout the Nation to determine how
often people are victims of crimes.  We last contacted 
this address six months ago." 

When conducting a telephone interview, it isn't 
necessary for you to ask if the household received 
our introductory letter.

Explaining the Purpose of 
the NCVS

Some respondents may want to ask some questions about
the NCVS before agreeing to answer the survey questions. 
You need to be prepared to answer their questions briefly 
and accurately.

The following sources provide answers to some of the more 
commonly asked questions from respondents:

*  Page 2 of the Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554,

*  The job aid, NCVS At a Glance, NCVS-550.1, and

*  Part A, Chapter 2, Topic 5, of this manual,        
   NCVS-550. 

Mentioning the Introductory Letter

It is not necessary for you to mention or ask about 
the introductory letter during a telephone interview.  

However, you should have one with you in case a respondent 
has a question about it. If you were conducting the 
interview in person, you would ask if the respondent 
received a copy of the introductory letter and hand him/
her a copy if it was not received in the mail.

Identifying Yourself

Unlike a personal visit interview, you are not able to 
show any formal identification to a respondent over the 
telephone. If you identify yourself, your agency, the survey, 
and your purpose for calling, most respondents will believe 
you and agree to be interviewed. For those respondents who 
seriously doubt what you tell them, suggest that they call 
your regional office's (1-800) number (if available) or call 
collect to confirm who you are and why you are calling 
them.

Explaining the Purpose of a Telephone Interview

Some respondents may want to know why you are calling
them instead of coming to their home for the interview.  
If this happens, just explain that telephone interviews 
help us to reduce our survey expenses.  Therefore, as 
a cost saving measure, we attempt to conduct most 
interviews by telephone if the household has indicated 
to us in a prior interview that a telephone interview 
is acceptable.

Verifying the Accuracy of Your 
Contact

Keep in mind that for the NCVS we are following the
sample address and not a specific household. In other
words, if a household moves out of a sample address
between enumeration periods, you would no longer 
interview that household.  You would interview the 
current residents at the sample address.

If you call the telephone number on the Control Card 
and reach the same household from the previous 
enumeration period, don't assume that you have reached 
the sample address. It is possible that the household 
could be using the same telephone number at their new 
address.

Always verify that the household is still living at 
the address listed in Control Card Item 6a. If you 
are given an address that doesn't identify an exact 
unit or is slightly different from the address listed 
on the Control Card, ask the respondent if the 
household has moved since their last interview.

If the household has moved out of the sample address 
and continues to use the same telephone number, thank 
the respondent for their cooperation and explain that 
you do not need to interview his/her household, since 
they no longer live at the sample address for this 
survey.

Anytime you discover that a new or replacement household
is currently living at the sample address, you are 
required to complete a new Control Card and conduct the 
interviews with the replacement household by personal 
visit for the current enumeration period.

Selecting a Household Respondent

Once you are sure that you have reached the sample 
address and the same household from the previous 
enumeration period, you need to speak to the household 
member who will be the "household respondent." Because 
of the type of information this person needs to 
provide both for the Control Card (NCVS-500) and the 
Basic Screen Questionnaire(NCVS-1), you need to select 
a household member who is at least 18 years of age and 
knowledgeable about the household.

Listed below is the order of preference for selecting 
a household respondent:

First   Ask for the household respondent from the
        previous enumeration period.

Second  Ask for one of the persons who owns or rents 
        the home.

Third   Ask for a household member who is at least     
        18 years of age and knowledgeable about the
        household.

Using the Information Card Booklet

Control Card Items 23, 24, and 28 instruct you to show a 
flashcard to the respondent for personal visit interviews. 
When several answer categories are listed for an item, it 
is much easier for a respondent to read the flashcard and 
select the correct answer.  Obviously, these items must be 
handled differently during a telephone interview.

Spanish Origin, Item 23

Since your telephone interview cases will be sample addresses 
that have been interviewed in a previous enumeration period, 
you will only ask item 23 for any NEW household members that 
you add for the current enumeration period.

If the respondent hesitates to answer once you have asked 
the question in Item 23, then turn to page 6 in your 
Information Card Booklet and ask the respondent if the added 
person's ethnic origin is one of the following origins...
(then read the origins listed on page 6). 

Race, Item 24

For your telephone interviews, only ask the race question 
for any NEW household members for the current enumeration 
period. If the respondent does not give you the NEW household 
member's race(s) after you ask the question for Item 24, 
then read the race categories listed with the race codes in 
the top, right corner of the Control Card.

Household Income, Item 28

If you are conducting a telephone interview for a third, 
fifth, or seventh enumeration period household, you will 
need to update Item 28 with the household respondent. 
Follow these steps:

Step 1 - Rephrase the question in Item 28 so that you
         ask, "What was the total combined income of 
         all members of this household during the past     
         12 months?"

Step 2 - If necessary, explain to the respondent that you
         need to identify the broad income range that best
         fits the total combined income during the past  
         12 months for all household members who are 
         14 years of age or older. 

         Exclude the income of any household member
         who left the household and is not a household
         member at the time of the interview.  If the
         respondent seems confused about which
         household member's income to include, then read
         the list of current household members who are
         over 14 years of age by looking at Control Card
         Items 13a and 17. 

Step 3 - If the respondent gives too broad of an income
         range, then probe by reading the answer
         categories from the Control Card that are within
         the broad range. 

Step 4 - If the respondent has trouble giving you an
         amount or a income range, then probe by reading
         the answer category marked on the Control Card,
         along with the answer categories just above and
         below it.

Marking the Type of Interview 
(Item 18 on the NCVS-1)

As you complete the Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1,
for each eligible household member, mark the correct
answer category for Item 18 to show whether the 
interview was conducted in person or by telephone, as 
well as showing whether the interview was a self-response 
interview or a proxy interview.  

If you are unable to interview an eligible household 
member (other than the household respondent), you would 
mark Box 5, "Noninterview (Type Z)" in Item 18 to show 
that the person is a Type Z noninterview. A Type Z 
noninterview also requires you to complete Item 14 on 
the cover page of the NCVS-1 either during or after the 
interview.

Topic 5.  Telephone Interviewing Skills

Overview

Every interviewing situation is unique and should be 
treated as such. Do not allow a difficult interview or 
a sharp refusal to shake your confidence or affect 
subsequent interviews.  It is important that you begin 
each interview as if it were your first interview of 
the workday.  Try to keep a businesslike attitude and 
a positive frame of mind at all times.          

Successful telephone communication is dependent on 
how the respondent perceives you based on your vocal
expression.  Your language usage, grammar, voice quality,
rate of speech, and enunciation are all key elements 
in creating a favorable impression over the telephone.

General Rules

When you conduct a telephone interview, you want to sound
professional.  You can accomplish this if you are easy to
understand and always try to sound confident, polite, and
businesslike.  Listed below are some general rules that 
can help you to promote a professional image.

Clarity

Avoid talking to respondents with anything in your mouth--
no mints, gum, and so forth.  Always speak directly into 
the mouthpiece and guard against placing the mouthpiece 
at chin level.  Instead of raising your voice when a 
respondent is having difficulty hearing or understanding 
you, first ensure that you are holding the mouthpiece 
between your nose and your lower lip. This will improve 
the quality of the transmission and allow you to speak 
in your normal tone of voice.

Enunciation

Pronounce your words carefully and never mumble. This is
so important because the English language is full of 
similar sounds, such as the letters "T" and "D," and "P," 
"B," and "V."  Careful enunciation will not only save 
you from repeating what you just said, but will also 
help you avoid misunderstandings.

Courtesy

Courtesy is tremendously important during a telephone
interview.  Whenever a respondent tries your patience, 
try to remain calm and do not allow him/her to hear any
impatience or frustration in your voice.  The best way 
to achieve this goal is to never take anything a 
respondent says personally. Avoid letting your emotions 
push you into saying anything that may upset or excite 
a respondent.  

Also, as a courtesy to the respondent, explain why you 
are pausing between questions. The respondent may be 
more patient and willing to wait if he/she knows that 
you are pausing to write down pertinent facts about an 
incident.  Remember that your job is to conduct complete 
and accurate interviews in a "professional" manner.

Rate of Speech

Find a rate of speech that is comfortable for you and 
the majority of your respondents. The average rate of 
speech is 120 words per minute.  Keep in mind that if 
you speak too rapidly your words tend to run together, 
and if you speak too slowly the respondent may still 
have difficultly understanding what you say.

Pitch and Inflection

Speak in a moderate pitch and avoid talking in a monotone 
voice.  When reading questions, it is especially helpful to 
use a rising inflection towards the end of a question. If 
you put a "smile" in your voice and avoid sounding like a 
robot, you are more likely to keep your respondent's 
interest.

Use a Brief Introduction

Avoid using lengthy introductions.  Keep them brief 
and to the point and begin interviewing as soon as 
possible.

Start Fresh

Do not let your emotions from a "tough" interview or 
a refusal carryover into the next interview. Each 
respondent deserves a fresh start and the best that 
you have to give them. You can not allow "tough" 
interviews and refusals to shake your confidence.

No Rushing

Do not rush respondents or make them feel that they  
are taking too long to answer your questions. We want 
our respondents to relax and take their time, so they 
can remember all the pertinent facts about an incident.                
If respondents feel as though you are rushing them, 
they may purposely leave out information.

Ending the Interview

As you finish interviewing each eligible respondent in 
a sample household, thank him/her and ask to speak to 
the next respondent. When the time comes to end the 
telephone call, always let the respondent hang up first. 
This technique tends to give the respondent a feeling 
of control over the situation.

Listening Skills

It takes much more than just asking questions to be a 
good interviewer. Listening attentively to your respondent 
is just as important for conducting a successful interview.  
Listed below are some listening techniques which all 
interviewers need to practice:

*  Limit your own talking so that the respondent has
   ample time to explain incidents. Remember that it 
   is very difficult to talk and listen well at the 
   same time.

*  When you do not understand something said or you
   feel that you may have missed a point, always 
   attempt to get a clear understanding of the 
   situation. Sometimes repeating what the respondent 
   said in your own words may help to straighten out 
   the misunderstanding.  Keep in mind that telephone
   interviews may require more probing than personal
   visit interviews.

*  Make an effort not to interrupt a respondent before
   he/she is finished replying.  A long pause does not
   always indicate that the respondent is done answering
   your question.  Never rush a respondent when he/she
   needs more time to recall specific facts.

*  Life is full of distractions, but you have to learn 
   to shut them out while conducting interviews.  
   Concentrate on focusing your mind on what each 
   respondent is telling you.

*  The occasional use of interjections like "Yes" or "I
   see" will reassure the respondent that you are paying
   attention to what he/she is saying.  Be especially
   careful to use neutral comments that will not bias the
   interview in any way.  Avoid saying things like "That's
   good" or "That's too bad."

*  Listen attentively and objectively.  Do not allow a
   respondent's words to irritate you or a respondent's
   harsh manner to distract you from your professional
   manner.

*  Avoid jumping to conclusions or assuming that a
   respondent will say something before they actually
   finish explaining the incident. Be patient and let 
   the respondent finish his/her thought. You do not 
   want to lead the respondent and possibly bias the 
   interview.

Telephone Techniques

Every interviewing situation is unique and should be 
treated as such. It is important that you adapt to 
each new respondent. You can not let your reactions 
to one interview carryover and affect the next 
interview.  

Here are some basic techniques you can follow to aid 
you in conducting your telephone interviews:

*  Select a good working space

   Select a "quiet" place where you can conduct your
   telephone interviews without distractions and in
   privacy.  Also, make sure that you have adequate 
   space and light for your work.

*  Be prepared
   
   Before you begin a telephone interview, make sure 
   that you have all the materials you may need within 
   your arms reach.  Make sure that you have adequate
   supplies of paper, pens, pencils, and forms, together
   with this manual and any job aids. If you need to 
   leave the telephone for some unexpected reason, always
   excuse yourself politely and never let the respondent
   wait more than a minute. If your telephone has a "call
   waiting" feature, disconnect the "call waiting" feature
   before you start any telephone interviews.

*  Learn from your mistakes
   
   Whenever possible, try to evaluate your performance
   for each interview.  See if you can improve your
   technique in any area of the interview process.  In
   other words, try to improve your technique with each
   new interview and do not continue making the same
   mistakes over and over.

*  Learn from your success
   When you feel that an interview went especially well, 
   try to evaluate why it went so well. Perhaps your
   telephone manner made the difference because you
   were able to maintain your confidence and project a
   pleasant and businesslike attitude. Concentrate on 
   the positive aspects of the successful interview and
   continue to improve your technique.

Always represent the Census Bureau with pride!

Part A, Chapter 6

Chapter 6
Noninterviews

Table of Topics

Topic

1 Overview of Noninterview Types and Procedures

2 Type A Noninterview Categories

3 Type B Noninterview Categories

4 Type C Noninterview Categories

5 Control Card Entries for Noninterviews

6 Type Z Noninterview Persons

Topic 1.  Overview of Noninterview Types and Procedures

Noninterview Cases

When you are assigned an NCVS case and cannot get a completed 
interview, you will need to classify the case into one of 
three noninterview categories. These categories are identified 
as Type A, Type B, and Type C.

A sample address will be classified as a noninterview if:

*  The living quarters is occupied but you are not able to
get any completed interviews.

*  The living quarters is occupied by persons who are not
eligible respondents for the NCVS.

*  The living quarters is vacant.

*  The living quarters is not eligible for sample because 
it is no longer used as a residence, it no longer exists, 
or it does not qualify based on the current listing and
coverage rules.

Noninterview Categories

Each of the three noninterview categories, Type A, B, and
C, has its own set of reasons why assigned  cases cannot 
be interviewed.

Type A-- Some sample households consist of persons who are 
eligible for interview, but none of these persons can be 
interviewed for a specific reason. These cases will classify 
as Type A noninterviews. The Type A noninterview reasons for 
the NCVS are:

No one home
Temporarily absent
Refused
Other occupied (Use this Type A reason for occupied sample 
units that you cannot reach due to impassable roads; for 
sample households that you cannot interview due to serious 
illness or death in the household; or for sample units that 
you are unable to locate.)

Type B -- A sample address could be vacant or occupied 
entirely by persons who have a usual residence elsewhere.  
Although these cases are not eligible for interview during 
the current interview period, they could become eligible 
at a later time. These cases will classify as a Type B 
noninterview. The Type B noninterview reasons for the 
NCVS are:

Vacant - regular
Vacant - storage of household furniture
Temporarily occupied by persons with usual residence elsewhere 
(URE)
Unfit or to be demolished
Under construction, not ready
Converted to temporary business or storage
Unoccupied site for mobile home, trailer, or tent
Permit granted, construction not started
Other (Only use this Type B reason if none of the other
Type B reasons are appropriate for the situation.)   

Type C -  Some situations can require a sample address to be
permanently removed from the NCVS sample. These cases will 
classify as a Type C noninterview. The Type C noninterview 
reasons for the NCVS are:

Unused line of listing sheet
Demolished
House or trailer moved
Outside segment
Converted to permanent business or storage
Merged
Condemned
Built after April 1, 1990
Permit abandoned
Other (Only use this Type C reason when none of the other 
reasons are appropriate for the situation.)

Documenting Noninterviews

Each time that you classify a sample household as a 
noninterview you need to document the noninterview on 
the:

Control Card (NCVS-500)

Noninterview Record (NCVS-7)

INTER-COMM (Form 11-36)

Control Card

See Topic 5 of this chapter for detailed instructions on
which entries need to be made on the Control Card for each
sample address that you classify as a noninterview.

Noninterview Record

When you classify an NCVS case as a noninterview, you need 
to complete a Noninterview Record, NCVS-7, to provide details 
about the case and why it cannot be interviewed.  Do not 
complete a Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, for any sample 
address that you classify as a noninterview.

Since the NCVS-7 is a single-page form, make sure to staple
the completed NCVS-7 to the Control Card for the sample
address before mailing it back to the regional office.

Completing the NCVS-7:
Start by transcribing the case identification information 
from the Control Card onto the appropriate blocks at the 
top, left corner of the form. This information includes the 
sample number, control number (PSU, segment, check digit, 
and serial number), and household number. If the noninterview
is for an EXTRA unit discovered during the current interview 
period, you need to enter some type of unit identification 
in place of the serial number. You could enter the reference 
person's name or some type of physical description of the 
EXTRA unit.

Item 1  Enter your FR code and name.

Item 2  If the noninterview is classified as a Type A or B, 
transcribe the information from Control Card Item 9 onto 
Item 2 of the NCVS-7.

Item 3  If the noninterview is classified as a Type A
or B, transcribe the information from Control Card Item 
10 onto Item 3 of the NCVS-7.

Item 4  If the noninterview is classified as a Type A
or B, transcribe the information from Control Card Item 
11c or 11d onto Item 4 of the NCVS-7. Make sure to also 
transcribe any descriptions that are shown on the Control 
Card for answer Boxes 7 or 12.

Item 5  Enter in Item 5 the last date on which you contacted 
or attempted to contact someone about the case.  Enter the 
date using 2-digits for the month and day, and 4-digits for 
the year (e.g., 01/02/2003).

Item 6  Type A Reasons:
Use Boxes 1 through 4 to indicate the reason for the Type 
A noninterview.  These reasons are described in detail in 
Topic 2 of this chapter.  

If you mark Box 2, Temporarily absent, make sure to enter 
the date that the household is expected to return to the 
sample address.  If you mark Box 4, Other occupied, make 
sure to enter an accurate and acceptable reason for
classifying the sample address as a  Type A noninterview 
on the "Specify" line below Box 4. Only use Box 4 if you 
are sure that the reason does not fit into one of the 
other three Type A reasons. After marking the Type A 
reason, continue with Item 7.

Type B Reasons:
Use answer Boxes 10 through 18 of Item 6 to indicate the 
reason for the Type B noninterview. These reasons are 
described in detail in Topic 3 of this chapter.

Only mark Box 18, Other, when the reason does not fit 
any of the other Type B reasons. Also make sure that 
you enter an accurate and acceptable reason for 
classifying the sample address as a Type B noninterview 
on the "Specify" line below Box 18.

Type C Reasons:
Use Boxes 20 through 29 of Item 6 to indicate the reason 
for the Type C noninterview. These reasons are described 
in detail in Topic 4 of this chapter.

Only mark Box 29, Other, when the reason does not fit 
any of the other Type C reasons. Also make sure that 
you enter an accurate and acceptable reason for 
classifying the sample address as a Type C noninterview.

Items 7, ONLY COMPLETE THESE FOUR
8, 9,    ITEMS FOR TYPE A 
and 10   NONINTERVIEWS.
                     
When filling Item 7 (Race) for a household that was 
interviewed in a previous enumeration period, use the 
household respondent's race(s) from Control Card Item 
24. If the household respondent chose more than one 
race, mark all that apply. Mark Box 3, Other, for any 
races marked other than White and Black, such as
American Indian, Asian, Native Hawaiian, or Other.  

If Control Card Item 24 is blank, then leave Item 7 blank, 
too.  While you must always try to obtain each household 
member's race, you cannot fill race by observation, probing, 
or asking a neighbor.  NEVER mark Item 7 for a Type B or C 
noninterview.

When filling Item 8 (Public Housing), use the answer marked 
in Control Card Item 8c.

When filling Item 9 (Manager Verification of Public Housing), 
use the answer marked in Control Card Item 8d.

When filling Item 10 (American Indian Reservation or 
American Indian Lands), use the answer marked in Control 
Card Item 8e.

INTER-COMMs

In addition to completing the NCVS-7 for each noninterview
case, you also need to fill out an INTER-COMM explaining
the situation to your supervisor.  Attach the completed
INTER-COMM to the completed NCVS-7 and return these forms 
along with the case's Control Card.

Topic 2.  Type A Noninterview Categories

Overview

Since Type A noninterviews mean the loss of  valuable
information, it is essential to keep Type A noninterviews 
to a minimum. If we fail to get NCVS data from sample 
households, the data we do collect may not be 
representative of the U.S. population.

It is not always possible to avoid Type A noninterviews, 
but there are ways to keep them at a minimum. Some of 
these ways include:

*  Establishing good relations with your respondents,

*  Contacting sample households when they are most likely
to be at home, and

*  Conducting the interview in a positive and professional
manner.

The following reasons can cause a sample unit to be 
classified as a Type A noninterview:

*  After making repeated contacts during the interview
period, you are never able to reach anyone at home.

*  All members of the sample household are temporarily
away from home during the entire interview period.

*  The sample household refuses to allow any interviews.

*  An occupied sample unit cannot be interviewed due to
impassable roads.

*  The sample household cannot be interviewed during the
interview period because of a serious illness or a 
death in the family.

*  You are not able to locate the sample unit.

Before you classify a telephone interview case as a Type 
A noninterview, you must attempt to make contact and 
interview the household in person.  Also make sure that 
you call your regional office before sending in a Type A 
noninterview.

Procedures for "No One Home"

Before you can classify a sample household as "No One Home," 
you must make several attempts to contact the household and 
verify that they are only gone for a short while and plan 
to return during the interview period. If the household is 
away from home and isn't expected to return before your 
closeout date, do not use the "No one home" reason.  

For personal visit interviews:
If no one is home at the time of your first visit for the
interview period, check with neighbors or anyone else who
may know when the household is expected to return home. 
Remember, do not mention the survey name when making
any inquiries.  Listed below is a suggested way of 
making inquiries:

"Hello, I am (your name) from the United States Census
Bureau. Here is my identification (show ID). I am trying
to contact someone at (sample address), but no one is at
home.  Do you know when it is likely that someone would
be there?"  

Listed below are the procedures to follow when you discover 
that the household is expected to return home sometime 
within the interview period:

Fill out a Request for Appointment (Form 11-38 or 11-38A) 
indicating when you plan to return. For identification 
purposes, enter the case's control number and your name 
and telephone number on the form.

Use Control Card Item 30g to enter the callback date
and time for your return visit.

Note: Another alternative is to leave your business card
at the sample address with a preprinted peel off sticker 
attached to it saying:

------------------------------------------------
                  IMPORTANT
Please call me at the number on the attached card.  
I am required to contact an adult household 
member and I am obligated to return until contact 
has been made. 

U.S. Census Bureau Field Representative      
------------------------------------------------

*  If it is not practical to use a Request for Appointment
form, try to determine the best time to contact the household 
and then make a return visit at that time.

*  If all of these efforts fail, then classify the case as a
Type A noninterview, No one home, as described in Topic 1 of 
this chapter.

Procedures for "Temporarily Absent"

For personal visit interviews:
When you make your first visit to a sample address for an
interview month and find that no one is home, try to determine 
from neighbors or anyone else who may know how long the 
household may be gone.

Before classifying a case as a Type A noninterview,
Temporarily Absent, all of the following conditions must
exist:

All household members are temporarily away and not expected 
to return home until the current closeout date has passed.  
They might be on vacation, a business trip, caring for 
sick relatives, or some other similar reason.

All of the household's personal belongings are still in 
the sample unit. In other words, the sample household has 
not moved their personal belongings to another location. 
This is especially important if you see a "For Sale" or 
"For Rent" sign on the property.

The sample unit is not a summer cottage or a unit used 
only for vacation purposes. In other words, the sample 
unit is the primary residence for the sample household.

Once you determine that the case qualifies as a Type A
Noninterview, Temporarily Absent, take the following
actions:

*  Using Control Card Item 30g, enter the date when the
sample household is expected to return to the sample
address.

*  Using Control Card Item 33, enter the name, address,
and telephone number of the person who provided the
information about the household.

*  If there is any possibility that the household will return
before your closeout date, attempt to interview the household 
prior to your closeout date when feasible.  

*  If there is any possibility that the household will return
before the office closeout date, follow the "Telephone Hold" 
procedures covered later in Topic 2 of this chapter. Do not 
use the "Telephone Hold" procedures when the household is 
expected to return before your closeout date.

*  When you know that the household definitely will not
return before either closeout dates, complete a Noninterview 
Record (NCVS-7) according to the instructions in Topic 1 
of this chapter. Make sure that you enter the "Return date" 
when filling Item 6 on the NCVS-7.

Procedures for "Refused"

Although our response rates are high, you may occasionally
experience households who refuse to be interviewed.  When
you encounter such households, impress upon them that the
information they can provide is valuable and the survey
results will benefit their household and their community. 
Make every reasonable effort to obtain cooperation from
each sample household assigned to you. 

Despite all your efforts, a sample household may still 
refuse to answer the survey questions or may insist that 
an interview is not necessary since their household had no
changes or crimes to report for the past 6 months. You are
still required to complete and/or update the appropriate
Control Card items and to complete the NCVS-1 interviews
with a household respondent and all remaining eligible
household members.

When you are unable to change the way a household feels
about participating in the NCVS and they just refuse to
cooperate, follow these procedures:

For personal visit interviews:

Your supervisor may instruct you to notify her/him by
telephone and explain the refusal situation. If your
supervisor will be in the sample area on other business,
she/he could visit the refusal household and try to
change their minds.

When all efforts to convert a refusal are unsuccessful,
complete a Noninterview Record (NCVS-7) as described in 
Topic 1 of this chapter.  

After completing an NCVS-7, complete an INTER-COMM 
(Form 11-36) explaining the situation and what actions 
were taken to gain the household's cooperation.

As soon as your office becomes aware of a refusal
household, they will mail a letter to the household
requesting their cooperation and letting them know that 
you will contact them again.  The office will also send 
you a copy of this letter.

If your office notifies you that a refusal household is
considered a "confirmed" refusal, you will no longer attempt
to interview the refusal household.  For future enumeration
periods, you will just verify with neighbors or other
knowledgeable sources whether or not the same household
is still living in the sample unit.  

If the confirmed refusal household is still living at the
sample unit, you would:

*  Enter the month and year of your visit (e.g., 8/03) in
Item 30b on the Control Card.

*  Enter the noninterview type and reason code A-03 in
Control Card Item 30f. The noninterview types, along
with their reason codes, are listed on the Control Card
following Item 33.

*  In the "Notes" space on the Control Card, enter "Confirmed 
refusal household - Do not attempt to interview household."

*  Complete a Noninterview Record (NCVS-7)as described in 
Topic 1 of this chapter.

If you discover that a new household has moved into the
sample unit, you would visit and interview the new or
"replacement" household.

Group Quarters Refusals

Some of your NCVS assignments could include sample units 
within group quarters, such as hotels, boarding houses,
and so forth.  If either the manager or owner of a group
quarters refuses to allow you to interview persons residing
in sample units within the group quarters, notify your
supervisor immediately.  Based on the situation, your
supervisor will provide you with specific instructions.

Procedures for "Other Occupied"

Most of your Type A noninterviews will fall under one of
the three reasons already mentioned--No one home, Temporarily 
absent, and Refused.  However, you could encounter other 
situations that will force you to classify an eligible 
and occupied sample unit as a Type A noninterview.

For example, the following situations could justify 
classifying a case as a Type A noninterview, Other
occupied: 

A family member died very recently.

The sample household has been quarantined.

The sample household lives in a gated and/or guarded community 
and you cannot gain access to the sample address.  Notify your 
supervisor immediately and he/she will provide you with specific 
instructions.

A storm or other natural disaster prevents you from getting to 
sample addresses in your assignment. In recent years, weather-
related interviewing problems, such as floods, mud slides, 
earthquakes, fires, and heavy snow, have become more prevalent.  
If you encounter these problems, try to identify which sample
addresses are occupied and which sample addresses are vacant.

For previously interviewed households: 
Determine occupancy based on the unit's status during the last 
enumeration period, unless a knowledgeable person tells you 
otherwise.

For first time households:
If a sample unit is assigned to you for the first enumeration 
period, try to discover the occupancy status from neighbors, 
local merchants, postal workers, county recorder of deeds, 
or other local government officials. Never mention the 
survey name when talking to persons who are not household 
members at the sample address.

More than two of the household respondent's screen
questions are left unanswered because the household
respondent refused to answer them and you are unable
to interview another eligible household member as the
household respondent.

Telephone Hold Procedures

Each regional office may use slightly different procedures
for telephone hold cases.  In this manual, we will provide
you with the general procedures.  Your program supervisor
will provide you with specific instructions.

Telephone hold procedures were initiated to allow you to
meet your closeout date for each month, and still give you
some additional time to complete "hard-to-interview" cases
that could result in Type A noninterviews.

Listed below are the general steps to follow for a telephone
hold case:

Step
1 Prepare a duplicate or "dummy" Control Card for the
telephone hold case including all the information that
you will need to transcribe onto the NCVS-1 for the
case.  Write the word "HOLD" in the "Notes" space on
the "dummy" Control Card.  Keep the "dummy" Control Card 
in the event you are able to interview the sample household 
before the "telephone hold" closeout date.

2 Prepare the cover page of an NCVS-1 questionnaire
with the following information:

Enter the sample, control number, and household number.

Fill Items 1 and 2.

Write the word "HOLD" at the top of the page.

Keep this NCVS-1 in case you are able to conduct the 
interview before the "telephone hold" closeout date.

Step
3 Prepare an NCVS-7 as described in Topic 1 of this chapter 
and attach a note to it identifying the case as a "telephone 
hold."  Make sure that you return these forms no later than 
the last shipment before your "original" closeout date.  
Make sure to place the NCVS-7 and the current Control Card 
for the case on top of the shipment.

4 Continue your attempts to get interviews for your
telephone hold cases.  If you can complete a telephone
hold case, call in the information to your office for the
NCVS-1, the Control Card, and any NCVS-2s. If your
office doesn't hear from you, they will assume that the
case needs to be classified as a Type A noninterview. 
Do not attempt to get interviews for telephone hold
cases after this closeout date.

5 By the 25th day of the interview month, destroy any
"dummy" Control Cards or questionnaires you are
holding for telephone hold cases.  Make sure to tear
these "dummy" forms before disposing of them so that
you do not violate a respondent's confidentiality.

Topic 3.  Type B Noninterview Categories

Overview

Type B noninterviews include cases which you cannot
interview during a specific interview period because they
are either:

*  Unoccupied or 

*  Temporarily occupied by persons who are ineligible
for interview because they have a usual residence
elsewhere (URE). 

Any case that you classify as a Type B noninterview could
become eligible for interview in a later enumeration period.

The following reasons can cause a sample unit to be
classified as a Type B noninterview:

Vacant, regular

Vacant, storage of household furniture

Temporarily occupied by persons with a usual residence 
elsewhere (URE)

Unfit or to be demolished

Under construction, not ready

Converted to temporary business or storage

Unoccupied site for a mobile home, trailer, or tent

Permit granted, construction not started

Other Type B

Procedures for "Vacant, Regular"

The majority of the unoccupied units that you discover will
probably classify as "Vacant, regular." If you discover that
a sample address is unoccupied and the following conditions 
exist, you can classify the unit as a Type B
noninterview, Vacant, regular:

The unit is vacant and the occupants have permanently left 
the unit.

The unit is for sale or rent.

The unit is being held off the sales market.

The unit is seasonally closed (e.g., a vacation home).

A dilapidated unit that is still considered a living
quarters, such as a housing unit that is very run down,
in need of many repairs, and still occupied as a living
quarters.  Do not include unoccupied units that are
condemned, unfit for human habitation, awaiting
demolition or being demolished.

A vacant living quarters such as a mobile home, tent,
or a similar structure.

A group quarters unit that may be vacant in transient
quarters, boarding houses, or rooming houses.

Special Situations

You may discover a vacant sample unit that is in the
process of being converted to make more units or merged
to make fewer units. Classify the unoccupied units created
by the conversion or merger as Type B noninterviews,
Vacant, regular, if:

*  The conversion or merger has progressed to the stage
where you can identify the converted or merged units
as they will be when completed, or 

*  A responsible person can tell you how the units will
be when completed.

Otherwise, classify the original sample unit as a Type B
noninterview, Vacant, regular.

The same procedures used for conversions and mergers also
apply to sample units that are undergoing repairs or
alterations.

Procedures for "Vacant, Storage of 
Household Furniture" 

Only use this Type B noninterview reason when an unoccupied 
sample unit is used solely for the storage of excess 
furniture.  This is not the same as a vacant unit that
is fully furnished and awaiting a potential renter or owner. 
For a vacant, furnished unit that is waiting to be rented 
or sold, you would use the "Vacant, regular" Type B 
noninterview reason. 

Procedures for "Temporarily Occupied 
by Persons With a URE"

If an entire household is staying at a sample unit
temporarily (e.g., on vacation) and the household has a
usual residence elsewhere, they are not eligible household
members and you must not interview them. If you discover
this situation, classify the unit as a Type B noninterview,
Temporarily occupied by persons with a URE.

Procedures for "Unfit or to
be Demolished"

Consider an unoccupied sample unit as unfit for human
habitation if the unit is no longer protected from the
elements because the roof, walls, windows, or doors are
either damaged or missing.  This may have been caused by
vandalism, fire, or deterioration from neglect and age.

If you see the following conditions, the unit will probably
need to be classified as "Unfit or to be demolished":

Windows are broken

Doors are either missing or swinging open

Parts of the roof or walls are missing or destroyed leaving 
holes in the unit's structure

Part of the structure has been blown or washed away

Part of the structure has collapsed or is missing.

Do not use this Type B noninterview reason for the
following two situations:

*  When doors and windows are boarded up to keep
them from becoming destroyed by vandalism or bad
weather.

*  When doors and windows are not intended to be used
in a structure, such as in some rural sections of the
country.

Also use the "Unfit or to be demolished" reason for vacant
sample units that you can verify as being scheduled for
demolition.  You must see positive evidence such as a
demolition sign, notice, or mark on the sample unit or 
the building that houses the sample unit.

Procedures for "Under Construction, 
Not Ready"

This Type B noninterview reason is intended for sample
units that are in the process of being newly constructed 
and are not yet ready for occupancy because the following
items have not been installed:

*  Exterior windows and doors and

*  Usable floors.

Once the newly constructed sample unit is ready for
occupancy, but is still vacant, classify it as a Type B
noninterview, Vacant, regular.

Procedures for "Converted to Temporary 
Business or Storage"

Use this Type B noninterview reason when a sample unit
that is intended as a living quarters is used instead for 
the temporary storage of commercial or business supplies,
machinery or other products related to a business.  If you
can determine that the storage of these business supplies 
is permanent, then the sample unit needs to be classified 
as a Type C noninterview, not a Type B noninterview.

Do not use "Converted to temporary business or storage," 
if you discover that the vacant unit is intended for the 
storage of business supplies in the future, but not at 
the time of your visit.

Remember that there is a separate Type B noninterview
reason for a sample unit that is vacant and used solely 
to store household furniture.  Do not use "Converted to
temporary business or storage" when it is household
furniture that is being stored in the vacant unit.

Procedures for "Unoccupied Site for
Mobile Home, Trailer, or Tent

Although mobile homes, trailers, tents, boats, cars, buses,
caves, and so forth are not located within a typical building
structure, they can still be considered housing units if 
they meet our housing unit definition. (See page 7-4 in the
Listing and Coverage Manual, Form 11-8.) If the sample unit 
is listed by its site identification rather than an address,
and you find that the site is vacant, classify the sample 
unit as a Type B noninterview, Unoccupied site for a mobile
home, trailer, or tent.

Procedures for "Permit Granted, 
Construction Not Started"

There may be instances when you are assigned a sample 
unit in a permit segment and discover that the construction
permit has been issued, but construction has not yet 
started. When this occurs, classify the sample unit as 
a Type B noninterview, Permit granted, construction not 
started.

Procedures for "Type B,
Other"

Most of your Type B noninterviews will fall under one of
the reasons already mentioned.  If you discover a rare
situation that is not covered in any of the Type B
noninterview reasons, use the Type B, Other, reason.

Topic 4.  Type C Noninterview Categories

Overview

Type C noninterviews are sample units that are ineligible
for the NCVS sample and need to be removed permanently
from the sample.  Many Type C noninterviews occur because 
of changes that happen between the time a unit is listed 
and the time the unit is assigned for interview.

Type C noninterview reasons include:

Unused line of listing sheet

Demolished

House or trailer moved

Outside segment

Converted to permanent business or storage

Merged

Condemned

Built after April 1, 1990

Permit abandoned

Type C, Other

Procedures for "Unused Line of 
Listing Sheet"

When working with listing sheets in Unit, Permit, and
Group Quarters Segments, you may discover as you list
units or verify listings that a multi-unit structure has 
fewer units than expected. If you are assigned a sample 
unit for interview and find out that the assigned case 
is actually an unused line on the listing sheet, classify 
the case as a Type C noninterview, Unused line of listing 
sheet. (See the appropriate chapters in your Listing and 
Coverage manual, Form 11-8, for more details about the 
use of listing sheets.)

Procedures for "Demolished"

You could be assigned a sample unit and then discover that
it no longer exists because it was demolished or is in the
process of being demolished. If this happens, classify 
the case as a Type C noninterview, Demolished.

Do not classify an unoccupied unit as a Type C noninterview, 
Demolished, when the unit is scheduled to be demolished, but 
demolition work has not yet begun. Classify the unit as a 
Type B noninterview, Unfit or to be demolished, when 
demolition work has not yet begun.

Procedures for "House or
Trailer Moved"

It is possible that a sample unit could have been moved
from its site after it was listed.  This is more likely to
happen when the unit is a mobile home or trailer, but it
could also be a house.  If this happens and the unit is 
listed by its street address, not its site identification, 
then classify the unit as a Type C noninterview, House or 
trailer moved.

Procedures for "Outside
Segment"

Use this Type C noninterview reason when the original
listing for an area segment is incorrect and, at the time 
of interview, you discover that the unit is physically 
located outside of the area segment boundaries.

Procedures for "Converted to 
Permanent Business or Storage"

Use this Type C noninterview reason when a sample unit
has been converted permanently from living quarters to
storage space for a business. The unit may be used to 
store such items as farm products, machinery, lumber, 
business supplies, and so forth.

Procedures for "Merged"

Merged units occur when two or more apartment units or
two single family homes combine to form one new unit. 
Instructions for when to classify a sample unit as a 
Type C noninterview, Merged, can vary depending on the 
situation and segment type.  Detailed instructions for 
merged units are provided starting on page 7-23 of the 
Listing and Coverage Manual, Form 11-8.

Procedures for "Condemned"

Before you can use this Type C noninterview reason, 
the sample unit must be unoccupied and there must be 
positive

evidence that the unit is condemned, such as a sign, 
notice, or mark on the unit or on the building that 
houses the unit. 

Do not use the Condemned reason for a Type C
noninterview if:

You see a "condemned" sign, but the unit is occupied. 
If the occupants qualify as eligible household members, 
try to conduct interviews at the sample unit and ignore 
the "condemned" sign.

The sample unit is vacant, but you can't find any positive 
evidence that the unit is "condemned." If the unit is 
vacant and unfit for human habitation, classify it as a 
Type B noninterview, Unfit or to be demolished.  

Be careful not to classify a sample unit as a Type C
noninterview when it should be a Type B noninterview. 
This type of mistake can remove a unit permanently
from the survey's sample.

Procedures for "Built After
April 1, 1990"

When you are working in an Area Segment, your office
will mark Item 7a on the Control Card so that you know
whether or not to ask about the year the sample unit was
built.  If the "Ask first month" box is marked in Item 
7a, you will ask the household respondent during the first
enumeration period interview whether the original structure
was built before or after April 1, 1990.

If the household respondent tells you that the sample 
unit was built "After 4-1-90," you will:

*  Mark the "After 4-1-90" answer box in Item 7a, 

*  If the Box (3) is marked for Item 7b, ask the question
for Box (3) to determine whether or not there is any
other building (occupied or vacant) on the property
that is or could be used as a living quarters.  A "Yes"
answer will also require you to complete Table X on
the reverse side of the Control Card.  After following
the instructions in Table X, end the interview and
classify the sample unit as a Type C noninterview,
Built after April 1, 1990.

*  If you are not required to complete Item 7b, end the
interview and classify the sample unit as a Type C
noninterview, Built after April 1, 1990.

Procedures for "Permit Abandoned"

At times, you may find from the builder or the permit 
office that the builder abandoned the building permit 
and never built the structure for a sample unit. If this 
happens and the permit will never be used, classify the 
case as a Type C noninterview, Permit abandoned.

Procedures for "Type C, Other"

Most of your Type C noninterviews will fall under one of
the reasons already mentioned. If you discover a rare
situation that is not covered in any of the Type C
noninterview reasons already mentioned, use the Type C,
Other, reason.

Topic 5.  Control Card Entries for Noninterviews

Entries for All Noninterview Cases

Any time you classify an assigned case as a  noninterview,
regardless of whether it's a Type A, B, or C, you need to
make the following Control Card entries:

Item
6a Make sure that the address for the sample unit is
entered correctly.

30b Enter the interview month and year (e.g., 10/03).

30d &
30e Enter tally marks in Item 30d to indicate the number 
of personal visits you made before classifying the case 
as a noninterview. If your visits were before 5 p.m., 
enter your tally marks in Column (B). If your visits were 
after 5 p.m., enter your tally marks in Column (A). Since 
you cannot classify a case as a noninterview without
making at least one personal visit, you should have at 
least one tally mark in Item 30d.

Enter tally marks in the appropriate column (B and/or A) 
of Item 30e to indicate the number of telephone calls 
that you made before and/or after 5 p.m.

30f Enter the appropriate noninterview type and reason 
code(e.g., B-17).  All noninterview types, reason codes, 
and descriptions are shown on the Control Card following 
Item 33.

30h If the case is a CATI recycle, mark the "Yes" box and 
enter the CATI code provided by your regional office next 
to the "Yes" box.

33 When appropriate, enter the name, address, and telephone 
number for the contact person with whom you spoke to verify 
information about the noninterview case.

Entries for Type A Noninterviews

In addition to the Control Card entries required for all
noninterview types, you also need to make the following
entries for a Type A noninterview:

Item
7a If the case is in an Area Segment and the "Ask 1st
mo." box is marked in Item 7a, check to see if an
answer box is marked.  If not, ask the question in
Item 7a and mark the appropriate answer box.  If
necessary, ask a neighbor, apartment manager, janitor, 
etc.

7b Normally, this item would be asked during the first
enumeration period for specific types of units.  If a
Type A noninterview happens during the first enumeration 
period in an Area Segment and Box (1), (2), and/or (3) 
is marked, then you need to ask the marked questions the 
next time you are able to interview the household. If you 
find that the unit is vacant in a subsequent enumeration 
period, ask the marked questions of a knowledgeable person 
at that time.

8e Normally, this item would be asked during the first
enumeration period. If a Type A noninterview happens 
during the first enumeration period, mark Item 8e by 
observation or ask a knowledgeable person when unsure.

9 If your office has not already filled Item 9, mark the
appropriate answer box and follow the instructions
printed after each answer.

10  Normally, Item 10 is asked during the first enumeration 
period for specific types of units. If a Type A noninterview 
happens during the first enumeration period in a rural area 
and the Control Card instructions tell you to ask Item 10 
(farm sales), ask this question the first time you are able 
to get an interview.  If you find that the unit is vacant
in a subsequent enumeration period, ask the question in 
Item 10 of a knowledgeable person at that time.

11 Fill if not already marked.

24 Fill only if provided by the household respondent.
Otherwise, leave the race information blank until you 
are able to interview the household.  Do not fill race 
by observation, probing, or by asking a neighbor.

Entries for Type B Noninterviews

In addition to the entries required for all noninterview
types, you need to complete Item 7a and Items 9 through 
11 following the same instructions provided above for 
Type A noninterviews.

Vacant Units

If you discover a vacant sample unit in an area segment
during the first enumeration period and one or more of 
the questions are marked in Item 7b, ask the marked 
questions of a knowledgeable person in the area.

Temporarily Occupied by
Persons With a URE

Some sample areas, such as beach resorts, will have units
that are occupied by URE households and turnover in these
areas will be unusually high.  We do not want you to
prepare a new Control Card in these areas each time an
entire URE household is replaced by another URE household 
in the sample unit. 

To save time in these situations, report new occupants at
these sample units on the Control Card as instructed below:

Item
3  Do not change the household number.

Item  
13 For all persons in the previous URE household, cross out 
each person's entries in Items 13a, 13b, and 13c.

Using the first available line in Item 13a, only enter
the reference person's name for the new URE household.  
Also, enter the new reference person's relationship code 
(11) in Item 13b and mark the "No" answer box in Item 
13c. It is not necessary to list any other URE household 
members on the Control Card.

25a For the previous URE household members, enter the 
reason code (25) and the month and year (e.g., 6/03) 
that you discovered the household composition change.

For the new URE household, enter the total number of 
household members and the month and year (e.g., 6/03) 
that you discovered the new URE household in the sample 
unit.  Make sure that the line number used in Item 25a 
for the new URE household matches the line number used 
in Item 13a for the new URE reference person.

Entries for Type C Noninterviews

In addition to the Control Card entries required for all
noninterview types, you also need to make the following
entry for Type C noninterviews:

Item
7b If the sample unit is in an Area Segment and you
classify the unit as a Type C noninterview in the
first enumeration period, check to see if Box (3) is 
marked. If it is, ask this question of a neighbor or
other knowledgeable person and then circle the
appropriate answer.

Topic 6.  Type Z Noninterview Persons

What Is a Type Z Noninterview?

You will classify an eligible household member as a Type
Z noninterview when you are unable to interview an
eligible household member and the household member is
not the household respondent.

Unlike Type A, B, and C noninterviews, a Type Z noninterview 
relates to an eligible household member (other than the 
household respondent) and does not relate to the entire 
sample household.  Another difference is that a personal 
visit is not required prior to classifying a person as a 
Type Z noninterview. 

However, if you are unable interview the household 
respondent, the entire sample household will classify as 
a Type A noninterview because:

*  You must interview the household respondent before
interviewing anyone else in the household AND

*  You cannot classify a household respondent as a 
Type Z noninterview person.

Minimizing Type Z Noninterviews

It is important to keep both Type A and Type Z noninterviews 
to a minimum, so that:

*  Your response rate does not suffer and 

*  The sample data you collect is truly representative of
the entire U.S. population.

Individuals who are difficult to find at home or who resist
being interviewed may have different victimization
experiences than persons who are readily available for
interviews.  Therefore, failure to get interviews from all
eligible household members could introduce a serious bias
into the survey results. 

Situations Causing Type Z
Noninterviews

There are several reasons why you might be unable to
interview one or more eligible household members in a
sample unit.  Some situations will be beyond your control,
while other situations can be overcome by improving your
salesmanship and contacting households when you are most
likely to reach household members.

Never Available (Code 1)

You may find that an individual respondent within a sample 
household is never available when you contact the household.  
If all of the following conditions are true, then you can 
classify an individual respondent as a Type Z noninterview:

You made repeated attempts to reach the individual
respondent.

You are sure that the individual respondent is not
temporarily absent. If the respondent is temporarily
absent, you would try to get a proxy interview
following the proxy interview procedures provided in
Part C, Chapter 1, of this manual.

You have a completed interview with the household respondent.

Refused (Code 2)

Even after you try to persuade a respondent to comply with
our survey, some individual respondents will still refuse 
to be interviewed.  You cannot take a proxy interview for
an eligible respondent who refuses to be interviewed. 
When an individual respondent refuses to be interviewed,
classify the person as a Type Z noninterview.

Also use Code 2, Refused:

Any time another person refuses to allow an interview
with an eligible household member, such as a household 
member refusing to let you interview his/her elderly 
parent or 14-year-old child.

An acceptable proxy respondent refuses to give an
interview for an eligible respondent who is unable to
respond for himself/herself due to a physical and/or
mental problem or due to being temporarily absent
from the sample address. 

Physically/Mentally Unable to 
Answer and No Proxy Available
(Code 3)

You are allowed to take proxy interviews for individual
respondents who are physically and/or mentally unable to
be interviewed during the entire interview period. 
"Physically/mentally unable to answer" means that the
household member must have health and/or mental illness
problems that are continuous throughout the entire
interview period.  If you are unable to find an eligible
proxy respondent for this person, classify the household
member as a Type Z noninterview and enter Code 3.

Temporarily Absent and
No Proxy Available
(Code 4)

If an individual respondent is temporarily away from home
and not expected to return before your closeout date, you
can take a proxy interview.  If you cannot find an eligible
proxy respondent for this person, classify the household
member as a Type Z noninterview and enter Code 4.

Other Type Z Situations (Code 5)

Use Code 5 when you are unable to interview an eligible
respondent (other than the household respondent) and the
situation does not fit Codes 1 through 4.  Here are some
examples:

Household member cannot speak English/no acceptable
interpreter--
Another situation you may encounter is a household
member who cannot speak English and an acceptable
interpreter is not available.  If this occurs, classify 
the person as a Type Z noninterview. Do not take a proxy
interview.

No acceptable proxy respondent available for a 12- or
13-year-old child--
If a 12- or 13-year-old household member is not allowed 
to answer for himself/herself and no acceptable proxy

respondent is available, classify the child as a Type 
Z noninterview and use Code 5. 

Blank screen questions for a household member (other
than the household respondent)--
Be careful not to leave Screen Questions 36c, 40c, 41c, 
42c, 43c, 44b, and 45b unanswered on the NCVS-1 
questionnaire.  This situation could cause an individual
respondent to be classified as a Type Z noninterview.

Insufficient number of NCVS-2s completed--
Make sure that you complete an NCVS-2, Crime Incident
Report, for each incident reported by a respondent.  Be 
sure to complete the correct number of NCVS-2s for an 
individual respondent. If any NCVS-2s are missing and we 
are unable to obtain the missing Crime Incident Reports, 
NCVS-2s, the individual respondent will be classified as 
a Type Z noninterview.

Entries on the Control Card

Item 25b on the Control Card is intended to show the most
current interview date for each eligible household member. 
However, if the person is a Type Z noninterview, leave the
"date of interview" space blank. If a previous interview
date is shown in Item 25b, erase it.

Item 25c on the Control Card is intended to show how long
each eligible household member has lived at the sample
address.  This question needs to be updated each enumeration 
period, even if the person is a Type Z noninterview. You 
will ask the household respondent this question for each 
eligible household member.

Entries on the NCVS-1, Basic Screen 
Questionnaire

When it becomes necessary to classify an individual
respondent as a Type Z noninterview, there are certain
items on the Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, to
which you need to pay particular attention.  These items
include 14a, 14b, and 17 through 28.

Items 14a and 14b

Use Items 14a and 14b on the cover page of the NCVS-1
to:

Identify by line number the household member who you are 
unable to interview (Item 14a).

Enter the appropriate reason code to explain why the person 
is a Type Z noninterview. The codes and descriptions are 
listed to the right of Item 14b.

Items 17 Through 28

Even though you are unable to complete an interview with
a Type Z person, you are still required to complete:

Item
17 With the individual respondent's first and last name.

18 By marking Box (5) to indicate that the person is a 
Type Z noninterview.

19 With the person's line number from Control Card Item 
13a.

20 - 28 With the person's personal characteristics from 
the Control Card.

Completing an INTER-COMM 
(Form 11-36)

Each time you classify an individual respondent as a Type 
Z noninterview, you must complete an INTER-COMM explaining 
the circumstances so that your supervisor has a clear 
picture of the situation.  Attach the completed INTER-COMM 
to the NCVS-1 before returning the case to the office.

Do Not Complete an NCVS-7

When you classify a person as a Type Z noninterview, do
not complete a Noninterview Record, NCVS-7.  The
Noninterview Record is only required for Type A, B, and 
C noninterview cases.

Part A, Chapter 7

Chapter 7
Interviewing Materials -
Descriptions and Receipt/Transmittal Instructions 

Table of Topics

1 Description of Materials

2 Materials Kept Month to Month

3 Materials Supplied Monthly

4 Checking and Acknowledging Receipt of Materials

5 Mailing Completed Work

Topic 1.  Description of Materials

Titles and Form Numbers

Listed below are the titles and form numbers of the forms
and questionnaires that you will use specifically for your
NCVS work:

*  Control Card, NCVS-500
*  Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1
*  Personal Characteristics, NCVS-1A
*  Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2
*  Noninterview Record, NCVS-7
*  Field Representative's Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554
*  NCVS At a Glance, NCVS-550.1
*  NCVS Fact Sheet, NCVS-110
*  NCVS Introductory Letters, NCVS-572(L) and NCVS-573(L)
*  NCVS Thank You Letters, NCVS-593(L) and NCVS-594(L)

There will be other materials that you will use in the course
of your work, but those materials are generic to most surveys, 
such as appointment slips, INTER-COMMs, and transmittal forms.

Control Card, NCVS-500

The Control Card is used as the basic record of each sample
unit. It contains the sample unit's control number and
address, as well as basic information about each household
member (e.g., names of each person living in the household,
age, race(s), sex, marital status, education, and so forth). 
Also shown is information about the entire household, such
as total household income, a record of crime incidents,
contacts with the household, and noninterviews.

Each interview month, your regional office will send you
Control Cards for all of your assigned cases.  The items 
that you will fill or update on each Control Card will vary
depending on the enumeration period for the sample unit. 
Detailed instructions for completing the Control Card are
covered in Part B, Chapter 1, of this manual.

Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1

The information that is collected for all sample households
on the Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, and the Crime
Incident Report, NCVS-2, is tabulated and later used as 
the basis for the annual criminal victimization reports.

You will complete an NCVS-1 for each sample unit that you
interview. This questionnaire consists of four parts which
you will either fill with the respondent during the 
interview or transcribe information onto after the 
interview.

NCVS-1 Cover Page (Items 1 Through 16)

You will complete most of the information on the NCVS-1
cover page after completing the interview. Most of the 
cover page items require you to transcribe information 
from Control Card items.  Instruction banners on the 
cover page will tell you when to fill each group of 
items.

The NCVS-1 cover page consists of identification 
information for the sample unit, together with information 
on type of living quarters, use of telephone, household 
income, whether the sample unit is located on an American 
Indian Reservation or American Indian Lands, possible proxy 
interviews, Type Z noninterviews, number of eligible and 
ineligible household members, number of crime incident 
reports filled, and changes in household composition. 

NCVS-1 Personal Characteristics 
(Items 17 Through 28)

Items 17 through 28 make up what we refer to as the NCVS-1 
personal characteristics. For the household respondent, 
these items appear on page 2. Since the NCVS-1 can be used 
for the household respondent and three additional respondents, 
Items 17 through 28 are also repeated on pages 12,18, and 
24. If a sample household has more than four eligible 
household members, you will use an NCVS-1A as the screen 
questionnaire for each additional household member who does 
not fit on the household's NCVS-1. 

Items 17 through 28 are mostly information that you will
transcribe from the Control Card.  You need to complete
these items for each household member who is at least      
12 years of age, even if the person is a Type Z noninterview. 

NCVS-1 Interview Date and Questions 
on Mobility and Business Operated 
from Sample Address (Items 29
Through 35)

Use Item 29 to enter the month, day, and year of the
household member's interview.  Use Item 33 to collect
information about the length of time the household member
has lived at the current address and the number of moves
made in the 5 years prior to the interview (if resided less
than 5 years at current address). Items 34 and 35 are asked
only of the household respondent to determine whether a
household member operates a recognizable or unrecognizable 
business from the sample address.

NCVS-1 Screen Questions (Items 36
Through 46 for the Household Respondent
and Items 36 and 40 Through 45 for
Individual Respondents)

Pages 3 through 10 of the NCVS-1 contain the screen questions 
for the household respondent. In addition to the screen 
questions asked of all eligible household members, you will 
ask the household respondent a few additional screen questions 
dealing with household crimes.  The household respondent's 
screen questions start with Item 36 and end with Item 46. 
The additional screen items for household crimes are Items 
37 through 39 and 46.

All other eligible household members will be asked the
screen questions in Items 36 and 40 through 45. These
screen questions are repeated in the NCVS-1, so that you
can interview three individual respondents after completing
the household respondent's interview.  Use NCVS-1A
questionnaires for households that have more than four
eligible household members.

Detailed instructions for completing the NCVS-1 questionnaire 
are provided in Part B, Chapter 2, of this manual.

Personal Characteristics, NCVS-1A

Any sample household that has more than four eligible household 
members will require you to complete an NCVS-1A questionnaire 
for each additional household member.  The NCVS-1A contains 
the same personal characteristics and screen questions as 
shown for individual respondents in the NCVS-1 questionnaire.

Since the NCVS-1A has only five pages and can become
separated very easily from the household's NCVS-1, always
remember to carefully transcribe the sample, control
number, and household number onto the top of the NCVS-
1A cover page before you begin filling out the rest
of the NCVS-1A. This identification information is vital 
to showing the relationship between the questionnaire and 
the sample unit.

Before you transmit completed forms for an assigned case 
to your regional office, make sure to insert any NCVS-1As 
that you completed inside the NCVS-1 questionnaire. If the 
sample household requires only one NCVS-1A, staple the 
completed NCVS-1A to the last page of the household's NCVS-1.

Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2

For each crime incident reported by an eligible household
member, you need to complete a separate Crime Incident
Report, NCVS-2.  Use this questionnaire to gather detailed
information about each reported incidence of crime.

Always transcribe the identification information for the
sample case onto the top of the NCVS-2 cover page before
completing the Crime Incident Report.  By entering the
case's sample, control number, and household number on the
NCVS-2, you are ensuring that any NCVS-2s completed for
a sample address can be linked together with the other
completed forms for the sample address.

Detailed instructions for completing the Crime Incident
Report, NCVS-2, are covered in Part B, Chapter 3, of this
manual.

Noninterview Record, NCVS-7

Any time you need to classify a sample unit as a Type A, 
B, or C noninterview, you also need to complete an NCVS-7,
Noninterview Record.  Complete the necessary items on the
Noninterview Record after you complete the required items
on the Control Card.

Do NOT complete:

*  An NCVS-7, Noninterview Record, when you classify
a household member as a Type Z noninterview.  

*  An NCVS-1 or any NCVS-2s when you complete an NCVS-7, 
Noninterview Record.

Be sure to transcribe the sample, control number, and
household number onto the top of the NCVS-7 and attach
the completed NCVS-7 to the case's Control Card before
mailing the case back to your office.

Detailed instructions for completing the Noninterview
Record, NCVS-7, are provided in Part B, Chapter 4, of 
this manual.

Field Representative's Information 
Card Booklet, NCVS-554

Your Information Card Booklet contains two types of cards. 
Some of the cards in this booklet are designed for you to
show respondents as you conduct certain parts of the NCVS
interview in person. By using these cards during a personal
visit interview, you can:

*  Avoid reading long lists of answer categories and

*  Allow respondents to read all the categories before
selecting the appropriate answer.  

The remaining cards in this booklet are designed to aid you
with specific parts of your NCVS job.

Here is how your Information Card Booklet is arranged:

Page
2  Shows an explanation of the NCVS which satisfies the
Privacy Act requirements, together with commonly
asked questions and suggested answers.

3  Displays the suggested introductions for both personal
visit and telephone interviews, along with listing
reminders.

4  Provides a summary table to help you determine who to 
include as a household member. This table is designed to 
help you with Control Card Item 13c.

5  Once you have a household member's date of birth in
Control Card Item 16, then the age verification chart
on page 5 will help you to determine the household
member's age as of the last day of the month preceding
the interview month.  After determining the household
member's age, verify it with the household member
before entering it in Control Card Item 17.

6  Provides the Spanish Origin flashcard that you will
show to a household respondent when asking Control
Card Item 23 in person.

7  Provides the Race flashcard that you will show to a
household respondent when asking Control Card Item 24 
in person.

8  Provides the Education Codes flashcard that you will 
show to a household respondent when asking Control Card 
Item 21 in person during the first, third, fifth, and 
seventh enumeration periods.

9  Provides the Employment flashcard to show a household 
member who is at least 16 years of age when asking Item 
48a on the NCVS-1.

10  Provides a checklist to help you determine the correct
reference period starting date for each eligible household 
member.  For a first enumeration period household, the 
reference period for all household members will be the 
first day of the month 6 months prior to the interview month.  
For subsequent enumeration periods, the reference period 
starting date can vary based on the interview date from the 
previous interview, but the ending date for each reference 
period is always the day prior to the current interview date.

11  Gives examples of correct reference period starting and
ending dates for a variety of household situations.

12 & Provide a 2-year calendar, along with a list of
13   holidays for each year.  When necessary, allow the
respondent to view these calendars during a personal
visit interview to help him/her remember the months
covered by the reference period and the exact month
in which an incident occurred.
          
14  Provides a table showing which Control Card items
need to be filled for each enumeration period (1
through 7).  Also identified are the Control Card
items that you must either verify or fill for every
enumeration period.

15  Provides the Household Income flashcard that you
will show to the household respondent when asking
Control Card Item 28 in person.

16  Provides a quick reference to help you decide which
items to either include or exclude when recording
answers to Items 88 and 89 on the NCVS-2. These
items relate to incidents of theft and attempted theft. 
When the offender is a police officer, page 16 also
provides guidance on preparing the summary report
for Check Item W on the NCVS-2.

17  Explains the various interviewing or listing situations
that require you to prepare an INTER-COMM, Form 11-36.

18  Provides a table listing which items to complete on
each NCVS form by type of noninterview (Type A, B, C, and 
Z).

19  Gives you the NCVS definition for the term "rape."

20  Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the
NCVS-500 for interviewed households.

21  Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the
NCVS-1 and NCVS-1A for interviewed households.

22  Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the
NCVS-2 for interviewed households.

23  Provides an edit checklist to aid you in editing the
NCVS-500 and the NCVS-7 for noninterviewed households.

NCVS At a Glance, NCVS-550.1

This job aid consists of four legal-size pages.  The first 
two pages provide information about the survey's purpose, 
its sponsor, data users and uses, length of interview, and
participation requirements, along with answers to seven
frequently asked questions.  The last two pages contain
reference information to help you with NCVS key concepts
and definitions.  Information on the first two pages are
worded so that you can read the information directly to a
respondent as needed.  The last two pages are written for
you to read to yourself as needed.

NCVS Fact Sheet, NCVS-110

This brochure provides summarized results from the most
recent NCVS findings.  The results are presented in text,
graphs, and charts.  Prior to interviewing a sample
household for the first enumeration period, your office 
will mail the household an NCVS Fact Sheet, NCVS-110, and 
an introductory letter, NCVS-572(L).  For subsequent
enumeration periods, you can hand the respondent an NCVS
Fact Sheet when:

* The respondent requests the type of information provided 
in this brochure.

* You discover a replacement household at a sample unit.

* You feel that the brochure may encourage a respondent
to cooperate.

NCVS Introductory Letters, NCVS-572(L) 
and NCVS-573(L)

Before you visit a sample household, the regional office 
will mail the household an introductory letter which briefly
describes the NCVS and lets them know to expect your visit
or telephone call. The NCVS-572(L)letter is sent to each
first enumeration period household and the NCVS-573(L)
letter is sent to each second through seventh enumeration
period household.

Always look at Item 5 on the Control Card to see if your
regional office sent an introductory letter to the sample
household. If the "No" box is marked for the current
enumeration period, make sure to hand the respondent a
copy of the appropriate letter and a copy of the NCVS Fact
Sheet(NCVS-110) when conducting the interview in person.

Both of these introductory letters are also available in
Spanish, Chinese, Korean, and Vietnamese.

NCVS Thank You Letters, NCVS-593(L) 
and NCVS-594(L)

There are two different preprinted "Thank You" letters 
for you to use as appropriate.  The NCVS-593(L)letter is
written to help leave a positive impression with a reluctant
respondent and possibly help you to gain his/her cooperation
during the next enumeration period.  After interviewing a
household, mail the NCVS-593(L) "Thank You" letter to the
household if they showed any signs of refusing in the 
future. 

The NCVS-594(L) letter is written as a "Thank You" letter 
for you to mail to sample households who have completed 
their interviews for the seventh enumeration period.

Both of these "Thank You" letters are also available in
Spanish, Chinese, Korean, and Vietnamese.

Questionnaires, Forms, and
Instructions in Spanish, Chinese, 
Korean, and Vietnamese

You are supplied automatically with "Introductory" and "Thank 
You" letters, questionnaires, forms, and instructions printed 
in English.  If you know that your assignment area includes 
households that may speak Spanish, Chinese, Korean, or 
Vietnamese, make sure that you request letters, questionnaires, 
forms, and instructions in the required languages (Spanish, 
Chinese, Korean, or Vietnamese).

Topic 2.  Materials Kept Month to Month

Materials Needed Each Interview 
Month

Your regional office will provide you with the following
supplies that you need to keep on hand to use every
interview month:

A black portfolio to hold your identification card and
all of your assignment materials

Copies of both "Introductory" letters, NCVS-572(L)
and NCVS-573(L)

Copies of both "Thank You" letters, NCVS-593(L)
and NCVS-594(L)

Copies of "Request for Appointment" slips, Forms 11-38 
and 11-38A

Copies of blank Control Cards, NCVS-500

Copies of blank Basic Screen Questionnaires, NCVS-1

Copies of blank Personal Characteristics, NCVS-1A

Copies of blank Crime Incident Reports, NCVS-2

Copies of blank Noninterview Records, NCVS-7

Copies of blank Interviewer Communications (INTER-
COMMs), Form 11-36

Field Representative's Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554

Copies of the NCVS Fact Sheet, NCVS-110

Payroll forms

Pre-addressed envelopes for you to mail completed work 
back to the office

Mechanical pencils

Notify your regional office whenever you start to run 
low on any of these supplies or need a particular item 
replaced.

Topic 3.  Materials Supplied Monthly

Assignment Materials for an 
Interview Month

Before the start of each interview month, your regional
office will send you:

A detailed memorandum which provides any special topics of 
which you need to be aware, as well as reminders and regular 
monthly topics, 

Control cards for each of the current sample cases assigned 
to you, 

CATI Hold Control Cards (in some assignment areas) for 
your use if the sample case recylces from the CATI
facility to you for completion, and

Segment folders containing the listing sheets, maps, and 
any other related materials and instructions you may need 
for your listing and interviewing work. Call your supervisor 
immediately if any of the instructions are unclear to you.

Importance of the Monthly
FR Memorandum

Read all NCVS monthly memorandums very carefully so that 
you can conduct your NCVS work accurately for each
interview month.  Every month your memorandum will
cover current monthly topics, as well as any special
reminders.  Ongoing regular monthly topics are covered as
attachments to the memorandum.  Contact your regional
office if any part of the memorandum is unclear to you.

Topic 4.  Checking and Acknowledging Receipt of Materials

Checking New Assignments

As soon as you receive your monthly package of interview
materials, check the items listed on the Transmittal       
Form 11-35 that accompanies these materials.  When you
review your transmittal form, you will see a list of segment
numbers for your assigned cases, along with a list of serial
numbers for each assigned case within the segment.  

Check to make sure that you received a segment folder for
each segment number listed on the transmittal form. Also
check to ensure that you received a Control Card for each
case/serial number listed on the transmittal form. If you 
find that  anything listed on the transmittal is missing 
from your package, call your supervisor immediately.

Requesting Materials Kept
Month to Month

If you know that you are running low on your regular supplies 
or need to replace an item used each month for the NCVS 
interviewing, place your order by either:

*  Calling your regional office or 

*  Using the supply request form provided by your regional 
   office.  

Topic 2 of this chapter provides a list of the materials 
that your regional office sends and expects you to keep on 
hand for use during each interview month.

Topic 5.  Mailing Completed Work

When to Return Completed Work 
and Related Materials

Whenever possible, try to send your completed work back to
the regional office on a daily basis. If you can't return
completed work daily, make sure to send it back on a flow
basis as frequently as possible.

Once you have completed all assigned cases within a segment, 
you can return the segment folder to your regional office.  
Return completed segment folders on a flow basis and do not 
hold them until the final shipment.

Return the following divider cards with your final shipment:

  NCVS-601, Use Personal Procedure Cover Card,

  NCVS-602, Use Telephone Procedure Cover Card, and

  NCVS-604, CATI Hold Cover Card.

Make sure that your final shipment for an interview month 
is mailed back to the regional office no later than the 
closeout date provided by your supervisor.

Preparing Your Completed Work 
and Materials for Mailing

Before placing your completed work in the preaddressed
envelope for mailing, you need to stack these materials 
in a specific order.

Noninterview Cases (Type A, B, or C)

You should have a completed Noninterview Record, NCVS-7, 
for each of your noninterview cases (Type A, B, or C). 
Staple each completed NCVS-7 to the appropriate Control 
Card for the sample household.  When organizing your 
shipment to the regional office, place at the top of the
stack of completed work any NCVS-7s that have been stapled 
to their Control Cards.  Any segment folders that you are 
returning to the regional office need to be at the bottom 
of the stack.

Completed Cases

For each completed case, insert the Control Card and any
completed NCVS-2s and NCVS-1As inside the completed NCVS-1 
for the case.  Do not insert these completed questionnaires 
into the segment folder.  

Stack all completed NCVS-1s with the cover page facing up
and the appropriate forms inside each NCVS-1.  Place the
stack of completed NCVS-1s directly under the NCVS-7s in
the stake of completed work.  

Segment Folders

Once you are done interviewing all assigned cases in a
segment, including any recycled CATI cases that your
supervisor asks you to complete, place the segment folder
below the completed NCVS-1s in the stack of completed
work.

Mailing Your Completed Work

Your regional office will provide you with pre-addressed
envelopes to use for mailing back your completed work and
materials and your supervisor will tell you whether to mail
your work back by first class, priority, and so forth. 

Once you have all the completed NCVS work and materials
stacked in the proper order, place them in the pre-addressed
envelope and seal the envelope securely. Mail the envelope
using the method recommended by your supervisor. 

Part B, Chapter 1

Chapter 1
Completing the NCVS-500, Control Card

Table of Topics

1  General Instructions

2  Completing Items 1 Through 11 (Unit Identification)

3  Completing Items 12 Through 15 (Household Roster/
   Housing Unit Coverage)

4  Completing Items 16 Through 22(Personal Characteristics)

5  Completing Items 23 Through 25 (Spanish Origin/Race/
   Household Composition Changes)

6  Completing Items 26 Through 29 (Use of Telephone/Building 
   Characteristics/Household Income)

7  Completing Items 30 Through Table X Record of Visits and 
Telephone Calls/Noninterview Reason/Notes/Bounding 
Information/Noninterview Contact Person/Determining EXTRA 
Units

Topic 1.  General Instructions

Definition

The NCVS-500, Control Card, is the "basic record" for each
sample unit throughout each enumeration period (first
through seventh).  Your NCVS assignment materials will
always include a Control Card for each case assigned to 
you, and it is your responsibility to collect and/or update 
most of the information stored on this form.  

When completed, an NCVS Control Card contains the sample 
unit's control number and address, as well as basic
information about the sample household (for example, names 
of each person living in the household and each person's 
age, ethnicity, race, sex, marital status, education, and so 
forth).  The Control Card also provides information about the 
housing unit, the household's total income, crime incidents 
reported by the household, contacts with the household, and 
noninterviews.  

The items that you will fill and/or update on each Control
Card will vary depending on the enumeration period for the
sample unit. Since Control Cards are used to document a
wide variety of information about the sample address and its
household members throughout each enumeration period, you 
need to be extremely careful to complete and/or update
each item accurately, completely, and legibly.

First Enumeration Period

Before you receive your NCVS assignment materials and visit 
a sample address for the first enumeration period, your
regional office is responsible for pre-filling the following
Control Card items:

*  Item 1--Sample number (for example, J20, J21, J22)

*  Item 2--Control number (PSU (5 digits), Segment (4 digits),
   Check digit (1 digit), and Serial number (2 digits)). Here
   is an example, J20-19183-1355-2-03).

*  Item 3--Household number 

*  Item 4a--Segment type

*  Item 4b--CATI segment eligibility

*  Item 5--Mailing of an introductory letter to the sample 
   address

*  Item 6a--Sample address

*  Item 6d--Group quarters name, code, and sample number(when
   applicable)

*  Items 7a and 7b--Year built and coverage questions (when 
   sample unit is located in an area segment)

*  Item 9--Land use

During the first enumeration period, you are responsible for
completing the remaining Control Card items following the
instructions in this chapter and on the Control Card.

Updating Control Card Items

Several Control Card items are shaded.  After your first
interview with a sample household, you are responsible for
updating the information for each shaded item during each
remaining enumeration period.  However, you only need to
update unshaded items on the Control Card if you happen
to discover a change.

Control Cards for "CATI Hold" Cases

Depending on your assignment area(PSU), your assignment
materials could include a stack of Control Cards that are
marked as "CATI Hold" cases.  Since all first enumeration
period interviews must be done in person and are not
eligible for CATI, any "CATI Hold" Control Cards that you
receive will always be for a second through seventh
enumeration period case.

Only interview a "CATI Hold" case when your supervisor 
instructs you to do so. If a "CATI Hold" case is 
successfully interviewed at the CATI facility to which it
was assigned initially, then you will not interview the
sample household or make any entries on the "CATI Hold"
Control Card.

However, when the CATI facility is not successful in
completing the interview, the NCVS case will "recycle" to
you for interview.  If this happens, your supervisor will
notify you to pull the "CATI Hold" Control Card and to
interview the sample household by telephone or, if
necessary, by personal visit.  At that point, you will make
the appropriate updates to the case's Control Card, based 
on the enumeration period for the sample household.

Identifying a Case's Panel and 
Rotation Group

The NCVS sample is divided into panels and rotation groups.  
Occasionally, you may need to identify from your assignment 
a case's panel and rotation group before conducting 
interviews for a supplement or special study related to the 
NCVS. To identify a case's panel and rotation group, look at 
Item 2 on the Control Card.  The case's control number in 
Item 2 starts with a 5-digit PSU number and is followed by 
a 4-digit segment number.  You can determine a case's panel 
and rotation group by looking at the first two digits of the 
segment number.

The first digit of the segment number tells you the case's
panel number (1 through 6) and the second digit of the
segment number identifies the case's rotation group (1
through 6).  Since an NCVS case is assigned for interview
once every 6 months while in sample, here is a list of panel
numbers and interview months:

PANEL
ROTATION
1-Assigned for interview in January and July. 

2-Assigned for interview in February and August.

3-Assigned for interview in March and September.

4-Assigned for interview in April and October.

5-Assigned for interview in May and November.

6-Assigned for interview in June and December.

Within each sample (J20, J21, J22), cases are grouped into
six rotation groups and each rotation group consists of six
panels.

(See Part A, Chapter 1, Topic 3, for more information
about the NCVS sample design.)

Topic 2. Completing Items 1 Through 11(Unit Identification)

Control Card Label

In most cases, your regional office will affix a computer-
generated label in the top, left corner of the original
Control Card for a sample address. In addition to a
barcode, the Control Card label shows the information for
Items 1(Sample), 2(Control Number), and 6a (Address).

Item 1 (Sample)

If the Control Card is completed in the field for a
replacement household or an EXTRA unit, the sample
designation will be handwritten in Control Card Item 1. 
For the 1990 sample design, the available sample designations 
for NCVS are J18 through J24.

Item 2 (Control Number)

The sample designation in Control Card Item 1, together
with the control number in Item 2, uniquely identify the
sample address.  For each case assigned to you for
interview, the control number will either appear on the
computer-generated label or will be handwriten in Item 2.  

Each NCVS case has a unique control number that consists 
of:

* A 5-digit Primary Sampling Unit (PSU) number of which the 
first two-digits identify the Federal Information Processing 
Standards (FIPS)state code and the next three digits identify 
the FIPS county code (for example, PSU 19183 identifies Iowa 
State and Washington County).

* A 4-digit segment number of which the first digit identifies 
the panel number, the second digit identifies the rotation 
group, and the last 2 digits identify the type of segment 
(area, unit, permit, or group quarters).

* A 1-digit check-digit number follows the segment number.

* The last 2 digits of the control number are the case's
serial number, which is unique within segment number and 
sample designation. Serial numbers can range between 01 
and 15.

Item 3 (Household Number)

Prior to the first enumeration period interview, your
regional office should pre-fill Item 3 with the number one
(1). If it is blank for a first enumeration period interview,
enter the number one (1). Each time a household moves
out of a sample address and a new household replaces the
previous household, Control Card Item 3 needs to increase
by "1."  If the household/family that you interviewed for
the first enumeration period continues to occupy the
sample address throughout all seven enumeration periods,
then you will never change the household number in   
Item 3.  

As BJS compares data from one enumeration period to the
next, they need to be aware of any household changes, so
they can account for these household changes in their 
data analysis.

Completing a New Control Card and
Changing the Household Number

Under the following conditions, you will complete a "new" 
Control Card for a sample address and enter a "new" 
household number in Item 3:

During a second through seventh enumeration period, the 
household who occupied the sample address during the previous 
enumeration period has moved out and a different household 
has moved into the sample address.  This new household is 
referred to as a "replacement" household, even if the 
original household was a Type A noninterview in the previous
enumeration period and the new household is a Type A 
noninterview in the current enumeration period.  

Complete a new Control Card for the replacement household 
and increase the household number in Item 3 by "1." For 
example, if the Control Card for the previous enumeration 
period showed the household number as "1," then the Control 
Card for the replacement household needs to show the
household number as "2."

Do not change the household number on the Control Card if 
the household was a Type A noninterview in the previous 
enumeration period and the same household resides at the 
address for the current enumeration period. 

In previous enumeration periods, the sample address was 
occupied, interviewed, and then the address was classified 
as a Type B noninterview (for example, vacant or under 
construction, not ready).  In the current enumeration period, 
another household is residing at the sample address. In this 
situation, the current household is considered a replacement 
household and you would increase the household number in Item 
3 by "1."  While the sample address is unoccupied and 
classified as a Type B noninterview, do not change the household 
number. Wait until another household occupies the unit.

Do not change the household number if the sample address 
was classified as a Type B noninterview starting with the 
first enumeration period and, at a later enumeration period, 
a household occupies the sample address. In this case, 
this household is considered the first sample household.

Filling Item 3 for Extra Units

If you discover an EXTRA unit while interviewing, you
need to complete a separate Control Card for this "new"
housing unit.  As you complete a new Control Card for an
EXTRA unit, always enter household number "1" in Item 3. 

Items 4a and 4b (Segment and CATI 
Eligibility)

Your regional office should pre-fill both of these items
before the first enumeration period. If either one of these
items is left blank, call your regional office. In Item 4a,
your regional office should mark one of four answer boxes
to indicate the type of segment in which the sample
address is located.  The four segment types for the 1990
sample design are Area, Group Quarters, Unit, and Permit.

(Detailed instructions for each segment type can be
found in the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field
Representatives, Form 11-8.)

Your regional office should also pre-fill Item 4b to indicate 
whether or not the sample address is eligible for interview at 
a CATI facility after the first personal visit interview with 
the sample household.
                   
Item 5 (Letter Sent)

If your regional office instructs you to mail introductory
letters for your assigned cases (NCVS-572(L) for initial
interviews and NCVS-573(L) for subsequent interviews),
then it is your responsibility to complete Item 5 indicating
whether or not you mailed a letter to the sample address. 
Otherwise, your regional office will complete Item 5 to let
you know whether the office mailed a letter to the sample
household prior to your visit or call.

Before conducting a personal visit interview, always check
Item 5 to see whether an introductory letter has been sent
to the household.

First Interviews

The Privacy Act requires that we provide the information
contained in these letters to our respondents.  As you
deliver your introduction for the initial personal visit
interview to a first enumeration period household or to a
replacement household, you will either:

* Verify that the household received the NCVS-572(L)letter 
(when "Yes" marked in Item 5). If you discover that the 
household did not receive the letter, hand a copy of the 
NCVS-572(L) letter to the respondent and allow time for the 
respondent to read it.

Or

Hand the respondent a copy of the NCVS-572(L) letter (when 
"No" is marked in Item 5) and allow the respondent time to 
read it.

Subsequent Interviews

After your initial interview, most remaining interviews 
for a returning household will be conducted by telephone.  
Do not ask about receipt of the NCVS-573(L) letter when 
you are conducting an NCVS interview by telephone,
regardless of whether "Yes" or "No" is marked in Item 5.  

When "No" is marked in Item 5 for a returning household,
do not interview the household in person just so you can
give them a letter.  However, if there is another reason 
for interviewing the returning household in person and 
"No" is marked in Item 5, then you can hand the NCVS-573
(L)letter to the respondent.

If there is a reason to interview a returning household in
person and the "Yes" answer is marked in Item 5, there is
no need to ask about receipt of the introductory letter.  
In this situation, keep the NCVS-573(L) letter handy in 
case the respondent asks for a copy or asks for information
covered in this letter.

Item 6a (Address)

If a Control Card Label is used, the sample address for
Item 6a will be shown below the barcode on the label. 
Otherwise, the sample address will be handwritten in  
Item 6a, along with the segment listing sheet number and
line number. Use this address to find the location of the
sample address when you need to make a personal visit
interview. Materials in the segment folder, such as listing
sheets and census maps, are also provided to help you
locate a sample address.  Use the sheet and line numbers
entered in Item 6a to help you locate the sample address
on the segment listing sheet.

(Detailed instructions for using listing sheets and census
maps and locating sample addresses are covered in the
Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives,
Form 11-8.)

When to Make Address Corrections

You are responsible for making corrections to the address
entered in Item 6a when:

Errors are found between the address shown on the listing 
sheet and the address printed on the Control Card label or 
handwritten in Control Card Item 6a.

The respondent gives you an address correction after you 
ask the question in Item 6b, "What is your exact address?"  
However, if you are working in an area segment and the 
respondent gives you a mailing address and Item 6a shows 
a location description (for example, white house with black 
shutters on Rt. 40 about 1/4 mile east of Rt. 40/209 
intersection), do not line through and change the location 
description in Item 6a. In most cases, the respondent is
providing the mailing address (see Item 6c below).

How to Make Address Corrections

Line through any incorrect parts of the address shown in
Item 6a; do not erase incorrect parts of the address. 
Add any corrections or additions as legibly as possible,
and make sure to include any unit designations and ZIP
Codes.

Any corrections or additions that you make to the address
shown in Item 6a, also need to be made to the address
shown on the segment listing sheet.  

Instructions for correcting segment listing sheets are
included in the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field
Representatives, Form 11-8. 

Also prepare an INTER-COMM, Form 11-36, explaining
why you needed to correct or add information to the
sample address in Item 6a.   

Item 6b (Address Verification)

Once you have delivered your introduction, begin completing 
or updating the Control Card by either asking the question 
in Item 6b for incoming households or verifying the address 
in Item 6a for returning households.

First Interview (Incoming 
Households)

Always ask the question in Item 6b exactly as worded on
the Control Card the first time you conduct an interview
at a sample address.  Never verify the address shown in
Item 6a for an incoming household (first enumeration
period, noninterview in previous enumeration periods, and
newly discovered units) instead of asking the question in
Item 6b.  You must ask the question in Item 6b to avoid
"leading" the respondent and thus biasing his/her response.

If the respondent gives you an address that is identical to
the address shown in Item 6a, mark the "Same" box in Item 6b.  

Do not mark the "Same" box in Item 6b if:

* You make any changes to the address in Item 6a or

* Item 6a shows a location description and the respondent 
gives you a mailing address.

Subsequent Interviews (Returning 
Households)

After the first interview at a sample address, you can
verify the address in Item 6a,instead of asking the
question in Item 6b. In other words, you can verify
the address in Item 6a, without asking the question in  
Item 6b, if:

* The household is a returning household in the second 
through seventh enumeration period or

* A replacement household moves into the sample address in 
the second through seventh enumeration period. 

Identifying EXTRA Units

During your interview, you may discover an EXTRA unit. Once 
you have verified that the unit is truly a separate housing 
unit from the original sample unit, you will need to complete 
a separate Control Card for the EXTRA unit. As you enter the 
address for the EXTRA unit in Item 6a, make sure to enter an 
accurate unit description so the unit can be distinguished 
easily from the original (or parent) unit.

Item 6c (Mailing Address)

Whenever you are required to ask the question in Item 6a,
you are also required to ask the question in Item 6c, "Is
this your mailing address?".  If the guidelines outlined on
page B1-13 allow you to verify the sample address in Item 
6a, then it is also acceptable to verify the mailing address 
in Item 6c.

If the mailing address for the case is exactly the same as
the address shown in Item 6a, then mark the "Yes" box in
Item 6c.  When the household uses a different address for
mailing purposes, mark the "No" box and enter the
mailing address in Item 6c.

Since the mailing address is used to send "Introductory"
and "Thank you" letters to sample households, make sure
to enter a complete and accurate address in Item 6c. For
example, a complete mailing address in an urban area
normally includes a house number, street name, unit
designation (if any), city providing postal service, state,
and ZIP Code.  Some addresses may also include a house
number suffix (for example, 1358A), a street name
direction (for example, South Jaggard St.), or a 4-digit 
ZIP Code extension (for example, 20603-4102).  For rural
areas, a complete mailing address normally includes a
route number, a box number (if any), city providing postal
service, state, and ZIP Code.

Item 6d (GQ)

Whenever a sample address is part of a group quarters
(GQ), your regional office will pre-fill Item 6d with the
GQ name, GQ type code (for example, 75-N, the GQ code
for non-institutional group homes for abused women), and
the sample number (for example, J20, J21, or J22). 
Detailed procedures for working with GQs are covered in
the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives, 
Form 11-8.

If you discover at the time of interview that a sample
housing unit is actually a GQ unit, it is your responsibility
to enter the GQ name, type code, and sample number in Item 6d.  
A complete list of GQ type codes is included in Chapter 4 of 
the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives, Form 
11-8.

Item 7a (Year Built)

Whenever an assigned case is in an area segment (Box 1 is
marked in Item 4a), your regional office will pre-fill either
the "Ask 1st mo." or "Do NOT ask" box in Item 7a. If the
"Ask 1st mo." box is marked, ask, "When was this structure 
originally built?".  Only ask this question during the 
first enumeration period and ask it regardless of whether 
the sample address is occupied or vacant.

If you are unable to ask the question in Item 7a because
the case is a potential Type A or Type B noninterview, ask
this question of a knowledgeable person such as a long-
term neighbor or an apartment manager.  Whenever you
ask this question of a nonhousehold member, never mention 
the survey by name.

Understanding "Year Built"

When you ask the question in Item 7a, "When was this
structure originally built?", our intent is to get the 
date that the original structure was completed.  We are 
not interested in the completion date for later remodeling,
additions, or conversions.  Consider the structure to be
completed when all exterior windows and doors have been
installed and the final usable floors are finished. At this
point, the unit is considered ready for occupancy. In the
case of a multi-unit structure, all units in the structure
would use the same "year built" date. 

If the structure containing the sample unit was built before
April 1, 1990:

* Mark the "Before 4-1-90" box in Item 7a and

* Continue completing the Control Card.

If the structure containing the sample unit was built after 
April 1, 1990 and Box 3 in Item 7b was marked by your regional 
office:

* Mark the "After 4-1-90" box in Item 7a and

* Ask Question 3 in Item 7b to determine if there are any 
EXTRA units in another structure on the property that were 
built before April 1, 1990. (See Item 7b later in this 
chapter.)

If the structure containing the sample unit was built after
April 1, 1990 and Box 3 is not marked in Item 7b:

* Mark the "After 4-1-90" box in Item 7a and

* End the interview with the sample address.

Uncertainty About Year Built

If there is uncertainty about whether the structure was 
built either before or after April 1, 1990:

* Mark the "Before 4-1-90" box,

* Note in Item 7a that you estimated the year built, and

* Continue the interview.

(See the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives, 
Form 11-8, for detailed instructions on determining year 
built.)

No Entries on the Area Segment 
Listing Sheet

When you are instructed in Item 7a to determine "year built" 
at the time of interview, do not make any entries on the Area 
Segment Listing Sheet in column 7g, Year built, and do not 
line through any units that you determine are built after 
April 1, 1990.

EXTRA Units

You must complete a new Control Card for each EXTRA unit that 
you discover during an interview.  When your regional office 
marked the "Ask 1st mo." box in Item 7a for the original unit, 
you need to take the following actions for the new Control 
Card:

Mark the "Ask 1st mo." box in Item 7a and 

Ask the question in Item 7a for the EXTRA unit. 

Attempt to interview an EXTRA unit during the same visit at 
which you discover the unit.  If you ask the "year built"
question in Item 7a and the EXTRA unit was built before
April 1, 1990, continue the interview.  However, if the
EXTRA unit was built after April 1, 1990, end the interview 
and report the EXTRA unit as a Type C noninterview, Built 
After 4/1/90 (Code 27).

Replacement Households

When you discover a replacement household at a sample
address, you need to complete a new Control Card.  For a
replacement household in an area segment, do not ask the
question in Item 7a when the "Ask 1st mo." box is marked
on the original Control Card.  Since this question was
already asked of the original household, just transcribe 
the entries from the original Control Card to Item 7a on 
the new Control Card for the replacement household. 

Sample Address Built After 
April 1, 1990

If a sample address is in an area segment and you
determine in Item 7a that the structure was originally
built after April 1, 1990, you will end the interview
because the unit does not qualify to be in the 1990
sample.  Take the following actions to remove the sample
address from sample:

* Complete a Noninterview Record, NCVS-7, for the sample 
address.  When you get to Item 6 on the NCVS-7, mark Box 
27 to identify the case as a Type C noninterview, Built 
after April 1, 1990.

* In Control Card Item 30b, enter the month and year of
your visit to the sample address (for example, 8/2003).

In Control Card Item 30f, enter the noninterview type
and reason code "C27."  The block to the right of
Control Card Item 33 lists all noninterview types and
reason codes.

Item 7b (Coverage Questions)

The coverage questions shown in Control Card Item 7b are
intended to discover any EXTRA housing units that have
not been listed prior to your interview.  For each assigned
case from an Area Segment, your regional office will
mark:

* The appropriate coverage questions that you need to ask 
the household respondent or 

* The "None" box to indicate when it is not necessary for 
you to ask any coverage questions in Item 7b and can 
continue with Item 8a.

If the case is in an area segment and no boxes are marked
in Item 7b, explain the situation on an INTER-COMM, Form 
11-36. Before the next enumeration period, your office will 
indicate in Item 7b which question(s) you need to ask.

When Questions Are Marked

Only ask the marked questions in Item 7b during the first
enumeration period.  If you get a "No" answer, circle the
"N" and continue with Item 8a. If you get a "Yes" answer,
circle the "Y" and complete Table X on the reverse side of
the Control Card.  Table X is designed to determine if
additional living quarters qualify as EXTRA housing
units.

Once you are done filling Table X, finish interviewing the
original sample unit before interviewing any EXTRA units 
that you may find.

Type B and C Noninterviews

When you need to ask a coverage question in Item 7b and the 
sample unit is a Type B noninterview:

* Ask the marked coverage question of a neighbor or other 
knowledgeable person and

* Modify the question's wording so that it refers to the
noninterview unit (for example, "Are there any occupied or 
vacant living quarters besides the vacant unit next door 
to you on this floor?").  Never mention the survey's name 
when asking this question of a nonhousehold member, just 
identify yourself and let the person know that you are 
doing survey work for the United States Census Bureau.

If you have a unit that classifies as a Type C noninterview
and you need to ask coverage question 3 in Item 7b, make
sure to ask question 3 of someone who is pretty knowledgeable 
about the area.

EXTRA Units

When interviewing an EXTRA unit, do not ask any questions 
or circle any answers in Item 7b.

Replacement Households
                    
When preparing a "new" Control Card for a replacement
household, do not ask the coverage question(s) in Item 7b
for the replacement household.  You do need to transcribe
the marked box from Item 7b on the original Control Card
to Item 7b on the new Control Card for the replacement
household.

Item 8a (Tenure)

Ask the tenure question in Item 8a for each sample household 
you are able to interview during the first, third, fifth, and 
seventh enumeration periods.  However, there may be situations 
when you are not able to interview a sample household during 
the first, third, fifth, and seventh enumeration periods, 
because the sample household:

* Was a noninterview,

* Was a newly discovered EXTRA unit, or

* Was a replacement household.

If you experience this situation and are able to interview 
a sample household during the second, fourth, or sixth
enumeration period, ask the question in Item 8a and mark
the respondent's answer in the column for the preceding
enumeration period (for example, if you are interviewing
for the sixth enumeration period, mark the fifth enumeration 
period).

How To Ask Item 8a

Start Item 8a by reading the lead-in statement, "Are your
living quarters--."  Then ask each part of the question,
wait for an answer, and continue this process until you get
a "Yes" answer from the respondent.  Be careful to mark
the appropriate box in the correct row (for the question)
and in the correct column (for the enumeration period).

Owned or Being Bought by You or 
Someone in Your Household

Before you mark Box 1 in Item 8a to indicate that the
living quarters is owned or being bought someone in
sample household, make sure that: 

* The owner or co-owner of the sample unit is a household 
member.

* The owner or co-owner actually lives in the sample unit 
when it is a cooperative apartment or a condominium unit.

* The owner or co-owner has paid completely for the housing 
unit or is paying on a mortgage for the housing unit.

Rented for Cash

Before you mark Box 2 in Item 8a to indicate that the living 
quarters is rented for cash, make sure that money is paid for 
rent or a contract exists for payment of rent for the housing 
unit.  The person paying the rent does not have to live in the 
housing unit (for example, the rent payer could be a welfare 
agency or a college student's parents).

Occupied Without Payment of 
Cash Rent

Before you mark Box 3 in Item 8a to indicate that the living 
quarters is occupied without payment of cash rent, make sure 
that:

The sample household does not own or have to pay a mortgage 
payment.

The sample household is not required to pay rent to reside 
in the housing unit and no one else pays the rent for the 
household.

Examples of this situation could include:

A household living in a unit without paying rent in exchange 
for services the household provides to the owner.

A household living in a unit without paying rent as a gift 
from a relative or friend who does not live in the housing 
unit.

It is also acceptable to mark Box 3 if the sample household
is only required to pay for the utilities they use and no 
rent is required.

Item 8b (College or University)

If it is obvious whether or not the household's living
quarters are used as student housing by a college or
university, you can mark the appropriate answer box
without asking the question.  Make sure to verify the
answer to this question during each enumeration period.

Item 8c (Public Housing)

During the first enumeration period, you will ask the
question in Item 8c after you discover in Item 8a that 
the sample unit is occupied by a household who:

* Pays cash rent (Box 2 is marked in Item 8a) or

* Occupies the unit without payment of cash rent(Box 3 
  is marked in Item 8a).

Do not ask the question in Item 8c if the household
respondent tells you in Item 8a that they own or are buying
the sample unit. When Box 1 is marked in Item 8a, skip to
Item 8e.

If you ask, "Is this building owned by a public housing
authority?", and you get a "Yes" answer, make sure that
the unit is in a federally funded project.  If the building 
is funded by a state or local government, mark Box 2 "No." 
Also mark Box 2 "No" if the building is part of a federal
assisted housing program, such as VA (veteran), FHA,
voucher, or certificate assisted housing.  After marking
Box 1 "Yes," you are instructed to verify this fact with the
building manager in Item 8d.  If you mark Box 2 "No" in
Item 8c, you are instructed to skip to Item 8e.

Item 8d (Manager Verification)

If you determine in Item 8c that the sample unit is in a
building that is owned by a public housing authority, you
are instructed in Item 8d to:

* Locate the building manager and 

* Verify that this fact is true.

This verification should be done during the first enumeration 
period and, if possible, again during the fifth enumeration 
period.

If you are unable to verify the respondent's "Yes" answer
in Item 8c, mark the appropriate box in Item 8d to indicate
why verification was not possible.  There are two reason
boxes available under the heading "Unable to verify"--
CATI/Telephone and Other-Specify.  If you mark the "Other-
Specify" box, make sure to enter the reason on the "Specify" 
line.

Item 8e (American Indian Reservation 
or American Indian Lands)

Complete Item 8e during the first interview with a sample
household. It is acceptable to mark the answer for Item 8e
without asking the question if you are familiar with the
area in which a sample address is located and know for
sure whether or not the living quarters is located on an
American Indian Reservation or on American Indian Lands.  
Whenever there is any doubt about which answer to mark in 
Item 8e, ask the household respondent the question in Item 
8e before marking an answer box. If you notice that Item 
8e is unanswered during a subsequent enumeration period, 
either mark the answer without asking when it is obvious 
or ask the household respondent and mark his/her answer.

What Is an American Indian 
Reservation?

American Indian Reservations are territories reserved as
permanent tribal homelands with boundaries established
by treaty, statute, or executive or court order.  The 
Federal Government and some state governments have 
established reservations as territory over which American 
Indians have governmental jurisdiction.  These entities are
designated as colonies, communities, pueblos, rancherias,
reservations, and reserves.

What Are American Indian Lands?

American Indian Lands are comprised of tribal subdivisions 
and trust lands.

A tribal subdivision is an administrative subdivision of 
a reservation.  Tribal subdivisions may extend beyond the
boundary of their reservations and are internal units of 
self government or administration that serve social, cultural, 
or economic purposes for the American Indians living on and
adjacent to the reservation.

Trust Lands are held in trust by the Federal Government
for either a tribe (tribal trust land) or an individual
member of a tribe (individual trust land).  Such land is
always associated with a specific federally recognized
reservation or tribe, but may be located on or off the
reservation.

Item 9(Land Use)

Your regional office will pre-fill Item 9 to indicate
whether the sample unit is located in an urban or rural
area. If the "Urban" box is marked, you are instructed to
skip to Item 11a.  However, when the "Rural" box is marked, 
your instructions will vary depending on the information 
pre-filled by your regional office in Item 6d.

When the following conditions exist, you will ask the
question in Item 10 only during the first enumeration
period:

The "Rural" box is marked in Item 9 AND Item 6d is
blank (because the unit is a housing unit, not a GQ
unit).

The "Rural" box is marked in Item 9 AND Item 6d shows a 
GQ type code of 92-N or 93-N (GQ facilities for housing 
workers).

If the "Rural" box is marked in Item 9 AND Item 6d shows 
a GQ type code other than 92-N or 93-N, mark the "No" box 
in Item 10 without asking the question and continue with 
Item 11a.

EXTRA Units and Replacement
Households

When you discover an EXTRA unit or a replacement household, 
you will need to complete a new Control Card. As you complete 
the new Control Card, make sure to mark the same box in Item 
9 as the box pre-filled by your regional office for the 
parent unit or the original sample household.

Item 10 (Farm Sales)

Based on the instruction in Item 9, you may need to ask
the household respondent the following question in Item 10:

"During the past 12 months did sales of crops, livestock,
and other farm products from this place amount to $1,000 
or more?"

What We Mean by "Place"

For this question, the term "place" encompasses one or
more tracts of land which the respondent considers to be
on the same property, farm, ranch, or estate.  These tracts
may be adjoining or separated by a road, creek, or other
pieces of land.  In most cases, a "place" can be clearly
defined.  For example, in a built-up area, a "place" is 
likely to consist of a house and a lot.  However, in a more 
rural setting, a "place" could consist of a whole tract of 
land or a combination of two or three pieces of land (for 
example, a sample address on one piece of land and another 
piece of land used to grow crops for sale).

What We Mean by "Sales of Crops,
Livestock, and other Farm Products"

The household respondent should report the gross amount
of money received for the sale of crops, vegetables, fruits,
nuts, livestock and livestock products (milk, wool, and so
forth), poultry and eggs, and nursery and forest products
that are produced at this place and sold at any time during
the past 12 months. 

Exclude the value of any products consumed at the place. 
The household respondent does not need to provide an
exact amount.  He/she only needs to identify whether or
not these sales totaled $1,000 or more during the past     
12 months.

Sample household owns or is buying the property: 
In this case, farm sales should include sales from the 
entire acreage or property that the sample household owns 
or is buying, even if a portion of the property is rented 
to someone else.

Sample household is paying cash rent for the property:
In this case, farm sales should include only the amount 
of sales generated from the property they are renting.

Sample household lives on property without paying cash rent:
In this case, if the sample address for both the owner and
the non-cash renter are in the sample, include the amount
of farm sales from the entire acreage of the owner.  Do not
limit the amount of sales to only the property occupied
without payment of cash rent.

Sample household lives on property subsidized by the
Federal Government not to grow certain crops:
Only include the amount of the subsidy if the respondent
would have normally grown and sold the crops that he/she
is paid not to grow.

Sample household moved to the property during the past 
6 months:
Explain to the current household that this question refers
to farm sales from the property during the past 12 months,
regardless of who resided on the property during those   
12 months.  If the current respondent is unable to answer
this question, print "NA" in the answer space.

Sample household is a Type A or B noninterview:
Attempt to complete Item 10 by asking a neighbor. If you
cannot get an answer for Item 10, print "NA" in the answer
space.

Sample household is Unable or Unwilling to Answer:
If a respondent is unable or unwilling to answer Item 10,
print "NA" in the answer space and use the "Notes" space
on the Control Card to explain why you entered "NA" in
Item 10.                           

Item 11a (Unit in GQ/Not in GQ)

Mark Item 11a during the first enumeration period, 
regardless of whether or not the sample household is
interviewed.  Also mark Item 11a each time you complete
a new Control Card for a replacement household or an
EXTRA unit.

Item 11a is a check item designed to help you determine
whether or not the sample address is part of a group
quarters. 

Entry in Item 6d

Refer to Item 6d to see if a GQ name and type code are
entered.  If a GQ name and type code are listed in Item 6d,
then verify the accuracy of the GQ type code against the
GQ Table provided in the Listing and Coverage Manual
for Field Representatives (Form 11-8), Chapter 4, Topic 3. 

GQ Code Found in GQ Table:
Mark Box 1 in Item 11a and then mark the appropriate box
in Item 11d based on the description found in the GQ
Table of the Listing and Coverage Manual (Form 11-8). 
Leave Items 11b and 11c blank when you mark Box 1 in
Item 11a.

GQ Code Not Found in GQ Table:
Mark Box 1 in Item 11a and make your best determination
for marking Item 11d based on the descriptions shown in
the GQ Table.  If you encounter problems classifying a
GQ unit, contact your regional office and note the 
problem on an INTER-COMM.

No Entry in Item 6d

When no entry is shown in Item 6d, you will:

* Mark Box 2 in Item 11a,

* Mark the correct box in Item 11b (direct access), and

* Mark the correct box in Item 11c (type of housing unit).

Item 11b (Access)

Item 11b is designed to indicate whether or not a sample
household has direct access to their living quarters.  

A living quarters has direct access when an occupant can
either:

* Enter his/her living quarters directly from the outside
of the structure or

* Enter his/her living quarters from a common hall or lobby 
that is used by occupants of more than one unit (as found in 
apartment buildings).  The hall or lobby must not be part of 
any unit and must be clearly separate from all units in the 
structure.

If the only entrance to an occupant's living quarters is
through a room or hall of another household's living
quarters, then the living quarters does not have direct
access.

Only mark Item 11b by your observations when you are sure 
that the sample unit has direct access. If you are not
sure, ask the household respondent before marking Item 11b.  

If you mark Box 2 because the unit does not have direct
access, then the sample address is not a separate housing
unit and should be considered part of the housing unit
through which access to it is gained. It is also possible
that the unit may have been merged with another unit.  A
merger is the result of combining two or more unit addresses 
to form one unit address.  A merger could involve two single 
family homes or two or more apartments in a multi-unit 
structure. (See Appendix B of this manual for more information 
on mergers.)

Item 11c (Housing Unit)

A housing unit is a group of rooms or a single room
occupied as separate living quarters or intended for
occupancy as separate living quarters. A housing unit may
be occupied by a family or one person, as well as by two
or more unrelated persons who share the living quarters. 
To be considered a separate living quarters, the occupants
must:

Live and eat separately from all other persons on the
property and

Have direct access to their living quarters from the
outside or through a common hall or lobby (as found
in apartment buildings).

Once you have determined that the sample address qualifies 
as a housing unit, then mark the appropriate box in Item 
11c to indicate the type (not condition) of housing unit.  
For example, you should mark Box 1, House, apartment, flat, 
for a vacant or occupied housing unit that appears to be 
dilapidated, but still meets the housing unit definition. 

Box 1, House, Apartment, Flat

Mark Box 1 for Item 11c when the housing unit is:

* An ordinary house or apartment,
* An apartment located over a garage or behind a store,
* A janitor's quarters in an office building, and
* Housing units in structures like converted barns or sheds.

Box 2, HU in Nontransient Hotel,
Motel, etc.

Mark Box 2 in Item 11c when the housing unit is in a 
nontransient hotel, motel, motor court, or YMCA.  A hotel or 
motel is classified as nontransient if 75 percent or more of 
the rooms or suites are occupied or intended for occupancy 
by permanent guests. Permanent guests usually stay a month 
or more at reduced monthly or weekly rates.

Box 3, HU Permanent in Transient Hotel,
Motel, etc.

Mark Box 3 in Item 11c when the housing unit is occupied or 
intended for occupancy by permanent guests or resident 
employees.  A hotel or motel is classified as transient if 
more than 25 percent of the rooms or suites are occupied or 
intended for occupancy by transient guests. Transient guests 
usually stay less than a month and pay daily rates.

Box 4, HU in Rooming House

Mark Box 4 in Item 11c when the housing unit is located
in a rooming house or a combination rooming and boarding 
house.  Both rooming houses and boarding houses are group 
quarters that have five or more units for rent.  However, 
the weekly or monthly rent paid by roomers at a rooming 
house does not cover meals, but it could cover linens and 
maid service.  At a boarding house, the weekly or monthly 
rent paid by its boarders entitles them to their room and 
regular meals.  The proprietor may or may not eat with the 
boarders at a boarding house.

Box 5, Mobile Home or Trailer 
With No Permanent Room Added

Mark Box 5 in Item 11c when the housing unit is a mobile
home or trailer (regardless of the type of foundation) and
no permanent rooms have been added to the mobile home
or trailer.  Open or unheated porches or sheds built onto
trailers are not considered rooms.

Box 6, Mobile Home or Trailer 
With One or More Permanent Rooms
Added

Mark Box 6 in Item 11c when the housing unit is a mobile
home or trailer (regardless of the type of foundation) and
one or more permanent rooms have been added.  Sheds and 
open or unheated porches built onto trailers are not
considered rooms.

Box 7, HU Not Specified Above

Mark Box 7 in Item 11c when a housing unit cannot be described 
by the specific categories already listed. Tents, houseboats, 
and railroad cars can fall into this category if they meet the 
housing unit definition.  Whenever you mark Box 7, make sure 
to describe the type of structure accurately on the line 
provided.

Item 11d (Other Unit)

Once you have marked Box 1 in Item 11a and checked the GQ 
Table in the Listing and Coverage Manual (Form 11-8), mark 
the box in Item 11d which best describes the GQ unit.

Box 8, Quarters Not HU in 
Rooming or Boarding House

Mark Box 8 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is located in a rooming 
or boarding house or a combination rooming and boarding house.  
The sample unit must not meet the housing unit definition.  
(Also see page 4-36 in the Listing and Coverage Manual, Form 
11-8.)

Box 9, Unit Not Permanent in 
Transient Hotel, Motel, etc.

Mark Box 9 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is located in a transient 
hotel, motel, motor court, etc. and is occupied or intended for 
occupancy by transient guests.  The sample unit must not meet 
the housing unit definition. (Also see page 4-38 in the Listing 
and Coverage Manual, Form 11-8.)

Box 10, Unoccupied Site for 
Mobile Home, Trailer, or Tent

Mark Box 10 in Item 11d if the sample address identifies an 
unoccupied site for a mobile home, trailer, or tent within a 
group quarters.  The site must not be intended for a mobile 
home, trailer, or tent that meets the housing unit definition.

Box 11, Student Quarters in 
College Dormitory

Mark Box 11 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is occupied by a
college student in a dormitory.  The sample unit must not
meet the housing unit definition.

Box 12, OTHER Unit Not 
Specified Above

Mark Box 12 in Item 11d if the GQ unit is not described in
the categories already mentioned.  For example, mark Box 12 
for dormitories used by nurses and interns in general and 
military hospitals (GQ Code 86-N).  Make sure to enter the 
description of the GQ type as shown in the GQ Table in the 
Listing and Coverage Manual, Form 11-8, starting on page 4-9.

Identifying Changes in Type of 
Living Quarters

If you should discover a change in the type of living quarters 
or an error in classification, correct the entries on the 
Control Card and note the circumstances and the date you 
discovered the change or error in the "Notes" space.

Topic 3.  Completing Items 12 Through 15 (Household Roster/ 
Housing Unit Coverage) 

Item 12 (Line Number)

As you list each person in the household roster (Item 13a), the 
person is assigned a unique line number that is preprinted in 
Item 12. This preprinted line number distinguishes the various 
individuals from each other on the Basic Screen Questionnaire 
(NCVS-1) and the Crime Incident Report(NCVS-2). The Control 
Card also asks you to identify by line number in Item 30c the 
household respondent for each enumeration period, and to 
identify by line number in Item 32e the household member 
who reported the incident described in Item 32e.

In addition to identifying the household respondent in Item 
30c, you also must identify the household respondent by circling 
the household respondent's line number in Item 12. If another 
household member is the household respondent in a subsequent 
enumeration period, circle that person's line number in Item 
12, too.  You will only line through a circled line number in 
Item 12 when the person has died (using a wavy line across Items 
12 - 24) or permanently left the household (using a diagonal 
line across Item 12).

More Than Seven Persons in a 
Household

You will need to renumber the line numbers printed in Item 12 
when you complete more than one Control Card for a sample 
household because:

The household has more than seven persons or

Enough people have moved in and out of the household so that 
you run out of lines in Item 13a (household roster).

On the second Control Card for a household, change the line 
numbers to 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14, so that each person 
listed in Item 13a for a household has a unique line number.  
Follow this same procedure for a third or fourth Control Card 
for a household, if necessary, making sure that each person 
has a unique line number.

Person Dies or Permanently 
Leaves a Household

When you discover that a person has died, draw a wavy line 
across the person's line starting with Item 12 and continuing 
through Item 24.  When a person has permanently left the 
household for other reasons, just draw a diagonal line through 
the person's line number in Item 12.

Item 13a (Household Roster)

Complete the household roster in Item 13a during the first
interview with a sample household.  Once you ask the question 
in bold type, "What are the names of all persons living or 
staying here?", the next statement you read will vary depending 
on the answer recorded in Item 8a.

If the living quarters is either owned or being bought by
someone in the household, then read the statement as
follows: "Start with the name of the person or one of the
persons who owns this home."

If the living quarters is rented for cash, then read the
statement as follows: "Start with the name of the person
or one of the persons who rents this home."

If the living quarters is occupied without payment of cash 
rent, then read the statement as follows: "Start with any 
adult household member."

Completing the Household Roster

Normally, you list the reference person on line number 1
of the household roster.  Starting with line number 1 and
printing one letter in each space:

* Enter the person's last name, 

* Leave a blank space between the person's last name and 
first name, and 

* Enter the person's first name.  

Try to complete Items 13b (relationship to reference person) 
and 13c (household member) for one line number before entering 
the next person in Item 13a.  However, if the household 
respondent gives you a list of names all at once, enter each 
name in Item 13a and then complete Items 13b and 13c for each 
line number.  

Do not skip any lines when entering names in Item 13a and do 
not use a comma to separate the last and first names (just 
leave a blank space).  

For each person with the same last name as the preceding 
person in Item 13a:

* Enter a long dash across the spaces for the last name,
instead of repeating the same last name,

* Leave a blank space, and 

* Enter the person's first name.

As you complete the household roster in Item 13a, you may 
need to probe for the household respondent to give you the 
names of all remaining persons staying at the sample address.  
If so, you can ask, "What are the names of all other persons 
who are living or staying here?" Repeat this question as 
necessary until you are sure that the household roster is 
complete.

Who to List in Item 13a

List the names (last names first) of the following persons:

* All persons living or staying at the sample address at
the time of your contact.

* All persons who usually live at the sample address, but 
who are temporarily away for reasons such as visiting friends 
or relatives, traveling for their jobs, in "general" hospitals, 
and so forth.

* All children who usually live at the sample address,
including infants under 1 year of age.

* Any lodgers, servants, hired hands, and other persons who 
usually live at the sample address.

* Visitors and other persons who are not household members 
(do not usually live at the sample address), but are in the 
sample household at the time of your interview and have stayed 
at the sample address at least one night before your interview, 
such as a visitor or student with a usual residence elsewhere.

* Households consisting entirely of persons who are not 
household members and have a usual residence elsewhere. However, 
once you complete Items 13a through 13c for the entire household 
and determine that the entire household has a usual residence
elsewhere, you will classify the household as a Type B 
noninterview, Temporarily occupied by persons with URE.(Also 
see Part A, Chapter 6, Topic 3, Type B Noninterview Categories.)

Preferred Order for Listing Names 

Listed below is the "preferred" order for listing names in
Item 13a by relationship to the reference person:

* Reference person (See page B1-41 for a definition.)

* Husband or wife of the reference person

* Unmarried children of the reference person or his/her
spouse, starting with the oldest and ending with the
youngest

* Married sons and/or daughters of the reference person or 
his/her spouse followed by the married child's spouse, and 
each of their children (oldest to youngest)

* Other persons related to the reference person or his/her 
spouse (if these other relatives are related to each other 
list them together)

* Lodgers and other nonrelatives staying at the sample address 
(if these other nonrelatives are related to each other list 
them together)

Although this is the "preferred" order, it is not necessary to
change entries in Item 13a so that they match the "preferred" 
order.

Verifying Living Arrangements 
(EXTRA Units)

As you complete Item 13a, you may discover that a family group, 
nonrelatives, and so forth actually have separate living quarters 
that qualify as an EXTRA housing unit. Each EXTRA unit that 
meets the housing unit definition requires a separate Control 
Card. However, if the living quarters does not qualify as an 
EXTRA housing unit, list these persons with the original household 
in Item 13a. (Also see Item 15b in Topic 3 and Table X in Topic 
7 of this chapter.)

Household Requires More Than 
One Control Card

Since each Control Card has space to list seven persons, some 
households may require more than one Control Card because:

* The household has more than seven persons or

* Several persons have left or entered the household between 
enumeration periods.  

When it is necessary to start a second or third Control Card 
for a household, make sure to:

* Renumber the line numbers in Item 12 on the second or third 
Control Card, so that each person listed in Item 13a has a 
unique line number.

* As you complete Item 13a on a second or third Control Card 
for a household, always enter the last name for the first 
person listed, even if it is the same last name entered on the 
first or second Control Card for the household.

* Just above Item 1 on each Control Card for a household, note 
how many Control Cards there are for the household (for example, 
1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3).

* Staple together all Control Cards for a household.

Item 13b (Relationship to Reference 
Person)

Use Item 13b to identify the reference person and the
relationship of each remaining person listed in Item 13a to
the reference person.

Item 13b is designed with two columns, so you can:

Designate one person as the reference person (normally line 
number 1) and enter the relationship of all remaining persons 
to the reference person under the "Relationship" column 
(reference person, husband, wife, son, daughter, and so forth) 
and

Enter the appropriate two-digit relationship code in the "Code" 
column.  A list of relationship descriptions and codes is 
printed in a box at the top, right corner of the Control Card.

Reference Person

The reference person is usually the first person mentioned when 
you ask the question in Item 13a for the household roster. Since 
we want a responsible adult household member who is less likely 
to permanently leave the household, we prefer designating one of 
the persons who owns or rents the home as the reference person.  
Each household must have a reference person and the reference 
person must be a household member.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 4, for more information about 
reference persons.)

Relationship of Other Persons to the
Reference Person

Once you have identified which person will be the reference 
person, you must determine the precise relationship of all 
other persons listed in Item 13a to the reference person.

Relatives of the reference person:
Enter the word(s) describing the family connection between the 
reference person and each person listed in Item 13a who is 
related to the reference person by blood, marriage, or adoption.  
If there is any kinship between the reference person and another 
person in the household roster, use the word(s) that show the 
actual family relationship between the two persons, rather than 
general descriptions.  For example, if the reference person's
cousin or nephew is visiting for the summer, enter "cousin" or 
"nephew," rather than "visitor" or "other relative."

Here are some examples of acceptable relationship descriptions 
in Item 13b for relatives of the reference person:  husband, 
wife, son, daughter, stepson, stepdaughter, father, mother, 
stepfather, stepmother, niece, nephew, cousin, grandmother, 
grandfather, grandson, granddaughter, father-in-law, mother-
in-law, sister-in-law, brother-in-law, son-in-law, and daughter-
in-law.  If necessary, abbreviate the relationship in Item 13b.

After entering the relationship in the left column of Item 13b, 
enter the appropriate two-digit relationship code in the right 
column of Item 13b.  A list of relationship codes in printed 
in a box at the top, right corner of the Control Card. If you 
don't see a relationship code for a specific type of relative, 
such as nephew or cousin, use relationship code 09 for "Other 
relative."

Note: A "foster" son or daughter who has not been legally 
adopted (unless the child is related to the reference person 
in some other way), is considered a "nonrelative," code 10.

Nonrelatives of the reference person:
Any person who is living or staying at the sample address
and is not related in any way to the reference person is
considered a "nonrelative."  For example, a live-in maid, a
friend visiting from out-of-town, or a foster child who has
not been legally adopted are considered "nonrelatives." 
Enter the specific relationship to the reference person in
the "relationship" column and enter code 10 for "nonrelative" 
in the "code" column of Item 13b.

Changing the Reference Person 
(Person Left Household Permanently)

After the first enumeration period, it is possible that the
person designated as the reference person has left the sample 
household permanently, because he/she relocated permanently, 
died, and so forth. If this happens, 

Delete the person who has permanently left the household by:

--  Drawing a diagonal line through the deleted person's line 
number in Item 12.  

--  In Item 25a, entering the reason code and the interview 
month and year in which you discovered that the person left 
the household permanently.  A list of reasons and codes for
changes to household composition appears in a box at the top, 
right corner of the Control Card.

--  Do not erase any information for a person who has permanently 
left the household.

Delete the person who has died by:

--  Drawing a wavy line through the deceased person's entire line 
from Item 12 through Item 24.

--  In Item 25a, enter reason code 21 and the interview month and 
year in which you discovered that the person died.

--  Do not erase any information for a deceased household 
member.

Determine who should be the new reference person by asking, 
"What is the name of the person or one of the persons who 
(owns/rents) this home?". 

Correct the relationship description and code in Item 13b 
to identify the new reference person.

If necessary, correct the relationship descriptions and codes 
in Item 13b for the remaining persons in the household roster 
to show their relationship to the new reference person.

Item 13c (Household Member)

Item 13c is designed to help you determine whether or not each 
person listed in the household roster is considered a household 
member.  Once you have identified a person's relationship to 
the reference person in Item 13b, ask the following question in 
Item 13c, "Does...usually live here?".  If the answer is "No," 
try to determine whether

the person has a usual place of residence held elsewhere for 
him/her.  Ordinarily, a person's usual place of residence is 
the place where the person eats and sleeps the majority of 
the time.

As a general rule, a person is considered a household member 
if:

The sample address is the person's usual place of residence or

The person is staying at the sample address at the time of 
interview and does not have a usual place of residence 
elsewhere.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 3, of this manual and page 
4 of your Information Card Booklet(NCVS-554)for help in 
determining household membership.)

Person Is a Household Member

If you determine that the person meets the household member 
criteria:

Mark Box 1 (Yes) in Item 13c and

Continue with the next person listed in the household roster.

Person Is Not a Household 
Member

If you determine that the person does not meet the household 
member criteria:

Mark Box 2 (No) in Item 13c and

Enter the reason the person is not a household member across 
Items 16 through 22 for the person. Here are some examples of 
acceptable entries across Items 16 through 22:

      --   Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere
      --   Patient - Mental institution
      --   Student - Usual residence elsewhere
      --   Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere
      --   Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere 

If the entire household has a usual residence elsewhere, follow 
the procedures for classifying the case as a Type B Noninterview.  
Also, erase any entries that may have been made in Items 8a 
through 8e if the entire household has a usual residence 
elsewhere.

(See Part A, Chapter 6, Topic 3, for procedures to classify a 
case as a Type B noninterview.)

When Unsure About Household 
Membership

First, reread the information:

In Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 3, of this manual and 

On page 4 of your Information Card Booklet(NCVS-554).

If you are still unsure whether to include a person on the
household roster as a household member, mark Box 1, "Yes," in 
Item 13c, continue to interview the person, and explain the 
situation in the "Notes" space on the Control Card and on an 
INTER-COMM.

Changing the Reference Person 
(Person Is Not a Household Member)

If you determine that the person identified in Item 13b as the 
reference person is not a household member, you must identify 
another household member as the reference person.  If you 
encounter this situation, you must:

* Determine who should be the new reference person by asking, 
"What is the name of the person or one of the persons who 
(owns/rents) this home?". 

* Correct the relationship description and code in Item 13b to 
identify the new reference person.

* If necessary, correct the relationship descriptions and codes 
in Item 13b for the remaining persons in the household roster, 
including the original reference person, to show their 
relationship to the new reference person.

Item 14 (Household Roster Coverage)

After completing Item 13c for each person listed in the
household roster, ask the question in Item 14 next. Item 14 
is designed to remind the household respondent to mention 
anyone he/she may have forgotten to mention initially and to 
ensure that the household roster in Item 13a is complete.  
Many household respondents forget to mention babies, lodgers, 
and visitors when you ask about persons staying at their home.

Asking Item 14 for the First 
Enumeration Period

When interviewing a sample household for the first time, start 
Item 14 by reading, "I have listed...," and then read each name 
entered in Item 13a (household roster). Continue Item 14 by 
asking, "Have I missed anyone else living or staying here such 
as any babies, any lodgers, or anyone who is away at present 
traveling or in the hospital?"

If the household respondent answers "Yes" to the question in 
Item 14:

Mark Box 1 "Yes" under the "1st" enumeration period, 

Add the person's name to the household roster in Item 13a, and 

Complete Items 13b and 13c for the added person.

Continue asking if you missed anyone else living or staying at 
the address until the household respondent answers, "No."

Asking Item 14 for the Second 
Through Seventh Enumeration
Period 

After completing the first interview with a sample household, 
it is not necessary to ask the question in Item 13a for 
subsequent interviews.  Instead of asking the question in Item 
13a:

Read the statement in Item 14, "I have listed...," and read 
each name already listed in Item 13a. 

Ask the question in Item 14, "Have I missed anyone else living 
or staying here such as any babies, any lodgers, or anyone who 
is away at present traveling or in the hospital?".

Using the appropriate enumeration period in Item 14, mark 
Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No."

If you mark Box 1 in Item 14 and need to add one or more persons 
to the household roster, add each person's name in Item 13a and 
complete Items 13b, 13c, and 25a to identify each person's 
relationship to the reference person, whether the person is a
household member, and, if the person is a household member, the 
reason the person entered the household. 

If you mark Box 2 in Item 14, verify that each household member 
listed in a previous enumeration period is still a household 
member by asking the household respondent the question in Item 
13c again. If you still get a "Yes" answer in Item 13c, then ask
the question in Item 13c for each nonhousehold member listed in a 
previous enumeration period to see if the person's status has 
changed. If you still get a "No" answer, then proceed with Item 
15a to collect information for housing unit coverage.

Documenting Household Composition
Changes on the Control Card

If you discover any changes in household composition between 
enumeration periods, make the appropriate entries and/or changes 
to the Control Card based on the examples described below.  
Also enter in Item 25a the appropriate two-digit code to 
indicate why the person either entered or left the household, 
along with the date (month and year)in which you discovered the 
household change.  A list of codes for Item 25a is printed in 
the top, right corner of the Control Card.

Person Leaves Permanently:
If a person leaves the household permanently (for a reason
other than death), draw a diagonal line through the person's 
line number in Item 12. In Item 25a, enter the appropriate code 
to indicate why the person left the household permanently and 
the month and year that you discovered the change. Codes 22 
through 25 are reasons (other than death) for a person leaving 
a household permanently.  

Person Died:
If a person listed in Item 13a has died, draw a wavy line
through his/her entire line from Item 12 through Item 24. 
In Item 25a, enter code 21 and the month and year that you
discovered this household change.

Adding a New Household Member:
After adding the person's name in Item 13a, filling Item 13b, 
and marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 13c, complete Items 16 through 
22 for the added household member, as appropriate. If you add 
a new household member after the initial interview with a 
household, enter the code that best describes the reason for 
this person becoming a household member and the month and year 
that you discover the change in Item 25a.  Codes 11 through 
15 are reasons for a person entering a household.

Adding a New Nonhousehold Member:
After adding the person's name in Item 13a, filling Item 13b, 
and marking Box 2 "No" in Item 13c, write the reason that the 
person is not a household member across Items 16 through 22 
for the person.  Here are some examples of acceptable reasons 
to enter across Items 16 through 22:

     --   Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere
     --   Patient - Mental institution
     --   Student - Usual residence elsewhere
     --   Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere
     --   Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere 

A Nonhousehold Member Becomes a Household Member:
When you determine in Item 13c that a nonhousehold member in a 
previous enumeration period is now a household member:

     --   Draw a diagonal line through Box 2 "No" in Item 13c.
     --   Mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 13c.
     --   Erase as completely as possible the reason entered
          across Items 16 through 22.
     --   Complete Items 16 through 22, as appropriate, for
          the newly added household member.
     --   In Item 25a, enter the code that best describes the
          reason for this person becoming a household
          member and the month and year that you discovered
          the change.

A Household Member Becomes a Nonhousehold
Member:
When you determine in Item 13c that a household member in a 
previous enumeration period is now a nonhousehold member:

     --   Draw a diagonal line through Box 1 "Yes" in Item 13c.
     --   Mark Box 2 "No" in Item 13c.
     --   Enter the reason for the person no longer being a
          household member across Items 16 through 22. 
          Here are some examples of acceptable reasons to
          enter across Items 16 through 22:

     --   Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere
     --   Patient - mental institution
     --   Student - Usual residence elsewhere
     --   Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere
     --   Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere 

Item 15a (GQ vs. Housing Unit )

Item 15a is a check item designed to help you in determining 
whether or not to complete Items 15b and 15c.  You will only 
complete Items 15b and 15c when the sample address identifies 
a housing unit.

GQ Unit

Mark Box 1 "In a GQ" when GQ information is entered in Item 
6d. After marking Box 1 in Item 15a, skip to Item 16.

Housing Unit

Mark Box 2 "Not in a GQ" when Item 6d is left blank and the 
sample address identifies a housing unit.  After marking Box 
2 in Item 15a, complete Item 15b.

Item 15b (All Persons Live or Eat 
Together)

Item 15b is designed to ensure that all household members 
listed in Item 13a actually live or eat together as one 
household. You can mark the appropriate box in Item 15b 
without asking the question when you are sure of the answer.  
However, if the answer is not apparent, ask the question in 
Item 15b.

Here are some examples of households in which you would not 
need to ask the question in Item 15b before marking the 
answer:

* A one-person household.

* A two-person household consisting of a reference person and 
spouse.

* A household consisting of a reference person, spouse, and 
their unmarried children under 18 years of age.

For most other household situations, it is safer to ask the
question in Item 15b before marking the answer.

Only Include Household Members

When you ask, "Do all persons in this household live or eat 
together?", "all persons" really means all household members 
listed in Item 13a. If Box 1 "Yes" is marked in Item 13c, 
then the person is a household member.  

Box 1 "Yes"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 15b if:

All household members live together OR

All household members eat together OR

All household members live AND eat together.

After marking Box 1 "Yes," continue with Item 15c.

Box 2 "No"

Mark Box 2 "No" in Item 15b if there is one household member 
or a group of household members who neither live NOR eat with 
the reference person.

After marking Box 2 "No," go to Table X on the reverse side 
of the Control Card and complete Table X for each household 
member or group of household members who do not live or eat 
with the reference person. Table X is used to identify EXTRA 
housing units during an interview.

(Also see Topic 7 of this chapter for more information
about Table X.)

Item 15c(Other Households Who Live or
Eat With the Sample Household)

Item 15c is designed to ensure that we do not miss any
merged housing units or other changes to the structure of
the sample housing unit, as well as garages, mobile homes,
and so forth, on the property that are used as overflow
sleeping quarters.  The question in Item 15c asks, "Does
any other household on the property live or eat with this
household?".

* The term "on the property" in Item 15c includes:

* The entire structure (or other type of living quarters
such as a mobile home or trailer) which contains the
sample unit,

* The land on which the structure stands,

* Any additional structures (or other types of living
quarters) on the same plot of land owned by the same 
person(s) who own the structure containing the sample 
unit, and

* Any adjacent land and structures (or other type of
living quarters) which are owned by the same person(s) 
who own the structure containing the sample unit.

* For cooperative and condominium units:
"Property" includes only the structure (or other type of
living quarters) in which the sample unit is located and
the ground on which it stands.

Box 1 "Yes"

Always ask the question in Item 15c before marking Box 1
"Yes."  If one or more other households on the property
live AND/OR eat with the sample household, mark Box 1
"Yes" and redefine the sample address to include the space
occupied by all persons on the property who live and/or
eat together.  Once you are done redefining the sample
address, continue with Item 16.  Procedures for handling
merged units are included in Appendix B of this manual. 

(Also see Topic 4, Chapter 7, of the Listing and Coverage
Manual for Field Representatives, Form 11-8, for more
information about merged units.) 

Box 2 "No"

If it is apparent that no other household on the property
lives or eats with the sample household, mark Box 2 "No"
without asking the question in Item 15c.  If you are not
sure, ask the question before marking the answer.  After
marking Box 2, continue with Item 16.

Topic 4.  Completing Items 16 Through 22 (Personal 
Characteristics)

General Information for Items 16 
Through 22

Items 16 through 22 are used to obtain personal characteristics 
(date of birth, age, marital status, and so forth) for each 
household member listed in Item 13a. Complete Items 16 through 
22, as applicable, for one household member before completing 
these items for the next household member listed in Item 13a.

Do not complete Items 16 through 22 for any nonhousehold members 
listed in Item 13a.  For each nonhousehold person listed in Item 
13a, write the reason that the person is not a household member 
across Items 16 through 22.  Here are some examples of acceptable
reasons to enter across Items 16 through 22:

    --   Visitor - Usual residence elsewhere
    --   Patient - Mental institution
    --   Student - Usual residence elsewhere
    --   Traveling for work - Usual residence elsewhere
    --   Armed Forces Member - Stationed elsewhere 

Item 16 (Date of Birth)

Item 16 is used to record each household member's exact date 
of birth.  Once you have entered a household member's date of 
birth in Item 16 during the first interview, you do not need 
to verify the person's date of birth in subsequent 
enumeration periods, unless the respondent tells you that 
the date is incorrect or you see that the date is incomplete.  
If you are unable to get an exact date of birth for a household 
member, enter an approximate date (for example, if the respondent 
only knows the month and year (October 1964), enter 10/NA/1964).  
Use "NA" for the part of the date that is not known.

Entering the Date of Birth

Use numerals for the entire date of birth, entering 2 digits
in the month column, 2 digits in the day column, and 4 digits 
in the year column (for example, 04/02/2000 for April 2, 2000).

When a household respondent is unsure of the exact date
of birth, you can:

Ask the individual respondent for his/her date of birth when 
you conduct the person's NCVS interview and then complete Item 
16.

Ask the household respondent to find out the person's date of 
birth so you can enter it in Item 16 during the next enumeration 
period.

Date of Birth is Refused

If the household respondent refuses to give you another
household member's date of birth, try to get the date of
birth directly from the household member when you
interview him/her.  If the household member refuses to
give you his/her date of birth, write "REF" across Item 16
and enter an estimate of the person's age in Item 17.

Item 17 (Age Last Birthday)

Each enumeration period, enter in Item 17 the age for every 
household member as of the last day of the month that precedes 
the interview month.  

Determining Household Member's Age

Starting with the person's date of birth in Item 16, determine 
the person's age by following the instructions on the "Age 
Verification Chart" located on page 5 of the NCVS-554, Field 
Representative's Information Card Booklet.  Make sure to verify 
the age with the household respondent before entering it in 
Item 17.  

Birthday in the Interview Month:
If you are conducting an interview on April 3 and the person's 
birthday was on April 1, do not enter the person's current age 
in Item 17.  Enter the person's age as of March 31(the last 
day of the month preceding the interview month). 

Birthday is Incomplete or Refused:
If you cannot get a person's complete date of birth (month,
day, and year) or the person's date of birth is refused, enter
your best estimate of the person's age in Item 17 and footnote 
the situation (for example, Item 17 - L2's est. age).  When 
estimating a person's age, do not enter an age range, instead 
enter a specific 2-digit number from "00" through "96."

Entering a Household Member's Age

Fill one digit in each space under the appropriate enumeration 
period column, even if the age has not changed from the last 
enumeration period.  

For Babies Under 1 Year:
Enter "00" in Item 17 for household members who are under 1 
year of age.

For Children 1 to 9 Years:
Enter a zero "0" for the first digit and the child's age as 
the second digit.

For Adults Over Age 96:
Enter "96" in Item 17 for an adult whose age is 97 or older.

Item 18 (Marital Status)

After looking at the name in Item 13a, the relationship
entries in Item 13b, and the age entered in Item 17, you
can often determine a household member's marital status
without asking the question in Item 18.  However, if there
is any doubt, ask the question in Item 18 as worded for all
household members who are 14 years of age and older. For 
household members who are under 14 years of age, enter Code 
5, Never married, without asking the question.

If an unrelated man and woman are living together and it
is not evident whether or not they consider themselves as
married to each other (either legally or by common law),
ask the question in Item 18 as worded or determine the
marital status without asking, if possible.

After the first interview, you do not need to update Item 18, 
unless you happen to discover a change in marital status. When 
you do discover a change in marital status:

Line through the original code,

Enter the current code above it, and

Footnote the situation in Item 30g (Notes) giving the date 
when you discovered the change (for example, Item 18 - L1 
now Code 4 (9/2003). 

Code 1 (Married)

Enter Code 1 (Married) in Item 18 when:

The person is currently married and living with his/her 
spouse.

The person is currently married, but is parted temporarily 
from his/her spouse for reasons other than marital discord 
(for example, employment, military service, spouse in nursing 
home, and so forth).

The person is not officially married, but is living with 
someone as husband and wife, such as a common-law marriage.

If the person is separated from his/her spouse due to marital 
discord, enter Code 4 (Separated).

Code 2 (Widowed)

Enter Code 2 (Widowed) in Item 18 when the household member's 
spouse has died and the person has not remarried. If not sure, 
ask the question in Item 18 as worded and accept the household 
respondent's answer.

Code 3 (Divorced)

Enter Code 3 (Divorced) when the person's divorce is final. 
If you suspect that the person's divorce is not final, ask 
the question in Item 18 as worded and accept the household 
respondent's answer.

Code 4 (Separated)

Enter Code 4 (Separated)when:

The person is married, but has a legal separation.

The person is married, but parted from his/her spouse because 
of marital discord.

The person expects to obtain a divorce in the future.

The person intends to remain separated from his/her spouse 
permanently and never get a divorce.

If the person is separated from his/her spouse for reasons
other than marital discord, enter Code 1 (Married).

Code 5 (Never Married)

Enter Code 5 (Never married) when the person has never
been married or the person's only marriage was annulled. 
Also enter Code 5, without asking, for children in the
household who are under 14 years of age.

Item 19 (Sex)

For each household member, mark Box 1 "Male" or Box 2
"Female," as appropriate.  You can usually determine the
household member's sex from the name in Item 13a or the
relationship entries in Item 13b. However, if there is any
doubt, ask the question in Item 19 and record the appropriate 
code for the household respondent's answer.

Item 20 (Armed Forces)

For each household member (male or female) ages 18 through 65, 
ask the question in Item 20.  Leave Item 20 blank when the 
household member is under 18 years of age or over 65 years of 
age.

A household member is considered as "in the Armed Forces" when 
the person is at least 18 years of age and not over 65 years of 
age and is serving on active duty at the time of interview in 
the:

* U.S. Army

* U.S. Navy

* U.S. Air Force

* U.S. Marine Corps

* Reserve branch of any of the above Armed Services and is 
currently on active duty status for several months

* U.S. Public Health Service as commissioned officers who are 
attached to any branch of the above Armed Services

* National Guard in Federal Service (if his/her unit has become 
part of regular forces by Presidential Order)

* United States military academies as Cadets (for example, West 
Point, Naval Academy, Air Force Academy, and the Coast Guard 
Academy).

Each of the military services has a regular component and
a reserve component.

Members of the regular component of any branch of the Armed 
Forces are always considered to be on active duty, unless they 
are retired.  Members of the reserve component of any branch 
of the Armed Forces are only considered to be on active duty 
when they have been called to active duty by military order 
and are currently on active duty for several months.

First Enumeration Period

Mark Box 1 (Yes) if the household member is currently in the 
Armed Forces on active duty.

Mark Box 2 (No) if the household member is not currently
on active duty in the Armed Forces.  Also mark Box 2 if
the household member:

Only serves in the Coast Guard Temporary Reserve

Is an employee of the Merchant Marines, Maritime Commission, 
or the American Field Service Department

Is a civilian employee of the Department of Defense

Serves in a National Guard unit not blanketed into the regular 
forces by Presidential order and is not serving the 4-6 months 
of active duty in connection with provisions of the Reserve 
Forces Act of 1955

Is in short periods of active reserve training or is attending 
weekly reserve meetings.

If you are still unsure which box to mark in Item 20, mark Box 
1 (Yes) and explain the situation using an INTER-COMM form.

Subsequent Enumeration Periods

When you see Box 1 marked in Item 20 for a household member, 
verify each enumeration period that the person is still an active 
duty member of the Armed Forces. If you discover that the person 
is no longer an active duty member of the Armed Forces, line 
through Box 1 and mark Box 2. Using the "Notes" space on the 
Control Card, note the change and the date that you discovered 
the change (for example, Item 20 - L2 separated from AF (6/2003).

If a household member has turned 18 years of age since the last 
interview, ask the question in Item 20 during the current 
interview.

If you happen to discover that any household member ages 18 to 
65 years has entered the Armed Forces on active duty since the 
last interview, line through Box 2 and mark Box 1 in Item 20.  
Using the "Notes" space on the Control Card, note the change 
and the date that you discovered the change (for example, 
Item 20 - L3 joined the AF (2/2003).

Item 21 (Educational Attainment)

Item 21 is designed to provide up-to-date information on the 
educational attainment of each household member who is 12 years 
of age or older.  Using the appropriate enumeration period column, 
enter the two-digit code to indicate the highest level of school 
completed or the highest degree received by the household member. 

When to Ask Item 21

During the first, third, fifth, and seventh enumeration
periods, ask Item 21 for one eligible household member
before asking Item 21 for the next eligible household
member.  Leave Item 21 blank for any household members
who are under 12 years of age during the reference period.

Under the following situations, also ask Item 21during an
enumeration period other than the first, third, fifth, and
seventh enumeration period:

* The household was not interviewed in the previous
enumeration period (first, third, or fifth).

* The person became a household member since the previous 
enumeration period.

* The person celebrated his/her 12th birthday since the
previous enumeration period.

If you suspect that a household member's educational
attainment level may have changed between the first/second, 
third/fourth, or fifth/sixth enumeration periods, verify 
this information with the household respondent. Whenever you 
verify that a change has occurred, line through the entry in 
Item 21 for the previous enumeration period and enter the 
appropriate 2-digit code at the time of your interview above 
the lined-through entry. 

For example, Pat Clark has Code 09 entered in Item 21 for
the first enumeration period in May 2003.  During the second 
enumeration period in November 2003, you verify that she is 
now attending tenth grade. If this is true, then line through 
Code 09 in the first enumeration period column and enter Code 
10 above it in the same column.

Education Codes for Item 21

A "Table of Education Codes" appears on page 8 of your 
Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554).  Shown below are
the available codes for Item 21, along with descriptions 
for these educational attainment codes.
                            
If interviewing during a household member's summer vacation 
from school, enter the appropriate code for the grade just 
completed, not the grade that he/she will attend in the fall.  

For persons who have skipped or repeated grades, enter the 
code for the highest grade completed, regardless of the number 
of years it took.
 
Special Situations for Item 21

Here are some examples for handling a response other than the 
highest grade or year completed:
                                           
Junior high/middle school:
Since junior high or middle school can cover different grades 
in different localities, probe to determine the highest grade 
or year completed and enter the appropriate code in Item 21. 
                                
High school equivalency tests:
Enter code 28 in Item 21 for persons who pass a high school 
equivalency test, such as the GED, or who receive a high 
school diploma while in the Armed Forces.
                                
Post-graduate high school:
Enter code 28 in Item 21 for persons who have received a
high school diploma and are attending post-graduate high
school courses in preparation for attending college.
                                
Miscellaneous school system:
Determine the equivalent grade in the American regular school 
system for household members who have obtained their formal 
education in foreign schools, ungraded schools, night schools 
or by the instruction of tutors (if counted toward promotion 
in the American regular school system), "readers" (roughly 
equivalent to regular grades), or "normal" schools.

Item 22 (Attending School)

Item 22 is designed to determine whether or not each household 
member who is 12 years of age or older is currently attending 
or enrolled in regular school (elementary or high school) or 
enrolled full-time or part-time in a college or university, 
trade, or vocational school. Ask the question in Item 22 in ALL 
enumeration periods. 

When asking Item 22 for a high school graduate, omit the phrase, 
"such as elementary or high school." In other words, omit this 
phrase when you enter code 28 or a higher educational attainment 
code in Item 21 for the person.

Code 0, Regular school

The term "regular school" includes both public and private
schools starting with kindergarten and continuing through
elementary, junior or middle, and high school, regardless
of whether the classes are graded or ungraded.  If a
household member is enrolled or attends special education
classes, but the school consists of mostly regular classes,
use Code 0 for the person.  However, if the person's
school is entirely for special education classes, use Code 4,
None of the above schools.

Code 1, College/University

Use Code 1, College/University, for each household
member who:

Has graduated from high school, and

Is currently enrolled in or attending a 2- or 4-year college 
or university or post-graduate school.

Code 2, Trade School

Use Code 2, Trade School, when a household member is enrolled 
in or attending a secondary school teaching a skilled trade 
that does not earn college credit.  A trade school prepares a 
person for a skilled trade, such as plumber or electrician. 
Most trade schools have apprentice/journeyman programs.

Code 3, Vocational School

Use Code 3, Vocational School, when a household member is 
enrolled in or attending a secondary school teaching a skill 
to help the person pursue a career, such as barber or 
cosmetology schools.  These courses do not earn college credit.

Code 4, None of the Above Schools

Use Code 4, None of the Above Schools, when the household 
member is:

* Not enrolled in or attending any type of school,
* Attending a home school,
* Attending a school devoted entirely to special education, 
  such as an alternative school, or
* Working on completing a GED.

Topic 5.  Completing Items 23 Through 25 (Hispanic Origin/Race/
Household Composition Changes)
                             
Item 23 (Hispanic or Spanish Origin)
                             
Always complete Items 16 through 22 for all household members, 
as applicable, before asking Item 23. Only ask Item 23 once to 
record whether or not each household member is Spanish, Hispanic, 
or Latino by his/her national, cultural, or language group.  
Always ask Item 23 during the first interview or when adding a 
household member during a subsequent enumeration period, 
regardless of the household member's race.
                                
For a personal visit interview, open the Information Card
Booklet (NCVS-554) to page 6 and show the Spanish Origin 
flashcard to the household respondent before asking Item 23.   
For a telephone interview, ask the Spanish origin question 
from page 6 of the Information Card Book including the 
Spanish Origin examples.

Purpose of Item 23
                            
If a respondent wants to know why we ask whether anyone is 
Spanish, Hispanic or Latino, explain that this information 
will enable us to tabulate crime victimization data for this 
group of people, since they comprise the second largest 
minority group in this country.

Completing Item 23
                               
After getting a "Yes" answer to Item 23, "Is anyone living 
here Spanish, Hispanic, or Latino?", ask which household 
members and mark Box 1 for each person identified by the 
household respondent. Then, mark Box 2 for any remaining 
household members.
                                
If a person has multiple origins and one origin is Spanish,
Hispanic, or Latino, mark Box 1 "Yes."
                                
If you get a "No" answer, mark Box 2 for each household 
member.
                                
If you get a "Don't know" answer, probe by asking if any
of the household members have a parent or grandparent who 
is Spanish, Hispanic or Latino. The following list may 
also help to determine whether or not a person is Spanish, 
Hispanic or Latino.
                                                      
When a household respondent is still unable to answer Item 
23 for a person, leave Item 23 blank for the person and 
enter a footnote in the "Notes" space of the Control Card 
(for example, Item 23-DK for LN ...).  

If a household respondent refuses to answer Item 23, leave it 
blank and enter a footnote in the "Notes" space of the Control 
Card (for example, Item 24-REF.).

Race (Item 24)

Ask Item 24 once for each household member to record up to 
four races that each household member considers him/herself 
to be.  Enter the appropriate race code(s) for each household 
member's race(s) based on the household respondent's answer.  
If you add any household members in subsequent enumeration 
periods, make sure to complete Item 24 for these added persons 
at that time.
                                
Before asking Item 24 for a personal visit interview, open
the Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554) to page 7 and show 
the Race flashcard to the household respondent.
                                
If you add a household member during a telephone interview, 
ask Item 24 and, if necessary, read the race categories from 
the list in the top, right corner of the Control Card.
                                
Do NOT mark race either by observation, probing, or asking 
a neighbor.  Since the Census Bureau bases race on self-
identification, you must ask this race question for each
household member even when it may seem obvious.

Race Codes for Item 24

A list of 1-digit race codes is printed in the top, right
corner of the Control Card.
                                
Once the household respondent has identified the household 
member's race, enter the appropriate 1-digit race code on 
that person's line in Item 24.  Only enter Code 6, "Other," 
as a last resort.  If you enter Code 6, then you also must 
enter the race description in the "Notes" space below Control 
Card Item 30g as follows, "Item 24-Code 6 (race description)."

Response is an ethnic origin:
If the answer is an ethnic origin (Italian, Irish, French,
Hispanic, German, and so forth), ask the household respondent 
to identify the racial group(s) each household member belongs 
based on the categories shown on the race flashcard.  A 
person's ethnic origin or ancestry does not automatically 
identify his/her race. 

Refusal:
If the household respondent refuses to give you any race
information for the household, leave Item 24 blank until
you interview each household member.  Then ask Item 24 of 
each household member.  If race is still refused, enter 
"REF" in the answer space for Item 24.

Item 25a (Changes in Household 
Composition)

Item 25a does not have a question for you to ask the
household respondent.  Use Item 25a to document
household composition changes as you discover that a
household member has entered or left the household since
the first interview.  Try to determine the reason for the
change without antagonizing the household respondent
with questions that may be too personal or specific.

Once you determine the reason for a household member
entering or leaving a household, find the appropriate       
2-digit reason code in the list printed in the top, right
corner of the Control Card.  Enter the appropriate code, the
reason given, and the month and year that you discover the
change in Item 25a.  If the reason will not fit in Item 25a,
use the "Notes" space on the Control Card.

Adding a Household Member

When a new person enters a household, you need to:

Add the person's name to the household roster using the next 
unused line in Item 13a.

Complete Item 13b to determine the new person's relationship 
to the reference person.

Complete Item 13c to determine if the new person qualifies 
as a household member.  

If you get a "Yes" answer in Item 13c, complete Items 16 through 
22 for the new household member, as applicable.  In Item 25a, 
enter the appropriate code (11 - 15), the reason given, and the 
month and year you discover the household change.  For example, 
"Code 14/Married L1/7-2003" or "Code 13/Released from prison/
9-2003."  

If you get a "No" answer in Item 13c, enter the reason the 
person is not a household member across Items 16 through 22.

If a household member has been deleted from a household roster 
and then returns while the household is still in sample, erase 
the diagonal line in Item 12 and use the same line number to 
complete the other applicable items that may need to be updated.  
In Item 25a, enter the appropriate code, the reason that the 
person entered the household, and the month and year that you 
discovered this change.

Deleting a Household Member

Person dies:
If a person in a household dies, draw a wavy line through the 
person's entire line from Item 12 through Item 24. In Item 25a, 
enter Code (21), "Person died," and the month and year you 
discovered this change.

Person leaves household:
If a person leaves a household and is not just temporarily
absent, draw a diagonal line through the person's line number 
in Item 12.  In Item 25a, enter the appropriate code, the 
reason that the person left, and the month and year you 
discover this change.  For example, "Code 22/Attending College/
10-2003" or "Code 25/Active military duty overseas/7-2003."

NOTE:  Once a person has left a household, make sure
       that you do not read the person's name at
       subsequent interviews when checking the
       household roster at Control Card Item 14.

Person's Household Membership 
Changes

If you discover that a person, who was listed as a URE
(usual residence elsewhere) in a previous enumeration
period, is now a household member, line through Box 2 in
Item 13c and mark Box 1.  Also complete Items 16 through 
24, as applicable.  In Item 25a, enter the appropriate code, 
the reason for the person entering the household, and the 
month and year you discovered the change.  For example, 
"Code 15/Returned from active military duty overseas/8-2003."

Item 25b (Date of Interview)

First enumeration period:
Once you complete a household member's entire NCVS interview 
(the NCVS-1 and NCVS-2s for all reported incidents), transcribe 
the month, day, and year from the person's Item 29 on the 
NCVS-1 to Control Card Item 25b. 

Subsequent enumeration periods 2 - 7:
Once you complete a household member's entire NCVS interview 
(the NCVS-1 and NCVS-2s for all reported incidents), erase the 
date entered for the previous interview, and transcribe the 
month, day, and year from the person's Item 29 on the NCVS-1 
to Control Card Item 25b.

Type Z Noninterview Persons

When you classify a household member (other than the household 
respondent)as a Type Z noninterview because you cannot 
complete the person's interview, erase the interview date from 
the previous enumeration period and leave Item 25b blank for 
the Type Z noninterview person. Remember that a household 
respondent can never be a Type Z noninterview.

Type A Noninterview Case

Whenever you are unable to complete at least the household 
respondent's NCVS interview, you will classify the case as a 
Type A noninterview.  Leave all lines in Item 25b blank when 
the household is a Type A noninterview for the current 
enumeration period.

Importance of Item 25b

The date that you enter in Item 25b is used as the starting
date for the household member's next reference period, so it 
is very important that this date be accurate.

Item 25c(Length of Time Living at 
the Address)

Item 25c is used to determine the length of continuous time 
in years and months that each household member has lived at 
a sample address.  Unlike Item 25b, complete/update Item 25c 
for each household member even if the person is a Type Z 
noninterview for the current enumeration period.

First enumeration period:
Before starting the NCVS-1 interview with a household
respondent, ask the question in Item 25c of the household
respondent and for each household member at the sample
address.  Accept the answer given by the household
respondent without probing.  

However, if the household respondent hesitates or is not
sure how to answer this question, explain that we are
interested in the continuous length of time a person has
been a household member at the sample address.  For
example, John leaves his parents' home to live and work as
a chef in Seattle a month after the second interview. 
Unfortunately, the restaurant closes and John moves back
with his parents 5 months before the household's sixth
interview.  For the sixth enumeration period, John's length
of time living at the sample address is 5 months (the last
continuous length of time since he returned to the sample
address).

Subsequent enumeration periods:
After the first interview with a sample household, you can
update each household member's entry in Item 25c without
asking the question.  Just add 6 months to the entry from
the previous interview, erase the old entry, and enter the
updated length of time for the current enumeration period.  

However, if you add a new household member, ask the
question in Item 25c for each new person added to the
household roster.  Also, if the household was a Type A
noninterview in the previous enumeration period, ask the
question in Item 25c for all household members, including
any Type Z noninterview persons.

Recording Answers in Item 25c

Record separately for each household member the length
of time he/she has lived continuously at the sample
address in "years" and "months." Do NOT round up or
down for the number of years.  For example, do not round
up to 7 years an answer of 6 years and 10 months.  Enter
both the years and months in the appropriate columns of
Item 25c.

Answer is less than 1 year:
Leave the "years" column blank in Item 25c and enter the
number of months the person has lived continuously at the
sample address in the "months" column.  

Answer is less than one month:
If the answer is less than one month, always enter "1" month 
in the "months" column.  This is the only time that rounding 
up is acceptable for Item 25c.

Answer is given in weeks:
If the household respondent answers in weeks, convert the
weeks to months.  For example, if you are given an answer
of 10 weeks, convert the "10 weeks" to 3 months and enter
"3" in the "months" column of Item 25c.

Answer is "all of his/her life":
When a household respondent tells you that the household
member has lived at the sample address all of his/her life,
in the "years" column of Item 25c, enter the person's age

from Control Card Item 17.  In this case, it is not
necessary to enter anything in the "months" column.

Answer is vague or in ranges:
When a household respondent's answer is vague or in ranges, 
probe to get a more precise response. Here are some examples:

If the household respondent can only give you an estimated 
length of time, enter the estimated length of time in the 
appropriate columns and print "EST" beside the entry in Item 
25c.

If the household respondent really doesn't know how long
a household member has lived at a sample address and
cannot give you a good estimate, enter "DK" in Item 25c.

Topic 6. Completing Items 26 Through 29 (Use of Telephone/
Building Characteristics/Household Income

Use of Telephone(Items 26a - 26f)

At the end of your first interview with a sample household,
ask the questions in Items 26a through 26f of the household 
respondent.  As a lead-in to these questions, explain that 
the household will be interviewed a total of seven times at 
6-month intervals.  Also, explain that we try to:

Limit survey costs by conducting future interviews by telephone 
and

Ensure that we contact each household at an acceptable time of 
day.

You can also tell a household respondent that we may need a 
household's telephone number to:

Make appointments to visit other household members, when 
a personal visit is necessary.

Obtain any missing information that a respondent may be 
unable to supply during an interview.

Clarify facts or answers provided during an interview.

Verifying Use of Telephone

During the second through seventh enumeration periods, verify 
any telephone numbers entered in Item 26c and correct Items 
26a through 26f, as needed.  For example, you might discover 
that a household now has a telephone in their home and no 
longer uses their mother's telephone. In this case, you would 
correct Items 26a through 26c. Also, ask the question in Item 
26d again.

Item 26a (Telephone in House/Apartment)

Before asking for a telephone number, you need to determine 
whether there is a telephone in the house/apartment by asking 
the question in Item 26a.

Box 1 (Yes)

If there is a telephone in the sample house/apartment, mark
Box 1 and skip to Item 26c to record the telephone number.

Box 2 (No)

If the household does not have a telephone in their house/
apartment, mark Box 2 and then ask the question in Item 26b 
to determine if there might be a telephone elsewhere on which 
some or all of the household members can be reached. Since 
we prefer that you conduct all interviews by telephone 
following the initial interview, it is important to obtain a 
telephone number to reach most, if not all, household members.

Item 26b (Telephone Elsewhere)

Households that do not have their own telephone sometimes have 
access to a neighbor's telephone or a hall telephone where they 
can receive calls.  Ask the initial question in Item 26b,"Is 
there a telephone elsewhere on which people in this household 
can be contacted?".

For a "Yes" Answer

If the answer is "Yes," ask where the telephone is located
and mark:

Box 2 if there is a telephone available in a common area, 
such as a hall or lobby.

Box 3 if there is a telephone available in another housing 
unit, such as a neighbor's or relative's home.

Box 4 when an office or work telephone is the only
telephone on which you can reach most of the household 
members.

For a "No" Answer

If you get a "No" answer to the initial question in Item 26b, 
mark Box 5 "No phone" and skip to Item 26e to determine the 
best time to conduct personal visit interviews in the future.

Item 26c (Telephone Number)

Ask the question in Item 26c to record up to two telephone
numbers when:

* Box 1 is marked in Item 26a or

* Box 2, 3, or 4 is marked in Item 26b.

Telephone Number(s) Provided

Use a separate line in Item 26c for each phone number given and 
make sure to enter the area code in the parentheses. If a second 
phone number is an office or work number, note that fact after 
the number.

Respondent Is Hesitant or Refuses

If the household respondent is hesitant or uneasy about
providing you with a phone number, assure him/her that
we will keep the number strictly confidential.  Sometimes
the respondent will allow telephone calls to set appointments 
or to collect missing information, but not to be interviewed.  
If this happens, enter the telephone number, mark Box 2 "No" 
in Item 26d, and note in Item 26d that the telephone number 
is to be used only for setting appointments or adding missing 
information.  

When you cannot persuade a household respondent to give you 
the phone number, mark the "Refused number" box in Item 26c 
and skip to Item 26e where you will record the best time of 
day to visit the household in the future.

Item 26d (Telephone Interview 
Acceptable)

Whenever you record a telephone number in Item 26c, ask the 
question in Item 26d to make sure that a telephone interview 
is acceptable.

Box 1 (Yes)

If the household respondent answers "Yes," mark Box 1 "Yes" 
and remind the respondent that conversations could be overheard 
if the household has a "party" line.

Box 2 (No)

Mark Box 2 "No" when:

The household respondent refuses to provide a telephone 
number.  In this case, mark the answer without asking the 
question in Item 26d.

The household respondent does not want to be interviewed by 
telephone. If a reason is given, note the reason in Item 26d, 
but do not probe for a reason.

A telephone number is provided in Item 26c, but only for 
setting appointments or collecting missing information. Make 
sure to note this fact in Item 26d.

Item 26e (Best Time)

Mark only one box to indicate the time of day that is best to 
reach an adult household member, since you must interview the 
household respondent first during each enumeration period.  
Word the question in Item 26e based on whether or not a telephone 
interview is acceptable. Make sure to verify the information in 
Items 26a and 26e each enumeration period and make corrections, 
as needed.

In addition to marking the appropriate box for the best time 
of day to contact the household, you can use the "Notes" space 
in Item 26e to:

* Enter a specific day of the week that the household
respondent prefers, in addition to marking a box for
the time of day.

* Enter days or times of day that the household respondent 
does not want to be bothered.  However, if the person tells 
you not to contact them on a Sunday, just mark Box 2 "No" in 
Item 26f.

Item 26f (Sunday Interview)

Always ask the question in Item 26f to find out whether or not 
a Sunday interview is acceptable.  Mark Box 1 if a Sunday 
interview is acceptable and Box 2 if a Sunday interview is not 
acceptable.

Using the Information From 
Items 26a Through 26f

Always review these items before starting an assignment, so 
that you are:

More likely to reach respondents at home,

Less likely to upset respondents by contacting them
when they have asked not to be contacted, and

More likely to plan your work days more efficiently.

Item 27a (Units in Structure)

Complete Item 27a once you have completed Item 26f. If you 
are sure how to mark Item 27a by your observations, mark the 
appropriate box without asking the question. However, if there 
is any doubt in your mind, ask the question of the household 
respondent and mark the appropriate box to indicate the number 
of housing units in the structure.

What Is a Structure?

A structure is a separate building that either:

* Has open space on all sides (no other building attached 
to it) or

* Is separated from other structures by dividing walls that 
extend from ground to roof.

Consider the following residential buildings to be separate
structures if the common wall between them goes from ground 
to roof:

Double houses

Duplex houses

Row houses

Houses attached to nonresidential structures.

Sheds and private garages attached to houses are not considered 
separate structures because they are not intended for occupancy 
as separate living quarters.

What Is a Housing Unit?

A housing unit is a group of rooms or a single room occupied 
as separate living quarters or intended for occupancy as 
separate living quarters.  A housing unit may be occupied by 
a family or one person, as well as by two or more unrelated 
persons who share the living quarters.

(See page 7-4 of the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field 
Representatives (Form 11-8) for more information about 
separate living quarters and direct access.)

Single-Unit Structures

If you mark Box 1 or Box 7 because there is only one housing 
unit in the structure, do not complete Item 27b and skip to 
Item 28.

Multi-Unit Structures

If you mark Box 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 because there are two or
more housing units in the structure, complete Item 27b to
inquire about direct access from outside the structure.

Group Quarters Units

If the sample address identifies a group quarters (GQ) unit,
mark Box 8 "Only OTHER units."

Item 27b (Direct Access From Outside)

When you are sure how to mark Item 27b by your observations, 
mark the appropriate box without asking the question. However, 
if there is any doubt in your mind, ask the question of the 
household respondent and mark the appropriate box.

Box 1 (Yes)

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if there is some means of entering the sample 
unit directly from the outside, such as a door, patio doors, or 
windows at ground level (even if there are locks and/or bars to 
prevent entrance) and outside stairs (such as porch, deck, or 
fire escape stairs) that lead directly to an outside entrance 
for the sample unit.

Box 2 (No)

Mark Box 2 "No" when there is no direct access into the sample 
unit from outside of the structure and the only entrance to the 
sample unit is through a common hall from within the structure, 
such as a common hall into a second floor apartment.

Item 28 (Household Income)

During the first interview with a household, show the household 
respondent the flashcard on page 15 in your Information Card 
Booklet (NCVS-554) and then ask the question in Item 28 to 
determine the household's total combined income.  You also 
need to update Item 28 during the third, fifth, and seventh 
enumeration periods. Ask or verify Item 28 with the household 
respondent once you have completed Items 27a and 27b, as 
required.

For Personal Visit Interviews

Just before reading the question in Item 28, show the household 
respondent the Household Income Flashcard on page 15 in your I
information Card Booklet.  After reading the question, allow 
the respondent time to read the categories, make an estimate, 
and respond.  When necessary, help the respondent by adding 
each household members income and/or the income from all 
sources to get the total combined income.

For Telephone Interviews
                                                             
After the first personal visit interview, in most cases, 
your remaining interviews at the sample address will be 
conducted by telephone.  During the third, fifth, and 
seventh enumeration periods, read the question slightly 
different since you are unable to show a flashcard to the 
respondent. Instead of reading, "Which category on this 
card...", say, "Which category represents..." and continue 
reading the rest of the question and each income category 
from Control Card Item 28 until the respondent identifies 
the appropriate income category.
                                                               
If necessary, explain that we do not need the respondent to
identify the actual amount of the total household income, 
just the income range that it falls within. If the respondent 
is unable to give you an income range or an amount, read the 
answer category that was marked previously, along with the 
category just below it and just above it.

What to Include

A respondent may ask you what type of income to include in 
his/her total.  Here are the types of income that a
respondent should include in the combined household income:

* Income received from jobs
                                                               
* Net income from business, farm, or rent
                                                               
* Pensions

* Dividends and interest
                                                               
* Social security payments

* Alimony and child support
                                                               
* Public assistance                                       
* Any other money received by household members who are 14 
years of age or older.
                                                               
We are interested in the household's combined income during 
the 12 months immediately preceding the date of interview--not 
the last calendar year--unless they happen to coincide. Do not 
specifically ask a respondent to look for tax records; however, 
a respondent can use income tax records to help him/her to 
compare the last calendar year's income with the income in 
the 12-month period preceding the interview.  
                                                               
Make sure that the respondent's answer includes the money 
income received during the 12 months immediately preceding 
the interview and covers the reference person and each 
household member who is 14 years of age and older.  Do not 
include income from persons who are listed in the household 
roster, but are not household members.  If necessary, name 
each household member who is 14 years of age and older so 
that the household respondent understands whose money income 
we want to include.

What to Exclude

We do not want the respondent to include:
                                      
x "In kind" income, such as room and board, free meals in a 
restaurant, value of crops produced by a farmer and consumed 
by his family, and so forth.
                                            
x Insurance payments or lump-sum inheritances.
                                  
x Occasional gifts of money from persons not living in the 
household or any exchanges of money between relatives living 
in the same household.
                                                               
x Money received from selling one's own home, car, or other 
personal property.
                                                               
x Savings withdrawals from banks.
                                                               
x Tax refunds. 

Special Situations for Item 28

If a household respondent reports no income, a loss, or that 
they "broke even," mark Box 1 "Less than $5,000." Make sure 
that the respondent understands what type of income we want 
included and from which persons in the household, before 
accepting an answer of "No income."
                                                               
In difficult cases, try to assist the respondent by probing 
to find out:
                                                               
Which household members worked during the last 12 months.
                                                               
How much money each working household member (14 years of 
age and older) earned each week or pay period.
                                                               
Whether or not any household members operated a business or 
a farm during the last 12 months.
                                                               
Whether or not any household members received a pension, 
dividends, interest, and so forth.
                                                               
Avoid "Don't know" or "Refused" answers if at all possible.

Reassuring Respondents

You may encounter a respondent who knows the household income, 
but is reluctant to tell you because he/she does not think we 
need to know or does not see why it would be necessary for the 
survey.  If so, explain that information such as income, race, 
and sex are essential for providing statistics which reflect 
the crime experiences for various segments of the United 
States population.

Item 29a (Control Number)

You only need to complete Item 29a if you are completing a 
Control Card for an EXTRA unit discovered during an interview.  
An EXTRA unit is any unlisted separate living quarters that 
is:
                                                               
Discovered by chance during an interview or when asking the 
household coverage questions,
                                                               
Associated with the sample unit, and
                                                               
Not likely to have had a chance of being selected for a sample.
                                                               
(See Appendix B of this manual for more information about EXTRA 
units.)
                                                               
If you discover an EXTRA unit during an interview, enter the 
original or parent unit's control number in Item 29a. This 
would be the PSU, segment, check digit, and serial number 
from Item 2 on the original Control Card.

Item 29b (Listing Sheet Identification)

You only need to complete Item 29b if you discover an EXTRA 
unit during an area segment interview. If you should discover 
an EXTRA unit during an area segment interview, locate the 
line number for the first unit listed at the basic address 
on the area segment listing sheet.  Then enter the listing 
sheet number and the line number for the first unit on the 
appropriate lines for Item 29b. Keep in mind that the first 
unit at the address may or may not be the original or parent 
unit for the EXTRA unit.

Topic 7. Completing Items 30 Through Table X (Record of 
Visits and Telephone Calls/Noninterview Reason/Notes/
Bounding Information/Noninterview Contact Person/Determining 
EXTRA Units 

Item 30a (Enumeration Period)

Each enumeration period, you will record information about 
any visits and/or telephone calls that you make to the sample 
address in Item 30. To help you record this information, Item 
30a assigns an enumeration period to each row for Item 30.

Items 30b and 30c (Interview 
Month/Year and Line Number of 
Household Respondent)

Complete Items 30b and 30c once you have completed the 
household respondent's interview.  In Item 30b, use the
appropriate line for the current enumeration period and
enter the month and year of interview (for example,
1/2003).  In Item 30c, use the appropriate line for the
current enumeration period and enter the circled line
number from Item 12 to identify the household respondent
for the current interview.

Items 30d and 30e (Tally of Personal 
Visits and Telephone Calls)

Item 30d is divided into two columns--B and A--for recording 
personal visits to the sample address.  Using the appropriate 
line for the enumeration period, enter a tally mark ( / )in 
column B for each personal visit that you make to the sample 
address before 5 p.m.  Enter a tally mark ( / ) in column A 
for each personal visit that you make to the sample address 
after 5 p.m.

Do not make a tally mark in Item 30d when you travel by the 
sample address, but you do not stop at the address or attempt 
to speak to someone at the address. 

Item 30e is divided into two columns--B and A--for recording 
telephone calls to the sample address.  Using the appropriate 
line for the enumeration period, enter a tally mark ( / )in 
column B for each telephone call that you make to the sample 
address before 5 p.m.  Enter a tally mark( / )in column A 
for each telephone call that you make to the sample address 
after 5 p.m.

Make a tally mark in the appropriate column of Item 30e for 
every phone call that you make to the sample address,
regardless of the reason (for example, setting appointments, 
getting missing information, and so forth). Also count phone 
calls when you are not successful in reaching someone.

Item 30f (Noninterview Reason)

Whenever you are unable to interview a sample household, use 
the appropriate line for the enumeration period and enter in 
Item 30f the correct letter (A, B, or C)to identify the type 
of noninterview for the sample address and the correct two-
digit reason code (for example, A03 for Type A, Refused). A 
list of noninterview reason codes grouped together by 
noninterview type is printed next to Control Card Item 33 and 
is also provided on the next page.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 6, for more details about
noninterviews.)

Items 30g and 30h(Notes and CATI Recycle)

In Item 30g, use the appropriate line for the enumeration
period and enter the date and time for any callback
appointments that you set up.  Also, enter your Field
Representative Code, along with any notes that you enter
in Item 30g.

In Item 30h, for enumeration periods two through seven,
use the appropriate line and mark the "Yes" box if your
regional office has instructed you to interview a "CATI
Hold" case, because it was not completed during the CATI
interviewing period.  A "Yes" box does not appear for the
first enumeration period, because all first enumeration
period interviews must be conducted in person.

Item 31 (Supervisor's Use)

Leave Item 31 blank, because this item is for the sole use
of your supervisor. Ignore any entries that you may see in
Item 31.

Item 32(Bounding Information)

Since the information that you enter in Item 32 is used as
an important tool for ensuring NCVS quality, it is imperative 
for you to complete each part of this item accurately. Once 
you end your visit or telephone call to a sample address, you 
must complete a separate line of Item 32 for each NCVS-2, 
Crime Incident Report, that you complete for the sample 
household.  When a sample household does not report any 
incidents, just leave Item 32 blank. 

We refer to the information that you enter in Item 32 as
"bounding information."  After completing your summary
report in Check Item W of the NCVS-2, you are instructed
to check the bounding information for previous enumeration 
periods.  This procedure is required to avoid collecting 
duplicate information about incidents. If a respondent 
reports an incident that is similar to one described in 
Item 32, you need to ask probing questions of the respondent 
to determine whether or not the incidents are identical or 
separate incidents.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 7, for more information 
about Bounding Interviews.)

Filling Item 32a

In Item 32a, enter the number to identify the enumeration
period (1 through 7).

Filling Item 32b

In Item 32b, enter either a "Y" or an "N" to indicate whether 
or not the incident is a "series incident."  When Box 2 is 
marked in Check Item D on the NCVS-2 for the incident, then 
the reported incident is a "series incident" and you would 
enter a "Y" in Item 32b.

Enter an "N" in Control Card Item 32b when the NCVS-2 shows 
that:

* Box 1 is marked in Check Item B,

* Box 2 is marked in Check Item C, or

* Box 1 is marked in Check Item D.

(See Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 2, for more information about 
series incidents.) 

Filling Item 32c

Use Item 32c to indicate when the incident happened.  

Incident is not a series incident:
When the incident is not a series incident, transcribe the 
month and year from Item 3 of the NCVS-2 onto Control Card 
Item 32c (for example, 11/2003).

Incident is a series incident:
When the incident is a series incident, transcribe the most
recent quarter and year entered in Item 155 of the NCVS-2
onto Control Card Item 32c (for example, Qtr. 2/2002).

Filling Item 32d

In Item 32d, enter an incident description that will enable
anyone to identify it easily at a later date.  Make sure that
your incident description is complete and clear enough so you 
or anyone else can determine what took place during the 
incident without difficulty.

Try to confine your incident description to one line and print 
one letter in each space.  Here are a few examples of incident 
descriptions for Item 32d:

* Home broken into/family away/radio, TV, jewelry taken

* L2 raped in car/off. had weapon/L2 injured/off.
  arrested

Filling Item 32e

In Item 32e, transcribe the respondent's line number from Item 
1a of the NCVS-2 onto Control Card Item 32e.

Item 33(Noninterview Contact Person)

When you are unable to conduct an NCVS interview for anyone in 
a sample household, you still need to obtain some information 
about the sample household that you will enter on the NCVS-7, 
Noninterview Record. Normally, you will contact a neighbor, 
apartment manager, or some knowledgeable person in the area to 
get this information. In Control Card Item 33, you will enter
the following information about the contact person:

His/her name

A description of the person you contacted (neighbor, mail 
carrier, apartment manager, and so forth)

His/her address

His/her telephone number.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 6, Topic 1, for an overview of
noninterviews and noninterview procedures.)

1990 Table X

As you complete the coverage questions in Control Card Items 
7 and 15, you could be instructed to fill Table X to
determine whether the sample address has more than one
separate living quarters.  Run through the appropriate steps
in Table X based on the segment type and skip instructions
for each living quarters suspected of qualifying as an
EXTRA unit.

Definition of Separate Living 
Quarters

A separate living quarters is one in which the occupants 
live and eat separately from all other persons on the 
property, and have direct access to their living quarters 
from the outside or through a common hall or lobby (as 
found in apartment buildings).

Filling Column (1)

When filling Table X, you must start with column (1),
regardless of the segment type.  Before you can mark the
correct box in column (1):

Check the listing sheet to see if the address of the
additional living quarters is already listed. If the
original sample unit is a single-unit address in a unit
segment, you will not have a listing sheet.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (1):
When the additional living quarters is already listed on the 
listing sheet for the assigned segment and could have a chance 
of selection for a sample, mark the "Yes" box in Column (1).  
Stop filling Table X because this additional living quarters 
is not an EXTRA unit just discovered during your interview.  

After marking the "Yes" box, continue the interview with 
the original sample unit and do not include household 
members from the additional living quarters with the 
household members from the original sample unit.

Mark the "No" box in Column (1):
When the additional living quarters is not listed on the 
listing sheet for the assigned segment or there is no 
listing sheet, because the original sample unit is a
single-unit address in a unit segment, mark the "No"
box in Column (1).

After marking the "No" box, continue with:

--   Column (2) for area segments,
        
--   Column (4) for permit segments,

--   Column (5) for unit segments when the original
     sample address is a single-unit, or

--   Column (6) for unit segments when the original
     sample address is in a multi-unit structure (such
     as an apartment building).

Filling Column (2) for Area Segments

You will only fill column (2) if:
The original sample address is located in an area segment, 
and 

You mark the "No" box in column (1) because the additional 
living quarters is not already listed on the Area Segment 
Listing Sheet, Form 11-5.

Refer to the assigned area segment map and determine
whether or not the additional living quarters is located
within the same area segment boundaries as the original
sample unit.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (2):
If the additional living quarters is within the same area 
segment boundaries as the original sample unit, mark the 
"Yes" box and continue filling Table X by going to column 
(3).

Mark the "No" box in Column (2):
If the additional living quarters is not located within
the same area segment as the original sample address, mark 
the "No" box and stop filling Table X. Do not interview 
anyone residing at the additional living quarters and 
continue the interview with the original sample address.

Filling Column (3)for Area 
Segments

You will only fill column (3) if:

The additional living quarters is located in the same area 
segment as the original sample unit and

You marked the "Yes" box in column (2).

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (3):
If the additional living quarters is located in a group
quarters, mark the "Yes" box, stop filling Table X, and 
do not interview anyone residing at the additional living 
quarters.

Mark the "No" box in Column (3):
If the additional living quarters is not located in a group 
quarters, mark the "No" box in column (3) and continue 
filling Table X by skipping to column (7).

Filling Column (4) for Permit 
Segments

You will only fill column (4) if:
The original sample address is located in a permit segment, 
and 

You marked the "No" box in column (1) because the additional 
living quarters is not already listed on the Unit/Permit 
Listing Sheet, Form 11-3.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (4):
Before marking the "Yes" box in column (4), make sure that 
the additional living quarters is within the same structure 
AND within the same space occupied by the original sample unit 
(for example, a structure that was used as a single-family 
house and now contains two rental units).  After marking the 
"Yes" box in column (4), continue filling Table X by skipping 
to column (7).

Mark the "No" box in Column (4):
If the additional living quarters is outside of the structure 
AND space occupied by the original sample unit, mark the "No" 
box in column (4), stop filling Table X, and do not interview 
anyone residing at the additional living quarters.

Filling Column (5) for Single-Units in 
Unit Segments

Since you will not receive a listing sheet when the original
sample unit is a single unit in a unit segment, you will

mark the "No" box in column (1) automatically and continue 
Table X by skipping to column (5).

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (5):
If the additional living quarters uses the same basic address 
(house number and street name) as the original sample unit, 
mark the "Yes" box in column (5) and continue filling Table X 
by skipping to column (7).

Mark the "No" box in Column (5):
If the additional living quarters uses a different basic
address from the original sample unit, mark the "No" box in 
column (5), stop filling Table X, and do not interview anyone 
residing in the additional living quarters.

Filling Column (6) for Multi-Units 
in Unit Segments

You will only fill column (6) if:

* The original sample unit is located in a multi-unit structure 
in a unit segment., and

* You marked the "No" box in column (1) because the additional 
living quarters is not already listed on the Unit/Permit 
Listing Sheet, Form 11-3.

Mark the "Yes" box in Column (6):
Before marking the "Yes" box in column (6), both of the 
following conditions must be met:

--   The additional living quarters must be within the
     same space as the original sample unit, AND

--   The additional living quarters must be the result
     of a split apartment.    

If both conditions are met, mark the "Yes" box in column (6) 
and continue completing Table X by going to column (7).

Mark the "No" box in Column (6):
If the additional living quarters does not meet both of the 
conditions listed above, mark the "No" box in column (6), stop 
filling Table X, and do not interview anyone residing at the 
additional listing quarters.

Filling Column (7)

Before an additional living quarters can be considered an
EXTRA housing unit, it must meet the criteria for 
"separateness."  The question in column (7) is designed to 
determine whether the occupants or intended occupants of
the additional living quarters live and eat separately from
all other persons on the property.

Mark the "Yes" box in column (7):
If you determine that the occupants or intended occupants of 
the additional living quarters live and eat separately from 
all other persons on the property, mark the "Yes" box in 
column (7) and continue filling Table X by going to column 
(8).

Mark the "No" box in column (7):
If you find that the occupants or intended occupants of the 
additional living quarters do not live and eat separately from 
all other persons on the property, mark the "No" box in column 
(7) because the additional living quarters does not qualify as 
a separate housing unit. Stop filling Table X, include the 
occupants as part of the original unit, and continue the 
interview for the original sample unit.

Filling Column (8)

Another component of "separateness" involves "direct access."  
Once you determine in column (7) that the occupants of the 
additional living quarters live and eat separately from all 
other persons on the property, then you need to determine 
whether the occupants or the intended occupants have direct 
access from the outside of the additional living quarters or 
through a common hall.

Mark the "Yes" box in column (8):
Once you determine that the occupants or the intended occupants 
of the additional living quarters have direct access, mark the 
"Yes" box in column (8).  At this point, you have completed the
process of determining that the additional living quarters does 
qualify as an EXTRA housing unit. After marking the "Yes" box 
in column (8), go to column (9).

Mark the "No" box in column (8):
If the additional living quarters does not have direct access 
from the outside or through a common hall, mark the "No" box 
in column (8).  Since the additional living quarters does not 
qualify as an EXTRA housing unit, stop filling Table X, include
the occupants of the additional living quarters with the original 
sample unit, and continue the interview for the original sample 
unit.

Filling Column (9)

It is possible that you could discover more than one EXTRA unit 
while interviewing at a sample address. Column (9) is designed 
to provide you with instructions on how to proceed when you 
discover more than 3 EXTRA units at a sample address or less 
than 3 EXTRA units at a sample address.

Mark the "Yes" box in column (9):
If you discover more than 3 EXTRA units at the
sample address:

--   Mark the "Yes" box in column (9).

--   Call your regional office for instructions on
     which EXTRA units to interview.

--   Using the appropriate listing sheet, enter the
     basic address and unit designations (if any) for
     the EXTRA units discovered.  Make sure that
     each unit is uniquely described so that another
     field representative will be able to distinguish
     them from one another.

--   Complete a Control Card and the appropriate
     questionnaires for each EXTRA unit that your
     regional office instructs you to interview.

Mark the "No" box in column (9):
If you discovered between 1 and 3 EXTRA units at the sample 
address:

--   Mark the "No" box in column (9).

--   Enter the basic address and unit designation (if
     any) of each EXTRA unit on the appropriate
     listing sheet.  Make sure that each unit is
     uniquely described so that another field
     representative will be able to distinguish them
     from one another.

--   Complete a Control Card and the appropriate
     questionnaires for each EXTRA unit that you
     discovered.

Part B, Chapter 2

Chapter 2
Completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

Table of Topics
                             
1  General Instructions
                              
2  Completing Items 1 Through 16 (Cover Page)
                           
3  Completing Items 17 Through 28(Personal Characteristics)

4  Completing Items 29 Through Check Item E (Mobility/
   Businesses/Theft/Breakins/Motor Vehicles/Specific
   Locations/Use of Weapons/Known Offenders/ Unwanted Sexual
   Acts/Catch-all Questions/Computer Crime/Proxy Help)

5  Completing Items 46 Through Check Item I (Vandalism/Crimes 
   During Vandalism/Hate Crimes/Transcribing Number of Incidents/
   Employment Questions)

Topic 1.  General Instructions

Definition

The NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire, is used to determine 
whether each eligible household member (12 years of age or older) 
at the sample address was victimized by crime during the member's 
6-month reference period. The NCVS-1 consists of four parts and 
you will complete an NCVS-1 for each sample household that you
interview.  For some of the NCVS-1 items, you will transcribe 
information from the household's Control Card. You will complete 
the remaining NCVS-1 items with a respondent as you conduct the 
interview.

The NCVS-1 is designed so that you can collect information for 
up to four eligible household members, including the household 
respondent.  When a sample household has more than four eligible 
household members, you will complete a separate NCVS-1A, Personal
Characteristics form, for each eligible household member who will 
not fit in the NCVS-1 questionnaire.

Since the content of the NCVS-1 and NCVS-1A forms changes 
periodically, it is important that you use the current form by 
checking the print date shown below the form number on the front 
cover of each form.  Your monthly memorandums will tell you when 
to start interviewing with a modified form and will identify the 
new print date and ink/paper color.

Overview of the NCVS-1

Once you are done entering the length of time each eligible
household member has lived at the sample address in Control 
Card Item 25c, stop completing the Control Card and start 
completing the NCVS-1 for the household.  The only time you 
do not need to complete an NCVS-1 for a household is when the 
entire household is a noninterview (Type A, B, or C). For 
noninterview households, you must complete an NCVS-7, 
Noninterview Record, instead of an NCVS-1, Basic Screen 
Questionnaire.

(Also see Part B, Chapter 4, for instructions on completing the 
NCVS-7, Noninterview Record.)

If you are unable to complete an NCVS-1 interview for an eligible 
household member (other than the household respondent), you still 
need to complete the following items on the NCVS-1:

* Items 14a and 14b on the cover page and 

* Items 17 through 28 on the appropriate page for the Type Z 
noninterview person (page 12, 18, or 24). This also applies to 
Items 17 through 28 on any NCVS-1A forms that you complete for 
a Type Z noninterview person.

The first entries that you make on an NCVS-1 must be the sample, 
control number, and household number in the top, left corner of 
the front cover.  Transcribe each of these identification items 
from the household's Control Card.

* See Control Card Item 1 for the Sample. 

* See Control Card Item 2 for the Control number(PSU, segment, 
  check digit(CK), and serial number).

* See Control Card Item 3 for the Household number(HH No.).

The sample, control number, and household number on the NCVS-1 
is used to link the Basic Screen Questionnaire to the appropriate 
Control Card for a household, and is the main source for 
identifying the sample address.  Make sure that you transcribe 
these items ACCURATELY and LEGIBLY. 

Serial Number Entries for EXTRA 
Units

Since EXTRA units are discovered as you conduct interviews, any 
EXTRA units that you find will not have assigned serial numbers.  
For each NCVS form that you complete for an EXTRA unit, print 
the reference person's last name in place of the serial number.

Sequence for Completing the NCVS-1

Here is the sequence for completing the remainder of the NCVS-1:

Complete Items 1 through 4 on the front cover.

On page 2, complete Items 17 through 19 for the household 
respondent.

Starting with Item 29, enter the interview date and complete 
the mobility, business operated from sample address, and the 
screen questions with the household respondent. After completing 
Check Item G for the household respondent, either complete an 
NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for each reported crime incident 
or continue with Check Item H.

Complete or update Control Card Items 26a through 28 and Items 
30b and 30c with the household respondent BEFORE ending the 
household respondent's interview.

Starting on page 12, complete Items 17 through 19 for the next 
eligible household member.

Starting with Item 29, enter the interview date and complete 
mobility and screen questions with the next household member.  
After completing Check Item G for the household member, either 
complete an NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for each reported
crime incident or continue with Check Item H.

Repeat this process for each eligible household member on the 
NCVS-1. If the household has more than four members, complete 
a separate NCVS-1A for each household member who does not fit 
on the household's NCVS-1.

After leaving the household or ending the phone interview, 
transcribe the appropriate information from the household's 
Control Card to Items 5 through 12e on the front cover, and 
complete Items 13 through 16, as needed.  Also transcribe the 
correct information from the Control Card onto Items 20 through 
28 for each eligible household member.

Wording Questions for Proxy Interviews

When you take a proxy interview for an eligible respondent, 
remember that the screen questions refer to the person for whom 
the proxy interview is being taken (proxy person), NOT to the 
person answering the questions (proxy respondent).  Starting 
with Item 33a on the NCVS-1, substitute the name of the person 
for whom the proxy interview is being taken in place of the 
word "you" when asking questions.

Here is an example:

Item 33a - "How long has Joan Tyler lived at this address?"

In this example, Joan Tyler is the "proxy person"; in other
words, she is the person for whom the proxy interview is
being taken.

Topic 2.  Completing Items 1 Through 16 (Cover Page)

Filling Items 1 Through 4 on the 
NCVS-1

Once you have entered the sample, control number, and household 
number on the front cover of the NCVS-1, the next step is to 
complete Items 1 through 4 on the cover page.

Item 1 (Field representative
identification)

In Item 1, enter your field representative code (for example,
B23) and your full name (for example, David Waterman).

Item 2 (Unit status)

In Item 2, you will indicate whether this is the first enumeration 
period for the sample address or whether the assigned address was 
in sample in a previous enumeration period. 

Box 1:
Mark Box 1 if you are scheduled to interview the sample household 
for the second through seventh enumeration period, even if the 
household was a noninterview in the first enumeration period. 
After marking Box 1, fill Item 3.

Box 2:
Mark Box 2 if you are:

* Attempting to interview a sample household for the first 
enumeration period,

* Interviewing EXTRA units discovered during an interview, or

* Interviewing additional units discovered during listing/listing 
verification in unit and permit segments.

(See Chapter 7, Topic 6, of the Listing and Coverage Manual for 
Field Representatives, Form 11-8, for more instructions concerning 
additional units.)

* After marking Box 2, skip to Item 4.

Item 3 (Household status)

Use Item 3 to indicate the interview status of the household 
from the previous enumeration period. Mark the first box in 
Item 3 that applies for the sample household.

Box 1:
Mark Box 1 if one or more household members from the current 
interview were also household members during the previous 
enumeration period AND the sample household was interviewed 
during the previous enumeration period.

Box 2:
Mark Box 2 when all household members at the sample address 
are new for the current interview and the former household 
no longer lives at the sample address.  In this case, you 
would have increased the household number in Control Card 
Item 3 to the next higher number.  For example, if the 
original household number is "1," then the replacement 
household becomes household "2." Mark Box 2 for a replacement 
household, even if the former household was a noninterview 
in the previous enumeration period.

Box 3:
Mark Box 3 if the sample address was a Type A or B noninterview 
in the previous enumeration period AND the same household still 
resides at the sample address.

Box 4:
Only mark Box 4 if you are interviewing at the sample address 
for the second through seventh enumeration period AND Boxes 1 
through 3 do not describe the household status for the previous 
enumeration period.  After marking Box 4, write a brief 
description of the household status for the previous 
enumeration period on the "Specify" line.

Here is an example of when you would mark Box 4:

"You are interviewing at the correct sample address for the 
current enumeration period, but the wrong unit was interviewed 
for the previous enumeration period. In this case, you would 
mark Box 4 and write "Wrong unit interviewed previous 
enumeration period" on the "Specify" line.

Item 4 (Line number of household 
respondent)

In Item 4, enter the line number to identify the household
respondent for the current enumeration period.  You can find 
this line number circled in Control Card Item 12 or entered in 
Control Card Item 30c. After entering the household respondent's 
line number in Item 4, turn to page 2 of the NCVS-1 and continue 
with Item 17 for the household respondent.

Filling Items 5 Through 12e
on the NCVS-1 

After you are finished interviewing a sample household, fill
Items 5 through 12e on the NCVS-1 by transcribing the appropriate 
information from the household's Control Card.

Item 5 (Special place/GQ code)

Check Control Card Item 6d. If Item 6d is blank, leave Item 
5 on the NCVS-1 blank. If the sample address is a group quarters 
(GQ) unit, then transcribe the GQ type code (for example, 87-N) 
from Control Card Item 6d onto Item 5 on the NCVS-1.

Item 6 (Tenure)

Transcribe the answer from Control Card Item 8a for the most 
current enumeration period onto Item 6 on the NCVS-1. If the 
tenure status is unknown, print "NA" in Item 6. If the tenure 
status is refused, print "Ref." in Item 6.

Item 7 (Land use)

Transcribe the answer marked in Control Card Item 9 onto Item 7 
on the NCVS-1.  Your regional office fills Control Card Item 9 
before you receive the Control Card.

Item 8 (Farm sales)

Check Control Card Item 10. If Item 10 is blank, mark the "Item 
blank" box in Item 8 on the NCVS-1. Otherwise, transcribe the 
answer from Control Card Item 10 to Item 8 on the NCVS-1. For 
example, if Box 1 (Yes) is marked in Control Card Item 10, then 
mark Box 1 ($1,000 or more) in Item 8 on the NCVS-1.
                                                        
Item 9 (Type of living quarters)

If the sample address identifies a housing unit, transcribe the 
entry in Control Card Item 11c onto the appropriate housing unit 
box (1 - 7) in Item 9 on the NCVS-1. If the sample address 
identifies a group quarters unit, transcribe the entry in Control 
Card Item 11d onto the appropriate "OTHER unit" box (8 - 12)in 
Item 9 on the NCVS-1. When you mark Box 7 or 12 in Item 9, make 
sure to transcribe the handwritten description to the appropriate 
line.

Item 10a (Location of phone)

Mark the appropriate box in Item 10a based on the box marked in 
Control Card Item 26a or 26b.

Examples of common areas where a phone could be located and 
accessible to the household are:

* Apartment halls, 
* Rooming house lobbies, 
* Pay phones inside of buildings in which households
* reside, and so forth. 

Examples of other units where a phone could be located and 
accessible to the household are:

* Houses,
* Private rooms,
* Apartment units, or 
* Dwelling units belonging to someone other than the sample 
  household, such as a neighbor, friend, and so forth.

Item 10b (Phone interview acceptable)

Mark the appropriate box in Item 10b based on the box(es)marked 
in Control Card Items 26c and/or 26d.

Item 11a (Number of housing units in
structure)

Refer to Control Card Item 27a and transcribe the marked answer 
to the appropriate box in Item 11a. If you mark Box 1 or 7 in 
Item 11a, skip to Item 12a.

Item 11b (Direct outside access)

Refer to Control Card Item 27b and transcribe the marked answer 
to the appropriate box in Item 11b. If Control Card Item 27b is 
unanswered, mark Box x (Item blank)in Item 11b.

Item 12a (Household Income)

Refer to Control Card Item 28 and transcribe the marked answer 
for the most recent enumeration period to Item 12a. If you do 
not see a marked answer in Control Card Item 28 because this 
question is not applicable or the respondent refused to give 
an answer, then enter "NA" for "Not applicable" or "REF" for 
"Refused" in Item 12a.

Item 12b(College/University)

Refer to Control Card Item 8b and transcribe the marked answer 
to Item 12b to indicate whether the living quarters is 
presently used as student housing by a college or university.

Item 12c (Public Housing)

Refer to Control Card Item 8c and transcribe the answer marked 
to Item 12c. If Control Card Item 8c is left blank, then mark 
Box x "Item blank" in Item 12c.

Item 12d (Manager Verification of 
Public Housing)

Refer to Control Card Item 8d and transcribe the answer marked 
to Item 12d. If Control Card Item 8d is left blank, then mark 
Box x "Item blank" in Item 12d. If you mark Box 4 under "Unable 
to verify" in Item 12d, make sure to transcribe the "Other" 
reason from Control Card Item 8d.

Item 12e (American Indian Reservation 
or American Indian Lands)

Refer to Control Card Item 8e and transcribe the answer marked 
to Item 12e on the NCVS-1. Control Card Item 8e should never be 
left blank.

Items 13a Through 13c (Proxy 
Information)

Items 13a through 13c are used to identify:

* The proxy person,
* The proxy respondent, and 
* The reason you were unable to interview the household member 
  by self-response.

Whenever you take a proxy interview, complete these items either 
before you leave the household or before you end the phone call 
with the household.

Item 13a (Line Number for Proxy 
Person)

Make sure to enter the correct line number for the household 
member who is unable to answer for himself/herself (the proxy 
person).

Item 13b(Proxy Respondent)

In Item 13b, print the full name and line number for the 
household member who is answering the questions for the
proxy person identified in Item 13a.  We refer to this
person as the proxy respondent. 

In a small number of special situations, the proxy respondent 
can be a caregiver who is not a household member. If you are 
unsure whether it is acceptable to take a proxy interview from 
a nonhousehold member, check with your regional office before 
taking the proxy interview.

When the proxy respondent is NOT a household member, print the 
proxy respondent's full name in the "name" column and "non HH" 
in the "Line No." column of Item 13b.  Also explain in the 
"Notes" space of the Control Card why the proxy respondent is 
a nonhousehold member.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 2, Topic 3, for detailed requirements 
for accepting a nonhousehold member as a proxy respondent.)

Item 13c (Reason Code)

Listed below are the acceptable reason codes to indicate why a 
proxy interview was taken. These codes are also printed below 
Items 13a - 13c on the NCVS-1. If none of the reasons apply to 
the situation, you should NOT take a proxy interview.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 6, for detailed
information on proxy interviews and acceptable reasons.)

Code 1:
Enter Code 1 when the household member is 12 or 13 years
of age and the child's parent(s) refuses to allow you to
interview the 12 or 13 year old child by self-response.

Code 2:
Enter Code 2 when the household member has a physical and/or 
mental illness that prevents the person from responding 
directly to you.  After entering Code 2 in Item 13c, ALWAYS 
complete an INTER-COMM explaining the situation in detail 
and attach the completed INTER-COMM to the NCVS-1.

Code 3:
Enter Code 3 when the household member is away from the
sample address temporarily AND is not expected to return
during the interview period.  Before taking a proxy
interview, make sure that the person is still a household
member and will not return during the entire interview
period.

After entering Code 3 in Item 13c, ALWAYS complete an INTER-
COMM explaining the situation in detail and attach the 
completed INTER-COMM to the NCVS-1.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 3, of this manual and page 
4 of your Information Card Booklet (NCVS-554) for help in 
determining household membership.)

Items 14a and 14b (Type Z Noninterview)

Complete Items 14a and 14b to identify each eligible household 
member, other than the household respondent, who cannot be 
interviewed during the interview period AND for whom a proxy 
interview is either not allowed or not possible.  You can 
complete Items 14a and 14b either during or after interviewing 
the household.  You must complete the household respondent's 
interview before any remaining eligible household members can 
be classified as Type Z noninterviews. Try to keep Type Z 
noninterviews to a minimum.

You must complete an INTER-COMM explaining the circumstances 
for each eligible household member that you classify as a Type 
Z noninterview person and attach the completed INTER-COMM to 
the NCVS-1.

Occasionally, you may interview a large household with more 
than four Type Z noninterviews.  If this happens, make sure 
to complete the Personal Characteristic Items 17 through 28 
on each person's NCVS-1A and use the "Notes" space on the 
cover page of the  NCVS-1A to explain why the household 
member was a Type Z noninterview.

Item 14a (Line Number)

For each Type Z noninterview person, use Item 14a to identify 
the household member's line number.

Item 14b(Reason Code)

A list of reason codes for Type Z noninterviews is shown to
the right of Item 14b.  Starting at the top of the list, 
enter the FIRST reason code that applies in Item 14b for the 
situation.

Code 1:
Enter Code 1 if the eligible household member is never
available when you contact the household to get his/her
interview.  Do not use Code 1 if the person is "temporarily
absent" and not expected to return during the interview
period.

Code 2:
Enter Code 2 any time you cannot interview an eligible
respondent (other than the household respondent), because
the eligible respondent, a proxy respondent, or someone
else refuses to allow the interview.  Here are some
examples:

An eligible respondent refuses to cooperate with the interview 
AND is not the household respondent.

A household member refuses to allow you to interview another 
eligible respondent in the household, such as an elderly parent 
or a 14-year-old child.

An acceptable proxy respondent refuses to give you a proxy 
interview.

Code 3:
Enter Code 3 if:

It is acceptable to take a proxy interview for an eligible 
respondent who is unable to respond for himself/herself due 
to a physical and/or mental illness, BUT

No acceptable proxy respondent is available.

Code 4:
Enter Code 4 if:

It is acceptable to take a proxy interview because the household 
member is temporarily absent from the household and will not 
return during the interview period, BUT

No acceptable proxy respondent is available.

Code 5:
Enter Code 5 when Codes 1 through 4 do not apply to the
situation that is preventing you from interviewing an
eligible household member.  Here are a few examples:

* An eligible household member cannot speak English and no 
acceptable translator is available.

* A 12- or 13-year-old household member is not allowed to 
answer for himself/herself and no acceptable proxy respondent 
is available.

Do not use Code 6 in Item 14b. Code 6 is only used by your 
regional office staff.

Once you leave the household or end the phone call with the 
household, make sure to transcribe the appropriate information 
from the Control Card to the NCVS-1 Items 17 through 28 for each 
Type Z noninterview person.  When you classify a person as a 
Type Z noninterview, do not fill Items 29 through Check Item I 
on the NCVS-1 and do not complete any NCVS-2, Crime Incident 
Reports, for the Type Z noninterview person.

If you have already completed an NCVS-2 for a household member 
(other than the household respondent) and the person refuses to 
complete any remaining NCVS-2s for reported incidents, you must 
classify the household member as a Type Z noninterview and out-
of-scope the completed NCVS-2.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, for detailed
instructions on out-of-scope incidents.)

Items 15a Through 15c (Total Counts)

Items 15a, 15b, and 15c are used to identify total counts of:

* Household members 12 years of age and over (Item 15a)

* Household members under 12 years of age (Item 15b)

* Crime Incident Reports filled (Item 15c).

Complete these three items once you have left the household or 
ended the phone call.

Item 15a (Household Members 12 Years 
of Age and Over)

Refer to Control Card Items 12, 13c, and 17 to determine the 
number to enter in Item 15a.

First, in Item 12, count only the household members who do NOT 
have a diagonal line drawn through their line numbers, since a 
diagonal line indicates that a person has left the household.

Of the persons counted in Item 12 as instructed above, next
count those household members who have Box 1 "Yes" marked in 
Item 13c.  A "No" answer indicates that the person has a usual 
residence elsewhere, is not a household member, and would not 
be included in the count that you enter in Item 15a on the 
NCVS-1.

The last step is to check Item 17 for those household members 
and only count the members whose age for the current enumeration 
period is 12 years of age or older.

Once you have determined the total number of household members 
who are 12 years of age and over, enter that number in Item 
15a on the NCVS-1.

Item 15b (Household Members Under 12
Years of Age)

Refer to Control Card Items 12, 13c, and 17 to determine the 
number to enter in Item 15b.

First, in Item 12, count only the household members who do 
NOT have a diagonal line drawn through their line numbers, 
since a diagonal line indicates that a person has left the 
household.

Of the persons counted in Item 12 as instructed above, next
count those household members who have Box 1 "Yes" marked in 
Item 13c. A "No" answer indicates that the person has a usual 
residence elsewhere, is not a household member, and would not 
be included in the count that you enter in Item 15b on the 
NCVS-1. The last step is to check Item 17 for those household
members and only count the members whose age for the current 
enumeration period is under 12 years.

Once you have determined the total number of household members 
who are under 12 years of age, enter that number in Item 15b 
on the NCVS-1. If none of the household members are under 12 
years of age, mark Box 0 "None" in Item 15b.

Item 15c (Crime Incident Reports 
Filled)

In Item 15c, enter the total number of NCVS-2, Crime Incident 
Reports, filled for all eligible household members in the 
sample household. If you marked any NCVS-2s as "out-of-scope," 
do not include those Crime Incident Reports in your tally. If 
you did not complete any NCVS-2s for a household, mark Box 0 
"None" in Item 15c.

Item 16 (Changes in Household 
Composition)

Refer to Control Card Item 25a and see if any household
composition changes are noted for the current enumeration
period.  If so, transcribe the household member's line
number and the reason code for the change from Control
Card Item 25a to Item 16 on the NCVS-1. 

After completing Item 16, return to the Control Card and
complete Control Card Items 32a through 32e for each NCVS-2 
that you completed for the household.  The information that 
you enter in Items 32a through 32e is referred to as 
"bounding" information and is used to avoid collecting 
duplicate incidents in subsequent interviews with the 
household.

Topic 3.  Completing Items 17 Through 28 (Personal 
Characteristics)
                              
Items 17 Through 28
(Personal Characteristics)

After completing Item 4 on the cover page of the NCVS-1,
turn to page 2 and complete Items 17 through 19 for the
household respondent.  Complete the remaining Personal
Characteristics, Items 20 through 28, after you leave the
household or end the phone call with the household.
                                
You need to complete the Personal Characteristics, Items 17 
through 28, for every eligible household member (12 years 
of age or older), including Type Z noninterview persons.
                                
Always complete Items 17 through 19 before you continue
with the NCVS-1 screen interview.

Item 17 (Respondent's Name)

Start the screen interview for each eligible household member 
by entering his/her full name in Item 17.  Control Card Item 
13a shows the name of each household member. Always enter the 
household respondent's name in Item 17 on page 2 of the NCVS-1.  
For the remaining eligible respondents, use Item 17 on pages 
12, 18, and 24. If the household has more than four eligible 
respondents, use a separate NCVS-1A to record information for 
respondent five, six, and so forth. 

Item 18 (Type of Interview)

After entering the household member's name in Item 17, mark 
the type of interview in Item 18. Since the household
respondent cannot be a Type Z noninterview person, only
four answer boxes appear in Item 18 for the household
respondent.  All remaining household members have a fifth
answer box for Type Z noninterviews.
                                
Box 1:
Mark Box 1 when you are interviewing a household member in 
person by self-response.  The first contact with a sample 
household must be a personal visit interview for at least 
the household respondent. It is acceptable to interview the 
remaining household members by telephone during the first 
contact.
                                
Box 2:
Mark Box 2 if the household member is interviewed by
telephone and the household member answers the questions
for himself/herself.
                                
Box 3:
Mark Box 3 if the household member cannot answer for
himself/herself, meets the requirements for a proxy
interview, and the proxy interview is conducted in person
with the proxy respondent.  After marking Box 3, turn back
to the cover page and complete the proxy information in
Item 13 before conducting the proxy interview. 
                          
Box 4:
Mark Box 4 if the household member cannot answer for himself/
herself, meets the requirements for a proxy interview, and 
the proxy interview is conducted by telephone with the proxy 
respondent.  After marking Box 4, turn back to the cover page 
and complete the proxy information in Item 13 before conducting 
the proxy interview. 
                                
Box 5:
Mark Box 5 when an eligible household member, other than the 
household respondent, is a Type Z noninterview person. Item 18 on 
page 2 does not have a Box 5 for the household respondent. After 
marking Box 5, you are reminded to complete Items 19 through 28 
for the Type Z noninterview person and to complete the Type Z
noninterview information in Item 14 on the cover page. 

Item 19 (Line Number)

Refer to Control Card Item 12 to find the household member's line 
number at the same time that you check Control Card Item 13a for 
the person's name.  Enter the household member's line number in 
Item 19 before you start the person's screen interview. Make 
sure to enter the correct line number for the respondent, since 
the line number is the link between the household member's
personal characteristics and any Crime Incident Reports (NCVS-2s) 
you may complete for the household member.

Items 20 Through 28
(Personal Characteristics)
                   
After you leave the household or end the phone call with the 
household, complete Items 20 through 28 by transcribing the 
appropriate information from the Control Card to these items 
for each eligible household member. You need to complete Items 
20 through 28 for interviewed persons AND Type Z noninterview 
persons.

Item 20 (Relationship to
Reference Person)

For Item 20, mark the household member's relationship to the 
reference person based on the relationship entered in Control 
Card Item 13b.
                                
(Also see Part B, Chapter 1, Topic 3, for more information about 
Relationship to Reference Person.)

Item 21(Age Last Birthday)

For Item 21, using the current enumeration period, enter the
household member's age from Control Card Item 17.

Item 22a (Marital Status
This Survey Period)

For Item 22a, enter the household member's current marital
status based on the marital status code entered in Control
Card Item 18.  If you changed the person's marital status
code for the current interview, make sure to use the current
code and not the lined through code.

Item 22b (Marital Status
Last Survey Period)

For Item 22b, enter the household member's marital status from 
the previous enumeration period based upon the marital status 
code entered in Control Card Item 18. If a marital status code 
was entered in Control Card Item 18 when you received the 
Control Card and you did not change the person's marital 
status, use that code to mark the marital status in Item 22b.  
However, if you lined through the previous marital status code 
and entered a new code, use the lined through code to mark the 
marital status in Item 22b. If Control Card Item 18 was blank 
when you received the Control Card, mark Box 6 in Item 22b.

Item 23 (Sex)

Mark Box 23 based upon the sex marked for the household member 
in Control Card Item 19.

Item 24 (Armed Forces Member)

If the household member is male or female and 18 through 65 
years of age, use the answer marked in Control Card Item 20 
to mark Item 24 on the NCVS-1. If the household member is 
under 18 years of age or over 65 years of age, leave Item 24 
blank. 

Item 25 (Educational Attainment)

Mark Item 25 based upon the most current 2-digit education code 
entered in Control Card Item 21. Since Control Card Item 21 only 
gets updated during selected enumeration periods (1st, 3rd, 5th, 
and 7th), the most current code for the highest level completed 
will sometimes be the one entered for the previous enumeration 
period. For example, if you are interviewing for the fourth
enumeration period, use the code entered for the third 
enumeration period in Control Card Item 21.

Item 26(Attending School)

Mark Item 26 based upon the code entered in Control Card 
Item 22.

Item 27 (Hispanic Origin)

Mark Item 27 based upon the answer marked in Control Card 
Item 23.

Item 28 (Race)

Mark Item 28 based upon the race code(s) entered in Control Card 
Item 24.  Since each person can identify up to four races, make 
sure to mark all appropriate boxes. If Code 6, "Other," is entered 
in Control Card Item 24, you also must transcribe the "Other" race 
description entered in the "Notes" space below Control Card Item 
30g to the "Specify" lines for Box 6 of Item 28 on the NCVS-1. 

Topic 4.  Completing Items 29 Through Check Item E (Mobility/
Businesses/Theft/Break-ins/Motor Vehicles/Specific Locations/ 
Use of Weapons/Known Offenders/Unwanted Sexual Acts/Catch-all 
Questions/Computer Crime/Proxy Help)

Item 29 (Date of Interview)

In Item 29, enter the date on which you start the household
member's interview using 2 digits for the month, 2 digits
for the day, and 4 digits for the year (for example, 02-03-
2003).

Item 33a Through 33b(Mobility 
Questions)

You will complete the mobility questions for each eligible
household member.  Item 33a is used to determine the length 
of continuous time the respondent has lived at the sample 
address and, if the respondent has lived at the sample address 
less than 5 years, Item 33b is used to determine how many times 
the respondent has moved in the last 5 years.

Item 33a (Length of Time at Address)

After reading the lead-in statement for Item 33a, you have
the option of:

* Asking the question in Item 33a if you are unsure of the 
answer or 

* Verifying the entry in Control Card Item 25c with the
respondent before marking the answer.

NOTE: The lead-in statement shown on the previous
      page is from the household respondent's section
      of the NCVS-1. For the remaining eligible
      household members, the lead-in statement will
      read "Before we get to the crime questions, I
      have one or two questions...", since the crime
      questions for the remaining household members
      follow Item 33b.

Accept the answer given by the respondent without probing. 
However, if a respondent seems unsure about how to answer this 
question, you can tell him/her that we are interested in the 
most recent continuous length of time the respondent has been 
a household member at the sample address.  

Here is an example:

During the past 5 years, a household member:

Resided at the sample address,

Then left the sample address for 6 months to live on a college 
campus, and

Then returned to reside at the sample address just 3 months 
prior to your interview and has stayed there continuously 
during the past 3 months. 

For this example, you would enter 3 months in Item 33a.

Answer is less than 1 year:
If the answer is less than 1 year, enter the number of months the 
respondent has lived continuously at the sample address on the 
"Months" line and skip to Item 33b.  Here are some examples of 
what to enter in Item 33a based upon the respondent's answer:

Answer is vague or respondent is unsure:
Probe to get a more precise answer.  Here are some examples:

Respondent's answer:          Probe:
Years and years               Would you say more than       
                              5 years or less than 5 years?

Respondent's answer:          Probe:
5 to 10 years                 Would you say more than       
                              7 years or less than 7 years?

Less than a year              Would you say more than       
                              6 months or less than 6
                              months?

It's been so long, I can't    Can you give me your 
really say.                   best estimate? (If you      
                              enter an estimate in  
                              Item 33a, print "EST" beside it.)
                         
I really can't say, but it    If probing does not 
is well over 20 years.        work, print "DK - more      
                              than 5 years."  (Always      
                              try to determine whether it has
                              been "5 years or more" or
                              "less than 5 years.")
Check Item A

Read the question in Check Item A to yourself. Based upon the 
answer that you marked in Item 33a, you will either:

Mark the "5 years or more" box in Check Item A and skip to Item 
34 (for a household respondent) or Item 36a (for an individual 
respondent), or

Mark the "Less than 5 years" box in Check Item A and ask the 
question in Item 33b. 

Item 33b (Number of Times Moved)

In Item 33b, you are inquiring about how many times the 
respondent has moved in the last 5 years.

Follow these steps for completing Item 33b:

Before reading the question to the respondent, enter the month 
of interview and the year 5 years ago on the lines following the 
word "since."  The respondent will use this date to determine 
his/her answer.  Here is an example: If you are interviewing on 
March 2, 2003, then you would enter "March 1998" for the
question in Item 33b.

Read the question in Item 33b and enter the number provided by 
the respondent. Count all moves whether inside or outside of 
the United States, including the move into the sample unit.  
Each time a respondent changes his/her usual place of residence 
is considered one move.  It is acceptable to enter an estimate 
and print "EST" next to it. However, only enter "DK" as a
last resort, and do not enter a range of numbers, such as 
"2 - 4." 

For respondents who are students, you may need to explain what 
we consider to be a move. Although some students may consider 
their usual place of residence to be their parent's home, we 
consider their usual place of residence to be the place where 
they usually live and sleep. During the school year that could 
be a college dormitory or apartment.  Each time a student 
changes the place where he/she usually lives and sleeps is 
considered a move, even if it is just moving from one dormitory 
room to another one.

Items 34 and 35 (Recognizable and
Unrecognizable Businesses)

Items 34 and 35 are asked only of the household respondent to 
determine if:

A sample household member operates a business from the sample 
address (Item 34).

The business operated from the sample address is considered 
recognizable or unrecognizable (Item 35).

Item 34 (Operating a Business)

Read the question in Item 34 to the household respondent and 
mark the appropriate answer box. If you get a "Yes" answer, 
mark Box 1 and ask the question in Item 35 next. If you get 
a "No" answer, mark Box 2 and skip to Item 36a.

Item 35 (Sign on the Premises)

For a personal visit interview, you can complete Item 35 by 
using your observations of the housing unit's exterior to
determine whether the business is recognizable or
unrecognizable.  

Before marking Box 1 to indicate that the business is 
recognizable, make sure that:

* A sign announcing the business is visible to the public from 
OUTSIDE the housing unit and 

* The sign announcing the business must be located on the sample 
household's property, such as a sign on a front door, window, 
garage door, mail box, or a free standing sign in the front yard.

Do NOT use the following indicators as evidence that a
business is recognizable:

x The business is advertised in a newspaper, magazine, telephone 
book, or on the Internet.

A motor vehicle, such as a van, car, truck, or bus, is parked 
in the driveway or in front of the housing unit and the vehicle 
carries the business logo on it.

Before marking Box 2 to indicate that the business is 
unrecognizable, make sure that NO sign is visible on the
outside of the housing unit indicating that the business
exists.  Any reported incidents of theft from an unrecognizable 
business operated by a household member from the sample unit 
must be included in the NCVS.

For a telephone interview, ask the question in Item 35 of the 
household respondent and mark the appropriate answer box. If 
you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 indicating that the business 
is recognizable from outside the housing unit. If you get a 
"No" answer, mark Box 2 indicating that the business is 
unrecognizable from outside the housing unit.

Here is the reason why we need to differentiate between a
recognizable or unrecognizable business operated from the
sample address by a household member:

We keep crime incidents that involve property stolen from an 
unrecognizable business, but

We do NOT keep crime incidents that ONLY involve property 
stolen from a recognizable business.   

However, if the following types of incidents are reported, we 
want to keep them regardless of whether a household member 
operates a recognizable business from the sample address:

Personal property was stolen from the household respondent or 
another household member.

The household respondent or another household member received a 
face-to-face threat of physical harm, was attacked, or an attempt 
was made to attack a household member.

Someone illegally entered, broke into or attempted to break into 
the sample unit.  

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 5, of this manual for detailed 
definitions and examples of special situations for recognizable 
and unrecognizable businesses.) 

Items 36 Through 46 (Screen 
Questions)

The screen questions cover a wide variety of situations and are 
designed to provide the respondent with concrete examples of the 
kinds of crimes that are typically reported for the NCVS and 
could be overlooked by respondents. These screen questions ensure 
that we collect ALL incidents of crime in a sample household that 
occurred during each respondent's 6-month reference period. 

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 2, for a detailed definition 
and examples for the NCVS reference period.)

The household respondent's interview has a few additional screen 
questions to elicit crime incidents involving the entire household, 
in addition to crime incidents involving just the household 
respondent.  These additional screen questions are asked in Items 
36 through 39 and 46 to determine whether any crime incidents 
involving the entire household happened, such as:

* In Item 36 - Things stolen from outside the home (for example, 
lawn furniture or a garden hose), and things stolen from a 
household member under 12 years of age (for example, a 10-year-
old's bicycle stolen from the home's driveway),

* In Item 37 - Break-ins, attempted break-ins, or illegal entries 
at the sample address (for example, the house, garage, shed, or a 
storage room), or at a hotel, motel, or vacation home where the 
respondent was staying,

* In Item 38 - The total number of motor vehicles owned by the 
entire household during the 6 months prior to the interview,

* In Item 39 - Thefts or attempted thefts of motor vehicles 
owned by the household during the 6 months prior to the interview, 
including gasoline and parts (for example, tires, wheels, battery, 
cassette player, CD player, and so forth).

* In Item 46 - Attacks, threats of physical harm, thefts, and 
attempted thefts related to reported acts of vandalism.

Do Not Leave Screen
Questions Unanswered

It is important to ask each screen question for an eligible
respondent.  Unanswered screen questions for a household
respondent can cause the case to be classified as a Type A
noninterview and unanswered screen questions for an individual 
respondent can cause the respondent to be classified as a Type 
Z noninterview person.

"Don't Know" or "DK" Entries 
Are Not Acceptable 

If a respondent answers with "Don't know," probe carefully
to get a definite "Yes" or "No" answer.  If the respondent 
is still unable to answer the screen question, mark the "No"
answer box.

Respondent Refuses to Answer 
a Screen Question

If a respondent refuses to answer a particular screen question, 
print "REF" in the question's answer space and explain in the 
"Notes" space why you feel the respondent refused to answer the 
question.

Recording Incidents on
the NCVS-1

In most cases, record incidents as a respondent reports them, 
regardless of whether the screen item relates to the type of 
incident reported.  Reports of vandalism are an exception to 
this rule. If a household respondent reports an act of vandalism 
(for example, spray painting graffiti on a garage door) AND no 
NCVS crime is reported, record the vandalism in Items 46a through 
46f. These vandalism items are asked only of the household 
respondent.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 2, for detailed information 
about crimes measured by the NCVS.)

How to Ask Screen Questions

Part (a) of most screen items has at least three subcategories
and could have as many as eight subcategories (for example, Item 
36a).  This may prompt some respondents to give you an answer 
before you finish reading each subcategory.  We would prefer that 
you finish reading each subcategory before the respondent gives 
an answer.  Even if you get interrupted, you must read each and 
every subcategory in its entirety, so that we do not miss any 
crime incidents.  

The following technique may help you get through all the
subcategories of a screen question before getting a 
respondent's answer:

1 After reading each subcategory in part (a), only pause 
long enough to let the respondent know that you are about 
to start reading a new subcategory.  If you pause too long, 
the respondent may feel that you are waiting for an answer.

2 After reading all subcategories in part (a), pause long
enough to allow the respondent to reply.  If the respondent 
doesn't give you an answer, then read the question in part 
(b), "Did any incidents of this type happen to you?" 

3 If you get a "Yes" response in part (b), mark Box 1 and ask 
the respondent "What happened?"  Based upon the answer you 
receive, enter a brief description of the crime incident in 
the space provided to the right of part (a). Then, ask the 
question in part(c), "How many times?" and fill the "Number 
of times" space.

4 If you get a "No" response in part (b), mark Box 2 and 
follow the skip instruction to the next screen item.

If this technique doesn't work and a respondent either 
interrupts you in the middle of reading a subcategory or 
before you finish reading all the subcategories for a 
question, follow these steps:

Respondent answers in the middle of reading a
subcategory--

1 Stop and thank the respondent, but explain that there is 
more to the question which he/she needs to hear before 
giving an answer.

2 Reread the unfinished subcategory again from the beginning.  

If the respondent gives you a "No" answer after you finish 
reading the entire subcategory, tell the respondent that you 
need to finish reading all the subcategories for the question.  

If the respondent gives you a "Yes" answer before you have 
read all subcategories, then follow the instructions below.

Respondent answers "Yes" before you have read ALL
subcategories--

1  Mark the "Yes" answer box in part (b) and ask "What happened?"

2  Enter a brief description of the crime incident in the space 
to the right of part (a).

3  Then, ask the question in part (c), "How many times?" and fill 
the "Number of times" space.

4 Next, start by saying, "Other than any incidents already 
reported..." and finish reading the remaining subcategories 
in part (a) of the same screen question. 

5 If the respondent mentions any additional crime incidents, 
briefly describe them in the space next to part (a) AND correct 
the "Number of times" entry in part (c), as necessary. If the 
respondent reports more than one incident in one screen item, 
enter a brief description for each incident in part (a) and 
number each one separately (for example, #1 - L1 threatened
with a knife by coworker, #2 - L1's purse snatched while 
boarding a bus).  

By using these techniques, there is less chance of missing
any crime incidents which occurred during a respondent's
reference period.

(Also see Part A, Chapter 2, Topic 6, for general interviewing 
techniques to use for the NCVS.) 

Items 36a Through 36c
(Theft or Attempted Theft)

Items 36a through 36c are asked of all eligible household
members and are designed to remind each respondent of
incidents in which thefts were attempted or completed
during the 6 months prior to the interview.  Subcategories 
(e) and (f) of Item 36a are asked only of the household 
respondent and do not appear in Item 36a for individual 
respondents.

Before asking the question in Item 36a, make sure to enter
the date for the first day of the respondent's reference
period in the lead-in statement.  In most cases, this will be
the month, day, and year entered in Control Card Item 25b. 
If Item 25b is blank or the date entered is more than           
6 months before the current interview, refer to pages 10 and
11 in your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554, for help
in determining the date to enter in Item 36a.

Once you have entered the date to indicate the start of the
respondent's reference period, always read the two lead-in
statements in Item 36a before reading the question.  Then
follow the instructions under "How to Ask Screen Questions" 
on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

Items 37a Through 37c (Break-in 
or Attempted Break-in)

Items 37a through 37c are asked only of the household respondent 
to find out if:

* The household respondent's home or lodging was broken into 
or illegally entered, or

* An attempt was made to break into or illegally enter the 
household respondent's home or lodging.
       
Items 37a through 37c are not included in the screen interview 
for individual respondents.  If the household respondent reported 
an incident in Item 36, make sure to read the parenthetical 
phrase (Other than any incidents already mentioned,) as you 
read the question in Item 37a. This will help avoid duplicate 
incidents. 

Moved Into Sample Address During
Reference Period

A household respondent may have lived in more than one housing 
unit during his/her 6-month reference period. If you encounter 
this situation, include all reported incidents that happened 
during the household respondent's reference period AND involved 
property owned or rented by the current household respondent.

Incident Happened at Sample Address
Before Owned/Rented by Household
Respondent 

When the following conditions exist, do not accept the reported 
incident:

* The household respondent reports an incident that happened 
at the sample address during the household respondent's 6-month 
reference period, BUT

* The current household respondent was not the owner or renter 
at the sample address at the time of the incident.  For example, 
the sample unit may still have been owned or rented by the 
previous owner/renter or may have been vacant while it was 
available for sale or rent.

However, you should accept the incident if the current household 
respondent was the owner/renter, but had not yet moved into the 
sample unit when the incident occurred. Only accept incidents 
involving property owned or rented by the current household 
during the 6 months prior to the interview.

Household Respondent Owns/Rents a 
Recreation Vehicle or Vacation Home

Accept the incident if the recreation vehicle or vacation home 
was owned or rented by the household respondent AND was being 
occupied as a housing unit at the time of the incident.

Do not accept incidents involving break-ins or attempted
break-ins of vacation or second homes when:

x The vacation or second home is part of a recognizable 
business,

x The vacation or second home was rented to a nonhousehold 
member at the time of the incident, OR

x The vacation or second home was not occupied by the sample 
household as a housing unit at the time of the incident.

Instructions for "How to Ask Screen Questions" are covered 
on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

Items 38 Through 39c(Motor Vehicles)

Items 38 through 39c are asked only of the household 
respondent to find out:

* The total number of motor vehicles currently or previously 
owned by the sample household during the last 6 months, AND

* Whether any of these motor vehicles were stolen or used 
without permission, including parts and gasoline, AND

* Whether any attempts were made to steal or use them without 
permission, including parts and gasoline.

Items 38 through 39c are not included in the screen interview 
for individual respondents.

Completing Item 38 

Ask the question in Item 38 of the household respondent as 
worded and make sure to include the statement, "Include those 
you no longer own" at the end of the question. If the sample 
household has not owned any motor vehicles during the 6 months 
prior to the interview, mark Box 0 "None" and skip to Item 40a.  
Otherwise, mark the appropriate answer box in Item 38 and ask 
the question in Item 39a next. If the respondent refuses to 
answer Item 38, you still need to ask the question in Item 
39a.

(Also see "Respondent Refuses to Answer Item 38" on page 
B2-44.) 

What to Include in Item 38

If a household respondent questions what to include in the 
total number of motor vehicles for Item 38, here are some 
guidelines for what to include:

  Include cars, vans, trucks, sport utility vehicles,
  motorcycles, or any other motorized vehicle that can
  be legally used as a means of transportation on most
  roads or highways (for example, motorized
  recreation vehicles that do not require towing).

  Include a motorized vehicle owned by a sample
  household member during the 6 months prior to the
  interview, even if it has been sold, given away,
  junked, stolen, or abandoned.

  Include all vehicles owned by an unrecognizable
  business that a household member operates, as well
  as all vehicles owned for the household's personal
  use.

  Include vehicles owned by a recognizable business
  that a household member operates IF the vehicles are
  used at least partially for the household's personal
  use.

  Include vehicles leased by a household member for
  at least one month AND the leased vehicles are the
  responsibility of the household member if stolen. 

What to Exclude in Item 38

If a household respondent questions what to exclude from the 
total number of motor vehicles for Item 38, here are some 
guidelines for what to exclude:

x Exclude motorized vehicles that cannot be driven legally 
  as a means of transportation on most roads or highways 
  (for example, minibikes, go-carts, or snowmobiles).

x Exclude vehicles owned by a recognizable business that is 
  operated by a household member AND the vehicles are ONLY 
  used for business purposes.

x Exclude vehicles that are loaned to a household member for 
  private use by a business AND the business is not owned by 
  a household member.

x Exclude vehicles that a household member rented for less 
  than one month.

x Exclude vehicles owned by parents in a sample household when 
  their children are using the vehicles away from the sample 
  address while attending school.

Respondent Refuses to
Answer Item 38

If a household respondent refuses to answer or feels uneasy 
about answering the question in Item 38, explain the reasons 
for asking about motor vehicles owned by the household which 
are:

    To determine whether or not we need to ask about
    any thefts of motor vehicles owned by the sample
    household, AND

    To help respondents recall all motor vehicles owned
    during the 6 months prior to the interview, before
    asking about any thefts involving the vehicles.

When you are unable to convince a household respondent to 
provide an answer for Item 38, write "REF" in the question's 
answer space and explain in the "Notes" space why you feel 
the respondent refused to answer this question.

You still need to ask the question in Item 39a when a 
household respondent refuses to answer Item 38.  Just 
reword the question slightly as follows:

"During the last 6 months, were any of the vehicles that MAY 
HAVE BEEN owned by you or any other member of this household..."

Completing Items 39a Through 39c

The question in Item 39a refers to the motor vehicles mentioned 
in Item 38. If the household respondent has already reported 
an incident during this interview, make sure to read the 
parenthetical phrase, "other than any incidents already
mentioned."  

As you read the question in Item 39a, use the phrase:

* "Was the vehicle" when the household respondent reports only 
   one motor vehicle in Item 38.  

* "Were any of the vehicles" when the household respondent 
   reports two or more motor vehicles in Item 38.

* "Were any of the vehicles that may have been owned by you or 
   any other member of this household" when the household 
   respondent refuses to answer Item 38.

Additional instructions for "How to Ask Screen Questions" are 
covered on pages B2-35 through  B2-37.

Distinguishing Between Vandalism 
and Attempted Thefts

Accept reported attempts to steal motor vehicles or motor vehicle 
parts owned by the household, because attempted thefts are just 
as important as actual thefts.  However, it may not always be 
clear to a respondent that an attempt was made to steal his/her 
vehicle or parts (for example, a broken window on a car). If it 
is not clear whether the incident was an attempted theft or an 
act of vandalism:

* Probe by asking, "Do you think the offender was trying to 
  break into or steal your vehicle or do you think it was an 
  act of vandalism?"

* Rely on the respondent's perception. If the respondent 
  feels the incident was an attempted theft or is still 
  unsure, enter the incident in Item 39. However, if the 
  respondent feels the incident was an act of vandalism AND 
  no NCVS crime was committed (for example, a broken antenna, 
  mirror or slashed tires), enter the incident in Item 46.
  If you stop to enter the incident in Item 46, make sure
  to return to Item 39 and complete the items between Items 
  39 and 46.

Examples of Motor Vehicle Parts

The following items are examples of parts attached to motor 
vehicles:  tires, wheels, hubcaps, CD players, tape decks, 
cellular phones, batteries, steering wheels, door handles, 
and so forth.  However, if a respondent reports a theft or 
attempted theft of other types of items from a vehicle (for 
example, Christmas presents or grocery items)at Item 39a, 
accept the reported incident in Item 39.

Items 40a Through 40c (Attacks, Threats, 
and Thefts by Location)

Items 40a through 40c are asked of all eligible household
members and are designed to remind each respondent of
incidents in which he/she may have been attacked or
threatened with physical harm in a variety of locations or
situations.  The question in Item 40a also asks about things
stolen from the respondent or attempts to steal anything
from the respondent.

Before asking the question in Item 40a, make sure to enter
the date for the first day of the respondent's reference
period in the question.  In most cases, this will be the
month, day, and year entered in Control Card Item 25b.  If
Item 25b is blank or the date entered is more than 6 months 
before the current interview, refer to pages 10 and 11 in 
your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554, for help in 
determining the date to enter in Item 40a.

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item, 
make sure to read the phrase (Other than any incidents already 
mentioned,), as you read the question in Item 40a. Then follow 
the instructions under "How to Ask Screen Questions" on pages 
B2-35 through B2-37.

Acceptable and Unacceptable 
Threats

The following conditions must exist for a threat to be 
acceptable for the NCVS:

  The threat must be delivered directly by the offender
  to the respondent verbally and in person AND

  The threat must involve the potential for physical
  harm to the respondent.

Do not accept threats that an offender makes over the 
telephone, in a letter, FAX, or electronic message. Also 
unacceptable are threats or warnings delivered by another 
person for the offender, as well as a respondent saying 
that he/she felt threatened.

Items 41a Through 41c (Attacks and 
Threats by Weapon or Use of Force)

Items 41a through 41c are asked of all eligible household 
members and are designed to remind each respondent of 
incidents in which he/she may have been attacked or threatened 
with physical harm involving various weapons or the use of 
force.

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item, 
make sure to read the phrase, (Other than any incidents already 
mentioned,), as you read the question in Item 41a. However, the 
phrase (Exclude telephone threats) is included only as a reminder 
to you and should not be read to the respondent. Remember that 
threats made over the telephone are never acceptable for the
NCVS.  Then follow the instructions under "How to Ask Screen 
Questions" on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

Only accept verbal threats delivered by the offender in person 
to physically harm the respondent. Also read "Acceptable and 
Unacceptable Threats" on page B2-47.

With the exception of cases involving police officers, accept 
any incidents in which the offender had a weapon present during 
the incident, even if the offender did not use it. Also, accept 
incidents in which the offender threw something or shot at the 
respondent, even though the object thrown may not qualify as a 
weapon for the NCVS.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 7, for more information about 
weapons, and Topic 21, for more details about incidents involving 
police officers.)

Items 42a Through 42c (Offender is 
Known by the Respondent)

Items 42a through 42c are asked of all eligible household
members and are designed to remind each respondent of
incidents in which the offender was someone he/she knows 
(for example, co-worker, friend, neighbor, relative, or 
family member) and the incident involved an attack, threat, 
or theft.

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,
make sure to read the phrase, (Other than any incidents
already mentioned,), as you ask the question in Item 42a. 
However, the phrase(Exclude telephone threats)is included 
only as a reminder to you and should not be read to the 
respondent. Remember that threats made over the telephone 
are never acceptable for the NCVS. Then follow the 
instructions under "How to Ask Screen Questions" on pages 
B2-35 through B2-37.

Only accept verbal threats delivered by the offender in
person to physically harm the respondent.  Also read
"Acceptable and Unacceptable Threats" on page B2-47.

Items 43a Through 43c (Forced or 
Unwanted Sexual Acts)

Items 43a through 43c are asked of all eligible household
members and are designed to remind each respondent of
incidents in which he/she was forced or coerced to engage
in unwanted sexual activity, regardless of whether the
respondent did or did not know the offender.  Make sure to
read the lead-in statement before asking the question in
Item 43a.

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,
make sure to read the phrase,(Other than any incidents
already mentioned,), as you ask the question in Item 43a. 
Then follow the instructions under "How to Ask Screen
Questions" on pages B2-35 through B2-37.

Item 44a, Check Item B, and Item 44b 
(Reported Incident to Police)

Item 44a, Check Item B, and Item 44b are asked of all eligible 
household members and are designed to remind each respondent of 
incidents that the respondent reported to the police because 
something happened to the respondent that he/she thought was a 
crime.  Item 44a has a general question designed to bring out 
crimes that the respondent may have overlooked earlier or 
perhaps we did not ask about specifically in earlier items 
(For example, incidents in which the offender was a child, 
or no loss or injury resulted.). 

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item,
make sure to read the phrase, (Other than any incidents
already mentioned,), as you read the question in Item 44a.

"Yes" Answer in Item 44a

Mark Box 1 and ask "What happened?" when you get a "Yes" answer 
in Item 44a. Then enter a brief description of each reported 
incident in the space above Box 1 and continue with Check Item 
B. If the respondent reports more than one incident in Item 44a, 
enter a brief description for each incident and number each one
separately (For example, #1 - L2 threatened with physical harm 
by coworker, #2 - L2's purse snatched while boarding a bus.). 

If the respondent relates an incident that might not be a 
crime, such as a traffic accident, or that involved a 
nonhousehold member, stress that we are only interested in 
an incident when:

* It was reported to the police,

* It directly affected the respondent or another household member, 
   AND 

* The respondent believes it to be a crime. 

After stressing these points, accept the respondent's answer and 
mark the appropriate box in Item 44a. 

"No" Answer in Item 44a

When you get a "No" answer in Item 44a, mark Box 2 in Item 44a 
and skip to Item 45a.

Check Item B

If you can determine the answer for Check Item B from the 
incident description provided by the respondent in Item 44a, 
you can mark the "Yes" or "No" box in Check Item B without 
asking the question.  However, if you are unsure whether the 
respondent was attacked or threatened, or something was stolen 
or an attempt was made to steal something that belonged to the 
respondent or another

household member, ask the question in Check Item B
before marking the answer. 

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 44a AND at least
one of the incidents involves the respondent being attacked or 
threatened, or something was stolen or an attempt was made to 
steal something that belonged to the respondent or another 
household member, then mark Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item B.

Box 1 "Yes":
After marking Box 1 to indicate that the incident is an NCVS 
crime, ask Item 44b next to find out how many incidents happened.  
Although Check Item B does not mention break-ins or illegal 
entries, mark Box 1 if the respondent reports a break-in or 
illegal entry.  Also mark Box 1 in Check Item B for household 
crimes not reported in an earlier item (For example, a 10-year-
old household member's bicycle was stolen from the home's 
backyard.).

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item B, you are
instructed to ask Item 44b next.

Box 2 "No":
After marking Box 2 to indicate that the incident is not an
NCVS crime, skip to Item 45a.  If the incident involves ONLY 
acts of vandalism (for example, graffiti painted on a shed or 
tires slashed on a motor vehicle), mark Box 2 and remind the 
household respondent of the vandalism when asking the vandalism 
questions in Items 46a through 46f. If the respondent mentions 
ONLY threatening letters or telephone threats and no personal 
confrontation occurred, mark Box 2 because we only accept 
threats of physical harm delivered in person and verbally 
directly by the offender to the respondent.  When an eligible
household member, other than the respondent, was attacked or 
threatened with physical harm, mark Box 2 in Check Item B.  
Remind the victimized household member to report this incident 
if he/she does not report it when interviewed. If that person 
has already been interviewed, re-contact him/her and try to 
obtain the incident.

After marking Box 2 "No" in Check Item B, you are
instructed to skip to Item 45a.

Item 44b

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item B, ask the question in 
Item 44b to determine how many times each reported incident 
happened during the last 6 months. Enter the TOTAL number on the 
"Number of times" line in Item 44b.

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 44a AND Box 1 
"Yes" is marked in Check Item B, ask the question "How many 
times?" for each incident in which the respondent was attacked 
or threatened, or something was stolen or an attempt was made 
to steal something that belonged to the respondent or another 
household member. Then enter the TOTAL number in Item 44b.

Once you have completed the respondent's NCVS-1 interview, make 
sure to complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for 
each "Number of times" entered in Item 44b.

Item 45a, Check Item C, and Item 45b (Incident
Not Reported to Police)

Item 45a, Check Item C, and Item 45b are asked of all eligible 
household members and are designed to remind each respondent of 
incidents that the respondent did NOT report to the police, even 
though he/she thought they were crimes. Item 45a has a general 
question designed to elicit crimes that the respondent may have 
overlooked earlier or perhaps we did not ask about specifically 
in earlier items (for example, incidents in which the offender 
was a child, or no loss or injury resulted). 

If the respondent reported an incident in an earlier item, make 
sure to read the phrase, "(Other than any incidents already 
mentioned,)", as you read the question in Item 45a.

"Yes" Answer in Item 45a

Mark Box 1 and ask "What happened?" when you get a "Yes" answer 
in Item 45a.  Then enter a brief description of each reported 
incident in the space above Box 1 and continue with Check Item 
C. If the respondent reports more than one incident in Item 
45a, enter a brief description for each incident and number 
each one separately (for example, #1 - L1 threatened with a 
knife by coworker, #2 - L1's purse snatched while boarding a 
bus). 

If the respondent relates an incident that might not be a 
crime, such as a traffic accident, or that involved a 
nonhousehold member, stress that we are only interested in 
an incident when:

*  It directly affected the respondent or another household 
   member AND 

*  The respondent believes it to be a crime. 

After emphasizing these points, accept the respondent's answer 
and mark the appropriate box in Item 45a. 

"No" Answer in Item 45a

When you get a "No" answer in Item 45a, mark Box 2 in Item 45a 
and skip to the INTRO at the top of page 7.

Check Item C

If you can determine the answer for Check Item C from the incident 
description provided by the respondent in Item 45a, you can mark 
the "Yes" or "No" box in Check Item C without asking the question.  
However, if you are not sure whether the respondent was attacked 
or threatened, or something was stolen or an attempt was made to 
steal something that belonged to the respondent or another 
household member, ask the question in Check Item C before marking 
the answer. 

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 45a AND at least 
one of the incidents involves the respondent being attacked or 
threatened, or something was stolen or an attempt was made to 
steal something that belonged to the respondent or another 
household member, then mark Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item C.

Box 1 "Yes":
After marking Box 1 to indicate that the incident is an NCVS 
crime, ask Item 45b next to find out how many incidents happened. 
Although Check Item C does not mention break-ins or illegal 
entries, mark Box 1 if the respondent reports a break-in or 
illegal entry. Also mark Box 1 in Check Item C for household 
crimes not reported in an earlier item (For example, a 10-year-
old household member's bicycle was stolen from the home's 
backyard.).

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item C, you are instructed 
to ask Item 45b next.

Box 2 "No":
After marking Box 2 to indicate that the incident is not an NCVS 
crime, skip to the INTRO at the top of page 7. If the incident 
involves ONLY acts of vandalism (For example, graffiti painted
on a shed or tires slashed on a motor vehicle.), mark Box 2 and 
remind the household respondent of the vandalism when asking the 
vandalism questions in Items 46a through 46f. If the respondent
mentions ONLY threatening letters or telephone threats and no 
personal confrontation occurred, mark Box 2 because we only 
accept threats of physical harm delivered in person and verbally 
directly by the offender to the respondent.  When an eligible 
household member, other than the respondent, was attacked or 
threatened with physical harm, mark Box 2 in Check Item C.  
Remind the victimized household member to report this incident 
if he/she does not report it when interviewed. If that person has 
already been interviewed, re-contact him/her and try to obtain 
the incident.

After marking Box 2 "No" in Check Item C, you are instructed to 
skip to the INTRO at the top of page 7.

Item 45b

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item C, ask the question in 
Item 45b to determine how many times each reported incident 
happened during the last 6 months. Enter the TOTAL number on the 
"Number of times" line in Item 45b.

When multiple incidents are reported in Item 45a AND Box 1 "Yes" 
in marked in Check Item C, ask the question "How many times?" for 
each incident in which the respondent was attacked or threatened, 
something was stolen, or an attempt was made to steal something 
that belonged to the respondent or another household member. 
Then enter the TOTAL number in Item 45b.

Once you have completed the respondent's NCVS-1 interview, make 
sure to complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for 
each time entered in Item 45b.

Item 45c

Notice that the reference period for the computer crime screen 
questions covers the 6 months prior to the interview, just like 
the reference period for the rest of screen interview.  As you 
read the question in Item 45c, make sure to emphasize the word 
"YOU" and to read each answer category from Boxes 1 through 4 
as a separate question.  
                                
For example, start by asking, "During the last 6 months, have 
YOU used a computer, laptop, or WebTV for the following purposes 
For personal use at home?"  Wait for the respondent's answer. If 
you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 and then ask, "For personal 
use at work?".  If you get a "No" answer for the first question, 
leave Box 1 unmarked and continue by asking, "For personal use at
work?".  Follow this method for each of the four questions for 
Boxes 1 through 4 and mark ALL boxes that apply.  Notice that 
Box 5 is not printed in bold type.  Do NOT read this statement 
to the respondent. If the respondent answers "No" to all four 
questions in Item 45c, mark Box 5, "None of the above," and 
skip to Check Item D. Also mark Box 5 if the respondent says 
that he/she only uses a computer for work and does not have 
a home business.  In other words, the respondent has not used 
a computer for personal use or for a home business. 
                                
Take your time asking and completing this item and avoid
rushing through it. If you mark Box 5 incorrectly, you
will skip over the remaining computer crime screen questions 
and could miss information about a computer crime.
                                
If you mark any box in Item 45c, other than Box 5, you will 
continue with Item 45d.                           
Item 45d

Once you have determined in Item 45c that a respondent has 
used any type of computer in the past 6 months for personal 
use or for operating a home business, then you will determine 
in Item 45d how many computers the respondent accessed during 
the reference period for personal use or for operating a home 
business.
                                
Notice that one of the answer categories is Box 0, "None." If 
a respondent should answer "None," you need to probe to make 
sure that the respondent understood the question and to verify 
whether the answer you were given in Item 45c is correct.
                                
After completing Item 45d, continue with Item 45e.

Item 45e

Notice that the word "YOU" is printed in capital letters in
the question for Item 45e.  As you ask this question, emphasize 
the word "YOU" so that the respondent concentrates only on his/
her use of the Internet for personal reasons or for operating a 
home business.  For a proxy interview, emphasize the proxy 
person's name so that the proxy respondent concentrates on the 
proxy person's Internet usage.  
                                
Boxes 1, 2, and 3 are self-explanatory.  Only mark Box 4, "None 
of the above," when the respondent has not used the Internet at 
all during the 6 months before the interview for personal use or 
for operating a home business. 

Item 45f

Item 45f is used to identify any computer-related crime incidents 
that the respondent may have experienced in the 6 months before 
the interview.  Make sure to emphasize "COMPUTER-RELATED" and 
ask each answer category from Boxes 1 through 6 as a separate 
question.
                                
For example, start by asking, "Have you experienced any of the 
following COMPUTER-RELATED incidents in the last 6 months-Fraud 
in purchasing something over the Internet?  Wait for the 
respondent to answer and, if you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1.  
If you get a "No" answer, leave Box 1 unmarked and continue by 
asking, "Computer virus attack?"
                                
When you get to Box 5, only ask about this type of incident if 
the respondent told you in Item 45c that he/she uses a computer 
for the operation of a home business. If Box 4 is NOT marked in 
Item 45c, skip the question for Box 5 and continue by asking the 
question for Box 6.
                                
If you get all "No" answers in Item 45f, mark Box 7, "No computer-
related incidents," and skip to Check Item D. Notice that Box 7 
is not printed in bold type.  Do NOT read this statement to the 
respondent. If you mark at least one of the boxes for answer 
categories 1 through 6, continue with Item 45g.
                                
At this time, computer-related incidents are not considered NCVS 
crimes, just as acts of vandalism are not considered NCVS crimes, 
unless the incident also involves an attack or a threat of attack, 
or a theft or attempted theft. Therefore, do not complete an 
NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, if a respondent ONLY reports a 
computer-related incident and no NCVS crime occurred, such as 
an attack, a threat, a theft or an attempted theft. 

Item 45g

You will ask the question in Item 45g to find out if the 
respondent lost any money as a result of the computer-
related incident(s) identified in Item 45f. If the respondent 
reported more than one incident in Item 45f, then ask the 
question in Item 45g using the word "incidents." If you get a 
"Yes" answer, you will continue with Item 45h. If you get a 
"No" answer, you will skip to Item 45i.
                                
Item 45h

When a respondent indicates in Item 45g that he/she lost money 
due to a computer-related incident reported in Item 45f, you will 
identify how much money the respondent lost in Item 45h.  Once the 
respondent gives you an amount, use the "Amount of loss" line and 
enter the respondent's answer in whole dollars rounding up or down 
to the nearest dollar figure.  
                                
If the respondent hesitates or has trouble arriving at a dollar 
figure, ask the respondent to give you his/her best estimate. 
Enter the estimated dollar amount on the "Amount of loss" line. 
Only mark Box x, "Don't know," when you are unable to get an 
exact amount or at least an estimate from the respondent.

After completing Item 45h, continue with the last computer 
crime screen question, Item 45i.

Item 45i

Item 45i is used to find out to whom the respondent may have 
reported the computer-related incident(s). Ask each answer 
category in Boxes 1 through 5 as a separate question, as you 
were instructed for Items 45c and 45f, marking all answers that 
apply. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent reported the computer-related incident 
to any city, county, state, or Federal police agency, a housing or 
transit police agency, or any other type of law enforcement agency, 
with the exception of private security agencies.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent reported the computer-related incident 
to a company that provides access to the Internet for a fee and 
provides the user with a software package, username, password, and 
access phone number.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent reported the computer- related incident 
to an individual who manages a Website. Depending on the size of the 
site, the Website Administrator might be responsible for any or all 
of the following tasks: 
                                
* Making sure that the Web server hardware and software are running 
  properly; 
* Designing the Website; 
* Creating and updating Web pages; 
* Replying to user feedback; or
* Monitoring traffic through the site.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent reported the computer-related 
incident to an individual who is responsible for maintaining 
a multi-user computer system, including a local-area network 
(LAN).

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the respondent answers "Yes" to Box 5, "Someone 
else?", and then make sure to find out to whom the respondent 
reported the incident.  Always enter the agency's name or the 
person's title on the "Specify" lines. 

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 when you have not marked any boxes that correspond to 
answer categories 1 through 5, because the respondent did not 
notify anyone.
                                
After completing the last computer crime screen question, continue 
with Check Item D.

Check Item D

Mark Check Item D based upon your observations to show whether 
anyone besides you and the respondent was present or could 
overhear all or part of the respondent's NCVS-1 interview. Mark 
all boxes that apply to the respondent's screen interview.
                                
Do not count the following persons:
                                
Yourself
The respondent (self or proxy) For a proxy interview - the proxy 
person who is unable to answer for himself/herself

A Census Bureau observer

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1 in Check Item D for all telephone interviews, even 
if you know someone could have overheard the respondent's 
answers.

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2 in Check Item D when no one else was present during 
a personal visit interview.

Mark Boxes 3 Through 7

Mark Boxes 3 through 7 to identify the type of person when one 
or more persons were present during a personal visit interview 
and there was a possibility that they overheard the respondent's 
answers.

Proxy Interviews

If someone is present during a personal visit proxy interview, 
mark the box in Check Item D which identifies the person's 
relationship to the person for whom the proxy interview was 
conducted. 

Relationship Unknown

If someone is present during a personal visit interview and you 
do not know the person's relationship to the respondent, either 
mark the box for the most likely relationship or mark Box 7 if 
you cannot decide.

Mark Box 8

Mark Box 8 when you really do not know whether anyone was present 
or could overhear the respondent's answers to the screen questions.

Check Item E

Check Item E only applies to proxy interviews. If you are 
conducting a self-response interview with a respondent, skip 
Check Item E and continue with Item 46a (for the household 
respondent) or Check Item G (for an individual respondent).
                                
When taking a proxy interview, mark the appropriate box (1, 2, or 
3) to indicate whether the proxy person for whom the interview is
being taken provided any information, answered a screen question, 
or confirmed anything that the proxy respondent told you. Mark 
Box 1 for "Yes," Box 2 for "No," and Box 3 for "Person for whom 
interview taken not present."
                                
It is acceptable to mark Box 1 "Yes" even if the proxy person 
provided inaccurate information. For example, if a mentally 
disabled proxy person claims that neighbors shoot at him/her 
each time he/she goes outside the house, you would mark Box 1 
"Yes" in Check Item E. 

Topic 5.  Completing Items 46 Through Check Item I (Vandalism/
Crimes During Vandalism/Hate Crimes/Transcribing Number of
Incidents/Employment Questions)

Items 46a Through 46f (Vandalism Screen
Questions)

Items 46a through 46f are asked only of the household respondent 
and are designed to:

* Measure the kinds and amount of vandalism that may have 
occurred during the 6 months prior to the interview, AND

* Determine whether the household respondent was attacked or 
threatened during the act of vandalism, OR

* Something was stolen or an attempt was made to steal something 
that belonged to the household respondent or another household 
member during the act of vandalism.

Acts of vandalism alone are not considered NCVS crimes. 

Item 46a 

Always read the introductory statement before asking the question 
in Item 46a.  This statement lets the household respondent know 
that we will be asking about acts of vandalism committed against 
his/her household during the 6 months prior to the interview and 
tells the household respondent what to consider as an act of 
vandalism.

Exclude any damage done in conjunction with incidents already 
mentioned in an earlier screen question.  For example, if a 
household respondent reported in Item 39 that her van was broken 
into, the side mirror was broken during the break in, and the CD 
player was stolen, you would not include the broken side mirror 
for the vandalism screen questions because it was already reported 
with an incident in Item 39.

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 46a, ask Item 46b next. After 
marking Box 2 "No," skip to Check Item G on page 10.

Item 46b

Ask Item 46b to identify the types of property damaged or
destroyed in the vandalism reported in Item 46a. After
asking the question in Item 46b and marking the appropriate 
answer boxes (1 - 9), continue asking "Anything else?" until 
the household respondent says "No." Mark all answer boxes that 
apply to the act(s) of vandalism reported in Item 46a.  

There may be rare instances when the respondent's answer is not 
identified in Boxes 1 through 8. If you are sure the answer does 
not relate to any of the property identified in Boxes 1 through 
8, mark Box 9 "Other" and enter the property description on the 
"Specify" line.

Item 46c

Ask Item 46c to identify what type of damage was done to the 
vandalized property reported in Items 46a and 46b. After asking 
the question in Item 46c and marking the appropriate answer boxes 
(1 -7), continue asking "Anything else?" until the household 
respondent says "No." Mark all answer boxes that apply to the 
act(s) of vandalism reported in Items 46a and 46b.

There may be rare instances when the respondent's answer is not 
identified in Boxes 1 through 6. If you are sure the answer does 
not relate to any of the kinds of damage identified in Boxes 1 
through 6, mark Box 7 "Other" and describe the type of damage on 
the "Specify" line.

Item 46d

Ask Item 46d to get an estimate of the total dollar value for 
the vandalism damage reported in Items 46a through 46c. Exclude 
the dollar value for any damage done during incidents reported 
in earlier screen items. If the damaged property was repaired, 
you can use the repair cost. 

Enter the estimated value of the damaged property in whole dollars 
on the answer line in Item 46d, rounding up or down as necessary 
and then skip to Check Item F1. Here are a few examples for 
rounding up or down:

* Enter $1,if the estimate is less than $1.

* Enter $80,if the estimate is $80.49.

* Enter $81,if the estimate is $80.50.

Mark Box x "Don't know" when a respondent is unable to give an 
estimate and really does not know. After marking Box x, ask the 
question in Item 46e next. Mark Box 0 "No cost" when applicable 
and then skip to Check Item F1.

Item 46e

Whenever you mark Box x "Don't know" in Item 46d, you will ask 
the question in Item 46e to determine whether the damage was 
valued "under $100" or "$100 or more." Include the total dollar  
amount for all acts of vandalism during the 6 months prior to the 
interview. If the respondent still gives you a "Don't know" reply, 
mark  Box 3 "Don't know." After completing Item 46e, complete 
Check Item F1 next.

Check Item F1

Check Item F1 is asked to determine whether any NCVS crimes were 
committed during the act(s) of vandalism reported in Items 46a 
through 46e. If you are sure of the answer for Check Item F1, mark  
Box 1 "Yes" or 2 "No" without asking the question. If unsure of 
the answer, make sure to ask the question in Check Item F1 before
marking Box 1 or 2. 

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if:

* The household respondent was attacked or threatened during 
the act(s) of vandalism, OR

* Something was stolen or an attempt was made to steal something 
that belonged to the household respondent or another household 
member during the act(s) of vandalism.

After marking Box 1, ask the household respondent "What happened?" 
and enter a brief description of the NCVS crime on the lines above 
Box 1.  Exclude NCVS crimes reported in an earlier screen item. 
After marking Box 1 "Yes," ask the question in  Item 46f next.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the household respondent was not attacked or 
threatened during the act(s) of vandalism and nothing was stolen 
and no attempt was made to steal something from the household 
respondent or any other household member during the act(s) of 
vandalism.  After marking Box 2 "No," skip to Item 46g next.
Item 46f

After determining in Check Item F1 that an NCVS crime was 
committed during the act(s) of vandalism, ask the question in 
Item 46f to determine the number of times the NCVS crime occurred.  
Enter the household respondent's answer on the "Number of times" 
line in Item 46f.

Once you complete Check Item G, you must fill a separate NCVS-2, 
Crime Incident Report, for each incident marked in Item 46f. 
However, do not complete any NCVS-2s for act(s) of vandalism with 
no associated NCVS crimes.

After completing Item 46f, continue with Item 46g, which is the 
first household respondent's hate crime screen question.

Items 46g Through 46k (Household Respondent's
Hate Crime Screen Questions)

Items 46g through 46k are asked only of the household respondent 
when an act of vandalism is reported in Item 46a. These items 
are designed to determine if the reported vandalism was motivated 
by prejudice or bigotry towards a specific group. Similar 
questions are included in the NCVS-2 for each reported NCVS crime 
incident, but Items 46g through 46k refer only to reported act(s) 
of vandalism. These questions are commonly known as the "Hate 
Crime" questions.

For the NCVS, we consider an act of vandalism to be hate-
related when the offender targets a sample household member or 
the sample address because of the offender's prejudice or bigotry 
against the household member's characteristics or religious 
beliefs.  The offender's motivation must be at least partially 
related to his/her dislike of or prejudice against a specific 
group of people because of their:

*  Race,
*  Religion,
*  Ethnicity/national origin,
*  Disability,
*  Gender, or
*  Sexual orientation.

This type of offense is still considered a hate crime regardless 
of whether the offender has an incorrect perception of the victim's 
membership in or association with a specific group.

Item 46g

Ask Item 46g of the household respondent to find out if any of the 
vandalism reported in Item 46a was motivated at least partially by 
the offenders prejudice or bigotry towards a specific group (for 
example, Jews, Catholics, Hispanics, persons in wheelchairs, 
homosexuals, and so forth).  

Always read the lead-in statement before asking the question in 
Item 46g. If the incident involved only one offender, read the 
lead-in statement this way:

"Hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry occur when an 
offender targets people because of one or more of their 
characteristics or religious beliefs."

If there were two or more offenders, read the lead-in statement 
this way:

"Hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry occur when 
offenders target people because of one or more of their 
characteristics or religious beliefs." 

After reading the lead-in statement, ask the question in Item 
46g and mark the appropriate box based on the household 
respondent's answer.

Marking Box 1 "Yes"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the household respondent suspects that 
the vandalism reported in Item 46a was motivated by the 
offender's prejudice or hatred of specific groups of people 
because of their characteristics or religious beliefs.  After 
marking Box 1 "Yes," you are instructed to ask Item 46h next.

Marking Box 2 "No"

Mark Box 2 "No" when the household respondent does NOT suspect 
that the vandalism reported in Item 46a was motivated by the 
offender's prejudice or hatred of specific groups of people 
because of their characteristics or religious beliefs.  After 
marking Box 2 "No," you are instructed to skip to Check Item G.

Marking Box 3 "Don't know"

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" when the household respondent is not 
really sure whether the vandalism reported in Item 46a was 
motivated by the offender's prejudice or hatred of specific 
groups of people because of their characteristics or religious 
beliefs.  After marking Box 3 "Don't know," you are instructed 
to skip to Check Item G.

Item 46h

If the household respondent has one or more reasons to suspect 
that the vandalism reported in Item 46a was a hate crime or a 
crime of prejudice or bigotry, you will read the lead-in 
statement and ask the series of questions in Item 46h to 
identify the reasons for suspecting a hate crime.

After reading the lead-in statement:

*  Ask the first question, "Do you suspect the offender(s) 
   targeted you because of your race?", 

*  Wait for the respondent's answer, 

*  Record the answer by marking the appropriate box(1 for "Yes," 
   2 for "No," or 3 for "Don't know").

Repeat this procedure for each question in Item 46h. Unless you 
are interrupted as you ask questions (b)through (f) in Item 46h, 
it is not necessary to repeat "Do you suspect the offender(s) 
targeted you because of..." as you ask questions (b) through (f).

Keep the following points in mind as you ask each question in 
Item 46h:

    In question (a), "race" refers to White, Black or
    African American, American Indian or Alaska
    Native, Asian, or Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific
    Islander.  Keep in mind that "Spanish, Hispanic, or
    Latino" relates to ethnic background or national
    origin, not race.

    Questions (c) and (d) both contain parenthetical
    phrases to further explain "ethnic background or
    national origin" in (c) and "disabilities" in (d). 
    Make sure that you always read these parenthetical 
    phrases as part of the question.

    In question (e), if the household respondent doesn't
    seem to understand what the term "gender" means,
    you can add "by this I mean male or female."

    Unlike questions (c) and (d), only read the additional
    phrase, "by this we mean gay, lesbian, bisexual or
    heterosexual" AFTER the household respondent
    answers "Yes" to question (f), "Do you suspect the
    offender(s) targeted you because of your sexual
    orientation?"  

    After reading the additional phrase, the household
    respondent may tell you that he/she meant something
    different.  In that case, line through the "Yes" answer
    in Box 1 and mark the "No" answer in Box 2 for
    question (f).  Do not read this additional phrase if the
    household respondent answers "No" to question (f).

    If the household respondent says that the vandalism
    was motivated by the offender's  dislike for
    homosexuals or transvestites, mark Box 1 "Yes" in
    question (f).

Item 46i

Once you complete Item 46h, you will ask the two questions in 
Item 46i to determine whether the household respondent suspects 
that he/she was targeted because of:

* His/her association with people who have certain
  characteristics or religious beliefs about which the
  offender is prejudiced (for example, the household
  respondent's friends are gay or a multiracial
  couple), AND/OR

* The offender's perception of the household respondent's 
  characteristics or religious beliefs (for example, an 
  offender thinks the household respondent is Jewish because 
  he/she visited a synagogue or an offender thinks the 
  household respondent is gay because his/her friend is gay).

Ask the first question in Item 46i, wait for the household
respondent's answer, and mark the appropriate box. If you
mark Box 1 "Yes," explain briefly why the household

respondent suspects that he/she was targeted because of his/her 
association with certain people.

Repeat this procedure for the second question in Item 46i. Again, 
if you mark Box 1 "Yes," explain briefly why the household 
respondent suspects that he/she was targeted because of the 
offender's perception of the household respondent's 
characteristics or religious beliefs.

Once you have finished Item 46i, complete Check Item F2.

Check Item F2

Use Check Item F2 to decide whether you should:

*  Continue with Item 46j or 

*  Skip to Check Item G.  

If you marked Box 1 "Yes" for one or more questions in Items 46h 
or 46i, mark the "Yes" box in Check Item F2 and ask the question 
in Item 46j next.  However, if Box 2 "No" or Box 3 "Don't know" 
is marked for ALL the questions in Items 46h and 46i, skip to 
Check Item G on page 10.

Item 46j

Ask the question in Item 46j to determine if the household
respondent has any evidence that the vandalism reported in
Item 46a was motivated by prejudice or bigotry. 
 
If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 and ask the questions 
in Item 46k next.

If you get a "No" or "Don't know" answer, ask the probing
question in Item 46j to ensure that there was no evidence
causing the household respondent to suspect a hate crime. 
After asking the probe question, accept the household
respondent's answer and mark the appropriate box.  If the
answer is still "No" or "Don't know," skip to Check Item G.

Item 46k

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 46j, you will continue
with the lead-in statement and the seven questions in  
Item 46k to identify the type of evidence causing the
household respondent to suspect a hate crime or a crime of
prejudice or bigotry.

After reading the lead-in statement:

* Ask the first question, "As I read the following questions, 
  please tell me if any of the following happened: Did the 
  offender(s) make fun of you, make negative comments, use 
  slang, hurtful words, or abusive language?", 

* Wait for the respondent's answer, 

* Record the answer by marking the appropriate box (1 for "Yes," 
  2 for "No," or 3 for "Don't know").

Repeat this procedure for each question in Item 46k. Unless you 
are interrupted as you ask questions (b)through (g) in Item 46k, 
it is not necessary to repeat "As I read the following questions, 
please tell me if any of the following happened: " as you ask 
questions (b) through (g). Once you complete Item 46k, complete 
Check Item G.

Check Item G

Use Check Item G to summarize by item number the "Number of times" 
entries from the respondent's screen interview.  Page back through 
the respondent's screen interview and transcribe each "Number of 
times" entry made for a screen item to the appropriate line in 
Check Item G. To help you locate entries quickly, scan each page 
of the respondent's screen interview looking for the "tick marks" 
printed to the right of each "Number of times" entry. 

No Reported Incidents 

If the respondent did not report any crime incidents during the 
screen interview (all "Number of times" entries are blank), mark 
the box at the top of Check Item G, "No entries transcribed below," 
and go to Check Item H next.

One or More Reported Incidents

After transcribing each "Number of times" entry to Check Item 
G, stop completing the NCVS-1 screen interview and complete a 
separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for each screen 
question that has an entry of "1" or more in Check Item G.

Field Representative Note

This note is a reminder for you to:

   Stop completing the NCVS-1 at this point if the respondent 
   reported one or more crime incidents, AND

   Complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for 
   each time an incident was reported for a screen question, 
   as noted in Check Item G.

   Always complete any required Crime Incident Reports BEFORE 
   completing Check Item H.

Check Item H 

You will complete Check Item H AFTER you:

* Mark the "No entries transcribed below" box in Check Item G, 
  OR

* Complete the last NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for the 
  respondent.

Check Item H is used to determine whether the respondent is old 
enough to qualify for the employment questions. If the respondent 
is 16 years of age or older, you will mark Box 1 "Yes" and start 
the employment questions with Item 47a. If the respondent is 
under 16 years of age, mark Box 2 "No" and skip to Check Item I.

Item 47a

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item H, you will ask
the question in Item 47a to determine if the respondent had
a job AT ALL during the week before the interview.  This
could be a full-time or part-time job for salary or wages
working for a business, government agency, or self-
employed.  Do NOT include volunteer work for which the
respondent was not paid.

For the NCVS, a job is defined as any activity that is done
for pay, wages, salary, commission, tips, or payment "in
kind," or that is done without pay on a family farm or for a
family business.  If someone in the household has a farm
or a business, make sure to probe by asking the respondent
about any unpaid work last week for the family farm or 
business.

Marking Box 1 "Yes"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent had a job or worked at a 
business at any time during the week prior to the interview, 
even if the respondent was on vacation or temporarily absent 
due to sickness or some other reason. After marking Box 1 
"Yes," you are instructed to skip to Item 48a.

Marking Box 2 "No"

Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent did not have a job or work at 
a business during the week prior to the interview. Also, mark 
Box 2 "No" if a respondent receives scholarship money while 
attending school (even if it is in excess of the cost of 
tuition, textbooks, lab fees, and so forth) AND does not have 
a job. After marking Box 2 "No," you are instructed to ask or 
verify the answer for Item 47b.

Item 47b

Item 47b is asked to determine whether the respondent had a job 
or worked at a business at any time during the 6 months prior 
to the interview.  You will only ask or verify Item 47b when the 
respondent did not have a job or work at a business during the 
week before the interview.

Marking Box 1 "Yes"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent had a job or worked at a 
business at any time during the 6 months prior to the interview, 
even if the respondent was away from work during some of that 
time for a vacation or illness.  After marking Box 1 "Yes," you 
are instructed to ask the question in Item 47c next.  A large 
arrow points from the "Yes" answer in Item 47b to Item 47c. This 
arrow is used as an added reminder for you to ask the question 
in Item 47c when you mark the "Yes" answer in Item 47b.

Marking Box 2 "No"

Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent did not have a job or work at 
a business at any time during the 6 months prior to the interview.  
After marking Box 2 "No," you are instructed to skip to Check 
Item I next.

Item 47c

Once the respondent tells you in Item 47b that he/she had
a job or worked at a business during the 6 months before
the interview, then you will ask the question in Item 47c 
to determine whether that job or work lasted for 2 or more
consecutive weeks.

Marking Box 1 "Yes"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the respondent has worked at least 2 
consecutive weeks at the job or business mentioned in Item 
47b. After marking Box 1 "Yes," you are instructed to ask 
the question in Item 48a next.

Marking Box 2 "No"

Mark Box 2 "No" when the job or work mentioned in Item 47b did 
NOT last for at least 2 consecutive weeks. After marking Box 2 
"No," you are instructed to skip to Check Item I. 

Item 48a

Item 48a is used to identify whether the respondent's job is
in one of the job classifications which may increase or decrease 
his/her likelihood of becoming a victim of crime. Item 48a allows 
you to verify a known answer without asking the question first.  

Make sure to only mark ONE answer box. If the respondent worked 
at more than one type of job during the past 6 months, mark the 
box for the category at which the respondent worked the MOST 
hours.  If the respondent worked at more than one type of job 
during the past 6 months AND spent the same amount of time at 
each job, mark the box for the first category mentioned.

Personal Visit Interviews

If you are conducting a personal visit interview:

* Open your Information Card Booklet to page 9 and show the 
  "Employment" flashcard to the respondent.

* Ask the question in Item 48a and then ask the respondent 
  to identify on the flashcard the job category that best 
  describes his/her job.  Not all job categories will be 
  identified on the flashcard or in Item 48a. If the 
  respondent cannot find a job category that describes his/
  her job, mark Box 27 "Something else" and enter the 
  respondent's job title on the "Specify" line.

Telephone Interviews

If you are conducting a telephone interview:

* Ask the question in Item 48a followed by, "Were you employed 
  in the..." 

* Then read each of the main headings until the respondent 
  answers "Yes."  By main headings, we mean the bolded text 
  above each group of job categories; for example, "Medical 
  Profession,"  "Mental Health Services Field," and so forth.

* Once you get a "Yes" answer, then read the appropriate lead-
  in statement and each job category until you get another 
  "Yes" answer.  For example, if you get a "Yes" answer after 
  reading "Mental Health Services Field," then read:  "Are 
  your duties professional (social worker/psychiatrist), 
  custodial care, or other?" Any time you mark an "Other" 
  job category or Box 27 "Something else," make sure to
  enter an accurate job title on the "Specify" line.

Item 48b

Item 48b is used to determine whether the respondent's job
or work is with:

  A private company, business, or individual for wages

  The Federal government

  A State, county, or local government

  The respondent's own business, professional practice, or 
  farm (self-employed).

Item 48b allows you to verify a known answer with the respondent 
without asking the question.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when a respondent worked for a PRIVATE employer for 
wages, salary, commission, tips, piece-rates, or pay in kind.  
Also mark Box 1 for respondents who worked for pay for churches, 
unions, and other private nonprofit organizations.

Marking Box 2 

Mark Box 2 when a respondent:

   Worked for any branch of the Federal government.

   Was elected to a paid Federal office.

   Was a member of the Armed Forces.

   Was employed by an international organization (for example, 
   the United Nations) or a foreign government.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when a respondent worked in any branch of a state, 
county, or local government.  This also includes respondents 
who were elected to paid state, county, or local offices.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when a respondent was self-employed for profit or 
fees in his/her OWN business, farm, shop, office, practice, 
and so forth.

Item 48c

Item 48c is used to determine whether a respondent is employed 
by a college or university.

Mark Without Asking

If you marked Box 12 "College or university" in Item 48a 
indicating that the respondent was a teacher at a college 
or university, mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 48c without asking 
the question. 

Ask the Question

If you marked a box in Item 48a other than Box 12, always ask 
the question in Item 48c BEFORE marking the answer.

Item 48d

Item 48d is asked to find out if a respondent works in a
city, suburban area, rural area, or a combination of any of
these areas.  If the respondent has been a victim of crime
while on the job, we can use these data to determine if
specific areas are more prone to crime. 

Read the lead-in statement and each answer category as part of 
the question.  Most respondents will know the correct response, 
so let the respondent decide which type of area. When a respondent 
worked for more than one employer, mark the box for the area in 
which he/she worked the greater number of hours. If a respondent
works off shore such as on an aircraft carrier, the answer to 
Item 48d should be based on the ship's home harbor. Avoid marking 
Box 4 "Combination of any of these?" unless a respondent insists 
that the area he/she worked MOST of the time was a combination of 
city, suburban, and rural.

Check Item I 

Check Item I is designed to help you decide what actions
need to be taken if:

   You are interviewing the last household member OR

   You have more eligible household members left to interview.

Marking the "Yes" Box

Mark the "Yes" box if you are interviewing the LAST eligible 
household member to be interviewed. If you mark the "Yes" box 
and the interview is for the household respondent, you will 
see an additional instruction to ask or verify Control Card 
items. You will not see this instruction when you mark the 
"Yes" box in Check Item I for an individual respondent (any 
eligible respondent who is not the household respondent).  
Make sure that you have completed or updated Control Card Items 
25b through 28 and Items 30b and 30c for the current enumeration 
period. After you have updated the Control Card items, end the
interview.

Marking the "No" Box

Mark the "No" box if one or more eligible household members 
still need to be interviewed and ask to speak to the next 
available household member who is 12 years of age or older. 
Make sure to follow the instruction in the Field Representative 
note below Check Item I which reads, "If the next household 
member to be interviewed is under 18, tell the household 
respondent/current respondent that you will be asking the same 
questions you just asked him/her." If necessary, arrange callback 
appointments for any respondents who are not available at that 
time. 

Part B, Chapter 3

Chapter 3
Completing the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

Table of Topics

1  General Instructions
                              
2  Completing Items 1 Through 23(Cover Page/Location of 
   Incident/Illegal Entry/Presence During Incident/Use 
   of Weapon) 

3  Completing Items 24 Through 31 (Attacks/Threats)

4  Completing Items 32 Through 54 (Injuries/Medical Care/
   Protecting Self or Property/Results of Actions/Presence 
   of Others/Injuries to Others Present)

5  Completing Check Item G Through Item 87(Use of Physical 
   Force/Characteristics of the Offender(s))

6  Completing Items 88 Through 114 (Theft/Items Stolen/Value 
   of Stolen Property/Repair or Replacement of Stolen Property/
   Cost of Repair or Replacement)

7  Completing Items 115 Through 134(Police Notification/
   Reasons for Reporting or Not Reporting Incident to 
   Police/Police Response to Notification/Contact With 
   Authorities)
                                
8  Completing Items 135 Through 153(Activity During Incident/
   Employment Status at Time of Incident/Type of Industry
   and Occupation/Lost Work Time and Pay Due to Injury/Means 
   of Transportation)

9  Completing Check Item U Through Check Item Z (Series of 
   Crimes/Hate Crimes/Disability/Summary of Incident)

Topic 1.  General Instructions

Definition

The NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, is a detailed questionnaire 
used to gather a variety of information about each reported 
incidence of crime that occurred during the respondent's 6-
month reference period.  It is important to record accurate 
and complete information on each Crime Incident Report so that 
we have a clear picture of what happened during the incident.  
Always make sure that you are using the latest version of the 
NCVS-2 by checking the paper color and the print date shown 
below the form number on the cover page.

When to Complete(NCVS-2) 

You will complete one or more NCVS-2's for a respondent based 
on the "Number of times" entries that you make for each screen 
question in Check Item G on the NCVS-1. Complete a separate 
NCVS-2 for each "time" an incident was reported during the 
screen interview.  Also complete a separate NCVS-2 for any 
incidents that might be discovered while completing a Crime 
Incident Report, even if they were not reported in the screen 
questions. 

Always complete all required NCVS-2s for a respondent as soon 
as you finish completing Check Item G on the NCVS-1 for a 
respondent and BEFORE you:

*  Continue with Check Item H on the NCVS-1 or 

*  Conduct screen interviews for any remaining eligible
   household members. 

Once you start to complete a Crime Incident Report, you must 
finish it, with the exception of incidents that happened
outside of the respondent's reference period.  For all other
situations, it is important to finish the NCVS-2 once you
begin.  This is important because you may discover that an
additional NCVS crime has occurred in conjunction with
the original crime.

How Many to Complete(NCVS-2)

Complete a separate NCVS-2 for each time a crime incident is 
reported in a screen question on the NCVS-1. Also complete an 
NCVS-2 for any additional incidents that the respondent 
mentions as you complete the NCVS-2 with him/her.  

--------------------------------------------
Example:  
During the screen interview, a respondent reports that 
her home was broken into on two separate occasions, and 
on another occasion a co-worker threatened to beat her 
up if she did not stop seeing the co-worker's former 
boyfriend.  While completing the first NCVS-2 for the 
break in, the respondent mentions that on another occasion 
within the last 6 months she had money and jewelry stolen 
during a house party. Because these incidents happened 
during the respondent's reference period, you would 
complete four separate Crime Incident Reports (NCVS-2s) 
for this respondent.
----------------------------------------------

If a respondent remembers an incident that occurred during
his/her reference period AFTER completing the respondent's 
screen interview, you must correct the NCVS-1 by:

* Adding the incident to the appropriate screen question for 
  the respondent (describing the incident and correcting the 
  number of times entry).

* Correcting the appropriate entries in Check Item G for
  the respondent.

When more than one household member was "personally victimized" 
during the same incident, complete a separate NCVS-2 with each 
eligible household member who was personally victimized during 
his/her reference period.  By personally victimized, we mean 
there was some type of physical contact between the offender 
and the household member, a threat of physical harm made in 
person between the offender and the respondent, or an attempt 
to physically harm a household member.

---------------------------------------------
Example:
During a screen interview, a respondent reported that he and 
his wife were robbed at gun point while walking in a shopping 
center parking lot.  During the robbery, the offender forced 
both household members to walk to a wooded area where he robbed
them and tied them to a tree. Even though this is one incident, 
you will complete two NCVS-2s since both eligible household 
members were personally victimized during the incident. Fill 
one NCVS-2 with the husband and another NCVS-2 with his wife. 
If his wife does not mention that she was personally victimized 
during her interview, you need to remind her about the incident.
----------------------------------------------

When you are done interviewing an NCVS household, the number of 
completed NCVS-2s should match the total of all "Number of times" 
entries in Check Item G for all interviewed household members on 
the NCVS-1. 

Special Situations

Under certain circumstances, the number of completed NCVS-2s 
will not match the number of times entries originally reported 
in Check Item G. This can happen when the procedures allow you 
to:

* Stop completing an NCVS-2 OR 

* Complete an NCVS-2 and then out-of-scope the incident.

Here are some examples:

  Series of crimes - A respondent reports a series of crimes 
  requiring you to complete only one NCVS-2 for the most recent 
  incident in the series.  To be considered a series of crimes, 
  there must be at least SIX occurrences or incidents that are 
  very similar in detail AND the respondent must NOT be able to
  recall individual details about each occurrence or incident.  
  Items on the NCVS-2 cover page will help you verify the 
  existence of a series of crimes.  Do not record details 
  for all incidents in the series on the NCVS-2. Instead, 
  record only the details for the most recent incident. 

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 2, for more details about a 
series of crimes.)

  Incident happened outside of reference period - A respondent 
  reports an incident that happened outside of his/her 6-month 
  reference period.  Item 3 on the NCVS-2 cover page will help 
  you verify this fact. 

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, for more details about the NCVS 
reference period.)

  Household crime reported by more than one household member - 
  A respondent reported an incident involving a household 
  crime (for example, burglary or motor vehicle theft) or a 
  personal theft without contact that another household member 
  has already reported. Incidents that do NOT involve any
  physical contact, face-to-face threat of physical harm, or 
  an attempt to physically harm a household member only need 
  to be reported once during the interview period. If you 
  discover this situation after starting the NCVS-2, finish 
  completing it and then out-of-scope the incident, AFTER 
  verifying that the two incidents are identical.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, for more information about out-of-
scope incidents.)

  Identical crime incidents reported in more than one screen 
  question - A respondent reports the same crime incident in 
  more than one screen question.  If you discover this 
  situation after starting the NCVS-2, finish completing it 
  and then out-of-scope the incident.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 1, for more information about out-of-
scope incidents.)

If you discover any of these situations AFTER completing a 
respondent's screen interview, make sure to correct the
"Number of times" entries in the screen question and in
Check Item G on the NCVS-1, so that the total number of
times matches the number of NCVS-2s completed and does NOT 
include out-of-scope incidents for the respondent.  If
necessary, also correct the "Yes/No" entries for the screen
question.  Make sure that you correct these NCVS-1 entries
for each incident that you out of scope.  Do not erase
incorrect entries you may make, instead line through them
and then make the correct entries. 

General Instructions for Completing an NCVS-2

Always transcribe accurately and legibly the case's identification 
information onto the top of the NCVS-2 cover page BEFORE completing 
the Crime Incident Report.  By entering correctly and legibly the 
case's sample, control number, and household number on the NCVS-2,
you are ensuring that any NCVS-2s completed for a sample address 
can be linked together with the other completed forms for the 
sample address.

To ensure that you fill ALL required NCVS-2s for a respondent:

* Start with incidents reported in the lowest item number 
  screen question and work your way to the highest item 
  number screen question.

* If more than one incident is reported for a screen question, 
  start with the earliest or first incident that occurred during 
  the person's reference period and work your way to the most 
  recent incident in order of occurrence within the reference 
  period.

Make sure to follow all skip patterns and Field Representative 
instructions accurately to ensure a smooth flowing and complete 
interview.  

When assembling completed questionnaires for a household, follow 
these steps:

Step
1 The first questionnaire at the top of the stack should be 
  the completed NCVS-1. If you complete any NCVS-1As, staple
  them to the NCVS-1. If you completed any questionnaires 
  for NCVS supplements, such as School Crime and Police 
  Public Contact, insert them into the NCVS-1.

2 Below the NCVS-1, place any NCVS-2s completed for the 
  household.

3 Rubber band all completed questionnaires for the household 
  together in one bundle.

By organizing your work this way, you can help prevent forms 
from getting lost. 

Topic 2.  Completing Items 1 Through 23 (Cover Page/Location of
          Incident/Illegal Entry/Use of Weapon)

Filling Items 1a Through 1c

Once you have transcribed the case's sample, control number, 
and household number in the appropriate space at the top right 
of the NCVS-2 cover page, you are ready to complete Items 
1a, 1b, and 1c.

Item 1a (Line Number of Respondent) 

Fill Item 1a with the 2-digit line number to identify the 
household member who reported the incident in his/her screen 
interview. Item 19 of the household member's screen interview 
(NCVS-1) shows the person's line number as assigned on the 
household's Control Card.

For a proxy interview, make sure to enter the 2-digit line 
number for the household member who is unable to answer for 
himself/herself (proxy person), NOT the line number for the 
proxy respondent who is answering for the proxy person.

Item 1b (Screen Question Number)

Fill Item 1b with the 2-digit item number to identify the 
screen question where the household member reported the incident. 
Refer to the household member's screen interview to locate the 
item number for the incident. It is not necessary to enter a 
letter suffix (a, b, or c) when identifying the screen question 
item number in Item 1b. 

-----------------------------------------
Example:
Line number 1 reports in Items 41a through 41c that someone 
grabbed and punched him during an argument. When you complete 
Item 1b on the NCVS-2 for this incident, you will enter only 
the 2-digit item number, "41." 
------------------------------------------

Item 1c (Incident Number)

When you complete an NCVS-2 for an incident and it is the only 
incident reported for the screen question identified in Item 1b, 
enter "01" in Item 1c.  However, if the household member reported 
two or more incidents in one screen question, then you need to 
assign a unique number to each incident starting with "01" for 
the earliest or the first incident that happened during the 
respondent's reference period, "02" for the second earliest 
incident that happened during the reference period, and so 
forth. 

------------------------------------------------------
Example:
During the screen interview, line number 1 reported two 
incidents in Item 42.  On one occasion in June, a neighbor 
threatened to slap her if she did not stop yelling at his 
child.  On another occasion in August, the same neighbor 
threatened to hit her with a baseball bat if she did not 
stop yelling at his child.  When completing Item 1c on the 
NCVS-2, the incident in June would be incident number "01"
and the incident in August would be incident number "02."  
------------------------------------------------------

However, if you recorded two incidents in one screen question 
and one incident in another screen question, the one incident 
in the other screen question would be entered in Item 1c as 
"01," NOT "03."

Check Item A (More Than 6 Months at 
Current Address)

Check Item A will help you determine whether or not to ask the 
question in Item 2. If you are unsure about which box to mark 
in Check Item A:

* Look at the answer marked in Item 33a on the NCVS-1 or

* Ask the respondent whether he/she has lived at the sample 
  address more than 6 months.

If you mark the "Yes" box because the household member has 
lived at the sample address more than 6 months, you will skip 
to Item 3.

If you mark the "No" box because the household member has lived 
at the sample address 6 months or less, then you will continue 
with Item 2.

Also mark the "No" box in Check Item A when you are unable to 
determine whether the household member has lived at the sample
address more than 6 months or less than 6 months.

If you are conducting a proxy interview, the word "respondent" 
in Check Item A refers to the person who is unable to answer 
for himself/herself, not the proxy respondent who is answering 
the questions.

Item 2 (While Living at Current 
Address)

If the household member has lived at the sample address for 6 
months or less, then you will ask the question in Item 2 to 
determine if the reported incident occurred while the household 
member:

*  Lived at the sample address or

*  Lived at a previous address. 

Follow these steps when asking the question in Item 2:

  Use the incident description that you entered in the NCVS-1 
  screen question to decide how to word the lead-in statement 
  and how many times the incident happened during the reference 
  period.

--------------------------------------------
Example 1:
During the screen interview, the respondent reported in 
Item 39 that someone stole the battery from her car one 
time.  Read the lead-in statement this way: "You said 
that during the last 6 months someone stole the battery 
from your car."  For a proxy interview, read: "You said 
that during the last 6 months someone stole the battery 
from Jennifer Bailey's (proxy person's) car."

Example 2:
During the screen interview, the respondent reported in 
Item 41 that a neighbor threatened to hit her with a 
frying pan if she walked her dog in the neighbor's yard.  
The neighbor made this threat two times during the 
reference period.  Read the lead-in statement this way:  
"You said that during the last 6 months your neighbor 
threatened to hit you with a frying pan twice."  For a 
proxy interview, read: "You said that during the last 
6 months your neighbor threatened to hit Jennifer Bailey
(proxy person) with a frying pan twice."
-----------------------------------------------------

  When the incident reported in a screen question happened 
  ONLY ONE TIME during the reference period, ask the 
  question in Item 2 this way:

  "Did this incident happen while you were living here or 
  before you moved to this address?"

  For a proxy interview, ask Item 2 this way:

  "Did this incident happen while Jennifer Bailey (proxy 
  person) was living here or before she moved to this 
  address?"

  When the incident reported in a screen question happened 
  MORE THAN ONE TIME, you must complete a separate NCVS-2 
  for each time it happened during the reference period.  
  Start with the earliest incident in the reference period 
  and work towards the most recent.  Read the question in 
  Item 2 based on the incident number entered in Item 1c.

-------------------------------------------------
Example:
The first threat to hit the respondent with a frying 
pan was made in March and the second threat was made 
in April.  The March incident will be incident "01" 
when you complete Item 1c and the April incident will 
be incident "02."  For incident "01," read the 
question in Item 2 this way: "Did the first incident 
happen while you were living here or before you moved 
to this address?"  When you complete the NCVS-2 for 
incident "02," read the question in Item 2 this way: 
"Did the second incident happen while you were living 
here or before you moved to this address?"
-------------------------------------------------

Mark Box 1 "While living at this address" or Box 2 "Before
moving to this address" based on the respondent's answer.

Item 3(Month Incident Happened)

Item 3 is used to determine the month and year in which the 
incident occurred.  Encourage respondents to give an exact
month and, when necessary during a personal visit interview, 
show them the calendars on pages 12  and 13 in the Field 
Representative's Flashcard Booklet, NCVS-554. As you show a 
respondent the calendars, point out the months covering the 
respondent's reference period.  For telephone interviews, 
probe with holidays or other special events to help the 
respondent identify an exact month of occurrence.  

Follow these steps when asking Item 3:

  Use the incident description that you entered in the NCVS-1 
  screen question to decide how to word the lead-in statement 
  and how many times the incident happened during the reference 
  period.

--------------------------------------------------
Example 1:
During the screen interview, the respondent reported
in Item 39 that someone stole gasoline from his car
one time.  Read the lead-in statement this way: 
"You said that during the last 6 months someone
stole gasoline from your car."  For a proxy interview, 
read: "You said that during the last 6 months someone 
stole gasoline from Jennifer Bailey's (proxy person's) 
car."

Example 2:
During the screen interview, the respondent reported
in Item 41 that she was raped two times during the
reference period.  Read the lead-in statement this
way: "You said that during the last 6 months you
were raped twice."  For a proxy interview, read: 
"You said that during the last 6 months Jennifer
Bailey (proxy person) was raped twice."
---------------------------------------------------

  When the incident reported in a screen question happened 
  ONLY ONE TIME during the reference period, ask the question 
  in Item 3 this way:

  "In what month did this incident happen?"

  When the incident reported in a screen question happened 
  MORE THAN ONE TIME, you must complete a separate NCVS-2 for 
  each time it happened during the reference period. Ask the
  question in Item 3 based on the incident number entered in 
  Item 1c.

If you are completing the NCVS-2 for the first incident reported 
for a screen question, enter "01" in Item 1c and read the question 
in Item 3 this way:

"In what month did the first incident happen?"

If you are completing the NCVS-2 for the second or third incident 
reported for a screen question, enter "02" or "03" in Item 1c and 
read the question in Item 3 this way when completing each NCVS-2:

" In what month did the second incident happen?"

"In what month did the third incident happen?" 

Enter the respondent's answer for Item 3 using 2-digits for the 
month and 4-digits for the year (For example, enter March 2003 
as "03" and "2003.").

Date Is Outside of Reference 
Period

If the respondent's answer to Item 3 is a date outside of his/
her reference period, remind the respondent of the starting 
and ending dates for his/her reference period.

When the respondent still gives you a date outside of his/her 
reference period and the incident happened only one time, stop 
completing the NCVS-2 and out-of-scope the incident. 
Instructions for how to out-of-scope an incident are shown in 
Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, Out-of-Scope Incidents.

If the incident happened more than once, only complete NCVS-2s 
for those incidents that happened within the respondent's 
reference period.

-------------------------------------------
Example:
A respondent reported that she had been raped twice during 
the last 6 months.  When you get to Item 3, you discover 
that the first rape occurred before the start of her 
reference period, but the second rape did happen during her 
reference period.  Leave the "01" in Item 1c, but enter the 
date for the second rape in Item 3, since it is the first 
incident that happened within the reference period. Out-of-
scope the first rape by making the appropriate entries on 
the NCVS-1.

(See Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, for detailed instructions 
on how to mark forms for out-of-scope incidents.)
-----------------------------------------------

Item 4 (Number of Incidents)

Item 4 is used to record, for the screen question entered in
Item 1b, the total number of times that the same type of
incident happened during the reference period. If you are
already sure what the total number is, enter the number of
incidents without asking the question in Item 4.

Always record the exact number of incidents and only include 
incidents in the total that happened during the respondent's 
reference period.  Do not enter a range of numbers (for 
example, 1-4).  Whenever a respondent seems unsure, probe to 
arrive at an exact number or at least his/her best estimate.  
Do not rush the respondent and allow sufficient time for the 
respondent to recall information about the incidents.

Use neutral probes to help arrive at an exact number or the
respondent's best estimate, such as "Thinking back, can you
recall what you were doing or what was happening in your
life at the time of the incidents?" If probing does not help
and the respondent still cannot provide even an estimate,
print "DK" to the right of the answer space.

If you enter a number of incidents in Item 4 between "1 and
5," you must complete a separate NCVS-2 for each incident.  
Failure to do so will result in either the respondent 
classifying as a Type Z noninterview person or the household 
classifying as a Type A noninterview.

Check Item B (How Many Incidents)

Check Item B is the first check item on the NCVS-2 to determine 
whether the reported incidents qualify as a series of crimes.

Mark Box 1 if the number of incidents entered in Item 4 is
1 through 5.  This automatically disqualifies the incidents
as a series of crimes and you will skip to Item 6 after
marking Box 1.

Mark Box 2 if the number of incidents entered in Item 4 is
6 or more.  This indicates that the incidents may qualify as
a series of crimes. Continue with Check  Item C for the next 
criteria.

Check Item C (Similar or Different 
Incidents)

Check Item C is used to determine if the incidents are very
similar to each other or the incidents involve different types
of crimes. The incidents entered in Item 4 must be very
similar to each other to qualify as a series of crimes. If you
are not sure which box to mark, ask the respondent the question 
in Check Item C.

Mark Box 1 if ALL the incidents entered in Item 4 are very
similar to each other in detail and then fill Check Item D
for the next criteria.  For example, a respondent reported
seven separate incidents that occurred during the reference
period in which money was stolen from her desk at work. 
In each of these incidents, money was stolen from her desk
at work and she was not victimized in any other way that
might classify as a different type of NCVS crime. Therefore, 
you would mark Box 1 in Check Item C.

Mark Box 2 when there are facts for some of the incidents
entered in Item 4 that differentiate them from one another. 
After marking Box 2, you will skip to Item 6 because these
incidents do not qualify as a series of crimes. For example,
a respondent reported seven separate incidents all of which
took place in the same parking garage during the reference
period.  For two of the incidents, the offender threatened to
sexually assault her.  For the remaining five incidents,
someone broke into her car and stole unattached items, such 
as a coat, music CDs, and so forth. In this example, we do 
NOT have at least 6 very similar incidents, so you would 
mark Box 2 in Check Item C.

Check Item D(Series of Incidents)

Check Item D is used to determine whether the incidents meet 
the final criteria for a series of crimes.  If you are not
sure whether the respondent can recall enough facts about
each incident to distinguish them from each other, ask the
question of the respondent before marking an answer box.

Mark Box 1 if the respondent can remember enough facts to 
distinguish the incidents from one another, so that you
can complete most of the required questions on the NCVS-2 
for each incident. By marking Box 1, you are confirming 
that the incidents are NOT a series of crimes and you must 
complete a separate NCVS-2 for each incident entered in 
Item 4.

Mark Box 2 if the respondent cannot remember enough facts to 
distinguish the incidents from one another, so that it would 
not be possible to complete a separate NCVS-2 for each 
incident.  By marking Box 2, you are confirming that the 
incidents entered in Item 4 qualify as a "series of crimes."

After marking Box 2 in Check Item D, make sure to:

* Correct the number of times entries on the NCVS-1 so that the 
  series of crimes is shown as ONE time in the reported screen 
  question and in Check Item G.

* Leave the number of incidents in Item 4 of the NCVS-2 as 
  originally entered. Do NOT reduce the number in Item 4 after 
  marking Box 2 in Check Item D.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 2, for more information 
about a series of crimes.)

Item 5 (Most Recent Incident)

When you identify a series of crimes by marking Box 2 in
Check Item D, you must read the statement in Item 5 next. 
By reading this statement, you are letting the respondent
know that the questions you will ask next relate ONLY to
the most recent incident that happened in the series of
crimes. Once you read the statement in Item 5, ask Item 6
next.

Item 6 (Time of Day/Night)

Item 6 is used to determine what time of day or night the
incident happened. If a "1" is entered in Item 4, read the
question in Item 6 this way: "About what time did this
incident happen?" If a "2" is entered in Item 4, read the
question in Item 6 this way: "About what time did the
second incident happen?"  However, if you are completing an 
NCVS-2 for a series of crimes (Box 2 marked in Check Item D), 
read the question in Item 6 this way: "About what time did 
the most recent incident happen?"

Specific Time Given

If the respondent answers with a specific time, such as 10 
p.m., then mark the appropriate answer box for the time
given (For example, when the answer is 10 p.m., mark Box 6 
"After 9 p.m. - 12 midnight.").  Make sure to verify whether 
the specific time given is "a.m." or "p.m."

Range of Hours Given

When a respondent answers with a range of hours, take these 
steps:

Step
1 See if the hours given fit into one answer category. For 
  example, when a respondent answers with "between 4 and 6 p.m.,
  " mark Box 3 "After 3 p.m. - 6 p.m.".

2 If the range of hours does not fit into one answer category, 
  see if the hours given are all "during the day" or all "during 
  the night."  For example, when a respondent answers with 
  "sometime between 12 noon and 4 p.m.," mark Box 4 "Don't know 
  what time of day." If a respondent answers with "between 
  10 p.m. and midnight," mark Box 8 "Don't know what time of
  night."

3 If the range of hours overlaps day and night answer categories, 
  mark Box 9 "Don't know whether day or night."  For example, 
  when a respondent answers with "Sometime between 5 p.m. and 
  10 p.m.," mark Box 9 "Don't know whether day or night."

Respondent Does Not Know What Time

When a respondent really does not know an exact hour or range 
of hours when the incident happened and he/she tells you that:

* It happened sometime during the day, mark Box 4 "Don't know 
  what time of day." 

* It happened sometime during the night, mark Box 8 "Don't know 
  what time of night." 

* He/she really does not know whether it happened during the 
  day or during the night, mark Box 9 "Don't know whether day 
  or night."

Items 7 Through 8b(City/County/ State 
of Occurrence)

Since these items are designed to help establish where the crime 
occurred, encourage the respondent to be as precise as possible.  
In some cases, you may be able to help the respondent to provide 
a more precise answer by using your knowledge of the area.

Item 7 (City/Town/Village of 
Occurrence)

After asking the question in Item 7, "In what city, town, or 
village did this incident occur?", you will mark:

  Box 1 "Outside U.S." when the incident happened outside of 
  the 50 states and the District of Columbia. For the purposes 
  of the NCVS, consider Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, and 
  the other U.S. territories as being outside of the United 
  States.  After marking Box 1, skip to Item 10.

  Box 2 "Not inside a city/town/village" when the incident did 
  not happen inside the limits of a city, town, or village.  
  After marking Box 2, ask the question in Item 8a next.

  Box 3 "SAME city/town/village as present residence" when the 
  incident happened in the same city, town, or village as the 
  sample address.  After marking Box 3, skip to Item 9.

  Box 4 "DIFFERENT city/town/village from present residence" 
  when the incident happened in a different city, town, or 
  village from the sample address.  Make sure to enter the 
  name of the city, town, or village where the incident 
  occurred on the "Specify" line and then ask the question 
  in Item 8a.

  Box 5 "Don't know" when the respondent does not know where 
  the incident happened. After marking Box 5, ask the question 
  in Item 8a.

Item 8a (County And State of 
Occurrence)

Item 8a is used to identify the county and state in which the
incident occurred.  After asking the question in Item 8a,
print the county and state names provided by the respondent 
legibly on the lines provided. It is acceptable to use the 
standard 2-letter abbreviation for the state name. Leave the 
boxes above the county and state lines blank.

Item 8b (Same County And State)

Item 8b is used to find out whether or not the incident happened 
in the same county and state as the county and state where the 
sample address is located.  Even if you know the answer, ask 
the question of the respondent before marking Box 1 "Yes" or 
Box 2 "No."

Item 9 (Occurred on an American Indian
Reservation or on American Indian Lands)

Item 9 is used to determine whether the incident happened on 
an American Indian Reservation or on American Indian Lands. In 
most cases, a respondent will probably answer Item 9 without 
hesitation. However, if a respondent is unsure of how to answer, 
you need to understand what we mean by American Indian Reservation 
and American Indian Lands so you can help the respondent.

What is an American Indian Reservation?

American Indian Reservations are territories reserved as permanent 
tribal homelands with boundaries established by treaty, statute, 
or executive or court order.  The Federal Government and some state
governments have established reservations as territory over which 
American Indians have governmental jurisdiction. These entities are 
designated as colonies, communities, pueblos, rancherias, 
reservations, and reserves.

What are American Indian Lands?

American Indian Lands are comprised of tribal subdivisions and 
trust lands. 

A tribal subdivision is an administrative subdivision of a
reservation.  Tribal subdivisions may extend beyond the
boundary of their reservations, and are internal units of self
government or administration that serve social, cultural, or
economic purposes for the American Indians living on and
adjacent to the reservation.  

Trust Lands are held in trust by the Federal Government for 
either a tribe (tribal trust land) or an individual member
of a tribe (individual trust land).  Such land is always
associated with a specific federally recognized reservation
or tribe, but may be located on or off the reservation.

If you feel that probing is necessary after asking the question 
in Item 9, the following probe may help the respondent to give 
you an accurate answer:

"Did the incident happen in an Indian colony, community, pueblo, 
rancheria, reservation, or reserve?"

Item 10 (Where Incident Took Place)

Item 10 is used to identify the type of place at which the 
incident took place. It is very important that you mark the
most appropriate box so that you follow the correct skip
pattern for the incident. If you mark the wrong box in  
Item 10, the appropriate questions will not get asked to
show what really happened during the incident.

When a respondent's answer in Item 10 is not clear and you are 
unsure which box to mark, probe for more details to identify 
the correct box to mark.  Only mark ONE box to answer Item 10 
and always mark the most appropriate box for the incident.

---------------------------------------------------
Example:
A respondent's answer for Item 10 is, "At work."  
That response is too general for you to know which
answer box to mark, so you need to find out where
the respondent works.  Also, if the respondent is 
a school teacher, the incident may have happened 
inside the school building (Box 18) or on the
school property (Box 19).  Probe for the exact
location.
----------------------------------------------------

Notice that the 23 answer categories in Item 10 are grouped
together under eight major headings shown in uppercase and bold 
type.  These major headings should help you locate more quickly 
the correct box to mark after getting the respondent's answer.

In Respondent's Home or Lodging

This is the first major heading and covers Boxes 1 through
4 for enclosed structures owned or rented by the respondent in 
which an incident may have occurred.  An enclosed structure is 
one which has a door or window to gain entry through, such as 
a respondent's house, apartment, room, garage, shed, enclosed 
porch, or a vacation home, second home, or hotel/motel room in 
which the respondent was staying at the time of the incident.  
This also includes enclosed structures that are on the respondent's 
property, but are detached from the main structure, such as a
detached garage or storage shed.

When marking Box 1 through 4, it does not matter how the offender 
gained entrance to the enclosed structure (For example, the 
offender may have used force, was let in by a household member, 
or gained entrance through an unlocked or open door or window).  
However, if the offender did not enter or try to enter the types 
of places identified in Boxes 1 through 4, mark the most 
appropriate box from Boxes 5 through 23.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1, In own dwelling, own attached garage, or enclosed porch 
(Include illegal entry or attempted illegal entry of same), when the 
offender either tried to enter or was inside the following types of 
places during the incident:

    The respondent's own dwelling, attached garage, or
    enclosed porch.

    The respondent's room in a boarding house, school
    dormitory, or a similar type of place.  As you ask the
    questions in Items 11 through 16, keep in mind that
    we are only interested in the respondent's room and
    not the rest of the building.  If the incident took place
    somewhere else in the building outside of the respondent's 
    room, do NOT mark Box 1, instead mark Box 6.  

    The respondent's apartment.  As you ask the questions
    in Items 11 through 16, keep in mind that we are only
    interested in the respondent's apartment and not the
    rest of the apartment building.  If the incident took
    place somewhere else in the building outside of the
    respondent's apartment, do NOT mark Box 1, instead
    mark Box 6. 

    The respondent's former living quarters, as long as the
    respondent was living there at the time of the incident
    AND the incident occurred during the respondent's  
    6-month reference period.

    The respondent's enclosed porch.  If the incident
    occurred on the respondent's unenclosed porch, do
    NOT mark Box 1, instead mark Box 5. 

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 11.

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2, In detached building on own property, such as 
detached garage, storage shed, etc. (Include illegal entry or 
attempted illegal entry of same), when the offender either 
tried to enter or was inside the following types of places 
during the incident:

    A detached building on the respondent's property
    other than the respondent's dwelling or attached
    garage, such as a detached garage, tool shed, guest
    house, barn, greenhouse, and so forth.  Do NOT
    mark Box 2 if the incident took place in an open 
    carport on the respondent's property, instead mark
    Box 5. 

    A mobile home or trailer that is NOT used as a
    recreation vehicle and is situated on the respondent's
    property.  If the mobile home or trailer is used as a
    recreation vehicle and is situated on the respondent's
    property during the incident, do NOT mark Box 2,
    instead mark Box 5. 

After marking Box 2, continue with Item 11.

Mark Box 3

Mark Box 3, In vacation home/second home(Include illegal entry or 
attempted illegal entry of same) when the offender either tried 
to enter or was inside the following types of places during the 
incident:

    A second home either owned or in the possession of
    the respondent.  Second homes include former
    dwellings still owned or rented by the respondent, but
    not used as the respondent's primary residence, as
    well as new dwellings that are in the possession of the
    respondent, but not yet used as the primary residence. 
    If the incident happened at a second home owned by a
    nonhousehold member or rented to a nonhousehold
    member, do NOT mark Box 3, instead mark Box 8.

    A vacation home owned by the respondent, regardless
    of whether or not the respondent was residing at the
    vacation home when the incident took place.  If the
    incident happened at a vacation home owned by a
    nonhousehold member or rented to a nonhousehold
    member, do NOT mark Box 3, instead mark Box 8. 

    A detached building on the property of a second home
    or vacation home owned by the respondent, such as a
    detached garage, storage shed, and so forth.  If the
    incident happened in the yard of a vacation or second
    home, do NOT mark Box 3, instead mark Box 23 and
    describe the location on the "Specify" line. 

After marking Box 3, continue with Item 11.

Mark Box 4

Mark Box 4, In hotel or motel room respondent was staying in 
(Include illegal entry or attempted illegal entry of same), when 
the offender either tried to enter or was inside a hotel or motel 
room where the respondent was staying temporarily during any part 
of the incident. However, if the incident happened in the hotel 
or motel building (for example, in a conference room, lobby, or
hallway) and the offender never entered or tried to enter the
respondent's room, do NOT mark Box 4, instead mark Box 26.

After marking Box 4, continue with Item 11.

Near Own Home

This is the second major heading and covers Boxes 5 through 7 for 
places near a respondent's primary residence where an incident may 
have occurred.

Mark Box 5

Mark Box 5, Own yard, sidewalk, driveway, carport, unenclosed porch 
(does not include apartment yards), when the incident happened in 
the following places near the respondent's home:

     The respondent's yard, regardless of size, when it
     belongs solely to the respondent's house, townhouse,
     mobile home, apartment, condominium, and so forth. 
     If the yard is for the use of all occupants in the
     apartment building, do not mark Box 5, instead mark
     Box 20. 

     The respondent's driveway, mailbox, sidewalk,
     unenclosed porch or carport used solely by the
     respondent's unit.  If the incident happened in a
     parking lot used by more than just the sample unit, 
     do NOT mark Box 5, instead mark Box 17. 

     The respondent's motor vehicle or recreation vehicle
     parked on the respondent's property and intended for
     the sole use of the respondent.

     The respondent's balcony or patio when it is used
     solely by the respondent's unit and there was no
     illegal entry or attempted illegal entry to the sample
     unit itself.

After marking Box 5, skip to Item 18.

Mark Box 6

Mark Box 6, Apartment hall, storage area, laundry room (does not 
include apartment parking lot/garage), when the incident happened 
inside a respondent's residential building, but not in the 
respondent's apartment, condominium, room in a boarding house, a 
dormitory room, and so forth.

Box 6 is NOT intended for incidents that:

     Happen in another apartment or room in the
     respondent's building, other than the respondent's
     apartment or room, instead mark Box 8. 

     Happen in an apartment parking garage, even if the
     parking garage is in the basement of the respondent's
     building, instead mark Box 17.

After marking Box 6, skip to Item 18.

Mark Box 7

Mark Box 7, On street immediately adjacent to own home, when the 
incident occurred on the street IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT to the 
respondent's property. "Immediately adjacent" includes directly 
in front or to the side of the sample unit and does NOT include 
next door or across the street from the sample unit.

After marking Box 7, skip to Item 18.

At, In, or Near a Friend's/ Relative's/
Neighbor's Home

This is the third major heading and covers Boxes 8 through 11 for 
places where an incident may have happened that are at, in, or 
near the home of a respondent's friend, relative, or neighbor.

Mark Box 8

Mark Box 8, At or in home or other building on their property, 
when the incident happened at or in a dwelling or other building 
on the property owned by a friend, relative, or neighbor. Other 
buildings on a friend's, a relative's, or a neighbor's property 
could include a garage, porch, tool shed, guest house, barn, 
greenhouse, mobile home or trailer that is not used as a 
recreation vehicle, and so forth.

Also mark Box 8 if the incident happened at or in:

     A second home or vacation home owned by a friend,
     relative, or neighbor of a respondent. 

     A friend's, a relative's, or neighbor's room in a
     boarding house, school dormitory, or similar type of
     place.

     A friend's, a relative's, or a neighbor's apartment.

After marking Box 8, skip to Item 18.

If the incident happened at or in a dwelling or other building 
on the property of someone the respondent does not know, mark 
Box 23 and enter a description of exactly where the incident 
took place.

Mark Box 9

Mark Box 9, Yard, sidewalk, driveway, carport (does not include 
apartment yards), when the incident happened in a friend's, a 
relative's, or neighbor's yard, sidewalk, driveway, carport, 
balcony, open porch, or patio.  The yard, sidewalk, driveway, 
carport, balcony, open porch, or patio must be intended for the 
sole use of the respondent's friend, relative, or neighbor and 
not for the use of other housing units.  Do not mark Box 9 if 
the incident took place in an apartment yard, instead mark Box 
20. 

After marking Box 9, skip to Item 18.

If the incident happened in the yard, sidewalk, driveway or
carport of someone the respondent does not know, mark Box 23 
and enter a description of exactly where the incident took 
place.

Mark Box 10

Mark Box 10, Apartment hall, storage area, laundry room (does not 
include apartment parking lot/garage), when the incident happened 
in the building where a respondent's friend, relative, or neighbor 
lives, but not in the friend, relative, or neighbor's unit. The 
building could include apartments, condominiums, dormitory rooms,
boarding house rooms, and so forth. If the incident happened in 
the building's parking garage, do not mark Box 10, instead mark 
Box 17.

After marking Box 10, skip to Item 18.

Mark Box 11

Mark Box 11, On street immediately adjacent to their home, when the 
incident occurred on the street IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT to the property 
of the respondent's friend, relative, or neighbor. "Immediately
adjacent" includes directly in front or to the side of the friend's, 
the relative's, or neighbor's unit and does NOT include next door 
or across the street from the friend's, relative's, or neighbor's 
unit.

After marking Box 11, skip to Item 18.

Commercial Places

This is the fourth major heading and covers Boxes 12, 24 - 26, 
14, and 27 for different types of commercial places in which the 
incident could have occurred.

Mark Box 12

Mark Box 12, Inside restaurant, bar, nightclub, when the incident 
happened INSIDE any type of eating and/or drinking establishment, 
such as a restaurant, bar and grill, cafe, tavern, cafeteria, bar, 
and so forth.

After marking Box 12, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 24, 25, or 26

Mark Box 24, Inside bank, when the incident happened in a bank, 
credit union, or some other type of financial institution. Mark 
Box 25, Inside gas station, when the incident happened anywhere 
on the property of a gas station.  Mark Box 26, Inside other 
commercial building, such as a store, when the incident happened 
INSIDE a business establishment where cash/credit is exchanged 
for purchased products by the general public, OTHER THAN AT A 
BANK OR GAS STATION.  For example, in a department store, 
factory outlet store, hotel gift shop, and so forth.

Box 26 is NOT intended for incidents that happened in a:

     Restaurant, bar, or nightclub, instead mark Box 12.

     Commercial parking lot or garage, instead mark   
     Box 15.

     Airport, bus or train station, or on a bus, train, plane,
     or some other type of public transportation, instead
     mark Box 22.

After marking Box 24, 25, or 26, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 14 or 27

Mark Box 14, Inside office, when the incident happened INSIDE a 
building used for office work, including incidents that occur in 
post office buildings. Mark Box 27, Inside factory or warehouse, 
when the incident happened INSIDE a commercial building used for 
factory work or warehouse storage purposes.

After marking Box 14 or 27, skip to Item 17c.

Parking Lots/Garages

This is the fifth major heading and covers Boxes 15 through 17 
for all types of parking lots and parking garages at which the 
incident could have happened.

Mark Box 15

Mark Box 15, Commercial parking lot/garage, when the incident took 
place at an attended or unattended parking lot or garage which is 
privately operated for profit AND requires a parking fee.  

Do NOT mark Box 15 when the incident occurred:

x In a parking lot or garage that has parking meters or is
operated by a local, state, or Federal government, regardless 
of whether or not a fee is required, instead mark Box 16.

x In a commercial parking lot or garage during hours when the 
general public can park free, instead mark Box 16.

After marking Box 15, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 16

Mark Box 16, Noncommercial parking lot/garage, when the incident 
happened at a public parking lot or garage where the general 
public can park free of charge, such as at a shopping mall or 
shopping center, bus station, office building, and so forth.  

Also mark Box 16 when the incident happened at:

     A parking lot or garage that has parking meters.

     A parking lot or garage that is operated by a local,
     state, or Federal government, regardless of whether or
     not a fee is required.

     A commercial parking lot or garage during hours
     when parking is free to the general public.

Do NOT mark Box 16 when the incident took place:

     At parking meters on the side of a street, instead mark
     Box 21. 

     At apartment parking lots, instead mark Box 17.

     At school parking lots or areas, instead mark Box 19.

After marking Box 16, skip to Item 17c.

Mark Box 17

Mark Box 17, Apartment/townhouse parking lot/garage, when the 
incident happened in the parking area provided for residents 
and their guests.  This includes residents of apartments, 
townhouses, rooming houses, dormitories, condominiums, and so 
forth. It does not matter if the parking garage is inside or 
attached to the resident's building.

After marking Box 17, skip to Item 17c.

School

This is the sixth major heading and covers Boxes 18 and 19 for 
school buildings and school property at which the incident could 
have taken place.

Mark Box 18

Mark Box 18, Inside school building, when the incident happened 
inside a school building (for example, in a classroom, gym, hallway,
or principal's office). If the incident happened on the grounds of 
a school and not inside a school building, mark Box 19. If the 
incident happened in a school dormitory building, mark Box 1 or 6, 
as appropriate.

After marking Box 18, skip to Item 17a.

Mark Box 19

Mark Box 19, On school property (school parking area, play area, 
school bus, etc.), when the incident happened outside of a school 
building in areas such as the school steps, parking lot, athletic 
field, playground, or a school bus that is transporting students 
to or from school each school day or on a school bus to and from 
a school sponsored activity.  If the incident happened when a 
school bus was transporting students to or from an activity NOT 
sponsored by the school (such as to an amusement park or summer
camp), mark Box 22.

After marking Box 19, skip to Item 17c.

Open Areas, on Street or Public 
Transportation

This is the seventh major heading and covers Boxes 20 through 22 
for a variety of places open to the general public where an 
incident could take place.

Mark Box 20

Mark Box 20, In apartment yard, park, field, playground (other 
than school), when the incident occurred in a public, unenclosed 
area AND the area is NOT on school property.  Also mark Box 20 
when the incident happened in a yard shared by more than one 
family.

Mark Box 21

Mark Box 21, On the street (other than immediately adjacent to
own/friend's/relative's/neighbor's home), when the incident 
happened on a public street or highway AND the street or highway 
is not adjacent to the respondent's own home or the home of a 
respondent's friend, relative, or neighbor.  

Also mark Box 21 when the incident involved:

     A parked motor vehicle, such as an incident involving
     auto theft,

     The respondent driving or riding in a motor vehicle,

     The respondent walking or riding a bicycle on a
     street,

     The respondent while on the shoulder of a street or on
     a public sidewalk that is not covered in another
     category of Item 10.

After marking Box 21, skip to Item 18.

Mark Box 22

Mark Box 22, On public transportation or in station (bus, train, 
plane, airport, depot, etc.), when the incident happened on some 
type of public transportation (bus, taxi, train, plane, subway, 
and so forth) or in a bus depot, train station, airport, or subway 
station.  Also mark Box 22 when the incident happened on a school 
bus while transporting persons to or from an activity that 
is NOT sponsored by the school, such as to or from a summer 
camp.

If the incident happened on a school bus going to or from 
school each school day or on a school bus to and from a school 
sponsored activity, mark Box 19.

After marking Box 22, skip to Item 18.

Other (Box 23)

Mark Box 23, Other, when the incident happened at or in a place 
that does not fit any of the places shown for Boxes 1 through 27 
(Box numbers are not shown in sequence in Item 10.) OR when the 
respondent does not know where the incident took place.  After 
marking Box 23, always describe the place or situation on the 
"Specify" line.  

Here are some examples for marking Box 23 in Item 10: 

*  Fenced in storage yard of a factory

*  Jail or prison

*  Hospital

*  Library

*  Church

*  On a beach

After marking Box 23, skip to Item 17c.

Item 11 (Right to be Here/There)

If you mark Box 1, 2, 3, or 4 in Item 10, you will ask the
question in Item 11 next to determine whether the offender
had a legal right to be in the respondent's home or other
structure on the respondent's property. 

Mark Box 1, Yes

Mark Box 1 "Yes," when the offender:

     Was living or staying with the respondent when the
     incident happened.

     Had a legal right to be in the respondent's dwelling or
     a building on the respondent's property when the
     incident happened, such as a plumber, cleaning
     service, hotel/motel maid, and so forth.

     Had permission to enter the respondent's dwelling or
     a building on the respondent's property prior to the
     time the incident took place, such as a friend, relative,
     salesperson, or meter reader.  However, if the
     offender entered fraudulently, do not mark Box 1. 
     For example, mark Box 2 "No," if the offender
     misrepresented his or her purpose for needing to enter
     the building/unit/dwelling by impersonating a repair
     person, police officer, maid, and so forth.

After marking Box 1, skip to Item 19.

Mark Box 2, No

Mark Box 2 "No," when the offender:

     Was not living or staying with the respondent and did
     not have a legal right or permission to be in the
     dwelling or building on the respondent's property at
     the time of the incident.

     Was let into the dwelling by a child and did not have
     a legal right to enter the dwelling because the child's
     parents would not have allowed access to the
     offender. 

     Pushed his/her way into the dwelling when the
     respondent answered the door.

     Entered the dwelling by fraudulently misrepresenting
     himself/herself as a repair person, police officer,
     maid, and so forth.

After marking Box 2, continue with Item 12.

Mark Box 3, Don't Know

Mark Box 3, "Don't know," when the respondent does not know who 
the offender was or whether the offender had a legal right to be 
in the dwelling or other building on the respondent's property.  
If you think that the respondent answered "Don't know," because 
he/she is uncertain who the offender is, you may want to probe 
by asking the respondent if the person suspected of being the 
offender had a legal right to be in the respondent's dwelling.

After marking Box 3, continue with Item 12.

Item 12(Actually Got Inside)

After marking Box 2 or 3 in Item 11, you will ask the question 
in Item 12 next to determine if the offender actually entered 
the building or dwelling.  As you ask Item 12, make sure to 
read the appropriate type of structure. For example, if the 
incident occurred in the respondent's garage, ask, "Did the 
offender actually get INSIDE your garage?"

For a Multi-Unit Structure

If the incident happened in a multi-unit structure, such as 
an apartment building or a hotel, we are only interested in 
the respondent's apartment unit or hotel room for Item 12. 
Mark Box 2 "No" if the offender got inside the building,
but did not actually get inside the respondent's apartment
unit or hotel room.

Before Marking Box 3, Don't Know

If you feel that a respondent may know how the offender entered 
the dwelling or other building on the respondent's property even 
though he/she answered "Don't know," probe by repeating the 
respondent's answer or pausing a moment. However, some respondents 
really will not know if the offender actually got inside.  For 
instance, you would mark Box 3 "Don't know" if a respondent:

* Did not find anything disturbed or stolen even though the 
  back door window was broken and the door was unlocked.

* Was told by a neighbor that an offender was seen leaving the 
  respondent's house, but there was no evidence that the 
  offender got inside.

Item 13 (Tried to Get Inside)

After marking Box 2 or 3 in Item 12, you will ask the question 
in Item 13 to determine if the offender tried to get into the 
respondent's dwelling or other building on the respondent's 
property.  As you read the question, make sure to read the 
appropriate type of structure. For example, if the incident 
occurred in the respondent's enclosed porch, ask, "Did the 
offender TRY to get in your enclosed porch?"

For a Multi-Unit Structure

If the incident happened in a multi-unit structure, such as an
apartment building or a hotel, we are only interested in the
respondent's apartment unit or hotel room for Item 13. Mark Box 
2 "No" if the offender tried to get inside the building, but did 
not actually try to get inside the respondent's apartment unit 
or hotel room.

Before Marking Box 2, No

Before marking Box 2 "No" in Item 13, make sure that the respondent 
did NOT answer "No" because the offender was let in or entered 
through an unlocked or open door or window.  In other words, there 
was no evidence of forcible entry. If this is the case, change the 
answer in Item 12 by lining through the mark in Box 2 or 3 
and marking Box 1 "Yes" to show that the offender actually 
got inside the respondent's home or lodging.

Reviewing Answer in Item 10

If you mark Box 2 "No" in Items 12 and 13, you are indicating that 
the offender did NOT get inside or try to get inside the respondent's 
home or lodging. Therefore, no illegal entry or attempted illegal 
entry happened. In this situation, you must go back to Item 10 and 
review the entry with the respondent so you can verify that the 
correct box is marked to indicate where the incident took place.  

If you need to correct the entry in Item 10:

*  Line through the incorrect box,

*  Mark the correct box from Boxes 5 through 27 (Box
   numbers are not shown in sequence in Item 10.),

*  Follow the skip instruction for the correct box, and

*  Line through the answers marked in Items 11 through
   13 due to the new skip instruction.

Items 14 and 15 (Evidence of Force)

Items 14 and 15 are used to determine whether there was any 
physical, visible evidence of forcible entry found after the 
incident took place. 

You will ask Item 14 when:

*  Box 1 is marked in Item 12 indicating that the offender 
   actually got inside the respondent's dwelling or lodging 
   OR

*  Box 1 or 3 is marked in Item 13 indicating that the
   offender tried to get in the respondent's dwelling or
   lodging or the respondent does not know whether the
   offender tried to get in the respondent's dwelling or
   lodging.

As you ask Item 14, make sure to read the correct phrase based on 
whether:

*  Box 1 is marked in Item 12. If so, read "got in by force." 
   OR
 
*  Box 1 or 3 is marked in Item 13. If so, read "TRIED to get 
   in by force."

Marking Item 14

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when there was physical, visible evidence 
following the incident that the offender entered or tried to 
enter the respondent's dwelling or lodging by force. Examples 
of visible evidence are shown in the answer categories for 
Item 15.  After marking Box 1 for Item 14, you will continue 
with Item 15 to identify the types of physical, visible evidence 
from the incident.

Mark Box 2 "No" in Item 14, when the evidence is:

     A skeleton key or entry through an open window,
     door, and so forth.

     A ladder or trash placed next to a window, but there
     was no evidence that the window was tampered with
     in some way.

     An injury to the respondent as he/she opened the door
     and the offender pushed the respondent out of the
     way.  Although this is evidence of an attack, it is not
     evidence of a break-in.  

     An offender forces a respondent to let him/her enter
     the dwelling or lodging and there is no visible
     evidence of a break-in or attempted break-in to the
     dwelling or lodging after the incident.

In the examples shown above, you would mark Box 2 "No" if no 
other evidence of a forcible entry or attempted forcible entry 
was mentioned.  After marking Box 2 in Item 14, you will skip 
to Item 16.

Marking Item 15

After marking Box 1 in Item 14, you will continue with Item 15 to 
identify the types of evidence found after the incident indicating 
that there was a forcible entry or an attempted forcible entry of 
the respondent's dwelling or lodging.  Mark all boxes that apply 
to the respondent's answer and continue to ask,"Anything else?", 
until you get a "No" response.

The answer categories for Item 15 are separated into three groups--
Window, Door, and Other.  Boxes 1 through 4 relate to the types of 
damage to a window. Boxes 5 through 8 relate to the types of damage 
to a door. Box 9 relates to all other means of force used to gain 
entry or to try to gain entry into the respondent's dwelling or 
lodging.

Since physical, visible evidence of force is evidence that can be 
seen, keep in mind that the following types of evidence are not 
considered signs of forcible entry or attempted forcible entry:

       x An open or unlocked window

       x An open or unlocked door.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the glass in the window was broken, cracked, or 
removed, or if there was evidence on the window frame that force 
was used to gain access or to try to gain access into the 
building, such as pry marks on the window frame.

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the window screen was cut, ripped, or removed by 
the offender to gain access or to try to gain access.

Mark Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the window lock was damaged, removed, or showed 
visible signs that the offender tampered with it to gain access 
or to try to gain access.

Mark Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent mentions some type of window damage 
not covered in Boxes 1 through 3 and then note how the offender 
gained access or attempted to gain access through a window.  
Avoid using Box 4 if the respondent's answer really fits Box 1, 
2, and/or 3.

Mark Box 5

Mark Box 5 if there were marks on the door or door frame, such as 
scratches, holes, or damaged glass in the door, or if the offender 
removed or knocked down the door to gain access or to try to gain 
access.

Mark Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the offender damaged or removed a screen door.

Mark Box 7

Mark Box 7 if a door lock or handle was damaged, tampered with, 
or removed.

Mark Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the respondent mentions some type of door damage not 
covered in Boxes 5 through 7 and then note how the offender gained 
access or attempted to gain access through a door.  Avoid using 
Box 8 if the respondent's answer really fits Box 5, 6, and/or 7.

Mark Box 9

Mark Box 9 if the offender forcibly gained access or tried to gain 
access other than through a door or window, such as by cutting a 
hole in a wall.  After marking Box 9, always note what type of 
evidence there was of forcible entry or attempted forcible entry.

After marking all applicable boxes in Item 15, skip to Item 19.

Item 16 (How Got In or Tried to Get In)

After marking Box 2 in Item 14, you will skip to Item 16 to
determine how the offender got inside or tried to get inside
the respondent's dwelling or lodging when there was no evidence 
of a forcible entry or attempted forcible entry. After asking 
the question in Item 16, mark the first box that applies and 
probe when the respondent's answer is unclear or too general.  
For example, if a respondent says that the offender got in 
through the front door, you need to probe to determine whether 
the offender was let in, came through an unlocked door, and so 
forth.

Only mark ONE box for Item 16 and skip to Item 19 after marking 
the appropriate box.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender was let into the dwelling or lodging 
by someone who was not authorized to permit entry.  For example, 
a child lets in an offender even though the child's parents had 
told the offender never to come to their home.

Also mark Box 1 if the offender entered the dwelling or lodging 
without permission or entered fraudulently when someone answered 
the door.  For example, an offender falsely claims to be a police 
officer or a maid to gain access. 

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender pushed his/her way in after someone 
opened the door.

Mark Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the offender got in or tried to get in through
a door or other opening that was already open at the time of
the incident.  Do not mark Box 3 if the offender had to
open an unlocked door, window, and so forth to enter the
respondent's dwelling or lodging.

The phrase "Other openings" includes open windows, open garage 
doors, the open side of a three-sided shed, an opening left by 
a missing door or window, a hole in the wall, and so forth.

Mark Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the offender opened or tried to open an unlocked 
door or window to gain access.

Mark Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the offender used a key to enter through a locked 
door or window of the respondent's dwelling or lodging.  A key 
includes one cut to fit the lock, a skeleton key, or any other 
key.

Mark Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the offender used "another means," other than a key, 
to gain access through a locked door or window AND the respondent 
knows or has a pretty good idea how the offender entered or 
attempted to enter the dwelling or lodging.  The phrase "another 
means" includes picking the lock, using a credit card, and so 
forth.

It is possible that you could discover that the method used
to gain access or to try to gain access left physical, visible
evidence of force.  If this happens, correct the answer in
Item 14 by lining through the original "No" entry and mark
Box 1 "Yes."  Based on the new answer in Item 14, you need to 
ask Item 15 next.  Also, if you marked a box in Item 16,line 
through the marked box.

Mark Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the respondent thinks or knows that the offender 
entered or tried to enter his/her dwelling or lodging through 
a locked door or window, but does not know how.

Mark Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the respondent does not know how the offender 
gained access or tried to gain access to his/her dwelling or 
lodging.  For example, a respondent returns home and discovers 
that the television and stereo system are gone, but there is 
no indication at all of how the offender got into the home.

Mark Box 9

Mark Box 9 if the offender entered or tried to enter the 
respondent's dwelling or lodging by some means not described 
in Boxes 1 through 8.  After marking Box 9, always describe 
the method used on the "Specify" line.

Here is an example for marking Box 9: The offender held a gun 
to the respondent's head and forced the respondent to open the 
door.

Item 17a (Respondent's School)

After marking Box 18, "Inside school building," in Item 10,
you are instructed to skip to Item 17a.  Item 17a is used to
determine whether or not the incident happened at the respondent's 
school.  If you are taking a proxy interview, ask the question 
this way:

"Was it Jennifer Bailey's (proxy person's) school?"

Mark Box 1 

If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 and continue with Item 17b 
to determine in what part of the school building the incident 
happened.

Mark Box 2

If you get a "No" answer, mark Box 2 and skip to Item 17c to
determine whether or not the incident happened in an area that 
is restricted to certain people.

Item 17b (Part of School Building)

After marking Box 1, "Yes," in Item 17a, continue with Item 
17b to determine in what part of the school building the 
incident happened.  Only mark ONE of the four boxes to identify 
the most accurate description of where the incident took place 
within the respondent's school building.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent tells you that the incident occurred 
in a classroom.

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent tells you that the incident occurred 
in a school hallway or stairway/stairwell.

Mark Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent tells you that the incident occurred 
in a school bathroom, shower room, or locker room.

Mark Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent tells you that the incident occurred 
in another location within the school building other than the 
locations mentioned in Boxes 1, 2, or 3, such as in the school 
library, gym, auditorium, cafeteria, and so forth.

Item 17c (Restricted Area or Open 
to the Public)

After marking a box in Item 10 that identifies a commercial 
place, parking lots/garages, on school property, or other, 
you will skip to Item 17c to determine whether at the time of 
the incident the location was restricted to certain people or 
was open to the public.  If you mark Box 18 in Item 10, you 
will ask Item 17c AFTER completing Item 17a and 17b.

Notice that Item 17c has the instruction "ASK OR VERIFY." When 
you see this instruction, you can verify a known answer with 
the respondent without asking the question.  Only verify a known 
answer when you see this instruction and do not mark the answer 
without at least verifying it first with the respondent.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1 when the incident happened in an area that was open 
to the general public at the time of the incident. Places that 
are usually open to the public include stores, public sidewalks, 
public buildings, restaurants, parking lots, apartment yards, 
parks, and so forth.

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2 when the incident happened in an area that was 
restricted to certain people at the time of the incident,
such as an employee's lounge in a store, a school classroom, 
or a private country club. Restricted places normally consider 
persons who do not belong on the premises as trespassers. Also 
mark Box 2 if the incident happened at a business during non-
business hours when the place is restricted and not open to 
the general public.

Mark Box 3

Mark Box 3 when the respondent does not know if the place where 
the incident happened was open to the general public at the time 
of the incident.  For example, a respondent left his rain coat 
at a restaurant and, when he returned the next day, the rain coat 
was not found.  In this situation, you would mark Box 2 since 
the respondent does not know whether the incident happened 
during business or non-business hours AND the restaurant is NOT 
open to the general public during non-business hours. 

Mark Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent's answer does not fit Boxes 1 
through 3.  After marking Box 4, make sure to explain the 
situation on the "Specify" line.  Avoid using Box 4 if the 
respondent's answer really fits Box 1, 2, or 3.

Item 18 (Outdoors or Indoors)

After marking box 5 through 11 or 20 through 22 in Item 10, you 
are instructed to skip to Item 18 so you can determine if the 
incident happened indoors, outdoors, or both indoors and outdoors.  
You will also complete Item 18 after completing Item 17c.

Item 18 includes the "ASK OR VERIFY" instruction, which allows 
you to verify a known answer with the respondent without asking 
the question.  Only verify a known answer when you see this 
instruction and do not mark the answer without at least verifying 
it first with the respondent.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the incident happened inside a building or
enclosed space that has a roof, such as a three-sided shed,
screened porch, screened gazebo, patio room, and so forth.

Mark Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the incident happened outdoors in an open
space, such as in a backyard (fenced or unfenced), baseball
field, carport, parking lot, open porch or patio, and so
forth.  For the NCVS, all modes of transportation are
considered outdoors.  This includes cars, trucks, vans,
sport utility vehicles, buses, taxicabs, airplanes, trains, 
and so forth.

Mark Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the incident happened both indoors and outdoors.  
For example, a respondent was attacked inside a bar. As the 
respondent fled the bar, the offender followed him and continued 
to attack him in the parking lot. Another example would be an 
incident in which a respondent's property was stolen from inside 
the home and from the unenclosed patio.

Item 19 (Distance From Home)

After completing Items 15, 16, or 18, you will complete Item 
19 to determine the distance between where the incident happened 
and where the respondent was residing at the time of the incident.

Notice that Item 19 has the instruction "ASK OR VERIFY."  When 
you see this instruction, you can verify a known answer with the 
respondent without asking the question.  Only verify a known 
answer when you see this instruction and do not mark the answer 
without at least verifying it first with the respondent.  Mark 
the first box about which the respondent feels sure.

Item 19 also includes a probe question that you only need to use 
if the respondent seems uncertain about how to answer the question.

Mark Box 1

Mark Box 1 when the incident took place in the respondent's home 
or on the respondent's property.  If the respondent was living in 
a single family home or a mobile home at the time of the incident, 
Box 1 refers to the home, yard, driveway, carport, sidewalk, or 
street adjacent to the home.  Also mark Box 1 if the incident 
happened at the respondent's next door neighbor's home.

If the respondent was living in an apartment, dormitory room, and 
so forth, at the time of the incident, Box 1 refers to:

*  Inside the respondent's unit, 

*  Inside the building where the unit is located (for
   example, an apartment hallway or laundry room), 

*  Inside another resident's unit in the same building, 

*  The yard, sidewalk, or street adjacent to the respondent's 
   building.

Mark Boxes 2 Through 6

Mark the first box from Boxes 2 through 6 that best describes 
the distance between where the incident happened and where 
the respondent was residing at the time of the incident. For 
example, mark Box 3 when the respondent is unsure if the distance 
is less than 5 miles, but is positive that the distance is at 
least two miles.

Item 20a (Household Member Present)

Following Item 19, ask or verify Item 20a to determine whether 
any persons who are considered household members at the time of 
the interview were present when the incident occurred.  It is 
extremely important that you mark this item correctly, because 
an incorrect answer will either:

     Cause you to skip over items needed to fully describe 
     the incident and could cause the incident to classify 
     incorrectly when you mark Box 2 "No" by mistake, OR

     Cause you to ask questions that do not relate to what
     happened during the incident when you mark Box 1
     "Yes" by mistake.

It is very important that you understand the NCVS concept of 
"presence" during an incident. If you suspect that a respondent's 
answer to Item 20a is not correct based on the information 
provided earlier in the interview, probe to get an accurate 
answer. If you probe and it is still unclear how to mark Item 
20a, it is better to mark Box 1 "Yes," than to mark Box 2 "No."

Here are three examples when the respondent answered "No," but, 
by NCVS standards, each respondent is considered present during 
the incident:

* A respondent answers "No" to Item 20a because she
  was sleeping in her bedroom on the second floor
  while the offender forcibly entered through her
  kitchen door on the first floor and stole electronic
  equipment.  

* A respondent answers "No" to Item 20a because he is 
  watching television in his family room while the
  offender stole three bicycles from his open attached
  garage.  

* A respondent answers "No" to Item 20a because she
  is in the kitchen cooking dinner while the offender
  who is a guest was stealing jewelry and money from
  her bedroom dresser. 

In all of these examples, Box 1 "Yes" should be marked because the 
respondent in each case is considered present during the incident.  
This may not always be clear to a respondent.

For the NCVS, a household member is considered present when he/
she is at the immediate scene of the crime incident and there is 
an opportunity for the offender to attack or threaten to physically 
harm a household member or to take something directly from a 
household member.  

If a current household member was not at the immediate scene of 
the incident, but was personally attacked or threatened with 
physical harm or an attempt was made to harm the household member, 
consider the person present during the incident and complete a 
separate NCVS-2 for each eligible household member who was 
personally victimized.  This includes:

* Being shot at through a window by someone outside of the 
  house,

* Being threatened with physical harm by a neighbor
  in the adjoining yard or by an ex-boyfriend standing
  outside the respondent's closed door while the
  respondent is inside the house and on the other side
  of the closed door.  This does NOT include threats
  that are NOT made in person directly from the
  offender to the respondent, such as a threat by
  telephone, Internet, FAX, mail, or through another
  person.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 6, for more detailed
information about presence during an incident.)

Notice that Item 20a has the instruction "ASK OR VERIFY."  
When you see this instruction, you can verify a known answer 
with the respondent without asking the question. Only verify 
a known answer when you see this instruction and do not mark 
the answer without at least verifying it first with the 
respondent.

If you are taking a proxy interview, the word "you" in the
question refers to the person for whom the interview is
being taken (the proxy person), not to the proxy respondent.  
As you verify the answer or ask the question in Item 20a, 
replace the word "you" with the proxy person's name.  For 
example, "Was John Blake (proxy person) or any other member 
of this household present when this incident occurred?"

Marking Box 1 "Yes" 

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent or any other person who is 
a household member at the time of the interview was present 
during the incident according to the NCVS definition of 
presence.  

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 20b.

Here are some examples for when Box 1 should be
marked in Item 20a:

     A woman looked out her kitchen window and saw a
     strange boy entering her garage.  When she entered
     the garage, she saw that the boy was attempting to
     steal her bicycle.  The boy got scared and ran away. 
     In this situation, the woman was present because she
     reached the immediate crime scene while the
     attempted crime was still in progress and she could
     have been harmed by the offender.

     A man falls asleep on the beach and when he wakes
     up his CD player and keys are gone.  In this
     situation, the man was present even though he was
     sleeping while the incident took place.  He was at 
     the immediate scene of the crime and could have been
     harmed by the offender.

     A woman was resting in her family room when a
     stranger tried to break in through the locked door.
     When she turned on the porch light, he ran away.  In
     this situation, the woman was present because she was
     at the immediate scene of the attempted break in and,
     if the break in had been successful, she could have
     been harmed by the offender.  

Marking Box 2 "No"

Mark Box 2 "No" if none of the household members at the time of 
the interview were present during the incident according to the 
NCVS definition of presence.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 56 on page 8 of the NCVS-2.

Here are some examples for when Box 2 should be marked in Item 
20a:

     A woman's leather coat was stolen from the coat
     room in the restaurant lobby while she was eating
     dinner at the restaurant.  After finishing her meal, she
     returned to the coat room to get her leather coat and
     it was gone.  In this situation, the woman was not
     present, because she was not at the immediate scene
     of the crime during the incident and the offender did
     not have an opportunity to harm the woman during
     the theft.

     A man was sleeping inside his house while someone
     stole his new Mercedes from his driveway.  In this
     situation, the man was not present, because he was
     not at the immediate scene of the crime during the
     incident and the offender did not have an opportunity
     to harm him during the theft.

     A woman looked out her living room window and 
     saw someone loading her riding lawn mower from
     her front yard onto a truck.  By the time she got
     outside, they had driven away with her lawn mower. 
     In this situation, the woman was not present
     because she was not at the immediate scene of the
     crime and there was no chance that she could have
     been harmed during the incident.

Item 20b (Which Household Member
Present)

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 20a, you are instructed to 
complete Item 20b next to determine which household members 
were present during the incident.

Notice that Item 20b has the instruction "ASK OR VERIFY." When 
you see this instruction, you can verify a known answer with 
the respondent without asking the question.  Only verify a known 
answer when you see this instruction and do not mark the answer 
without at least verifying it first with the respondent.

Item 20b is another critical item and you need to ensure that 
you mark the correct answer box.  Otherwise, important 
information may be missed (for example, information about weapons, 
attack or threat methods, injuries, medical expenses, and so 
forth) or inappropriate questions may be asked (for example, 
questions about weapons, attacks, and threats).

For a Proxy Interview

If you are taking a proxy interview, the word "Respondent" in 
the answer categories refers to the person for whom the proxy 
interview is taken (proxy person), not to the proxy respondent.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when the respondent for a self-response interview (or 
the proxy person for a proxy interview) is the ONLY household 
member who was present during the incident. After marking Box 1, 
continue with Item 21.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when both the respondent for a self-response interview 
(or the proxy person for a proxy interview) AND other household 
members were present during the incident.  After marking Box 2, 
continue with Item 21.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when the respondent for a self-response interview (or 
the proxy person for a proxy interview) was NOT present during 
the incident, but other household members were present. Before 
marking Box 3, make sure that the respondent was NOT present 
during the incident. After marking Box 3, skip to Item 59 on 
page 8 of the NCVS-2.

Remember to complete a separate NCVS-2 for each eligible household 
member who was personally victimized during the incident. 

Item 21(See the Offender)

After marking Box 1 or 2 in Item 20b, you are instructed to 
complete Item 21 next to determine if the respondent personally 
saw an offender.

Proxy Interviews

If you are conducting a proxy interview, use the proxy person's 
first name or an appropriate pronoun instead of the word "you" in 
each question from Item 21 through Item 115. For example, Robert 
Barnes is the name of the eligible household member who is unable 
to answer for himself.  As you ask Item 21 of the proxy respondent,
Pamela Barnes, you would say, "Did Robert Barnes personally see 
an offender?".

Proxy respondents may not know for sure whether the proxy person 
saw the offender during the incident. Probe by asking if the proxy 
respondent thinks the proxy person saw the offender and mark the 
appropriate answer box based on the proxy respondent's answer.

Item 22 (Weapon Present)

Whenever a respondent was present during the incident, you will 
ask the question in Item 22 to determine whether the offender 
had a weapon or used an object as a weapon.

Guns and Knives  

With the exception of BB and tear gas guns, all guns, rifles, and 
knives are considered weapons.  BB and tear gas guns are only 
considered weapons when they are used as clubs. 

Objects Used as Weapons

Objects other than guns, rifles, and knives must have been used 
as weapons to be considered weapons. For example, if the offender 
used a screwdriver only to break into the respondent's home, the 
screwdriver is NOT a weapon for the incident.  However, if the 
offender attacked or threatened to attack the respondent with 
the screwdriver, then the screwdriver is a weapon for the
incident. 

When a respondent mentions an object that may or may not be a 
weapon depending on how the offender used it, probe to verify that 
the object was used to either attack the respondent or threaten 
to attack the respondent.  Make sure to explain in the summary 
report(Check Item W)exactly how the object was used as a weapon 
during the incident. 

Motor Vehicles

In the following situations, a motor vehicle (for example,
a car, truck, van, SUV, motorcycle, and so forth) can be
considered a weapon:

* The respondent knows the offender and the offender deliberately 
  used a motor vehicle to try to run into the respondent's vehicle 
  or a vehicle in which the respondent was riding.
  

    However, the offender's vehicle is NOT a weapon if
    the respondent does not know the offender and there
    was NO verbal threat of physical harm to the
    respondent when:

       --  The offender cut in front of a vehicle driven by
           the respondent.

       --  The offender cut in front of a vehicle in which
           the respondent was a passenger.

       --  The offender and the respondent were involved
           in some type of traffic accident or incidence of
           road rage.    

* The respondent believes that the offender deliberately struck 
  or tried to hit him/her with a motor vehicle while the respondent
  was on foot, a bicycle, in a motor vehicle, and so forth.  The 
  respondent's belief could be based on words spoken by the offender 
  or facts known about the offender. 

Thrown Objects

Objects that are thrown at the respondent are ONLY considered weapons 
if they hit the respondent.  If the object did NOT hit the respondent,
consider the incident as a threat (marking Box 1 in Item 26) 
and identify the type of threat by marking Box 11 in Item 28b.  
Do not mark Box 1 in Item 22 if the respondent mentions only 
the thrown object that did not hit him/her as a weapon.

Objects That Are Never Weapons

The following objects are NEVER considered weapons for the NCVS:

     x  Animals
     x  Parts of the body (for example, hands, feet, and so forth)
     x  Food
     x  Small empty cans
     x  Mace or pepper spray
     x  Tear gas
     x  Chloroform
     x  Rings
     x  Casts

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes," if the offender had a weapon, such as a gun or 
knife, or used an object, such as a bottle or baseball bat, as a 
weapon.  After marking Box 1 "Yes," continue with Item 23. 

Whenever you mark Box 1 "Yes" indicating that the offender had a 
weapon during the incident, you must mark Box 1 "Yes" in Item 24, 
25, or 26 to indicate that the offender attacked, tried to attack, 
or threatened the respondent during the incident.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No," if the respondent says that the offender did not 
have a weapon.  After marking Box 2, skip to Item 24.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Don't know," if the respondent says that he/she does 
not know whether the offender had a weapon. After marking Box 3, 
skip to Item 24.

Item 23 (Type of Weapon(s))

After marking Box 1 "Yes" in Item 22, you are instructed to ask 
the question in Item 23 to identify the type of weapon(s) the 
offender had during the incident.  Ask the question as worded in 
Item 23 and continue asking, "Anything else?" until the respondent 
says, "No."

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when the respondent mentions any type of hand gun, 
other than a BB gun, tear gas gun, or stun gun. If a respondent 
mentions a stun gun, mark Box 6, Other, and enter "stun gun" on 
the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when the respondent mentions a rifle, shotgun, or any 
gun that is NOT a hand gun, other than a BB or tear gas gun.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when the respondent mentions any type of knife.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when the respondent mentions an object with a thin 
sharp edge or a fine point (other than a knife) that is intended 
for cutting or piercing (for example, scissors, ice pick, axe, 
and so forth).  When you mark Box 4 in Item 23, make sure to 
explain in the summary report (Check Item W) if the sharp object 
was used as a weapon. Also explain how it was used as a weapon, 
such as whether the object was thrown at and hit the respondent,
used to stab the respondent, or used to threaten the respondent.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 when the respondent mentions a blunt-edged object 
without sharp edges or points, such as a club, rock, blackjack, 
and so forth.  Also mark Box 5 when the offender used a BB gun 
or tear gas gun as a club.  When you mark Box 5 in Item 23, 
make sure to explain in the summary report (Check Item W) if 
the blunt object was used as a weapon. Also explain how it was 
used as a weapon, such as whether the object was thrown at and 
hit the respondent, used to beat the respondent, or used to
threaten the respondent.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 and enter a complete description of the weapon on the 
"Specify" line, such as "stun gun." Box 6 is intended for weapons 
that you are unsure how to classify or for weapons or objects that 
the respondent believes the offender had and could use as a weapon,
even if the respondent does not know what the weapon or object 
was. If possible, try to obtain a description and enter it on the 
"Specify" line.  Avoid marking Box 6 if the weapon fits one of the 
other answer categories.

When you mark Box 6 in Item 23, make sure to explain in the summary
report (Check Item W) if the object was used as a weapon.  Also 
explain how it was used as a weapon and whether the object was 
thrown at the respondent, used to beat the respondent, or used to
threaten the respondent. 

Topic 3.  Completing Items 24 Through 31 (Attacks/Threats)

Item 24 (Attacks)

Ask Item 24 to determine if the respondent was actually attacked 
during the incident. In other words, there was some type of 
physical contact between the offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when there was some type of physical contact 
between the offender and the respondent (for example, the 
offender hit, knocked down, or assaulted the respondent in some 
way).  

Do NOT mark Box 1 if the offender:

* Threw something at the respondent and the object did not hit 
  the respondent OR

* Shot at the respondent and the bullet missed the respondent.

After marking Box 1 "Yes," skip to Item 29 on page 5.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" when the offender did NOT touch or make physical 
contact with the respondent during the incident.  Also mark Box 2 
if the offender:

    x Threw something at the respondent and the object
      did NOT hit the respondent OR

    x Shot at the respondent and the bullet MISSED the
      respondent.

After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 25.

Item 25 (Tried to Attack)

Ask the question in Item 25 to determine if the offender tried to 
attack the respondent during the incident, but did NOT make any 
physical contact with the respondent. If there is any question in 
your mind as to whether or not the offender tried to attack the 
respondent, go with the respondent's perception. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when both the offender and the respondent were 
present during the incident and the offender:

     Made an attempt to attack the respondent (for example, 
     the offender tried to punch, hit, shoot, or
     stab the respondent and missed) OR 

     The respondent perceives that the offender could
     have caused physical injury to him/her (for example,
     the offender was chasing the respondent with a gun
     in his/her hand, but was stopped before reaching the
     respondent).

After marking Box 1 "Yes," skip to Item 28a.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" when the offender did not attempt to attack the 
respondent during the incident. Also mark Box 2 if the respondent 
was threatened with physical harm, but the offender did not attempt 
to attack him/her. After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 
26.

Item 26 (Threatened)

Ask the question in Item 26 to determine whether the offender made 
a verbal threat in person to physically harm the respondent during 
the incident.  Both the respondent and the offender must be present 
and the threat must be voiced by the offender directly to the
respondent.  

Do NOT include threats made by:

        x  Telephone, 

        x  Letter, 

        x  Electronic mail, 

        x  FAX machine, or 

        x  Threats delivered by someone other than the offender.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the offender verbally threatened to physically 
harm the respondent.  After marking Box 1 "Yes," skip to Item 28b.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" when:

        Someone other than the offender delivered the threat
        to the respondent.

        The respondent felt threatened and the offender did
        not verbally threaten to physically harm the
        respondent.

        The threat was made by telephone, letter, electronic
        mail, or FAX machine.

After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 27.

Item 27 (What Actually Happened)

Ask the question in Item 27 to identify what happened during the 
incident when the respondent answers "No" to each of the questions 
in Items 24, 25, and 26 indicating that the offender did NOT attack, 
try to attack, or threaten him/her with physical harm. This item 
allows you to mark multiple boxes, so continue asking, "Anything
else?" until you get a "No" response. Once you are done completing 
Item 27, skip to Item 40 on page 6.  

After asking the question in Item 27, you may discover that the 
offender did attack, tried to attack, or verbally threatened to 
physically harm the respondent. If so, do not mark any boxes in 
Item 27 and correct the answers marked in Items 24, 25, and 26, 
as necessary.  Make sure to follow the correct skip instructions 
after correcting the answers in Items 24, 25, and 26.

Unwanted Sexual Contact

Boxes 4 and 5 include a broad range of unwanted sexual acts and 
are included in Item 27 for respondents who do not consider the 
unwanted sexual contact as an assault. We want to ensure that 
all sexual assaults committed during an incident are reported.  
Categories for unwanted sexual contact are also included in 
Items 28a and 28b to ensure that we do not miss any sexual 
assaults when a respondent says that the offender tried to 
attack or threatened to physically harm him/her. 

It may not always be clear whether you should mark Box 4 (with 
force) or Box 5 (without force) based on what the respondent 
tells you. Generally, if the sexual contact involved grabbing, 
pushing, restraining, or other acts of force, mark Box 4 and 
then ask the structured probe below the question in Item 27.  
If the respondent tells you that he/she was forced or coerced 
into having sexual intercourse or a forced attempt was made to 
have sexual intercourse, change the answer in Item 24 to "Yes"
and line through the entries in Items 25 through 27. If the
sexual contact did not involve any force (for example, only 
unwanted touching and/or fondling), mark Box 5 in Item 27.  
If unsure, go with the respondent's perception of whether or 
not force was used.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Something taken without permission" if the
offender stole something belonging to the respondent or
another household member.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "Attempted or threatened to take something"
if the offender:

*  Tried to take something that belonged to the respondent 
   or another household member or

*  Threatened to take something belonging to the respondent 
   or another household member.  A threatened theft can be 
   verbal (For example, "I'm taking your motorcycle.") or 
   nonverbal (For example, the offender reaches for the 
   respondent's purse, but doesn't get it.)

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Harassed, argument, abusive language" if the 
offender verbally bothered the respondent without threatening 
him/her (for example, yelling, teasing, insulting, arguing, 
using obscenities, and so forth).

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 "Unwanted sexual contact with force(grabbing, fondling, 
etc.)" if the offender used any type of force during the unwanted 
sexual contact(for example, grabbing, pushing, or restraining).  
Before marking Box 4, ask the structured probe.  

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 "Unwanted sexual contact without force (grabbing, 
fondling, etc.)" if the offender did not use any force during 
the unwanted sexual contact (for example, sexually touching, 
embracing, and/or fondling the respondent without grabbing, 
pushing, or restraining).

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 "Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry of house/
apartment" if the offender used force to either break into or 
attempt to break into the respondent's house or apartment during 
the incident.  When NO FORCE was used to enter or attempt to 
enter, mark Box 10 "Other" and explain the break in or attempted 
break in on the "Specify" line. 

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 "Forcible entry or attempted forcible entry of car" 
if the offender used force during the incident to break into or 
attempt to break into a car or any other type of motor vehicle 
owned by the respondent or another household member. If force was 
NOT used, mark Box 10 "Other."  Then explain on the "Specify" line 
how the offender entered or attempted enter the household member's 
motor vehicle WITHOUT FORCE (For example, the offender entered 
the motor vehicle through an unlocked door).

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 "Damaged or destroyed property" if the offender damaged 
or destroyed property during the incident that belongs to the 
respondent or another household member.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 "Attempted or threatened to damage or destroy property" 
if the offender tried or threatened to damage or destroy property 
during the incident that belongs to the respondent or another 
household member.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 "Other" and enter a brief and concise explanation of 
what happened during the incident on the "Specify" line when the 
incident does not fit one of the preceding categories. Some 
examples of acceptable entries for Box 10 are:

       Illegal entry of the respondent's house or car without
       the use of force

       Obscene gestures

       Trespassing on the respondent's property

       A "Peeping Tom."

Items 28a and 28b (How Offender Tried 
to Attack/Threaten)

Ask the question in Item 28a to identify how the offender tried 
to attack the respondent when Box 1 "Yes" is marked in Item 25.  
Ask the question in Item 28b to identify how the offender 
threatened to harm the respondent when Box 1 "Yes" is marked in 
Item 26.  Do not ask both questions.

The answer categories for Items 28a and 28b are the same. Both 
items allow for multiple entries, so continue asking "Anything 
else?" until you get a "No" response.  

After completing Item 28a or Item 28b, skip to Item 40 on
page 6.

If you determine that none of the respondent's answers for
Item 28a or 28b indicate that there was an attempted attack
or a threat of physical harm, do NOT mark any boxes in
Items 28a and 28b and correct the answers for Items 25
through 27, as necessary.  Make sure to follow the correct
skip instructions after correcting answers in any of these
items.

Unwanted Sexual Contact

Boxes 5 and 6 include a broad range of unwanted sexual acts 
included in Items 28a and 28b for respondents who do not 
consider an unwanted sexual contact as an attack or assault.  
We want to ensure that all sexual assaults committed during an 
incident are reported.  Box 5 "Unwanted sexual contact with 
force (grabbing, fondling, etc.)" and Box 6 "Unwanted sexual 
contact without force (grabbing, fondling, etc.)" can be marked 
as an answer for Items 28a OR 28b. 

It may not always be clear whether you should mark Box 5
(with force) or Box 6 (without force) based on what the
respondent tells you.  Generally, if the sexual contact
involved grabbing, pushing, restraining, or other acts of
force, mark Box 5 and then ask the structured probe below
the question in Item 28b. If the respondent tells you that
he/she was forced or coerced into having sexual intercourse 
or a forced attempt was made to have sexual intercourse, 
change the answer in Item 24 (for attacks) to "Yes" and line 
through the entries in Items 25 through 28. If the sexual 
contact did not involve any force (for example, only unwanted 
touching, embracing, and/or fondling), mark Box 6. If unsure, 
go with the respondent's perception of whether or not force 
was used.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Verbal threat of rape" if the offender was face-
to-face with the respondent and verbally threatened to rape 
him/her.  For the NCVS, rape means forced sexual intercourse 
including both psychological coercion, as well as physical 
force.  Forced sexual intercourse means vaginal, anal, or oral 
penetration by the offender(s).  The penetration also can be 
from a foreign object, such as a bottle. 

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "Verbal threat to kill" if the offender was face-to-
face with the respondent and verbally threatened to kill the 
respondent.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Verbal threat of attack other than to kill or rape" 
if the offender was face-to-face with the respondent and verbally 
threatened to attack the respondent in some way other than by 
raping or killing him/her.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 "Verbal threat of sexual assault other than rape" if 
the offender was face-to-face with the respondent and verbally 
threatened to sexually assault the respondent, but did not 
threaten to rape him/her.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 "Unwanted sexual contact with force (grabbing, fondling, 
etc.)" if the offender used some type of force such as grabbing, 
restraining, or pushing during the unwanted sexual contact.  
Before you mark Box 5, always ask the structured probe printed 
below the question in Item 28b.  If the answer to the probe question 
is "No," then mark Box 5.  If the answer to the probe question is
"Yes," change the answer in Item 24 to "Yes" and delete any 
answers marked in Items 25 through 28b. After correcting the 
answer in Item 24, skip to Item 29.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 "Unwanted sexual contact without force (grabbing, 
fondling, etc.)" if the offender made some type of unwanted 
sexual contact without the use of force.  For example, during 
the incident, the offender may have embraced, fondled, or 
touched the respondent against his/her will, but did not grab, 
push, or restrain the respondent in any way.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 "Weapon present or threatened with weapon" if the 
offender had a weapon or an object that he/she intended to use 
as a weapon and the respondent believed the offender would use 
the weapon to harm him/her.  Do NOT mark Box 7 if the offender 
attempted to use the weapon or actually shot at the respondent.

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 "Shot at (but missed)" if the offender discharged a 
gun or rifle in the direction of the respondent intending to 
hit the respondent, but the bullet did NOT hit the respondent.  

Do NOT mark Box 8 if:

     x  The offender was not aiming to hit the respondent or 

     x  The bullet actually hit the respondent. If the
        respondent was hit by a bullet, change the answer in
        Item 24 to "Yes," delete the answers in Items 25
        through 28b, and skip to Item 29.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 "Attempted attack with knife/sharp weapon" if the 
offender tried unsuccessfully to strike or stab the respondent 
with a knife or other sharp weapon, such as an ice pick or 
scissors.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 "Attempted attack with weapon other than gun/knife/
sharp weapon" if the offender tried unsuccessfully to attack the 
respondent with a weapon other than a gun, knife, or other sharp 
weapon.  This could include weapons such as clubs, blackjacks, 
rocks, and so forth.

Marking Box 11

Mark Box 11 "Object thrown at person" if the offender threw an 
object at the respondent, but did not hit him/her.

Marking Box 12

Mark Box 12 "Followed or surrounded" if the offender was following 
the respondent or blocking his/her way, and the offender's close 
proximity to the respondent caused the respondent to fear for his/
her safety. 

Marking Box 13

Mark Box 13 "Tried to hit, slap, knock down, grab, hold, trip, 
jump, push, etc." if the offender tried unsuccessfully to hit, 
slap, knock down, grab, hold, trip, jump, or push the respondent.

Marking Box 14

Mark Box 14 "Other" if the offender tried to attack or threatened 
to physically harm the respondent in a way that does not fit one 
of the preceding categories.  Avoid using this category if at all 
possible since most threats or attempted attacks can be identified 
in Boxes 1 through 13. If you do need to mark Box 14, make sure to 
enter how the offender tried to attack or threatened to physically 
harm the respondent on the "Specify" line. 

Item 29 (How Attacked)

After a respondent tells you in Item 24 that he/she was attacked 
during the incident, you will mark Box 1 in Item 24 and skip to 
Item 29 to determine how the respondent was attacked during the 
incident.  Item 29 allows you to mark multiple boxes, so continue 
asking "Anything else" until you get a "No" response.

If you discover that the respondent was NOT physically attacked 
during the incident, leave Item 29 blank, change the answer in 
Item 24 to "No," and ask the question in Item 25 next.

Marking Box 1 (Raped)

If the respondent says that he/she was raped during the incident, 
always ask the structured probe, "Do you mean forced or coerced 
sexual intercourse?", before marking Box 1 "Raped."  This question 
is included to ensure that the respondent's definition of rape 
matches the NCVS definition.  The complete NCVS definition of rape 
is printed on page 19 of your Field Representative's Information 
Card Booklet (NCVS-554).

If the respondent's answer to the probe question is:

*  "Yes" - Mark Box 1 "Raped"

*  "No" - Ask the second probe question, "What do you mean?"  
   The purpose of this question is to distinguish between rape 
   and other forms of sexual assault.  Do not probe beyond this 
   question. If the respondent insists that he/she was raped, 
   mark Box 1.  Include as much detail as possible about the
   incident as you write your summary report in Check Item W.  
   If the attack involved another type of sexual assault, other 
   than rape, do not mark Box 1, instead mark Box 3.

Marking Box 2 (Tried to Rape)

If the respondent says that the offender tried to rape him/her 
during the incident, always ask the structured probe, "Do you mean 
attempted forced or coerced sexual intercourse?", before marking 
Box 2 "Tried to rape." This question is included to ensure that 
the respondent's definition of attempted rape matches the NCVS 
definition. 

If the respondent's answer to the probe question is:

*  "Yes" - Mark Box 2 "Tried to rape"

*  "No" - Ask the next probe question, "What do you  mean?"  
   The purpose of this question is to distinguish between 
   attempted rape and other forms of sexual assault.  Do not 
   probe beyond this question. If the respondent insists that 
   the offender tried to rape him/her, mark Box 2. Include 
   as much detail as possible about the incident as you write
   your summary report in Check Item W.  If the attack
   involved another type of sexual assault, other than
   tried to rape, do not mark Box 2, instead mark Box 3.

Marking Box 3 (Sexual Assault Other 
Than Rape or Attempted Rape)

Mark Box 3 when the respondent was sexually assaulted in some 
way other than rape or attempted rape; that is, the sexual assault 
did not involve forced or coerced sexual intercourse or attempted 
sexual intercourse (for example, fondling the respondent's breasts 
against her will). 

Marking Box 4 (Shot)

Mark Box 4 when the offender shot a gun or rifle at the respondent 
and the respondent was actually hit by the bullet.

Marking Box 5 (Shot at
(but missed))

Mark Box 5 when the offender shot a gun or rifle intending to hit 
the respondent, but the respondent did not get hit by the bullet.  
During an incident, it is possible to have both an attempted attack 
and an actual attack. However, if you mark Box 5 AND do not mark 
another box in Item 29 to indicate that some physical attack or
contact happened during the incident, then you should:

      Leave Item 29 blank,

      Change the "Yes" answer in Item 24 to "No," and

      Ask the question about attempted attacks in Item 25
      next.

Marking Box 6 (Hit With Gun Held 
in Hand)

Mark Box 6 when the offender used a gun or rifle to strike the 
respondent (for example, using it to inflict blunt force injury 
rather than shooting at the respondent).

Marking Box 7 (Stabbed/Cut With
Knife/Sharp Weapon)

Mark Box 7 when the offender used a knife or other sharp object 
to cut the respondent causing a puncture wound.

Marking Box 8(Attempted Attack With
Knife/Sharp Weapon)

Mark Box 8 when the offender tried to cut or stab the respondent 
with a knife or other sharp object but was not successful in 
causing a puncture wound. During an incident, it is possible 
to have both an attempted attack and an actual attack. However, 
if you mark Box 8 AND do not mark another box in Item 29 to 
indicate that some physical attack or contact happened during 
the incident, then you should:
     
        Leave Item 29 blank,

        Change the "Yes" answer in Item 24 to "No," and

        Ask the question about attempted attacks in Item 25
        next.

Marking Box 9 (Hit by Object (Other 
Than Gun) Held in Hand)

Mark Box 9 when the offender was holding an object, other than 
a gun, in his/her hand and hit the respondent with the object.

Marking Box 10 (Hit by Thrown Object)

Mark Box 10 when the offender threw something at the respondent 
AND the thrown object hit the respondent.

Marking Box 11 (Attempted Attack 
With Weapon Other Than Gun/Knife/
Sharp Weapon)

Mark Box 11 when the offender tried to attack the respondent 
with a weapon, other than a gun, knife, or sharp weapon, but 
the weapon did not make contact with the respondent. During an 
incident, it is possible to have both an attempted attack and 
an actual attack. However, if you mark Box 11 AND do not mark 
another box in Item 29 to indicate that some physical attack 
or contact happened during the incident, then you should:

        Leave Item 29 blank,

        Change the "Yes" answer in Item 24 to "No," and

        Ask the question about attempted attacks in Item 25
        next.

Marking Box 12 (Hit, Slapped, Knocked
Down)

Mark Box 12 when the offender used his/her hands or fists to 
hit, slap, or knock down the respondent.

Marking Box 13(Grabbed, Held, Tripped, 
Jumped, Pushed, Etc.)

Mark Box 13 when the offender physically interfered with the 
respondent's movement by grabbing, holding, tripping, jumping, 
or pushing him/her.

Marking Box 14 (Other)

Mark Box 14 when the offender physically attacked the respondent 
in a way not covered in Boxes 1 through 13. After marking Box 14, 
make sure to explain how the respondent was attacked on the 
"Specify" line.  Before marking Box 14, make sure that the method 
of attack does not fit Boxes 1 through 13.             

Item 30 (Threatened Before Attacked)

After identifying in Item 29 how the respondent was physically 
attacked, you will ask the question in Item 30 to determine if 
the offender verbally threatened to hurt the respondent prior to 
the actual attack.  The verbal threat could be to take any of 
the actions specified in Item 29, such as threatening to rape 
the respondent.

The offender could have voiced the threat anytime from the start 
of the incident until the moment of the physical attack.

In most cases, you will mark Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" based on 
the respondent's answer.  Mark Box 3 "Other" only if you need to 
describe the situation with more than a "Yes" or "No" answer.  
Make sure to explain the respondent's answer on the "Specify" 
line if you mark Box 3 "Other."

Item 31 (Injuries)

After completing Item 30, you will ask Item 31 to determine if 
the respondent experienced any personal injuries during the 
attack and, if so, to identify what type of bodily injuries were 
suffered from the incident.  Do not include mental or emotional 
suffering as an injury.

Since the respondent may have suffered various types of injuries 
during the incident, continue asking, "Anything else?", until you 
get a "No" response.

Marking Box 1 (None)

Mark Box 1 "None" when the respondent tells you that he/she did 
not experience any physical injuries from the attack.  However, 
do not mark Box 1 if:

      x  You mark another box in Item 31 or

      x  You marked Box 1 "Raped" or Box 2 "Tried to rape"
         in Item 29.

Marking Box 2 (Raped)

Mark Box 2 "Raped" when you have marked Box 1 "Raped" in Item 
29, regardless of whether the respondent mentions "Raped" as 
an injury.  Do not ask the probe question a second time, when 
you have already asked, "Do you mean forced or coerced sexual 
intercourse?", in Item 29.  However, when the respondent does 
not mention "Raped" in Item 29 and then reports "Raped" as an 
injury in Item 31, make sure to ask the probe question in Item 
31. If you determine in Item 31 that the respondent was raped
during the incident, mark Box 2 in Item 31 and then go back to 
Item 29 and mark Box 1.  However, if the respondent answers, 
"No," also ask, "What do you mean?".  This probe question is 
needed to distinguish between rape, attempted rape, and other 
types of sexual assaults.  Mark the appropriate box based on 
the respondent's answer.

Do not ask any additional probe questions after asking, "What do 
you mean?".  Make sure to include any additional details about 
the incident in your summary report.

Marking Box 3(Attempted rape)

Only mark Box 3 "Attempted rape" when the respondent specifically 
says that his/her injury was an attempted rape. Do not automatically 
mark Box 3 "Attempted Rape" when Box 2 "Tried to rape" is marked 
in Item 29. If an offender tried to rape the respondent and the 
respondent does not report any physical injuries in Item 31, 
mark Box 1 "None" in  Item 31.

If the respondent reports an "Attempted rape" injury in Item 
31, but did not report "Tried to rape" in Item 29, ask the 
probe question, "Do you mean attempted forced or coerced 
sexual intercourse?" If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 3 
in Item 31 and go back to Item 29 and mark Box 2. Then ask 
if any other injuries were incurred during the attempted rape 
and mark the appropriate boxes in Item 31. If the respondent 
says that he/she did not mean attempted forced or coerced 
sexual intercourse or is unsure of the answer, ask the 
additional probe question, "What do you mean?".  It is not 
necessary to ask these probe questions again if you already 
asked them in Item 29.

The second probe question is needed to distinguish between 
rape, attempted rape, and other types of sexual assaults. 
Mark the appropriate box based on the respondent's answer.

Do not ask any additional probe questions after asking, "What 
do you mean?".  Make sure to include any additional details 
about the incident in your summary report.

Marking Box 4 (Sexual assault other 
than rape or attempted rape)

Only mark Box 4 "Sexual assault other than rape or attempted 
rape" when the respondent specifically says that this was one 
of his/her injuries. Make sure to also ask if the respondent 
suffered any other injuries and, if so, mark the appropriate 
boxes in Item 31. Do not automatically mark Box 4 when Box 3
"Sexual assault other than rape or attempted rape" is marked 
in Item 29. If the respondent reports a sexual assault other 
than rape or attempted rape in Item 29 and does not report any 
physical injuries in Item 31, mark Box 1 "None" in Item 31. 

Marking Box 5 (Knife or stab wounds)

Mark Box 5 "Knife or stab wounds" when the respondent reports 
an injury caused by a knife or any other sharp or pointed 
object.

Marking Box 6 (Gun shot, bullet 
wounds)

Mark Box 6 "Gun shot, bullet wounds" when the respondent reports 
an injury caused by the bullet or shot from a hand gun, rifle, 
shotgun, and so forth.  Do not mark Box 6 if the injury was 
caused by being shot with a BB gun, tear gas gun, or a stun 
gun.

Marking Box 7 (Broken bones or teeth 
knocked out)

Mark Box 7 "Broken bones or teeth knocked out" when the 
respondent reports that he/she suffered broken, chipped, or 
cracked bones from the attack.  When a respondent says that 
one or more of his/her teeth were knocked out, also mark Box 
7.  

However, do not mark Box 7 for injuries involving broken, 
chipped, or cracked teeth. Mark Box 10 for this type of 
injury.

Marking Box 8(Internal injuries)

Mark Box 8 "Internal injuries" when the respondent reports that 
he/she suffered any type of internal injuries during the attack.

Marking Box 9(Knocked unconscious)

Mark Box 9 "Knocked unconscious" when the respondent reports 
that he/she was knocked unconscious, blacked out, passed out, 
went into a coma, and so forth, resulting directly from the 
attack.

Do not mark Box 9 if the respondent became unconscious or fainted 
due to fear or medical treatment, which cannot be attributed 
directly to the attack.

Marking Box 10 (Bruises, black eye,
cuts, scratches, swelling, chipped 
teeth)

Mark Box 10 "Bruises, black eye, cuts, scratches, swelling, 
chipped teeth" when the respondent reports any minor injuries 
that are not covered specifically in Boxes 2 through 9. Examples 
of injuries to include for Box 10 are minor burns, bruises, 
black eyes, cuts, scratches, swellings, and chipped teeth 
suffered during the attack.

Marking Box 11 (Other)

Mark Box 11 "Other" when the respondent mentions an injury that 
does not seem to fit into any of the injuries for Boxes 2 through 
10. Always enter a description of the injury on the "Specify" 
line after marking Box 11 (for example, eye damage from gasoline 
thrown in eyes or severe burns from acid dropped on arms). Avoid 
marking Box 11 if the injury fits into one of the injury 
descriptions for Boxes 2 through 10.

Topic 4. Completing Items 32 Through 54 (Injuries/Medical Care/
Protecting Self or Property/Results of Actions/Presence of 
Others/Injuries to Others Present)

Item 32 (Were Injuries
Caused by Weapon)

Item 32 is used to determine if any injuries reported in Item 
31 were caused by a weapon OTHER THAN a gun or a knife. If 
you feel sure of the answer, you can verify the answer with 
the respondent, instead of asking the question.  Otherwise, 
ask the question in Item 32. If you get a "Yes" answer, mark 
Box 1 and continue with Item 33. If you get a "No" answer, 
mark Box 2 and skip to Item 34.

Item 33 (Which Injuries)

Item 33 is used to identify up to three injuries reported in
Item 31 that were caused by a weapon OTHER THAN a gun or a 
knife. If the respondent answers "Yes" in Item 32, enter the 
box number(s) in Item 33 to identify the injuries. For example, 
if you marked Boxes 5, 7, and 9 in Item 31 and the respondent 
answers the question in Item 33 with "broken nose and knocked 
unconscious," enter "07" in the first two boxes, "09" in the 
next two boxes, and leave the last two boxes blank.  

Enter injury codes starting from the left and working towards 
the right of the answer space.  If a respondent mentions more 
than three different injuries from Item 31, only enter codes 
for the first three injuries mentioned.

Since we are not interested in identifying injuries caused
by a gun or a knife, do NOT enter the following codes in
Item 33: "01" (None), "05" (Knife or stab wounds), and "06" 
(Gun shot, bullet wounds).

Item 34 (Medical Care)

Item 34 is used to find out if the respondent received any
medical care for the injuries reported in Item 31. Only
mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent actually received medical 
care which includes any care or treatment provided for the 
respondent's physical injuries, including self treatment.  
Treatment can range from bandages and ice packs to setting 
broken bones and major surgery.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the respondent received any type of 
medical treatment for the reported injuries, regardless of 
where the medical care was provided or who provided the 
treatment. After marking Box 1, continue with Item 35.

Mark Box 2 "No" when the respondent did not receive any
medical treatment for his/her injuries and then skip to 
Item 40 on page 6 of the NCVS-2.

Item 35 (Medical Care Received)

Item 35 is used to determine where the respondent received 
medical treatment for his/her injuries.  Continue asking, 
"Anything else?", until you get a "No" response, since the 
respondent may have been cared for at more than one location 
(for example, at the crime scene, then at an emergency room, 
and later at a doctor's office).

Marking Box 1 (At the scene)

Mark Box 1 "At the scene" if the respondent received any type 
of medical treatment at the scene of the attack (for example, 
in the alley where he was mugged or in the shopping mall where 
she was stabbed).

Marking Box 2 (At home/neighbor's/
friends)

Mark Box 2 "At home/neighbor's/friends" if the respondent 
received any type of medical treatment at his/her home or 
at the home of the respondent's neighbor, friend, or relative.

Marking Box 3 (Health unit at work/school,
first aid station at a stadium/park, etc.)

Mark Box 3 "Health unit at work/school, first aid station at
a stadium/park, etc." if the respondent received any type of
medical treatment at a health unit or first aid station at
work or school, at a sports arena or stadium, airport, at a
train or subway station, a museum or some other type of
emergency facility other than those covered in Boxes 4, 5,
and/or 6.

Marking Box 4 (Doctor's office/
health clinic)

Mark Box 4 "Doctor's office/ health clinic" if the respondent 
received any type of medical treatment at any type of doctor's 
or dentist's office, or in some kind of medical or health clinic 
that serves patients on either a routine or an emergency basis.

Marking Box 5 (Emergency room at
hospital/emergency clinic)

Mark Box 5 "Emergency room at hospital/emergency clinic" if the 
respondent received any type of medical treatment at a hospital 
emergency room or at an emergency clinic.  Emergency clinics 
differ from other medical clinics in that they only deal with 
emergency cases and do not provide services on a routine basis.

Marking Box 6 (Hospital (other than
emergency room))

Mark Box 6 "Hospital (other than emergency room)" if the
respondent received any type of medical treatment after
being admitted to a hospital or being referred to an
outpatient treatment center or therapy area. If the
respondent was treated first at a hospital emergency 
room and was later admitted to the hospital, mark BOTH
Boxes 5 and 6.

Marking Box 7 (Other)

Mark Box 7 "Other" if the respondent received any type of
medical treatment at a location other than the places
identified in Boxes 1 through 6.  Avoid marking Box 7 if
the location fits into one of the other boxes in Item 35. If
you do mark Box 7, always enter a description of the place
on the "Specify" line (for example, in ambulance on way
to hospital or on a street, shoulder of a highway, parking
lot, and so forth, NOT at the crime scene).

Check Item E (Medical Care in 
Hospital)

Check Item E is used to help you determine whether:

*  To ask about overnight stays in a hospital for the
   injuries suffered by the respondent during the attack
   or

*  To skip over Items 36 and 37 and ask Item 38 next.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item E if Box 6 is marked in Item 35 
and ask Item 36 next.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item E if Box 6 is not marked in Item 
35 because the respondent did not receive any medical care in a 
hospital and then skip to Item 38.

Item 36 (Overnight Stay in Hospital)

Item 36 is used to find out if the respondent stayed in a hospital 
overnight to receive medical care for his/her injuries suffered 
during the attack.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with Item 37. Mark 
Box 2 for a "No" answer and then skip to Item 38.

Item 37 (Number of Days
in Hospital)

Item 37 is used to identify how many days the respondent spent in 
the hospital to receive medical treatment for his/her injuries. 
When determining the number of days spent in the hospital:

     Count each night spent in the hospital as one day and
     only enter whole days (for example, enter 3 days, not
     3 1/2 days).

     Count all days spent in the hospital up to the night
     prior to the interview.

     If a respondent cannot recall the exact number of
     days, enter the respondent's best estimate. 

Item 38 (Medical Insurance Coverage)

Item 38 is used to determine if the respondent is eligible to
receive health benefits from a medical insurance plan or policy.  
Normally, the benefits will cover all or part of the hospital 
expenses and the charges for a doctor or surgeon's services, 
medication, and so forth. The respondent needs to understand 
that you are asking about health benefits from a formal plan 
or policy with defined membership and benefits which he/she 
was eligible to receive at the time of the incident. 

In addition to health insurance coverage from a private company, 
we are also interested in knowing whether the respondent was 
eligible for benefits from any publicly organized system that 
provides health benefits, such as medicaid, Veterans 
Administration, or Public Welfare.

If a respondent tells you that a friend or family member offered 
to pay for his/her medical expenses, probe to find out whether 
the respondent was covered by some type of health insurance plan, 
even if the respondent did not submit a claim or the plan did not 
pay any benefits.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No" answer, and Box 
3 for "Don't know."  After completing Item 38, continue with 
Item 39.
 
Item 39 (Total Amount of
Medical Expenses)

Item 39 is used to identify the TOTAL dollar amount of the 
respondent's medical expenses resulting directly from injuries 
suffered during the incident.  Include in this figure any doctor 
and hospital bills, surgeon's fees, emergency room expenses, 
ambulance services, services provided by a physical therapist, 
dentist, and so forth.  Also include expenses for medicine and 
any kind of special devices or aids required as a result of the 
respondent's injuries, such as braces, crutches, dentures, 
eyeglasses, a wheelchair, or artificial limbs.

As you ask the question in Item 39, include the parenthetical 
phrase, "(INCLUDING anything paid by insurance)", if the respondent 
told you in Item 38 that he/she was covered by some type of 
medical insurance or health benefits program.

Enter the respondent's answer in whole dollars on the line
provided for the total dollar amount.  If the respondent is
not sure of the exact amount, enter his/her best estimate of
the cost.

If the respondent is still undergoing medical treatment for
injuries related to the incident, ask for the respondent's
best estimate of the projected total cost for his/her medical
expenses and enter the projected estimate on the "Total
amount" line.

Mark Box 0 (zero) "No cost" if the respondent did not incur 
any medical expenses for his/her injuries as a result of the 
incident.

Mark Box x "Don't know" if the respondent is unable to give 
you a dollar amount or even a good estimate.

Items 40, 41, and 42 (Actions to 
Protect Self And Property)

Items 40, 41, and 42 are used to determine if the respondent 
took any actions during the incident to protect himself/herself 
or his/her property and, if so, what kind of actions were taken.

Item 40 (Actions to Protect 
Self or Property)

Item 40 is used to determine if the respondent did anything
in an attempt to protect himself/herself or his/her property
during the incident.  

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and skip to Item 42.  Mark
Box 2 if the respondent answers "No" or says that he/she
took no action or just kept still during the incident. After
marking Box 2, continue with Item 41.

Item 41(Actions Against Offender)

Item 41 is used to find out if the respondent did ANYTHING while 
the incident was taking place, even if the respondent's actions 
were not intended to protect himself/herself or his/her property.  

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 42. Mark 
Box 2 if the respondent answers "No" or says that he/she took 
no action or just kept still during the incident. After marking 
Box 2, skip to Item 47.

Item 42 (What Actions Taken)

Item 42 is used to identify the types of actions taken by the
respondent during the incident.  Since the respondent may
have taken more than one action, continue asking, "Anything 
else?", until you get a "No" response. Based on the respondent's 
answer, mark ALL categories that apply.

The types of actions listed in Item 42 are divided into eight
groups and each group has a heading which is in bold and
uppercase letters.  Scan these titles to speed up your search
for the correct box(es) to mark for a respondent's answer.

Boxes 1 through 6

Boxes 1 through 6 fall under the heading, USED PHYSICAL FORCE 
TOWARD OFFENDER, and cover any aggressive actions taken by the 
respondent against the offender, such as attacking the offender 
either with or without a weapon or threatening to physically
harm the offender with or without a weapon.

Boxes 7 and 8

Boxes 7 and 8 fall under the heading, RESISTED OR CAPTURED 
OFFENDER, and cover a respondent's actions taken in an attempt 
to catch the offender or resist the offender (for example, the 
respondent struggled, ducked, blocked blows, held onto property) 
without actually attacking or threatening to physically harm the 
offender.

Box 9

Box 9 falls under the heading, SCARED OR WARNED OFF OFFENDER, 
and covers a respondent's actions taken in an attempt to scare 
or warn off the offender by yelling, turning lights on, 
threatening to call the police, and so forth.

Boxes 10 and 11

Boxes 10 and 11 fall under the heading, PERSUADED OR APPEASED 
OFFENDER, and cover a respondent's actions taken in an attempt 
to coax the offender not to take specific actions or to calm the 
offender down to avoid injury.  This could include pretending to 
cooperate with the offender, stalling for time to escape, 
pleading with the offender, and so forth.

Box 12

Box 12 falls under the heading, ESCAPED OR GOT AWAY, and covers a 
respondent's attempts to get away from the offender and leave the 
crime scene.

Boxes 13 and 14

Boxes 13 and 14 fall under the heading, GOT HELP OR GAVE ALARM, 
and cover the respondent calling the police or a guard or trying 
to attract attention (for example, crying out for help or sounding 
a car horn).

Box 15

Box 15 falls under the heading, REACTED TO PAIN OR EMOTION, and 
covers the respondent screaming or making noise in reaction to 
pain or fear.

Box 16

Box 16 falls under the heading, OTHER, and covers any action(s) 
taken by the respondent that do not fit into one of the previous 
categories for Item 42. Before marking Box 16, make sure that 
the answer does not fit Boxes 1 through 15.  However, if you do 
mark Box 16, always enter a description of the respondent's 
action(s) on the "Specify" line. 

Once you are done completing Item 42, continue with Check Item F.

Check Item F (Was Respondent Injured 
in Incident?)

Check Item F is used to help you decide whether to ask Item 43a 
to determine when the respondent took actions in relation to any 
injuries incurred during the incident or whether to skip to Item 
43b and ask the respondent whether his/her actions helped the 
situation.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item F if one or more boxes from 
Boxes 2 through 11 are marked in Item 31.  After marking the 
"Yes" box, continue with Item 43a. 

Mark the "No" box in Check Item F when NONE of the boxes from 
Boxes 2 through 11 are marked in Item 31 and then skip to Item 
43b.

Item 43a (When Actions
Taken/Injury)

Item 43a is used to determine whether the respondent took the 
actions identified in Item 42 before, after, or at the same 
time that the offender injured the respondent. Based on the 
respondent's answer, mark all boxes that apply in Item 43a.

After completing Item 43a, continue with Item 43b. 

Item 43b (Did Actions Help)

Item 43b is used to find out whether the respondent feels that 
any of his/her actions identified in Item 42 improved the 
situation or helped minimize the damage done during the incident.  
If the respondent seems unsure of how to answer this question, 
also ask the additional probe question for Item 43b.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 44. Mark 
Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer and 
then skip to Item 45. 

Item 44 (How Actions Helped)

Item 44 is used to identify how the respondent's actions
improved the situation or minimized the damage done during the 
incident.  You will only ask this question if the respondent 
answers "Yes" to the question in Item 43b. Based on the 
respondents answer, mark all boxes that apply and continue 
asking, "Any other way?", until you get a "No" response.

If the respondent mentions a way that his/her actions helped 
improve the situation and the answer does not fit the 
descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6 "Other" and enter 
the description on the "Specify" line.  Avoid marking Box 6,if 
the answer matches one of the other descriptions in Boxes 1 
through 5.

After completing Item 44, continue with Item 45.

Item 45 (Did Actions Make
Situation Worse?)

Item 45 is used to find out whether the respondent feels that 
any of his/her actions identified in Item 42 caused the 
situation to deteriorate or the damage done to escalate during 
the incident. If the respondent seems unsure of how to answer 
this question, also ask the additional probe question for Item 
45.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 46. Mark 
Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer and 
then skip to Item 47. 

Item 46 (How Actions Worsened 
Situation)

Item 46 is used to identify how the respondent's actions made the 
situation worse or caused the damage done to escalate during the 
incident.  You will only ask this question if the respondent 
answers "Yes" to the question in Item 45.  Based on the respondent's 
answer, mark all the boxes that apply and continue asking, "Any 
other way?", until you get a "No" response.

If the respondent mentions a way that his/her actions made the 
situation worse and the answer does not fit the descriptions in 
Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6 "Other" and enter the description 
on the "Specify" line.  Avoid marking Box 6, if the answer 
does match one of the other descriptions in Boxes 1 through 
5.

After completing Item 46, continue with Item 47.

Item 47 (Other Persons Present)

Item 47 is used to find out if anyone besides the offender
and the respondent were present during the incident, EXCLUDING 
children under 12 years of age.  Other persons present could 
include other crime victims, bystanders, or other household 
members.

When deciding whether a person is "present" during an incident, 
follow the instructions in this chapter for completing Item 20a, 
as well as the detailed information about presence during an 
incident in Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 6.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 48. Mark 
Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer and 
then skip to Check Item G on page 8 of the NCVS-2.

Item 48 (Did Actions of Other 
Persons Help)

When persons, other than the respondent and the offender, were 
present during the incident ("Yes" marked in Item 47), Item 48 
is used to determine whether the actions taken by any of these 
persons may have helped the situation in any way.

As you ask Item 48, only use the phrase "this person" if the 
respondent happens to mention that there was only one other 
person present.  Otherwise, ask the question using the phrase 
"any of these people."

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with Item 49.  
Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer or for instances when the other 
persons present did nothing or took no actions during the 
incident.  Mark Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer. After 
marking either Box 2 or Box 3, skip to Item 50.

Item 49 (How Actions Helped)

Item 49 is used to identify how the actions of other persons 
present during the incident helped the situation. Based on the 
respondent's answer, mark all the boxes that apply and continue 
asking, "Any other way?", until you get a "No" response.

If the respondent mentions a way that the other person's actions 
helped the situation and the answer does not fit the descriptions 
in Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6 "Other" and enter the description 
on the "Specify" line. Avoid marking Box 6, if the answer matches 
one of the other descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5.

After completing Item 49, continue with Item 50.

Item 50 (Did Actions of Other 
Persons Make Situation Worse)

Item 50 is used to find out whether the respondent feels that 
any actions taken by other persons present during the incident 
caused the situation to deteriorate or the damage done to 
escalate. 

As you ask Item 50, only use the phrase "this person" if the 
respondent happens to mention that there was only one other 
person present.  Otherwise, ask the question using the phrase 
"any of these people."

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 51. Mark 
Box 2 for a "No" answer or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer and 
then skip to Item 52.

Item 51 (How Other Person's 
Actions Worsened the Situation)

Item 51 is used to identify how the actions of other persons 
made the situation worse or caused the damage done to escalate 
during the incident.  Based on the respondent's answer, mark 
all the boxes that apply and continue asking, "Any other way?", 
until you get a "No" response.

If the respondent mentions a way that the actions of other
persons made the situation worse and the answer does not
fit the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5, mark Box 6 "Other" 
and enter the description on the "Specify" line. Avoid marking 
Box 6, if the answer matches one of the other descriptions in 
Boxes 1 through 5.

After completing Item 51, continue with Item 52.

Items 52 through 54 (Other Persons 
Victimized During the Incident)

Items 52 through 54 are used to determine whether other persons 
who were present during the incident experienced any physical 
harm, the threat of physical harm, or were robbed by force or 
the threat of harm. If you identify that one or more household 
members over the age of 12 were also victimized in any of these 
ways during the incident, each of these household members should 
report the incident during his/her interview.

Item 52 (Other Persons Victimized)

Item 52 is used to determine whether or not other persons who 
were present during the incident were physically harmed, 
threatened with physical harm, or robbed by force or threat of 
harm. As you ask Item 52, make sure to pause where indicated 
and make sure that the respondent understands NOT to include:

        Himself/herself,

        The offender(s), and

        Any children who were younger than 12 years of age
        at the time of the incident.

Mark Box 1 if you get a "Yes" answer and then continue with Item 
53.

Mark Box 2 if you get a "No" answer or the respondent indicates 
that:

*  The only other person who was harmed or threatened with harm 
   was someone under 12 years of age, or

*  The other person(s) did NOT experience any physical harm or 
   threat of physical harm (for example, they had their pockets 
   picked or property was stolen from their cars while they were 
   in a bank).

Mark Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer.

After marking Box 2 or Box 3, skip to Check Item G on page 8 of 
the NCVS-2.

Item 53(How Many Harmed?)

Item 53 is used to identify the total number of persons over the 
age of 12 who were harmed, threatened with harm, or robbed by 
force or threat of harm during the incident, EXCLUDING the 
respondent and the offender(s).  Enter the number of persons 
provided by the respondent on the "Number of persons" line.  

If the respondent's answer is not a total number (for example, 
the respondent says "several," "just a few," "many," and so forth), 
probe to get at least an estimate of the number of other persons 
who were present and personally victimized during the incident.  

You must enter a numeric answer in Item 53 when you mark Box 1 
"Yes" in Item 52.

Item 54 (Identifying Household 
Members Harmed)

Item 54 is used to:

*  Determine whether any of the persons included in the count 
   in Item 53 are sample household members at the time of the 
   interview. 

*  Identify the number of persons included in the count in Item 
   53 who are sample household members at the time of the 
   interview.
 
*  Identify by name or line number each of the household members, 
   other than the respondent or the offender(s), who were harmed, 
   threatened with harm, or robbed by force or the threat of harm 
   during the incident.

Mark Box 0 (zero) when none of the other persons present during 
the incident are current household members.

Using the "Number of persons" line, enter the number of current 
household members who were personally victimized during the 
incident, excluding the respondent, the offender(s), and any 
children under 12 years of age.

Below the "Number of persons" line, enter the names or line 
numbers to uniquely identify each of these current household 
members who were personally victimized during the incident. As 
you interview each of these household members, complete a 
separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for each household member 
to report how he/she was personally victimized during this 
incident. However, if you discover that the person was NOT 
personally victimized during the incident, note this fact in
Item 54 of the NCVS-2 for the original respondent and correct 
Items 52, 53, and 54, as necessary.

If you have already interviewed one of these household members 
and the person did not report this incident, you need to speak 
to that person again to verify whether or not the household 
member was personally victimized. If the person was personally 
victimized during the incident, complete an NCVS-2 and correct 
the appropriate information on the NCVS-1 (for example, number 
of incidents in Item 15c and the appropriate screen question
entries and Check Item G for the household member). If the 
person was NOT personally victimized during the incident, note 
this fact in Item 54 on the NCVS-2 for the original respondent 
and correct Items 52, 53, and 54, as necessary.

For proxy interviews, if the proxy respondent was one of the 
household members who was personally victimized during the 
incident reported for the proxy person, make sure that you 
enter the proxy respondent's name or line number in Item 54, 
NOT the name or line number for the person for whom the 
interview is being taken (proxy person).

Topic 5.  Completing Check Item G Through Item 87 (Use of Physical
Force/Characteristics of the Offender(s))

Check Item G (Use or Threaten to 
Use Force)

Check Item G is designed to help you decide whether or not to 
ask about who used or threatened to use physical force first in 
Item 55.  If you are not sure how to mark Check Item G, refer 
back to your entries in Item 42 on page 6.

If you marked one or more of Boxes 1 through 6 in Item 42, mark 
Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item G and continue with Item 55.

If Boxes 1 through 6 in Item 42 are ALL blank, mark Box 2 "No" 
in Check Item G and skip to Item 60.

Item 55 (First to Use or Threaten to 
Use Force)

Item 55 is used to identify who was the first person to use or 
threaten to use physical force during the incident. Mark only 
one box in Item 55.

If the first person to use or threaten to use force during the
incident was:

          The respondent - Mark Box 1

          One or more of the offenders - Mark Box 2

          Someone other than the respondent or an offender -
          Mark Box 3

          Respondent does not know who used or threatened to
          use force first - Mark Box 4.

After marking the appropriate box in Item 55, skip to Item 60. 

Item 56 (Know the Offender)

The question in Item 56 is ONLY asked when NO household members 
were present during the incident (Box 2 "No" marked in Item 20a).  
If any household members WERE present during the incident, do not 
ask the question in Item 56 and skip to Item 59. However, if
the respondent was present during the incident, go back and re-
ask the questions in Items 20a and 20b and correct the entries, 
as necessary.  

Item 56 is used to find out if the respondent knows anything or 
has learned anything about the offender(s), such as whether there 
were one or more offenders, whether the offender was young or old, 
or male or female. It does not matter from which source the 
respondent received this information; for instance, it may have 
come from the police, neighbors, or other circumstances of the 
incident.

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," then continue with Item 57. If you 
mark Box 2 "No," skip to Item 88 on page 11 of the NCVS-2.

Item 57 (Certainty About Offender 
Information)

Item 57 is used to discover how sure the respondent is about the 
accuracy of what he/she knows or has learned about the offender(s).

Mark Box 1 if the respondent only suspects what he/she knows about 
the offender(s) is true.  Mark Box 2 if the respondent is fairly 
sure what he/she knows about the offender(s) is true.  Mark Box 3 
if the respondent is certain what he/she knows about the offender(s) 
is true. 

Item 58 (How Respondent Learned 
About Offender)

Item 58 is used to determine how the respondent found out any 
information about the offender(s).  Since there may have been more 
than one source, continue asking, "Any other way?", until you get 
a "No" answer and mark all boxes that apply.  Once you complete 
Item 58, skip to Item 88 on page 11 of the NCVS-2.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent saw or heard the offender, but was 
not present during the incident. For more information about 
presence during an incident, refer to Item 20a in Topic 2 of 
this chapter and Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 6.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent found out about the offender from 
another household member who saw the offender, but was not 
present during the incident.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent found out about the offender from 
someone who is not a household member, such as a neighbor who 
actually saw the offender commit the crime.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent found out about the offender from 
the police department.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the respondent found out about the offender from 
someone who is not a household member, but this person did not 
see the offender commit the crime.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the offender(s) admitted his/her offense to the 
respondent, another household member, or to someone who is not 
a household member AFTER the incident happened.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the offender(s) threatened to commit this type 
of crime against the respondent or someone else PRIOR to the 
incident. 

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the respondent or someone else found property 
that was stolen during the incident on the offender's property 
or in the offender's possession.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 if the respondent suspects a particular person to be 
the offender because that person had a motive or opportunity to 
commit the crime or because the person had committed similar 
crimes in the past.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 if the respondent's answer really does not fit the 
descriptions in Boxes 1 through 9 and explain how the respondent 
found out information about the offender(s) on the "Specify" 
line.

Item 59 (What Actually Happened)

Item 59 is used to determine what actually happened during the 
incident when only other household members were present, but 
NOT the respondent (Box 3 marked in Item 20b).  Since the 
offender(s) may have taken more than one action during the 
incident, continue asking, "Anything else?", until you get 
a "No" response and mark all boxes that apply.

If you discover that a household member other than the
respondent was personally victimized during the incident,
complete an NCVS-2 for the incident when you interview
the other victimized household member.  You may need to
remind this household member about the incident, if he/she 
does not report it.  If you already interviewed the other 
household member and he/she did not report the incident, 
check back with that person to see if maybe he/she forgot 
to mention it.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender stole something that belongs to
the respondent or another household member.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender:

     Tried to steal something that belongs to the respondent
     or another household member or

     Threatened either verbally or nonverbally to take
     something that belongs to the respondent or another
     household member.  An example of a verbal threat to
     take something is the offender saying: "Give me your
     jacket or I'll rip it off your back." An example of a
     nonverbal threat to take something is an offender 
     lunging towards the household member reaching for her 
     necklace.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the offender bothered a household member verbally 
without threatening the household member. This could include 
yelling, teasing, insulting, arguing, using obscenities, and so 
forth.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the offender forced his/her way into or attempted 
to force his/her way into the respondent's home and physical 
evidence of force is visible on the house/apartment after the 
incident happened. Do not mark Box 4 if there was no force 
involved or if the only force involved was used against a 
household member and not against the house/apartment. In this 
case, you would mark Box 8 "Other" and explain the situation on 
the "Specify" line. 

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the offender forcibly entered or tried to enter 
a car or other motor vehicle owned by the respondent or another 
household member.  However, if no physical force was used to 
enter or to try to enter the vehicle (for example, offender 
opened an unlocked door to enter the vehicle), mark Box 8 "Other" 
and explain the situation on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the offender damaged or destroyed property during 
the incident that belongs to the respondent or another household 
member.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the offender tried or threatened to damage or 
destroy property belonging to the respondent or another
household member while the crime was being committed.

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the respondent's answer does not fit any of the 
descriptions in Boxes 1 through 7 and then explain what actually 
happened during the incident on the "Specify" line.  

Here are some examples of acceptable entries after marking Box 
8 "Other":

        Illegal entry into house/apartment, no force used

        Peeping tom

        Offender opened hood of car

        Obscene gestures.
    
Item 60 (One or More Than One Offender)

Item 60 is used to find out if the crime was committed by one 
offender or by multiple offenders. If you have been told 
already how many offenders were involved in the incident, you 
can verify this information with the respondent, instead of 
asking the question in Item 60.

Mark Box 1 when only one offender was involved in the incident 
and then skip to Item 62 so you can gather information about 
the offender's personal characteristics.

Mark Box 2 when there were two or more offenders involved in 
the incident and then skip to Item 73 so you can gather 
information about the personal characteristics of all the 
offenders.

Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know whether there was 
just one offender or more than one offender involved in the 
incident and then continue with Item 61.

Item 61 (Know Anything About One 
of the Offenders)

Item 61 is used to determine whether the respondent knows
anything about the offender(s).  You will only ask this 
question when the respondent does not know whether there was 
one or more than one offender (Box 3 marked in Item 60).

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," you will continue with Item 62 so 
you can collect whatever information the respondent is able 
to provide about the offender(s).

If you mark Box 2 "No," you will skip to Item 88 on page 11 
of the NCVS-2.

Items 62 through 72(Personal 
Characteristics of One Offender)

Items 62 through 72 are used to collect an offender's personal 
characteristics when only ONE offender is involved in an 
incident.  There is a separate set of questions in Items 73 
through 87 to collect personal characteristics for multiple 
offenders involved in an incident.

Item 62 (Offender's Sex)

Item 62 is used to identify whether the offender is male or
female.  Based on the respondent's perception, mark Box 1
for "Male," Box 2 for "Female," and Box 3 if the respondent 
does not know the offender's sex.

Item 63 (Offender's Age)

Item 63 is used to identify the approximate age of the
offender based on the respondent's perception.  If the
respondent seems unsure, ask the respondent to give you
his/her best estimate.  

Each box identifies a range of years, such as "Under 12" for
Box 1, "12-14" for Box 2, and so forth.  Mark the appropriate 
box based on the respondent's answer.  If the respondent is 
unable to give you even an estimated age for the offender, 
mark Box 7 "Don't know."

Item 64a (Offender Member of a 
Street Gang)

Item 64a is used to determine whether or not the offender is
a member of a street gang based on the respondent's perception.  
Consider a street gang as a group of people who associate 
regularly with one another, generally have a leader or group 
of leaders who issue orders and reap the fruits of the gang's 
activities, and often engage in anti-social or deviant behavior.  

There are currently four major street gangs identified in the
United States:  Crips, Bloods, Folk Nation, and People Nation.  
Some ways to identify gang members are their "colors," clothing, 
tattoos, brands, or imprints of the gang's name, logo, or other 
identifying marks on their bodies.

Mark the appropriate box based on the respondent's answer--
Box 1 for "Yes," Box 2 for "No," or Box 3 for "Don't know."

Item 64b (Offender Drinking or on
Drugs)

Item 64b is used to find out if the offender was drinking
alcoholic beverages or under the influence of drugs during 
the incident. Mark this item based on what the respondent 
believes or knows.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the offender was actively drinking or 
under the influence of drugs or alcohol at the time of the 
incident. After marking Box 1, ask the question in Item 65 
next.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" if the offender was not drinking or under the 
influence of drugs or alcohol and then skip to Item 66.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent could not tell if 
the offender was under the influence of drugs or alcohol and 
then skip to Item 66.
    
Item 65 (Identifying Drinking 
or Drugs)

Item 65 is used to distinguish between whether the offender
was just drinking, just on drugs, under the influence of
BOTH alcohol and drugs, or perhaps the respondent cannot
distinguish between the two.  After completing Item 65,
continue with Item 66.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Drinking" if the respondent thinks or knows that 
the offender was under the influence of only alcohol during 
the incident.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "On drugs" if the respondent thinks or knows that 
the offender was under the influence of only drugs during the 
incident.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Both" if the respondent thinks or knows that the 
offender was under the influence of BOTH drugs and alcohol 
during the incident.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 "Drinking or on drugs" if the respondent thinks
or knows that the offender is under the influence of drugs
or alcohol, but cannot tell which one.

Item 66 (Offender Known or
Stranger)

Item 66 is used to determine whether the respondent either
knew the offender or had seen the offender in the past.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender knew or had seen the offender
at some time prior to the incident.  After marking Box 1,
skip to Item 68.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender is a stranger to the respondent. 
After marking Box 2, continue with Item 67. 

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know for sure whether or 
not the offender is someone he/she knows or a stranger. After 
marking Box 3, continue with Item 67.

Item 67 (Could Respondent
Recognize Offender)

Item 67 is used to find out how certain the respondent is that 
he/she could identify the offender if the respondent saw the 
person again.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when the respondent is fairly sure that he/she would 
recognize the offender if the respondent saw the person again.  
After marking Box 1, skip to Item 69.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when the respondent thinks he/she might recognize 
the offender if the respondent saw the person again, but is 
not really certain.  After marking Box 2, skip to Item 69.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when the respondent knows that he/she could not 
recognize the offender if the respondent saw the person again.  
After marking Box 3, skip to Item 71.

Item 68 (How Well Known)

After a respondent has indicated in Item 66 that he/she knew 
or had seen the offender before the incident, then ask the 
question in Item 68 to find out just how well the respondent 
knew the offender. If the respondent does not answer with 
one of the suggested choices, probe by repeating the options 
again.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent only remembers seeing the
offender previously.  After marking Box 1, continue with
Item 69.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent knew the offender somewhat and 
felt comfortable saying "Hello," but did not necessarily
know his/her name.  After marking Box 2, skip to Item 70.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent feels that he/she knew the
offender very well. Let the respondent make this decision. 
After marking Box 3, skip to Item 70.

Item 69 (How to Find Offender)

Item 69 is used to determine whether the respondent has
any information which may help the police find the
offender.  The respondent's answer should be based on
what he/she knows about the offender, and NOT necessarily 
on what the respondent actually told the police.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No" answer,
and Box 3 for "Other" when you need to record more than
just a "Yes" or "No" answer.  After marking Box 3, make
sure to enter a description of the respondent's answer on
the "Specify" line.  Once you have completed Item 69,
skip to Item 71.

Item 70 (How Victim Knew Offender)

Item 70 is used to identify the relationship between the
respondent and the offender, when the respondent indicates in 
Item 68 that he/she was a casual acquaintance of the offender 
or knew the offender very well(Box 2 or 3 marked in Item 68).  
Always read BOTH questions to ensure that the respondent knows 
we want to identify all types of relationships, not just 
relatives.

Mark only the first box that applies to the respondent's
answer.  Notice that the answer categories are divided into
two groups.  Boxes 1 through 6 cover relatives of the
respondent and Boxes 7 through 17 cover nonrelatives of
the respondent, including Box 13 which is out of sequence.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender was the spouse of the respondent 
(husband/wife) at the time of the incident, regardless of 
whether they are currently married to each other.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender was a former spouse (husband/wife) 
of the respondent at the time of the incident. Accept the 
respondent's answer and do not probe when the respondent says 
"Ex-spouse" or "Former wife/husband."

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the offender is the mother, father, step-
mother, or step-father of the respondent.  Box 3 is not
intended for parents through marriage, which should be
included in Box 6 "Other relative."  After marking Box 6,
indicate the type of other relative on the "Specify" line,
such as "father-in-law" or "mother-in-law."

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the offender is a child of the respondent by
birth, adoption, or marriage, such as a son, daughter, step-
son, or step-daughter.  Box 4 is not intended for foster
children, instead mark Box 13 "Other nonrelative" and write 
in the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the offender is a brother or sister of the
respondent or the child of a respondent's step-parent.   
Box 5 is not intended for "brother-in-laws" or "sister-in-
laws," instead mark Box 6 and write in the relationship on
the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the offender was the respondent's aunt, uncle, 
cousin, grandparent, father-in-law, mother-in-law, sister-
in-law, brother-in-law, or any offender who is related to the 
respondent by blood or marriage and is not described in Boxes 
1 through 5. After marking Box 6,always enter the relationship 
on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the offender is a nonrelative who has or had
romantic connections to the respondent.  For example, the
offender and the respondent were dating at the time of the
incident or used to date prior to the incident. 

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the offender is a male or female friend or
past friend of the respondent AND there is no romantic
connection between the two persons.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 if the offender is a person who is NOT related to 
the respondent, but was living with the respondent at the
time of the incident, such as a boarder or roommate. Box 9 is 
not intended for "live-in" boyfriends/girlfriends; instead, 
mark Box 7 for these situations.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 if the offender attended the same school as the 
respondent at the time of the incident AND is not related to 
the respondent. 

Marking Box 11

Mark Box 11 if the offender lives close enough to the respondent 
to be considered a neighbor AND is not related to the respondent.

Marking Box 12, 14, 15,
16, or 17

Mark the most appropriate box from Boxes 12, 14, 15, 16, or 17 
if the offender is a nonrelative, but is known by the respondent 
as a business client, patient, or a supervisor, employee, or co-
worker, including former supervisors, employees, and co-workers.

Marking Box 13

Mark Box 13 if the respondent's answer does not fit any of
the other nonrelative relationships, but the offender is
either well known or a casual acquaintance.  After marking
Box 13, enter the offender's relationship to the respondent
on the "Specify" line, such as the respondent's barber,
Avon lady, and so forth.

Once you have completed Item 70, continue with Item 71.

Item 71 (Offender's Race)

Item 71 is used to record the race of the offender as perceived 
by the respondent.  Only three racial designations are used for 
Item 71--White, Black, and Other.

Mark Box 1 for "White" and Box 2 for "Black or African
American."  If the respondent mentions a race other than
White or Black/African American, mark Box 3 "Other"
and identify the offender's race on the "Specify" line, such
as American Indian, Alaska Native, Asian, Native Hawaiian, 
and so forth.

If the respondent's answer is "Spanish, Hispanic or Latino"
or any other ethnic origin, such as French or German,
mark Box 1 "White" and do NOT mark Box 3 "Other" and
do NOT enter the ethnic origin on the "Specify" line.  The
terms "Spanish, Hispanic or Latino" refer to a person's
ethnic origin or ancestry, and not to his/her race. 

After completing Item 71, continue with Item 72.

Item 72 (Other Crimes by
Offender)

Item 72 is used to determine whether the offender has ever
committed any type of crime or threatened to physically
harm the respondent or another household member, other
than the current incident.  For this question, do not limit
the respondent to crimes committed only during his/her  
6-month reference period.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes (only time)" if the respondent tells you that 
the current incident is the only crime this offender has
committed against his/her household.  Make sure that the
respondent understands we are interested in crimes committed 
by this offender at ANY time prior to this incident.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No (there were other times)" if the respondent 
says that this offender did commit other crimes against the 
respondent or other household members at ANY time prior to 
this incident.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not really know whether or 
not the offender has committed other crimes against the 
household in the past.

Once you have completed Item 72, skip to Item 88 on page 11.

Item 73(Number of Offenders)

Item 73 is used to identify the total number of offenders
involved in the current incident, when the respondent has
indicated in Item 60 that there was more than one offender. 
If the respondent is uncertain about the number, ask for an 
estimate of the number of offenders.

Enter the total number of offenders on the "Number of
offenders" line. Only mark Box x "Don't know" if the
respondent is unable to provide even an estimate of the
number of offenders. After completing Item 73, continue
with Item 74.

Item 74 (Sex of Offenders)

Item 74 is used to determine the sex of the offenders. If
the respondent only knows the sex of some of the offenders, 
but not all of them, the answer should be based on the 
offenders for which he/she can identify the sex. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when the respondent says that all of the offenders 
were male and then skip to Item 76.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when the respondent says that all of the offenders 
were female and then skip to Item 76.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when the respondent does not know the sex of any of 
the offenders and then skip to Item 76.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when the respondent says that some of the offenders 
were male and some were female, and then ask the question in 
Item 75.

Item 75 (Sex of Offenders)

When there were three or more offenders involved in the incident 
(as indicated in Item 73) and they were both male and female 
(as indicated in Item 74), ask the question in Item 75 to 
determine the sex of MOST of the offenders. If the respondent 
only knows the sex of some of the offenders, but not all of them, 
the answer should be based on the offenders for which he/she can 
identify the sex.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when most of the offenders were male.

Marking Box 2
Mark Box 2 when most of the offenders were female.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the total number of offenders were equally male 
and female.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent does not know how many offenders 
were male and how many were female.

After completing Item 75, continue with Item 76.

Item 76 (Age of Offenders)

Item 76 is used to identify the age range into which the
youngest offender's age fits.  Mark the appropriate box
based on the respondent's answer.  Mark Box 7 if the
respondent does not know or cannot estimate the age of
the youngest offender.  After completing Item 76, continue
with Item 77.

Item 77 (Age of Offenders)

Item 77 is used to identify the age range into which the
oldest offender's age fits.  Mark the appropriate box based
on the respondent's answer.  When the respondent is not
sure of the age, ask for an estimate.  Mark Box 7 if the
respondent does not know or cannot estimate the age of
the oldest offender.  After completing Item 77, continue
with Item 78a.

Item 78a (Members of a Street 
Gang)

Item 78a is used to determine whether any of the offenders
were members of a street gang based on the respondent's
perception.  Consider a street gang as a group of people
who associate regularly with one another, generally have a
leader or group of leaders who issue orders and reap the
fruits of the gang's activities, and often engage in anti-
social or deviant behavior.  

There are currently four major street gangs identified in
the United States:  Crips, Bloods, Folk Nation, and People
Nation.  Some ways to identify gang members are their
"colors," clothing, tattoos, brands, or imprints of the gang's
name, logo, or other identifying marks on their bodies.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent believes that some or all of
the offenders were members of a street gang.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent believes that none of the offenders 
were members of a street gang.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know if any of the 
offenders were members of a street gang.

After completing Item 78a, continue with Item 78b.

Item 78b (Offenders Drinking 
or on Drugs)

Item 78b is used to determine whether the respondent believes 
that one or more of the offenders was drinking or on drugs 
during the incident.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent believes that at least one of the 
offenders was under the influence of alcohol or drugs during 
the incident. After marking Box 1, continue with Item 79.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent believes that none of the offenders 
were under the influence of alcohol or drugs during the incident.  
After marking Box 2, skip to Item 80.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know whether any of the 
offenders were under the influence of alcohol or drugs during 
the incident.  After marking Box 3, skip to Item 80.

Item 79 (Identifying Drinking 
or on Drugs)

After a respondent indicates that at least one of the offenders 
was under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs, ask the question 
in Item 79 to find out whether it was alcohol, drugs, or both.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent believes that at least one of the 
offenders was under the influence of only alcohol during the 
incident.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent believes that at least one of 
the offenders was under the influence of only drugs during 
the incident. 

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent believes that at least one of the 
offenders was under the influence of BOTH alcohol and drugs.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent believes that at least one of the 
offenders was under the influence of alcohol or drugs, but the 
respondent cannot tell whether it was alcohol, drugs or both.

Item 80 (Offenders Known
or Strangers)

Item 80 is used to determine whether the respondent has known 
or ever seen ANY of the offenders prior to this incident.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent either knows or has seen ALL of 
the offenders prior to this incident. After marking Box 1, 
skip to Item 82.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent knows or has seen AT LEAST ONE, 
but not all, of the offenders prior to this incident. After 
marking Box 2, skip to Item 82.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent has never seen any of the 
offenders prior to this incident. After marking Box 3, 
continue with Item 81.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent does not know whether he/she 
has ever seen any of the offenders prior to this incident.  
After marking Box 4, continue with Item 81.

Item 81 (Could Respondent Recognize 
Offenders)

Item 81 is used to find out if the respondent would recognize 
any of the offenders if he/she saw them again. You will only 
ask this question after marking Box 3 "All strangers" or Box 
4 "Don't know" in Item 80.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when the respondent is fairly sure that 
he/she could identify AT LEAST ONE of the offenders in the 
future. After marking Box 1, skip to Item 83.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "Not sure (possibly or probably)" when the respondent 
may be able to identify AT LEAST ONE of the offenders, but is 
not completely sure.  After marking Box 2, skip to Item 83.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "No" when the respondent feels that he/she probably 
could not recognize any of the offenders again. After marking 
Box 3, skip to Item 85. 

Item 82 (How Well Known)

When Box 1 "All known" or Box 2 "Some known" is marked in Item 
80, you will ask the question in Item 82 to determine how well 
the respondent knew the offender(s)prior to the incident. If 
you mark Box 1 in Item 80, then Item 82 refers to all of the 
offenders.  If you mark Box 2 in Item 80, then Item 82 refers 
only to the offenders the respondent knew prior to the 
incident.  

Mark all boxes that apply, since the respondent could be
answering for one or more offenders.  For example, the
respondent may consider one offender as a casual acquaintance 
(Box 2) and another offender as someone he/she knows well
(Box 3). Notice that the answer categories are the same as 
those for Item 68, which asks about one offender. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent only remembers seeing the offender 
previously.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent knew the offender somewhat and felt 
comfortable saying "Hello," but did not necessarily know his/her 
name.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent feels that he/she knew the offender 
very well. Let the respondent make this decision.

Check Item H (Casual Acquaintance 
or Well Known)

Use Check Item H to help you decide whether to:

        Ask the question in Item 83 or

        Skip to Item 84.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item H if you marked Box 2 "Casual 
acquaintance" or Box 3 "Well known" in Item 82. After marking 
the "Yes" box, skip to Item 84.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item H if you only marked Box 1 
"Sight only" in Item 82.  After marking the "No" box, continue 
with Item 83.

Item 83 (How to Find Offender)

Item 83 is used to find out if the respondent had any information 
at the time of the incident that could have helped the police 
locate any of the offenders.  The respondent's answer should be 
based on what he/she knows about the offender, and NOT necessarily 
on what the respondent actually told the police.

Mark only ONE box to record the respondent's answer. Mark Box 1 
for a "Yes" answer and Box 2 for a "No" answer.  If the 
respondent's answer requires more than a "Yes" or "No" answer, 
mark Box 3 for "Other" and enter the respondent's answer on the 
"Specify" line. Once you are done completing Item 83, skip to 
Item 85.

Item 84 (How Victim Knew 
Offender)

Item 84 is used to identify the relationship between the
respondent and the offender(s).  Make sure to ask BOTH
questions in Item 84 so that the respondent understands we
want to identify all types of relationships, not just
relatives.  Since a respondent could answer for more than
one offender, mark all boxes that apply.

Notice that the answer categories are divided into two
groups:  Boxes 1 through 6 cover relatives of the
respondent and Boxes 7 through 17 cover nonrelatives of
the respondent, including Box 13 which is out of
sequence.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender was the spouse of the respondent 
(husband/wife) at the time of the incident, regardless of 
whether they are currently married to each other.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender was a former spouse (husband/wife) 
of the respondent at the time of the incident. Accept the 
respondent's answer and do not probe when the respondent says 
"Ex-spouse" or "Former wife/husband."

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the offender is the mother, father, step-
mother, or step-father of the respondent.  Box 3 is not
intended for parents through marriage, which should be
included in Box 6 "Other relative." After marking Box 6,
indicate the type of other relative on the "Specify" line,
such as "father-in-law" or "mother-in-law."

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the offender is a child of the respondent by 
birth, adoption, or marriage, such as a son, daughter, step-
son, or step-daughter.  Box 4 is not intended for foster 
children, instead mark Box 13 "Other nonrelative" and write 
in the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the offender is a brother or sister of the respondent 
or the child of a respondent's step-parent. Box 5 is not intended 
for "brother-in-laws" or "sister-in-laws," instead mark Box 6 and 
write in the relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the offender was the respondent's aunt, uncle, 
cousin, grandparent, father-in-law, mother-in-law, sister-in-
law, brother-in-law, or any offender who is related to the 
respondent by blood or marriage and is not described in Boxes 
1 through 5. After marking Box 6, always enter the relationship 
on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the offender is a nonrelative who has or had
romantic connections to the respondent.  For example, the
offender and the respondent were dating at the time of the
incident or used to date prior to the incident. 

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the offender is a current or past friend of the
respondent (male or female) AND the offender has never had a 
romantic connection to the respondent.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 if the offender is a person who is NOT related
to the respondent, but was living with the respondent at the
time of the incident, such as a boarder or roommate. Box 9 
is not intended for "live-in" boyfriends/girlfriends; instead, 
mark Box 7 for these situations.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 if the offender attended the same school as the 
respondent at the time of the incident AND is not related to 
the respondent. 

Marking Box 11

Mark Box 11 if the offender lives close enough to the respondent 
to be considered a neighbor AND is not related to the respondent.

Marking Box 12, 14, 15,
16, or 17

Mark the most appropriate box(es) from Boxes 12, 14, 15,16, 
or 17 if the offenders are nonrelatives, but are known by the 
respondent as business clients, patients, or supervisors, 
employees, or co-workers, including former supervisors, 
employees, or co-workers.

Marking Box 13

Mark Box 13 if the respondent's answer does not fit any of
the other nonrelative relationships, but the offenders are
either known or casual acquaintances.  After marking  
Box 13, enter the offenders' relationships to the respondent 
on the "Specify" line, such as the respondent's barber, Avon 
lady, and so forth.

Once you have completed Item 84, continue with Item 85.

Item 85 (Race of Offenders)

Item 85 is used to identify the racial makeup of a group of
offenders.  Since you are asking about more than one offender, 
continue asking, "Any other race?" until you get a "No" 
response and mark all applicable boxes.  Only three racial 
designations are used for Item 85--White, Black, and Other.

Mark Box 1 for "White" and Box 2 for "Black or African
American." If the respondent mentions a race other than
White or Black/African American, mark Box 3 "Other"
and identify the offender(s)'s race on the "Specify" line,
such as American Indian, Alaska Native, Asian, Native
Hawaiian, and so forth

If the respondent's answer is "Spanish, Hispanic or Latino,
or any other ethnic origin, such as French or German, mark 
Box 1 "White" and do NOT mark Box 3 "Other" and do NOT enter 
the ethnic origin on the "Specify" line. The terms "Spanish, 
Hispanic or Latino" refer to a person's ethnic origin or 
ancestry, and not to his/her race.

Mark Box 4 when the respondent does not know the race of one 
or more of the offenders.

It is possible that you could mark all four boxes for an
incident.  For example, perhaps there were five offenders
and one was White (Box 1), another was Black or African
American (Box 2), a third was Asian (Box 3), and, for the
last two offenders, the respondent is unable to identify
their race (Box 4).

After completing Item 85, continue with Item 86.

Item 86 (Race of Offenders)

Item 86 is used to identify the predominant race for most
of the offenders. If you marked only ONE box in Item 85,
leave Item 86 blank and skip to Item 87.  However, if the
offenders consist of two or more different races, mark the
appropriate box for Item 86.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when the majority of the offenders were White. For 
example, if there were six offenders and four of the offenders 
were White, you would mark Box 1.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when the majority of the offenders were Black or 
African American.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when most of the offenders were a race other than 
White or Black/African American, such as Asian, American 
Indian, Native Hawaiian, and so forth. 

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when the offenders are equally split among two or 
more races.  For example, if there were a total of three 
offenders and one was Black/African American, one was 
American Indian, and one was White.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the respondent really cannot identify the
race for most of the offenders.

After completing Item 86, continue with Item 87.

Item 87 (Other Crimes by Any of 
the Offenders)

Item 87 is used to determine whether at any time prior to this 
incident ANY of the offenders committed a crime against or made 
a threat to physically harm the respondent or another household 
member. With the exception of the current incident, include any 
type of crime or threat which occurred either before or during 
the reference period.

Topic 6.  Completing Items 88 Through 114 (Theft/Items Stolen/
Value of Stolen Property/Repair or Replacement of Stolen
Property/Cost of Repair or Replacement)

Item 88 (Theft)

Item 88 is used to determine whether the offender(s) stole
or took anything without permission, regardless of its
value, that was owned by the respondent or another
household member.  This could include the personal
property of one household member or property that
belongs to the entire household.  It could also include
property stolen during the 6-month reference period from a
former residence, IF the property was stolen from someone 
who is a household member at the time of the interview.

If the respondent or other household members own an
unrecognizable business and items were stolen from that
business, those items need to be included when answering
this question.  However, do NOT include items stolen or
taken without permission from a  recognizable business,
unless they are personal items belonging to the respondent
or other household members.

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 5, for more information 
about recognizable and unrecognizable businesses.)

You can verify the answer to this question without asking
the question if the respondent has indicated the answer
earlier in the interview.  Otherwise, ask the question in
Item 88 exactly as it is worded.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when:

     Items were taken that belonged to any household
     member, regardless of age, during a burglary or
     household theft.

     During any other crime of theft, items were taken
     that belonged to a household member who is         
     12 years of age or older.

     Items were taken that belong to an unrecognizable
     business owned by the respondent or another
     household member.

     Items that belong to a household member were stolen
     while in the possession of a friend, neighbor, co-
     worker, and so forth, who had borrowed them from
     the household member.  However, if the borrowed
     items were just never returned to the household
     member, mark Box 2 "No."

After marking Box 1, skip to Item 96.

Marking Box 2 

Mark Box 2 "No" when:

     The items taken belong to a recognizable business
     owned by the respondent or another household
     member, regardless of whether or not the business is
     located at the sample address.  However, mark Box 1
     "Yes" when the items stolen from a recognizable
     business are personal ones belonging to the
     respondent or other household members, such as a
     purse, watch, and so forth.

     The items taken belong to the owner of the sample
     address, who is renting the home to the respondent.
     Even though the items were stolen from the sample 
     address, these items do not belong to the sample
     household. 

     The items taken belong to a nonhousehold member,
     regardless of whether or not the person was at the
     sample address.

     The items taken really belong to a nonhousehold
     member because he/she lent the stolen items to a
     household member.  This is true even if the
     household member compensated the nonhousehold
     member for the borrowed item(s).

     Items loaned to a friend, neighbor, co-worker, and so
     forth, and never returned.  Do not consider these
     items as stolen.

     Items taken belong to a household member who is
     younger than 12 years of age for any crime that did
     NOT happen in the sample unit or on the property
     belonging to the sample unit.

After marking Box 2 "No," continue with Item 89.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent does not know whether any items 
were stolen or taken without permission that belong to him/her 
or another household member. After marking Box 3 "Don't know," 
continue with Item 89.

Item 89 (Attempted Theft)

Item 89 is used to determine whether the offender(s) tried
to take something that belonged to the respondent or another 
household member.  You will only ask this question when Box 
2 or 3 is marked in Item 88.

Read the instructions for Item 88 if you need assistance in
determining whether or not to include stolen item(s) for
this question.  You can verify the answer to this question
without asking the question if the respondent has indicated

the answer earlier in the interview. Otherwise, ask the
question in Item 89 exactly as it is worded.

After marking Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, continue with
Item 90.  However, if you mark Box 2 for "No" or Box 3
for "Don't know," then you will skip to Item 110 on    
page 14.
    
Item 90 (What Offender(s)
Tried to Take)

Item 90 is used to identify the type of item(s) that the
respondent thinks the offender(s) attempted to steal or take
without permission.  After asking the initial question in
Item 90, continue asking, "Anything else?", until you get a
"No" response and then mark all appropriate boxes.  Some of 
the answer categories are self-explanatory, but the
following categories require additional clarification.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Cash" if the respondent thinks that the offender(s) 
tried to take paper money and/or coins, such as $10, $20, or 
$50 dollar bills and/or nickels, dimes, or quarters.  Do not 
mark Box 1 for checks or credit cards, instead mark Box 4. Also, 
do not mark Box 1 for coin collections, instead mark Box 13.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 "Credit cards, checks, bank cards" if the respondent 
thinks that the offender(s) tried to take items that are of 
little or no value unless someone tries to use them fraudulently.  
For example, someone tried to steal the respondent's gasoline 
credit card to fraudulently purchase gasoline for his/her vehicle.  
Also mark Box 4 if the offender(s) tried to take Savings Bonds, 
bank books, money orders, debit cards, traveler's checks, and 
phone cards.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 "Other motor vehicle" if the offender(s) tried
to take without permission any type of truck, van, sport
utility vehicle (SUV), motorcycle, or moped that belonged
to the respondent, another household member, or an unrecognizable 
business owned or operated by a household member.  If the 
"Other motor vehicle" was owned or operated by a recognizable 
business, only mark Box 6 IF the "Other motor vehicle" was 
also intended for personal use by a household member.

Do NOT mark Box 6 for the attempted theft of boats, jet
skis, airplanes, minibikes, or snowmobiles, instead mark
Box 16 and identify the item(s) on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 "Part of motor vehicle" if the offender(s) tried
to take without permission anything that is ATTACHED to a car, 
truck, or other motor vehicle owned by the respondent or 
another household member.  For example, include tires, hubcaps 
or wheels, CD players, scanners, CB radios, car telephones, 
antenna, license plates, motor parts, mirrors, steering wheel, 
door handles, and so forth.

Do NOT mark Box 7 if the items were stored in the glove
compartment, left on a seat, or kept in the trunk of a car or
the bed of a truck, since we do not consider these items as
attached to the motor vehicle. 

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 "Bicycle or parts" if the offender(s) tried to
take without permission NONMOTORIZED bicycles or bicycle 
parts owned by the respondent or another household member.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 "TV, stereo, or other household appliances" if the 
offender(s) tried to take without permission items intended for 
the use of all or most of the household members, such as a gas 
grill, kitchen stove, freezer, VCR, CD player, personal computer, 
and so forth.

Marking Box 11

Mark Box 11 "Silver, china, art objects" if the offender(s)
tried to take without permission any type of silver, china,
or art object, regardless of its value.

Marking Box 12

Mark Box 12 "Other household furnishings" if the offender(s) 
tried to take without permission household furnishings, such 
as furniture, rugs, lamps, mirrors, and so forth, that are 
intended for use by all or most of the household members.  
Consider items such as a daughter's bedroom furniture to be 
household furnishings, even though the furniture is used 
primarily by one household member.

Marking Box 13

Mark Box 13 "Personal effects" if the offender(s) tried to
take without permission items that are intended for the
sole use of one household member, rather than by all or
most household members and are considered easily movable or 
portable.  For example, a household member's watch, jewelry, 
cellular telephone, clothing, camera, luggage, briefcase, 
sports or recreation equipment, toys, makeup, hair dryers, 
keys, personal collections(Hummels, coins, bears, dolls, 
stamps, and so forth).  Since the value of "Personal effects" 
is not needed, do not probe to determine their dollar value.

Marking Box 14

Mark Box 14 "Handgun" if the offender(s) tried to take
without permission any type of hand-held gun that is
intended to shoot bullets, regardless of its condition or
usage.  For example, the handgun could be a mint condition 
collector's item from World War II that is never shot by its 
owner or a new handgun kept by the respondent for protection.

Do NOT mark Box 14 for guns that shoot pellets, BB's, air, 
flares, or tear gas.  Instead, mark Box 16 "Other" and
identify the type of gun on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 15

Mark Box 15 "Other firearm" if the offender(s) tried to take 
without permission any type of rifles or shotguns that shoot 
bullets or shot, regardless of whether the rifle or shotgun 
works or is used by the respondent.  Do not mark Box 15 for 
handguns, instead mark Box 14.

Also, do NOT mark Box 15 for guns that shoot pellets, BB's, 
air, flares, or tear gas.  Instead, mark Box 16 "Other"
and identify the type of gun on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 16

Mark Box 16 "Other" AND describe the item(s) on the "Specify" 
line if the offender(s) tried to take any of the following types 
of items without permission:  food, drugs, food stamps, animals, 
plants, guns that fire BB's or pellets, flares, tear gas, and 
other items that do not fit the descriptions for Boxes 1 through 
15. Also mark Box 16 for boats, airplanes, minibikes, snowmobiles, 
and so forth.

Marking Box 17

Mark Box 17 "Don't know" if the respondent does not know or 
is unsure about what the offender(s) tried to take without 
permission.

Item 91 (Who Owned the Property)

Item 91 is used to identify the owner(s) of the property/
money that the offender(s) attempted to steal during the
incident.  Mark only ONE box for Item 91.  Also, when
we refer to "household member(s)" in Box 2 and 3, we mean 
household members at the time of the interview, NOT just at 
the time of the incident.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender(s) attempted to steal property/money 
that belongs SOLELY to the respondent. After marking Box 1, 
skip to Item 92.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender(s) attempted to steal property/money 
that belongs to the respondent and other household member(s) 
either jointly (For example, a car that is jointly owned by the 
reference person and his/her spouse.) or partially (For example, 
a collection of music CDs of which 20 belong to the respondent 
and the remaining 30 belong to the respondent's son.)  

After marking Box 2, fill Check Item J to identify by line number 
each household member who owned some of the property/money that 
the offender tried to steal.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the offender(s) attempted to steal property/money 
that belongs ONLY to other household member(s) and NONE of the 
property/money belongs to the respondent.  After marking Box 3, 
fill Check Item J to identify by line number each household 
member who owns any portion of the property/money that the 
offender tried to steal.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the offender(s) attempted to steal property/
money that belongs ONLY to person(s) who are NOT household 
members at the time of the interview.  After marking Box 4, 
you will skip to Item 92.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the offender(s) attempted to steal property/
money that belongs to two or more persons NOT described in 
Boxes 1 through 4.  For example, the property/money belongs 
jointly to another household member and a nonhousehold member.  
Using the "Specify" line, make sure to indicate who owns the
property/money (for example, LN 3 and a nonhousehold member).  
Continue to complete the entire incident report, regardless 
of what you enter on the "Specify" line for Box 5.  After 
marking Box 5 and identifying the owners on the "Specify" 
line, skip to Item 92.

Check Item J (Identifying Property 
Owners for Attempted Theft)

Check Item J is for your use to identify by line number(for 
example, 01, 02, and so forth) each household member who 
owns any portion of the property/money that the offender(s) 
attempted to steal.  Do NOT enter the respondent's line 
number.  

Always ask the respondent to identify the household members 
if you are not sure which line numbers to enter in Check 
Item J.

Mark Box 40 "Household property" if the property/money
belongs to the entire household jointly or if more than
three household members own the property/money jointly
with the respondent.  It is acceptable to mark Box 40 and
also have one or more line numbers entered in Check  
Item J, since the offender(s) may have tried to take both
personal and household property.

Item 92 (Articles In or Attached to 
a Motor Vehicle)

Item 92 is used to identify whether the offender(s) tried to
steal property/money that was either:

          Inside a motor vehicle or 

          Attached to a motor vehicle.

For Item 92, you can verify the answer without asking the
question if:

       You marked Box 5 and/or 6 in Item 90 or

       The respondent previously indicated where the
       articles were when the offender(s) tried to steal 
       them.

Otherwise, ask the question correctly based on whether there was 
only one item or two or more items that the offender(s) tried to 
steal.  Mark Box 1 "Yes" if ANY of the articles were in or attached 
to a motor vehicle. Only mark Box 2 "No" if NONE of the articles 
were in or attached to a motor vehicle.  After completing Item 92, 
fill Check Item K.

Check Item K (Cash, Purse, or 
Wallet)

Check Item K is used to help you decide whether to continue with 
Item 93 or skip to Item 94.  Refer to your entries in Item 90.  
If Box 1, 2, or 3 is marked in Item 90, mark the "Yes" box in 
Check Item K and ask the question in Item 93 to determine whether 
the offender(s) attempted to take the cash, purse, or wallet 
directly from the respondent.  If Boxes 1, 2, and 3 in Item 90 
are all blank, skip to Item 94.

Item 93 (Cash, Purse, or Wallet on 
Person)

Item 93 is used to determine whether the offender(s) tried to 
steal cash, a purse, or a wallet directly from the respondent's 
hands, shoulder, pocket, backpack, and so forth.  For the NCVS, 
it makes a difference whether the offender(s) attempted to steal 
cash, a purse, or wallet directly from the respondent, rather 
than from a counter, car seat, floor of a subway car, or other 
places where the respondent may have left cash, a purse, or a 
wallet.

If the answer is obvious from the information already provided 
by the respondent, verify the answer without asking the question.  
Otherwise, ask the question using the appropriate words to 
identify just the items that the offender attempted to steal.  
For example, replace "cash/purse/wallet" with "wallet" when the 
offender only tried to steal the respondent's wallet.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and Box 2 for a "No" answer and 
then continue with Item 94.

Item 94 (Other Property
on Person)

Item 94 is used to determine whether the offender(s) tried
to take anything OTHER THAN cash, a purse, or a wallet
directly from the respondent or another current household
member.  Exclude attempted thefts of items belonging to
nonhousehold members.

It is acceptable to verify the answer for Item 94 without
asking the question.  However, if you ask the question,
omit the word "else" when you have marked Box 2 "No"
in Item 93 or left Item 93 blank.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then ask the question
in Item 95.  Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and then skip
to Item 110 on page 14.

Item 95 (Items Tried to Take From 
Person)

Item 95 is used to identify the property marked in Item 90,
other than cash/purse/wallet, that the offender(s) tried to
take directly from the respondent or another household
member.  Enter the appropriate box numbers from Item 90
to identify the items using 2 digits (for example, 07, 13,
and so forth).

Enter the 2-digit box numbers starting on the left and
working to the right, entering the lowest number to the
highest number.  Make sure that you do not enter box
numbers 01, 02, or 03.  If you need to enter more than
three box numbers in Item 95, just enter the first three
lowest box numbers.  However, if everything that the
offender(s) tried to take was on the respondent or another
household member, mark Box 40 "Tried to take everything marked 
in 90 directly from respondent" and leave the code boxes blank.

Item 96 (What Was Taken)

Item 96 is used to identify the types of property/money
that the offender(s) took without permission.  Continue
asking, "Anything else?", until you get a "No" response
and mark all appropriate boxes.  If the respondent
mentions what items were stolen as he/she answers the
question for Item 88, verify those items before marking
the boxes in Item 96 and then continue asking, "Anything
else?", until you get a "No" response.  Then mark all
appropriate boxes.

Item 96 has several more answer categories than Item 90. 
These categories are grouped together under seven separate 
headings:  

        Cash

        Property

        Vehicle or Parts
     
        Household Furnishings

        Personal Effects

        Firearms

        Miscellaneous

Those categories which are NOT self-explanatory are covered 
below. 

Long-Term Rentals

If the respondent mentions that the stolen property was
leased or rented by the respondent or another household
member for one month or longer, consider the household
member(s) as the owner(s) of the stolen property for this
item. If necessary, ask the respondent how long the stolen
property has been leased or rented.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Only cash taken" when the offender(s)ONLY stole 
money (bills or coins).  After marking  Box 1, ask the 
respondent for the total amount of money stolen and enter 
the whole dollar amount on the line above Box 1.  Round up 
or down as necessary.  For example, if the amount given is 
$150.50, round up to $151 and, if the amount given is $150.49, 
round down to $150.  If the respondent gives an amount that 
is less than $1, round up to $1.  When the respondent is 
unable to give an exact dollar amount, ask for his/her best 
estimate.  

If the respondent mentions that a credit card, bank card,
checks, or a coin collection were stolen, do NOT mark
Box 1.  Instead, mark Box 4 for credit cards, bank cards,
and checks and mark Box 17 for coin collections.

Marking Box 2 and Box 3

Mark Box 2 when the offender(s) stole a purse from the
respondent or another household member and mark Box 3
when the offender(s) stole a wallet from the respondent 
or another household member.  After marking Box 2 and/or
Box 3, ALWAYS ask if the purse and/or wallet contained
any money when it was stolen.  If you get a "Yes" answer,
find out how much money and enter the whole dollar amount 
on the line above Box 1.  Round up or down as necessary 
(as instructed in "Marking Box 1").

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when the offender(s) stole a credit card, bank
card, checks, and so forth, which are of little value unless
used fraudulently to obtain money and/or property. Also
mark Box 4 for stolen Savings Bonds, bank books, money
orders, travelers checks, and phone cards.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 when the offender(s) stole a truck, van, sports
utility vehicle (SUV), motorcycle, moped, motorized bicycle, 
or any motor vehicle OTHER THAN a car.  Do not mark Box 6 
for boats, airplanes, minibikes, jet skis, or snowmobiles, 
instead mark Box 26 "Other" and identify the property on the 
"Specify" line. 

Do not mark Box 6 if the motor vehicle is owned by a
recognizable business and is never used for a household
member's personal use.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 when the offender(s) stole anything that is
ATTACHED to a car, truck, van, SUV, and so forth.  For
example, tires, hubcaps or wheels, CD players, scanners,
CB radios, car telephones, antenna, license plates, motor
parts, mirrors, steering wheel, door handles, and so forth.

Do NOT mark Box 7 if the items were stored in the glove
compartment, left on a seat, or kept in the trunk of a car or
the bed of a truck, since we do not consider these items as
attached to the motor vehicle.

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 when the offender(s) stole motor vehicle accessories 
or equipment that was NOT ATTACHED to the motor vehicle, such 
as a spare tire, a detachable antenna on the back seat, a 
removable CD player or changer in the trunk, and so forth.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 when the offender(s) stole any type of bicycle or 
bicycle parts that do not have a motor. Include motorized 
bicycles in Box 6.

Marking Box 11

Mark Box 11 when the offender(s) stole any type of electrical or 
gas appliances, such as kitchen stoves, freezers, dishwashers, 
CD players, VCRs, computers, FAX machines, and so forth.

Marking Box 12

Mark Box 12 when the offender(s) stole any type of silver,
china, or art object, regardless of its value.

Marking Box 13

Mark Box 13 when the offender(s) stole any type of household 
furnishings that are intended for the use of all or most of 
the household members, even if the furnishings belong to one 
or more household members.  For example, bedroom furniture, 
rugs, patio furniture, and so forth.

If you are unsure whether the stolen items are household
furnishings or personal effects, decide based on whether
the stolen items are considered portable or movable.  If
the stolen item is not easily movable or portable, consider
it a household furnishing.  Otherwise, mark the appropriate 
"Personal Effects" box (Boxes 14 through 19)to identify a 
stolen item that is intended for the use of a specific
household member, rather than all or most household members.

Marking Box 14

Mark Box 14 when the offender(s) stole any type of portable 
electronic or photographic gear intended for the use of a 
specific household member, such as Walkman radios, handheld 
computer games, video or audio cassettes, calculators, 
cameras, and so forth.

Marking Box 15

Mark Box 15 when the offender(s) stole the following types 
of personal items that belong to a specific household member: 
hats, gloves, coats, shoes, jackets, briefcases, luggage, 
and so forth.

Marking Box 16

Mark Box 16 when the offender(s) stole any of the following 
types of personal items, regardless of their value:  rings, 
necklaces, bracelets, money clips, cuff links, tie tacks, 
watches, and so forth.

Marking Box 17

Mark Box 17 when the offender(s) stole any type of personal 
collection, regardless of its value, such as coins, ceramic 
bears, dolls, stamps, books, baseball cards, and so forth.

Marking Box 18

Mark Box 18 when the offender(s) stole any type of toy, sports 
or recreation equipment that belongs to a specific household 
member and is not covered in Boxes 14 through 17.  Examples of 
such items are bowling balls, tennis rackets, BB guns, baby 
dolls, and so forth.

Marking Box 19

Mark Box 19 when the offender(s) stole any personal objects 
that are easily movable, but do not fit the descriptions in 
Boxes 14 through 18.  For example, these objects could include 
house or car keys, makeup, hair dryer, curling iron, flare 
guns, books, and so forth.

Marking Box 20

Mark Box 20 when the offender(s) stole any type of hand-
held guns (for example, pistols, revolvers, and so forth),
regardless of their condition or intended use (for example,
hunting, display, target practice, and so forth). Box 20 is
not intended for pellet guns, BB guns, air pistols, flare
guns, or tear gas guns.  Instead, mark Box 18 for pellet
guns, BB guns, and air pistols and mark Box 19 for flare
and tear gas guns.

Marking Box 21

Mark Box 21 when the offender(s) stole any type of firearm 
OTHER THAN a handgun, regardless of its condition or intended 
use.  For example, you should mark Box 21 for stolen machine 
guns, rifles, shotguns, and so forth.  

Box 21 is NOT intended for pellet guns, BB guns, air pistols, 
flare guns, or tear gas guns.  Instead, mark Box 18 for pellet 
guns, BB guns, and air pistols and mark Box 19 for flare guns 
and tear gas guns.

Marking Box 22

Mark Box 22 when the offender(s) stole power or hand tools, 
yard equipment (for example, lawn mowers, leaf blowers, and 
so forth) and any type of office equipment stolen from an 
unrecognizable business (for example, file cabinets, personal 
computers, printers, FAX machines, scanners, and so forth).  
However, if the stolen office equipment is electronic(for 
example, computers, printers, FAX machines, scanners, and so 
forth) AND is used primarily for the personal use of a 
household member, mark Box 14.

Marking Box 23

Mark Box 23 when the offender(s) stole any produce, fruit, 
firewood, straw, hay, or plants (flower or vegetable)
intended for sale and NOT for the personal use or consumption 
of the household members.  Mark Box 25 for any farm or garden 
produce intended for the household's personal consumption.

Marking Box 24

Mark Box 24 when the offender(s) stole any type of animals 
owned by the respondent or another household member, regardless 
of whether or not the animal was a pet. This category includes 
cats, dogs, parakeets, hamsters, pigs, cows, horses, and so 
forth.

Marking Box 25

Mark Box 25 when the offender(s) stole any type of edible
food, nonalcoholic beverage, or liquor, unless the stolen
food is produce or fruit intended for sale.  If stolen
produce or fruit was intended for sale by the household,
mark Box 23.

Marking Box 26

Mark Box 26 when the offender(s) stole any items that do not 
fit the descriptions for any of the previous categories. After 
marking Box 26, make sure to identify the item on the "Specify" 
line.  Examples of entries could include: cases of soda 
belonging to an unrecognizable business or an airplane owned 
by the respondent and intended for personal use only.

Marking Box 27

Mark Box 27 when the respondent does not know or is unsure 
what the offender(s) took without permission. It is 
acceptable to mark this box for some stolen items and still
mark other boxes in Item 96 for items the respondent knows 
or feels sure were stolen during the incident.

After completing Item 96, continue with Item 97 on page 13.

Item 97 (Who Owned Property)

Item 97 is used to identify the owner(s) of the property/
money that the offender(s) stole during the incident.  Mark
only ONE box.  Also, when we refer to "household member(s)" 
in Box 2 and 3, we mean household members at the time of the 
interview, NOT just at the time of the incident.  Keep in 
mind that the property owner could be a current household 
member whose property was stolen from a former residence 
during the 6-month reference period.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender(s) stole property/money that
belongs SOLELY to the respondent.  After marking Box
1, skip to Check Item M.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender(s) stole property/money that
belongs to the respondent and other household member(s)
either jointly (For example, a video camera that is jointly
owned by the reference person and his/her spouse.) or
partially (For example, a collection of music CDs of which
20 belong to the respondent and the remaining 30 belong
to the respondent's son.)  

After marking Box 2, fill Check Item L to identify by line
number each household member who owned any part of the 
property/money that the offender took without permission.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the offender(s) stole property/money that
belongs ONLY to other household member(s) and NONE of the 
property/money belongs to the respondent.  After marking 
Box 3, fill Check Item L to identify by line number each 
household member who owns any portion of the property/money 
that the offender stole.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the offender(s) stole property/money that 
belongs ONLY to person(s) who are NOT household members at 
the time of the interview. After marking Box 4, skip to 
Check Item M.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the offender(s) stole property/money that
belongs to two or more persons NOT described in Boxes 1
through 4.  For example, the property/money belongs
jointly to another household member and a nonhousehold
member.  Using the "Specify" line, make sure to indicate
who owns the property/money (for example, LN 3 and a
nonhousehold member).  Continue to complete the entire
incident report, regardless of what you enter on the
"Specify" line for Box 5.  After marking Box 5 and
identifying the owners on the "Specify" line, skip to 
Check Item M.

Check Item L (Identifying Stolen 
Property Owners)

Check Item L is for your use to identify by line number (for 
example, 01, 02, and so forth) each household member who owns 
any portion of the property/money that the offender(s) stole 
during the incident.  Do NOT enter the respondent's line number.  

Always ask the respondent to identify the household members 
if you are not sure which line numbers to enter in Check Item 
L.

Mark Box 40 "Household property" if the property/money
belongs to the entire household jointly or if more than
three household members own the property/money jointly
with the respondent. It is acceptable to mark Box 40 and
also have one or more line numbers entered in Check  
Item L, since the offender(s) may have tried to take both
personal and household property.

Check Item M (Theft of Car or 
Other Motor Vehicle)

Check Item M is used to help you decide whether to ask
the question in Item 98 next when the stolen property
was a car or other motor vehicle or to skip to Item 100 
when no car or other motor vehicle was stolen during the
incident.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item M if you marked Box 5 
or 6 in Item 96 and then continue with Item 98. 
Otherwise, mark the "No" box and skip to Item 100.

Item 98 (Permission to Use
Car/Motor Vehicle)

Item 98 is used to determine whether the owner of the stolen 
car or other motor vehicle EVER gave the offender permission 
to use the vehicle. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent has EVER given the
offender permission to use the vehicle.  Also mark Box 1
if permission can be assumed, such as in a family
situation.  After marking Box 1, continue with Item 99.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent NEVER gave the offender prior 
permission to use the car or other motor vehicle. After marking 
Box 2, skip to Check Item N.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent has no idea whether 
the offender had permission to use the stolen vehicle.  This 
could occur when the offender has not been identified.  After 
marking Box 3, skip to Check Item N.

Item 99 (Did Offender Return Car/Motor 
Vehicle)

Item 99 is used to find out if the offender personally returned 
the motor vehicle that was taken during the incident of his/her 
own free will. 

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the offender did return the motor
vehicle in person of his/her own free will.  

Mark Box 2 "No" if:

        The police returned the motor vehicle.

        The motor vehicle was recovered in a way OTHER
        THAN by the offender or the police.

        The motor vehicle was never returned or recovered.

After marking the appropriate box for Item 99, fill Check 
Item N.

Item 100 (Articles In or Attached to 
Motor Vehicle)

Item 100 is used to find out if any articles that the offender
stole were either in or attached to a motor vehicle during
the incident. You can verify the answer to this question
without asking it if the respondent mentioned earlier in the
interview where the articles were when stolen.  Otherwise,
ask the question using the appropriate wording based on
whether there was one or more items stolen.  For example,
if only one item was stolen, ask, "Was the article IN or
ATTACHED to the motor vehicle when it was taken?"

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if ANY articles stolen during the incident 
were in or attached to a motor vehicle.  Mark Box 2 "No" if 
NONE of the articles stolen during the incident were in or 
attached to a motor vehicle.  Also mark Box 2 "No" without 
asking the question in Item 100 when the ONLY boxes marked 
in Item 96 are Boxes 5 and/or 6.

After completing Item 100, continue with Check Item N.

Check Item N (Cash, Purse, or Wallet 
Taken) 

Check Item N is used to help you decide whether or not to
ask the question in Item 101. Before marking the appropriate 
box, look back at the boxes you marked in Item 96. If you 
marked Box 1, 2, or 3 or entered a cash amount above Box 1, 
mark the "Yes" box in Check Item N and ask the question in 
Item 101. Otherwise, mark the "No" box and skip to Item 102.

Item 101 (Cash, Purse, or Wallet 
on Person)

Item 101 is used to determine whether the cash, purse, or
wallet was taken directly from the respondent, such as
from his/her hands or pockets.  The answer to this question
is important in classifying the crime accurately.  

If the respondent has already indicated the answer to this
question, you can verify the answer without asking the
question.  Otherwise, ask the question and only read the
items that were stolen.  For example, replace "cash/purse/
wallet" with "wallet" when only the respondent's wallet
was stolen.

After completing Item 101, continue with Item 102.

Item 102 (Other Items Taken 
Directly From Person)

Item 102 is used to determine whether anything OTHER THAN 
cash, a purse, or a wallet were taken directly from the 
respondent, such as a bracelet from the respondent's
wrist, a hat from the respondent's head, or a computer
game from the respondent's pocket.  Only include property
stolen directly from the respondent or another household
member.

If the answer is obvious from the information already
provided, just verify the answer without asking the
question.  Otherwise, ask the question using the appropriate 
wording.  For instance, if you marked Box 1 in Item 101 and 
there was only one offender, ask the question in Item 102 
this way:

"Was there anything else the offender took directly from
you, for instance, from your pocket or hands, or something 
that you were wearing?"  

If you marked Box 2 in Item 101 or Item 101 is blank, omit 
the word "else" as you read the question in Item 102.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and continue with Item 103.  
Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and skip to Item 104.

Item 103 (Identifying Items Taken 
Directly From Person)

Item 103 is used to identify the property marked in Item 96, 
OTHER THAN cash/purse/wallet, that the offender(s) took 
directly from the respondent or another current household 
member.  Enter the appropriate box numbers from Item 96 to 
identify the items using 2 digits(for example, 07, 13, and 
so forth).

Enter the 2-digit box numbers starting on the left and
working to the right, entering the lowest number to the
highest number.  Make sure that you do not enter box
numbers 01, 02, or 03.  If you need to enter more than
three box numbers in Item 103, just enter the first three
lowest box numbers.  However, if the offender stole
everything directly from the respondent or another
household member, mark Box 40 "Everything marked in
96 was taken directly from respondent" and leave the
code boxes blank.  This is true even when cash, a purse,
or a wallet were also taken directly from the respondent
or another current household member.

Item 104(Value of Stolen Property)

Item 104 is used to identify the dollar amount for the
value of property stolen during the incident, regardless of
whether or not it was recovered.  If only cash, checks, or
credit cards were stolen, leave Item 104 blank and skip to
Item 106.  

Let the respondent decide how he/she will arrive at this
figure and enter the respondent's best estimate of the
value of stolen property, when necessary.  Only include
the dollar amount for stolen property owned by the
respondent or another current household member.

To assist the respondent in deciding the value of the
stolen property, you may remind the respondent of the
articles stolen.  If the respondent gives you separate
amounts for each item, just total the amounts and enter
the sum on the answer line.

Item 105(Method for Determining 
Value)

Item 105 is used to identify how the respondent arrived at
the dollar amount reported in Item 104.  Ask the question
as worded and continue asking, "Any other way?", until
you get a "No" answer.  Mark all methods that the respondent 
mentions.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when one of the methods used to arrive at the
amount entered in Item 104 was the price originally paid
for the item when it was purchased.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when one of the methods used to arrive at the
amount entered in Item 104 was the price to replace the
item, regardless of the original purchase price.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when one of the methods used to arrive at the
amount entered in Item 104 was the respondent's personal
estimate of the stolen item's worth or current value, which
is not necessarily the same as the item's replacement cost.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when one of the methods used to arrive at the 
amount entered in Item 104 was the insurance company 
statement of the stolen property's worth.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 when one of the methods used to arrive at the 
amount entered in Item 104 was the police department's 
statement of the stolen property's worth.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 "Don't know" only after your probing questions to 
identify the method used are unsuccessful.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 "Other" if the respondent mentions a method that does 
not fit the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 5. After marking Box 
7, enter the method used on the "Specify" line, such as a friend's 
estimate.  Also mark Box 7 for stolen food stamps and enter "face 
value" of the food stamps on the "Specify" line.

Item 106 (Recovery of Stolen 
Property)

Item 106 is used to find out whether any or all of the stolen 
money and/or property was recovered.  As you read the question, 
choose the correct words based on what you marked as stolen in 
Item 96.  For example, if only money was stolen, just read the 
word "money" or, if both money and property were stolen, read 
the words "money and property."

For stolen money, only include money returned by the offender.  
Also include the actual stolen money that someone other than 
the offender found or discovered and returned to the owner. 
Do NOT include the reimbursement of money from an insurance 
company, a relative, friend, or anyone OTHER THAN the offender.

For stolen property, only include the return of the original 
property that was stolen, NOT any replacement property from 
any source (for example, an insurance company or the offender).  
Also include recovered stolen property that is being held as 
evidence in a court case, even though the property has not yet 
been returned to the owner. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when ALL the money and ALL the property stolen 
during the incident was recovered.  In other words, everything 
that was stolen during the incident was or will be returned to 
the owner.  After marking Box 1, skip to Check Item O.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when only a portion of the stolen money and/or 
property was recovered and was or will be returned to the 
owner.  After marking Box 2, continue with Item 107.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when NONE of the stolen money and/or property was 
recovered.  After marking Box 3, skip to Item 109.

Item 107 (Identifying Recovered Stolen
Property)

Item 107 is used to identify what part of the stolen money
and/or property was recovered after the incident.  After
asking the initial question, continue asking, "Anything
else?" until you get a "No" response and mark all
appropriate boxes.  If the owner's stolen purse or wallet
was recovered, ask the additional question, "Did it
contain any money?".

For stolen money, only include money returned by the
offender or the actual stolen money that someone other
than the offender found and returned to the owner.  Do
NOT include the reimbursement of money from an insurance 
company, a relative, friend, or anyone OTHER THAN the 
offender.   

For stolen property, only include the return of the
original property that was stolen, NOT any replacement
property from any source (for example, an insurance
company or the offender).  Also include recovered
property that is being held as evidence in a court case,
even though the property has not yet been returned to 
the owner. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if ONLY the stolen cash was recovered and there 
were other stolen items NOT recovered.  After marking Box 1, 
enter the whole dollar amount recovered on the line above 
Box 1.  Round up or down as necessary.  For example, if the 
amount given is $150.50, round up to $151 and, if the amount 
given is $150.49, round down to $150.  If the respondent 
gives an amount that is less than $1, round up to $1.  When 
the respondent is unable to give an exact dollar amount, ask
for his/her best estimate.  

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the owner's stolen purse was recovered. After 
marking Box 2, always ask, "Did it contain any money?". If 
the recovered purse did contain money, enter the whole dollar 
amount on the line above Box 1.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the owner's stolen wallet was recovered. After 
marking Box 3, always ask, "Did it contain any money?". If 
the recovered wallet did contain money, enter the whole dollar 
amount on the line above Box 1.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the owner's stolen credit cards, checks, bank 
cards, Savings Bonds, bank books, money orders, or travelers 
checks were recovered. 

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the owner's stolen car or other motor vehicle 
was recovered.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if some part of the owner's stolen property was 
recovered and it does not fit any of the descriptions in Boxes 
2 through 5.  This could include items marked in Boxes 7 
through 26 in Item 96.  Also mark Box 6 if the respondent does 
not know or is unsure about what part of the stolen property 
was recovered. 

Check Item O (Recovered Property Other 
Than Cash, Checks, or Credit Cards)

Check Item O is used to help you decide whether or not to ask 
the question in Item 108. If you marked Boxes 2, 3, 5, or 6 
in Item 107, mark Box 1 "Yes" in Check Item O and continue with 
Item 108. If Box 1 and/or 4 is marked in Item 107, mark Box 2 
"No" in Check Item O and skip to Item 109. If you are unsure 
about which box to mark, ask the respondent before marking the 
answer in Check Item O.

Item 108 (Value of Recovered Stolen
Property)

Item 108 is used to identify the dollar value of stolen property 
that was recovered after allowing for any damage done to the 
property since it was stolen.  This includes the value of 
all stolen property that was recovered, regardless of whether 
or not it was damaged since it was stolen.

Remind the respondent to exclude the following recovered 
stolen property when determining the dollar value:  cash, 
credit cards, bank cards, Savings Bonds, bank books, money 
orders, or travelers checks.  

Also let the respondent use any means to arrive at this
value.  To assist the respondent in deciding the value of
the recovered property, you may remind the respondent of
the articles individually.  If the respondent gives you
separate amounts for each item, just total the amounts and
enter the sum on the answer line.

Enter the amount in whole dollars.  Round up or down as
necessary.  For example, if the amount given is $150.50,
round up to $151 and, if the amount given is $150.49,
round down to $150.  If the respondent gives an amount
that is less than $1, round up to $1.  When the respondent
is unable to give an exact dollar amount, ask for his/her
best estimate. 

Item 109 (Theft Reported
to Insurance)

Item 109 is used to find out if anyone reported the theft 
to an insurance company, regardless of whether the insurance 
company made any payment for the claim.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent, another household member, or 
someone outside of the household reported the theft to an 
insurance company.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if:

         The theft was not reported by anyone to an insurance
         company OR 

         The household was not covered by insurance at the
         time of the incident.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent either does not know or cannot 
remember whether anyone reported the theft to an insurance 
company.  Before marking Box 3, ask a few probing questions 
to help the respondent remember, such as "Do you remember 
speaking to a claims adjuster or reading any correspondence 
from your insurance company about the theft?"

Item 110 (Other Property
Damaged)

Item 110 is used to find out if any other item was damaged 
during the incident, excluding any stolen property.  This 
could be property owned by the respondent or any other 
household member.  If only cash was stolen during the 
incident, do NOT read the lead-in phrase in parenthesis.  
If any of the Boxes 2 through 27 are marked in Item 96, make 
sure to read the lead-in statement as you ask the question in 
Item 110.

If the respondent seems unsure of how to answer this question, 
also ask the probe question printed in Item 110. As you ask 
the probe question, make sure to select the appropriate 
examples shown in parenthesis based on the circumstances of 
the theft.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if:

          Items were damaged during the incident, but they
          were not stolen.

          These damaged items belonged to a household
          member at the time of the incident or to an
          unrecognizable business operated from the sample
          address.

          Any items damaged, but not stolen, during an act of
          vandalism which occurred during the same incident as
          the theft.

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 111.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" if:

          The only items damaged during the incident were the
          stolen items.

          The damaged items belonged to someone who was
          not a household member at the time of the incident.

          The damaged items belonged to a recognizable
          business operated from the sample address.

          The damaged items are commercial property, such as
          a damaged apartment door to an apartment rented by
          the respondent, even if the respondent paid for the
          repair or replacement cost.  In this example, the
          apartment door does not belong to the respondent.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 115.

Item 111 (Repair or Replacement of 
Damaged Items)

Item 111 is used to determine whether any or all of the items 
damaged during the incident were repaired or replaced, even if 
there was no cost involved.  Also, the person who repaired or 
replaced the damaged items could be anyone, such as a household 
member, a friend, the landlord, or anyone else. Only include 
damaged items that were NOT stolen. 

Mark the appropriate box based on the respondent's answer. If 
you mark Box 1 "Yes, all" or Box 2 "Yes, part," skip to Item 
113. If you mark Box 3 "No, none," continue with Item 112.

Item 112 (Cost to Repair or Replace 
Damaged Items)

Item 112 is used to identify what the cost would be to
repair and/or replace any items damaged, but not stolen, 
during the incident, if the respondent decided to get the
item(s) repaired or replaced.  If the respondent has
difficulty giving you an exact amount, ask for his/her best
estimate.

Enter the amount in whole dollars on the dollar line in
Item 112.  Round up or down as necessary.  For example, if 
the amount given is $150.50, round up to $151 and, if the 
amount given is $150.49, round down to $150. If the 
respondent gives an amount that is less than $1, round up 
to $1. After entering the amount on the dollar line, skip 
to Item 114.

Mark Box 0 (zero) if there would be no cost to repair
and/or replace the damaged items.  After marking Box 0,
skip to Item 115. Mark Box x if the respondent cannot
provide an amount. Avoid marking Box x if at all
possible. If you do mark Box x, then skip to Item 114.

Item 113 (Cost of Repair or Replacement 
of Damaged Items)

Item 113 is used to identify what the cost was to repair
and/or replace any items damaged, but not stolen, during
the incident.  If the respondent has difficulty giving you
an exact amount, ask for his/her best estimate.

Enter the amount in whole dollars on the dollar line in
Item 113.  Round up or down as necessary.  For example,
if the amount given is $150.50, round up to $151 and, if
the amount given is $150.49, round down to $150.  If the
respondent gives an amount that is less than $1, round up
to $1. After entering the amount on the dollar line, ask
the question in Item 114 next.

Mark Box 0 (zero) if there was no cost to repair and/or
replace the damaged items.  After marking Box 0, skip to
Item 115.  Mark Box x if the respondent cannot provide
an amount.  Avoid marking Box x if at all possible.  If
you do mark Box x, then continue with Item 114.

Item 114 (Who Paid/Will
Pay For Repairs or Replacement)

Item 114 is used to identify who paid or will pay to repair
and/or replace items that were damaged, but not stolen,
during the incident.  If you marked Box 1 or 2 in Item 111, 
then ask the question in Item 114 using the word "paid." Ask 
the question in Item 114 using the words "will pay" if you 
marked Box 3 in Item 111 or the respondent has told you that 
the items have been repaired and/or replaced, but the repair 
and/or replacement bill has not yet been paid.

Since more than one person or company may have paid for the 
repairs and/or replacements, continue asking, "Anyone else?", 
until you get a "No" response and then mark all the appropriate 
boxes.  

Only mark Box 1 if the respondent tells you that NONE of the 
damaged items will be repaired or replaced. However, do not 
mark Box 1 if a person or company provided or will provide 
money to repair and/or replace damaged item(s), but the 
respondent does not intend to use the money for this purpose.  
Instead, mark the appropriate box to indicate who provided or 
will provide the money.

Also, if a household member or someone else originally paid 
for the repair and/or replacement costs and the total amount 
has been or will be reimbursed by insurance, only mark Box 3 
or 4 to indicate whose insurance is reimbursing the cost and 
do not mark who originally paid the bill.  However, if the 
insurance only paid a portion of the costs and someone else 
paid the remainder of the costs, then mark both boxes.  For 
example, Box 2 for a household member and Box 4 for the 
household member's insurance.

If the respondent identifies a person, company, or government 
agency that is not described in Boxes 2 through 5, mark Box 6 
"Other" and enter the respondent's answer on the "Specify" 
line (for example, relatives or friends of the household, a 
government agency, a church, or a community organization).

Topic 7.  Completing Items 115 Through 134 (Police Notification/
Reasons for Reporting or Not Reporting Incident to Police/Police
Response to Notification/Contact With Authorities)

Item 115 (Reported to Police)

Item 115 is used to determine whether the police are aware 
that this incident took place, regardless of how they found 
out about it.  

Who Are Considered the Police?

For the NCVS, consider the police to be all regular police
officers at the city, county, State, or Federal government
level, as well as officers who work for sheriff's departments.  
Also include officers working for specialized police forces 
and authorized to make arrests in a special area or jurisdiction 
(for example, campus police, park police, transit police, 
harbor police, and airport police).

Exclude as Police Officers

For the NCVS, exclude as police officers any security forces, 
building guards, prison guards, fish and game wardens, fire 
marshals, and all others who do not have the authority to make 
police arrests.

Victim Is a Police Officer

When the victim/respondent is a police officer and answers "Yes" 
to the question in Item 115, probe to find out if the respondent 
or another person filed an official report or officially notified 
a police department about the incident.  Do not assume that an 
incident was reported to the police just because the victim/ 
respondent is a police officer.  For example, if the respondent 
who is a police officer was threatened with physical harm by a
crime suspect and he/she only mentioned it to his/her partner at 
the station, but never filed a report or officially notified the 
department, you would mark Box 2 "No."

Offender Is a Police Officer

When the victim/respondent answers "Yes" to the question in Item 
115 and the offender is a police officer, probe to find out if 
anyone filed an official report or officially notified a police 
department about the incident.  Again, do not assume because a 
police officer was involved in the incident that the police were
officially notified.  Mark Box 2 "No" if no one actually notified 
the police.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the incident was reported to the police and 
then continue with Item 116.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the incident was NOT reported to the police 
and then skip to Item 117.

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent does not know or 
cannot say for sure whether anyone reported the incident to 
the police and then skip to Item 130 on page 17.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 21, for more information 
about incidents involving police officers.)

Special Instructions for Proxy
Interviews - Items 116 - 134

The questions in Items 116 through 134 are the exception 
to the general rule for asking questions during a proxy 
interview. Normally, you are asking the NCVS question of the 
proxy respondent (who is usually another household member) 
for the proxy person (the household member who is unable to 
answer for himself/herself). For example, when asking the 
question for Item 110 during a proxy interview, you would 
replace the word "you" with the proxy person's name so that 
it reads:

"(Other than any stolen property) was anything that belonged 
to Mr. Baylor (the proxy person) or other members of the 
household damaged in this incident?"

Since the questions for Items 116 through 134 can apply
to anyone in the sample household who may have had 
contact with the police, ask each of these questions of
the proxy respondent, rather than the proxy person.  For
example, when you ask the proxy respondent in Item 116, 
"How did the police find out about it?", the proxy 
respondent says, "I told them."  In this case, you would 
mark Box 1 "Respondent."  However, if the proxy respondent 
says that, "Mr. Baylor (the proxy person)called the police," 
then you would mark Box 2 "Other household member."

Item 116 (How Police Found Out)

Item 116 is used to identify how the police found out about 
the incident. Mark only the first box that applies. For example, 
if the respondent tells you that he/she called the police and 
a security guard also called the police, just mark Box 1 
"Respondent."

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the police found out about the incident from the 
respondent. If you are taking a proxy interview, mark Box 1 if 
the proxy respondent informed the police. After marking Box 1, 
skip to Item 119.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the police found out about the incident from a 
household member OTHER THAN the respondent. If you are taking 
a proxy interview, mark Box 2 if the proxy person informed the 
police.  After marking Box 2, skip to Item 121.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the police found out about the incident from some 
type of official, such as a security guard, an apartment manager, 
a school principal, a store manager, and so forth. After marking 
Box 3, skip to Item 121.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the police found out about the incident from a 
person OTHER THAN a household member or someone acting in an 
official capacity.  For example, you would mark Box 4 if a 
neighbor called the police or a relative who is not a household 
member called the police (such as an uncle, aunt, brother-in-
law, and so forth).  After marking Box 4, skip to Item 121.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the police found out about the incident because 
they happened to be on the scene at the time of the incident or 
came by while the incident was taking place.  After marking Box 
5, skip to Item 123.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the police found out about the incident because 
the offender was a police officer and he/she notified the 
police.  After marking Box 6, skip to Item 124.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the police found out about the incident in a
way other than those described in Boxes 1 through 6. After 
marking Box 7, identify how the police were informed on the 
"Specify" line and then skip to Item 124.

Item 117 (Reasons For Not Reporting 
to Police)

Item 117 is used to find out why no one reported the incident 
to the police.  This item consists of 19 separate categories 
which are grouped together under six major headings to help 
you locate the correct box to mark for the respondent's answer.  
Since you need to mark all appropriate boxes for a respondent's 
answer, continue asking, "Any other reason?", until you get a 
"No" response.

Probing for Item 117

In some cases, a respondent's answer may seem to fit under one 
of the major headings, but you are not sure which box(es) to 
mark.  In this situation, you need to ask a general probe 
question.  For example, a respondent answers that she did not 
think the police would help her. You see the major heading, 
"POLICE WOULDN'T HELP," but do not know which box to mark.  You 
could ask, "Can you be more specific?".  If that probe question 
does not work, then you could ask,"Why do you think that the 
police would not help you?".

Since this item involves a respondent's feelings and motivations, 
you must be extremely careful when asking probe questions so you 
do not bias the respondent's answer.  Keep your initial probe 
questions general and neutral.  Then if the initial probe question 
does not work, ask a more specific probe question.

Only ask the structured probe question for Item 117
when:

     You have asked general probe questions and the
     respondent's answer still does not fit under one of the
     major headings.

     The respondent's answer is so vague and obscure that
     it would not be appropriate to ask a general probe
     question.

Verifying Answers

To ensure that all appropriate boxes are marked in Item 117, 
verify the boxes that you marked with the respondent BEFORE 
continuing with Check Item P. Here is an example of how to 
verify the answers you marked with the respondent:  "I have 
marked (read descriptions for the marked boxes).  Do these 
reasons cover why no one reported the incident to the police?"

Answer Categories for Item 117

Since most of the answer categories in Item 117 are self-
explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the
categories that require special attention. 

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "Private or personal matter or took care of it
myself or informally; told offender's parent"  when the
respondent tells you that: "It was a family matter,"
"He/she wanted to catch the thief," "He/she called the
person who did it," "He/she thought it was his/her
wife/husband," "The person was a friend," and so forth.

Marking Box 18

Mark Box 18 "Other" if you have tried asking both general 
probe questions and the structured probe question AND the 
respondent's reason still does not fit into one of the 
reasons in Boxes 1 through 17.  After marking Box 18, make 
sure to enter the reason on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 19

Mark Box 19 "Respondent not present or doesn't know why it 
wasn't reported" if the respondent really does not know why 
the incident was not reported to the police. For example, 
the respondent was not present during a burglary incident.

Noting Distinctions

Pay close attention when a respondent tells you that the
incident is not important enough to report to the police. 
Boxes 3 through 5 cover reasons why the respondent
feels that the incident was not important enough to report
to the police, while Box 10 covers when the respondent
thinks that the police would not consider the incident
important. 

Box 17 also implies that the respondent did not feel that
the incident was important enough to report to the police,
but the primary motivation for not reporting the incident was 
the respondent's lack of time and the level of inconvenience 
to him/her.

After completing Item 117, continue with Check Item P.

Check Item P(Multiple Reasons For Not
Reporting)

Check Item P is used to help you decide whether or not to
ask the question in Item 118.  Mark Box 1 "Yes" in Check 
Item P if you marked more than one box in Item 117 and then 
continue with Item 118.  Mark Box 2 "No" in Check Item P if 
you marked only one box in Item 117 and then skip to Item 
130 on page 17.

Item 118 (Most Important Reason For 
Not Reporting)

Item 118 is used to pinpoint which of the reasons marked
in Item 117 the respondent feels is the most important
one for not reporting the incident to the police.  If
necessary, read the reasons marked in Item 117 to the
respondent after asking the question in Item 118.

Based on the respondent's answer, enter the appropriate
box number in the code box using 2 digits (For example,
if the respondent says that the most important reason is
the one in Box 2, enter "02.")

If the respondent seems to have difficulty making up his/
her mind, you could ask the following probe question: 
"If you could only give one reason, which one would it
be?".  The respondent may still tell you that each reason
is equally important. If so, mark Box 30 "No one reason
more important."

After completing Item 118, skip to Item 130 on page 17.

Item 119 (Reasons For Reporting 
to Police)

Item 119 is used to identify why the respondent reported
the incident to the police.  You should only ask this
question if you marked Box 1 in Item 116. 

There are 12 categories for Item 119 and they are grouped
together under five major headings to help you locate the
correct box to mark for the respondent's answer.  Since
you need to mark all appropriate boxes for a respondent's
answer, continue asking, "Any other reason?", until you
get a "No" response.

Since we are interested in the respondent's feelings at the
time of the incident (or the proxy respondent's feelings),
be sure to pause after reading the question to allow the
respondent time to recall his/her feelings.  Do NOT read
the answer categories to the respondent BEFORE receiving 
the respondent's answer.

Probing for Item 119

In some cases, a respondent's answer may seem to fit under 
one of the major headings, but you are unsure which box(es) 
to mark. In this situation, you need to ask a general probe 
question. For example, a respondent answers that he thought 
the police should be aware of the incident. You see the major 
heading, "TO LET POLICE KNOW," but do not know which box to 
mark. You could ask, "Can you be more specific?". If that
probe question does not work, then you could ask, "Why did 
you feel that the police should be notified?".

Since this item involves a respondent's feelings and
motivations, you must be extremely careful when asking
probe questions so you do not bias the respondent's
answer.  Keep your initial probe question general and
neutral.  Then if the initial probe question does not work,
ask a more specific probe question.

Only ask the structured probe question for Item 119
when:

     You have asked general probe questions and the
     respondent's answer still does not fit under one of 
     the major headings.

     The respondent's answer is so vague and obscure that
     it would not be appropriate to ask a general probe
     question.

Verifying Answers

To ensure that all appropriate boxes are marked in Item 119, 
verify the boxes that you marked with the respondent BEFORE 
continuing with Check Item Q. Here is an example of how to 
verify the answers you marked with the respondent:  "I have 
marked (read descriptions for the marked boxes).  Do these 
reasons cover why you reported this incident to the police?"

Answer Categories in Item 119

Since most of the answer categories in Item 119 are self-
explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the
categories that require special attention. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 ONLY when the respondent tells you that he/she 
reported the incident to the police either at the time of the 
incident or just prior to the incident in an effort to keep it 
from happening.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when the respondent tells you that he/she reported 
the incident to the police in an effort to get help AFTER the 
incident, such as medical attention.  

Do NOT mark Box 2 if the incident was reported to:

        x  Recover property (Mark Box 3).

        x  Collect insurance money (Mark Box 4).

        x  Prevent the incident from happening again(Mark
           Box 5).

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 if the respondent feels that he/she had a
legal or moral obligation to report the incident to the
police.

Marking Box 12

Mark Box 12 if the respondent's only reason for reporting
the incident to the police was because it was a crime. 
After marking Box 12, skip to Item 121.

Check Item Q (Multiple
Reasons For Reporting)

Check Item Q is used to help you decide whether or not
to ask the question in Item 120.  Mark the "Yes" box in
Check Item Q if you marked more than one box/reason in
Item 119 and continue with Item 120.  Mark the "No" box
in Check Item Q if you only marked one box/reason in
Item 119 and then skip to Item 121.

Item 120 (Most Important
Reason For Reporting)

Item 120 is used to identify which reason from those marked 
in Item 119 the respondent feels is the most important reason 
for reporting the incident to the police. If necessary, read 
the reasons marked in Item 119 to remind the respondent.

Based on the respondent's answer, enter the appropriate
box number in the code box using 2 digits (For example,
if the respondent says that the most important reason is
the one in Box 8, enter "08.")

If the respondent seems to have difficulty making up
his/her mind, you could ask the following probe question: 
"If you could only give one reason, which one would it
be?".  The respondent may tell you that:

      Each reason is equally important.  If so, mark Box 21
     "No one reason more important."

      His/her main reason for reporting the incident to the
      police was that it was a crime.  If so, mark Box 22
     "Because it was a crime was most important."

After completing Item 120, continue with Item 121.

Item 121 (Police Response)

Item 121 is the first of three questions intended to find
out what the police did after they were notified about the
incident.  Item 121 is used to determine whether the police 
actually came to talk in person with the victimized person. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the police came to see and speak to the 
victimized person either at the scene of the incident or
somewhere else.  If the police only spoke to the victimized 
person on the phone, mark Box 2 "No."  After marking Box 1, 
continue with the question in Item 122.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" if the police were contacted and never came 
to speak in person with the victimized person and only 
communicated by phone, mail, and so forth. After marking 
Box 2, skip to Item 124.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent really does not 
know whether or not the police came in person once they 
were notified. After marking Box 3, skip to Item 124.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 "Respondent went to police" if the respondent 
went to notify the police in person about the incident. 
After marking Box 4, skip to Item 123.

Item 122 (Time Before Police Responded)

Item 122 is used to identify how much time elapsed between 
the police being notified and their arrival at the crime 
scene.  Mark the first category (1 - 5) about which the 
respondent feels sure. 

Mark Box 6 if the respondent really does not know how
soon after being contacted the police arrived. This is
possible if someone else called the police or the police
went to the crime scene before coming to speak to the
victimized person.

After completing Item 122, continue with Item 123.

Item 123 (Police Actions)

Item 123 is used to determine what actions the police took 
while they were with the victimized person during their 
initial visit.  Exclude any police actions taken after
the police left or during any subsequent visits with the
victimized person.  As you ask the question in Item 123,
use the appropriate word, either "there" or "here," based
on where the police visit took place and whether you are
conducting the interview in person or by telephone.

Since you need to mark all boxes that apply to the
respondent's answer, continue asking, "Anything else?",
until you get a "No" answer.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Took report" if the police spoke to the victimized 
person to find out what happened during the incident.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "Searched/looked around" if the police searched the 
area of the incident for the offender(s) or for any of the 
stolen property.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Took evidence" if the police took any type of 
evidence that the offender(s) may have left at the scene
of the crime, such as fingerprints, a weapon, scraps of
clothing, a hair or blood sample, and so forth.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 "Questioned witnesses or suspects" if the police 
questioned any witnesses and suspects, as well as potential 
witnesses and suspects (for example, neighbors, co-workers, 
friends, and so forth).

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 "Promised surveillance" if the police told the
victimized person that they will:

          Patrol the crime scene OR
  
          Keep a lookout in the area where the victimized
          person lives or works. 

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 "Promised to investigate" if the police told
the victimized person that they would do any of the
following things:  question suspects, witnesses, or others,
pursue the offender(s), try to recover stolen property, and
so forth.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 "Made arrest" if the respondent learned  that
the police arrested a suspect(s) during the initial visit
from the police.

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 "Other" if the police took any actions during
their initial visit with the victimized person which are 
not described in Boxes 1 through 7 and then fully describe
the action(s) taken on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 "Don't know" if the respondent really does not 
know what the police did during their initial visit with the 
victimized person.  For example, the respondent may not have 
been present when the police made their visit.

After completing Item 123, continue with Item 124.

Item 124 (Later Contact With Police)

Item 124 is the first of four questions asking about any
subsequent contacts with the police about the incident. 
Item 124 is used to determine whether the respondent or
any other household member had any later official contacts 
with the police about the incident.  For example, the police 
may have called the victimized person or made another personal 
visit, or perhaps a household member mailed a letter to the 
police inquiring about the case.

Exclude any unofficial contacts with the police, such as a
casual conversation with a police officer who is a friend
or acquaintance.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" when:

       There was any contact between the household and
       the police following the initial visit by the police,
       regardless of who initiated the contact.

       The police did NOT make a personal visit when they
       were originally contacted about the incident, but the
       police did call or send a letter to the household after
       they were contacted. 

       The police did NOT make a personal visit when they
       were originally contacted about the incident, but
       someone in the household called or sent a letter to
       the police after they initially notified the police.

After marking Box 1, continue with Item 125.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" when:

       There was no later contact between the household
       and the police AFTER the initial visit by the police.

       There was no contact at all between the household
       and the police after the police found out about the
       incident.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 128.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" when the respondent does not know whether 
there was any later contact with the police about the incident.  
After marking Box 3, skip to Item 128.

Item 125 (Who Initiated the Contact)

Item 125 is used to determine who initiated the later contact 
between the household and the police about the incident. Mark 
the appropriate box based on the respondent's answer.

Only mark Box 3 "Both" if there was more than one later
contact and some were initiated by the police and others
were initiated by someone in the household.

If you mark Box 5 "Other," make sure to identify who initiated 
the later contact(s) on the "Specify" line.  Avoid marking Box 
5 if the respondent's answer fits Box 1, 2, or 3.

After completing Item 125, continue with Item 126.

Item 126 (Method of Contact)

Item 126 is used to find out whether or not the later contacts 
were made in person.  Only mark one box.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if ALL later contacts were made in person, regardless 
of who initiated the contacts.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if ALL later contacts were made by some means OTHER 
THAN IN PERSON, such as by phone, FAX, mail, electronic mail, 
and so forth.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if there were two or more later contacts AND at least 
one later contact was made in person AND at least one later 
contact was made by some other means, such as by phone. 

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if, after probing, the respondent does not know 
whether the later contacts were in person or by some other
means.

After completing Item 126, continue with Item 127.

Item 127 (Later Police Actions)

Item 127 is used to determine what actions the police took to 
follow up on the incident, EXCLUDING actions that were already 
marked in Item 123 and were only taken during the initial 
contact. 

Since you need to mark all boxes that apply to the respondent's 
answer, continue asking, "Anything else?", until you get a "No" 
response.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Took report" if the police filled out a second report 
or spoke to the victimized person again since their first contact 
after the incident.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "Questioned witnesses or suspects" if, after the initial 
contact, the police questioned any witnesses and suspects, as well 
as potential witnesses and suspects (for example, neighbors, co-
workers, friends, and so forth).

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Did or promised surveillance/investigation" if, after 
the initial contact, the police investigated the incident or told 
the respondent that they would investigate, such as questioning 
suspects, witnesses, or others, pursuing the offender(s), or 
trying to recover stolen property.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 "Recovered property" if the police were able to recover 
stolen property.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 "Made arrest" if the respondent learned  that the police 
arrested a suspect(s) after their initial visit to the household.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 "Stayed in touch with respondent/household" if the 
police stayed in contact with someone in the household by any 
means, such as by phone, mail, and so forth.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 "Other" if the police took a later action that
does not fit the descriptions in Boxes 1 through 6.  After
marking Box 7, make sure to identify the action taken on
the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 "Nothing" if the respondent thinks that no actions 
were taken by the police following the initial visit by the 
police.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 "Don't know" if the respondent does not know what 
actions were taken since the incident happened. 

After completing Item 127, continue with Item 128.

Item 128 (Official Complaint)

Item 128 is used to determine whether anyone in the household 
signed a complaint against the offender(s) to the police 
department or another authority.  The complaint could be any 
type of official report signed by a household member in which 
one or more persons are NAMED as the offenders in the incident. 
The official report could be filed with a police department or 
some other legal authority, such as the FBI, immigration 
officials, and so forth.

After completing Item 128, continue with Item 129.

Item 129 (Offender Arrested or Charged)

Item 129 is used to find out if anyone:

          Was arrested in the incident or 

          Had charges brought against him/her.

You may already know the answer to this question. If so, verify 
the answer without asking the question.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent knows or has heard that 
someone was arrested or had charges brought against him/her 
in connection with the incident.  If the person was only 
questioned about the incident or held in custody and then 
released without being charged, mark Box 2 "No."

Item 130 (Victim Assistance)

Item 130 is the first of two items asking about any help
the household may have received from an office or agency 
that deals with crime victims, excluding the police
department.  Item 130 is used to determine whether or not
the household did receive any help or advice from an
office or agency which provides assistance to crime victims.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if anyone in the household received help or 
advice as a direct result of the incident and this help or 
advice was in the form of financial or legal advice, counseling, 
preventing similar crimes in the future, and so forth. The help 
or advice could have come from any office or agency that deals 
specifically with crime victims, with the exception of the 
police department. After marking Box 1, continue with Item 131.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" if no one in the household received any
help or advice from an office or agency set up to assist
crime victims.  Also mark Box 2 if the only help received
by the household came from:

          The police department 

          OR

          Private individuals or a group that is not trained
          specifically to handle crime victims, such as
          neighbors, relatives, psychologists, a family doctor, a
          priest or minister, and so forth.

After marking Box 2, skip to Check Item R.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent really does not know 
whether anyone in the household received help or advice from an 
office or agency set up to assist crime victims.  After marking 
Box 3, skip to Check Item R.

Item 131 (Government or Private Agency)

Item 131 is used to identify whether the office or agency who 
assisted the household was a government or private agency.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the office or agency is supported by Federal, 
State, or local government taxes.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the office or agency is supported by private 
funds or charitable contributions.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if, after probing, the respondent really does
not know who supports the office or agency that provided
assistance to the household.

Check Item R (Were Police Informed)

Check Item R is used to help you decide whether to continue 
with Item 132 or skip to Item 135.  Refer back to Item 115 
to verify whether or not the police were notified about the 
incident.  If Box 1 "Yes" is marked in Item 115, mark the 
"Yes" box in Check Item R and continue with Item 132. 
Otherwise, mark the "No" box in Check Item R and skip to 
Item 135.

Item 132 (Contact With Other Authorities)

Item 132 is the first of two items used to determine if
anyone in the household has had contact with an authority
about the incident, OTHER THAN the police or an agency marked 
in Item 130.  By authority, we mean a prosecutor, a court or 
juvenile officer, and so forth.

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," then continue with Item 133. If you 
mark either Box 2 "No" or Box 3 "Don't know," then skip to 
Item 134.

Item 133 (Identifying Other 
Authorities)

Item 133 is used to identify which authorities a household
member has contacted about the incident.  Since more than one 
authority may have been contacted, continue asking, "Any others?", 
until you get a "No" reply. If you mark Box 5 "Other" because 
the authority mentioned by the respondent is not described in 
Boxes 1 through 4,make sure to identify the authority on the 
"Specify" line.

Item 134 (Further Official
Action)

Item 134 is used to find out if the respondent knows or
feels that any authority (police, courts, and so forth) will
do anything further about the incident. This could include 
bringing suspects to trial, questioning suspects, offering a 
reward, investigating, or surveillance. Exclude any counseling 
that could be provided because of this incident. 

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," make sure to describe the actions 
that the respondent knows or feels will be taken. After 
completing Item 134, continue with Item 135.

Item 135 (Activity When Incident 
Happened)

Item 135 is used to identify what the respondent or proxy 
person was doing when the incident happened or started. It 
is not necessary for the respondent or proxy person to have 
been at the crime scene to answer this question. If the 
respondent or proxy person was not present during the incident, 
use the word "happened" when asking this question. Only mark 
ONE box to answer this question.

Proxy Interviews

Starting with Item 135, you will again ask each question about 
the proxy person and not of the proxy respondent.  Only Items 
116 through 134 are asked directly of the proxy respondent.  
Therefore, if you were taking a proxy interview, you would read 
the question in Item 135 this way: "What was Mr. Baylor(proxy
person) doing when this incident started?"

Answer Categories in Item 135

Since most of the answer categories in Item 135 are self-
explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the
categories that require special attention.

Marking Boxes 1 and 2

Mark Box 1 if the respondent or proxy person was working or on 
duty for his/her job when the incident began or happened.  Mark 
Box 2 if the respondent or proxy person was commuting to or from 
work when the incident began or happened.  After marking Box 1, 
skip to Item 138a.  After marking Box 2, skip to Check Item S.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent or proxy person was traveling to 
or from school when the incident started. However, if the incident 
started while the respondent or proxy person was in class during 
the school day, mark Box 6.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the respondent or proxy person was in class 
during the school day when the incident started. However, 
if the incident started while commuting to or from school, 
mark Box 3.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 when the respondent or proxy person was involved 
in an activity at his/her home when the incident started and 
the activity is not described in a previous box for Item 135.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 if the respondent or proxy person was doing 
something when the incident started that does not fit any
of the previous boxes in Item 135.  After marking Box 10, 
make sure to describe the activity on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 11

Mark Box 11 if the respondent or proxy person really does not 
know what he/she was doing when the incident started.  For 
instance, the respondent or proxy person could have been away 
from home on vacation when his/her house was broken into and 
burglarized.

Item 136(Employment at Time of 
Incident)

Item 136 is used to determine whether or not the respondent 
had a job or business at the time of the incident.  If you 
know the answer by this point in the interview, just verify 
the answer without asking the question.

For the NCVS, consider the respondent as having a job or
business if:

       There is a definite arrangement to work for pay or
       profit either full time or part time.

       The respondent was self-employed in his/her own
       business/farm or partnership.

       The respondent was working without pay on a family
       farm or in a family business.

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if any of the conditions mentioned above 
existed at the time of the incident, even if the respondent 
was temporarily absent from the job due to a vacation, illness, 
bad weather, strike, or temporary layoff. After marking Box 
1, skip to Check Item S.

Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent did not have a job or
business at the time of the incident.  After marking Box 2,
continue with Item 137.

Item 137 (Major Activity)

Item 137 is used to find out what the respondent's major
activity was during the week of the incident, since he/she
did not have a job or business.  As you ask this question,
make sure to read each of the examples in the question and 
mark only ONE box to answer this question. 

Answer Categories in Item 137

Since most of the answer categories in Item 137 are self-
explanatory, descriptions are provided below only for the
categories that require special attention. 

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent was attempting to find a job
or trying to start a business or profession during the week
of the incident.  Examples of "looking for work" include:

          Registration at an employment office.

          FAXing your resume to potential employers.

          Meeting and interviewing with prospective
          employers.

          Placing or answering advertisements in newspapers
          or on the Internet.

          Gathering information about starting his/her own
          business.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent spent most of his/her time
during the week of the incident doing work around his/her 
own home.  Examples of "keeping house" include:

          Cooking, washing clothes, cleaning house, and so
          forth.

          Caring for his/her own children, step-children, or
          foster children, as well as children who are brothers,
          sisters, or other relatives of the respondent.

          Overseeing the care of the home, even if the actual
          work is done by a paid maid or housekeeper.

          Cutting the lawn, painting the house, working in the
          garden (other than on a family farm), and so forth.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent spent the majority of the week of 
the incident attending any kind of public or private school, 
including trade or vocational schools.  If the respondent would 
normally be attending school that week, but was out sick or on 
a short vacation, you should still mark Box 3.

Do NOT mark Box 3 if the incident happened during the respondent's 
summer vacation, unless the respondent was attending summer school 
during the week of the incident. Otherwise, mark the student's major 
activity during the week of the incident, such as "Leisure activity 
away from home" or "Other activities at home."

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent was unable to do ANY kind of work 
during the week of the incident because he/she has a LONG-TERM 
physical or mental illness or disability.  However, if the 
respondent is only TEMPORARILY ILL or disabled and is expected 
to be well enough to work at some kind of gainful employment
within 6 months after the incident, mark Box 6 "Other" and 
explain the situation on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the respondent says that he/she was retired
during the week of the incident.  However, if the respondent 
has only cut back on the number of hours worked or was semi-
retired during the week of the incident, you should mark Box 
1 in Item 136 to indicate that the respondent did have a job 
at the time of the incident.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the respondent mentions a major activity during 
the week of the incident that is not covered in Boxes 1 through 
5. After marking Box 6, make sure to explain the activity on 
the "Specify" line, such as caring for a terminally ill spouse, 
child, or parent. 

After completing Item 137, skip to Item 151 on page 19.

Item 138a (Type of Employer)

Notice that there is an introductory statement printed above 
the question in Item 138a.  Make sure that you read this 
sentence to the respondent BEFORE asking the question in Item 
138a.  This statement lets the respondent know that the 
following questions relate to the job at which he/she was 
working during the time of the incident.

Each of the answer categories in Item 138a signifies a
different "Class of Worker" type.  Ask the respondent
about each category as a separate question.  For example:
"Were you employed by a private company, business, or
individual for wages?"  After asking this question, wait
for the respondent's answer. If you get a "Yes" answer,
mark Box 1 and then continue with Item 138b. If you get
a "No" answer, leave Box 1 blank and ask the second
question, "Were you employed by the Federal government?"  
Follow this procedure until you get a "Yes" answer. Only 
mark ONE box in Item 138a.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when a respondent worked for a PRIVATE employer for 
wages, salary, commission, tips, piece-rates, or pay in kind.  
After marking Box 1, continue with Item 138b.

Marking Box 2 

Mark Box 2 when a respondent:

       Worked for any branch of the Federal government.

       Was elected to a paid Federal office.

       Was a member of the Armed Forces.

       Was employed by an international organization (for
       example, the United Nations) or a foreign
       government.

After marking Box 2, skip to Item 138c.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when a respondent worked in any branch of a state, 
county, or local government.  This also includes respondents 
who were elected to paid state, county, or local offices. After 
marking Box 3, skip to Item 138c.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when a respondent was self-employed for profit or 
fees in his/her OWN business, farm, shop, office, practice, 
and so forth.  After marking Box 4,continue with Item 138b.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 when a  respondent was employed for PAY at the time 
of the incident by a church, union, or some other type of 
private nonprofit organization. After marking Box 5, continue 
with Item 138b.

Item 138b(Corporation)

If the respondent was working at the time of the incident for a 
private company, his/her own private business, or for a private,
not-for-profit organization, then you will continue with Item 
138b.  Item 138b is used to determine whether the business or 
organization is incorporated.

The respondent should know whether or not his/her employer is 
a legal corporation and then you would mark Box 1 for "Yes" or 
Box 2 for "No."  However, if the respondent really does not 
know, mark Box 3, "Don't know."

Item 138c (Name of Employer)

Item 138c is used to identify the name of the respondent's
employer at the time of the incident.  Census Bureau coders 
working in the National Processing Center need this key piece 
of information to assign the correct industry code to the 
respondent's employer.  For this reason, we need you to pay 
particular attention to recording this information accurately 
and legibly.

Even though a respondent may be reluctant to provide the
name of his/her employer, make every effort to collect this
information without badgering the respondent.  In some
cases, you may succeed by just reassuring a respondent
that the information he/she provides is held strictly 
confidential.

Item 38d (Kind of Business or Industry)

Item 138d is used to determine the kind of business or
industry that is transacted by the respondent's employer at
the time of the incident.  This is another key piece of
information needed to assign the correct industry code for
a respondent's employer.

To ensure that our coders can assign an accurate industry
code, you need to enter a clear and specific description of
the kind of business or industry.  In other words:

     1. What is the purpose of the business?  

        OR 

     2. What type of products are produced by the industry?

Structured Probe

If the respondent hesitates in giving you an answer to your
initial question in Item 138d, also ask the structured probe
question printed in italics below the initial question.  This
question may help the respondent to understand what type
of description we want for this item.

Be Specific

Make sure that you avoid entering descriptions that are too
general, such as:

          "It's a mining company."
          "The business provides a repair service."
          "It's a computer-related business."
          "It's a retail store."

Here are some examples of better descriptions:

          "Mines & transports coal & coal byproducts."
          "Repairs small home appliances."
          "Designs & sells computer software."
          "Operates two large hardware stores."

Enter descriptions that are specific, but avoid using
unnecessary words that make the descriptions too long. 
Keep your descriptions under 50 characters, since this is
the maximum number of characters allotted for keying this
information.  Fifty characters is the maximum for each of
the new employment questions requiring a write-in entry.

Item 138e (Type of Industry)

Item 138e is used to identify the major type of industry in
which the respondent was working at the time of the incident.  
The four options to choose from are:

          Manufacturing
          Retail trade
          Wholesale trade
          Something else

Distinguishing between these types of industries is very
important, because type of industry also plays an essential
role in assigning the correct industry code.  If this item is
left unanswered or is marked incorrectly, the coders will
not be able to assign an accurate industry code for the
respondent's employer.

Start by asking, "Is this mainly manufacturing?".  Wait for
the respondent's answer.  If you get a "Yes" answer, mark
Box 1 and then continue with Item 138f.  If you get a
"No" answer, leave Box 1 blank and continue by asking,
"Is this mainly retail trade?".  Follow this procedure until
you get a "Yes" answer.  Make sure that you mark only ONE box 
in Item 138e.

Marking Box 1, Manufacturing

Mark Box 1, "Manufacturing," if a respondent's employer makes 
and sells its products in large quantities or lots to other 
manufacturers, wholesalers, or retailers.

Marking Box 2, Retail Trade

Mark Box 2, "Retail Trade, if a respondent's employer sells 
primarily to individual consumers or users, but seldom makes 
products.

Marking Box 3, Wholesale Trade

Mark Box 3, "Wholesale Trade," if a respondent's employer buys, 
rather than makes, products in large quantities or lots for 
resale to retailers, industrial users, or to other wholesalers.

Marking Box 4, Something Else

Mark Box 4, "Something Else," if a respondent's employer does 
not manufacture or sell products as a wholesaler or a retailer.  
Examples of some employers that fit into the "Something Else" 
category are:

          Car repair shops,
          Accounting firms,
          Medical centers,
          Trucking companies, or
          Banks.

When To Probe

Some firms are engaged in more than one type of business
or activity.  When you encounter this situation, you need
to do some additional probing to determine the most
appropriate category to mark in Item 138e.

If you discover that the respondent's employer conducts
business at more than one location (for example, making
copy machines at one location and making chemicals used
by the copy machines at another location), collect data for
the location at which the respondent works.

If you discover that the respondent's employer conducts a
variety of activities at the same location (for example, a
gasoline station that also sells groceries), probe to
determine which activity or product the respondent is most
directly involved with in his/her job.  For example, if the
respondent primarily sells groceries at the gasoline station,
mark Box 2, "Retail Trade."  However, if the respondent
primarily works as a mechanic servicing motor vehicles at
the gasoline station, mark Box 4,"Something Else."

Item 138f (Kind of Work)

Item 138f is the first of the new employment questions
that asks about the kind of work or occupation the
respondent had at the time of the incident.  In addition to
assigning an industry code for the respondent's employer,
the coders also assign an occupation code for the
respondent's job based on:

          The kind of work described in Item 138f and 

          The respondent's most important activities or duties
          described in Item 139.

Make sure that you enter complete and accurate descriptions for 
both of these items, so that the coders can assign the correct 
occupation code.

Job Title vs. Kind of Work

The "kind of work" descriptions that our coders need must
clearly specify the type of work the respondent does on
his/her job, and this is not necessarily the respondent's job
title.  For some occupations, the common descriptions or
general job titles that a respondent provides will not be
sufficient for the coders to assign the correct occupation
code.

Self-Employed Persons

When a respondent is self-employed, only enter "Manager" as his/
her occupation if the person actually spends most of the workday 
managing his/her business. Otherwise, enter the kind of work the 
respondent spends the majority of his/her time doing, such as 
plumber, hair stylist, dentist, house painter, and so forth. In 
other words, describe the respondent's actual trade or craft, 
when that is the kind of work that the respondent spends most of 
his/her time doing for the business.

Avoid Entering Department or Work
Place Titles

Avoid entering kind of work entries such as "Works in shipping 
department" or "Works in the warehouse." These entries do not 
adequately describe the kind of work done by the respondent. If 
the respondent inspects outgoing products for the shipping 
department, enter "Inspects outgoing products for shipping dept."  
If the respondent is a clerk who monitors inventory in a
warehouse, enter "Clerk monitoring warehouse inventory."

Apprentice vs. Trainee

There is a difference between someone who is an apprentice and 
someone who is a trainee.  An apprentice is under contract during 
his/her training period, but a trainee is not. If a respondent 
tells you that he/she is in an apprenticeship or trainee program, 
make sure to enter both the person's occupation or kind of work, 
along with the term "apprentice" or "trainee." For example, you 
may need to enter "Apprentice plumber" or "Buyer trainee."

Machinist vs. Machine Operator vs. 
Mechanic

Although all three titles sound similar, there are major
differences in the kind of work done by a machinist, a
machine operator, and a mechanic.

A machinist is a skilled craftsman who constructs metal
parts, tools, and machines through the use of blueprints,
machine and hand tools, and precise measuring
instruments.

A machine operator runs a factory machine, such as a
drill press operator.

A mechanic inspects, services, repairs, or overhauls
machinery.

Secretary vs. "Official Secretary"

The title secretary applies to someone who does secretarial 
work in an office.  The title official secretary applies to 
someone who is an elected or appointed officer of a business, 
union, or other organization.

Probing for Difficult to
Code Occupations

Here is a basic rule for Item 138f:  Avoid entering a one
word response, because it will usually be too general for
our coders to assign the correct occupation code.  For
these situations, we are providing the following table
which has some difficult to code, one word occupations,
along with a suggested probe for each occupation.  These
probes are written to encourage the respondent to provide
a more specific description of the kind of work he/she does
on the job.  This table is also available as a separate job
aid, Difficult to Code Occupations.
                   
Item 139 (Usual Activities)

Item 139 is used to describe the usual activities or duties a
respondent performs at his/her job. This is the second key
piece of information that our coders use to assign an
occupation code.  What you enter in Item 139 is especially
useful when a simple job title does not provide enough
information to code the occupation.
                                
Here are some examples of entries you may need to enter
in Item 139:
                                
       * Keeping account books
       * Selling new and used motor vehicles
       * Laying bricks and stone
       * Typing and filing letters, reports, memos, etc.
                                
If a respondent tells you that his/her job duties are classified, 
do NOT probe. If this happens, enter "Information is classified."

Item 140 (Type of Employment Area)

Item 140 is asked to find out if the respondent was
working in a city, suburban area, rural area, or a
combination of any of these areas at the time of the
incident.  This type of information will help BJS in
determining if specific areas are more prone to crime.
                                
For Item 140, you will read each answer category as part
of the question until you get a "Yes" response.  Since most
respondents will know how to answer this question, let the
respondent select the type of area.  When a respondent
worked for more than one employer, mark the box for the
area in which he/she worked the greater number of hours. 
Avoid marking Box 4 "Combination of any of these?",
unless a respondent insists that the area he/she worked
MOST of the time was a combination of city, suburban,
and rural.
                                
After completing Item 140, continue with Item 141a.
          
Item 141a (Incident Happened at 
Work Site)

Item 141a is used to determine whether the incident happened at 
the respondent's work site for any job held by the respondent 
at the time of the incident. If you already know the answer to 
this question, you can verify the answer without asking the 
question.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1, "Yes," if the incident happened while the respondent 
was at his/her work site, which is considered the place where his/
her USUAL day-to-day activities take place.  Some examples of work 
sites include in an office, hospital, taxi cab, convenience 
store, beauty parlor, and so forth.
                                
If the respondent happens to work from an office or workshop 
in his/her home and the incident occurred in the office or 
workshop, also mark Box 1, "Yes." However, do NOT mark Box 1 
if the incident happened somewhere else in the house, garage, 
or property OTHER THAN in the office or workshop.
                                
If the respondent has no usual work site, such as a traveling 
salesperson, his/her work site is the place where he/she was 
working when the incident occurred.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2, "No," if the incident happened at a location
OTHER THAN the respondent's work site, such as at a
meeting in another office building during working hours,
out of town on a business trip, and so forth.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 "Don't know" if the respondent really does not know 
if the incident occurred at his/her work site. Only mark Box 3 
as a last resort.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent's answer requires more than just a 
"Yes" or "No" reply and then use the "Specify" line to answer 
this question. After completing Item 141a, continue with Item 
141b.

Item 141b (Day or Night Work)

Item 141b is used to find out if the respondent worked primarily 
days, nights, or rotating shifts at the time of the incident.  
Mark Box 1 for "Days," Box 2 for "Nights," and Box 3 for "Both 
days and nights/rotating shifts."  After completing Item 141b, 
continue with Item 142.
        
Item 142 (Current Job)

Item 142 is used to determine whether the respondent's job at 
the time of the incident is also his/her current job at the 
time of the interview.

Check Item S (Was Person Injured)

Check Item S is used to help you decide whether to continue with 
Item 143 or to skip to Item 147. Items 143 through 146 ask about 
lost time and pay due to any injuries suffered by the respondent 
during the incident. If you are not sure which box to mark, look 
back at Item 31 on page 5 to see whether you marked any boxes 
from Boxes 2 through 11.
                                
Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item S if the respondent was injured 
during the incident and then ask the question in Item 143. Mark 
the "No" box in Check Item S if Item 31 is blank or Box 1 "None" 
is marked and then skip to Item 147. 
            
Item 143 (Lost Work Time
Due to Injuries)

Item 143 is used to find out if the respondent/victim of the
incident lost time from work because of his/her own injuries 
that were suffered during the incident.  Later in the
interview, Items 151 and 152 are used to identify any other
household members who lost time from work because of the 
respondent's injuries.

Defining Terms

Work - For this item, work is considered a job or business
rather than housework, school, or other activities.
                                
Time lost from work - For this item, time lost from work
could be time away from his/her job or business due to:
                              
       Injuries suffered in the incident or 
                                
       Visits to a doctor or hospital to receive medical care
       for injuries suffered during the incident. 
                                
Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with Item 144.  
Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and then skip to Item 147.
          
Item 144 (Time Lost From
Work Due to Injuries)

Item 144 is used to identify how much time the respondent
lost from work due to the injuries he/she suffered from the
incident.  Include time lost from work up to the day of the
interview.
                                
If the respondent lost one or more days from work, enter
the number of whole days on the line provided in        
Item 144.  If the respondent answers in hours, always
determine whether the hours were missed all in one day
or more than one day.  For example, if the respondent lost
a few hours on one day for physical therapy and a few
hours on another day to visit the doctor, enter "2" for the
number of days, even though the respondent was at work a
portion of each day.  After entering the number of days
missed from work, continue with Item 145. 

Marking Box 0

Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent lost less than one
workday due to his/her injuries from the incident.  After
marking Box 0, skip to Item 147.

Marking Box x

If the respondent is unable to give you an answer, always
ask for his/her best estimate before marking  Box x "Don't
know." Only mark Box x as a last resort.  After marking
Box x, continue with Item 145.
             
Item 145 (Lost Pay Due to Injuries)

Item 145 is used to discover whether the respondent lost 
any pay because the time lost from work was not covered by 
unemployment insurance, sick leave, or some other source. 

Defining Terms

Unemployment insurance - Includes any money received
from State unemployment insurance funds or railroad
unemployment benefits.
                                
Sick leave - Includes continued payment of wages by the
respondent's employer while the respondent is unable to
work due to illness or injury.
                                
Some other source - Includes any money received from
private insurance plans, worker's compensation, and so
forth.  Worker's compensation is periodic money payments
made to workers who are injured on the job and in some
States to workers with nonoccupational temporary disability 
or illness.  Compensation checks could come from the State, 
private insurance companies, or from private businesses that 
insure their own workers.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent lost pay and was NOT
compensated monetarily for the time away from his/her
job due to injuries from the incident. Also mark Box 1 if a
self-employed respondent was paid for the time lost from
work, but he/she was obligated to hire someone to take
his/her place.  After marking Box 1, continue with Item 146.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent was compensated monetarily 
for the time lost from work due to his/her injuries from the 
incident.  After marking Box 2, skip to Item 147.

Item 146 (Amount of Lost
Pay Due to Injuries)

Item 146 is used to determine how much pay the respondent lost 
because he/she was unable to work due to injuries from the 
incident.  Also, if a self-employed respondent was compensated 
monetarily for his/her pay, but was required to hire someone to 
take his/her place, record the amount paid to the replacement 
as lost pay.  
                                
Enter the amount of lost pay in whole dollars on the line
provided in Item 146. Round the amount up or down as
necessary.  For example, if the amount given was $670.50,
enter "671," and, if the amount given was $670.49, enter
"670." If the amount was less than a $1, enter "1." 
                                
If the respondent has difficulty giving you a dollar amount, 
ask for his/her best estimate.  Only mark Box x "Don't know" 
as a last resort.
                                
After completing Item 146, continue with Item 147.
                                
Item 147 (Time Lost for
Other Reasons)

Item 147 is used to find out if the respondent lost time
from work for purposes OTHER THAN those related to his/her 
injuries suffered during the incident.  Since you will be 
asking this question regardless of whether or not the 
respondent was injured during the incident, only read
the word "other" when the respondent was injured.
                                
As you ask the question, pause after each example included 
in the question to allow the respondent time to answer. Since 
the respondent may have reasons not specifically mentioned 
in Boxes 1 through 4, continue asking, "Any other reason?", 
until you get a "No" reply.
                                
Item 147 relates specifically to time lost from work by the
respondent only; that is, the person who was victimized
during the incident. Items 151 and 152 collect similar
information for other household members.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the respondent lost time from work due to police-
related activities, such as cooperating with an investigation 
by identifying suspects in a lineup, helping to construct a 
composite drawing of the offender, identifying stolen items, 
and so forth.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the respondent lost time from work due to court-
related activities, such as testifying in court, attending a 
trial or hearing, talking to an attorney (either the prosecutor, 
the defense attorney, or the respondent's own lawyer), and so 
forth.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the respondent lost time from work to repair
property damaged during the incident, drop off and pick
up a damaged motor vehicle at a repair shop, visit an
optician to repair damaged eyeglasses, wait for a locksmith, 
and so forth.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the respondent lost time from work to replace 
stolen items, such as waiting for delivery persons, getting a 
replacement driver's license, Social Security card, credit 
card, checkbook, and so forth.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the respondent lost time from work for a reason 
that is not covered in the descriptions for Boxes 1 through 4. 
After marking Box 5, make sure to explain the reason on the 
"Specify" line.
                                
If you mark any of the Boxes 1 through 5, continue with
Item 148.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the respondent did not lose any time from work 
due to this incident and Boxes 1 through 5 in Item 147 are 
blank. After marking Box 6, skip to Item 151.

Item 148 (Amount of Time Lost)

Item 148 is used to identify how much time the respondent
lost from work to take care of ALL of the tasks marked in
Item 147.  As you ask the question in Item 148, read the
reasons marked in Item 147.  

Include time lost up to the day of the interview.  If the
respondent lost one or more days from work, enter the
number of whole days on the line provided in Item 148. If
the respondent answers in hours, always determine whether 
the hours were missed all in one day or more than one day.  

When calculating the number of days missed from work, it
is not necessary for the respondent to have missed an
entire workday.  For example, the respondent may have
lost 4 hours one workday to identify stolen property at the
police station and on another workday the respondent may
have lost 3 hours to wait for a replacement television to be
delivered.  In this example, you would enter "2" for the
number of days missed from work due to the incident. 

After entering the number of days missed from work in
Item 148, continue with Item 149.

Marking Box 0

Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent missed a total of less
than one full workday due to the reasons marked in Item 147.  
After marking Box 0, skip to Item 151.

Marking Box x

Before marking Box x, ask the respondent to give you his/her 
best estimate. Only mark Box x as a last resort. After marking 
Box x, continue with Item 149.

Item 149 (Loss of Pay for Any Other 
Reason)

Item 149 is used to determine whether the respondent lost
any pay because the time lost from work was not covered
by unemployment insurance, paid leave, or some other
source. 

Defining Terms

Unemployment insurance - Includes any money received from 
State unemployment insurance funds or railroad unemployment 
benefits.

Paid leave - Includes continued payment of wages by the
respondent's employer while the respondent is not at work,
such as "personal" or "annual" leave.

Some other source - Includes any money received from
private insurance plans, worker's compensation, and so
forth.  Compensation checks could come from the State,
private insurance companies, or from private businesses
that insure their own workers.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the respondent lost pay and was NOT
compensated monetarily for the time away from his/her
job due to the incident.  Also mark Box 1 if a self-
employed respondent was paid for the time lost from work, 
but he/she was obligated to hire someone to take his/her 
place.  After marking Box 1, continue with Item 150.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 "No" if the respondent was compensated monetarily 
for the time lost from work due to the incident. After marking 
Box 2, skip to Item 151.

Item 150 (Amount of Lost
Pay for Other Reasons) 

Item 150 is used to determine how much pay the respondent lost 
because he/she lost time from work due to the reasons marked in 
Item 147.  Also, if a self-employed respondent was compensated 
monetarily for his/her pay, but was required to hire someone to 
take his/her place, record the amount paid to the replacement 
as lost pay.  

Enter the amount of lost pay in whole dollars on the line
provided in Item 150.  Round the amount up or down as
necessary.  For example, if the amount given was $670.50,
enter "671," and, if the amount given was $670.49, enter
"670."  If the amount was less than a $1, enter "1." 

If the respondent has difficulty giving you a dollar
amount, ask for his/her best estimate.  Only mark Box x
"Don't know" as a last resort.

After completing Item 150, continue with Item 151.

Item 151 (Lost Time From
Work by Other Household
Members)

Item 151 is used to find out whether there were other
household members who were at least 16 years of age and
lost time from work due to the incident.  If the respondent
lost time from work due to the incident, read the word
"other" as you ask the question in Item 151.  Otherwise,
ask the question in Item 151 without the word "other."

Let the respondent decide how to answer this question. 
The time lost from work could be due to injuries suffered
by these household members or for any of the reasons
described in Item 147.

If you mark Box 1 "Yes," continue with Item 152.  If you
mark Box 2 "No," skip to Check Item T.

Item 152 (Time Lost From Work)

Item 152 is used to identify how much time household members 
OTHER THAN the respondent lost from work because of the incident. 

Include time lost up to the day of the interview.  If the
household member(s) lost one or more days from work, enter 
the number of whole days on the line provided in Item 152.  
If the time lost is in hours, always determine whether the 
hours were missed all in one day or more than one day.  

When calculating the number of days missed from work, it
is not necessary for the household member(s) to have
missed an entire workday.  For example, one household
member may have lost 4 hours one workday to visit a
doctor and on another workday another household member
may have lost 3 hours to wait for a replacement television
to be delivered.  In this example, you would enter "2" for
the number of days missed from work due to the incident. 

Marking Box 0

Mark Box 0 (zero) if the household member(s) missed less
than one full workday due to the incident.

Marking Box x

Before marking Box x, ask the respondent to give you his/her 
best estimate.  Only mark Box x as a last resort.  

After completing Item 152, continue with Check Item T.
                                 
Check Item T (Respondent
In Transit at Time of
Incident)

Check Item T is used to help you decide whether to continue with 
Item 153 or skip to Check Item U. Refer back to the boxes marked 
in Item 135 on page 17. If you marked Boxes 2, 3, or 4 in Item 
135, mark the "Yes" box in Check Item T and continue with Item 
153.  Otherwise, mark the "No" box in Check  Item T and skip to 
Check Item U.

Item 153 (Method of Transportation)

Item 153 is used to determine which means of transportation the 
respondent was using when the incident started or took place.  

If you know the answer to this question, you can verify the
answer with the respondent without asking the question. 
However, if you need to ask this question, make sure that
you word it properly based on the box marked in Item 135. 
Only mark one box to answer the question in Item 153.

If the respondent should mention a mode of transportation
not listed in Boxes 1 through 9, mark Box 10 "Other" and
enter the type of transportation on the "Specify" line.

After completing Item 153, continue with Check Item U.

Topic 9.  Completing Check Item U Through Check Item Z (Series 
of Crimes/Hate Crimes/Disability/Summary of Incidents)

Check Item U (Incident Part of a 
Series)

Check Item U is used to help you decide whether to continue 
with Item 154 to collect more information if the incident is 
part of a series or to skip to Item 161 on page 21 to start 
the hate crime questions.  If you are not sure how to mark 
Check Item U, refer back to Check Item D on page 1.  

If Box 2 "No" (is a "series") is marked in Check Item D,
then mark the "Yes" box in Check Item U and continue with 
Item 154. If Box 1 "Yes" (not a "series") is marked in Check 
Item D, then mark the "No" box in Check Item U and skip to 
Item 161 on page 21.

Item 154 (Number of Incidents in a 
Series)

Item 154 is used to verify how many incidents are included in 
the series for the 6-month reference period. Do NOT include an 
incident in the series that happened before the first day of 
the reference period or on the day of the interview.  It is 
possible that a respondent may give you a different number of 
incidents now that he/she has provided details for the most 
recent incident.

Different Number of Incidents Than 
Entered in Item 4

If the respondent gives you a number that is different than
the number of incidents provided in Item 4 on page 1, enter 
the new number in Item 154. If the number of incidents is less 
than six, the incidents do not qualify as a series.  If the 
number of incidents is six or more, the incidents still qualify 
as a series.  If the number given in Item 154 is six or more 
incidents, do NOT change the number of incidents entered in 
Item 4, even if they do not match.

Less Than Six Incidents

In most cases, this will not happen. However, if you determine 
that there are less than six incidents, then this incident is 
NOT part of a series and you need to:

        Complete a separate NCVS-2 for each incident that
        happened during the reference period.

        Correct the "Number of incidents" in Item 4 on the
        cover page of the NCVS-2. 

        Change the "Number of times" entries in Check 
        Item G on the NCVS-1 and in the screen question
        where these incidents were reported by the
        respondent. 

        Correct the number of Crime Incident Reports filled in
        Item 15c on the NCVS-1 cover page.

Don't Know

If the respondent cannot give you the number of incidents
in the series, ask the followup question in Item 154.  This
question is used to find out why the respondent is unable
to give you the number of incidents.  Mark the appropriate
box based on the respondent's answer to the followup
question:

        Mark Box 1 when the respondent has no way of
        knowing the number of incidents.

        Mark Box 2 when the crime happened too many
        times for the respondent to give you a number.

        Mark Box 3 when the respondent gives you a reason
        OTHER THAN Box 1 or Box 2 and then explain the
        reason on the "Specify" line.

After completing Item 154, continue with Item 155.
                
Item 155 (Quarters of Occurrence)

Item 155 is used to identify in which quarter(s) of the
calendar year the incidents in the series happened.  Ask 
the initial question to identify the month(s) in which 
these incidents occurred. If all the incidents in the 
series happened in one quarter (For example, all incidents
happened in January and February.), just enter the number 
from Item 154 in the appropriate column for Item 155 without 
asking the followup question.  
                                
If the incidents in the series occurred over more than one
quarter, ask the followup question to determine how many
incidents in the series happened in each three-month
period and then enter the appropriate number of incidents
on the line for the quarter in which they happened.  For
example, if the respondent tells you that the incidents
happened in June, July, and August, then you would ask,
"How many in June?" and "How many in July and August?" Make 
sure to only ask about months that fall within the respondent's 
reference period.

Respondent Has Difficulty Answering

If the respondent has difficulty remembering how many incidents 
took place by month or quarter:
                                
        Do not rush the respondent and allow sufficient time
        for him/her to recall these incidents.
                                
        Use neutral probe questions to help the respondent
        remember, such as "Did this type of incident happen
        about an equal number of times in June as it did in
        July and August or did it happen more in July and
        August than it did in June?"
                                
        If your probing questions fail, ask the respondent to
        give you his/her best estimate. For example, "You
        told me this type of incident happened (number
        entered in Item 154). Please give me your best
        estimate of how many times the incident happened in
        June and how many times in July and August."

Recording Numbers in Item 155

Once you determine how many incidents from the series
happened in each quarter within the reference period, enter
the exact number in the appropriate column for the quarter. 
You may need to add together incidents by month to arrive
at the total to enter for a quarter. Leave a column blank if
no incidents in the series happened during the 3-month
period for that quarter.
                                
Only include incidents that happened after the first day of
the reference period and up to, but not including, the day
of interview.  Probe as necessary to get a precise number
and do not enter a range of numbers.  Only enter "DK" if
you have asked probing questions and the respondent still
cannot provide an answer.
                                
The number of incidents in Items 4, 154, and 155 should
be independent and you should not attempt to reconcile
any differences for a series of incidents, as long as the 
total number in each of these items is at least six incidents. 
Also, do not change the date entered in Item 3 or the boxes
marked in Check Items B, C, or D.
                                
After completing Item 155, continue with Item 156.

Item 156 (Did Incidents
Occur in Same Place)

Item 156 is used to find out if the incidents in the series all
happened in the same place, or just some in the same place, or 
none of them in the same place or location.  Mark Box 1 for 
"All in the same place," Box 2 for "Some in the same place," 
and Box 3 for "None in the same place." Only mark one answer 
for this question and then continue with Item 157.
           
Item 157 (Same Offenders
for All Incidents)

Item 157 is used to find out if the offender(s) in all, some,
or none of the incidents in the series were the same person(s).  
Mark Box 1 if the offender(s)in all of the incidents were the 
same person(s). Mark Box 2 if the offender(s) in some of the 
incidents were the same person(s).  Mark Box 3 if the offender 
in each of the incidents was a different person. Only mark one 
answer for this question. After marking Box 1, 2, or 3, continue
with Item 158.
                                
If the respondent is unable to answer to this question, mark
Box 4 and skip to Item 159.
          
Item 158 (Offender's Relationship to
Respondent)

Item 158 is used to identify the relationship of each offender 
involved in the series of incidents to the respondent at the 
time of the incident. If there was more than one offender, mark 
all appropriate boxes. Make sure that the respondent understands 
that we are only interested in the relationship of each offender 
to the respondent, and NOT any relationships between one offender 
and another offender.
                                
The relationships are separated into two groups--Boxes 1 through 
4 are grouped under the heading "Relative" and Boxes 5 through 15 
are grouped under the heading "Nonrelative." Notice that Boxes 9 
and 10 are out of sequence.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 if the offender was either the husband or wife
of the respondent at the time of the incident, regardless of
whether or not they are still married at the time of the
interview.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 if the offender was an ex-spouse (ex-husband or ex-
wife) of the respondent at the time of the incident. 
                              
Accept the respondent's answer without probing to determine 
whether they are divorced or separated.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 if the offender was a father, mother, stepfather, or 
stepmother to the respondent.  Do not mark Box 3 if the offender 
was a mother-in-law or father-in-law, instead mark Box 4 and 
write in the relationship to the respondent at the time of 
the incident.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 if the offender is a relative of the respondent
OTHER THAN the relationships described in Boxes 1 through 3.  
Mark Box 4 if the offender is a child, brother, sister, aunt, 
uncle, cousin, grandparent, in-law, or other relative of the 
respondent by blood or marriage that is not covered in Boxes 
1 through 3.  After marking Box 4, always write in the 
relationship on the "Specify" line.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the offender was any type of friend or ex-
friend to the respondent at the time of the incident,
regardless of the offender's sex. Include responses such as
"good friend," "best friend," "boyfriend," "girlfriend,"
"just a friend," and so forth.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the offender was not related to the respondent 
by blood or marriage and was living close enough to the 
respondent at the time of the incident to be considered a 
neighbor.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the offender was not related to the respondent 
by blood or marriage and attended the same school as the 
respondent at the time of the incident.

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the offender was not related to the respondent 
by blood or marriage and lived with the respondent as a roommate 
or boarder at the time of the incident.

Marking Box 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15

Mark the most appropriate box(es) from Boxes 11, 12, 13, 14, 
and 15 if the offenders are nonrelatives, but are known by 
the respondent as business clients, patients, or supervisors, 
employees, or co-workers, including former supervisors, 
employees, or co-workers.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 if the offender is someone who was unknown or known 
only by sight to the respondent at the time of the incident. 

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 if the offender was not related to the respondent 
by blood or marriage and the nonrelative offender does not fit 
any of the descriptions in Boxes 5 through 9. After marking Box 
10, always write in the relationship of the offender to the 
respondent on the "Specify" line, such as the respondent's 
barber, electrician, and so forth.
                                
After completing Item 158, continue with Item 159.                
Item 159 (Were All Incidents the Same)

Item 159 is used to identify how the incidents in the series
may be different from one another. If the respondent answers 
"Yes" to this question, mark Box 1. However, if the respondent 
answers "No," mark Box 2 and ask the followup question to 
determine how they were different. For example, the offender 
may have vandalized the shed in one of the incidents or perhaps 
the offender used a weapon in two of the incidents. Make sure 
to explain clearly what made the incidents different on the 
line below the followup question.
                                
After completing Item 159, continue with Item 160.
       
Item 160(Is the Problem Ongoing)

Item 160 is used to find out whether the type of problem
that was recurring in the series of incidents is still
continuing or has ended.  Mark Box 1 "Yes" if the incidents 
are still happening.  If the respondent answers "No," ask 
the followup question to determine what terminated these 
incidents.  For example, the offender may have been arrested, 
the respondent moved to another house, the respondent changed 
schools, and so forth. Make sure to explain clearly what 
brought these incidents to an end.
                                
After completing Item 160, continue with Check Item V1.

Check Item V1 (Crime Categories for Series)

Check Item V1 is used by you to help classify the type of
series crime and it is very important that you mark this
check item accurately.  Based on the facts gathered to this
point, select and mark the first or lowest numbered box
that best describes what happened during this series of
incidents.  Only mark ONE box for this Check Item. If more 
than on box/category describes this series of incidents, 
always mark the lowest numbered box, because a "contact crime" 
is considered more serious than a "noncontact crime."
                                
Boxes 1 through 4 are grouped together under the heading "Contact 
crimes." Contact crimes involve an actual or threatened face-to-
face physical confrontation between the offender and the 
respondent.  Boxes 5 through 12 are grouped together under 
the heading "Noncontact crimes." Noncontact crimes do NOT 
involve an actual or threatened physical confrontation 
between the offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 1

Mark Box 1 when all incidents in the series involve the
offender physically attacking or threatening to physically
attack the respondent in the course of the respondent's
job. Only mark Box 1 if the incidents relate somehow to
the respondent's job.  For example, a prison guard reports
eight incidents in which prisoners threatened to physically
harm her or an attendant at a parking garage reports seven
incidents in which he was physically attacked and robbed
while on the job.

Marking Box 2

Mark Box 2 when all incidents in the series involve completed or 
attempted violence between spouses, other relatives, friends, 
neighbors, and so forth.  For example, a respondent's nephew has 
threatened to kill her on several occasions if she does not give 
him money or a respondent's ex-spouse physically attacked her on 
several occasions because she would not take him back.

Marking Box 3

Mark Box 3 when all incidents in the series involve completed 
or threatened violence at school or on school property.  For 
example, a student threatened to attack the respondent on 
several occasions in the school parking lot.

Marking Box 4

Mark Box 4 when all incidents in the series involve some
type of physical violence or threat of physical violence
between the offender and the respondent OTHER THAN
those types described in Boxes 1 through 3.  After marking
Box 4, make sure to explain clearly the type of violent
contact or threat of violent contact on the "Specify" line. 
For example, someone grabbed respondent's purse from her 
shoulder, knocked her down on the ground, and ran with the 
purse on multiple occasions.

Marking Box 5

Mark Box 5 if the series of incidents involves the theft or
attempted theft of motor vehicles AND there was no contact 
between the offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 6

Mark Box 6 if the series of incidents involves the theft or
attempted theft of parts ATTACHED to a motor vehicle, such 
as hubcaps, wheels, CD players, batteries, gasoline, and so 
forth AND there was no contact between the offender and the 
respondent.

Marking Box 7

Mark Box 7 if the series of incidents involves the theft or
attempted theft of items left inside a motor vehicle that are
NOT ATTACHED to the motor vehicle, such as a bowling ball, 
cellular phone, golf clubs, wallet, tools, clothes, and so 
forth AND there was no contact between the offender and the 
respondent.

Marking Box 8

Mark Box 8 if the series of incidents involves the theft or
attempted theft of items belonging to the respondent at school 
or on school property AND there was no contact between the 
offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 9

Mark Box 9 if the series of incidents involves the illegal
entry or attempted illegal entry into the respondent's home,
other building on his/her property, a second home, or a
motel or hotel room where he/she is staying AND there
was no contact between the offender and the respondent.

Marking Box 10

Mark Box 10 if the series of incidents involves the theft or
attempted theft from the respondent's home or the property
surrounding the home by someone the respondent knows,
such as a roommate, babysitter, or some other person
known to the respondent and this person did NOT illegally
enter the home or property.  Do not mark Box 10 if there
was any contact between the offender and the respondent,
instead mark the appropriate box under Contact crimes.

Marking Box 11

Mark Box 11 if the series of incidents involves the theft or
attempted theft from the respondent's home or the property
surrounding the home by someone the respondent does
NOT know, such as an appliance repair person or traveling
sales person and this person did NOT illegally enter the
home or property.  Do not mark Box 11 if there was any
contact between the offender and the respondent, instead
mark the appropriate box under Contact crimes.

Marking Box 12

Mark Box 12 if the series of incidents involves a theft or
attempted theft and the circumstances do not fit the
descriptions in Boxes 5 through 11.  After marking      
Box 12, make sure to clearly explain the type of theft or
attempted theft on the "Specify" line.  Do not mark Box 12
if there was any contact between the offender and the
respondent, instead mark the appropriate box under
Contact crimes.
                                
After completing Check Item V1, continue with Item 161.
                                
Item 161 (Suspect Incident Was a 
Hate Crime)

Item 161 is used to determine whether the respondent has any 
reason to suspect that the incident was a hate crime or crime 
of prejudice or bigotry.  Since Item 161 is the first in a 
series of "hate crime" questions that continue through Item 
166, make sure to read the lead-in statement and then
continue with the question in Item 161.  As you read the
lead-in statement, choose the correct wording based on
whether there was one offender or multiple offenders. 
                                
It is very important to read the lead-in statement and the
question exactly as it is worded on the questionnaire.  
This wording has been tested and analyzed thoroughly and
changing the wording during an interview could jeopardize 
the results.

Explaining "Hate Crimes or Crimes 
of Prejudice or Bigotry"

If a respondent should ask you what you mean by the
phrase "hate crimes or crimes of prejudice or bigotry," 
you can tell the respondent that it is a crime in which an
offender targets one or more persons out of hatred towards
certain characteristics associated with a group.  For
example, because an offender hates all persons of the
Jewish faith, he spray painted a swastika on the garage
door of each household on Tucker Street whose name on
the mailbox sounded Jewish to the offender.
                                
However, if a respondent claims that a classmate keeps
picking fights with her because she is jealous of the
respondent, this type of incident is NOT considered a
"hate crime" or a "crime of prejudice or bigotry."
                                
Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and then continue with Item 162.  
Mark Box 2 for a "No" answer and Box 3 for a "Don't know" 
answer.  After marking Box 2 or Box 3, skip to Item 167 on 
page 23. 
               
Item 162 (Why Offender Targeted Respondent)

Item 162 is used to identify the type of prejudice that the
respondent suspects motivated the offender to commit the
crime.  Notice that Item 162 starts with a lead-in statement
and then continues with six separate questions.
                                
Always read the lead-in statement and then read the first
question:
                                
"Do you suspect the offender(s) targeted you because of your 
race?"
                                
After asking this question, pause to let the respondent answer.  
Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No" answer, and Box 
3 for a "Don't know" answer.  Unless you get interrupted, you 
do not need to read the entire question for the remaining 
questions.  For example, just ask "Your religion?".

Understanding "Race"

When we use the term "race," we mean whether the person is 
White, Black/African American, American Indian or Alaska 
Native, Asian, Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander.  
Keep in mind that "Spanish, Hispanic, or Latino" relates to 
a person's ethnic background or national origin, NOT to his/
her race.

Reading Examples

Questions (c) and (d) have examples in parentheses as part
of the question.  These examples are included to help
avoid any misinterpretation of what we mean by "ethnic
background or national origin" and "disabilities."  Make
sure to always read these examples as part of the question.
                                
However, when you get to question (f), ONLY read the
examples in parentheses and bold type when you get a
"Yes" answer to question (f).  After reading the examples,
a respondent may tell you that he/she meant something
different. If this happens, line through the "Yes" answer
for question (f) and mark Box 2 "No."

Understanding "Gender"

Most respondents will probably understand what we mean
by "gender," but, if someone seems unsure, you can add
"by this we mean male or female."
                                
After completing Item 162, continue with Item 163.

Item 163 (Association With Certain 
People or Offender's Perception)

After completing all parts of Item 162, read the lead-in
statement first and then ask both questions in Item 163. 
These questions are used to determine if the respondent
feels that the offender targeted him/her due to:
                              
      The respondent's association with persons who
      have specific characteristics, such as being Asian,
      Catholic, Hispanic, physically disabled, male or
      female, homosexual, and so forth.  Here is an
      example:  An offender is prejudiced against
      homosexuals and believes that the respondent is
      homosexual because she lives with a woman who is
      known to be homosexual.
                                
      The offender's perception of the respondent's
      characteristics or religious beliefs.  Here is an
      example:  An offender is prejudiced against persons
      of Italian ancestry.  This offender believes that 
      Tina Martino is Italian because of her personal
      characteristics and her name. 
                                
Make sure to read the lead-in statement correctly based on
whether there was one offender or multiple offenders. 
After reading the lead-in statement:
                                
          Ask question (a) first,
                           
          Wait for the respondent's answer,
                                
          If the answer is "Yes," mark Box 1 and make sure to
          enter a brief description of WHY the respondent
          suspects that he/she was targeted due to his/her
          association with people who have certain
          characteristics or religious beliefs.
                                
          If the answer is "No," mark Box 2. If the answer is
          "Don't know," mark Box 3.
          Once you have recorded an answer for question (a),
          ask question (b) and follow the same procedure as
          instructed for question (a).

Check Item V2 ("Yes" Answer in Previous
Questions)

Check Item V2 is designed to determine whether you need
to continue with Item 164 or skip to Item 167.  If you
marked one or more "Yes" answers (Box 1) in either    
Item 162 or 163, you need to mark the "Yes" box in Check
Item V2 and continue with Item 164.  However, if you
marked ALL "No" or "Don't know" answers (Box 2 or 3)
in Items 162 and 163, mark the "No" box in Check      
Item V2, stop asking the hate crime questions, and skip to
Item 167 on page 23.

Item 164 (Evidence of a Hate Crime)

Item 164 is designed to find out if the respondent has any
evidence that the reported incident was a hate crime or a
crime of prejudice or bigotry.  
                                
If you get a "Yes" answer, mark Box 1 and then ask the
question in Item 165 to determine what type of evidence
the respondent has that makes him/her suspect the incident
was a hate crime or crime of prejudice or bigotry.
                                
If you get a "No" or "Don't know" answer, mark Box 2 for
"No" and mark Box 3 for "Don't know."  If you mark
either Box 2 or 3, make sure that you ask the structured
probe question for Item 164.  This probe question is
designed to help ensure that we get an accurate answer
concerning evidence of a hate crime. 
                                
If the probe question results in a "Yes" answer, line
through the "No" or "Don't know" answer and mark Box 1
"Yes."  However, if you still get a "No" or "Don't know"
answer after asking the probe question, leave Box 2 or 3
marked and skip to Item 167 on page 23.
                
Item 165 (Types of Evidence)

Item 165 is designed to pinpoint the type of evidence that
leads the respondent to suspect that the reported incident
was a hate crime or crime of prejudice or bigotry.        
Item 165 starts with a lead-in statement and continues with
seven separate questions, (a) through (g).
                                
Follow these steps to complete Item 165:
               
Step
 1  Start by reading the lead-in statement exactly as it
    is worded on the questionnaire.  It is not necessary
    to repeat this statement for each of the seven
    questions.  
                                
 2  Next, ask the respondent question (a).
                                
 3  After asking question (a), wait for the respondent
    to answer.
                                
 4  Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No"
    answer, or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer.
                                
 5  Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each of the remaining
    questions in Item 165.
                                
Because of the wording and examples provided for these questions, 
most respondents will probably answer each question without 
requiring any added explanations.  After completing Item 165, 
continue with Item 166.
                  
Item 166 (Told Police Suspected 
Incident Was a Hate Crime)

Item 166 is the last "hate crime" question in the Crime Incident 
Report (NCVS-2) and is used to determine if the respondent told 
the police that he/she believed the incident was motivated 
by the offender's hatred, prejudice, or bigotry.  Mark Box 
1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No," as appropriate. Once you complete 
Item 166, continue with Item 167. 

Disability Questions

Items 167 through 176 cover the "disability" questions in
the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2). In October 1998,
President Clinton signed into law the Crime Victims With
Disabilities Awareness Act.  This Act requires the U.S.
Department of Justice to collect information about the
victimization of persons with disabilities, especially 
those persons with developmental disabilities.  
                                
Keep in mind that the "developmental disability" definition 
which we are using for the NCVS was determined by Federal 
law and may differ from what you commonly think of as a 
developmental disability (for example, mental retardation). 
                                
There are two main purposes for collecting this information:
                                
      1 To increase our knowledge and awareness about
        crimes in which persons with developmental
        disabilities have been victimized, and
                                
      2 To help the Federal government in developing new
        strategies for reducing crimes against
        developmentally disabled persons.

Item 167 (Limitations Due
to Health Conditions)

Since Item 167 is the first in a series of disability
questions, always introduce this series of questions by
reading the lead-in statement.  Then ask each of the seven
questions in Item 167 to discover whether the respondent
is limited in performing any of the seven major life
activities.
                                
Follow these steps to complete Item 167:
                                
Step
 1  First read the lead-in statement and ask the lead-in
    question exactly as it is worded on the questionnaire. 
                                
 2  Next, ask question (a) of the respondent.                              
                                
 3  After asking question (a), wait for the respondent to
    answer.
                                
 4  Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No"
    answer, or Box 3 for a "Don't know" answer.                       
 5  Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each of the remaining
    six questions in Item 167.

Check Item V4 ("Yes" Answer in 
Previous Item)

Check Item V4 is used to help you decide:
                                
        Whether to continue asking the disability questions
        with Item 168
                                
        OR
                                
        Whether to skip out of the disability questions and
        go to Check Item W to complete your summary
        report for the incident.
                                
        Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V4 if you marked AT
        LEAST one "Yes" answer (Box 1) in Item 167.  Then
        continue with Item 168.
                                
        Mark the "No" box in Check Item V4 if you marked ALL
        "No" or "Don't know" answers (Box 2 or 3) in Item 167. 
        Then skip to Check Item W and complete the summary
        report for the incident.

Item 168 (Identifying Health Conditions)

After determining in Item 167 that the respondent is limited in 
one or more major life activities, Item 168 is used to identify 
up to three different health conditions, impairments, or 
disabilities which cause these limitations. As you ask the 
question for Item 168, finish the question by reading the 
activity from Item 167 that the respondent has problems 
performing.  
                                
Notice that there is a Field Representative's instruction
reminding you to:
                                
          List up to three DIFFERENT conditions reported by the 
          respondent and
                                
          Make sure not to repeat the same condition (for
          example, do not list Arthritis twice).
                                 
Here is an example for asking the question in Item 168:
The respondent answers "Yes" to the following question in
Item 167, "Mobility, such as bending, walking, climbing
stairs, or carrying something weighing approximately  
10 pounds?"  In this case, ask the question in Item 168 as
follows:  "What specific health conditions, impairments,
or disabilities do you have which limit your ability to
bend, walk, climb stairs, or carry something weighing
approximately 10 pounds?"  

Marking Box 0

Mark Box 0 (zero) "None" if the respondent tells you that
he/she does not have any health conditions, impairments,
or disabilities or that it is just "old age" or "laziness" 
that keeps him/her from doing certain things, such as climbing
stairs or doing housework. After marking Box 0, skip to Check 
Item W and complete the summary report for the incident.

First Health Condition

If the respondent mentions only one health condition, enter 
the name of the condition on the "First health condition" 
line. 

Second Health Condition

If the respondent mentions two unique health conditions, such 
as Diabetes and Parkinson's Disease, use a separate line for 
each health condition.  For example, enter Diabetes on the 
"First health condition" line and Parkinson's Disease 
on the "Second health condition" line. 

Third Health Condition

If the respondent mentions three unique health conditions, such 
as Diabetes, Parkinson's Disease, and Lupus, use a separate line 
for each health condition.  For example, enter Diabetes on the 
"First health condition" line, Parkinson's Disease on the "Second 
health condition" line, and Lupus on the "Third health condition" 
line.
                                
If the respondent mentions more than three health conditions, 
probe so you can identify the three conditions which are the 
MAJOR causes for the respondent's limitations and then enter 
those three conditions in Item 168.

Check Item V5 (Only One
Health Condition)

Following Check Item V5, there are two sets of disability
questions.  One set (Items 169 through 171) is worded
specifically for respondents who report only ONE health
condition in Item 168, and the other set of questions 
(Items 172 through 174) is worded specifically for
respondents who report two or three health conditions in
Item 168.
                                
Check Item V5 is designed to help you decide whether to: 
                                
        Continue with the set of disability questions starting 
        with Item 169 for ONE health condition reported in Item 
        168.
                                
        OR
                                
        Skip to Item 172 to ask the disability questions for
        two or three health conditions reported in Item 168.
                                
Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V5 if you only listed one 
health condition in Item 168 and then continue with Item 169.
                                
Mark the "No" box in Check Item V5 if you listed two or three 
health conditions in Item 168 and then skip to Item 172.
   
Item 169 (Condition Lasted Longer 
Than months)

Item 169 is used to determine whether the health condition
reported in Item 168 has lasted longer than 6 months.  As
you read the lead-in statement, include the health condition 
listed in Item 168.  For example, "You just reported that 
Arthritis limits your major life activities." Then ask the 
question, "Has this condition lasted longer than six months?"
                                
Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer and Box 2 for a "No" answer. 
Once you have completed Item 169, continue with Item 170.
                 
Item 170 (Severity of Health Condition)

Item 170 is used to find out if the respondent considers
his/her health condition to be mild, moderate, or severe. 
As you ask the question, include the health condition listed
in Item 168.  For example, "Do you consider your Arthritis 
to be mild, moderate, or severe?"
                                
Mark Box 1 for "Mild," Box 2 for "Moderate," and  Box 3 for 
"Severe." Mark Box 4 "Don't know"if the respondent really is 
not sure how to answer this question. Only mark Box 4 as a 
last resort.

Check Item V6(Respondent Is 22 Years
Old or Older)

Check Item V6 is used to help you decide whether to continue 
with Item 171 or skip to Item 175.  You will only ask the 
question in Item 171 if the respondent is at least 22 years 
of age. If you are not sure whether the respondent is 22 
years of age or older, you can find the respondent's current 
age by referring to either:
                               
        Item 17 on the household's Control Card or
                                
        Item 21 of the respondent's personal characteristics
        on the NCVS-1.
                                
Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V6 if the respondent is at 
least 22 years of age and then continue with Item 171.  
                                
Mark the "No" box in Check Item V6 if the respondent is younger 
than 22 years of age and then skip to Item 175.

Item 171 (Health Condition Started 
Before Age 22)

Item 71 is used to find out if the health condition listed in
Item 168 started before the respondent turned 22 years old.

Mark Box 1 for a "Yes" answer, Box 2 for a "No" answer, and Box 
3 for a "Don't know" answer.  Only mark Box 3 as a last resort.  
After completing Item 171, skip to Item 175.

Item 172 (Health Conditions Lasting Longer
Than 6 Months)

Item 172 is similar to Item 169 in that you are trying to
determine which of the two or three conditions listed in
Item 168 lasted longer than 6 months.  As you read the
lead-in statement, include the health conditions listed in
Item 168 and read them in the same order as they are listed
in Item 168.  For example, "You just reported that Diabetes 
and Parkinson's Disease limit your major life activities.  
Then ask the question, "Which of these conditions lasted 
longer than six months?

Marking Box 0

Mark Box 0 (zero) if NONE of the health conditions listed
in Item 168 have lasted longer than 6 months.

First Health Condition

If the first health condition listed in Item 168 has lasted
longer than 6 months, enter that health condition on the
"First health condition" line for Item 172.

Second Health Condition

If the second health condition listed in Item 168 has lasted
longer than 6 months, enter that health condition on the
"Second health condition" line for Item 172.

Third Health Condition

If there is a third health condition listed in Item 168 and 
it has lasted longer than 6 months, enter that health 
condition on the "Third health condition" line for Item 172.

After completing Item 172, continue with Item 173.

Item 173 (Severity of Health Conditions)

Item 173 is used to find out how severe the respondent
considers each reported health condition to be--mild,
moderate, or severe.  As you ask the question for the first
health condition listed in Item 168, include the name of 
the condition where indicated.  For example, "Do you
consider your Diabetes to be mild, moderate, or severe?" 

Always refer to Item 168 for the complete list of health
conditions and the sequence in which to ask about each
health condition.  Do NOT refer to Item 172, since Item 172 
only shows the health conditions that have lasted more than 
6 months.  

Also, accept the respondent's answer for Item 173 without
probing since we are interested in how the respondent
perceives the severity of each health condition.

Mark Box 1 for "Mild," Box 2 for "Moderate," Box 3 for "Severe," 
and Box 4 for "Don't know." Only mark Box 4 as a last resort.

Second Health Condition

Notice that there is a Field Representative instruction
following the initial question in Item 173. This instruction
tells you to only read the second question if a second
health condition is listed in Item 168. If the respondent
only has one health condition, you need to:

          Line through your entries in Items 172 and 173.

          Correct your entry in Check Item V5 on page 23 by
          lining through the "No" box and marking the "Yes"
          box.

          Ask the questions in Items 169 and 170. 

          Complete Check Item V6 and, if appropriate, ask the
          question in Item 171.


When the respondent has a second health condition, ask the 
second question in Item 173 including the second health 
condition listed in Item 168. For example, "And what about 
your Parkinson's Disease.  Do you consider it to be mild, 
moderate, or severe?" Mark the appropriate answer box 
based on the respondent's answer.

Third Health Condition

Following the second question, you will see another Field
Representative instruction.  This instruction tells you to
only ask the third question if there is a third health
condition listed in Item 168.  There may be instances in
which it will not be necessary to ask the third question in
Item 173.  However, if you do ask it, include the name of
the third health condition where indicated in the question. 
Mark the appropriate answer box based on the respondent's 
answer.  

After completing Item 173, continue with Check Item V7.

Check Item V7 (Respondent 22 Years Old
or Older)

Check Item V7 is very similar to Check Item V6 and is used to 
help you decide whether or not to ask the question in Item 174.  
If you are not sure if the respondent is at least 22 years of 
age, you can find the respondent's current age by referring 
either to:

          Item 17 on the household's Control Card or 

          Item 21 of the respondent's personal characteristics
          on the NCVS-1. 

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item V7 if the respondent is at 
least 22 years of age and then ask the question in Item 174 
next.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item V7 if the respondent is 
less than 22 years of age and then skip to Item 175.

Item 174(Health Conditions Which Started
Before Age 22)

Item 174 is very similar to Item 171 and is used to find out if 
any of the health conditions reported in Item 168 began before 
the respondent turned 22 years old. 

Marking Box 0

Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent tells you that none of the 
health conditions listed in Item 168 began before the respondent 
turned 22 years old.

First Health Condition

If the respondent tells you that the first health condition
listed in Item 168 began prior to his/her 22nd birthday,
enter that health condition on the "First health condition"
line for Item 174.

Second Health Condition

If the respondent tells you that the second health condition
listed in Item 168 began prior to his/her 22nd birthday, enter 
that health condition on the "Second health condition" line for 
Item 174.

Third Health Condition

If there is a third health condition listed in Item 168 and the 
condition began prior to the respondent's 22nd birthday, enter 
that health condition on the "Third health condition" line for 
Item 174.

After completing Item 174, continue with Item 175.

Item 175 (Suspect Victimization Resulted
From Health Condition)

Item 175 is used to determine whether the respondent has any 
reason to suspect that he/she was victimized during the incident 
because of his/her health condition(s), impairment(s), or 
disability(ies).

If the respondent answers:

        "Yes"         Mark Box 1 and continue with Check
                      Item V8. 

        "No"           Mark Box 2 and skip to Check Item W.

        "Don't know"   Mark Box 3 and skip to Check Item W.

Check Item V8 (More Than One Health
Condition)

Check Item V8 is used to help you decide whether to ask the 
question in Item 176 or skip to Check Item W.  Mark the "Yes" 
box in Check Item V8 if more than one health condition is 
listed in Item 168 and then continue with Item 176. However, 
if only one health condition is listed in Item 168, skip to 
Check Item W and complete the summary report for the incident.

Item 176 (Identifying Health Conditions)

Item 176 is used to identify which of the health conditions
listed in Item 168 the respondent feels may have caused
the offender to target him/her during the incident. 

Marking Box 0

Mark Box 0 (zero) if the respondent believes that NONE
of the health conditions listed in Item 168 were the cause
for the offender targeting him/her during the incident.

First Health Condition

If the respondent believes that the first health condition
listed in Item 168 was the cause for the offender targeting
him/her during the incident, enter that health condition on
the "First health condition" line for Item 176.

Second Health Condition

If the respondent believes that the second health condition
listed in Item 168 was the cause for the offender targeting
him/her during the incident, enter that health condition on
the "Second health condition" line for Item 176.

Third Health Condition

If there is a third health condition listed in Item 168 and
the respondent believes that this health condition was the
cause for the offender targeting him/her during the
incident, enter that health condition on the "Third health
condition" line for Item 176.

Item 176 is the last of the disability questions.  Once you
have completed Item 176, continue with the summary report in 
Check Item W.

Check Item W (Summary Report)

Check Item W is designed for you to summarize all of the
pertinent facts surrounding a reported crime incident. 
Each summary report should be written so that anyone
reading it can get a clear, well-defined picture of how the
respondent was victimized.

Include in the summary report any details that you feel are
not evident from the answers in the NCVS-2.  This is very
important because, before sending a case for processing,
editors often need more specific details than they can get
from other entries on the NCVS-2.  When this happens,
they must rely on what is written in your summary report.  

As you write your summary report, be careful not to use
misleading words or phrases that may raise more questions 
about the incident, instead of clarifying what really 
happened.

For example: 
When you ask if the offender threatened the respondent
with harm in any way, the respondent answers "No." 
Also, the respondent tells you in Item 27 that her husband
was harassing her and using abusive language.  However,
in the summary, you use the phrase "verbally threatened
her." Be careful that the words and phrases you use in
summary reports help explain the situation, instead of
adding more confusion to the situation.

Key Points to Cover

Use these key words to jog your memory when writing a
summary report--who, what, where, when, and how.

Who - Using the person's line number (L1, L2, and so
forth) from the household roster, identify all household
members who were involved in the incident, even if the
member was a Type Z noninterview.  Also include any
nonhousehold members who were involved in the incident.  
In the summary report, identify that they are nonhousehold 
members and use specific descriptions, such as "friend," 
"neighbor," or "co-worker" to show their relationship to 
the respondent.  Avoid using pronouns to describe persons 
involved in an incident.

Reminder:  
If other current household members who are at least       
12 years old were also victims of a personal crime with

contact, you need to complete a separate NCVS-2 for each
of these persons who you are able to interview.

What - Explain the type of crime and any pertinent details
related to the crime incident--purse stolen & offender
threatened to stab L1 while she was washing her hands.

Where - Explain where the crime took place--in a restaurant 
restroom.

When - Explain when the incident took place At 8:30 p.m. on 
December 21.

How - Explain how the crime was executed--offender yanked 
purse from L1's shoulder & ran/no injury to L1/reported to 
police/property not recovered.

Weapons Used

Item 22 - Did the offender have a weapon such as a gun or 
knife, or something to use as a weapon, such as a bottle or 
wrench?

Item 23 - What was the weapon?  Anything else?

If a respondent tells you in Items 22 and 23 of the NCVS-
2 that an offender had a weapon other than any type of
gun, rifle, shotgun, or knife, your summary report needs to
explain if and how this object was used as a weapon. Since 
guns, rifles, shotguns, or knives are obviously weapons, it 
is not necessary to explain if and how one of these weapons 
was used as a weapon in the summary report. 

For example:
L1 was arguing with neighbor/neighbor picked up rock/threw it 
at L1 & hit L1 in head/L1 treated at hospital emergency room & 
got 4 stitches for the cut.

Keep in mind that thrown objects are only considered weapons 
if they hit and seriously injure the respondent. BB guns and 
tear gas guns are only considered weapons if they are used as 
clubs.  

The following objects are NEVER considered weapons:

          Animals
          Pellet guns
          Chloroform
          Food
          Mace or pepper spray
          Parts of the body
          Small empty cans
          Tear gas
          Water balloons

Sex-Related Crimes

Since sex-related crimes are rare compared to other types
of crimes, include as many details as the respondent is
willing to provide.  This is important so that we can classify 
any sex-related crimes into the correct category--rape, 
attempted rape, sexual assault, or unwanted sexual contact.

Avoid using phrases like "made sexually explicit comments," 
"unwanted sexual contact," or "unwanted sexual advances."  
These phrases do not provide us with enough information to 
determine what actually happened. We need to know what was 
actually said, what parts of the body were touched, whether 
or not force was used, and so forth.

Even though we want all the pertinent facts, do not probe
beyond the structured probes that are provided in Items 27,
28, 29,  and 31 of the NCVS-2.  For example, here is the
structured probe for Item 27, "Do you mean forced or
coerced sexual intercourse including attempts?".

Stolen Property

Item 91 - "Did the (property/money) the offender tried to
take belong to you personally, to someone else in the
household, or to both you and other household members?"

Item 97 - "Did the stolen (property/money) belong to you
personally, to someone else in the household, or to both
you and other household members?"

Items 91 and 97 on the NCVS-2 relate to ownership of
property and/or money that an offender tried to steal or
stole.  If property and/or money involved in the incident
belongs to the respondent AND other household members
OR just to other household members, make sure to
specifically identify these persons by their line numbers
(L1, L2, and so forth).  

If property and/or money involved in the incident belongs
to nonhousehold members, mention that they are
nonhousehold members, along with a specific description
of their relationship to the respondent such as co-worker,
friend, cousin, and so forth.

Item 104 - "What was the value of the PROPERTY that
was taken?  Include recovered property.  (Exclude any
stolen cash/checks/credit cards.  If jointly owned with 
a nonhousehold member(s), include only share owned by
household members.)"

When completing Item 104 on the NCVS-2, please note:
If stolen property is jointly owned by one or more
household members together with one or more 
nonhousehold members, only include the dollar amount
for the portion that was owned by the household members.

When identifying the value of stolen property that was
owned jointly by a household member and a nonhousehold
member, show a separate dollar amount in your summary
report to differentiate between the share owned by the
household member and the share owned by the nonhousehold 
member.  Do not use names in your summary report; instead, 
use line numbers for household members and relationships 
to the respondent for nonhousehold members.

Offender is a Police
Officer

Whenever an offender is a police officer, there are specific
facts that we would like to have in your summary report. 
Include as many of these facts as you can gather.  Be
diplomatic and ask for the following facts in a way that
does not aggravate the respondent:

          Get a complete description of both the officer's and
          the victim's actions.

          Find out if the officer used or attempted to use
          his/her gun or billy club.

          Determine if the victim signed a complaint and, if so,
          include any additional details (for example, victim
          was arrested).

          Ascertain whether any property was confiscated by
          the police.  If so, find out what was done with the
          confiscated property--was it returned, kept as
          evidence, and so forth.

Commercial Establishment

If a crime incident occurred at a business or commercial
establishment, include in your summary report as many
facts as possible to provide a complete picture of what
took place.  Also, make sure to mention whether the
business is recognizable or unrecognizable.

For example:
L2 was shot in arm during clothing store robbery (recognizable 
business)/Off. shot L2 with small handgun as L2 reached under 
register to set off burglar alarm/L2 treated @ emergency room/
Store clothing & displays damaged/store closed for 2 days/Est. 
$50k in stolen money, damages & lost sales to store/Off. 
arrested.

Although the NCVS is not interested in the theft of property or 
cash belonging to a recognizable business, we do want this 
information in the summary report when it helps in describing a 
situation in which:

          Personal property was also stolen from a household
          member.

          A household member received a face-to-face threat
          of physical harm, was attacked, or an attempt was
          made to attack the household member.

          Someone illegally entered, broke into or attempted to
          break into the sample housing unit.

Series Crimes

When writing a summary report for series crimes, start by providing 
a GENERAL description of the entire series of incidents.  For the 
last or most recent incident in the series, provide a DETAILED 
description of the incident following the who, what, where, when, 
and how format.

Verifying Summary Reports

Once you have completed the summary report, ALWAYS read it back 
to the respondent.  This gives the respondent a final opportunity 
to either change or add any facts that may provide a clearer 
picture of the crime incident.

Lengthy Summary Reports

By the time you get to Check Item W, you should have a pretty good 
idea how lengthy your summary report will need to be to provide 
all the required facts. If you feel that it will take too much of 
the respondent's time to wait while you write out the summary 
report, just make sure that you have all the pertinent facts AND 
verify these facts with the respondent.  Once you leave the sample 
household, then write out your summary report in Check Item W.

If the answer space for Check Item W is not adequate, you can 
continue your summary report in the blank space below the Field 
Representative instructions for Check Item W, as well as in the 
"Notes" space on page 26 of the

NCVS-2.  However, if you continue on page 26, note that fact in 
Check Item W.

Saving Time and Space

In an effort to promote uniformity, we are providing a list of 
standard abbreviations and symbols that you may use to help save 
time and space:

Separate each main thought or piece of information with a slash 
mark "/".

For example:
L2 was punched in stomach by L3 in movie theater lobby during 
argument/usher called police/no weapons & no arrests/L2 didn't 
need medical care.

Consistency will help to make your summary report easier to 
read and comprehend.  When you start using one form of an 
abbreviation or a symbol within your summary report be consistent 
and continue using the same abbreviation or symbol throughout the 
summary report. 

Things to Avoid

When writing summary reports for crime incidents, avoid
the following bad habits:

          Using very general and vague statements or any
          extraneous or unnecessary words or phrases.  Write
          the facts in short, concise sentences and/or phrases.

          Using the exact wording from the marked answer
          category of an NCVS-2 item.

          Using pronouns (she, he, him, her, they, their, and so
          forth).

          Using abbreviations that most editors would not
          understand.

          Omitting pertinent facts that could help clarify
          details of an incident.

          Handwriting that is sloppy and illegible.

Examples of Good Summary Reports

Here are some examples of good summary reports:

     . At 9 p.m. on 10/12, L1's drunken ex-spouse
       (nonhousehold member) was arguing & using
       abusive language while in L1's home/ex-spouse
       refused to leave & threatened to burn down the
       house if L1 didn't take him back/police arrested ex-
       spouse/no injury to L1/lamp broken valued @ $40.

     . In a.m. on 3/24, L1 (school teacher) had $10 stolen
       from desk drawer in classroom while eating lunch in
       school cafeteria/police not notified/off. never
       caught/$10 not returned.

     . At 3:30 p.m. on 7/10, L2 (apt. mgr.) was shot in the
       arm by angry evicted tenant in L2's office/small hand
       gun used/police notified & off. arrested/L2
       hospitalized overnight.

     . At 2 a.m. on 8/4, off. attempted to break into L1's
       home/no one present/security alarm scared off. &
       off. ran away/damage to door & lock valued @
       $50/police notified/off. not found.

     .  At 4 p.m. on 2/13, L2's antique shop robbed at
        gunpoint by two off./$1,500 taken from shop
        register/$50 taken from L2/gold necklace & purse
        taken from customer/no injuries or store
        damage/police notified/off. caught & prosecuted.

     . At 10:30 p.m. on 5/15, off. threatened to rape L2 at
       gunpoint/siren from passing police car scared off./L2
       got free & ran to convenience store for help/L2
       bruised/police notified/off. never found.

     . At 2 p.m. on 12/24, off. forcibly grabbed L2/kissed
       L2 against L2's will/ran his hands up & down L2's
       buttocks/L2 kneed off. in his groin & got away/no
       police report/no injuries to L2.

Examples of Bad Summary Reports

The following are examples of bad summary reports:

          There was unwanted sexual contact between off. and
          L2 with no injuries.

          Sam was threatened by his co-worker in an office
          building.  There were no injuries.
          
          Rsp. sd she felt threatened by man who was
          following her.

          Jenny was involved in a car jacking/threatened to
          shoot/not far from home/police notified.

          Was on way to school/music compact discs
          stolen/$75/no police.

(Also see Part C, Chapter 3, Topic 23, Writing Summary
Reports.)

Check Item X (Checking Entries 
in Item 54)

Check Item X is used to help ensure that you complete all 
required Crime Incident Reports (NVCS-2s) for each
household member at the time of the interview who:

          Is 12 years of age or older AND

          Was physically harmed, threatened with physical
          harm, or robbed by force or threat of harm during the
          reported incident.

Before marking Check Item X, refer back to Item 54 on
page 7 to see if you listed any other eligible household
members in this item.  Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item X if 
you listed a household member in Item 54. Then, as you conduct 
that person's NCVS interview, complete a separate NCVS-2 to 
report that household member's victimization.  

If the household member does not mention the incident during 
his/her interview, ask probing questions to verify whether or 
not the household member was victimized during the incident 
reported earlier by another household member. If you discover 
that a household member listed in Item 54 was not actually 
victimized during the incident, note this fact in Item 54 and 
in the summary report(Check Item W) on the original NCVS-2 
completed for the incident.

If you are unable to conduct an interview for a household
member listed in Item 54, complete an INTER-COMM (Form 11-36) 
explaining the situation.

Check Item Y (Last Incident for Screen
Question)

Check Item Y is used to help you decide whether to:

          Continue with Check Item Z OR

          Complete the next Crime Incident Report for this
          household member.

Before marking Check Item Y, refer back to Check Item G on the 
NCVS-1 to see if the household member reported any other incidents 
for this screen question.  If this incident qualifies as a series, 
the number of incidents should be reduced to "1."

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item Y if only ONE incident is marked 
under the "Number of times" in Check Item G on the NCVS-1 for the 
household member.  After marking the "Yes" box, continue with Check 
Item Z.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item Y if you marked TWO OR MORE incidents 
under the "Number of times" in Check Item G on the NCVS-1 for the 
household member. After marking the "No" box, complete the next NCVS-2
with the household member.  You must complete a separate NCVS-2 for 
each time/incident marked for a screen question in Check Item G on 
the NCVS-1 for the household member.

Check Item Z (Last Incident for 
Respondent)

Check Item Z is used to help you decide whether to:

          Return to the NCVS-1 and fill Check Item H for the
          household member OR

          Complete another Crime Incident Report for the next
          incident marked in Check Item G on the NCVS-1 for
          the household member.

Mark the "Yes" box in Check Item Z if there are no other incidents 
marked in Check Item G for the household member.  After marking the 
"Yes" box, go back to the NCVS-1 and fill Check Item H for the 
household member.

Mark the "No" box in Check Item Z if there are more incidents marked 
in Check Item G for the household member.  After marking the "No" 
box, start completing the next Crime Incident Report for the household 
member.

Check Item Z is the LAST item on the NCVS-2.

Part B, Chapter 4

Chapter 4
Completing the NCVS-7, Noninterview Record

Table of Contents

1 General Instructions
                              
2 Items 1 Through 10

Topic 1.  General Instructions

Noninterview Cases

When you are assigned an NCVS case and cannot get a completed 
interview for the household, you will need to classify the case 
into one of three noninterview categories. These categories are 
identified as Type A, Type B, and Type C.

A sample address will be classified as a noninterview if:

      *  The living quarters is occupied but you unable to get
         any completed interviews.

      *  The living quarters is occupied by persons who are
         not eligible respondents for the NCVS.

      *  The living quarters is vacant.

      *  The living quarters is not eligible for sample because
         it is no longer used as a residence, no longer exists, 
         or does not qualify based on the current listing and
         coverage rules.

Each time you classify an assigned NCVS household as a Type A, B, 
or C noninterview, you must complete an NCVS-7, Noninterview 
Record. The NCVS-7 is designed to provide details about the 
case and to explain why it cannot be interviewed. If you complete 
an NCVS-7 for a noninterview household, do NOT complete an NCVS-1, 
Basic Screen Questionnaire. 

Since the NCVS-7 is a single-page form, make sure to staple the 
completed NCVS-7 to the Control Card for the sample address before 
mailing the forms back to the regional office. 

(Also see Part A, Chapter 6, for more information about
noninterviews.)

INTER-COMMs(Form 11-36)

In addition to completing the NCVS-7 for each noninterview case, 
you also need to complete an INTER-COMM (Form 11-36) explaining 
the situation to your supervisor. Attach the completed INTER-
COMM to the completed NCVS-7 and return these forms along 
with the Control Card for the sample address.

Identification Information

Before completing Item 1 on the NCVS-7, transcribe the case 
identification information  from the household's Control Card  
onto the appropriate blocks at the top, left corner of the 
Noninterview Record. This information includes the sample 
number, control number(PSU, segment, check digit, and serial 
number), and household number.  

If the noninterview is for an EXTRA unit discovered during
the current interview period, you need to enter some type of
unit identification in place of the serial number.  You could
enter the reference person's name or some type of physical
description of the EXTRA unit.

Topic 2.  Items 1 Through 10

Item 1(Field Representative
Identification)

Enter your FR code and print your full name in Item 1.

Item 2 (Land Use)

When you classify a case as a Type A or Type B noninterview, 
transcribe the answer from Control Card Item 9 onto Item 2 on 
the NCVS-7.

Item 3 (Farm Sales)

When you classify a case as a Type A or Type B noninterview, 
transcribe the answer from Control Card Item 10 onto Item 3 on 
the NCVS-7.  Mark Box x "Item blank" if Control Card Item 10 
was left blank.

Item 4 (Type of Living Quarters)

When you classify a case as a Type A or Type B noninterview, 
transcribe the information from Control Card Item 11c or 11d 
onto Item 4 on the NCVS-7.  Make sure to also transcribe onto 
Item 4 any descriptions entered on the Control Card for Box 7 
or 12.

Item 5 (Date Completed)

For each noninterview case (Type A, B, or C), enter in Item 5 the 
last date on which you contacted or attempted to contact someone 
about the case.  Enter the completion date using 2-digits for the 
month and day, and 4-digits for the year (for example, 01/02/2003).

Item 6 (Reason for Noninterview)

Notice that Item 6 is separated into three sections--Type A
noninterview reasons (Boxes 01-04), Type B noninterview reasons 
(Boxes 10-18), and Type C noninterview reasons (Boxes 20-29).  
For each NCVS-7 that you complete, you must mark ONE box under 
the appropriate noninterview type in Item 6.

Type A Noninterview Reasons

If you classify a sample address as a Type A noninterview,
then select the most appropriate reason for the noninterview
from Boxes 01 through 04.  Detailed descriptions for each 

of these Type A reasons are provided in Part A, Chapter 6,
Topic 2.

If you mark Box 2 "Temporarily absent," make sure to enter 
the date on which the household is expected to return to the 
sample address.  

If you mark Box 4 "Other occupied," make sure to enter an
accurate and acceptable reason for classifying the sample
address as a Type A noninterview on the "Specify" line
below Box 4. Only mark Box 4 if you are sure that the
reason does not fit into one of the other three Type A
reasons.

Type B Noninterview Reasons

If you classify a sample address as a Type B noninterview,
then select the most appropriate reason for the noninterview
from Boxes 10 through 18.  Detailed descriptions for each
of these Type B reasons are provided in Part A, Chapter 6,
Topic 3.

Only mark Box 18 "Other," when the reason does not fit any of 
the other Type B reasons.  Also make sure that you enter an 
accurate and acceptable reason for classifying the sample 
address as a Type B noninterview.

Type C Noninterview Reasons

If you classify a sample address as a Type C noninterview,
then select the most appropriate reason for the noninterview
from Boxes 20 through 29. Detailed descriptions for each
of these Type C reasons are provided in Part A, Chapter 6,
Topic 4 of this chapter.

Only mark Box 29 "Other," when the reason does not fit
any of the other Type C reasons. Also make sure that you
enter an accurate and acceptable reason for classifying the
sample address as a Type C noninterview.

Item 7 (Race)

Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 7 for a Type A 
noninterview. NEVER mark Item 7 for a Type B or C noninterview.

When identifying a household's race(s) in Item 7 and the 
household was interviewed in a previous enumeration period, 
use the household respondent's race(s) marked in Control Card 
Item 24. If Control Card Item 24 is blank, leave Item 7 blank 
on the NCVS-7.

While you must always try to obtain each household member's 
race(s), you cannot fill race for the NCVS by observation, 
probing, or asking a neighbor or any other nonhousehold members.

Since Control Card Item 24 allows each household member to report 
up to four different races for himself/herself, you are allowed to 
mark more than one box in Item 7 on the NCVS-7.  Mark Box 3 "Other," 
for any races other than White and Black/African American, such as 
American Indian or Alaska Native, Asian, Native Hawaiian or Other
Pacific Islander, and Other (Codes 3 - 6).

Item 8 (Public Housing)

Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 8 for a Type A noninterview.  

When filling Item 8, refer to Control Card Item 8c for the
sample address.  Transcribe the answer marked in Item 8c
onto Item 8 on the NCVS-7.  If Control Card Item 8c is blank, 
mark Box x "Item blank" on the NCVS-7.

Item 9 (Manager Verification of 
Public Housing)

Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 9 for a Type A 
noninterview.  

When filling Item 9, refer to Control Card Item 8d for the
sample address.  Transcribe the answer marked in Control
Card Item 8d onto Item 9 on the NCVS-7. If Control Card
Item 8d is blank, mark Box x "Item blank" on the NCVS-7.

Item 10 (American Indian
Reservation or American
Indian Lands)

Make sure that you ONLY complete Item 9 for a Type A 
noninterview.  

When filling Item 10, refer to Control Card Item 8e for the
sample address.  Transcribe the answer marked in Control
Card Item 8e onto Item 10 on the NCVS-7. If Control Card
Item 8e is blank, mark Box x "Item blank" on the NCVS-7.

Part B, Chapter 5

Chapter 5
Editing Procedures

Table of Topics

1 General Editing Instructions
                              
2 Editing the Control Card
                              
3 Editing the Basic Screen Questionnaire

4 Editing the Crime Incident Report
                             
5 Editing the Noninterview Record
                             
6 Office Edits and Qualified Edit Field Representatives

Topic 1.  General Editing Instructions

What Is Editing?

For the NCVS, editing is the systematic checking of every
item on every form to ensure that all required entries are
made correctly.

Using the Edit Checklist

In addition to the detailed instructions provided in this
chapter, you can refer to the edit checklist on pages 20
through 23 of the Field Representative's Information Card
Booklet (NCVS-554).  This checklist provides a quick
reference for editing each NCVS form that you complete
for both interviewed and noninterviewed households. However, 
it does not cover instructions for editing listing sheets. 
Refer to the Field Representative's Listing and Coverage Manual 
(Form 11-8) for instructions on how to edit listing sheets by 
segment type (Area, Unit, Permit, and Group Quarters). 

Before Leaving a Household

Before leaving a household, quickly review all forms completed 
for the household to ensure that you did not miss any questions 
requiring an answer. This review will allow you to:

          Ask any questions that may have been overlooked
          initially, and 

          Get answers for these questions BEFORE ending
          your contact with the household.  

By reviewing NCVS forms before leaving a household, you can keep 
your contacts with a household to a minimum and, hopefully, avoid 
any chance of annoying respondents with callbacks to ask additional 
questions.

Before Transmitting Completed Work

Before transmitting completed NCVS work to the office, edit ALL 
items carefully and systematically on all listing sheets, Control 
Cards, and questionnaires for your assignment. If you discover any 
incomplete items during this edit, correct these items and, if 
necessary, contact the respondent(s) by telephone to obtain the 
missing information. 

Topic 2.  Editing the Control Card

Overview

The Control Card items that you need to edit will vary
based on whether you:

        *  Were able to complete an interview for the sample
           household or had to classify the household as a
           noninterview. 

        *  Were interviewing the household for the first
           enumeration period or for subsequent enumeration
           periods.

Editing - Interviewed Households/First
Enumeration Period

As you edit a Control Card for an interviewed household in the 
first enumeration period, make sure to check the following items:

Item 6c

For Item 6c, make sure that one of the boxes (Yes or No) is 
marked and, if the "No" box is marked, that the household's 
mailing address is entered completely and legibly on the 
"Specify" lines in Item 6c.

Item 7a

When a sample address is in an Area segment and the "Ask 1st 
mo." box is marked in Item 7a, make sure that one of the boxes 
(Before 4-1-90 or After 4-1-90) is marked.

Item 7b

When a sample address is in an Area segment and Box 1, 2, or 
3 is marked in Item 7b, make sure that either "Y" or "N" is 
circled for the marked box.

Item 8a

For Item 8a, make sure that Box 1, 2, or 3 is marked under
the "1st" enumeration period column.

Item 8e

For Item 8e, make sure that one of the boxes (Yes or No)is
marked to indicate whether or not the sample address is
located on an American Indian Reservation or on American
Indian Lands.

Items 9 and 10

If Box 2 "Rural" is marked in Item 9, make sure that Item 10 is 
answered when the sample address is a housing unit or a group 
quarters unit showing a type code of 92-N or 93-N in Item 6d.

Items 11a Through 11d

Make sure that the correct box is marked in Item 11a (Unit
in a GQ or Unit not in a GQ). If you marked Box 1 in Item 11a, 
make sure that the correct box is marked in Item 11d. If you 
marked Box 2 in Item 11a, make sure that the correct box is 
marked in Items 11b and 11c.

Item 12

For Item 12, make sure that the line number is circled to
identify the household respondent for the first enumeration
period.

Item 13c

For Item 13c, make sure that either Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" 
is marked to indicate whether or not  each person listed in the 
household roster (Item 13a)is a household member at the sample 
address.

Item 14

For Item 14, make sure that Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" is marked 
under the "1st" enumeration period column to indicate whether or 
not anyone was missed from the household roster. 

Item 18

For Item 18, make sure that the correct 1-digit marital status code 
number is entered for each household member listed in the household 
roster.

Item 19

For Item 19, make sure that the correct box is marked to identify 
each household member's sex (Box 1 "Male" or Box 2 "Female")..Item 21

For Item 21, make sure that the correct 2-digit educational
attainment code is entered under the "1st" enumeration period 
column for each household member who is 12 years of age or 
older.

Item 23

For Item 23, make sure that the correct box (Box 1 "Yes" or Box 
2 "No")is marked to indicate whether or not each household member 
is either Spanish, Hispanic or Latino.

Item 24

For Item 24, make sure that the correct 1-digit race codes are 
entered to identify each household member's race(s). Each 
household member can identify up to four different races for 
himself/herself.

Items 26a Through 26f

For Item 26a, make sure that the correct box is marked to 
indicate whether there is a telephone in the unit. Make sure 
that Items 26b through 26f are marked appropriately.

Item 28

For Item 28, make sure that the correct box is marked under 
the "1st" enumeration period column to identify the household's 
total income for the past 12 months.

Items 30a Through 30e

For Items 30a through 30e, make sure that you entered on
the "1st" enumeration period line:

         * The month and year of interview (for example,
           2/2003),

         * The line number for the household respondent, and 

         * A tally of each visit and/or telephone call to the
           household.

Items 32a Through 32e

For Items 32a through 32e, make sure that the appropriate entries 
are made for each Crime Incident Report completed for a household 
member. 

Editing - Interviewed Households/ Second
Through Seventh Enumeration Periods

Make sure that you have updated the following Control Card items 
ONLY during the 3rd,5th, and 7th enumeration periods: Items 8a, 
21, and 28. Also, make sure that you have verified Item 8d ONLY 
during the 5th enumeration period when Box 3 or 4 is marked in   
Item 8d.

Edit the following Control Card items during the 2nd through 7th 
enumeration periods:

          Make sure that you verified Item 8b.

          Make sure that the line number for the current
          household respondent is circled in Item 12.
          
          Make sure that you asked Items 14 and 22 and 
          updated Item 17.

          Make sure that you noted in Item 25a any household
          composition changes.

          Make sure that you updated the interview date in 
          Item 25b.

          Make sure that you updated Item 25c with the "years
          lived at address."

          Make sure that you updated the telephone usage
          information in Items 26a through 26f.

          Make sure that you filled Items 29a and 29b for any
          EXTRA units you may have discovered while
          interviewing.

          Make sure that you entered the appropriate
          information in Items 30b through 30e and 30g and
          30h using the correct enumeration period line.

          Make sure that the appropriate information has been
          entered in Items 32a through 32e for each completed
          Crime Incident Report.

Editing - Noninterviewed Households

For each NCVS sample address that you classify as a noninterview, 
you must edit the following Control Card items:
          
          Make sure that Items 6a and 6b are filled or a pre-
          printed label with this information has been affixed to
          the Control Card.

          If required, make sure that you filled Items 7a and
          7b(1) - (3).

          For Type A noninterviews - Make sure that you
          filled Items 8c, 8d, and 8e.

          Make sure that you filled Item 10, if applicable.

          For Type A and B noninterviews - Make sure that
          you filled Item 11 appropriately.

          Make sure that you filled Items 30b, 30d, 30e, 30f,
          and 30h, using the correct line for the enumeration
          period.

          Make sure that Item 33 is filled, if applicable.

Topic 3.  Editing the Basic Screen Questionnaire

Overview

You will complete an NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire, for each 
interviewed household in your assignment. If a respondent refuses 
to answer a particular screen question, enter a note explaining 
why the question was refused. 

It is your responsibility to edit ALL items on each NCVS-1 and 
NCVS-1A that you complete for a household.  As you edit an NCVS-1, 
make sure that all of your entries are complete, correct, legible, 
and understandable.  Also make sure that you followed all skip 
instructions correctly. Although you must edit all items on the 
NCVS-1, pay particular attention to the items covered below.

Identification Information

Make sure that you transcribed the sample number, control number
(PSU, segment, check digit, and serial number), and household 
number accurately and legibly from the household's Control Card 
onto the NCVS-1 and any NCVS-1As that you complete.

Cover Page Items

Make sure that you filled Items 1 through 4 and Items 13a through 
16b on the cover page as instructed on the NCVS-1. Also make sure 
that you transcribed information correctly from the household's 
Control Card onto Items 5 through 12e on the cover page of the 
NCVS-1.

Item 15c

Make sure that the number of crime incidents entered or the box 
marked in Item 15c on the NCVS-1 agree with the number of incident 
reports completed, excluding any out-of-scope incidents.

Items 16a and 16b

Make sure that any changes in household composition for the current
enumeration period are identified BOTH in Items 16a and 16b on 
the NCVS-1 and in Control Card Item 25a. 

Items 17 Through 28

Make sure that Items 17 through 28 are completed for each household 
member who is 12 years of age or older. These items appear on page 
2 for the household respondent and on pages 12, 18, and 24 for the 
remaining household members who are eligible for interview.  For 
larger households, make sure that you completed these items on
each NCVS-1A that you filled out.  As you check Item 19, make sure 
that you entered the correct line number for the household member.

Items 36 Through 46 for the Household 
Respondent

Make sure that either Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" is marked
for the household respondent:

          In Part (b) of Items 36 through 43,

          In Check Item B for Item 44 and Check Item C for
          Item 45, and

          In  Check Item F1 for Item 46.

For each "Yes" answer marked in the screen items mentioned above, 
also make sure that the correct number is entered on the "Number 
of times" line:

          In Part (c) of Items 36 through 43,

          In Part (b) for Items 44 and 45, and

          In Part (f) for Item 46.

Items 46a Through 46k

These items cover the household respondent's vandalism and hate 
crime screen questions. As you edit these items, make sure that 
the following items are filled correctly when Box 1 "Yes" is 
marked in Item 46a:

          Items 46b through 46e (vandalism screen questions)
          and

          Items 46g through 46k (hate crime screen
          questions).

Items 36 Through 45 for Individual 
Respondents

Make sure that either Box 1 "Yes" or Box 2 "No" is marked for 
each individual respondent:

          In Part (b) of Items 36 through 43, and

          In Check Item B for Item 44 and Check Item C for
          Item 45.

For each "Yes" answer marked in the screen items mentioned above, 
also make sure that the correct number is entered on the "Number 
of times" line:

          In Part (c) of Items 36 through 43, and

          In Part (b) for Items 44 and 45.

Topic 4.  Editing the Crime Incident Report

Overview

You will complete a separate NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, for 
each incident or series of incidents reported by an eligible 
household member.  It is your responsibility to edit ALL items 
on every NCVS-2 that you complete for a household.  

As you edit an NCVS-2, make sure that all of your entries
are complete, correct, legible, and understandable.  Also
make sure that you followed all skip instructions correctly. 
Although you must edit all items on the NCVS-2, pay particular 
attention to the items covered below. 

Each Incident Has a Completed NCVS-2

Make sure that each separate incident or series of incidents
reported by eligible household members has a completed NCVS-2 
documenting the crime incident. 

Identification Information

Make sure that you transcribed the sample number, control number 
(PSU, segment, check digit, and serial number), and household 
number accurately and legibly from the household's Control Card 
onto the top of the cover page for every completed NCVS-2.

Items 1a Through 1c

Make sure that for each completed NCVS-2 you:

          Entered in Item 1a the correct line number (for
          example, 01, 02, and so forth) for the household
          member who reported the incident.

          Entered in Item 1b the screen question item number
         (for example, 36, 37, and so forth) at which the
          household member reported the incident.

          Entered in Item 1c the correct incident number (for
          example, 01, 02, and so forth) to uniquely identify the
          incident for the screen question entered in Item 1b.

Transcription of Incident
Descriptions

Make sure that you have transcribed a description of each 
incident onto Control Card. Items 32a through 32e.

Topic 5.  Editing the Noninterview Record

Overview

You will complete a separate NCVS-7, Noninterview Record, for 
each case that you classify as a Type A, B, or C noninterview. 
It is your responsibility to edit ALL items on each NCVS-7 that 
you complete for your assignment. 

As you edit an NCVS-7, make sure that all of your entries are 
complete, correct, legible, and understandable.  Also make sure 
that you followed correctly the Field Representative instructions 
at the top of the NCVS-7 and the skip instructions in Item 6.  
Although you must edit all items on the NCVS-7, pay particular 
attention to the items covered below. 

Identification Information

Make sure that you transcribed the sample number, control number 
(PSU, segment, check digit, and serial number), and household 
number accurately and legibly from the household's Control Card 
onto the top of the NCVS-7.

Items 1, 5, and 6

Items 1, 5, and 6 must be completed every time you complete 
an NCVS-7. Make sure that you entered:

          Your Field Representative Code and your full name in
          Item 1. 

          The date that you completed the NCVS-7 in Item 5
         (for example, 03/10/2003). 

          An (X) in the correct box in Item 6 to identify the
          noninterview reason by noninterview type (Type A, B,
          or C).  Also, if you marked Box 2, 4, 18, or 29, make
          sure that you entered the "Expected return date" for
          Box 2, the "Other" Type A reason for Box 4, the
         "Other" Type B reason for Box 18, and the "Other"
          Type C reason for Box 29. 

Items 2, 3, and 4

If you completed an NCVS-7 for a Type A or B noninterview, make 
sure that you transcribed the correct information from the 
household's Control Card onto Items 2, 3, and 4 on the NCVS-7.

Items 7 Through 10

If you completed an NCVS-7 for a Type A noninterview, make sure 
that you transcribed the correct information from the household's 
Control Card onto Items 7 through 10 on the NCVS-7.  If Control 
Card Item 24 (Race) is blank, it is acceptable for Item 7 (Race) 
to be left blank on the NCVS-7.  Also make sure that you do NOT 
complete Items 7 through 10 for a Type B or C noninterview.

Topic 6.  Office Edits and Qualified Edit Field Representatives

Office Edit

After your regional office receives your completed NCVS work each 
month, they perform their own edit of all completed forms.  Each 
month, prior to your next monthly assignment, you will receive an 
Edit Evaluation Sheet providing you with feedback on how well you 
did and documenting any errors found during the office edit.

It is your responsibility to review each Edit Evaluation Sheet so 
you can learn from your mistakes and try to avoid making the same 
mistakes in future assignments. 

Qualified Edit Field Representatives

Field Representatives who regularly send in questionnaires that 
can be sent for processing with a minimal office edit are 
designated as "Qualified Edit" or "QE Field Representatives."

In order for you to be a "QE Field Representative," you
must have:

          Satisfactorily completed the initial training program.

          Worked on the NCVS for at least three months.

          Achieved an accuracy rate in any one month that
          meets the standard specified by your regional office.

If you are able to achieve and maintain a QE rating, it will play 
an important role in your overall performance rating.

Edit for QE Field Representatives

Once you have attained QE status, your regional office performs a 
complete edit of the Control Cards for your assignment, but only 
performs an abbreviated edit of your completed questionnaires 
before sending them to the National Processing Center (NPC) in 
Jeffersonville, Indiana.  Once every six months, the regional 
office will select a monthly assignment and perform a complete 
edit on all of your completed forms. This procedure is intended
to ensure that you maintain high quality in your work.

Retaining QE Status

For you to maintain your QE status, you must consistently send in 
completed work with an accuracy rate above a level specified by 
your regional office.  You can lose your QE status if your accuracy 
rate drops below this predetermined level.  Once you lose your QE 
status, your work will be edited completely until you can requalify 
as a QE Field Representative.

Part C, Chapter 1

Chapter 1
Basic National Crime Victimization Survey Concepts

Table of Topics

1  Overview of Chapter 1

2  Reference Period

3  Household Membership

4  Reference Person

5  Household and Individual Respondents

6  Proxy Interview

7  Bounding Interviews

8  Out-of-Scope Incident

Topic 1.  Overview of Chapter 1

The primary purpose of the National Crime Victimization Survey 
(NCVS)is to obtain, from respondents who are 12 years of age 
and older, an accurate and up-to-date measure of the amount 
and kinds of crime committed during a specific 6-month reference 
period. When you are assigned an NCVS case for the first
interview, you are given a sample address to visit and 
interview, but you are not provided with any names.  

It is your responsibility to identify:

*  The household members who usually reside at the sample 
   address(household membership);
*  The relationship of each household member to a reference 
   person;
*  A household respondent who will provide specific information 
   about the household; and
*  All household members who are eligible as individual 
   respondents for an NCVS interview.

Each eligible respondent is expected to respond for himself/
herself. However, under specific circumstances, another 
household member can respond for an eligible respondent and 
give a proxy interview.

To avoid duplicating identical incidents, you go through a 
process called bounding interviews to ensure that duplicate 
incidents are not processed. When a reported incident falls 
outside of the NCVS survey limits, you delete the incident 
because it is considered an out-of-scope incident.

Chapter 1 defines all of these highlighted concepts in 
more detail.

Topic 2.  Reference Period

Definition

A reference period is a time interval for which we want to
collect information from a respondent.  The reference period
for the NCVS covers the 6 months prior to the interview
date.  When conducting interviews, we are only interested in
crime incidents that occurred during a household member's
specific 6-month reference period.

The type of reference period that we use for the NCVS is often 
referred to as a floating reference period or period-to-period 
recounting.  By using this type of a reference period, we can 
compile a continuous record of a household's experiences 
throughout the entire 3 1/2 years that the household is in the 
NCVS sample.

Using Your Information Card 
Booklet, NCVS-554

Your NCVS Field Representative's Information Card Booklet, 
NCVS-554,provides a checklist on page 10 for determining 
reference periods for interviewing and examples of reference 
periods on page 11. Two-year calendars are also shown on pages 
12 and 13 to:

     Help the respondent remember the reference period for
     the current interview 

      AND 

     Enable the respondent to determine the exact month that
     an incident occurred.

First Enumeration Period
Interviews

For the first enumeration period, each household member's
reference period starts on the first day of the month             
6 months prior to the interview month and ends on the day
prior to the interview date.

---------------------------------------------
Example for a household respondent:
If a household respondent's first enumeration period 
interview is conducted on May 2, 2003, then the current 
reference period for the household respondent would be 
November 1, 2002 to May 1, 2003.
----------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------
Example for an individual respondent:
If the remaining household members were interviewed 
for the first enumeration period on May 3, 2003, 
then the current reference period for each of these 
household members would be November 1, 2002 to May 
2, 2003.
-----------------------------------------------

For a first enumeration period household, all household 
members have the same start date, but each household member's 
end date may vary based on the member's current interview 
date.

Second Through Seventh Enumeration 
Period Interviews

After the first enumeration period, reference periods for all
remaining enumeration periods start on the date of the
household member's last interview and end on the day prior
to the household member's current interview date.  Unlike
the first enumeration period, each household member could
have a different reference period start date for the second
through seventh enumeration period based on the member's
last interview date. 

For the second through seventh enumeration periods, you would 
normally use the date entered in Control Card Item 25b as the 
household member's start date for the reference period. However, 
if the following exceptions exist for a household member, do 
NOT use the date in Control Card Item 25b as the reference 
period start date:

     When no date is entered in Control Card Item 25b
     (person was a noninterview last enumeration period):
     The start date for the reference period would be the
     first day of the month 6 months prior to the current
     interview month. 

----------------------------------------------
Example:
John Smith refused to be interviewed during the
previous enumeration period.  It is now June 2,
2003, and John agrees to be interviewed this
enumeration period.  John's reference period for the
current interview date starts on December 1, 2002,
and ends on June 1, 2003.
----------------------------------------------   

     When the date entered in Item 25b is more than    
     6 months prior to the interview date:
     The start date for the reference period would be 
     the first day of the month 6 months prior to the 
     current interview month.  

-----------------------------------------------
Example #1:
John Smith was a Type Z noninterview during the
previous enumeration period and you did not erase
the last interview date entered in Control Card 
Item 25b.  Whenever an eligible respondent is a
Type Z noninterview, Control Card Item 25b must
be left blank for that enumeration period.

Example #2:
After interviewing Denise Smith for the second
enumeration period, you forget to change the
interview date in Control Card Item 25b.  When
you are ready to interview her for the third
enumeration period, the interview date in Control
Card Item 25b is more than 6 months prior to the
current interview date.  
-------------------------------------------------

*  The household respondent is a different person
   than the last household respondent: 
   When the current household respondent was not the
   household respondent for the previous enumeration
   period, use the date entered in Control Card Item 25b
   for the previous household respondent as the reference
   period start date for the new household respondent.

-----------------------------------------------
Example:
John Smith was the household respondent during
the previous enumeration period and his interview
date was June 2, 2003.  For the current interview
date, December 1, 2003, you discover that John has
passed away.  His wife, Denise Smith, now becomes 
the new household respondent.  Her reference period
for the current interview starts on June 2, 2003 and
ends on November 30, 2003.
-------------------------------------------------

     You cannot determine which household member
     was the last household respondent: 
     The reference period start date for the current
     household respondent would be the first day of the
     month 6 months prior to the current interview month.

-------------------------------------------------
Example:
You are ready to interview the Hooper household
for the second enumeration period on July 3, 2003. 
When you check Control Card Item 30c, you notice
that the previous FR neglected to enter the
household respondent's line number for the first
enumeration period.  Once you select a household
respondent for the current interview, that person's
reference date starts on January 1, 2003 and ends on  
July 2, 2003.
----------------------------------------------------

Incidents Outside of the Reference 
Period

While interviewing, it is important to keep reminding the
respondent of the start and end dates for his/her reference
period. If a respondent seems to have difficulty keeping
track of the reference period dates, try adding the actual
dates after reading "in the last 6 months." This will help 
the respondent to focus on the correct time frame for his/
her interview.

Remember to only complete an incident report (NCVS-2) for 
incidents that happened during the reference period for
the respondent's current interview. If at any point during 
an interview, you discover that the incident is outside of 
the respondent's reference period, discontinue taking 
information for the incident and follow the proper procedures 
for making the incident "out-of-scope." (See Topic 8 of this 
chapter for out-of-scope incidents.) 

Also, if a respondent reports an incident that took place 
on the same day that you are interviewing him/her, do not
complete an NCVS-2 for the incident until the household's
next enumeration period. If this happens, make a note on
the Control Card as a reminder to complete an NCVS-2 for
the incident during the next enumeration period.

Topic 3.  Household Membership

Definition

For a person to be considered a sample household member,
he/she must be:

     Using the sample address as his/her usual place of
     residence at the time of the current interview, even if
     he/she is temporarily absent at the time of interview, 

     OR

     Staying temporarily at the sample address at the time
     of the current interview AND not have a usual place
     of residence elsewhere.  This category could include
     recent immigrants, persons trying to find permanent
     living quarters, and persons who have no other home
     of their own.  This category could also include entire
     households with no usual place of residence elsewhere,
     because they are renting or lending their usual living
     quarters to others and have no other home of their
     own.

Non-family persons can also be considered  household members if 
the sample address is their usual place of residence. These non-
family household members could be lodgers, servants, farmhands, 
or other employees, as long as they:

      Live at the sample address

      AND

      Claim the sample address as their usual place of
      residence.

Household membership is not limited to sample housing units and 
can also include residents of non-institutional group quarters 
selected for the NCVS sample, such as college dormitories, homes 
for unwed mothers, dormitories for student nurses and doctors, 
and so forth.

Summary Table for Determining Household
Membership

Page 4 of your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554, provides a 
summary table for your use in determining whether or not a 
person should be considered a household member at a sample 
address.

Determining Usual Place of
Residence

A person's usual place of residence is a specific living
quarters, either a housing unit or a non-institutional group
quarters unit, where he/she lives and sleeps the greater part
of the time and is free to return to at any time.  Do not
consider a mailing address as a usual place of residence if
the mailing address does not identify a living quarters.

Also, do not consider a person's living quarters as his/her
usual place of residence when the person:

     Is not residing at the living quarters AND is renting or
     lending the living quarters to someone else who is
     residing there in his/her absence, 

     OR

     Is not residing at the living quarters AND the vacant
     living quarters is offered for sale or rent.

Families With Two or More Homes

If a household owns more than one housing unit and spends
time in both homes, only ONE of the housing units can be
considered their usual place of residence.  Consider the
home where they spend the greater part of the calendar year
as their usual place of residence.

Here are some examples for handling this type of situation:

The Stapleton family owns two housing units--one in the
suburbs of Detroit and the other one is a cabin in a mountain
resort area.  They spend about 11 months of the year in their
suburban Detroit home.  Also, the Stapletons don't rent out
either home in their absence.

     If the Stapleton's were residing at their suburban
     Detroit home when you attempt to interview at that
     residence, you would interview all eligible household
     members.  Since this is the Stapleton's usual place of
     residence, all family member's who are 12 years of age
     and older are considered eligible household members
     at the suburban Detroit address.

     When you attempt to interview at the cabin address,
     you discover that the Stapleton's are residing at the
     cabin. In this situation, you would classify the case as
     a Type B Noninterview, "Temporarily Occupied by
     Persons With a URE" (usual residence elsewhere). 
     Since the cabin is not their usual place of residence,
     you would not interview them as household members
     at the cabin address.  This fact should become evident
     when you ask Control Card Item 13c.

     If the Stapleton's were residing at their suburban
     Detroit home when you attempt to interview at 
     the cabin address, you would classify the case as a
     Type B Noninterview, "Vacant-Regular."

     If you attempt to interview at the suburban Detroit
     address and find that the Stapleton's will be away from
     that address until after the interview period ends, you
     would classify the case as a Type A Noninterview,
     "Temporarily Absent."

(See Part A, Chapter 6, for more details about NCVS
noninterviews.)

Foster Children

Always consider foster children in a sample household at 
the time of your interview as household members, regardless 
of how long they are expected to stay with the family.

Crew Member on a Sailing 
Vessel

Never consider a sailing vessel to be a usual place of residence 
for its crew members.  This is true even when a crew member is 
on the sailing vessel at the time of your interview AND is on 
the vessel for long periods of time.

Household Members Who
Are Temporarily Absent

Listed below are circumstances in which persons claiming
the sample address as their usual place of residence are
considered to be household members, even though they are
temporarily absent from the address at the time of 
interview:

     Business travelers,
                    
     Crew members on sailing vessels,

     Railroad personnel,

     Long haul truck drivers,

     Bus drivers, and

     Persons who are away visiting relatives or friends, on
     vacation, or temporarily in general (noninstitutional)
     hospitals.

Foreign Citizens Temporarily Staying in the United States

Only consider citizens of foreign countries as household
members at a sample address when:

     They are temporarily living (not visiting or traveling)
     in the United States,

     The sample address is not an Embassy, Consulate,
     Chancellery, or any other type of office for a foreign
     country, AND 

     The sample address is their usual place of residence
     while residing in the United States.

Members of the Armed Forces


Men and women who are Armed Forces members can be considered 
household members at a sample housing unit if:

          They usually sleep at the sample housing unit and

          They are stationed in the same locality as the sample
          housing unit.

Do not consider Armed Forces members as household members at a 
sample housing unit if:

          They are stationed in a different locality than the
          sample housing unit and

          They are only staying at the sample housing unit while
          on leave to visit family or friends.

Students

When you interview at a sample housing unit and discover
that a student is residing away from the family residence
while attending school (boarding, college, trade, or
commercial school in the United States or overseas), do not
consider the student as a household member at the family
residence.  While attending school, the student is considered
a household member at his/her school residence, and would
be interviewed at that residence if it fell into the NCVS
sample. 

However, students are considered household members at
their family residence when they are:

        Living at the family residence while attending school,

        Living at the family residence at the time of interview
        because they are on a short holiday or home on
        summer vacation, and

        Claiming the family residence as their usual place of
        residence.

Student Nurses

At the time of interview, consider a student nurse's usual place 
of residence to be the hospital, nurse's home, or other place 
where he/she is residing while receiving nurse's training. 

------------------------------------------------
Example:
Before entering nursing school, Jim lived with his
parents at 505 Barts Drive, Cleveland, OH.  Jim now
lives at 7001 Central Avenue, Columbus, OH, while
attending nursing school.  

If you are interviewing at the 505 Barts Drive address
and discover that Jim is currently living at the 7001
Central Avenue address while attending nursing
school, do not consider Jim a household member at
the 505 Barts Drive address for this interview.  While
attending nurse's training, Jim's usual place of
residence is the 7001 Central Avenue address.
-----------------------------------------------------

Persons Working Overseas

Do not consider as household members persons who are absent 
from the sample address at the time of your interview because 
they are working and residing overseas for more than 6 months 
out of the year.

Persons With Concurrent
Residences

You may find that some persons reside part of the week at
one address and the rest of the week at another address.  
In this situation, count the person as a household member 
at the address where he/she resides the greater part of the 
week. If the person spends an equal amount of the week at 
each address, consider the person as a household member at 
the address where he/she is residing at the time of the 
interview.

Persons in Vacation Homes, Tourist 
Cabins, and Trailers

If persons are residing in vacation homes, tourist cabins, and
trailers and do not have any other usual place of residence at
the time of interview, consider these persons as household
members where they are residing at the time of the interview.  
However, if these persons do have a usual residence elsewhere, 
do not consider them as household members at a vacation home, 
tourist cabin, or trailer.

Inmates and Patients in
Institutional Group Quarters

Inmates and patients in institutional group quarters are not
considered household members at the sample address while
they are residing in the institutional group quarters. These

inmates and patients could reside in the following types of
institutional group quarters:

             Correctional Institutions
             Nursing, Convalescent, and Rest Homes
             Hospitals
             Institutions for the Disabled
             Institutions for the Mentally Ill/Retarded
             Juvenile Institutions

Remember that persons in institutional group quarters are
not free to come and go without permission.  Also, persons
residing in institutional group quarters are not eligible for
NCVS interviewing, even if the group quarters fell into the
NCVS sample.

(See the Listing and Coverage Manual for Field Representatives, 
Form 11-8, for more details about group quarters.)

When You Are Still Unsure About 
Household Membership

If you have read all the household membership procedures and 
still are unsure whether or not to include someone as a
household member, it is better to:

            Include the person,

            Explain the situation in the "Notes" space on the
            Control Card, and

            Explain the situation in an INTER-COMM.

Topic 4.  Reference Person

Definition

For each NCVS sample address assigned to you for interview, you 
must identify one household member as the household's reference 
person.  We want the household's reference person to be a 
responsible adult household member who is not likely to 
permanently leave the household. 

To meet this goal, the reference person must: 

       Qualify as a household member at the sample address,

       Be one of the owners or renters of the sample housing
       unit, and

       Be at least 18 years of age (in most cases). 

(Also see "When Can a Reference Person Be Under 18 Years of Age?" 
on page C1-16.)

Since one of the owners or renters of the sample housing unit is 
normally the most responsible and knowledgeable household member, 
we prefer the reference person to also be the household respondent.  
However, a household respondent does not have to be one of the 
household members who owns or rents the sample housing unit.

(See Topic 5 of this chapter for more details about household 
respondents.)

Special Situations

When identifying a reference person for a sample household, 
you could encounter one of the following situations:

Housing Unit Rented Without Cash 
Payment 

If a sample housing unit is occupied without payment of cash 
rent, then any household member who is at least 18 years of 
age can qualify as the reference person. (Also see "When Can 
a Reference Person Be Under 18 Years of Age?" on page C1-16.)

Housing Unit Jointly
Owned or Rented

If a sample housing unit is jointly owned or rented, then
designate the first owner/renter who is a household member
and is at least 18 years of age as the reference person. (Also
see "When Can a Reference Person Be Under 18 Years of Age?" 
below.)

When Can a Reference Person Be Under           
18 Years of Age?

There are two situations when a reference person can be a
household member who is under 18 years of age.  These
situations include:

     Sample households in which ALL household members
     are 17 years of age.  The reference person should be
     one of the 17-year-old household members who owns
     or rents the sample housing unit.

     Sample households in which the owners/renters are
     married and one or both of them are 17 years of age. 
     The reference person can be either person.

          NOTE: If you encounter a household in which ALL
          household members are under 17 years of age,
          contact your supervisor who will discuss this
          situation with Headquarters staff and then let you
          know how to handle the case.

Identifying the Reference
Person on the Control Card,
NCVS-500

The following Control Card items will help you confirm that the 
reference person meets our requirements:

          Item 13a  One of the persons who owns or rents the
          housing unit should be listed on line number 1.

          Item 13b  The household member should be identified 
          as the reference person, along with relationship
          code 11. 

          Item 13c  Box (1), Yes, should be marked to indicate 
          that the person is a usual resident and household
          member at the sample unit.
          
          Item 17  The household member should be at least      
          18 years of age.

Control Card Item 13a (Household 
Roster)

Control Card Item 13a is used to compile the household roster 
for the sample address.  Since you will ask the respondent to 
start with the name of the person or one of the persons who 
either owns or rents the home, the first person that you list 
in Item 13a will normally be the reference person.

Control Card Item 13b(Relationship to
Reference Person)

Once you have listed all persons on the household roster who 
usually live at the address, including those persons who are 
temporarily absent, then you need to identify in Item 13b
which person is the reference person.  In most cases, the
reference person will be the name entered on line number (1)
of the household roster.  Enter "Ref. person" and code "11"
in Item 13b to identify the household's reference person. 
Using the descriptions and 2-digit codes listed in the upper
right corner of the Control Card, identify in Item 13b the
relationship of all remaining persons on the household roster
to the reference person.

Control Card Item 13c
(Household Member)

In Item 13c, you will determine whether or not each person
listed in the household roster, including the reference
person, is a household member. In general terms, if the
person usually lives at the sample address, then he/she is
considered a household member.

Control Card Item 17
(Age Last Birthday)

After verifying the household roster in Item 14 and checking
for EXTRA housing units in Item 15, you will enter each
household member's date of birth in item 16 and the member's 
current age in Item 17. 

Changing the Reference Person

You may encounter situations where you will need to identify 
from the household roster a different person as the reference 
person.  This could happen when the reference person from the 
previous enumeration period is no longer a household member 
because he/she:

          Has died OR 

          Has moved out of the sample address permanently.
  
If the reference person (or any other person listed on the
household roster) has died since the last enumeration period,
draw a wavy line through the deceased person's entire line
(Control Card Items 12 through 24).

If the reference person (or any other person listed on the
household roster) has left the household permanently, draw
a diagonal line through the person's line number in Control
Card Item 12.  Do not draw a wavy line through Items 12
through 24 in the event that the person should return to the
sample address before it falls out of sample.

Also use Control Card Item 25a to indicate the reason for
the change and the date the change is discovered.  Two-digit
codes are assigned to each reason and these codes and
reasons are shown in the upper right corner of the Control
Card.

To determine who the new reference person will be, ask the
respondent to give you the name of the person or one of the
persons who either owns or rents the home.  In Item 13b,
line through any inaccurate relationship descriptions and
codes and enter the correct description and code for the new
reference person and for each remaining person to show his/her 
relationship to the "new" reference person.

URE Households in High
Mobility Areas

Some areas, such as resort or vacation areas, are usually
occupied by entire households with a usual residence
elsewhere (URE). To save time in these high mobility areas,
do not prepare a new Control Card when one URE household replaces 
another URE household. Report the new occupants on the original 
Control Card as follows:

     Item 3 - Do not change the household number. Item 13 - 
     Line through the entries in Items 13a, 13b, and 13c for 
     each person listed from the previous URE household.  
     Using the next available line, enter the reference 
     person's name in Item 13a for the new URE household, 
     enter "Ref. person" and code "11" in Item 13b, and 
     mark "No" in Item 13c.

     Item 25a - For each person deleted from the previous
     URE household, enter code "25" and the date that you
     discovered this change.  On the line where you entered
     the reference person's name for the new URE household, 
     enter code "15," the number of persons in the new URE 
     household, and the date that you discovered the new 
     URE household.

Type A Noninterviews

Item 7 on the Noninterview Record, NCVS-7, requires you to mark 
the household's race whenever you classify a sample address as 
a Type A Noninterview.  If the sample household was interviewed 
in a previous enumeration period, see what race(s) were marked 
for the reference person in Control Card Item 24. Mark Item 7 
on the Noninterview Record based on the race(s) marked in Control 
Card Item 24 for the reference person.  If Control Card Item 24 
is blank, leave Item 7 blank on the Noninterview Record.

Topic 5.  Household and Individual Respondents

Definition

A household respondent is the household member that you select 
to be the first household member interviewed.  The household 
respondent must be able to provide information for all persons 
in the sample household, as well as for herself/himself. For 
example, the household respondent must be able to:

     Complete and/or update information on the
     household's Control Card, NCVS-500.

     Complete the household respondent's section of the
     Basic Screen Questionnaire, NCVS-1, on pages 2
     through 10. 

     Complete Crime Incident Reports, NCVS-2s, for all
     incidents reported by herself/himself.

An individual respondent is any household member who is at least 
12 years of age and is not selected as the household respondent.  
In most cases, you will interview each individual respondent by 
self-response.  On the NCVS-1, complete Items 17 through Check 
Item G for each individual respondent.  If an individual 
respondent reports a crime incident, then you will complete an 
NCVS-2 with the individual respondent for each crime incident 
reported. 

Who Qualifies To Be a
Household Respondent

In most cases, the household respondent must be:

          A household member,

          At least 18 years of age, and

     Knowledgeable enough about the household to provide
     the necessary information for the Control Card
     (NCVS-500), the Basic Screen Questionnaire  
     (NCVS-1), and, if necessary, Crime Incident Reports
     (NCVS-2s) for each incident reported by the
     household respondent.

Normally, the best candidate for the household respondent is
the reference person or another household member who owns or 
rents the housing unit.  However, unlike the requirements for 
a reference person, the household respondent does not have to 
be one of the owners or renters of the housing unit. 

(See Topic 4 of this chapter for information about
reference persons.) 

For a second through seventh enumeration period interview,
try to select as the household respondent the same household
member who was the household respondent for the previous
enumeration period. If this is not possible, then make sure
that the household member you select meets the requirements 
for a household respondent.

Exceptions to the Rule

Is it acceptable for a household respondent to be under
18 years of age ?
If the reference person and/or the spouse of the reference
person is 17 years of age, either the reference person or the
spouse of the reference person can be the household respondent.  
For example, a sample household is comprised of a married 
couple ages 28 and 17.  Because they are married, either person 
qualifies as a household respondent, even though one person is 
17 years old.  

If ALL household members are 17 years of age, select the
household member who appears to know the most about the
sample household.  For example, three 17-year-old friends
rent an apartment together while attending college.  Try to
select the household member who is most likely to provide
accurate information about household matters.

If you discover a household comprised of at least one        
17 year old and the remaining persons are all under 17 years
of age, select the 17-year-old household member as the
household respondent.
          
          NOTE: If you encounter a household in which ALL
          household members are under 17 years of age,
          contact your supervisor who will discuss this
          situation with Headquarters staff and then let you
          know how to handle the case. 

However, if the household consists of two or more unmarried 
individuals AND at least one of the individuals is 18 years 
of age or older, then the household respondent must be one 
of the members who is at least 18 years of age.  For example, 
Joe, Terry, and Frank are good friends and rent a house 
together.  Joe is 17 years old, Terry is 19 years old, and 
Frank is 20 years old. In this example, Terry and Frank
are eligible to be the household respondent, but Joe is not
eligible because of his age. 

When can a household respondent be a nonhousehold
member?
A nonhousehold member can be a household respondent
only when all of the following conditions exist:

     If all eligible household members are physically and/or
     mentally unable to be interviewed,

     All eligible household members have been under the
     care of the nonhousehold member for the entire
     reference period, 

     AND

     None of the eligible household members were able to
     leave the sample address during the entire reference
     period unless they were accompanied by the
     nonhousehold member caretaker.

If any of the eligible household members are capable of
being interviewed, select a household member as the
household respondent, NOT the nonhousehold member.

Questions Asked Only of the
Household Respondent

Any information that needs to be added and/or updated on
the Control Card (NCVS-500) is asked ONLY of the
household respondent during each enumeration period.

The following items on the Basic Screen Questionnaire
(NCVS-1) are asked ONLY of the household respondent:

     Items 34 and 35 - Item 34 determines whether any
     household member operates a business from the
     sample address.  If a "Yes" answer is received in   
     Item 34, then Item 35 indicates whether the business 
     is "recognizable" or "unrecognizable."  

     (See Part C, Chapter 2, Topic 5, for more information 
      about recognizable and unrecognizable businesses 
      operated from the sample address.)

     Item 37 - This item determines whether the sample
     household has experienced any incidents during the
     reference period involving break-ins or attempted
     break-ins and illegal entries or attempted illegal
     entries. If a "Yes" answer is received, you will 
     ask for a brief description of the incident and enter 
     the number of times that the incident occurred.
     
     Items 38 and 39 - Item 38 determines how many
     motor vehicles are owned by current household
     members.  If at least one vehicle is mentioned or the
     respondent refuses to answer the question in Item 38,
     then Item 39 is asked to determine whether any
     incidents occurred during the reference period that
     involved any motor vehicles owned by the household
     members.  If a "Yes" answer is received, you will ask
     for a brief description of the incident and enter the
     number of times that the incident occurred.

     Item 46 - This item determines if any acts of
     vandalism were committed against the household
     during the reference period.  If a "Yes" answer is
     given, you will ask about the kind of property
     damaged, the kind of damage, and the cost, if any, to
     repair the damage. You will also ask if the household
     respondent was attacked or threatened or if the
     offender(s) stole or attempted to steal something from
     any household member during the act(s) of vandalism. 
     You will also determine whether any acts of vandalism
     were motivated by prejudice or bigotry towards
     members of specific groups.

Changing Household Respondents During 
an Interview

There may be instances when you need to change household
respondents after starting an interview.  

This could happen if:

     You call the household respondent back to complete
     an interview and discover that the person you selected
     as the household respondent is no longer considered a
     household member.

     You discover that the person you selected as the
     household respondent is unable to answer many of the
     questions about the household.

Under these circumstances, you must stop interviewing the
current household respondent and find a current household
member who is knowledgeable about the household.  Once
you have selected a new household respondent, start the
household respondent's interview from the beginning.

Identifying the Household
Respondent on NCVS Forms

As you conduct the NCVS interview, record your selection
for the household respondent on the following NCVS forms:

     Circle the line number of the household respondent in
     Control Card Item 12(NCVS-500). If you need to
     change the household respondent after the first
     enumeration period, make sure to erase the circle for
     the last household respondent when you circle the line
     number for the current household respondent.

Enter the household respondent's line number in--

         Item 30c on the reverse side of the Control
         Card.

         Item 4 on the cover page of the Basic Screen
         Questionnaire (NCVS-1).

         Item 19 on page 2 of the NCVS-1.

Topic 6.  Proxy Interview

Definition

A proxy interview is one in which someone other than the
intended household member answers the interview questions
for the eligible household member.  The person who is
authorized to answer for the intended household member is
referred to as the proxy respondent.  The intended
household member who is unable to answer the interview
for himself/herself is referred to as the proxy household
member.

Since a proxy respondent is more likely to omit an incident
or leave out some of the details about a reported incident, 
we discourage proxy interviews except as a last resort.

Acceptable Reasons for a
Proxy Interview

Only THREE conditions allow you to take a proxy interview
for a household member. These conditions are:

     A parent does not allow you to speak to his/her 12- or
     13-year-old child to conduct the interview.  In this
     situation, any household member who is at least       
     18 years of age can be the proxy respondent for the
     child.  However, one of the child's parents would be
     the best proxy respondent.

     An eligible household member is temporarily absent
     during the entire interview period.  Before accepting a
     proxy interview for this situation, make sure that the
     absent person still qualifies as a household member. If
     the absent person is still a household member, then
     you can accept a proxy interview from an eligible
     household member.

     (See "Who Qualifies as a Proxy Respondent?" later
     in this topic.  Also see Topic 3 of this chapter for
     more information about household membership.)

     An eligible household member is physically or
     mentally incapacitated continuously throughout the
     ENTIRE interview period, due to health or mental
     illness problems.  For example, a household may have
     a family member who is too hard of hearing to
     complete a telephone interview for himself/herself 
     or a household may have a family member with
     Alzheimer's disease who cannot respond for
     herself/himself.

     The following problems do not constitute being
     physically or mentally incapacitated and cannot be
     accepted as reasons for taking a proxy interview: Old
     age (by itself), colds or flu, drunkenness, under the
     influence of drugs, or any problems that might be
     aggravated because a respondent feels that some
     NCVS questions are upsetting (such as the NCVS
     questions related to rape and sexual assault).

Proxy Interviews for Household 
Respondents

There is only one acceptable reason for taking a proxy interview 
for a household respondent.  This can happen when a nonhousehold 
member is a proxy respondent for an entire household. This should 
happen only occasionally, but, when it does, the nonhousehold 
member must be the proxy respondent and caretaker for the 
household respondent AND all other household members who 
are eligible for the NCVS interview.  

If at least one eligible household member is capable of being
interviewed by self-response, then that person must be the
household respondent and the proxy respondent for the
remaining household members who are eligible for interview.  
Always complete the household respondent's interview BEFORE 
interviewing any other eligible household members.

(Also see "Accepting a Nonhousehold Member as a Proxy
Respondent" later in this topic.)

Here are some examples:

     Both members of the Bosco household are suffering
     from Alzheimer's disease and a live-in nurse cares for
     them. The nurse is over 18 years of age and has been
     caring for John and Mary Bosco for the past 2 years. 
     In this situation, the nurse qualifies as a proxy
     respondent for John and Mary Bosco.  The nurse
     would be the proxy respondent for the household
     respondent and the individual respondent.
  
     The Jones household includes the reference person,
     Gloria Jones, and her 78-year-old mother, Martha
     Perkins.  When you call the Jones household, only
     Martha Perkins is at home.  Since both Gloria and
     Martha are eligible to be the household respondent,
     you should make Martha the household respondent,
     take her NCVS interview, and recontact the household
     later to interview Gloria as an individual respondent.

     When you contact the Baxter household, the only
     household member who meets the requirements for a
     household respondent is away on a business trip and
     will not return before closeout.  However, his 16-year-
     old son, Gary, is available when you call the
     household. In this situation, you cannot take a proxy
     interview for Gary's father and Gary cannot be the
     household respondent.  Since you must always
     interview the household respondent first, you would
     need to classify this case as a Type A noninterview.

Unacceptable Reasons for
Proxy Interviews

To reinforce the fact that proxy interviews must only be taken 
as a "last resort," four situations are listed below in which 
you may be tempted to take a proxy interview for an individual 
respondent, but must NOT.  If you experience any of these 
situations, you must classify the household member as a Type Z 
noninterview.

     You make several attempts to contact a household
     member during the interview period, but are never
     successful in reaching him/her at home.  A good
     example of this would be a student who lives at home,
     but is engaged in so many activities during the day and
     evening that you are unable to set up an interview
     before closeout.

     A household member refuses to be interviewed even
     after you try to persuade him/her to cooperate, but 
     tells you to get the information from another household
     member.

     You are unable to interview an eligible household
     member, because another household member refuses
     to let you conduct the interview.  A good example of
     this would be a parent who refuses to let you interview
     his/her 15-year-old teenager.

     You are unable to interview an eligible household
     member, because he/she does not understand English
     and an acceptable interpreter is not available.

Who Qualifies as a Proxy
Respondent?

If you must take a proxy interview and the reason is an
acceptable one, your first choice for a proxy respondent
would be:

          A household member who is at least 18 years old,

          Very knowledgeable of the proxy household member,
          and

          Has already completed his/her own NCVS interview
          by self response.

Two exceptions to the age requirement for a proxy respondent are 
when:

     The household's reference person or one of the other
     persons who owns or rents the home is under 18 years
     of age OR

     All household members are under 18 years of age.

Accepting a Nonhousehold
Member as a Proxy Respondent

On rare occasions, a nonhousehold member can be a proxy
respondent.  However, several requirements must be met
before you can allow a nonhousehold member to be a proxy
respondent.

ALL of the following conditions must exist before accepting
a nonhousehold proxy respondent:

     Due to physical or mental illness problems, you are
     unable to interview ALL eligible household members
     by self response. 

     During the entire reference period (6 months prior to
     the interview date), ALL eligible household members
     at the sample address were unable to leave the housing
     unit unless they were accompanied by the nonhousehold 
     person who cares for them.

     The nonhousehold caretaker must be the proxy
     respondent for the entire household, including the
     household respondent.  This is the only situation in
     which a household respondent's interview can be a
     proxy interview.

     The nonhousehold proxy respondent must be at least
     18 years of age.

     The nonhousehold proxy respondent must have cared
     for all eligible household members during the entire
     reference period.  If the nonhousehold person did not
     care for some or all of the household members for
     more than a few days during the reference period, this
     person does not qualify as a proxy respondent.

If you don't feel comfortable or are unsure about a nonhousehold 
person as a proxy respondent, check with your supervisor before 
conducting the proxy interview.

Protecting Confidentiality

We have such strict requirements for accepting a nonhousehold 
proxy respondent because we want to ensure each sample household 
member's confidentiality.  

When talking to a proxy respondent who is not a household
member, you need to be especially careful not to mention
any information which a proxy household member or other
household members provided in a previous enumeration
period.  This includes the following types of information--
household composition, marital status, education, income,
and so forth.

To ensure confidentiality during a proxy interview with a
nonhousehold proxy respondent, always ask Control Card
Item 13a, regardless of the enumeration period.  Then, when
asking Control Card Item 14, "I have listed...", only read
the names provided by the nonhousehold proxy respondent
in Item 13a.  Don't mention or ask about other persons that
were listed in the household roster previously, but not
mentioned by the nonhousehold proxy respondent.  Also, for
any Control Card items that need to be updated, just ask the
item without mentioning the information recorded from a
previous enumeration period.

Completing an INTER-COMM for Each 
Proxy Interview

Complete an INTER-COMM for each proxy interview that you take, 
with the exception of proxy interviews for 12- or 13-year-old 
household members.  Make sure to explain on the INTER-COMM why 
it was necessary to take a proxy interview for a sample 
household member.  It is especially important to write a detailed 
explanation when the proxy interview was taken because the 
household member is physically and/or mentally unable to answer 
the interview questions.

Whenever you complete an INTER-COMM for a proxy interview from a 
nonhousehold proxy respondent, make sure that your explanation 
includes:

     Who the nonhousehold member is (a nurse, daughter,
     neighbor, and so forth) 
     AND 

     How much time the nonhousehold member spends
     with the household member(s) under his/her care for
     example, 8 hours a day or 70 hours a week).

After completing an INTER-COMM, attach it to the sample household's 
NCVS-1.

Keeping Proxy Interviews to
a Minimum

Whenever possible, we want eligible respondents (household members 
who are at least 12 years of age) to answer the interview questions 
for themselves.  By allowing a proxy respondent to answer for a 
household member, you run the risk of:

          Missing incidents 

          AND/OR

          Not getting sufficient details about reported 
          incidents.

(Also see pages A2-12 through A2-18 for proxy respondent
procedures.)

Problems Conducting a Proxy Interview

You may encounter situations in which a proxy interview is
acceptable, but the interview cannot be done because:

          You are unable to identify an acceptable proxy
          respondent 

          OR 

          An acceptable proxy respondent refuses to give 
          you an interview for a household member.
  
When this happens, you will need to classify the household
member as a Type Z noninterview.  

Under the following situation, you must classify the sample
address as a Type A noninterview:

     The entire household is under the care of a
     nonhousehold person,

     All household members are unable to be interviewed
     by self-response due to health or mental illness
     problems,

     The nonhousehold caretaker refuses to give a proxy
     interview for at least the household respondent.

Topic 7.  Bounding Interviews

Definition

Bounding interviews is an NCVS process to ensure that previously 
reported incidents are not reported again.  This process is 
designed to help you prevent turning in a completed NCVS-2 for 
an incident that:

     Was reported in a previous enumeration period and did
     not actually occur again during the current
     enumeration period.

     Was reported already by another household member
     during the current enumeration period, such as a
     household break-in and robbery in which no household
     members were threatened, attacked, or personally
     victimized during the incident.  However, if any
     household members were personally victimized during
     a crime incident, we want you to complete a separate
     NCVS-2 for each victimized household member.

     (Also see Chapter 3, Topic 16, for more information
     about completing NCVS-2s for victimized household
     members.)

This process is actually a quality assurance measure
designed so that we provide a more accurate measure of
criminal victimization within NCVS sample households.

Bounding Information(Item 32 on 
NCVS-500)

For each enumeration period, you will use Control Card
Items 32a through 32e to record specific facts about each
reported crime incident for a sample household.  The facts
that you record in these items are referred to as "bounding
information."

When to Complete Item 32

Enter the appropriate "bounding information" onto Control
Card Items 32a through 32e AFTER you have either:

     Left the household upon completion of some or all
     interviews for the household, 

     OR 

     Ended a telephone call with the household upon
     completion of some or all interviews for the
     household.  

Do not waste a respondent's time while you enter the bounding 
information on the Control Card.

How to Bound NCVS Interviews (Check 
Item W on NCVS-2)

First enumeration period:
The last item you will complete on a Crime Incident Report,
NCVS-2, is Check Item W.  Use Check Item W to summarize all 
the pertinent facts about the reported incident (who, what, 
where, when, and how).  After completing your summary report 
in Check Item W, you will see a field representative 
instruction telling you to check the bounding information on 
the back of the Control Card (Item 32).

Unless you make more than one contact with a first enumeration 
period household, you will not see bounding information entered 
in Control Card Item 32 for the first enumeration period. If you 
interview all eligible household members in one contact, then no 
bounding information will be entered in Item 32 and you will not 
need to refer to Item 32 after completing Check Item W on each 
NCVS-2 that you complete.  Once you end the first contact with 
a household, you will record information in Control Card Item 32 
for any incidents reported during the first contact
with a sample household.

Second through seventh enumeration periods:
ALWAYS check the incidents reported for the current interview 
against any information recorded in Control Card Item 32:

     After completing your summary report in Check    
     Item W on the NCVS-2 

     AND 

     While you are still with the respondent. 

Carefully review all bounding information on the Control
Card to ensure that the NCVS-2 you just completed does not
duplicate one described already in Control Card Item 32.  
If you suspect that a duplication has occurred, tactfully ask 
the respondent whether the incidents are the same (for example,
same time, place, and circumstances) or separate crime
incidents (for example, same place and circumstances, but
different times).

Deleting Duplicate Incidents

If you determine that you have completed an NCVS-2 for a
previously reported incident and have verified this fact with
the respondent, then you need to delete or "out-of-scope" the
NCVS-2 that you just completed and record the reason for
out-of-scoping the incident. 

(See Topic 8 of this chapter for more details about "out-of-
scope" incidents.)

Topic 8.  Out-of-Scope Incident

Definition

An "out-of-scope" incident is one that falls outside of the
limits defined for this survey.  There are specific reasons for
targeting a reported incident as "out of scope," as well as
specific procedures for marking an incident "out of scope." 
The information from out-of-scope incidents is not included
in the tabulations used to measure crime in the United
States.

You will mark most incidents out of scope after completing
the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2).  However, when a
reported incident happens outside of the reference period,
you will stop and mark the incident out of scope before
completing the Crime Incident Report (NCVS-2). This is the
only acceptable reason for not completing a crime incident
report for a reported incident.  All other reported incidents,
both in scope and out of scope, require you to complete a
Crime Incident Report before marking the incident out of
scope.  This procedure ensures that we do not miss any
crimes. 

Understanding In-Scope vs.
Out-of-Scope Incidents for
the NCVS

Listed below are the criteria you need to follow when deciding 
whether a reported incident is in scope or out of scope for the 
NCVS:

Reference Period

     In scope: The reported incident must have happened
     within the starting and ending dates for the household
     member's reference period.

     Out of scope: If a reported incident happened outside
     of the starting and ending dates for a household
     member's reference period, you must out of scope the
     incident. In fact, as soon as you discover that the
     incident occurred outside of the reference period, you
     can stop completing the NCVS-2 and mark it appropriately 
     as an out-of- scope incident.

(Also see "How To Mark NCVS Forms for Out- of-Scope Incidents" 
later in this topic.)  

Example:
It is August 3, 2003 and you are interviewing Carl Smith whose 
current reference period starts on February 1, 2003 and ends on 
August 2, 2003. During the interview, Carl reports a household 
theft that happened earlier that day.  This would be an out-of-
scope incident because it happened outside of the respondent's 
reference period.  Each respondent's reference period always 
ends on the day prior to the date of interview.

(Also see Topic 2 of this chapter for more information
about reference periods.)

Duplicate Incident

     In scope:  Only one crime incident report is necessary
     for each unique household crime incident reported in
     which none of the household members were personally
     victimized (For example, none of the household
     members were assaulted, attacked, or threatened with
     physical harm).  A separate crime incident report is
     required for each reported incident in which a
     household member was personally victimized.


     Out of scope:  When more than one household
     member reports the same household crime, one of the
     incidents must be marked out of scope.  Always keep
     the incident with the most complete Crime Incident
     Report (NCVS-2).  

     A separate Crime Incident Report is required for each
     unique incidence of personal victimization taken from
     the household member who was victimized. If two
     household members report the same incidence of
     personal victimization, only keep the NCVS-2
     completed with the household member who was
     personally victimized during the incident and 
     mark out of scope the duplicate incident.

----------------------------------------------
Example 1:
Peggy Polk, the household respondent, reported that
someone attempted to steal their riding lawn mower. 
However, Peggy's husband surprised the offender and
he ran away.  When you interview Peggy's husband,
Bob, he also reports the same attempted theft of their
lawn mower.  Since Peggy's crime incident report is
more complete than Bob's, mark Bob's NCVS-2 out of
scope.
-------------------------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------
Example 2:
Don Dwyer reported that he was attacked and robbed
while walking to his car after a movie.  When you
interview his wife, Barbara, she also reports Don's
attack and robbery that she witnessed from in front 
of the movie theater.  Barbara was not personally
victimized during this incident.  You would mark
Barbara's NCVS-2 out of scope, because she was not
personally victimized and her NCVS-2 is a duplicate
of Don's NCVS-2. 
--------------------------------------------------

(Also see Topic 7 of this chapter for more information
about bounding information and duplicate incidents.)

Vandalism

     In scope:  The vandalism questions only appear in the
     household respondent's screen questions.  We want to
     keep incidents in which the household respondent was
     attacked or threatened, any eligible household member
     had something stolen, or an attempt was made to steal
     something from a household member during the act(s)
     of vandalism.

     Out of scope:  However, if a household respondent
     reports an act of vandalism in which another eligible
     household member was attacked or threatened with
     physical harm, you would mark out of scope the
     NCVS-2 completed with the household respondent.
               
     Then, you would complete an NCVS-2 with the
     victimized household member himself/herself.

--------------------------------------------------
Example:
Sidney Soper, who is the household respondent,
reported that someone was spray painting symbols on
his son's car and when his son confronted the
offender, the offender punched him in the head and
kicked him in the stomach.  After completing the
NCVS-2 with Sidney Soper, make sure to get a
completed NCVS-2 from his son, Steven, for this
attack.  Then mark the NCVS-2 from Sidney out of
scope, since he was not personally victimized, no one
in the household had anything stolen, and no attempt
was made to steal anything.  
---------------------------------------------------

(Also see Chapter 2, Topic 4, for more information about
vandalism.)

Personal Theft

     In scope:  An eligible respondent reports an  incident
     of theft and the stolen property was owned solely by
     eligible household members.

     Out of scope:  When an eligible respondent reports an
     incident of theft involving property that belongs solely
     to nonhousehold members and no other crimes were
     reported during the incident, you will mark the
     incident out of scope. 

---------------------------------------------------
Example:
While interviewing Jim Jones, the household respondent, 
he reports an incident in which his friend's golf bag 
and clubs were stolen from Jim's front yard while his 
friend came in the house to get a drink. Since the stolen 
property is owned solely by Jim's friend and no other 
crime was committed during the incident, you will mark 
this incident out of scope after completing the NCVS-2.  
-----------------------------------------------------

(Also see Chapter 3, Topic 11, for more information about
property ownership.)


Theft From a Household Member Under 
12 Years of Age

     In scope:  If an eligible household member reports the
     theft of property belonging to a household member
     under 12 years of age, then the stolen property must
     have been taken away from one of the following
     locations for the incident to stay in scope for the
     NCVS and be considered stolen household property
     (since the owner is under 12 years of age):

         Property was taken from the sample address.

         Property was taken from a vacation or second
         home.

         Property was taken from a hotel or motel where
         the sample household was staying temporarily.

     Out of scope:  You must mark an incident out of
     scope when an eligible household member reports the
     theft of property belonging to a household member
     under 12 years of age and the property was taken
     from a location other than those listed above.  In this
     case, the stolen property cannot be considered
     household property and, if no other crime occurred
     during the incident, you must mark the incident out of
     scope.

--------------------------------------------------
Example 1:
George Gates reported that his 10-year-old daughter's
bike was stolen from the driveway to their home and
no other crime was committed during the incident.  In
this case, the incident is IN SCOPE for the NCVS.  
---------------------------------------------------
 
---------------------------------------------------
Example 2:
Lana Lomis reported that her 9-year-old son's go-cart
was stolen from his school parking lot, while he went
in the school to talk to a teacher.  In this case, you
would mark this incident OUT OF SCOPE because
the property was taken from a location other than the
acceptable locations and no other crime occurred
during the incident. 
----------------------------------------------------

(Also see Chapter 3, Topic 9, for more information about
thefts and attempted thefts.)

Business Theft

     In scope:  When a respondent reports an incident
     involving a theft of business property, the business
     must be:

         Owned by an eligible household member and

         The business must be considered unrecognizable
         (no sign or other indication on the property to
          indicate the presence of a business to the general
          public).

     Out of scope:  The following incidents of theft of
     business property are out of scope for the NCVS:

          A respondent reports a theft of business property
          and the business is not owned by any of the
          household members.

          A respondent reports a theft of business property
          and the business is recognizable to the general
          public by a sign or some other indication on the
          property.

--------------------------------------------------
Example 1:
Kelly Kallas is the owner of a small business out of
her home doing dressmaking and sewing alterations. 
She wants to keep her business small, so she doesn't
advertise and most of her customers are relatives,
friends, and neighbors.  She has three different sewing
machines which she considers to be business property. 
Kelly reported an incident in which someone illegally
broke into her home and stole household items, along
with all three sewing machines.  In this case, the
incident is IN SCOPE because, in addition to the
business being unrecognizable, there was an illegal
entry and some household items were also stolen. 
Even if this business was recognizable, this incident
would still be in scope because other crimes happened
during the incident.
-----------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------
Example 2:
Stephanie Slater owns a small dress shop in a local
shopping center.  This dress shop has a visible sign at
the entrance and is listed on the shopping center sign,
too.  Stephanie reported that an attempt was made to
steal several skirts during normal store hours.  In this
case, you would mark the incident OUT OF SCOPE since the 
business is recognizable and no other crimes happened 
during the incident.
--------------------------------------------------------

(Also see Chapter 2, Topic 5, for more information about
recognizable and unrecognizable businesses.)

Crimes Not Measured by the NCVS

     In scope:  The following types of crimes are measured
     by the NCVS and reported incidents involving these
     crimes would be in scope:

          Thefts and attempted thefts

          Break ins and illegal entries and attempted break
          ins and illegal entries

          Attacks and attempted attacks 

          Face-to-face threats to physically harm a
          household member

          Sexual assault and rape and attempted sexual
          assault and rape.

     Out of scope:  The following types of crimes are not
     measured by the NCVS and reported incidents
     involving these crimes would be out of scope:

                    Murder

                    Kidnapping

                    Fraud

                    Public drunkenness

                    Drug abuse

                    Prostitution

                    Illegal gambling

                    Con games

                    Blackmail

---------------------------------------------------
Example:
Tommy Tindall reported an incident in which he was
a victim of a con game.  He thought that he was
investing money in a legitimate company and, after
losing $7,000, he discovered that it was all a big con
game to steal money from unsuspecting clients.  In
this case, you would mark the incident out of scope
because con games are not measured by the NCVS. 
-------------------------------------------------

(See Chapter 2, Topic 2, for more information about
NCVS crimes.)

Offender Is a Police Officer

      In scope: If a respondent reports an incident in which
      the offender is a police officer and the officer exceeded
      his authority as a police officer or used excessive
      force, then the incident is in scope for the NCVS.

      Out of scope: However, if a respondent reports an
      incident in which the offender is a police officer and
      the officer's actions during the incident were within his
      authority as a police officer or he/she was acting in the
      line of duty, then you would mark the incident out of
      scope.

-------------------------------------------------
Example 1:
Monica Matthews reported an incident in which she
was stopped while driving for not wearing her seat
belt.  During the traffic stop, the officer handcuffed
her for no apparent reason. If the police officer did
exceed his authority in this situation, then the 
incident would be IN SCOPE for the NCVS.
--------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------
Example 2:
Donald Downs reported an incident in which he was
handcuffed and searched for drugs and weapons, while he 
was buying cocaine for a friend in an alley. In this case, 
the police officer was acting in the line of duty and you 
would mark the incident OUT OF SCOPE.
----------------------------------------------------

(See Chapter 3, Topic 21, for more information about
incidents involving police officers.)

Offender is a Spouse of
the Respondent

     In scope: If a respondent reports an incident in which
     his/her ex-spouse stole property owned by the
     respondent, then the incident is in scope for the NCVS.

     Out of scope:  However, if a respondent reports an
     incident in which his/her spouse stole property that is
     owned jointly by both spouses who are legally
     separated, but not yet divorced, then you would mark
     the incident out of scope.

---------------------------------------------------
Example:
Edward Easton reported an incident in which his
soon-to-be ex-spouse came in their house while he
was on a business trip and stole all of their computer
equipment.  Since their divorce was not final at the
time of the incident and the computer equipment was
jointly owned, you will mark the incident OUT OF
SCOPE if no other crimes occurred during the
incident.
---------------------------------------------------

(See Chapter 3, Topic 11, for more information about
property ownership.)

Completing an NCVS-2 for an Out-of-
Scope Incident

Once you start filling out an NCVS-2 for a reported incident, 
you must complete the entire Crime Incident Report.  There is 
only one exception to this rule.  As soon as you discover that 
an incident occurred either before the starting date for the 
reference period or on the day of the interview, you can stop 
and mark the incident out of scope without finishing the NCVS-2.

It is possible that you will be unable to determine that an
incident happened outside of the reference period while
completing the NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire.  If this
happens, you will normally discover that the incident is
outside of the reference period when you ask Item 3 on the
NCVS-2.  This item determines the exact month and year
that the incident occurred.

How to Mark NCVS Forms for Out-of-Scope 
Incidents

If you need to make an incident out of scope, mark the following 
forms as instructed below:

NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report

For each incident that you must mark out-of-scope, make the
following entries on the Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2:

     Using the "Notes" space in the top corner of the
     NCVS-2's cover page, print "O/S" and the reason
     for making the incident out-of-scope.  Make sure
     you always enter both "O/S" AND the reason. 

     Draw a large "X" from corner to corner on each page
     of the NCVS-2.

NCVS-1, Basic Screen Questionnaire

Do NOT count any out-of-scope incidents in the total number 
of completed NCVS-2s that you enter in Item 15c on the NCVS-1.

Adjust the "Number of times" entry for the screen question
at which the household member reported the out-of-scope
incident.  If the out-of-scope incident was the only incident
recorded for the screen question, change the "Yes" answer to
"No" in part (b) to show that no incidents of that type
happened during the reference period. 

Adjust the counts in Check Item G to delete the out-of-scope
incident for the household member who reported it.  If the
out-of-scope incident was the only entry in Check Item G,
mark the "No entries transcribed below" box after deleting
the "Number of times" entry.

NCVS-500, Control Card

Do NOT make any entries in Control Card Item 32 (bounding 
information) for an out-of-scope incident.

Part C, Chapter 2

Chapter 2
Screening for Crimes

Table of Topics

1  Overview of Chapter 2

2  Crimes Measured by the NCVS

3  Threats

4  Vandalism

5  Recognizable/Unrecognizable Businesses

6  Ownership of Motor Vehicles 

7  Months/Years Living at Address 

8  Frequency of Household Moves

9  Computer-Related Incidents

Topic 1.  Overview of Chapter 2

The Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1) is the instrument 
that you use to determine if any eligible household members 
have been victimized during the reference period. As you use 
the NCVS-1 to screen for crimes, you ask a series of detailed 
questions about various types of victimizations, including 
situations in which crimes could occur. However, not all 
crimes reported by respondents are measured by the NCVS. 
Topic 2 covers crimes measured by the NCVS.   

As you screen for crime incidents, you need to understand the 
concepts that are associated with NCVS crimes. For example, a 
respondent may report that he or she was threatened over the 
telephone, but the NCVS only includes threats made directly by 
the offender in person to the respondent. Topic 3 covers 
threats.  

Although the NCVS does measure some crimes committed during an 
act of vandalism, vandalism by itself is not measured by the 
NCVS.  Topic 4 covers vandalism.  

When respondents report thefts from their businesses, it is 
important to determine whether these businesses are unrecognizable.  
Not all thefts from businesses owned by eligible respondents are 
measured by the NCVS.  Only thefts from businesses that are NOT 
advertised with signs or other visible indications of a business 
to the general public are included in the NCVS. Topic 5 covers
recognizable/unrecognizable businesses.  When respondents 
report motor vehicle thefts, the NCVS measures these thefts 
if the thefts happened during the reference period and the 
vehicles were owned by eligible household members at the time 
of each incident. If a stolen vehicle is recovered and then 
sold before the interview date, the NCVS still includes the 
theft. Topic 6 covers ownership of motor vehicles.

Besides screening for crimes, the NCVS-1 also includes questions 
about the sample household, such as questions about a household's 
mobility.  Topic 7 covers months/years living at address, and 
Topic 8 covers frequency of household moves.  

Lastly, Topic 9 covers the personal use of computers, the use 
of computers to operate a home business, and computer-related 
incidents.  A computer-related incident by itself is not 
measured by the NCVS.

Topic 2.  Crime Measured by the NCVS

NCVS Crime Categories and Types

The NCVS data collected from sample households can be separated 
into two main crime categories:  personal crimes and property 
crimes. 

Personal Crimes

Personal crimes include attempted and completed crimes that 
involve direct contact between the victim and the offender(s).  
Personal crimes can fall under one of the following 
subcategories:

     Violent crimes
     Listed below are the types of personal crimes that are
     considered violent crimes if they are attempted or
     completed:

              Rape
              Sexual assault
              Personal robbery
              Assault
              Verbal threats of rape, sexual assault, personal
              robbery, and assault 

     Personal theft 
     Listed below are the types of personal crimes that are
     considered crimes of theft if they are attempted or
     completed:

              Purse snatching
              Pocket picking

     A personal theft crime involves an offender taking or
     attempting to take property or cash directly from the
     victim by stealth, but without force or threat of force. 

Property Crimes

Property crimes include attempted and completed crimes that do 
not involve any direct contact with a sample household member.  
Listed below are the types of crimes that are considered 
property crimes:

              Forcible entry
              Burglary, with forcible entry
              Burglary, with illegal entry and no force
              Motor vehicle theft
              Theft

Personal Crimes vs. Property Crimes

Personal crimes involve direct contact between offenders
and eligible household members during an incident,
regardless of whether the crimes were attempted or
completed. If more than one eligible household member
was attacked, verbally threatened, or had property or cash
taken directly from them during the same incident, you need
to complete a separate Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, for
each eligible household member who was personally
victimized during the incident.  

-------------------------------------------------------
Example:
The Trevor brothers, L1 and L2, are both eligible
household members.  While they were waiting together in
line to enter a movie theater, someone threatened to stab
both of them if they did not hand over their wallets.  
Since both household members were threatened with physical
harm, you need to complete two separate Crime Incident
Reports, NCVS-2s--one for L1 and another for L2.
-------------------------------------------------------

Since property crimes do not involve any personal contact
between a household member and an offender, you only
need to complete one Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, for
each incident, even though more than one household
member may report the same property crime incident.  

------------------------------------------------------
Example:
During the reference period, the Burton's house was
illegally entered and burglarized while they were out of
town for a wedding.  While conducting the screening
interview, L1and L2 both reported the same incident of
illegal entry and burglary.  Only one completed NCVS-2
is required for this property crime incident. 
------------------------------------------------

Let's say that you completed two NCVS-2s for the property
crime described above, one for L1 and another for L2, and
then you discover that they cover the same property crime
incident.  If this happens: 

        Only keep one Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2,
        usually the one reported by the household respondent
        who is L1 in the example above and mark the other
        NCVS-2 out-of-scope.

        Change the screen item answer for L2 from "Yes" to
        "No."

        Print "Duplicate of incident reported by L1" in the
        incident description space for L2's screen item.

        Delete or correct the "Number of times" entry for L2's
        screen item. 

Crimes Not Measured by NCVS

The NCVS does not collect information about the following types 
of crimes:

      Murder (because there is no victim to interview)
      Kidnapping
      Any crimes against recognizable businesses, regardless
      of whether the business is or is not operated from a
      sample address 
      Con games and fraud
      Blackmail

The following crimes against society also are excluded from
the NCVS:

      Public drunkenness
      Drug abuse
      Prostitution
      Illegal gambling

If a respondent reports a crime not measured by the NCVS,
complete an NCVS-2 so we do not miss any other crime that 
is measured by the NCVS and could have been committed
during the same incident.  If the only crime committed is
one NOT measured by the NCVS, you must out-of-scope
the incident after completing the NCVS-2.

(Refer to Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, for detailed instructions 
on how to out-of-scope an incident.) 

Classifying NCVS Crimes

Each incident can be classified as only ONE type of crime.
If an incident could classify as more than one type of crime,
then the incident will be classified as the most serious type
of crime that occurred during the incident.  For example, if a
respondent was raped and had her purse stolen during the
same incident, the incident would classify as a completed
rape, rather than a completed purse snatching.

After the following tasks are completed, a computer program is 
used to classify each incident into a specific type
of NCVS crime:

        All out-of-scope incidents for the NCVS have been
        deleted, 

        Any editing discrepancies have been resolved, and 

        The appropriate data have been keyed.  

Using a computer program designed to classify incidents by type 
of crime ensures a consistent and standardized classification of 
incidents.

Topic 3.  Threats 

Definition

A threat must meet the following conditions to be acceptable as 
a threat for the NCVS:

     The threat must be delivered verbally and in person
     from the offender to the respondent. 

     AND

     The threat must involve the potential for physical harm
     to the respondent. 

Examples of Acceptable Threats

The following examples are acceptable threats for the NCVS:

----------------------------------------------
Example #1:

Julie was withdrawing money at an ATM when an offender 
walked up behind her with a knife in his hand and told 
her to hand over the money she just withdrew or else he 
would stab her. 
----------------------------------------------
     

------------------------------------------------
Example #2:

An older student and Bobby (who is 16 years old)
were arguing in the school parking lot.  During the
argument, the older student threatened to break
Bobby's arm if he did not lend him his car that
afternoon. 
-------------------------------------------------

------------------------------------------------
Example #3:

Ted heard a noise just outside his front door.  He
went to the door and called out, "Who's there?" 
The woman outside the front door yelled back,
"Let me in now or I'll come to your shop and kill
you."
-------------------------------------------------

Threats Not Included for the NCVS

Do NOT accept the following types of threats as threats for the 
NCVS:

     Threats to physical harm the respondent delivered over
     the telephone or a FAX machine,

     Threats to physically harm the respondent delivered in
     a letter or an "email"  message, 

     Threats to physically harm the respondent delivered by
     someone else for an offender,

     Threats to physically harm a household member who
     is under 12 years of age,

     Threats to steal something from a household member
     or damage something belonging to a household
     member, without a threat to physical harm to the
     household member,

     Threats to physically harm household pets without a
     threat to physical harm a household member (include
     thefts of household pets), and

     Incidents in which a household member felt threatened, 
     but an offender did not verbally threaten to physically 
     harm the household member. 

Examples of Unacceptable Threats

The following examples are unacceptable threats for the NCVS:

--------------------------------------------------
Example #1:

Frank and Mike are good friends.  Mike asked Frank
to deliver a threat to his ex-girlfriend, Diane, for 
him. Frank met Diane at her office and passed on Mike's
threat to beat her up if she continued dating Tony.
---------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------------------------
Example #2:

Barbara was driving at night on a dark country road
when she noticed a big truck close to her back bumper.  
The truck driver honked, flashed his headlights, and 
then passed her at a high rate of speed. Barbara 
claimed that she felt threatened during that incident, 
although no words were spoken between her and the truck 
driver.  
----------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------------------------
Example #3:

Nick sent an e-mail message to Sam warning him to
stop parking in his company parking space or he
would knock him unconscious.
---------------------------------------------------

Topic 4.  Vandalism

Definition

For the NCVS, vandalism is the deliberate and malicious
damage to or destruction of property owned by either the
household respondent or another sample household member. 

Purpose of the Vandalism Questions

The vandalism questions are only included in the NCVS-1,
Basic Screen Questionnaire, and are only asked of the
household respondent. These questions are designed to:

     Measure the kinds and amount of vandalism that may
     have occurred during the 6 months prior to the
     interview, 

     AND


     Determine whether the household respondent was
     attacked or threatened during the act(s) of vandalism,

     OR

     Something was stolen or an attempt was made to steal
     something that belonged to the household respondent
     or another household member during the act(s) of
     vandalism.

You only need to complete an NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, when 
the household respondent reports that an NCVS crime occurred 
during the act of vandalism.  Do NOT assume that an NCVS crime 
occurred during an act of vandalism. 

Acts of Vandalism With No NCVS Crime

The following acts of vandalism by themselves do not require the 
completion of an NCVS-2:

     Spray painting the windows at a sample address.

     Smashing the mailbox at a sample address.

     Breaking a bird bath in the sample household's yard.
     Cutting the tires on a household member's car while
     parked in the driveway.

Acts of Vandalism With an NCVS Crime

The following acts of vandalism require the completion of an 
NCVS-2 because an NCVS crime was committed during these acts 
of vandalism:

     An offender spray painted the household respondent's
     garage door, broke the lock, illegally entered the
     garage, and stole a tool box full of tools.

     As the household respondent was walking back to his
     car in a store parking lot, he saw an offender scratch
     his car door.  When he confronted the offender, the
     offender punched him in the stomach and ran away.

     A household respondent happened to see a teenager hit
     her mail box with a baseball bat.  She ran out of her
     garage and confronted the teenager.  The teenager
     threatened to beat her up if she told his parents.

Topic 5.   Recognizable and Unrecognizable Businesses 

Definitions

When a business is operated from a sample address, we only 
collect information about reported incidents involving the 
business, such as a theft of business property, when the 
business is considered unrecognizable. For this reason, it 
is important that you understand the differences between an 
unrecognizable and a recognizable business.

For the NCVS, an unrecognizable business must meet ALL of 
the following criteria:

     It must be an establishment selling products or
     providing services for a fee that is operated by a
     household member from the sample address.

     There must be NO indication or sign announcing
     the business to anyone from outside the sample
     address, such as on a front door, window, garage
     door, mail box, or a free standing sign in the front
     yard.

For the NCVS, a recognizable business must meet ALL of the 
following criteria:

     It must be a commercial establishment operated by
     a household member either at the sample address or
     in another structure from which products are sold or
     services are provided for a fee.

     The business has a sign announcing its existence
     and the sign is clearly visible to the general public
     from OUTSIDE the business.

     When the business is operated from the sample
     address, the sign announcing the business must be
     located on the sample household's property, such as
     a sign on a front door, window, garage door, mail
     box, or a free standing sign in the front yard.

Any crimes committed against a recognizable business, such as 
an attempted or actual illegal entry of a recognizable business 
or an attempted or actual theft of property belonging to a 
recognizable business, are NOT included in the NCVS.  However, 
we do include in the NCVS incidents in which a household member 
was verbally threatened or harmed in some way or had personal 
property taken while at a recognizable business.

Here are some examples of incidents that require the completion 
of an NCVS-2 because a household member was verbally threatened 
or harmed in some way or had personal property taken while at a 
recognizable business:

-------------------------------------------
Example #1:
A robbery took place while Monica was buying milk at 
her local convenience store.  During the robbery, the 
offender threatened to kill her if she did not hand 
over her purse.  She handed over her purse without 
saying anything.

Example #2:
While Dave was picking up his prescription at his
local pharmacy, someone stole his wallet from his
jacket.

Example #3:
John operates a recognizable insurance agency from
his home. Last week, someone forcibly entered his
home and stole property belonging to both the
business and to John personally.
---------------------------------------------------

Identifying Businesses Operated From the
Sample Address

Page 2 of the Basic Screen Questionnaire (NCVS-1)includes 
two items that are asked only of the household respondent 
to determine if:

     Anyone in the household operates a business from
     the sample address (Item 34) and, if the answer is
     "Yes,"

     Whether there is a sign on the premises or some
     other indication to the general public that a business
     is operated from the sample address (Item 35).

A "Yes" answer in Item 35 indicates that a recognizable business 
is operated from the sample address.  A "No" answer in Item 35 
indicates that an unrecognizable business is operated from the 
sample address.

Unacceptable Signs of a Recognizable 
Business

Do not consider the following indicators as proof that a
recognizable business is operated from a sample address:

     A business advertisement appearing on the Internet
     or in a newspaper or telephone book.

     Any form of motor vehicle that has a business logo
     painted on it, such as a car, van, or truck parked
     either in the driveway or on the street outside the
     sample address.

Special Situations

Farms and ranches:
A farm or ranch should be considered a recognizable business 
when either of these conditions exist:

     A sample address is on a farm or ranch AND there is
     a sign somewhere on the property that identifies the
     farm or ranch by a specific name, such as "Desert
     Creek Dude Ranch."  

     A sample address is on a farm or ranch that has a
     produce stand by the roadside of the property.  

If the household respondent tells you in Item 34 that someone 
in the household operates a business from the sample address, 
but the farm or ranch does not have a sign or roadside produce 
stand on the property, mark the "No" answer in Item 35 on the 
NCVS-1, and consider the business to be unrecognizable.

Apartments:
When a household member manages an apartment complex in which 
he/she resides, consider this as a business operated from the 
sample address. If the following conditions exist, consider 
the business to be recognizable:
  
     A sign is present outside the apartment of a resident
     manager, resident owner, or apartment
     superintendent stating his/her job 

     OR 

     A sign is visible somewhere in the complex directing
     people to this person's specific apartment because of
     his/her job.  

If either situation exists, exclude any crime incidents
involving thefts of property owned only by the apartment
complex, such as furnishings from a furnished apartment
or any hall decorations.  However, you would complete an
NCVS-2 if any personal items belonging to the respondent
or other household members were stolen. 

When no visible sign exists in the apartment complex or
outside the resident manager's apartment identifying
his/her position, the "No" answer should be marked in
Item 35, indicating an unrecognizable business.  In this
situation, include any reported crime incidents involving
property owned by the apartment complex and reported by
the property's owner, such as furnishings stolen from a
furnished apartment.

Motor Vehicles:
Item 38 on the NCVS-1 is only asked of the household respondent 
and asks:

"What was the TOTAL number of cars, vans, trucks, motorcycles, 
or other motor vehicles owned by you or any other member of 
this household during the last 6 months?  Include those you 
no longer own."

When a respondent operates a recognizable business from the 
sample address and has a business vehicle, only include the 
business vehicle in the count for Item 38 if it is used also 
for personal use. If the vehicle is used only for the 
recognizable business, do NOT include it in the count for Item 
38.

If the respondent operates an unrecognizable business from the 
sample address and has a business vehicle, it does not matter 
if the vehicle is used only for the business.  In this case, 
the business vehicle would be included in the count for Item 
38, regardless of the vehicle's usage. 

Identifying Ownership of Stolen 
Property

It is possible that a respondent could report a crime incident 
in which property was stolen that belonged to the household, a 
household member, and an unrecognizable business operated from 
the sample address. When writing the Summary Report in Check 
Item W of the NCVS-2,it is important to identify separately 
who owned the stolen items.

For example, during the same incident:

     A big screen television valued at $1,200 belonging to
     the entire household was stolen, 

     Three rings valued at $3,500 belonging to the wife of
     the reference person were stolen, and

     Five watches were stolen that were valued at $4,000
     and belonged to the unrecognizable jewelry repair
     business operated from the sample address.

When describing the type and value of stolen property, do not 
lump together stolen property that belongs to the respondent 
or his/her household with stolen property belonging to the 
respondent's business.  If the stolen property belongs to a 
respondent's unrecognizable business, describe the type and 
value of the business property separately from the stolen 
property belonging to the respondent or his/her household. 
Make sure to state clearly that the stolen property belongs 
to an unrecognizable business.

Handling Crime Incidents Involving 
Businesses

The following examples show when to report incidents
involving businesses, as well as what parts of incidents
should not be reported on the NCVS-2:

     A respondent owns a recognizable candy store that is
     not operated from the sample address.  A theft
     occurred at the candy store in which $100 was taken
     from the register and $30 was taken from the
     respondent's wallet.

     You would--Accept the incident in the screen
     question and complete an NCVS-2 for the $30 theft
     from the respondent's wallet.  Do NOT include
     information about the theft from the register when
     completing the NCVS-2.

     A respondent works at a recognizable department
     store that was robbed.  During the course of the
     robbery, the respondent was shot in the arm with a
     handgun and $500 was stolen from the register at
     which she was working.

     You would--Accept the incident in the screen
     question and complete an NCVS-2 for the personal
     injury to the respondent.  Do NOT include
     information about the theft from the register when
     completing the NCVS-2.

     A respondent owns a recognizable hair salon and
     also operates part of the business from her home
     (which appears to be unrecognizable).  Someone
     broke into her home at the sample address and stole
     merchandise belonging to the business.

     You would--Accept the incident in the screen
     question and complete an NCVS-2 for the household
     break in.  Do NOT include information about the
     theft, because the stolen property belongs to a
     recognizable business.

     A respondent operates a recognizable lawn mower
     repair service from his home.  When he and his
     family were on vacation, someone broke into their
     home and stole some household items, as well as
     business tools and a few lawn mowers from his
     business.

     You would--Accept the incident in the screen
     question.  When completing the NCVS-2, only
     include information about the household break in
     and the stolen household items.  Do NOT include
     information about the stolen business tools and lawn
     mowers from the recognizable business. 

     Someone broke into the respondent's recognizable
     shoe store after it was closed for the day and stole
     several shoes, boots, and purses.  The respondent did
     not discover the incident until the next morning
     when she opened the store.

     You would--NOT accept the incident and would
     NOT complete an NCVS-2, because the stolen
     property belongs to a recognizable business and no
     sample household members were threatened or
     injured during the incident.

     A respondent operates a recognizable apartment
     house at a beach resort that contains beach rental
     units.  The respondent reported that someone broke
     into and vandalized two apartments, during the off
     season when the apartment house was vacant.  The
     offender(s) also stole electronic equipment and
     appliances.

     You would--NOT accept the incident and would
     NOT complete an NCVS-2.  Since this is a
     recognizable business, do NOT keep the break in
     and theft information.  Also, since no sample
     household members were threatened or injured
     during the incident, you do not need to complete 
     an NCVS-2.

Topic 6.  Ownership of Motor Vehicles

Definition

For the NCVS, motor vehicles owned by household
members are any vehicles that:

     Can be legally tagged, registered, and used as a
     means of transportation on most roads and highways
     (such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, and recreation
     vehicles/motor homes) and

     Were owned by a sample household member during
     the 6 months prior to the interview (reference
     period), regardless of whether the vehicle was sold,
     given away, junked, stolen, or abandoned before the
     interview date.

Item 38 on the NCVS-1

Item 38 on the NCVS-1 is asked only of the household respondent 
as part of his/her screening interview. The question for Item 
38 reads as follows:

"What was the TOTAL number of cars, vans, trucks, motorcycles, 
or other motor vehicles owned by you or any other member of 
this household during the last 6 months?  Include those you 
no longer own."

If the household respondent gives you an answer of one or
more vehicles, you will mark the appropriate box in Item
38 and continue with the screen question in Item 39a,
which asks about any incidents involving motor vehicles
owned by the sample household.

If the household respondent says that the household does not 
own any motor vehicles and has not owned any vehicles during 
the last 6 months, mark Box 0 (zero)"None" and skip to Item 
40a. 

Household Respondent Refuses

If you encounter a household respondent who refuses to tell 
you the number of vehicles owned by the household, tell the 
respondent that we ask this question so we know whether or 
not to ask about any crime incidents involving household 
vehicles.

If the household respondent still refuses to answer your
question, print "REF" in the answer space for Item 38. 
Even though a household respondent may refuse to answer 
Item 38, you are still required to complete Item 39.  You
will need to reword the question in Item 39 as follows:

"During the last 6 months, were any vehicles that you or
your household may have owned..."

Do NOT skip Item 39 when Item 38 is refused.

Which Vehicles Do You Include?

Under the following circumstances, INCLUDE a motor vehicle in 
the count of motor vehicles for Item 38:

     Vehicles used for private and/or business purposes if
     the vehicles are owned by a household member who
     also operates an unrecognizable business from the
     sample address.

     Vehicles used partially for private purposes if the
     vehicles are owned by a household member who also
     operates a recognizable business.  You may need to
     ask the household respondent whether or not a
     vehicle is used only for business purposes when you
     are unsure about its usage.

     Vehicles that are leased by a household member for
     more than one month AND for which a household
     member is responsible in case of theft.

Which Vehicles Do You Exclude?

Under the following circumstances, EXCLUDE a motor vehicle from 
the count of motor vehicles for Item 38:

     Vehicles that are used SOLELY for a recognizable
     business operated by a household member.

     Vehicles that are loaned to a household member
     from someone who is not a household member or
     from a business owned by someone who is not a
     sample household member.

     Vehicles that are kept at school and used by students
     living away from the sample address while attending
     school, even if the parents of the students own the
     vehicles and live at the sample address.

     Vehicles that are rented or leased by a household
     member for a short period of time (less than one
     month).

Topic 7.  Months/Years Living at Address

Definition

For the NCVS, "Months/years living at address" means the most 
current continuous length of time the household member has 
lived at the sample address.  

--------------------------------------------------
Example:

John and Beth lived at the sample address for a year before 
their trial separation.  While they were separated for 2 
months, John left the sample address and lived with his 
brother at another address.  After the 2-month separation 
ended, John moved back into the sample address and has 
continued to reside there continuously for the past 4 years.  
In this situation, the length of time John has lived at the
sample address would be 4 years.
-----------------------------------------------------

Items Using This Concept

Control Card Item 25c and Item 33a on the Basic Screen 
Questionnaire, NCVS-1, both ask:

How long have you lived at this address?

For Control Card Item 25c, you will always ask this question 
of the household respondent for each eligible household 
member during every enumeration period, regardless of 
whether the household member was interviewed.

For Item 33a on the Basic Screen Questionnaire, you have the 
option of either verifying the entry in Control Card Item 25c 
or asking the question again in Item 33a.

Check Item A on the Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, asks you 
to refer to the answer entered in Item 33a on the NCVS-1 and 
indicate on the NCVS-2 whether or not the household member 
has lived at the sample address:

          More than 6 months (7 months or longer) 

          OR

          6 months or less.

When you are not sure how to mark Check Item A on the NCVS-2, 
you can ask the following question of the respondent:

Have you lived at this address for more than 6 months?

When to Probe

For most NCVS interviews, you will just accept the answer given 
by the respondent without probing after you ask, "How long have 
you lived at this address?". However, if a respondent does ask 
you to explain this question or the answer given seems incorrect, 
probe by telling him/her that we want to know how many months or
years he/she has resided continuously as a household member at 
the sample address.  Probing will help ensure that you enter an 
accurate length of time in:

          Item 25c on the Control Card, 
          Item 33a on the NCVS-1, and 
          Check Item A on the NCVS-2.

If a respondent's answer is either too vague or given to you
in a range of years or months, you will need to probe for a
more precise answer.

If a respondent answers:
"Heavens, I've lived here for years and years."

Use this probe:
"Is it more than 5 years or less than 5 years?"

If a respondent answers:
"It's been about 5 to 10 years."

Use this probe:
"Can you give me your best estimate of the number of
years?"

If a respondent answers:
"Oh, I haven't lived here very long, less than a year." 

Use this probe:
"Have you lived here less than 6 months or more than 6
months?"

Whenever you must enter an estimate for the length of time a 
respondent has lived at a sample address, make sure that you 
print "EST" beside your entry.

Is a "Don't Know" Entry
Acceptable?

If you have probed for an answer and the respondent really
does not know and is unable to give you an estimate, you
can enter "DK" for "Don't know." However, if you can
determine whether the respondent has lived at the sample
address "more than 5 years" or "less than 5 years," enter
that information beside your "DK" entry.

Interpreting a Respondent's Answer

There may be instances when you cannot enter exactly what the 
respondent tells you. 

If a respondent has lived at a sample address for less than
one year (1 to 11 months), enter the number of months.  If
a respondent has lived at a sample address 12 months or
more, enter the number of years. 

When a respondent gives an answer in fractions of a month 
or in the number of weeks, always convert weeks to one or 
more months and either round up to the next month or down 
to the previous month.  If a respondent answers less than 
a month, enter "1 month."  

If a respondent answers with a number of years plus a
number of months, either:

     Round up to the next year when the number of
     months given is 6 or more (7 years and 8 months
     would convert to 8 years).

     When the number of months given is 5 or less,
     ignore the number of months and just enter the
     number of years (7 years and 2 months would
     convert to 7 years). 

Topic 8.  Frequency of Household Moves

Definition

For the NCVS, we consider a move to be each time a household 
member changes his/her usual place of residence, regardless 
of whether the usual place of residence was inside or outside 
the United States. A usual place of residence is the specific 
living quarters where a household member usually lives and 
sleeps the majority of each week or year. 

Item 33b on the NCVS-1

In Item 33b on the NCVS-1, each eligible household member 
living at the sample address for less than 5 years is asked 
the following question:

"Altogether, how many times have you moved in the last
5 years, that is, since (month of interview) , 19 (year 
5 years prior to interview year)?" 

If an eligible household member has lived continuously at
the sample address for 5 or more years prior to the
interview, you will skip over Item 33b.

Acceptable Answers

Acceptable answers in Item 33b on the NCVS-1 are:

     One number that is a total of all moves made by the
     respondent during the past 5 years, including the
     household member's move to the sample address.  If
     a respondent answers with a range of times moved,
     you need to probe for a single number.

     An estimated number when a respondent cannot
     provide the exact number of moves.  Print "EST"
     beside the number to show that it is an estimate.  

     Enter "DK" only as a last resort when a respondent
     cannot provide even an estimated number of times
     moved.

Probing for an Accurate Answer

Some respondents may have a little difficulty remembering how 
many times they have moved in the last 5 years, while other 
respondents may not understand what we mean by the term "move."  
Be prepared to explain what the number of times moved should 
include whenever a respondent appears confused or asks you a 
question about Item 33b.

When you need to probe for an accurate count to enter in
Item 33b, try asking the respondent where he/she was
living just before moving to the sample address and how
long he/she stayed at that address.  Repeat this type of
questioning until you have covered the respondent's moves
within the past 5 years.

College Students

When interviewing a college student, you may need to
explain that we want to know each time he/she has moved
between his/her dormitory and parents' home during the
past 5 years.  These students may not consider these
changes in their usual place of residence as moves, but 
we do for the NCVS.  

College students who live away from home during the
months of the year when school is in session should
consider the place where they are living as their usual
place of residence.  However, if they return to their
parents' home to live during long vacation periods, their
parents' home would be considered their usual place of
residence at that time.

Topic 9.  Computer-Related Incidents

Definition

Some of the computer-related incidents included in the series 
of computer crime screen questions are:

      * Fraud in purchasing something over the Internet.
      * A computer virus attack.
      * Threats of harm or physical attack made while online
        or through E-mail.
      * Unrequested lewd or obscene messages,
      * communications, or images while online or through
        E-mail.
      * A software copyright violation in connection with a
        home business.

For the NCVS, we ask if the respondent has experienced any 
computer-related incidents during the 6 months prior to the 
interview, while using any type of computer at home, work, 
or school for personal use or for operating a home business.  
None of these questions ask about a respondent's computer 
usage for his/her job, unless the respondent operates a home 
business.

Reasons for Asking About
Computer Crimes

With the increasing use of the Internet and the electronic
transmission of personal and financial information,
computer-related crimes seem to be on the rise.  These
types of crimes are also referred to as electronic or
cybercrimes.

Because of the increase in computer-related crimes, a need
has emerged to:

     Collect data about the incidence and impact of these
     types of crimes 

     AND

     Report this information to the general public, elected
     and appointed officials, and the criminal justice
     community.

The Bureau of Justice Statistics (BJS) has developed a
comprehensive statistical program to measure changes in
the incidence, magnitude, and consequences of computer
crimes.  As this statistical program evolves, the BJS is
committed to:

     Providing a better measure of the incidence and
     consequences of computer crimes and

     Communicating this information to persons who are
     instrumental in determining budgets and policies, as
     well as to the general public.

Eligible Respondents for the Computer 
Crime Screen Questions

You will ask the computer crime screen questions of all
current household members who are 12 years of age or
older in all sample households as part of their screen
interview in the NCVS-1 or NCVS-1A.

Which Items Cover the Computer Crime 
Screen Questions?

The computer crime screen questions are part of the screen
interview and are printed after Item 45b on the NCVS-1
and NCVS-1A.  However, you could also skip to the INTRO for 
this series of questions after marking Box 2, "No," in either 
Item 45a or Check Item C.

This series of questions starts with an Introduction and
continues with Items 45c through 45i.  For the household
respondent, the computer crime screen questions are
printed on page 7.  For the first three individual
respondents in the household, the computer crime screen
questions are printed on pages 15 and 16, 21 and 22, and
27 and 28 of the NCVS-1.

Since the NCVS-1 is designed for a four-person household,  
households with more than four eligible household members 
will require you to complete an NCVS-1A for each individual 
respondent whose interview will not fit on the household's 
NCVS-1.  The new computer crime questions are printed on 
pages 4 and 5 of the NCVS-1A.

At the start of each set of computer crime screen questions, 
you will see a banner announcing this series of screen questions.  
For the household respondent, the banner will read: HOUSEHOLD 
RESPONDENT'S COMPUTER CRIME SCREEN QUESTIONS.  For the remaining 
eligible household members, the banner will read: INDIVIDUAL'S  
COMPUTER CRIME SCREEN QUESTIONS.

Completing an NCVS-2, Crime Incident 
Report

At this time, computer-related incidents are not considered
NCVS crimes, just as acts of vandalism are not considered
NCVS crimes, unless the incident also involves an attack,
an attempted attack, a threat of attack, a theft or an
attempted theft.  Therefore, if a respondent ONLY reports
a computer-related incident and the respondent was not
attacked or threatened and no theft or attempted theft took
place, do NOT complete an NCVS-2, Crime Incident
Report.

However, if a respondent does happen to mention an NCVS crime 
incident as you ask the computer crime screen questions and the 
respondent did not report the incident earlier in the interview, 
make sure to complete an NCVS-2 for the NCVS crime incident.

Part C, Chapter 3

Chapter 3
Reporting Crime Incidents

Table of Topics

1   Overview of Chapter 3

2   Series of Crimes

3   Right to Legally Enter Home/Lodging

4   Restricted Areas/Areas Open to the Public

5   Illegal Entry (With or Without Force)

6   Presence During an Incident

7   Weapons

8   Rape/Unwanted Sexual Contact

9   Theft/Attempted Theft of Cash/Property

10  Value of Stolen Property/Methods Used to Determine

11  Property Ownership

12  Recovered Money and/or Property

13  Medical Care

14  Medical Expenses

15  Race of Offenders

16  Other Victimized Household Members

17  Damage to Property During an Incident

18  Job/Business at Time of the Incident

19  Major Activity During Week of the Incident

20  Incident Occurred at Work Site
                            
21  Incident Involved a Police Officer
                            
22  Hate Crimes

23  Writing Summary Reports
                            

24  Type of Industry and Occupation

Topic 1. Overview of Chapter 3

The Crime Incident Report(NCVS-2)is the instrument that 
you use to report crime incidents.  Each time an incident 
or personal victimization occurred during the reference 
period, you will complete an NCVS-2 to collect detailed
information about the incident or personal victimization.  
A separate NCVS-2 must be completed for each household member 
who reports a personal victimization during an incident(an 
attack, attempt to attack, or threat of physical harm).  
However, you will only complete one NCVS-2 for each reported 
incident of a property crime in which none of the household 
members were personally victimized (an illegal entry, something 
taken without permission, and so forth).

As you report crime incidents, there are several concepts that 
you need to understand.  Following this overview, definitions 
and examples are provided for 23 important concepts that are 
associated with several items on the NCVS-2. 

Topic 2.  Series of Crimes

Definition

For the NCVS, a series of crimes consists of six or more
separate incidents that:

     Occurred during the respondent's 6-month reference
     period,

     Were reported all in the same screen item on the 
     NCVS-1,

     Are all very similar in nature, and

     Cannot be described separately in enough detail so
     that you can complete most items on a Crime Incident
     Report(NCVS-2)for each incident.

All of these conditions must be met before you can complete 
only one NCVS-2 for multiple incidents.

Whenever possible, attempt to complete a separate NCVS-2 for 
each reported incident.  Classifying six or more similar 
incidents as a "series" should be done only as a last resort, 
since the NCVS will be losing detailed information for all but 
the most recent incident in the series.

Five or Less Similar Incidents

If a respondent reports that five or less similar incidents
happened during the respondent's reference period, then
you must complete a separate NCVS-2 for each reported
incident. 

Classify an individual respondent as a Type Z noninterview
if:
     The respondent reports five or less similar incidents, 

     BUT
 
     The respondent is unable to recall enough individual
     details to complete a separate NCVS-2 for each of
     these similar incidents.

If this situation happens while interviewing a household
respondent, classify the case as a Type A noninterview.

(Also refer to Part A, Chapter 6, for more information
about NCVS noninterviews.)

Verifying a Series of Crimes

As you complete the NCVS-2, you will complete check items and, 
if necessary, ask the respondent questions to help you verify 
whether or not six or more similar incidents meet the criteria 
for a series of crimes. 

Check Items B, C, and D on the 
NCVS-2

Check Items B, C, and D on the NCVS-2 cover page are designed 
to help you determine whether six or more similar incidents 
that were all reported in one screen item (item number entered 
in Item 1b) meet the criteria for reporting these incidents as 
a series of crimes on one NCVS-2.

If ALL of the following answer categories are marked for Check 
Items B, C, and D, then the similar incidents qualify as a series 
of crimes:

In Check Item B, you mark      Box 2 "6 or more
incidents" 

In Check Item C, you mark      Box 1
"Similar"

In Check Item D, you mark      Box 2 "No" (Respondent cannot 
recall enough details of each incident to distinguish them 
from each other.)

If you mark a different category in any one of these check
items, you are instructed to skip to Item 6, because the
multiple incidents do not qualify as a series of similar
incidents.  You also will need to complete a separate
NCVS-2 for each of the incidents reported for the screen
item entered in Item 1b on the NCVS-2.

After Marking Box 2 in
Check Item D(NCVS-2)

After marking Box 2 in Check Item D on the NCVS-2, make sure 
to:

     Correct the "Number of times" entries on the NCVS-1
     so that the series of crimes is shown as ONE time in
     the reported screen question and in Check Item G.

     Leave the number of incidents in Item 4 of the NCVS-2 
     as originally entered. Do NOT reduce the number of 
     incidents in Item 4 after marking Box 2 in Check Item D.

Details for the Most Recent Incident

Once you have determined through Check Items B, C, and D on the 
NCVS-2 that the multiple incidents qualify as a series of crimes, 
you will: 

     Only ask about the MOST RECENT INCIDENT in
     the series of crimes for Items 6 through Check  
     Item U.  

     Ask about the entire series of crimes for Items 154
     through Check Item V1.

     Only ask about the MOST RECENT INCIDENT in
     the series of crimes for Items 161 through 176.

     Provide a general description of the entire series of
     crimes in the first part of the Summary Report in
     Check Item W and then, for the last or most recent
     incident in the series, provide a detailed description
     of the incident following the who, what, where, when,
     and how format. 

Make Sure to Read Statement in 
Item 5

When completing an NCVS-2 for a series of crimes, ALWAYS read 
the "lead-in" statement in Item 5 before asking the question 
in Item 6.  This statement lets the respondent know that most 
of the questions you are about to ask (Item 6 through Check 
Item U)relate only to the most recent incident that occurred 
in the series of crimes.  

As you complete these items, do not include information
about any earlier incidents in the series.

(Refer to Part B, Chapter 3, for detailed instructions on
how to complete NCVS-2 items for a series of crimes.)

Examples of Incidents That
Qualify as a Series of Crimes

Listed below are two examples of reported incidents that 
qualify as a series of crimes.

--------------------------------------------
Example #1:

Interview Date:  August 2
Reference Period:  February 1 through August 1 

Tammy reported that money was stolen from her desk at
work on seven different occasions between February and
April.  She never found out who stole the money and
each time the circumstances were so similar that Tammy
cannot differentiate one incident from the other. These
incidents stopped in April, because Tammy stopped
leaving small amounts of money on top of her desk.  
-----------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------
Example #2:

Interview Date:  March 1
Reference Period:  September 3 through February 28

Dennis reported that the shed in his yard was broken into
and a variety of small garden tools were stolen on six
different occasions between October and November. 
Dennis really cannot remember enough details about
each incident to report them separately.  The series of
incidents ended when the offender was caught.
------------------------------------------------

Examples of Incidents That
Do NOT Qualify as a Series
of Crimes

Listed below are two examples of reported incidents that do
NOT qualify as a series of crimes:

Example #1:

Interview Date:  September 1
Reference Period:  March 1 through August 31

Bridget reported that a male co-worker kissed her against her 
will on four different occasions in July.  She was so upset 
that she remembers the circumstances of each situation very 
well.

In this situation, the crimes do NOT qualify as a series of
crimes because the respondent reported less than six similar 
incidents, regardless of whether or not the respondent 
remembers enough details to report each incident separately.

-------------------------------------------
Example #2:

Interview Date:  April 2
Reference Period:  October 2 through April 1

Tim reported that his ex-girlfriend threatened to shoot
him on seven different occasions between November and
January.  Tim was so frightened by her that he
remembers the details of each incident very vividly.  
--------------------------------------------

In this situation, the crimes do NOT qualify as a series of
crimes, even though there were more than six, because the
respondent remembers the details of each situation so that
he could differentiate one from another for completing the
NCVS-2s.

Topic 3.  Right to Legally Enter Home/Lodging

Definition

For the NCVS, we consider that an offender has a legal right 
to enter a respondent's home or lodging when the offender:

     Was living or staying with the respondent at the time
     of the incident 

     OR

     Had the right to be in the home or lodging or had
     permission at the time the incident took place to be
     inside the home or lodging, such as a maid from a
     cleaning service or a hotel maid, a babysitter, nurse,
     salesperson, meter reader, maintenance person, friend,
     or relative.

Item 11 on the NCVS-2

When a respondent tells you in Item 10 on the NCVS-2 that an 
incident happened in his/her own home, in a detached building 
on his/her property, in a vacation or second home, or in his/
her hotel/motel room (answer categories 1-4), you are 
instructed to skip to Item 11 after marking the answer in
Item 10.  The question in Item 11 asks:

"Did the offender live (here/there) or have a right to be
(here/there), for instance, as a guest or a repairperson?"

This question is intended to determine whether or not the
offender had a legal right to enter the respondent's home 
or lodging.

No Legal Right to Enter

Under the following circumstances, an offender does NOT
have a legal right to enter a respondent's home or lodging:

     The offender misrepresented himself/herself as a
     policeman, repairperson, and so forth, and
     fraudulently gained permission to enter the
     respondent's home or lodging.
     
     The offender was let in by a child or neighbor when
     the homeowners would not have allowed the offender
     to enter their home.

     The offender forced his/her way into the respondent's
     home or lodging as the respondent answered the door.

     The offender broke a door lock or window or cut a
     screen to enter the respondent's home or lodging.

Offender Not Known, But Suspected

If a respondent is not certain who the offender was, ask the
respondent if the person who is "suspected" of being the
offender:

     Was living or staying with the respondent at the time
     of the incident.

     Had the right to be in the home or lodging or had
     permission at the time the incident took place to be
     inside the home or lodging, such as a maid,
     babysitter, nurse, salesperson, meter reader,
     maintenance person, friend, or relative.

If you get a "Yes" answer, mark the "Yes" category for Item 11.  
When a respondent has no idea who the offender may have been, 
then mark the "Don't know" category.

Examples of Having a Legal Right to 
Enter Home/Lodging

Listed below are two examples of an offender who has a legal 
right to enter the respondent's home/lodging.

------------------------------------------

Example #1:

Sara, who is 12 years old, reported that during a recent
slumber party one of her guests stole a ring that belonged
to her mother from the kitchen table.  Another guest saw
her steal it and told Sara the next morning.  
---------------------------------------------

In this situation, the offender was a guest in the respondent's 
home and had permission at the time of the incident to be inside 
Sara's home.

-------------------------------------------
Example #2:

Paul reported that his cellular phone was stolen from 
the kitchen table by an appliance repair person who was
working on his kitchen stove.
-------------------------------------------

In this situation, the appliance repair person had permission
at the time the incident took place to be inside Paul's house.

Examples of Not Having a Legal Right 
to Enter Home/Lodging

Listed below are two examples of an offender who does
NOT have a legal right to enter the respondent's home/
lodging.

----------------------------------------------
Example #1:

Jack reported that someone who misrepresented himself
as a police officer entered his home, tied him up, and
stole cash, jewelry, and other valuable collectibles.
---------------------------------------------

In this situation, the offender did not have a legal right to
enter Jack's home.  If Jack had known that the offender was
not a police officer, he would not have allowed him to enter
his home.

---------------------------------------------
Example #2:

Tony has a restraining order against his brother which
prohibits his brother from coming onto his property. 
While Tony was at a business meeting out of town, his
neighbor was house sitting for him.  The neighbor was
not aware of the restraining order and let the brother into
Tony's house.  While the brother was in the house, he
stole Tony's coin collection.

------------------------------------------------
 
In this situation, the offender did not have a legal right 
to enter Tony's home, because the homeowner would not have
allowed the brother to enter his home. 

Topic 4.  Restricted Areas/Areas Open to the Public

Definition

For the NCVS, we consider a "restricted area" one in which:

     Only certain people are allowed to enter without
     being considered trespassers.

      Persons found in the area OTHER THAN the
     "acceptable persons" are considered trespassers. 

We consider an area "open to the public" at the time of the 
incident if anyone has a right to enter the place.

Item 17c on the NCVS-2

When you determine in Item 10 that an incident happened in a 
commercial place, parking lots or garages, on school property, 
or in a place identified in the "Other" category, you are 
instructed to skip to Item 17c.  Item 17c asks:

"Did the incident happen in an area restricted to certain
people or was it open to the public at the time?"

For this question, you have the option of either asking the
question or verifying the answer before marking an answer
category.  The answer categories include:

        Open to the public

        Restricted to certain people (or nobody had a right to
        be there)

        Don't know

        Other (Specify)

Areas Open to the Public

The following places are examples of areas USUALLY open to the 
public:

     Public areas in commercial establishments, such as in
     department stores, convenience stores, barber shops,
     restaurants, and so forth. 

     Public sidewalks and parks

     Public buildings, such as local libraries, Social
     Security offices, motor vehicle administration offices,
     and so forth.

     Parking lots that do not charge a fee, such as most
     shopping center parking lots

     Apartment yards

Areas Restricted to Certain People

The following places are examples of areas USUALLY restricted 
to certain people:

     School buildings and school grounds

     Private yards

     Employee's lounges, back rooms, storage areas,
     kitchens, and so forth, in commercial establishments

     Private clubs, such as country clubs and swim clubs

     Military bases

     Public areas of commercial establishments when they
     are not open for business

Don't Know

The "Don't know" answer category can be marked when a respondent 
is not sure if the area was open to the public when the incident 
occurred. This could be the case if the respondent does not know 
when the incident took place.  

Here is an example:

Sara left her leather jacket at the public library where she
had been studying.  She returned the next day to get her
jacket, but no one knew where it was.  In this case, she
does not know whether the offender stole her leather jacket 
while the library was open to the public or after the library 
was closed to the public.

Other (Specify)

Mark the "Other (Specify)" answer category when a respondent's 
answer for Item 17c does not fit any of the preceding categories.  
After marking Box 4 for "Other (Specify)," always enter a 
description of the area and the special circumstances.

Topic 5.  Illegal Entry (With or Without Force)

Definition

For the NCVS, illegal entry happens when a person who has no 
legal right to be on the premises enters, with or without 
force, a residence or lodging that is owned or rented by the 
sample household during the reference period. The NCVS is also 
interested in collecting data on unsuccessful attempts to 
illegally enter a sample household's residence or lodging. 

Since most illegal entries result in the theft of household
property, the NCVS is not only interested in actual or
attempted illegal entries at the sample address, but also at
any other residences, vacation homes, recreation vehicles,
and so forth, that are occupied by the sample household at
the time of the incident.

Examples of Illegal Entries
Without Force

Here are two examples of incidents involving illegal entries
without force:

---------------------------------------------
Example #1:

While Pat was watering his garden in the back yard, he
left the front door unlocked.  As he entered his house
from the back door, he heard noises in the living room. 
Just as he entered the living room, he saw someone
running out the front door.  Then he noticed that his
cellular phone was missing from the hall table.
----------------------------------------------

---------------------------------------------- 
Example #2:

While Frank and Amy were renting a summer cottage,
they left the door unlocked and walked down to the
beach for a short walk.  When they returned to the
cottage, they found a stranger in the kitchen taking 
food out of the refrigerator.  The stranger said that 
since the door was unlocked, she just let herself in.
-----------------------------------------------

Examples of Illegal Entries
With Force

Here are two examples of incidents involving illegal entries
with force:

------------------------------------------------
Example #1:

When John returned home from the movies, he
discovered that the glass was broken in his garage
window.  As he entered his garage, he found that 
several tools were gone and the side door to the 
garage was left open.
----------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------
Example #2:

When Tim and Becky returned home from shopping,
they discovered the porch screen was cut and all 
their wicker furniture was gone. 
-----------------------------------------------

When to Exclude Illegal
Entry Incidents

Under the following conditions, do not keep a completed NCVS-2 
if the reported incident only involves an illegal entry:

     The sample household's second or vacation home was
     rented to someone who was not a sample household
     member at the time of the illegal entry.

     The sample household's second or vacation home (not
     the household's usual or primary place of residence)
     was part of a recognizable business at the time of the
     illegal entry incident. 

If either of these situations occurs and no NCVS crime was
committed during the incident, you will out-of-scope the
incident.

Item 37 on the NCVS-1

Item 37 on the NCVS-1 is the only screen question that
specifically asks about any attempted or actual illegal
entries that occurred during the 6-month reference period
and is only asked of the household respondent.  Make sure
to include:

     Illegal entries or attempted illegal entries at a
     household respondent's previous residence if he/she is
     in the process of relocating to the sample address and
     still owns the previous residence during the reference
     period.

     Illegal entries or attempted illegal entries at the
     sample address if the current household owned the
     residence during the reference period, but had not yet
     moved into residence at the time of the incident. 

     Illegal entries or attempted illegal entries into a
     garage, shed, or storage room at the sample address if
     the household respondent owned or rented the
     property during the reference period.

     Illegal entries or attempted illegal entries into a hotel
     or motel room, vacation home, second home, or
     recreation vehicle in which the respondent or other
     household members were staying when the incident
     took place.

     Illegal entries or attempted illegal entries into a
     vacation home owned by the respondent, but
     unoccupied at the time of the incident.

Even though Item 37 is the only screen question that specifically 
asks about illegal entries, you may discover other incidents 
involving an illegal entry as you ask other screen questions.  
Always mark the screen question at which you discover the 
illegal entry incident.

Items on the Crime Incident Report 
(NCVS-2)

There are four items on the NCVS-2 that are used to collect
information about illegal entries during a reported crime
incident--Items 12, 13, 14, and 15.  At the end of the
NCVS-2, you also will include details about an illegal entry
as you summarize the reported incident in Check Item W. 

Other items on the NCVS-2 that mention illegal entry or
attempted illegal entry in their answer categories are   
Items 27 and 59.  However, these two items are not actually
used to collect information on illegal entry.

Item 12 on the NCVS-2

When a respondent tells you in Item 10 that the incident
occurred in his/her home or lodging and the offender did
not have a right to be there, you will ask Item 12 to
determine whether the offender actually entered or got
inside the respondent's home or lodging.  For example, an
offender may have entered a large apartment building, but
never actually entered the respondent's apartment unit.

Item 13 on the NCVS-2

If a respondent tells you in Item 12 that an offender did not
get inside the respondent's home or lodging or a respondent
gives you a "Don't know" answer, then you will ask Item
13 to determine whether the offender tried to get inside the
home or lodging.

A "No" answer in Items 12 and 13 indicates that the
offender did NOT get inside or try to get inside the
respondent's home or lodging.  Instructions for handling
this situation can be found on page B3-41.

Items 14 and 15 on the NCVS-2

Items 14 and 15 are used to determine whether there was any 
visible evidence that an offender used force to illegally
enter or try to illegally enter a respondent's home or
lodging.   

Item 27 on the NCVS-2

You will ask Item 27 when the respondent was present during 
the incident and answered "No" when asked if the offender:

     Hit, knocked down, or actually attacked the
     respondent in any way (Item 24);

     Tried to attack the respondent (Item 25); or

     Threatened to physically harm the respondent in any
     way (Item 26).

Item 27 allows for multiple entries to indicate what actually
happened during the incident, so continue asking, "Anything 
else?" until you get a "No" response.  One of the answer 
categories for item 27 is category (6), Forcible entry or 
attempted forcible entry of house/apartment.

Item 59 on the NCVS-2

You will ask Item 59 on the NCVS-2 when household members other 
than the respondent were present during the incident. Item 59 
also allows for multiple entries to indicate what actually 
happened during the incident, so continue asking, "Anything 
else?" until you get a "No" response.  One of the answer 
categories for item 59 is category (4), Forcible entry or 
attempted forcible entry of house/apartment.

Topic 6.  Presence During an Incident

Definition

For the NCVS, "presence" during an incident is intended to
determine whether any sample household member at the time of 
interview:

     Was at the immediate scene of the crime during the
     incident 

     AND

     Was in a place that was reachable by the offender so
     that the offender could have attacked, threatened to
     attack, or stolen something directly from a household
     member.

Understanding whether or not a respondent was "present"
during an incident and marking Items 20a and 20b on the
NCVS-2 accurately is a very important part of the Crime
Incident Report interview.  Whenever a respondent was
"present" during an incident, you will ask additional
questions to determine if the offender attacked the
respondent, attempted to attack the respondent, threatened
the respondent, or injured the respondent. Getting an
accurate and complete picture of everything that transpired
during the incident will help later to classify the incident
into the proper type of crime category.

When an Attack, Robbery, or Threat 
Has Occurred

Consider the respondent or any other current household
member to be "present" if you determine that:

     They were attacked or someone attempted to attack
     them.

     They had something taken directly from them or an
     attempt was made to take something from them.

     They were personally threatened with physical harm
     by the offender, even when the offender delivers the
     verbal threat from the other side of a closed door.  Do
     NOT include threats received by telephone, postal
     mail, electronic mail, or FAX machines.  Also
     exclude any threats delivered indirectly from someone
     other than the person who intends to physically harm
     the respondent.

Here are a few examples:

------------------------------------------------------
Example #1:

Peter was looking out of his living room window when he
saw a co-worker he had been arguing with standing in his
yard with a gun.  Before Peter could duck, the co-worker
shot through the window and hit Peter in the shoulder. 
Consider Peter present because he was personally
attacked and injured, even though the offender was
outside of his home.
-----------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------------
Example #2:

Wendy's neighbor has been upset because Wendy's dog
keeps jumping the fence and antagonizing his dog.  One
evening Wendy heard someone knocking on her front
door and yelling obscenities.  When Wendy asked the
neighbor what was wrong, he replied with:  "If you don't
keep your maniac dog in your own yard, you'll be sorry
because I'll put you in the hospital."  Consider Wendy
present because she was threatened with physical harm,
even though the neighbor was outside her closed front
door.
---------------------------------------------------

Items 20a and 20b on the NCVS-2

The question in Item 20a asks:

"Were you or any other member of this household present
when this incident occurred?"

You must ask or verify this information before marking the
answer for Item 20a.  Only verify the answer when you are
ABSOLUTELY SURE of the answer based on what the respondent 
has already told you about the incident. If the only persons 
who were present at the time of the incident are not household 
members at the time of your interview, mark the "No" answer.

The question for Item 20b asks:

"Which household members were present?"

This item is designed to identify which household members
were present during the incident--the respondent (victim)
only, the respondent (victim) and other household members,
or only other household members. If you mistakenly mark
"Only other household member(s), not respondent," the
respondent will not have an opportunity to provide us with
any information about possible attacks, attempted attacks,
threats, or injuries associated with the incident.

For proxy interviews, mark Box (1) if the proxy person,
NOT the proxy respondent, was present.  However, if the
proxy person and other household members (including the
proxy respondent) were present during the incident, mark
Box (2) in Item 20b.

You may discover that a respondent was present during an
incident after marking the "No" answer in Item 20a. If this
happens, line through the "No" answer and mark the "Yes"
answer.  Then, follow the instructions on the questionnaire
for asking the appropriate questions following a "Yes"
response for Item 20a.

Remember that you must complete a separate NCVS-2 for
EACH household member who is 12 years of age or older
and was personally victimized during a crime incident. 
This is true even if more than one household member was
victimized during the SAME incident. 

When and How to Probe for Item 20a 

If you sense that a respondent does not grasp the intent 
of the question in Item 20a, then you should probe to assist 
the respondent in giving an accurate answer. Here are some
probes you might want to try:

"Were you at the immediate scene of the crime?"

"Were you inside the house when the offender broke into
your basement?"

"Were you inside the house when your party guest stole
your jewelry?"

"Were you inside the house when the offender attempted
to break into your attached garage?"

"Were you and the offender both in your yard when the
bicycle was stolen from the driveway?"

A "Yes" answer to any of these probes indicates that the
respondent was present during the incident.

"Did you go outside when you saw the offender
tampering with your car parked in your driveway, or did
you watch from inside your house?"

If the respondent went outside during the incident and the
offender had not fled the scene, then the respondent was
present during the incident.  Consider the respondent
present in this situation because he/she was at the
immediate scene of the crime during the incident AND was
in a place that was reachable by the offender so that the
offender could have attacked, threatened to attack, or 
stolen something directly from the respondent.

However, if the respondent watched the offender from
inside the house, then the respondent was NOT present
during the incident.

If probing still does not help to confirm whether anyone in
the household was present during the incident, mark Box (1) 
"Yes" in Item 20a.  Only mark Box (2) "No" when you are sure 
that a household member was not present during the incident.

Examples of When It Is Correct to Mark 
"Yes" in Item 20a

For each of the following situations, you would mark Box (1) 
"Yes" in Item 20a:

     Respondent was reading in the den while the offender
     broke into her attached garage and stole some tools,
     even if there was no entrance leading directly from
     the attached garage into the home.

     Respondent was sewing in an upstairs room while the
     offender broke into her enclosed porch and stole her
     gas grill.

     Respondent and his family were all asleep on the
     second floor of their home while the offender broke in
     through the basement door and stole some stereo
     equipment from the basement.

     While respondent was sleeping on his beach blanket,
     someone stole his watch and wallet from the blanket.

     While respondent was getting into her car in a parking
     garage, the offender pointed a gun at her and stole her
     purse.

     A student punched the respondent in the stomach in
     the school cafeteria.

     While the respondent was on a business trip, the
     offender picked his pocket and stole his wallet.

     While at a house party, an offender threatened to
     break down the door and knock the respondent
     unconscious if he did not unlock the door and let his
     girlfriend out of the bedroom.

     During a party at the respondent's home, the
     respondent was in his family room while a party guest
     stole money from the bedroom dresser. 

Examples of When It Is Correct to Mark 
"No" in Item 20a

For each of the following situations, you would mark Box (2) 
"No" in Item 20a:

     The home/apartment at a sample address was broken
     into while the respondent and all other household
     members were shopping at a mall.

     The respondent and all other household members
     were sleeping in their bedrooms when someone stole
     the respondent's car from his driveway.

     The respondent was at a restaurant when her leather
     coat was stolen from the coatroom in the restaurant
     lobby.

     Respondent looked out her kitchen window and saw
     someone steal her son's bicycle from the backyard.

Item 47 on the NCVS-2

Item 47 on the NCVS-2 asks, "Was anyone present during the 
incident besides you and the offender? (Other than children 
under age 12.)" The same guidelines on presence that you 
just read for Item 20a also apply to Item 47.

As you ask the questions for Items 47 through 54 on the
NCVS-2, you may discover that current household members 
were either harmed, threatened with harm, robbed by force 
or by threat of harm. You need to complete a separate 
NCVS-2 for each household member who:

          Is at least 12 years of age, 

          Was present during the incident, and 

          Considers herself/himself to be a victim of a crime.  

Be careful not to assume that other household members were 
victims of a crime just because they were present during a 
crime incident.

Topic 7.  Weapons

Definition

For the NCVS, most guns and knives are always considered
weapons.  However, BB guns and tear gas guns are only
considered weapons when offenders use them as clubs to
attack or threaten to attack respondents.  Before any other
type of blunt or sharp objects can be considered weapons,
the offender must have used or threatened to use them to
inflict physical harm upon a respondent.

Example of an object used as a weapon:

As Ben entered the stockroom where he worked, he discovered 
an offender who jumped up and cut Ben's throat with a 
screwdriver. In this incident, the screwdriver is a weapon. 

---------------------------------------------- 
Example of an object NOT used as a weapon:

An offender tried to break into a neighbor's house using a
screwdriver to break the door lock, but was unsuccessful. 
In this incident, the screwdriver is NOT a weapon.
------------------------------------------------

If an offender throws an object at a respondent AND the object 
hits and seriously injures the respondent, then the thrown 
object can be considered a weapon.  

A motor vehicle can be considered a weapon if :

     The respondent knows the offender and the offender
     deliberately used a motor vehicle to try to run into
     the respondent's vehicle or a vehicle in which the
     respondent is riding.

     The respondent believes that the offender
     deliberately struck or tried to hit him/her with a
     motor vehicle while the respondent was on foot, a
     bicycle, in a motor vehicle, and so forth.  The
     respondent's belief could be based on words spoken
     by the offender or facts known about the offender. 

However, the offender's vehicle is NOT a weapon if the respondent 
does not know the offender and there was NO verbal threat of 
physical harm to the respondent when:

     The offender cut in front of a vehicle driven by the
     respondent.

     The offender cut in front of a vehicle in which the
     respondent was a passenger.

     The offender and the respondent were involved in
     some type of traffic accident or incidence of road
     rage.    

The following objects are never considered weapons:

     Animals
     Parts of the body (for example, hands, feet, and so
     forth)
     Food
     Small empty cans
     Mace or pepper spray
     Tear gas
     Chloroform
     Rings
     Casts

Items 22 and 23 on the NCVS-2

Item 22 on the NCVS-2 is used to determine whether or not
the offender had a weapon or something he/she intended to
use as a weapon during the incident.  The question in Item 
22 asks:

"Did the offender have a weapon such as a gun or knife,
or something to use as a weapon, such as a bottle or
wrench?"

If you get a "Yes" response, you are instructed to ask the
question in Item 23 so that you can identify the weapon(s)
the offender had or used during the incident.  The answer
categories for Item 23 are:

Box:
     (1)  Hand gun (pistol, revolver, etc.)
     (2)  Other gun (rifle, shotgun, etc.)
     (3)  Knife
     (4)  Other sharp object (scissors, ice pick, axe, etc.)
     (5)  Blunt object (rock, club, blackjack, etc.)
     (6)  Other - "Specify"

Since Item 23 allows for multiple entries, continue asking
"Anything else?" until you get a "No" response.

Keep the following points in mind for Item 23:

     If an offender had a blunt or sharp object, other than a
     gun or knife, and he/she did not use or threaten to use
     the object to inflict physical harm upon the
     respondent, the object is NOT a weapon.  If no other
     weapon was mentioned, you would mark Box (2)
     "No" in Item 22. 

     If an offender used either a BB gun or a tear gas gun
     as a club to hit or threaten to hit the respondent, mark  
     Box (5) "Blunt object."   

     If an offender made a deliberate attempt to hit the
     respondent with a motor vehicle or to cause an
     accident and physical harm to the respondent in some
     way with a motor vehicle, mark Box (6) "Other" and
     enter "motor vehicle" on the "Specify" line.

     Whenever you mark Boxes (4), (5), or (6), make sure
     to explain in Check Item W (Summary Report) what
     the object was and how the offender either used or
     threatened to use the object as a weapon to physically
     harm the respondent.

Box (1) "Yes" must be marked in Item 24 (attacks), Item 25 
(attempted attacks), or Item 26 (threatened with harm)when a 
respondent tells you that:

     The offender had a weapon (Box 1 "Yes" marked in
     Item 22) and 

     The respondent identifies one or more weapons (one
     or more boxes marked in Item 23).

Items 28a and 28b on the NCVS-2

Whenever a respondent says that an offender either tried to
attack or threatened to attack him/her, you will ask the
question in Item 28a for "tried to attack" and the question in
Item 28b for "threatened to attack."  The answer categories
for both items are identical and the following categories
involve the use of a weapon:

Box:
     (7)  Weapon present or threatened with weapon
     (8)  Shot at (but missed)
     (9)  Attempted attack with knife/sharp weapon
     (10) Attempted attack with weapon other than
          gun/knife/sharp weapon

Keep the following points in mind for Items 28a and 28b:

     Mark Box (7) when a weapon was present during the
     incident or if the offender threatened to physically
     harm the respondent with the weapon.  However, if
     the respondent was injured by the weapon, then    
     Box (1) "Yes" should be marked in Item 24 and then
     you will skip to Item 29.

     Mark Box (8) when an offender discharged a gun in
     the direction of the respondent, but the respondent
     was not hit. If the respondent was injured by gun fire,
     then mark Box (1) "Yes" in Item 24 and then you will
     skip to Item 29.

     If an offender attempted to attack the respondent with
     a knife or another sharp object, such as scissors or an
     ice pick, mark Box (9).
     
     If an offender attempted to attack the respondent with
     an object such as a rock, club, or blackjack, mark  
     Box (10).

Item 29 on the NCVS-2

When the respondent tells you in Item 24 that the offender hit, 
knocked down, or actually attacked him/her in some way, you 
will skip to Item 29 to determine how the respondent was attacked.  
The following answer categories in Item 29 involve the use of a 
weapon:

Box:
     (4)  Shot
     (5)  Shot at (but missed)
     (6)  Hit with gun held in hand
     (7)  Stabbed/cut with knife/sharp weapon
     (8)  Attempted attack with knife/sharp weapon
     (9)  Hit by object (other than gun) held in hand
     (10) Hit by thrown object
     (11) Attempted attack with weapon other than
          gun/knife/sharp weapon.

Since Item 29 allows for multiple entries, continue asking
"Anything else?" until you get a "No" response.

Keep the following points in mind for Item 29:

     If you discover that the respondent was NOT attacked
     and there was no physical contact between the
     offender and the respondent, mark the "No" answer in
     Item 24 and, if necessary, line through the "Yes"
     answer in Item 24 and ask the question in Item 25. 
     Also line through any entries in Item 29.  

     If you mark Boxes (5), (8), or (11) and no physical
     attack with contact took place during the incident,
     then the respondent was NOT attacked.  In this
     situation, line through the "Yes" answer in Item 24
     and ask the question in Item 25.  Also line through
     any entries in Item 29.

Item 31 on the NCVS-2

If the respondent was attacked in any way during the incident, 
you will ask the question in Item 31 to determine:

     If the respondent sustained any injuries and

     If so, what type of injuries the respondent suffered
     from the attack.

The following two answer categories in Item 31 relate
directly to injuries sustained from a weapon:

Box:
     (5) Knife or stab wounds
     (6) Gun shot, bullet wounds.

Since Item 31 allows for multiple entries, continue asking
"Anything else?" until you get a "No" response.

Keep the following points in mind for Item 31:

     Do not consider "mental or emotional suffering" to be
     an injury.  If only mental or emotional suffering is
     mentioned by the respondent, mark Box (1) "None"
     and then skip to Item 40. 

     Do not mark Box (6) if the respondent tells you that
     he/she was injured from being shot with a BB gun or
     a tear gas gun.  Instead, mark Box (11) and describe
     clearly what type of injuries were sustained.

Items 32 and 33 of the NCVS-2

Item 32 on the NCVS-2 is used to determine whether any of the 
injuries mentioned in Item 31 were caused by a weapon other 
than a gun or knife.  You have the option of either verifying 
the answer or asking the question before marking the answer 
for this item.

After marking Box (1) "Yes" in Item 32, you are instructed
to ask the following question in Item 33:

"Which injuries were caused by a weapon OTHER than a gun or 
knife?"

Since Boxes (5) and (6) in Item 31 describe injuries caused
by a gun or a knife, do NOT enter these two codes in Item 33.

The answer space for item 33 allows you to enter codes for
the first three injuries mentioned by the respondent. 
Identify these injuries by entering the box numbers from
Item 31 using two-digits.  For example, enter Box (8) as
(08).  

Item 42 on the NCVS-2

If the respondent tells you in Item 41 that he/she did or
tried to do something about the incident while it was
happening, you will be instructed to ask the question in
Item 42.  

Item 42 is used to determine what actions the respondent
took during the incident.  Under the first group of answer
categories, "Used Physical Force Toward Offender," the
following four categories identify actions involving a
weapon:  

Box:
     (1)  Attacked offender with gun; fired gun
     (2)  Attacked with other weapon
     (4)  Threatened offender with gun
     (5)  Threatened offender with other weapon

Topic 8.  Rape/Unwanted Sexual Contact

Definition

For the NCVS, rape is defined as forced sexual intercourse 
including both psychological coercion, as well as physical 
force.  Forced sexual intercourse means vaginal, anal, or 
oral penetration by the offender(s).  This category also 
includes incidents where the penetration is from a foreign 
object such as a bottle.  A rape victim can be either female 
or male and the rape can be heterosexual or homosexual.  

NCVS also obtains information on attempted rapes and verbal 
threats of rape and sexual assault.  An attempted rape is an 
incident in which the offender intends to force the victim 
to have sexual intercourse, but the offender does not 
penetrate the victim. 

Unwanted sexual contact is separate from rape or attempted 
rape.  Unwanted sexual contact may or may not involve force 
and includes such things as grabbing and fondling without 
the consent of the victim. 

Rape, attempted rape, sexual assaults, and threats of rape
and sexual assault are all considered to be personal crimes
of violence. 

Item 27 on the NCVS-2

Item 27 is used to determine what actually happened during a 
reported incident when a respondent answers "No" to all three 
of the following items:

     Item 24 - Used to determine if the respondent was
     hit, knocked down, or actually attacked in any way.

     Item 25 - Used to determine if the offender tried to
     attack the respondent.

     Item 26 - Used to determine if the offender
     threatened to physically harm the respondent.

Item 27 allows for multiple answers and two of the
answer categories are:

      Box (4) - Unwanted sexual contact with force
     (forcibly grabbing and fondling, etc.)

      Box (5) - Unwanted sexual contact without force
     (sexual touching, fondling, etc.)

Box (4) and Box (5) are intended for respondents who do not 
perceive that the offender attacked, tried to attack, or
threatened him/her in any way during the unwanted sexual contact.  
Since these two categories can encompass a broad range of sexual 
acts, it may not always be clear which category to mark.  
Base your decision on the degree of force used in the 
incident.  

Generally, if the incident involved grabbing and other
acts of force, mark Box (4).  However, if the incident
involved only touching and/or fondling with no mention
of force, mark Box (5).  When you are unsure, always go
with the respondent's perception of whether or not the
offender used force.

Probing to Identify
Rape or Attempted Rape

Each time you mark Box (4), "Unwanted sexual contact with 
force," you must ask the following probing question for 
Item 27:

"Do you mean forced or coerced sexual intercourse including 
attempts?"

If you get a "Yes" answer to this probing question, you must:

      Go back to Item 24 and change the answer from
     "No" to "Yes,"

      Line through any entries made in Items 25 through
      27, and

      Skip to Item 29.

Item 28 on the NCVS-2

If a respondent tells you in Item 25 that the offender tried
to attack him/her, then you will ask the question in Item 28a 
to determine how the offender tried to attack the respondent.  
If a respondent tells you in Item 26 that the offender 
threatened him/her with harm in any way, then you will ask the 
question in Item 28b to determine how the offender threatened 
the respondent.

Both of these questions allow for multiple answers and two of 
the answer categories for Items 28a and 28b are:

      Box (5) - Unwanted sexual contact with force
     (forcibly grabbing and fondling, etc.)

      Box (6) - Unwanted sexual contact without force
     (sexually touching, fondling, etc.)

Since these two categories can encompass a broad range of sexual 
acts, it may not always be clear which category to mark.  Base 
your decision on the degree of force used in the incident.  
Generally, if the incident involved grabbing and other acts of 
force, mark Box (5). However, if the incident involved only 
touching and/or fondling with no mention of force, mark Box(6).  
When you are unsure, always go with the respondent's perception 
of whether or not the offender used force.

Probing to Identify
Rape or Attempted Rape

Items 28a and 28b include the following probing question that 
you must ask each time you mark Box (5), "Unwanted sexual 
contact with force":

"Do you mean forced or coerced sexual intercourse including 
attempts?"

If you get a "Yes" answer to this probing question, you must:

      Go back to Item 24 and change the answer from "No" 
      to "Yes,"

      Line through any entries made in Items 25 through
      28, and

      Skip to Item 29.

Item 29 on the NCVS-2

After marking "Yes" in Item 24 to indicate that the respondent 
was attacked during the incident, you are instructed to skip 
to Item 29 which asks:

"How were you attacked?"

Although this question allows for multiple answers, do NOT MARK 
MORE THAN ONE of the following three answer categories in Item 
29 for an incident:

          Raped (Box 1)

          Tried to rape (Box 2)

          Sexual assault other than rape or attempted rape
         (Box 3).

If a respondent tells you that the offender either raped or tried 
to rape her/him, then you need to ask one of the following probe 
questions to ensure that you are marking the correct answer 
category:

When you mark Box (1) "Raped" in Item 29, ask :

"Do you mean forced or coerced sexual intercourse?"

If you get a "No" answer, also ask the following question
so you can determine what the respondent considers to be
rape:

"What do you mean?"

When you mark Box (2) "Tried to rape" in Item 29, ask:

"Do you mean attempted forced or coerced sexual intercourse?"

If you get a "No" answer, also ask the following question
so you can determine what the respondent means when using 
the term "Tried to rape":

"What do you mean?"

These probe questions are used to ensure that the respondent's 
interpretation of the term "rape" is the same as the 
interpretation used for the NCVS.  After asking "What do you 
mean?" for either probe question, do not ask any other probing 
questions. Make sure that the correct boxes are marked for 
Item 29.

Item 30 on the NCVS-2

After determining how a respondent was attacked in Item 29, 
you will ask the question in Item 30 to determine if the 
offender threatened to hurt the respondent before actually 
attacking her/him.  At the time of the incident and prior 
to the rape or attempted rape, it is possible that the 
offender may have threatened to hurt the respondent in one 
of the ways mentioned in Item 28 (although none of these 
categories will be marked).  If a "Yes" or "No" answer 
does not adequately cover the respondent's answer for Item 
30, mark the "Other - (Specify)" category and enter a note 
explaining the situation.

Item 31 on the NCVS-2

When a respondent has been attacked during an incident,
you will ask the question in Item 31 to determine what
type of physical or bodily injuries the respondent may
have received during the attack. The question for Item 
31 asks:

"What were the injuries you suffered, if any?"

Do not consider mental or emotional suffering, such as
depression or the need for counseling after a rape, as an
injury.  If the respondent did not suffer any physical
injuries from the incident, mark Box (1) "None" and skip
to Item 40.

Although Item 31 allows for multiple answers, only mark
ONE of the following three answer categories in Item 31:

      Raped (Box 2)

      Attempted rape (Box 3)

      Sexual assault other than rape or attempted rape
     (Box 4).

If a respondent tells you in Item 31 that her/his injury was
the rape or attempted rape AND the box for "Raped" or "Tried 
to rape" is NOT marked in Item 29,  then you need to ask one 
of the following probe questions:

When Box (2) "Raped" is marked in Item 31 and Box (1) "Raped" 
is NOT marked in Item 29:

"Do you mean forced or coerced sexual intercourse?"

If you get a "No" answer, also ask the following question
so you can determine what the respondent means when using 
the term "rape":

"What do you mean?"

When Box (3) "Attempted rape" is marked in Item 31 and Box (2) 
"Tried to rape" is NOT marked in Item 29:

"Do you mean attempted forced or coerced sexual intercourse?"

If you get a "No" answer, also ask the following question so 
you can determine what the respondent means when using the 
term "Attempted rape":

"What do you mean?"

These probe questions are used to ensure that the respondent's 
interpretation of the term "rape" is the same as the 
interpretation used for the NCVS and to distinguish between 
rape and other types of sexual assaults. If your probing 
questions verify that the offender did rape or tried to rape 
the respondent, then mark the appropriate boxes in Item 29. 
After asking "What do you mean?" for either question, do not 
ask any other probing questions. 

"Raped" Marked in Item 29

After marking Box (1) "Raped" in Item 29, always mark Box (2) 
"Raped" in Item 31, even if the respondent does not report 
"Raped" as an injury.  This is the only answer category that 
you would mark in Item 31 without being told to do so by the 
respondent. Once you have asked the probe questions in Item 
29, do not ask them again in Item 31.

"Tried to Rape" Marked in Item 29

Do NOT automatically mark Box (3) "Attempted rape" as an 
injury in Item 31 when you mark Box (2) "Tried to Rape" in 
Item 29. Only mark Box (3) "Attempted rape" in Item 31 when 
the respondent specifically mentions it as an injury from the 
incident.  Also, if a respondent only mentions "Attempted rape" 
in Item 31, make sure that there were no other injuries from 
the incident by asking, "Anything else?".

"Sexual Assault Other Than Rape or
Attempted Rape" Marked in Item 29

Do NOT automatically mark Box (4) "Sexual assault other than 
rape or attempted rape" as in injury in Item 31 when you mark 
Box (3) as the type of attack in Item 29. Only mark it as an 
injury in Item 31 when the respondent specifically mentions 
it as an injury from the incident. Also, if a respondent only 
mentions "Sexual assault other than rape or attempted rape" 
in Item 31, make sure that there were no other injuries from 
the incident by asking, "Anything else?".

Completing Check Item W

Since sex-related crimes are rare compared to other types of 
crimes, include as many details as the respondent is willing 
to provide.  This is important so that we can classify any 
sex-related crimes into the correct category--rape, attempted 
rape, sexual assault, or unwanted sexual contact.

Avoid using phrases like "made sexually explicit comments," 
"unwanted sexual contact," or "unwanted sexual advances."  
These phrases do not provide us with enough information to 
determine what actually happened. We need to know what was 
actually said, what parts of the body were touched, whether 
or not force was used, and so forth.

Even though we want all the pertinent facts, do not probe
beyond the structured probes that are provided in Items 27, 
28, 29, and 31 of the NCVS-2. 

Topic 9.  Theft/Attempted Theft of Cash/Property

Definition

For the NCVS, completed or attempted theft of cash and/or 
property is defined differently depending on whether or not 
the incident involved direct contact between a sample household 
member and an offender. When there was no direct contact between 
the offender and a household member during the theft or attempted
theft, then the incident is considered a property crime. If
the incident of theft or attempted theft involved any direct
contact between the offender and a household member, such as 
an attack, a threat, a robbery by force or threat, or a purse 
snatching or pocket picking, then the incident is considered 
a personal crime. 

Property Crime

When an incident involves a theft or attempted theft in which 
there was no direct contact between an eligible household 
member and an offender, the incident is considered a property 
crime.  

A property crime of theft or attempted theft can fall into
one of the following categories:

          Burglary,

          Theft, or

          Motor vehicle theft.

Complete ONLY ONE Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, for each 
property crime of theft or attempted theft in which the 
offender did not attack, attempt to attack, or threaten to 
physically harm a household member.

Burglary

The property crime of burglary usually involves a theft or
attempted theft, but always involves the unlawful or forcible 
entry or attempted entry of a sample address.

-----------------------------------
Example of Burglary:

Harry returned home to his apartment after work and 
discovered his apartment door was open and the lock 
was broken.  As he entered his apartment, he saw that 
his apartment had been vandalized, but nothing appeared 
to be stolen.
------------------------------------

Theft

Theft is the successful or unsuccessful attempt to take
cash and/or property from within the sample address or
its immediate vicinity by someone who has a legal right
to be in the residence at the sample address, such as a
maid, guest, or delivery person.  

Theft can also include the successful or unsuccessful
attempt to take property and/or cash from a place other
than the sample address or its immediate vicinity when
the property and/or cash belongs to one or more eligible
household members and there was no direct contact
between the offender and an eligible household member. 

---------------------------------
Example of Theft:

Jenny invited two of her co-workers to spend the night
at her house, because they had been drinking heavily. 
After they left the next morning, she discovered that
her expensive watch was missing from the bathroom. 
She is pretty sure that one of her co-workers took the
watch.
----------------------------------

---------------------------------- 
Example of Attempted Theft:

While in a movie theater, John threw his leather coat
over the empty seat beside him.  John happened to
notice the coat moving and he turned around to see
who was pulling it.  The person who was trying to steal
John's coat got up and left the theater without the coat.
----------------------------------

Motor Vehicle Theft

Motor vehicle theft is defined as the stealing or unauthorized 
taking of a motor vehicle that belongs to one or more eligible 
household members.  Motor vehicle theft also includes failed 
attempts to steal or take a motor vehicle without authorization 
from the owner(s).

-------------------------------------
Example of Motor Vehicle Theft:

Brian left the keys to his Mercedes on his car seat
while running into the house to answer the phone. 
When he went back outside, his Mercedes was gone
from the driveway.
------------------------------------

------------------------------------
Example of Attempted Motor Vehicle Theft:

While Diane's 15-year-old nephew was visiting her,
she caught him trying to start her SUV and take it 
for a joy ride.  Diane was able to stop him before 
he left with the vehicle. 
-------------------------------------

Personal Crime

A completed or attempted theft of cash and/or property is
considered to be a personal crime, when:

     There was direct contact between an eligible
     household member and an offender, such as a
     personal attack or threat of physical harm, or

     Cash, a purse or a wallet was taken directly from an
     eligible household member without the use of force
     or the threat of physical harm.

Purse Snatching and
Pocket Picking

Purse snatching and pocket picking is the successful and/or 
unsuccessful attempt to take cash, a purse, or a wallet 
directly from an eligible household member without the use 
of force or the threat of physical harm.

Example of Theft With Direct Contact:

As Margaret was leaving the shopping mall and walking to her 
car, a man took her by surprise, grabbed her arm to stop her, 
and took her purse. After taking her purse, he knocked her 
to the ground and ran away with her purse.

Thefts From Unrecognizable
Businesses

The NCVS is interested in collecting information for incidents 
involving thefts from a business when:

     An eligible household member operates an
     unrecognizable business from the sample address. 

     AND

     Cash and/or property belonging to the unrecognizable 
     business is stolen either from the sample address or 
     from another location where the business is still 
     unrecognizable. 

--------------------------------------
Example of Theft From an Unrecognizable Business:

Frank repairs lawn mowers in his garage as a side business, 
but there is no sign on the premises advertising his business.  
While Frank was away for the weekend, someone broke into his 
garage and stole tools and lawn mowers belonging to the 
business. 
--------------------------------------

The NCVS is NOT interested in collecting information for 
incidents involving thefts from a recognizable business, 
regardless of whether or not it is operated from the 
sample address.  In general terms, a recognizable
business is one that has a sign on the premises or some
other indication to the general public that a business 
is operated from the address. 

(Also refer to Part C, Chapter 2, for a detailed explanation 
of recognizable and unrecognizable businesses.)

--------------------------------------
Example of Theft From a Recognizable Business:

Cindy runs a ceramics class and retail shop from her
home and she has a sign on the premises advertising
her business.  While she was on vacation, someone
broke into her home and stole several finished ceramic
pieces that were for sale.
-------------------------------------

Thefts From Children Under 12 
Years of Age

The NCVS is interested in collecting information for incidents 
involving thefts from a sample household member who is under 12 
years of age ONLY when:

     The thefts took place at the sample address (inside
     the home or in the immediate vicinity of the home),
     or at a vacation/second home or hotel/motel where
     the family is staying temporarily.

     AND

     The child was not attacked or threatened with
     physical harm during the incident. 

This type of incident would be considered a property crime, 
NOT a personal crime.

Example of an Acceptable Theft From a Child Under 12:

While interviewing the household respondent, she reported that 
her 5-year-old son's wagon was stolen from the front yard of 
their home.  Her son was inside eating lunch when the wagon 
was stolen.
  
The NCVS is NOT interested in collecting information for 
incidents involving thefts from a sample household member 
who is under 12 years of age when:

     The theft took place at a location other than the
     family's home and its immediate vicinity or at a
     place other than any lodging and immediate vicinity
     where the family is staying temporarily.

     OR

     The child was attacked or threatened with physical
     harm during the incident, regardless of where the
     theft took place.

----------------------------------------
Example of an Unacceptable Theft From a Child Under 12:

While interviewing the parent of a 10-year-old boy, the
parent reported that his son was injured by an older boy
while playing in the park near their home.  During the
incident, the older boy stole the son's remote control
operated race car. 
---------------------------------------

Items 88 and 89 on the
NCVS-2

Item 88 on the NCVS-2 determines whether or not something 
was stolen or taken without permission that belonged to the 
respondent or another household member. Item 89 on the NCVS-2 
determines whether or not an unsuccessful attempt was made 
to steal or take without permission items belonging to the 
respondent or another household member.

If a respondent indicated earlier in the interview that
items were taken without permission or an unsuccessful
attempt was made to take items belonging to the
respondent or another household member, you have the
option to either ask the question or verify the answer
before marking the appropriate answer for Items 88 or 89.

Do not consider the cash and/or property as stolen if any
of the following conditions exist:

     The items belong to a recognizable business
     operated from the sample address or any other
     location where the business is recognizable.

     The items belong to someone who is not a sample
     household member, such as the owner of a rental
     home/apartment or a neighbor/friend who left the
     items at the respondent's home or allowed the
     respondent to borrow the items.

     The items belong to the respondent and were loaned
     to someone who never returned the items.

     The items belong to a household member who is
     under 12 years of age and was attacked and/or
     threatened with physical harm during the incident.

     The items belong jointly to a legally separated
     husband and wife who are not yet divorced and the
     offender is one of the spouses.

Item 90 on the NCVS-2

Item 90 on the NCVS-2 will identify what items the respondent 
thinks that the offender was trying to steal. Since this item 
allows for multiple entries, continue asking,"Anything else?" 
until you get a "No" reply. 

Keep the following points in mind for Item 90:

For Box:

(1)  Cash 
     Do not mark this category for credit cards, checks,
     bank cards, or coin collections.  Mark Box (4) for
     credit cards, checks, and bank cards, and mark 
     Box (13) for coin collections.

(4)  Credit cards, checks, bank cards
     In addition to the items mentioned, also mark this
     box for other items which have little or no value
     unless used fraudulently, such as Savings Bonds,
     bank books, money orders, and traveler's checks.

(6)  Other motor vehicle
     Mark Box (6) for any type of truck, van, sport
     utility vehicle (SUV), motorcycle, or moped.  Do
     NOT mark this box for boats, airplanes, minibikes,
     or snowmobiles, instead mark Box (16) "Other,"
     and identify the type of transportation on the
     "Specify" line.  Also, do not mark Box (6) or any
     other box for Item 90 if the motor vehicle was
     owned and operated exclusively for a recognizable
     business. 

For Box:
(7)  Part of motor vehicle
     Do not mark this box for any items stored in the
     glove compartment, left on the seat, or kept in the
     trunk, since they are not considered part of the
     motor vehicle.

(13) Personal effects
     Mark this box for items used by a specific
     household member, rather than by most or all
     household members.  Some examples include: 
     watches, jewelry, personal luggage, clothing,
     cameras, books, stamp or coin collections, compact
     discs, and so forth.

(14) Handgun
     Mark this box for all "hand-held" guns, regardless
     of how they are used.  Do not mark this box for
     pellet guns, BB guns, air pistols, flare guns, or tear
     gas guns.  Use Box (16) for these types of guns and
     enter the type of gun on the "Specify" line.

(15) Other firearm
     Mark this box for all rifles and shotguns, regardless
     of how they are used, but do not mark Box (15) for
     pellet guns, BB guns, air pistols, flare guns, or tear
     gas guns.  Use Box (16) for these types of guns and
     enter the type of gun on the "Specify" line.

Topic 10.  Value of Stolen Property/Methods Used to Determine

Definition

For the NCVS, the value of stolen property should be the
respondent's best estimate of the dollar value:

          Excluding any stolen cash, checks, or credit cards 

          AND

          Excluding any portion of the dollar amount that
          covers stolen property owned by a nonhousehold
          member.

Respondents can use any method they choose to arrive at
a dollar value for stolen property belonging to sample
household members. 

Item 104 on the NCVS-2

When items other than cash/checks/credit cards were stolen 
during an incident, you will ask the respondent the
following question in Item 104:

"What was the value of the PROPERTY that was taken? Include 
recovered property. (Exclude any stolen cash/checks/credit 
cards.  If jointly owned with a nonhousehold member(s), 
include only share owned by household members.)"

Keep the following points in mind as you ask this question:

     Only include the dollar amount for stolen property
     or the portion of the stolen property that is owned
     by sample household members.

     If the stolen property was owned jointly by one or
     more household members and a nonhousehold member, 
     only include the dollar amount for the portion of 
     the property owned by household members.

     Although you do not want to suggest a method for
     arriving at the dollar amount, you can mention the
     stolen items individually to the respondent.  If the
     respondent finds it easier to give you separate dollar
     amounts for each stolen item, then just total the
     separate amounts and enter the total in the answer
     space for Item 104.

     If one of the stolen items is food stamps, ask the
     respondent for the "face value" of the food stamps.

     Enter the value of the stolen property in whole
     dollars rounding up or down as necessary.

Item 105 of the NCVS-2

Item 105 on the NCVS-2 is used to determine how the respondent 
arrived at the amount given for the value of the stolen property.  
Ask the question exactly as it is worded on the questionnaire:

"How did you decide the value of the property that was taken?  
Any other way?"

Since this item allows for multiple entries, continue asking 
"Any other way?" until you get a "No" reply. Avoid reading the 
answer categories to the respondent, except as a last resort.

Methods Used to Decide

Original cost (Box 1)
The price paid for the item when the respondent first bought 
it.

Replacement cost (Box 2)
If the stolen property has been replaced already, it would
be the price paid at that time.  Otherwise, it would be the
cost to replace the stolen property at the time of interview.  
When using the replacement cost, the original purchase price 
should NOT be considered.

Personal estimate of current value (Box 3)
Current value is not the same as the property's replacement 
cost.  A personal estimate of current value is the respondent's 
idea of what the stolen property was worth at the time of the 
incident.

Insurance report estimate (Box 4)
This is the amount that an insurance company estimates the 
stolen property to be worth.

Police estimate (Box 5)
This is the amount that the police estimate the stolen
property to be worth.

Don't know (Box 6)
By marking this category, you are indicating that the
respondent does not know how he/she decided on the
amount given in Item 104 as the value of the stolen
property.  Always probe to get a more precise answer
before marking this category.

Other (Specify) (Box 7)
Use this category when the respondent gives you a definite 
way in which he/she arrived at the value, but it is not one 
of the categories listed in Boxes 1 through 5 of Item 105.  
Always enter what the method was after marking the "Other" 
category, such as "a friend's estimate," "appraisal from an 
antique dealer," or "face value" (for stolen food stamps). 

Topic 11.  Property Ownership

Definition

The NCVS is interested in obtaining information about
attempted or actual thefts of property or money only
when the property or money is owned by persons who are
eligible sample household members at the time of
interview.  As you complete an NCVS-2 for an attempted
or actual theft, you will determine whether the property is
owned by:

     The respondent only,

     The respondent and other household member(s),

     Other household member(s) only,

     Nonhousehold member(s) only, or

     Other "Specify" (For example, property or money
     owned jointly by a household member and a
     nonhousehold member.)

Theft Incidents From Former 
Residences

You may encounter incidents where an attempted or actual theft 
occurred while the sample household resided at an address other 
than the sample address during the reference period. As long as 
the property that the offender stole or attempted to steal is 
owned by a person who is a household member at the time of 
interview, you will keep the attempted or actual theft 
report for the NCVS.  However, if the attempted or actual 
theft involved property owned SOLELY by a person who is 
NOT a household member at the time of interview, the NCVS 
does not want to keep the attempted or actual theft 
information.

Theft Incidents From a
Legally Separated Spouse

If a husband and wife are legally separated and not yet
divorced, any property that they owned jointly while
married is still considered jointly owned during their
legal separation.  

Items 91 and 97 on the NCVS-2

When you determine in Items 89 and 90 that a reported
incident involves an attempted theft, you will ask the
respondent the following question in Item 91:

"Did the (property/money) the offender tried to take
belong to you personally, to someone else in the 
household, or to both you and other household
members?"

When you determine in Items 88 and 96 that a reported
incident involves an actual theft, you will ask the
respondent the following question in Item 97:

"Did the stolen (property/money) belong to you personally, 
to someone else in the household, or to both you and other 
household members?"

Both of these items are designed to determine whether the
owner is:

     The respondent only

     The respondent and other household member(s)

     Other household member(s) only

     Nonhousehold member(s) only

     Other "Specify" (For example, property or money
     owned jointly by a household member and a
     nonhousehold member.)

Here are a few situations in which you would mark Box 5 "Other" 
for Items 91 and 97:

     Owners of the property/money are the respondent
     and a nonhousehold member.

     OR

     Owners of the property/money are another
     household member and a nonhousehold member.

Nonhousehold Member at Time of
Interview

The NCVS does not want to keep incidents that involve only 
an attempted theft of property belonging to a person who 
is NOT a household member at the time of interview. If you 
discover in Item 91 or 97 that the property/money belongs 
only to a person who is a nonhousehold member at the time 
of interview, you still must finish completing the Crime 
Incident Report, NCVS-2. By completing the NCVS-2, you may 
discover other facts about the incident that are within the 
scope of the survey.

However, you will need to out-of-scope the incident when it 
only involves the theft or attempted theft of nonhousehold 
property and the offender did not steal or attempt to steal 
household property and did not attack or attempt to attack 
or threaten a household member.

(See Part C, Chapter 1, Topic 8, for more information
about out-of-scope incidents.)

Check Items J and L on the NCVS-2

When the property/money involved in a theft or attempted 
theft incident is owned by the respondent AND other sample 
household members, you will identify by line number on the 
NCVS-2 which household members other than the respondent 
own the property.  For an attempted theft, you will enter 
the line number(s)in Check Item J.  For an actual theft, 
you will enter the line number(s) in Check  Item L.  

Consider the property to belong to the ENTIRE sample
household and mark the "Household property" category
if:

     The respondent tells you that the property belongs
     to ALL household members 

     OR

     The respondent tells you that the property belongs
     jointly to himself/herself AND more than two other
     household members.

Depending on the circumstances, it is acceptable to enter
line number(s) for the theft of personal property and also
mark the "Household property" category.

Check Item W (Summary Report) on the 
NCVS-2 

When property from an attempted or actual theft incident
is owned by two or more persons, you need to identify in
the Summary Report (Check Item W) which persons own
which items and, when necessary, which items are household 
property.  For example, if you mark Box (2)in Item 91 or 
97, then you need to identify by line number in your Summary 
Report which items belong to the respondent and which items 
belong to the other household member(s). 

It is not necessary to do this when the property/money:

          Belongs only to the respondent 

          OR

          Is considered to be entirely household property.

Topic 12.  Recovered Money and/or Property

Definition

For the NCVS, "recovered money and/or property" means:

     For stolen money:  Any money stolen during the
     reported incident that has either been found and
     returned to the respondent OR that the offender has
     reimbursed to the respondent for all or part of the
     stolen money.

     For stolen property:  All or part of the original
     stolen property was returned to the respondent or is
     being held as evidence for a court case.

Item 106 on the NCVS-2

Item 106 on the NCVS-2 is one of the questions that you will 
ask the respondent when money and/or property was stolen 
during a reported incident. The question in Item 106 asks:

"Was all or part of the stolen (money/property)recovered, not 
counting anything received from insurance?"

The information recorded in Item 96 on the NCVS-2 will
indicate whether you will ask about the recovery of stolen
money, property, or both in Item 106.  For the NCVS, we
want to determine whether all, part, or none of the stolen
money and/or property was recovered.

Do Not Include as Recovered

Under the following circumstances, do NOT consider the
stolen money and/or property to be recovered:

     An insurance company replaced the stolen property
     or provided money to replace the stolen property.

     The offender replaced the stolen property or
     provided money to replace the stolen property.

     Anyone other than the offender reimbursed the
     respondent for the money that was stolen, such as an
     insurance company or a relative.

For the NCVS, we are only interested in the original property/
money, not property/money that was given to the owner as a 
replacement or reimbursement.

Item 107 on the NCVS-2

If a respondent tells you in Item 106 that only part of the
stolen money and/or property was recovered, then you will
determine in Item 107 how much of the stolen money and/or 
property was recovered.

Item 107 allows you to mark more than one answer category and 
notice that there are two main groups of answer categories--
Cash and Property.

Only Cash Was Recovered

When only stolen cash was recovered, mark Box (1), "Only cash 
recovered," and enter the amount in whole dollars (rounding up 
or down as necessary) on the "Amount of cash recovered" line.  
An estimated dollar amount is acceptable when the respondent 
is unable to give you an exact amount.

Only Property Was Recovered

When only stolen property was recovered, there are five
separate "Property" answer categories:

          Box (2) "Purse"

          Box (3) "Wallet"

          Box (4) "Credit cards, checks, bank cards"

          Box (5) "Car or other motor vehicle"

          Box (6) "Property other than the above"

Based on the respondent's answer, mark all property
categories that apply.  Anytime a respondent answers
"Purse" or "Wallet," also ask:  "Did it contain any
money?".  This additional question will ensure that we
document any stolen cash that may have been recovered. 
If you get a "Yes" answer, make sure to enter the dollar
amount on the "Amount of cash recovered" line.  

Mark Box (6) "Property other than the above" when:

     The respondent mentions recovered property not
     described in any of the other four property categories
     for Item 107.

     OR

     The respondent does not know or is unsure about
     which stolen property items were recovered.

Both Cash and Property
Were Recovered

When both stolen money and property were recovered:

     Enter the amount in whole dollars (rounding up or
     down as necessary) on the "Amount of cash
     recovered" line, 

     AND

     Mark all appropriate "property" categories Boxes (2)
     through (6) based on the respondent's answer. 

Check Item O and Item 108 on 
the NCVS-2

If you determine in Check Item O that the stolen property
recovered was something other than cash, checks, or
credit cards, then you will ask the question in Item 108 to
determine the value of the recovered stolen property.  The
question in Item 108 asks:

"Considering any damage, what was the value of the property 
after it was recovered? (Do not include recovered cash, 
checks, or credit cards.)"

Keep the following points in mind for Item 108:

     Include the value of a recovered purse and/or wallet,
     but do not include the value of recovered cash, 
     checks, or credit cards that may have been in the
     purse or wallet.

     Damage to stolen property before it is recovered may
     cause its value to decrease from what it was before
     the theft.

     Include the total whole dollar amount (rounding up
     or down as necessary) for all recovered property
     both damaged and undamaged (other than cash,
     checks, and credit cards).

     It is acceptable to mention recovered items
     individually to a respondent and allow the
     respondent to use any means he/she wishes to arrive
     at the item's value.  Then, total the individual
     amounts and enter the total on the "Value of property
     recovered" line for Item 108.

Item 127 on the NCVS-2

Item 127 on the NCVS-2 is one of a series of questions
inquiring as to how the police responded when notified
about an incident. The question in Item 127 asks:

"What did the police do in following up this incident?"

This question allows you to mark more than one box.  One
of the answer categories to identify what the police
followed up on for the incident is "Recovered property." 
Before marking Box 4 "Recovered property," make sure
that the stolen property is considered "recovered" by the
NCVS definition provided earlier in this topic.

Topic 13.  Medical Care

Definition

For the NCVS, medical care is any care or treatment that a
respondent received for physical injuries suffered during
the incident, regardless of:

          Who administered the care 

          OR 

          Where the care was administered.

Medical care can range from something as simple as applying 
an ice pack to something as complicated as major surgery.  
The person administering the medical care does not need to 
be anyone with medical training. In fact, it could even be 
the respondent treating his/her own injuries. The location 
where treatment is provided can be anywhere--at the crime 
scene, at home, in an ambulance, or at a hospital.

Item 34 on the NCVS-2

When a respondent tells you that he/she was injured during 
the incident, you will ask the following question in Item 
34:

"Were you injured to the extent that you received any
medical care, including self treatment?"

Item 31 on the NCVS-2 will actually identify what type of
injuries were suffered, if any. If the respondent suffered
injuries during an incident, but did not receive any care or
treatment for those injuries, mark Box (2) "No" in Item 34.

A "Yes" answer in Item 34 will take you through Items 35
through 37, so you can determine:

     Where the respondent received medical care for
     his/her injuries (Item 35).  Item 35 contains seven
     different answer categories identifying where
     medical care could have been provided to the
     respondent.  Since you can mark more than one box
     for Item 35, continue asking "Anywhere else?" until
     you get a "No" response. 

     Whether the respondent stayed at the hospital
     overnight, when care was administered at a hospital
     (Item 36).

     How many days the respondent stayed at the hospital, 
     when the respondent stayed overnight at a hospital 
    (Item 37).

If you determine that medical care was not provided at a
hospital, then you will skip to Item 38 to inquire about
medical insurance after marking the "No" box in Check
Item E.

Topic 14.  Medical Expenses

Definition

For the NCVS, medical expenses are intended to include all 
costs incurred directly as a result of treatment received
for any injuries that the respondent experienced during the
incident, regardless of who paid these costs.  Consider the
following costs as medical expenses if they are related
directly to the respondent's injuries from the incident:

     Services provided by doctors, surgeons, and
     hospitals,

     Ambulance service and emergency room fees,

     Physical therapist and dentist fees,

     Any costs for medicine or special devices, such as
     braces, wheelchairs, dentures, and so forth.

Item 39 on the NCVS-2

Item 39 on the NCVS-2 is used to determine what the total
dollar amount was for medical expenses resulting from the
incident.  The question for Item 39 asks:

"What was the total amount of your medical expenses
resulting from this incident (INCLUDING anything paid
by insurance)?  Include hospital and doctor bills,
medicine, therapy, braces, and any other injury-related
expenses."

Make sure to read the bolded statement following the
question so that the respondent understands fully what to
include when providing you with a total amount.  If the
respondent told you in Item 38 that he/she was covered by
medical insurance or another type of health benefits
program at the time of the incident, make sure to read the
statement within parentheses, "(INCLUDING anything paid by 
insurance)" as you ask the question in Item 39.

If the respondent is unable to provide an exact amount,
take the respondent's best estimate of the total dollar
amount for medical expenses.  In some cases, a respondent
may still be undergoing treatment for his/her injuries at 
the time of interview.  If so, try to get a projected estimate 
for the total cost of medical expenses resulting from the
incident.  When a respondent is unable to provide even an
estimated amount, mark Box x "Don't know."

Box (0) "No cost" is provided in Item 39 for instances when 
medical care was provided at no cost to the respondent or his/
her medical insurance.

Topic 15.  Race of Offenders

Definition

For the NCVS, we use only three race categories to describe 
the race of offender(s)--White, Black, and Other. The "Other" 
category encompasses any racial category that is not White or 
Black/African American.  For example:

          American Indian or Alaska Native
     
          Asian (Japanese, Chinese, Filipino, Korean, Asian
          Indian, Vietnamese, or other Asian)  

          Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander

Do NOT mark the "Other" category for persons who respond 
with "Spanish, Hispanic, Latino" or any other ethnic origin, 
such as Italian, Greek, Polish, and so forth.

Item 71 on the NCVS-2

When a respondent tells you that the crime was committed
by just one offender or a respondent knows something
about one of the offenders, you will ask him/her a series of
questions on the NCVS-2 to gather information about the
offender.  One of these questions is Item 71 and it asks
about the offender's race.  Only mark one box in Item 71
to indicate the offender's race.

The answer categories available for this item are White,
Black, Other (Specify), and Don't know.  Keep in mind
that a person's ethnic origin is NOT the same as the
person's race. If a respondent answers the offender's
race question with "Spanish, Hispanic, or Latino" or
any other ethnic origin, such as French or German,
mark Box (1)"White."  Do not mark Box 3 "Other" and do 
not enter the offender's ethnic origin or ancestry on 
the "Specify" line.

Items 85 and 86 on the
NCVS-2

When a respondent tells you that the crime was committed
by more than one offender, you will ask the respondent a
series of questions on the NCVS-2 to gather information

about these offenders.  Two of these questions are in 
Items 85 and 86.  Item 85 asks:

"Were the offenders White, Black, or some other race?"

Since the offenders could be of more than one race, you
can mark more than one box in Item 85 to identify the race
of each offender involved in the incident.  The answer
categories for Item 85 are:

          White (Box 1)

          Black (Box 2)

          Other (Specify) (Box 3)

          Don't know race of any/some (Box 4)

Item 86 asks:

"What race were most of the offenders?"

Whenever two or more answer categories are marked in Item 
85, you will ask the question in Item 86 to determine the 
race of MOST of the offenders.  Only mark ONE of the 
following boxes in Item 86:

          Mostly White (Box 1)

          Mostly Black (Box 2)

          Mostly some other race (Box 3)

          Equal number of each race (Box 4)

          Don't know (Box 5)

Topic 16.  Other Victimized Household Members

Definition

For the NCVS, "Other victimized household members" consist of 
sample household members who are:

     Also victims in an incident reported by the
     household member you are currently interviewing, 

     Household members at the time of interview, 

     AND

     At least 12 years of age at the time of the incident. 

Consider a household member to be a "victim" if the offender 
did any of the following things to an eligible household 
member:

     Hit, knocked down, or actually attacked the
     household member.

     Tried to attack the household member.

     Threatened to physically harm the household
     member.

Since it is important that we get a complete picture of each
household member's victimization, you need to complete a
separate NCVS-2 for each eligible household member at the 
time of interview who was personally victimized during an 
incident.

Items 52 Through 54 on
the NCVS-2

Item 52 on the NCVS-2 is used to determine if any persons 
who were present during the incident, other than the 
respondent, the offender, and any children under 12 years 
of age were victimized.  If you get a "Yes" answer in 
Item 52, then, in Item 53, you will document the number
of victimized persons excluding the respondent, the
offender, and any children under 12 years of age.

Item 54 on the NCVS-2 is used to determine if any of the
persons present during the incident are eligible household
members at the time of interview and, if so, to identify 
the household members by name or line number. Item 54
asks:

"How many of these persons are members of your household now?  
(Do not include yourself, the offender or children under 12 
years of age.)" 

Victimized Member Not
Yet Interviewed

If a household member identified in Item 54 does not
mention that he/she was personally victimized during the
incident reported by another household member, remind
the respondent about the victimization.  There may be
instances when the respondent will contradict what the
other household member told you.  If this happens, add a
note beside Item 54 on the other household member's
NCVS-2 saying, "Verified - No victimization occurred."

Victimized Member Already 
Interviewed

If you have already interviewed a household member
identified in Item 54 and the household member did not
mention that he/she was personally victimized in the
incident, you need to speak to that household member
again to verify whether or not the household member was
actually victimized during the incident.  Complete a
separate NCVS-2 if you discover that the household
member was victimized during the incident reported by
the other household member. 

If the household member identified in Item 54 denies
being a victim during the reported incident, go back to
Item 54 on the other household member's NCVS-2 and
line through the household member's name/line number
and enter a note saying, "Verified - No victimization
occurred."

Victimized Person No Longer a 
Household Member

Do NOT enter a previous household member's name or
line number in Item 54 if the person is NOT a household
member at the time of the incident. 

Victimized Person Is a Proxy 
Respondent

If you are conducting a proxy interview, be careful to
change the wording in parentheses for Item 54 to say:

"(Do not include (insert name of proxy person), the
offender or children under 12 years of age.)"

Make sure to enter a proxy respondent's name or line
number in Item 54 if the proxy respondent:

        Is a household member at the time of interview 

        AND 

        Was personally victimized during a reported
        incident.

If you confirm that a proxy respondent was personally
victimized, complete an NCVS-2 for the victimization.  If
the proxy respondent says that he/she was not personally
victimized, go back to Item 54 on the other household
member's NCVS-2 and line through the household member's 
name/line number and enter a note saying, "Verified - No 
victimization occurred." 

Victimized Person Is a Type Z 
Noninterview

If you have already classified a household member as a
Type Z noninterview and another household member tells
you that the Type Z person was also personally victimized
during an incident, do NOT attempt to recontact the Type Z 
person about the victimization.

Topic 17.  Damage to Property During an Incident

Definition

The NCVS measures "damage to property" when the property is:

     Owned by someone who was a household member at
     the time of the incident, 

     OR 

     Owned by an unrecognizable business that is
     operated from the sample address,

     AND

     The property was damaged or vandalized during the
     incident. 

When to Exclude Damaged Property

Under the following circumstances, EXCLUDE information about 
damaged property for the NCVS:

     The damaged property belonged to someone who
     was not a sample household member at the time of
     the incident and at the time of the interview.

     The damaged property belonged to a recognizable
     business operated by a household member.

     The damaged property is commercial property that
     does not belong to a household member. 

Items on the NCVS-2

There are several items on the NCVS-2 that are used to collect 
information about property damage during a reported crime 
incident--Items 27, 59, and 110 through 114.  At the end of 
the NCVS-2, you also will include details about damaged 
property as you summarize the reported incident in Check Item 
W.

Item 27 on the NCVS-2

Item 27 on the NCVS-2 is used to determine what actually
happened during the incident and it allows for multiple
answers.  You will ask Item 27 when the respondent was
present during the incident and answered "No" when asked
if the offender:

     Hit, knocked down, or actually attacked the
     respondent in any way (Item 24);

     Tried to attack the respondent (Item 25);

     OR

     Threatened to physically harm the respondent in any
     way (Item 26).

Item 27 includes two answer categories that deal with
damage to property:

     Box (8), Damaged or destroyed property, 

     AND

     Box (9), Attempted or threatened to damage or
     destroy property.

Item 59 on the NCVS-2

Item 59 on the NCVS-2 is also used to determine what actually 
happened during the incident and this item allows you to mark 
more than one box.  You will ask Item 59 when only other 
household members, other than the respondent, were present 
during the incident.  

Item 59 includes two answer categories that deal with damage 
to property:

          Box (6), Damaged or destroyed property, 

          AND

          Box (7), Attempted or threatened to damage or destroy
          property.

Item 110 on the NCVS-2

Item 110 on the NCVS-2 determines whether any property
owned by a household member at the time of the incident
(other than stolen property) was damaged during the
incident.  Since Item 110 excludes damage done to
property stolen during an incident, make sure to read the
lead-in statement shown in parentheses "(Other than any
stolen property)," whenever an incident involves stolen
property.  If you marked Boxes 2 through 26 in Item 96,
then you should read the lead-in statement when asking
the question in Item 110.  

If a respondent appears to be confused, also ask the probe
question shown below the initial question in Item 110. 
This probe question asks:  "For example, was (a lock or
window broken/clothing damaged/damage done to a car), or 
something else?"  You will have to decide which phrase within 
the parentheses is most appropriate to include in the probe 
question based on the type of incident reported. 

Item 111 on the NCVS-2

When you mark Box (1) "Yes" in Item 110, you will continue 
with Item 111 to determine whether any or all of the items 
that were damaged during an incident were either repaired 
or replaced.  A "Yes" answer is acceptable inItem 111 
regardless of:

       Who repaired or replaced the damaged items 

       OR

       What the repair or replacement cost may have been,
       even if the repair or replacement was done at no cost.

Items 112 and 113 on the NCVS-2

If a respondent tells you that the damaged items were not
repaired or replaced, you will ask Item 112 to determine
what it would cost to repair or replace the damaged items.  

If a respondent tells you that all or part of the damaged
items were repaired or replaced, you will ask Item 113 to

determine what it did cost to repair or replace the
damaged items.

For Items 112 and 113, enter the amount in whole dollars 
rounding up or down as necessary. If a respondent is
having difficulty giving you an amount, probe to help
him/her decide on an accurate answer. It is acceptable to
enter the respondent's best estimate when an exact amount
is not readily available or remembered. Only mark Box (x) 
"Don't know" when you are unable to even get an estimated 
cost after probing. If the household did not incur any 
cost to repair or replace the damaged property, then mark 
Box (0) "No cost."

Item 114 on the NCVS-2

Item 114 on the NCVS-2 determines who either paid or would 
pay the cost to repair or replace any items damaged during 
a reported incident.  When asking the question in Item 114, 
make sure to use the appropriate words based on the answers 
you received in Items 110 through 113.  Since the repair or 
replacement costs could be paid by more than one person or 
organization, Item 114 allows you to mark more than one box.  
Continue asking "Anyone else?" until you get a "No" answer. 

When recording answers for Item 114, remember the
following points:

Box (1) "Items will not be repaired or replaced":
Only mark Box (1) when NONE of the damaged property
will be repaired or replaced.  However, if money was paid
by insurance or another source to the respondent for the
purpose of repairing or replacing the damaged property
and the respondent decided not to use the money for that
purpose, do NOT mark Box (1).  Instead, mark Boxes (3)
through (6), as appropriate.  Here are a few examples:

       Victim's insurance paid to repair some furniture that
       was damaged during a household theft and the victim
       decided to give the damaged furniture away and use
       the insurance money for some other purpose.  In this
       example, you would mark Box (4) "Victim's (or
       household's) insurance," even though the furniture
       was not repaired.

       Respondent's neighbor gave him money to replace a
       lamp that he broke while arguing and physically
       assaulting the respondent during a party at the
       respondent's home.  The respondent did not use the
       money to replace the lamp.  In this example, you
       would mark Box (5) "Offender."

Any time money is given to a respondent for the purpose
of repairing or replacing a damaged item, mark the
appropriate answer boxes to show who gave the money,
regardless of whether or not the money was used for that
purpose.

Box (3) "Landlord or landlord's insurance" and
Box (4) "Victim's (or household's) insurance":

Any time the cost to repair or replace a damaged item is
paid for by someone other than an insurance company and
that person is later reimbursed by an insurance company,
you would mark either Box (3) and/or Box (4) depending
on whose insurance reimbursed the person.  If the
household member had to pay a deductible and the
insurance company paid the balance, mark Box (2)
"Household member" AND Box (4) "Victim's (or household's) 
insurance."

Box (6) "Other":
If the money to repair or replace the damaged property
came from a source not covered in Boxes (1) through (5),
mark Box (6) and describe the type of person or
organization on the "Specify" line below Box (6).  Some
examples are:  Relative, friend, government agency,
church, or community organization.

Topic 18.  Job/Business at Time of the Incident

Definition

For the NCVS, a job or business at the time of the incident
means that the respondent:

     Had a definite arrangement to work for pay or profit
     on a part-time or full-time basis at the time of the
     incident. 

     Was self-employed in his/her own business/farm or
     partnership at the time of the incident.

     Was working without pay on a family farm or in a
     family business at the time of the incident.

If a respondent meets one of the conditions stated above
and is temporarily absent from work because of an illness,
vacation, bad weather, strike, or temporary layoff, you
would still consider him/her to have a job at the time of
the incident.

Do NOT consider a respondent to have a job at the time of
the incident, if the respondent was:

          Doing volunteer work without pay.

          Keeping house without pay. 

          Receiving money from a scholarship.

Item 136 on the NCVS-2

The question in Item 136 on the NCVS-2 can be either asked 
or verified and it asks:  "Did you have a job at the time 
of the incident?"  A "Yes" answer to this question will take 
you Check Item S, while a "No" answer will take you to Item 
137.

Keep in mind that the employment questions on the NCVS-1 ask 
about the respondent's job or business held at least two 
consecutive weeks in the 6 months before the interview and 
Item 136 on the NCVS-2 asks about the respondent's job or 
business at the time of the incident. 

Topic 19.  Major Activity During Week of the Incident 

Definition

For the NCVS, major activity during the week of the incident 
is intended to identify the one activity at which the 
respondent spent the majority of his/her time during the week 
of the incident.  Whenever a respondent says in Item 136 that 
he/she did not have a job or business at the time of the 
incident, you will ask the question in Item 137 to determine 
how the respondent spent most of his/her time during the week 
of the incident.  

Item 137 on the NCVS-2

When a respondent tells you in Item 136 that he/she did
not have a job or business at the time of the incident, you
will continue with the question in Item 137 to find out
whether the person was:

          Looking for work (Box 1)
          Keeping house (Box 2)
          Going to school (Box 3)
          Unable to work (Box 4)
          Retired (Box 5)
          Other - Specify (Box 6)

Make sure that you read the entire question, so the
respondent has a better idea of the question's purpose. 
Only mark ONE box to record the respondent's answer.  

Item 137 asks:

"What was your major activity the week of the incident-
were you looking for work, keeping house, going to school, 
or doing something else?" 

Looking for Work

The following activities constitute "Looking for work"
Box (1):

       Registering at an employment office,

       Meeting with prospective employers,

       Placing or answering job advertisements, and

       Investigating the possibility of starting a business or
       professional practice.

Keeping House

Box (2) "Keeping house" is intended for respondents whose 
primary responsibility during the week of the incident 
involved housework within their own home. "Keeping house" 
includes the following activities:

        Cooking, washing clothes, and cleaning house,

        Caring for their own children, foster children, or
        children of relatives, such as brothers, sisters,
        cousins, and so forth,

        Overseeing the care of their home, even if someone
        else actually does the labor, and

        Maintaining their yard and house, such as cutting the
        grass, painting the house, and caring for vegetable
        and flower gardens (other than on a family farm). 

Consider a respondent as having a job at the time of the
incident if the respondent is paid to keep house, such as a
maid. If this happens, line through the "No" answer in Item 
136 and mark Box (1) "Yes."

Going to School

Box (3) "Going to school" is intended for respondents who
spent the major part of the incident week attending any
kind of public or private school, including a trade or
vocational school.  When a respondent was not at school
due to an illness or short vacation, you would still mark
Box (3) "Going to school." 

However, a student's summer vacation is treated
differently. If the respondent was on summer vacation
when the incident occurred and he/she was not attending
summer school during that week, you would mark one of
the other categories, NOT Box (3) "Going to school." 
For example, if the household member was:

      Looking for work, you would mark Box (1).

      OR 

      "Babysitting brother and sister" or "Doing volunteer
      work without pay," you would mark Box (6) "Other"
      and write in the activity on the "Specify" line.

Unable to Work

Box (4) "Unable to work" is intended for respondents who
are unable to do any kind of work either permanently or
for more than 6 months from the time of the incident due
to a long-term physical/mental illness or disability.  This
category is NOT intended for respondents who are only ill
or disabled temporarily and will be able to do some type 
of work within 6 months following the incident.  For a
temporary illness or disability that keeps a respondent
from working, you may need to mark Box (6) "Other" and
enter a description of the major activity.

Retired

Box (5) "Retired" is intended for respondents who have
discontinued working permanently from their jobs.  If a
respondent has retired from one job, but was working at
least part of the incident week, consider the person as
having a job at the time of the incident, mark Box (1)
"Yes" in Item 136 and skip to Check Item S.

Other

Use Box (6) "Other" when the respondent's major activity
during the incident week does not fit any other category in
Item 137.  Whenever you mark Box (6), you must enter a
written description of the major activity, such as
recuperating from surgery, caring for a sick relative, and
so forth.

Topic 20.  Incident Occurred at Work Site

Definition

For the NCVS, a work site is the area in which the respondent 
usually conducts his/her day-to-day job-related tasks for all 
jobs held by the respondent at the time of the incident.

Item 141a on the NCVS-2

If you determine in Item 135 that the incident happened
while the respondent was working or on duty, then you
will ask a series of questions about the respondent's job
and employer.  Item 141a is part of this series of questions
and is used to find out if the incident happened at the
respondent's work site.  You have the option of either
verifying the answer or asking the question before marking
the answer category.

Here are some situations when you would mark Box (1)
"Yes" in Item 141a:

Example 1:
As a taxi cab driver was driving a customer to the airport,
the customer threatened to stab him with a knife if he did
not turn over his money and watch.

Example 2:
While working at a construction site, a bricklayer was
physically attacked by a coworker.

Example 3:
An insurance agent was sexually assaulted in her office
while working late one evening.  However, if this incident
had occurred in a hotel during a business conference, then
the incident did not happen at the respondent's work site
and you would mark Box (2) "No" in Item 141a.

Example 4:
A traveling salesperson had vacuum cleaners stolen from
his business van while he was in a customer's home trying
to make a sale.

Example 5:
An accountant who works out of her home office reported
that her office was broken into, vandalized, and computer
and other electronic equipment were stolen during the
incident.  Her home office is an unrecognizable business. 
However, if the only items stolen belonged to the
respondent personally and not to the business, you would
mark Box (2) "No" in Item 141a.

Topic 21.  Incident Involved a Police Officer

Definition

Police officers can be involved in crime incidents as either
victims or offenders.  The NCVS is interested in all incidents 
involving police officers, regardless of whether the officers 
are victims or offenders or on duty or off duty. Due to the 
nature of their job, police officers present special issues 
for the NCVS. 

An assault, a threat of physical harm, or any other type 
of NCVS crime in which a police officer has been victimized
is no less of a crime because of his/her line of work. 
However, due to a police officer's job, he/she is more
likely to report a greater number of incidents than the
average NCVS respondent.

Even though a police officer in the line of duty sometimes
has the right to use necessary physical force to make an
arrest or to keep the peace, a police officer while either 
on or off duty can still be an offender in a crime incident.  
If a respondent claims that an offender is a police officer, 
do NOT attempt to determine whether the police officer was
or was not acting in the line of duty.  

Headquarters staff will review all incidents involving
offenders who are police officers and determine whether
each incident:

     Should be kept because the police officer acted
     beyond the line of duty

     OR

     Should be "out-of-scoped" because the police officer
     acted within the line of duty.

Item 115 on the NCVS-2

When completing a Crime Incident Report, NCVS-2, for an incident 
in which a police officer is either the victim or the offender, 
do not assume that the police department was informed and an 
official report was filed. Item 115 on the NCVS-2 asks:

"Were the police informed or did they find out about this
incident in any way?"

Always read this question to the respondent and, if necessary, 
probe by asking whether or not an official report was filed 
for the incident. If a report was not filed, mark Box (2) 
"No."

Check Item W (Summary Report) on 
the NCVS-2

When a police officer is reported as the offender in an
incident, Headquarters staff rely heavily on the facts that
you enter in the Summary Report in Check Item W.  Since
this information will help determine whether or not the
incident falls outside the scope of this survey, you need to
provide as many of the facts as possible to answer the
following questions:

       Was the victim/respondent arrested?

       Did the victim/respondent press charges against the
       police officer?

       Did the police confiscate any property?  If so, was
       the property returned, kept as evidence, and so forth?

       Was the police officer on or off duty?

       Did the police officer have a hand gun or billy club? 
       If so, did the police officer draw or use either the gun
       or the billy club?

Probe to get a complete description of the police officer's
actions AND the victim's actions during the incident without 
offending the respondent.

NCVS-554, Field Representative's
Information Card Booklet

For incidents in which the offender is a police officer, you
can refer to page 16 in your Information Card Booklet, NCVS-554.  
This bottom portion of this page includes a quick reference to 
help you remember what facts are needed in the Summary Report 
(Check Item W) when the offender is a police officer.

Topic 22.  Hate Crimes

Definition

For the NCVS, a hate crime is one in which the offender
targets a sample household member or the sample address
when committing an NCVS crime and/or an act of
vandalism because of the offender's prejudice or bigotry
against a household member's characteristics or religious
beliefs.  

The offender's motivation must be at least partially related
to his/her dislike of or prejudice against a specific group of
people because of their:

          Race,
          Religion,
          Ethnicity/national origin,
          Disability,
          Gender, or
          Sexual orientation.

This type of offense is still considered a hate crime regardless 
of whether the offender has an incorrect perception of the victim's 
membership in or association with a specific group.

Hate-Related Acts of
Vandalism

Whenever a household respondent reports that an act of
vandalism was committed against the household, you will
ask a series of hate crime screen questions of the
household respondent. Items 46g through 46k on the NCVS-1 
are asked to determine if the household respondent has any 
reason to suspect that the vandalism was a hate crime or a 
crime of prejudice or bigotry.

Hate-Related NCVS Crime
Incidents

Whenever you complete an NCVS-2 for a reported crime
incident, you will ask a series of hate crime questions that
are very similar to the hate crime screen questions. 
However, these hate crime questions are used to find out if
the household member has any reason to suspect the
reported incident was a hate crime or a crime of prejudice
or bigotry.  Items 161 through 166 on the NCVS-2 cover
the hate crime questions involving a reported incident.

Examples of Hate Crimes

Example #1:

Tracy was driving a good friend to services at the friend's 
synagogue.  Although Tracy is not Jewish, she attended the 
service with her friend.  When they returned to Tracy's car, 
they found that someone had spray painted a swastika on the 
side of her car.

This is an example of a hate-related act of vandalism.

Example #2:

After walking in a Gay Pride March, two men came up to Doug 
and his friend, punched them in the stomach, and said that 
they hate faggots and have no use for them. 

This is an example of an incident involving a hate crime. 

Topic 23.  Writing Summary Reports

Definition

The Summary Report which you will enter in Check Item W on 
each NCVS-2 that you complete is intended for you to 
summarize all of the pertinent facts involving a reported 
crime incident.  Each summary report should be written so 
that anyone reading it can get a clear, well-defined picture 
of how the respondent was victimized during the reported 
incident.

Include in the summary report any details that you feel are
not evident from the answers in the NCVS-2.  This is very
important because, before sending a case for processing,
editors often need more specific details than they can get
from other entries on the NCVS-2.  When this happens,
they must rely on what is written in your summary report.
  
As you write your summary report, be careful not to use
misleading words or phrases that may raise more questions
about the incident, instead of clarifying what really
happened.

For example: 
When you ask if the offender threatened the respondent
with harm in any way, the respondent answers "No." 
Also, the respondent tells you in Item 27 that her husband
was harassing her and using abusive language.  However,
in the summary, you use the phrase "verbally threatened
her."  Be careful that the words and phrases you use in
summary reports help explain the situation, instead of
adding more confusion to the situation.

Key Points to Cover

Use these key words to jog your memory when writing a
summary report--who, what, where, when, and how.

Who - Using the person's line number (L1, L2, and so
forth) from the household roster, identify all household
members who were involved in the incident, even if the
member was a Type Z noninterview.  Also include any
nonhousehold members who were involved in the incident.  
In the summary report, identify that they are nonhousehold 
members and use specific descriptions, such as "friend," 
"neighbor," or "co-worker" to show their relationship to 
the respondent.  Avoid using pronouns to describe persons 
involved in an incident.

Reminder:  
If other current household members who are at least       
12 years of age were also victims of a personal crime with
contact, you need to complete a separate NCVS-2 for each
of these persons who you are able to interview.

What - Explain the type of crime and any pertinent details
related to the crime incident--purse stolen & offender
threatened to stab L1 while she was washing her hands.

Where - Explain where the crime took place--in a
restaurant restroom.

When - Explain when the incident took place At :30 p.m. on 
December 21.

How - Explain how the crime was executed--offender yanked 
purse from L1's shoulder & ran/no injury to L1/reported to 
police/property not recovered.

Weapons Used

Item 22 - Did the offender have a weapon such as a gun or 
knife, or something to use as a weapon, such as a bottle or 
wrench?

Item 23 - What was the weapon?  Anything else?

If a respondent tells you in Items 22 and 23 of the NCVS-
2 that an offender had a weapon other than any type of
gun, rifle, shotgun, or knife, your summary report needs to
explain if and how this object was used as a weapon. Since 
guns, rifles, shotguns, and knives are obviously weapons, 
it is not necessary to explain if and how any of these 
weapons were used as a weapon in the summary report. 

For example:
L1 was arguing with neighbor/neighbor picked up rock/threw 
it at L1 & hit L1 in head/L1 treated at hospital emergency 
room & got 4 stitches for the cut.

Keep in mind that thrown objects are only considered
weapons if they hit and seriously injure the respondent. 
BB guns and tear gas guns are only considered weapons if
they are used as clubs.  

The following objects are NEVER considered weapons:

                    Animals
                    Pellet guns
                    Chloroform
                    Food
                    Mace or pepper spray
                    Parts of the body
                    Small empty cans
                    Tear gas
                    Water balloons

Sex-Related Crimes

Since sex-related crimes are rare compared to other types
of crimes, include as many details as the respondent is
willing to provide.  This is important so that we can
classify any sex-related crimes into the correct category--
rape, attempted rape, sexual assault, or unwanted sexual
contact.

Avoid using phrases like "made sexually explicit
comments," "unwanted sexual contact," or "unwanted
sexual advances."  These phrases do not provide us with
enough information to determine what actually happened. 
We need to know what was actually said, what parts of the
body were touched, whether or not force was used, and so
forth.

Even though we want all the pertinent facts, do not probe
beyond the structured probes that are provided in Items 27,
28, 29, and 31 of the NCVS-2.  For example, here is the
structured probe for Item 27, "Do you mean forced or coerced 
sexual intercourse including attempts?".

Stolen Property

Item 91 - "Did the (property/money) the offender tried to
take belong to you personally, to someone else in the
household, or to both you and other household members?"

Item 97 - "Did the stolen (property/money) belong to you
personally, to someone else in the household, or to both
you and other household members?"

Items 91 and 97 on the NCVS-2 relate to ownership of
property and/or money that an offender tried to steal or
stole.  If property and/or money involved in the incident
belongs to the respondent AND other household members
OR just to other household members, make sure to
specifically identify these persons by their line numbers
(L1, L2, and so forth).  

If property and/or money involved in the incident belongs
to nonhousehold members, mention that they are
nonhousehold members, along with a specific description
of their relationship to the respondent such as co-worker,
friend, cousin, and so forth.

Item 104 - "What was the value of the PROPERTY that
was taken?  Include recovered property.  (Exclude any
stolen cash/checks/credit cards.  If jointly owned with a
nonhousehold member(s), include only share owned by
household members.)"

When completing Item 104 on the NCVS-2, please note:
If stolen property is jointly owned by one or more
household members together with one or more 
nonhousehold members, only include the dollar amount
for the portion that was owned by the household members.

When identifying the value of stolen property that was
owned jointly by a household member and a nonhousehold
member, show a separate dollar amount in your summary
report to differentiate between the share owned by the
household member and the share owned by the nonhousehold 
member.  Do not use names in your summary report; instead, 
use line numbers for household members and relationships 
to the respondent for nonhousehold members.

Offender is a Police Officer

Whenever an offender is a police officer, there are specific
facts that we would like to have in your summary report. 
Include as many of these facts as you can gather.  Be
diplomatic and ask for the following facts in a way that
does not aggravate the respondent:

     Get a complete description of both the officer's and
     the victim's actions.

     Find out if the officer used or attempted to use
     his/her gun or billy club.

     Determine if the victim signed a complaint and, if so,
     include any additional details (for example, victim
     was arrested).

     Ascertain whether any property was confiscated by
     the police.  If so, find out what was done with the
     confiscated property--was it returned, kept as
     evidence, and so forth.

Commercial Establishment

If a crime incident occurred at a business or commercial
establishment, include in your summary report as many
facts as possible to provide a complete picture of what
took place.  Also, make sure to mention whether the
business is recognizable or unrecognizable.

For example:
L2 was shot in arm during clothing store robbery
(recognizable business)/Off. shot L2 with small handgun
as L2 reached under register to set off burglar alarm/L2
treated @ emergency room/Store clothing & displays
damaged/store closed for 2 days/Est. $50k in stolen
money, damages & lost sales to store/Off. arrested.

Although the NCVS is not interested in the theft of
property or cash belonging to a recognizable business, 
we do want this information in the summary report when 
it helps in describing a situation in which:

     Personal property was also stolen from a household
     member.

     A household member received a verbal threat in
     person to physically harm him/her, the household
     member was attacked, or an attempt was made to
     attack the household member.

     Someone illegally entered, broke into or attempted to
     break into the sample housing unit.

Series Crimes

When writing a summary report for series crimes, start by
providing a GENERAL description of the entire series of
incidents.  For the last or most recent incident in the
series, provide a DETAILED description of the incident
following the who, what, where, when, and how format.

Verifying Summary Reports

Once you have completed the summary report, ALWAYS read it 
back to the respondent.  This gives the respondent a final 
opportunity to either change or add any facts that may 
provide a clearer picture of the crime incident.

Lengthy Summary Reports

By the time you get to Check Item W, you should have a
pretty good idea how lengthy your summary report will
need to be to provide all the required facts. If you feel that
it will take too much of the respondent's time to wait while
you write out the summary report, just make sure that you
have all the pertinent facts AND verify these facts with the
respondent.  Once you leave the sample household, then
write out your summary report in Check Item W.

If the answer space for Check Item W is not adequate, you
can continue your summary report in the blank space below 
the Field Representative instructions for Check Item W, as 
well as in the "Notes" space on page 26 of the NCVS-2.

Things to Avoid

When writing summary reports for crime incidents, avoid
the following bad habits:

     Using very general and vague statements or any
     extraneous or unnecessary words or phrases.  Write
     the facts in short, concise sentences.

     Using the exact wording from the marked answer
     category of an NCVS-2 item.

     Using pronouns extensively (she, he, him, her, they,
     their, and so forth).

     Using abbreviations that most editors would not
     understand.

     Omitting pertinent facts that could help clarify
     details of an incident.

     Handwriting that is sloppy and illegible.

Examples of Good Summary Reports

Here are some examples of good summary reports:

     .  L1's drunken ex-spouse (nonhousehold member) was
     arguing & using abusive language while in L1's
     home/ex-spouse refused to leave & threatened to
     burn down the house if L1 didn't take him
     back/police arrested ex-spouse/no injury to L1/lamp
     broken valued @ $40.

     .  L1 (school teacher) had $10 stolen from desk drawer
     in classroom while eating lunch in school cafeteria/
     police not notified/off. never caught/$10 not
     returned.

     .  L2 (apt. mgr.) was shot in the arm by angry evicted
     tenant in L2's office/small hand gun used/police
     notified & off. arrested/L2 hospitalized overnight.

     .  Off. attempted to break into L1's home/no one
     present/security alarm scared off. & off. ran 
     away/damage to door & lock valued @ $50/police
     notified/off. not found.

     .  L2's antique shop robbed at gunpoint by two
     off./$1,500 taken from shop register/$50 taken from
     L2/gold necklace & purse taken from customer/no
     injuries or store damage/police notified/off. caught &
     prosecuted.

     .  Off. threatened to rape L2 at gunpoint/siren from
     passing police car scared off./L2 got free & ran to
     drug store for help/L2 bruised/police notified/off.
     never found.

     .  Off. forcibly grabbed L2/kissed L2 against L2's
     will/ran his hands up & down L2's buttocks/L2
     kneed off. in his groin & got away/no police
     report/no injuries to L2.

Examples of Bad Summary Reports

The following are examples of bad summary reports:

     There was unwanted sexual contact between off. and
     L2 with no injuries.

     Sam was threatened by his co-worker in an office
     building.  There were no injuries.

     Rsp. sd she was shot at while walking down the
     street/offenders were arrested.

     Rsp. was involved in a car jacking/threatened to
     shoot/not far from home/police notified.

     Was on way to school/music compact discs
     stolen/$75/no police.

Topic 24.  Type of Industry and Occupation

Definition

Specific items in the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, ask
about various aspects of a respondent's job at the time of
the incident.  The information collected about the 
respondent's employer, kind of business, and kind of work
done at the time of the incident are used to assign industry
and occupation codes that uniquely identify the respondent's 
job by type of industry and occupation.

The aggregated data from these industry and occupation items 
allow users to analyze crime data by different types of 
industries and occupations.

Conditions for Asking the Industry and 
Occupation Questions

The only time you will ask a respondent the industry and
occupation questions in the NCVS-2 is when the respondent 
reports that he/she was working or on duty when the incident 
happened/started. In other words, Box 1, "Working or on duty," 
is marked in Item 135.

Items Covering the
Industry and Occupation
Questions

The industry and occupation questions are printed on page 18 
of the NCVS-2, Crime Incident Report, and begin with Item 138a 
and end with Item 142.  

Item 138a

Item 138a is used to identify into which "Class of Worker"
type the respondent's employer fits.  The "Class of
Worker" categories include:

          Box 1  A private company, business, or individual for
                 wages.
          Box 2  The Federal government.
          Box 3  A State, county, or local government.
          Box 4  Yourself (Self-employed) in your own business,
                 professional practice, or farm.
          Box 5  A private, not-for-profit, tax-exempt, or
                 charitable organization.

Item 138b

Item 138b is used to determine whether or not the business
at which the respondent worked at the time of the incident
is incorporated.  You will only ask this question if you
mark Box 1, 4, or 5 in Item 138a.

Item 138c

Item 138c is used to identify the name of the respondent's
employer at the time of the incident. Since Census Bureau
coders working in the National Processing Center need
this key piece of information to assign the correct industry
code, make sure that you record this information
accurately and legibly.

Even though a respondent may be reluctant to provide the name 
of his/her employer, make every effort to collect this
information without badgering the respondent. In some cases, 
you may succeed by just reassuring a respondent that the 
information he/she provides is held strictly confidential.

Item 138d

Item 138d is used to determine the kind of business or industry 
that is transacted by the respondent's employer at the time of 
the incident.  This is another key piece of information needed 
to assign the correct industry code for a respondent's employer.

To ensure that our coders can assign an accurate industry
code, you need to enter a clear and specific description of
the employer's kind of business or industry. In other words:

          What is the purpose of the business?

          OR

          What type of products are produced by this industry?

Structured Probe

If the respondent hesitates in giving you an answer to your
initial question in Item 138d, also ask the structured probe
question printed in italics below the initial question.  This
question may help the respondent to understand what type
of description we want for this item.

Be Specific

Make sure that you avoid entering descriptions that are too
general, such as:

          "It's a mining company."
          "The business provides a repair service."
          "It's a computer-related business."
          "It's a retail store."

Here are some examples of better descriptions:

          "Mines & transports coal & coal byproducts."
          "Repairs small home appliances."
          "Designs & sells computer software."
          "Operates two large hardware stores."

Enter descriptions that are specific, but avoid using
unnecessary words that make the descriptions too long. 
Keep your descriptions under 50 characters, since this is
the maximum number of characters allotted for keying this
information.  This is true for each industry and occupation
item requiring a write-in entry.

Item 138e

Item 138e is used to identify the major type of industry in which 
the respondent was working at the time of the incident.  The 
four options to choose from are:

          Manufacturing
          Retail trade
          Wholesale trade
          Something else

Distinguishing between these types of industries is very
important, because type of industry also plays an essential
role in assigning the correct industry code.  If this item 
is left unanswered or is marked incorrectly, the coders will
not be able to assign an accurate industry code for the
respondent's employer.

Box 1, Manufacturing

If a respondent's employer makes and sells its products in
large quantities or lots to other manufacturers, wholesalers, 
or retailers, the respondent's employer is probably a 
manufacturing company.

Box 2, Retail Trade

If a respondent's employer sells primarily to individual
consumers or users, but seldom makes products, the
respondent's employer is probably a retail establishment.

Box 3, Wholesale Trade

If a respondent's employer buys, rather than makes, products 
in large quantities or lots for resale to retailers, industrial 
users, or to other wholesalers, the respondent's employer is 
probably a wholesale establishment.

Box 4, Something Else

If a respondent's employer does not manufacture or sell
products as a wholesaler or a retailer, then you need to
mark Box 4, "Something Else."  Examples of some employers 
that fit into the "Something Else" category are:

          Car repair shops,
          Accounting firms,
          Medical centers,
          Trucking companies, or
          Banks.

When To Probe

Some firms are engaged in more than one type of business
or activity.  When you encounter this situation, you need
to do some additional probing to determine the most
appropriate category to mark in Item 138e.

If you discover that the respondent's employer conducts
business at more than one location (for example, making
copy machines at one location and making chemicals used
by the copy machines at another location), collect data for
the location at which the respondent works.

If you discover that the respondent's employer conducts a
variety of activities at the same location (for example, 
a gasoline station that also sells groceries), probe to
determine which activity or product the respondent is most
directly involved with in his/her job.  For example, if the
respondent primarily sells groceries at the gasoline station,
mark Box 2.  However, if the respondent primarily works
as a mechanic servicing motor vehicles at the gasoline
station, mark Box 4.

Item 138f

Item138f is used to determine the kind of work or occupation 
the respondent had at the time of the incident. In addition to 
assigning an industry code for the respondent's employer, the 
coders also assign an occupation code for the respondent's job 
based on:

          The kind of work described in Item 138f 

          AND 

          The respondent's most important activities or duties
          described in Item 139.

Make sure that you enter complete and accurate descriptions for 
both of these items, so that the coders can assign the correct 
occupation code.

Job Title vs. Kind of Work

The "kind of work" descriptions that our coders need must
clearly specify the type of work the respondent does on
his/her job, and this is not necessarily the respondent's 
job title.  For some occupations, the common descriptions 
or general job titles that a respondent provides will not 
be sufficient for the coders to assign the correct occupation
code.

Self-Employed Persons

When a respondent is self-employed, only enter "Manager" as his/
her occupation if the person actually spends most of the workday 
managing his/her business. Otherwise, we want you to enter the 
kind of work the respondent spends the majority of his/her time 
doing, such as plumber, hair stylist, dentist, house painter, 
and so forth. In other words, describe the respondent's actual
trade or craft, when that is the kind of work that the respondent 
spends most of his/her time doing for the business.

Avoid Entering Department or Work
Place Titles

Avoid entering kind of work entries such as "Works in
shipping department" or "Works in the warehouse."  These 
entries do not adequately describe the kind of work done 
by the respondent.  If the respondent inspects outgoing 
products from the shipping department, enter "Inspects 
products leaving shipping department." If the respondent 
is a clerk who monitors inventory in a warehouse, enter 
"Clerk monitoring warehouse inventory."

Apprentice vs. Trainee

There is a difference between someone who is an apprentice and 
someone who is a trainee.  An apprentice is under contract 
during his/her training period, but a trainee is not. If a 
respondent tells you that he/she is in an apprenticeship or 
trainee program, make sure to enter both the person's occupation 
or kind of work, along with the term "apprentice" or "trainee."  
For example, you may need to enter "Apprentice plumber" or 
"Buyer trainee."

Machinist vs. Machine Operator vs.
Mechanic

Although all three titles sound similar, there are major
differences in the kind of work done by a machinist, a
machine operator, and a mechanic.

A machinist is a skilled craftsman who constructs metal
parts, tools, and machines through the use of blueprints,
machine and hand tools, and precise measuring
instruments.

A machine operator runs a factory machine, such as a
drill press operator.

A mechanic inspects, services, repairs, or overhauls
machinery.

Secretary vs. "Official
Secretary"

The title secretary applies to someone who does secretarial 
work in an office.  The title official secretary applies to 
someone who is an elected or appointed officer of a business, 
union, or other organization.

Probing for Difficult to Code 
Occupations

Here is a basic rule for Item 138f: Avoid entering a one
word response, because it will usually be too general for
our coders to assign the correct occupation code.  For
these situations, we are providing the following table
which has some difficult to code, one word occupations,
along with a suggested probe for each occupation.  These
probes are written to encourage the respondent to provide
a more specific description of the kind of work he/she does
on the job.  This table is also available as a job aid 
entitled, "Difficult to Code Occupations." 

Item 139

Item 139 is used to describe the usual activities or duties a
respondent performs at his/her job.  This is the second key
piece of information that our coders use to assign an
occupation code.  What you enter in Item 139 is especially
useful when a simple job title does not provide enough
information to code the occupation.
                                
Here are some examples of entries you may need to enter
in Item 139:
                                
            Keeping account books
            Selling new and used motor vehicles
            Laying bricks and stone
            Typing and filing letters, reports, memo's, etc.
                                
If a respondent tells you that his/her job duties are classified, 
do NOT probe. In this situation, enter "Information is classified." 

Item 140

Item 140 is used to find out if the respondent was working
in a city, suburban area, rural area, or a combination of any
of these areas at the time of the incident.  This type of
information will help BJS in determining if specific areas
are more prone to crime.
                        
When a respondent worked for more than one employer at the 
time of the incident, mark the box for the area in which
he/she worked the greater number of hours.  Avoid marking 
Box 4, "Combination of any of these?", unless a respondent 
insists that the area he/she worked MOST of the time was a 
combination of city, suburban, and rural.

Item 141a

Item 141a is used to determine whether the incident happened at 
the respondent's work site for any job held by the respondent 
at the time of the incident.  If you already know the answer to 
this question, you can verify the answer without asking this 
question.

Incident Happened at Work Site

Consider a respondent's work site to be the place where
his/her USUAL day-to-day activities take place.  Some
examples of work sites include in an office, hospital, taxi
cab, convenience store, beauty parlor, and so forth. 

Work Site at Sample Address

If a respondent happens to work out of an office or workshop 
in his/her home and the incident occurred in the office or 
workshop, consider the incident as happening at the respondent's 
work site.  However, if the incident happened somewhere else in 
the house, garage, or property OTHER THAN in the office or 
workshop, then the incident did not happen at the respondent' 
work site.

Not at Usual Work Site

Do not consider the incident as happening at a respondent's 
work site if it occurred while the respondent was on the job, 
but not at his/her usual work site.  Some examples include 
attending a meeting in another office building during working 
hours or attending a business meeting out of town.

Last Resort Answer

Only mark Box 3, "Don't know," when a respondent really does 
not know if the incident happened at his/her work site.

Explanation Required

Mark Box 4, "Other," if a respondent's answer requires more than 
just a "Yes" or "No" answer and then use the "Specify" line to 
answer Item 141a.

Item 141b

Items 141b is used to find out if the respondent worked primarily 
days, nights, or rotating shifts at the time of the incident.

Item 142

Item 142 is used to determine whether the respondent's job at the 
time of the incident is also his/her current job at the time of 
the interview.

End of file
05/08/03 ih